FIRST YEAR BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

1/52

Name of Course :-Engineering Chemistry I 1 Water Treatment Hard and soft water, Hardness- types, units, estimation by EDTA. Softening of water (principles of external and internal treatment), Boiler problems, Numericals to calculate hardness from analytical data and EDTA estimation. Polymers, Plastics and Elastomers Introduction and definition of Polymers, Classification of polymers, Functionality, Amorphous polymers, Crystallinity in polymers, Structure & technological functions of polymers, Structure property relationship in polymers, Applications of polymers, Miscellaneous polymers –sponge rubber, foam rubber, laminated plywood, laminated plastics, thermocole. Resins and plastics, classification, compounds of plastics, common thermoplastics & thermosets – polyethylene, polypropelyne PVC, polytetra fluoro ethylene, polysterene, polyamide, polyster, UF, bakelite. Strucural requirements of elastomers, natural rubber, cis and trans isomer, Properties and drawbacks, vulcanization, synthetic rubbers – polyurethane, styrene & silicone rubber Lubricants Functions of lubricants, Mechanism of lubrication, Classification, Properties and testing of lubricating oils. Transition & inner transition elements & their compounds Electronic configuration of transition elements, spectral and magnetic properties, complex formation tendency, Chelation and its applications, application of transition elements Analytical chemistry Introduction, experimental techniques, spectrophotometry PRACTICALS: Determination of Total Hardness of water Determination of Chloride in water Determination of Soponification value of an oil Determination of Viscosity by Red Wood Viscometer Determination of flash point by Abel’s apparatus Determination of flash point by Pensky – Martins apparatus REFERENCE BOOKS: Engineering Chemistry, Jain and Jain. Text Book of Engineering , M.M.Uppal Engineering Chemistry , S.S.Dara

2

3 4

5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

2/52

Name of Course :Engineering Physics I 1 Crystal Structure Space lattice, atomic basis, crystal lattice and unit cell, Bravais lattices, coordination number, atomic radius, packing factor, monoatomic cubic crystal system-SC, BCC and FCC, diatomic crystals,CsCl2,, NaCl, Diamond, Barium Titanate, Miller Indices, Miller Planes and directions, Ligancy and critical radius ratios of ligancy 3-12. Semiconductors The band theory of solids, energy gap, classification of solids the energy band structure of some typical solids, electron distribution function, Fermi-Dirac distribution function, energy band structure of –conductor, insulator and semiconductor, intrinsic semiconductor at 0 K and at room temperature, intrinsic carries, electron and hole concentration, Fermi level in intrinsic semiconductor, intrinsic density, intrinsic conductivity, bipolar junction transistor.. Acoustics and Ultrasonics Elementary acoustics, acoustics of building echo and reverberation time absorption of sound, Sabine’s formula-- derivation, and drawbacks, cring’s equation, measurement of absorption coefficient-by single double source method, acoustics planning of the auditorium. Ultrasonics: magnetostriction and piezoelectric effects, production of ultrasonics by production by magnetostriction and piezoelectric method, properties of ultrasonic waves, cavitations effect, flaw detection ultrasonic emulsification, depth sounding, ultrasonic soldering, ultrasonic drilling. Electricity and Magnetism Concept of potential gradient, equipotential surfaces Lorentz force, motion of electrons in uniform electric field – parallel, perpendicular, and inclined fields, electrostatics deflection, motion of electrons in the uniform magnetic fields— parallel, perpendicular, and inclined fields, magneto static deflection, electric and magnetic fields in cross field configuration, velocity filters, electron optics, electron diffraction- Bethe’s law, electrostatic lenses, electron gun, cathode ray tube, electrostatic and magneto static deflection system, cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO)-construction working and applications. PRACTICALS: Study of crystal structure – 1 (Unit Cell) Study of crystal structure – 2 (Miller Indices) Characteristics of PN Junction Diode Characteristics of transistor Ultrasonic Interferometer Ultrasonic Flaw Detector Ultrasonic processor and cleaner Cathode Ray Oscilloscope 3/52

2

3

4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

1 2 3 4

RECOMMENDED BOOKS: Engineering Physics , R.K.Gaur and S.L.Gupta Material Science and Engineering , V. Raghavan A Textbook of Engineering Physics, M.N.Avadhanulu, P.G.Khirsagar Solid State Physics , Kittle

Name of Course :Engineering Mathematics 1 Complex Numbers Argand diagram, Cartesian, polar and exponential form of complex number, De’Moivres theorem, Power and roots of exponential and trigonometric functions, Hyperbolic and logarithmic functions, inverse trigonometric functions. Vector Algebra and Vector Calculus and Solid Geometry Vector triple product and product of 4 vectors, Differentiation of a vector function of a single scalar variable. Theorems on derivatives of sum and product, Curves in space, Serret Frenet formulae curvature, torsion, osculating plane, normal plane and rectifying plane. Equation of plane angle between two planes. Equation of straight line angle between two lines, shortest distance between two lines. Sphere, section of sphere by a plane, tangent plane. Cone cylinder and quadratic surfaces or conicoid. Differential Calculus Successive differentiation of nth derivatives of function such as (ax + b) m , (ax + b) -1 eax, Sin (ax + b), cos (ax + b), log (ax + b), e ax sin (bx + c), eax cos (bx + c), Leibnitz’s theorem, Mean value theorems, Rolles theorem, Lagrange‘s and Cauchy’s mean value theorem, Idea of convergence and divergence series, Taylor’s and Maclaurin’s series, Indeterminate forms and L Hospital rule. Partial Differentiation Partial derivatives of first and higher order, total differentials, composite functions and implicit functions, Euler’s theorem on homogeneous functions with two and three independent variables, Errors and approximations, Maxima and minima of a function of two variables. REFERENCE BOOKS: Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr.B.S.Grewal-Khanna Publications A Text Book of Applied mathematics, P.N & J.N.Wartikar - Pune Vidyarthi Griha Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erurin Kreyszing – Wiley Eastern Limited Applied Mathematics 1, G.V.Kumbhojkar-C.Jamnadas & Co. Applied Mathematics 1, Dr. U.B.Jungam, K.P.Patil

2

3

4

1 2 3 4 5

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

4/52

Name of Course :Engineering Graphics-I 1 2 3 Introduction Drawing instruments, symbolic lines, lettering, dimensioning system as per I. S. conventions, geometrical constructions and tangential arcs (01) Engineering Curves Ellipse, parabola and hyperbola, by Focus directrix Method & Rectangle Method, Cycloid, Involute by various methods including their tangents and normals (02/20) Projections Projections of points and lines to both the reference planes including HT and VT ( excluding application problems), Projection of planes inclined to both the reference planes( excluding H.T and V.T) Projections of Right Regular Solids Cube, prism, pyramid, tetrahedron, cylinder & cone with inclined to both H.P and V.P.( excluding spheres, hollow and composite solids) Orthographic Projections Multi-view orthographic projections of simple machine parts by first angle method of projection( 02/20) Sectional View Sectional view of simple machine parts ( full section, half section, offset section, partial section, removed and revolve sections) (01/10) Isometric Views PRACTICALS All the drawings should be prepared during the practical class hours using half imperial drawing sheets. Engineering Curves (01) Projections of solids (01) Sections of solids (01) Development of Lateral Surfaces (01) Orthographic Projections & Sections (02) Isometric Views (01) Reading of Orthographic Projections & Sections (02) Building Plan & Section (01) Recommended Text Books: Engineering Drawing – Plan & Solid Geometry by N.D.Bhat, Charotal Pub. House Machine Drawing by N.D.Bhat Engineering Drawing by M.B. Shah & B.C. Rana. Pearson Education Engineering Drawing 1 & 2 by N.H. Dubey Nandu Book House REFERENCE BOOKS Engineering Graphics by Glesecke & others Macmilan Publishers Engineering Graphics by Thomas E. French & others – McGraw Hiel Publishers Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing by Warren J Luzadder. Prentice Hall of

4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 1 2 3

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

5/52

India.

Name of Course : Elements of Engineering -1 1 Introduction Effect of temperature on resistance, Resistance temperature coeff, Work, Power energy and relationship between Thermal, mechanical and electrical units. ( problems based on above topics) D.C. Networks Star-delta transformation, series-parallel combination of network, Kirchoff’s law, Loop and nodal analysis, Superposition Theorem, Thevenin’s & Noratons theorem, maximum power transfer theorem. Magnetic Circuits BH Curve, expression for eddy current loss, series-parallel magnetic circuits, Inductance, self inductance, mutual inductance and emf induced due to self and mutual inductance, coeff of coupling energy stores. A.C. Circuits Sinusoidal voltage and current waveforms , RMS and average value, R-L,RC,RLC series parallel circuits, phaser diagram, power & power factor, series and parallel resonance Three Phase Balanced System Three phase voltage generators and waveform, star and delta balanced systems. Relationship between phase and line quantities, phase diagram power in a three phase circuit Generation of Electricity Basic concepts about thermal, hydro & nuclear power stations Single phase transformer Construction, principle of operation, emf equation Three phase induction motor Construction, principle of operation PRACTICALS Verification of Kirchoff’s Current and Voltage Law Verification of Superposition theorem Verification of Thevenin’s Theorem and Norton’s Theorem Study of Single Phase series and parallel circuits Verification of voltage and current relationship of Balanced Star and Delta networks Study of series Resonance REFERENCE BOOKS Principle of Electrical Engineering , A.Vincent Deltoro PHI Principles in Electrical Engineering, S.Parker Smith. Oxford university

2

3

4

5

6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

6/52

Name of Course :Computer Programming-1 1 Programming paradigms Role of programming languages, Programming paradigm, Algorithm, Programming constraints: Selection, Looping, Sequence. Language evaluation criteria, Practices and attributes of good programming languages Data Types Character set, variable names, data types, constants and declaration. Operators Operators & expressions, precedence of operators. Basic input and output Basics input and output, formatted input and output Control Structure Concept of a block statement, if, if –else, switch, looping structures – For, Do, While Functions Parameter passing, Use of pointers, Recursion Arrays One dimensional, Two dimensional and multi dimensional arrays, their limitations, their initialization & manipulation Strings String processing Structure and Unions Basic of structures, initialization File Management Low level file access error handling PRACTICALS Each candidate shall submit a journal in which the candidate has recorded at least 15 programs based on the topics given below. The programs can be implemented in Turbo C/Microsoft ANSI C. Algebraic problem – Newton Raphson, quadratic roots etc. Array based searching sorting – binary search, bubble sort. Matrix manipulations using real and complex elements. Banking applications – fixed deposit interest calculations, loans repayments. Text processing – extracting of words, searching sorting of words. Enumerated data types and sets. Recursion – factorial calculation, quick sort algorithm. Study of internal and external Dos commands. REFERENCE BOOKS Programming Language, B.W.Kernighan, D.M.Ritchie - PHI Computer Programming UNIX &C , M.P.Bhave, S.A.Patekar, Nandu Programming With C , Schaum’s - TMH

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

7/52

4

Fundamentals of Programming Language, V.Rajaram, PHI

Name of Course : Workshop Practice I and II 1 Fitting Use and setting of fitting tools for marking, center punching, chipping, cutting, filing, drilling, tapping Term work to include one simple job involving above mentioned operations Carpentary Use and setting of hand tools like hack saw, jack plane, chisels and gauges for construction of various joints Term work to include one simple job involving a joint Demonstration for wood turning and report writing Forging (smithy) At least one job for change of cross sectional area like round into rectangular or making a ring from a round bar Welding Edge preparation Term work to include one simple job having lap or butt welding of plates or fillet welding Plain turning Operations: simple turning, step turning, taper turning Term work to include one simple job involving above mentioned operations Electrical board wiring House wiring, staircase wiring, go-down wiring, three-phase wiring Printed circuit boards Layout drawing, +ve and -ve film making, PCB etching and drilling, tinning and soldering techniques Sheet metal and brazing Use of sheet metal working hand tools, cutting, bending and spot welding Plumbing Use of plumbing tools, spanners, wrenches, threading dies, demonstration of preparation of a domestic plumbing line involving fixing of a water tap and use of coupling, elbow, tee, tee and union etc. Masonry Use of mason's tools like trowel, hammers, spirit level, square, plumb, line and pins etc. Demonstration of mortar making, single and one and half brick masonry, english and flemish bonds, block masonry, pointing and plastering

2

3 4

5

6 7 8 9

10

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

8/52

Name of Course :Engineering Chemistry - II 1 Corrosion and its Control Introduction to corrosion, cause & effect of corrosion, chemical or dry corrosion, electrochemical or wet corrosion, types of electro chemical corrosion (galvanic corrosion, pitting, soil, crevice corrosion, differential aeration corrosion, water line corrosion, under ground corrosion, microbial corrosion), Corrosion control: Prevention of corrosion by material selection and design, cathodic protection, use of protective coatings (metals & paints) 2 Fuels Definition & classification of fuels, characteristics of good fuel, calorific value: high and low C.V. Units, Dulong’s formula with numerical problems Coals, analysis of coal: proximate and ultimate with significance, carbonization of coal, types of carbonization of coal Gaseous fuels: composition and properties of natural gas, LPG and coal gas Other sources of energy: wind power, water power, geothermal power, tidal power 3 Petroleum & PetroChemistry Petroleum, refining of crude petroleum oil, fuels for IC engines, Petrol, Diesel, Octane Number, Cetane number, Aviation gasoline, Cracking – thermal & catalytic Petrochemicals Alkanes – Alkenes, Cycloalkanes, benzene & its homologous derived from petroleum & its fraction and their important related uses 4 Electro Chemistry Electrolytes, Industrial Insulators, electric Cells, primary Cell, Secondary cell (battery) , fuel cells 5 Metallurgy & Alloys Ore concentration, smelting, refining, metal extraction by electrolysis, metals as reducing agents in extraction process Alloys: Steel & alloy steels, duralumin, magnalumin, Solder alloys 6 Environmental Chemistry Air pollution, water pollution, radio active Pollution, Solid waste materials, pollution by motor cars and air crafts, pollution by noise, e - waste PRACTICALS: 1 Estimation of iron in plain carbon steel 2 Determination of zinc in brass 3 Nickel in steel alloy 4 Determination of lime in cement 5 Nitrogen in fuel 6 Transport fuel adulteration RECOMMENDED BOOKS: 1 Engineering Chemistry, Jain and Jain 2 Text book of Engineering Chemistry, M M Uppal 3 Engineering Chemistry, S S Dara

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

9/52

Name of Course :Engineering Physics – II 1 Interference Superimposition of waves, constructive & destructive interference, general conditions of interference, interference at parallel thin films – reflected and transmitted light rays, antireflection coating, highly reflective coating, interference at wedge shaped film – reflected & transmitted rays, Newton’s rings, testing of optical flatness of surface 2 Diffraction: Fraunhofer and Fresnel, Fraunhofer diffraction at single slit, double slit and multiple slit, diffraction grating, characteristic of diffraction grating and its application 3 Optical fiber :Total internal reflection, importance of total internal reflection, acceptance angle & acceptance cone, numerical aperture, Single mode fiber, step index multimode fiber, graded index multimode fiber, applications 4 X Rays Production of x rays, properties of x-rays, Characteristics and continuous rays, continuous spectrum. Characteristic of x- ray spectrum, origin of the continuous xrays, origin of the line spectra, Moseley’s law, Bragg’s law, Bragg’s x- ray spectrometer, determination of crystal structure, applications of x – rays 5 Laser Induced absorption, spontaneous emission, stimulated emission, Active medium, population, thermal equilibrium, Einstein coefficient, condition for light amplification, requisite for laser system, properties, population inversion, condition for laser action, pumping & lasing, solid state laser, ruby laser, helium – neon laser, holography 6 Nuclear Physics Isotopes, the nuclear force, Nuclear density, atomic mass unit, mass defect, binding energy, natural radioactivity, activity of radioactive substance, radiation detector, artificial radioactivity, Q value, nuclear fission & fusion PRACTICALS: 1 Newton’s rings 2 Wedge shape method 3 G M Counter – I (inverse square law) 4 G M Counter – II (optical activity) 5 LASER diffraction 6 Study of fibre optics RECOMMENDED BOOKS 1 A text book of optics, N Subramanyam and Brij Lal 2 A textbook of engineering, M N Avadhanulu and P G Kshirsagar 3 Fundamental of optics, Jenkins and White 4 Nuclear Physics, Kaplan

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

10/52

Name of Course :Engineering Mathematics – II Improper integrals 1 Beta and gamma functions Error function Differentiation under integral sign Integral calculus Curve tracing, Rectification of plane curves Double and triple integration Jacobian, properties of Jacobian Uses of Jacobian for evaluating integrals with transformation Evaluation of double integration by changing order of integration, changing to polar form Applications of double and triple integration to area, mass and volume computations Differential equations Differential equations of first order and first degree, exact differential equation and those that can be reduced to exact by use of integrating factors. Linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s equation and equations reducible to liner equations, linear differential equations of higher order with constant coefficients, complimentary functions, particular integrals Generalized rule and P.I. for equation of type f(D)y = X where X = eax, sin(ax +b), cos(ax+b), xm, eaxV, xV where V is a function of x only. Cauchy’s linear homogeneous equation and Legendre’s differential equation. Method of undetermined coefficients and variation of parameter method. Partial Differential equations Formation of partial differential equation Methods to solve the first order partial differential equations of the type: F(p,q)=0, F(p,q,z)=0, F1(x,p)=f2(y,q), Lagrange’s form Pp+Qq=R Transformation of variables, Method of multipliers, method of grouping, Homogeneous linear equations, short method to find P.I., (1/F(D,D’)(eax+by), (1/F(D2,DD’,D’2), cos or sin( ax+by), (1/F(D,D’)(xryr), Non homogeneous linear equation RECOMMENDED BOOKS: Higher Engineering Mathematics, B S Grewal A Text book of Applied Mathematics, P N Wartikar and J N Wartikar Applied Mathematics, G V Kumbhojkar, -C.Jamnadas & Co. Applied Mathematics, Dr U B Jangam, K P Patil and N M Kumthekar Advanced Engineering Mathematics, H.K. Das, S. Chand Publications

2

3

4

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

11/52

Name of Course :Engineering Mechanics 1 System of Coplanar Forces Resultant of Concurrent force system, moment of force about any point, Couple, Varignon’s theorem, distributed forces in plane, Resultant of Parallel force system and General force system 2 Equilibrium of System of Co-planar Force Condition of equilibrium for 1.Concurrent force system. 2. Parallel force system. 3. General force system, Type of supports, Determination of reactions at supports for various types of determinate structures, (without internal hinge), centroid of plane area, center of gravity of wires bent in different shapes, Area Moment of Inertia and mass Moment of Inertia, Analysis of pin jointed plane truss by method of joints and method of sections, introduction to Graphic static’s. 3 Friction Laws of friction, equilibrium of bodies on inclined plane. Application to problems involving wedge and ladders, screws and belt friction – only simple problems involving tension on both sides of pulley to be covered. 4 Principle of Virtual Work and Forces in Space Principle of Virtual Work – application to link systems with single degree of freedom only, Forces in Space – 1. Resultant and equilibrium of concurrent force system. 2. Moment of force about a point and about an axis. 5 Kinematics of particles Rectilinear motion, uniform acceleration, non-uniform acceleration, displacement time, acceleration time and velocity time curves and their applications Velocity and acceleration in Cartesian and polar co-ordinate system, motion along a plane curved path, tangential and normal components of acceleration, Projectile motion, Simple harmonic motion, Relative velocity 6 Kinematics of rigid bodies Translation, pure rotation and plane motion of rigid bodies Instantaneous center of zero velocity and zero acceleration for bodies in plane motion 7 Kinetics of particles and rigid bodies D’Alembert principle, equation of dynamic equilibrium in linear and curvilinear motion Linear momentum, impulse momentum principle, Principle of conservation of momentum Impact of solid bodies, elastic impact, semi-elastic impact, plastic impact Work done by force, potential and kinetic energy and work-power energy equation, principle of conservation of energy PRACTICALS 1 Simple Roof Truss 2 Bell Crank Lever 3 Simple Beam 4 Simple Jib Crane B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08 12/52

5 Link Chain 6 Screw Jack (Friction) 7 Shear Leg Apparatus 8 ‘g’ by falling weight method 9 Plane motion of bodies 10 M.I. of fly wheel 11 Compound pendulum 12 Torsional pendulum 13 Principle of conservation of energy (connected bodies with flywheel) 14 Stiffness of spring REFERENCE BOOKS: 1 Mechanics for Engineers, Beer and Johnston, McGraw Hill 2 Engineering Mechanics, Mclean and Nelson, Schaum Outline Series 3 Engineering Mechanics, R C Hibbeler, Pearson Education 4 Engineering Mechanics, A K tayal, Umesh 5 Engineering Mechanics, Timoshenko and Young, McGraw Hill 6 Engineering Mechanics,, Singer, McGraw Hill

Name of Course :Elements of Engineering II 1 Fundamental Concepts and Definitions Thermodynamics system, surroundings & boundary, thermodynamic properties, processes & cycles, Units & dimensions, energy, power, work, heat, Zeroth law of thermodynamics, temperature & temperature scale, Macro & microscopic approach Laws of Thermodynamics Principles of conservation of mass & energy, continuity equation, first law of thermodynamics, Joule’s experiment, application of first law of flow & non flow processes & cycles, Concept of internal energy & enthalpy, Applications of steady flow, energy equation to nozzles, turbines & pumps Power producing Devices Boilers & Steam turbines, reciprocating IC engines, gas turbines, hydraulic turbines, compressed air motor (theoretical study using schematic diagrams, no numericals) Power absorbing Devices Reciprocating pumps & compressors, centrifugal pumps, rotary compressors, blowers, study of household refrigerators & window air conditioners using schematic diagrams (elementary treatment only, no numerical) Conventional & non conventional energy sources Thermal, geothermal, hydraulic, nuclear, wind, solar, tidal waves, biogas, ocean thermal energy, biomass, fuel cells (schematic of plant layout) Heat Transfer

2

3

4

5 6

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

13/52

7

8 9

10

Basic modes of heat transfer, conduction, convection & radiation, Fourier’s law of heat conduction, Newton’s law of cooling, Stephen – Boltzmann law of radiation, heat transfer, emissivity & its value for practical interpretation, Conducting & insulating materials & their properties, description of type of heat exchangers Introduction to metal cutting processes Lathe, drilling, grinding & power saw machines, lathe machine, center lathe (basic elements, working principles & types of operations) drilling machine; study of pillar drilling machine (operation only), introduction to NC / CNC machines Introduction to metal joining processes Welding, soldering & brazing methods and applications Mechanical Devices Drives: Individual & group drives, belt, rope, chain, gear drives & friction clutches & brakes (types & applications only) Machine elements: power transmission shafts, axles, keys, couplings, bush & ball bearings, flywheel & governor (types & applications only) Impact of environment on engineering activities, concept of sustainable development

PRACTICALS: 1 I C Engine 2 Domestic refrigerator 3 Window air conditioner 4 Shell and tube heat exchanger 5 Solar water heating system 6 NC / CNC machine 7 Power transmitting elements: coupling, gear, shaft RECOMMENDED BOOKS: 1 Basic Mechanical Engineering, G Shanmugam, Tata McGraw Hill 2 Basic Mechanical Engineering, K Venugopal, New Age Publication 3 Elements of Mechanical Engineering, Mathur S B and Domkundwar S, Dhanpat Rai & Co

Name of Course :Computer Programming – II 1 2 C++ fundamentals (moving from C to C++) Data types, preprocessor directives, input and output, manipulators (endl, setw(), setprecision), control structures, functions, arrays, difference between C and C++ Objects and classes Data hiding and encapsulation, private and public members, member functions, accssing class members, object as function parameters, static data and member functions, friend functions and friend classes 14/52

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

3

Object installation and cleanup Constructors, parameterized constructors, destructors, constructor overloading, constructors with default arguments, default constructors and copy constructors 4 Function and operator overloading Function overloading, functions with default arguments, inline functions, unary operator overloading, operator returning value, binary operator overloading such as arithmetic, relational and assignment operators, overloading of insertion and extraction operators. 5 Inheritance Derived and base class, protected members, overriding functions, private, protected and public inheritance, derived class constructors, types of heritance, virtual base class and inheritance relationship 6 Pointers Pointer concepts, pointer variable, address operator, referencing and dereferencing, void pointers, pointer to functions and objects, THIS pointer, pointers and memory management, New and Delete operators, dynamic memory allocation, linked lists, (single block and many small blocks of memory) 7 Virtual functions and polymorphism Polymorphism and its types, need for virtual functions, pointer to derived class object, pure virtual functions, abstract classes, dynamic or late binding 8 Graphics Text mode graphics, graphic mode graphics, colors and pallets, use of setting, drawing, filling and text functions, drawing various shapes, animation using Getimage and Putimage functions, storing image on the disk 9 File handling Files and streams, opening and closing a file, text and binary files 10 Object oriented system development Programming language before object orientation and advantages of object oriented analysis, design and implementation, case study PRACTICALS: 1 Simple programs to implement object passing and returning object 2 Class for complex variables 3 Data manipulation classes 4 Matrix manipulation class with operator overloading 5 String class 6 Programs on inheritance and its types 7 Programs on graphics and animated graphics TEXT BOOK: Object Oriented Programming with C++, M P Bhave and S A Patekar, Pearson Education REFERENCE BOOKS: 1 The annotated C++: reference manual, ANSI base document, M A Ellis and B Stroustrap, Pearson Education

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

15/52

2 3

Programming with C++, J R Hubbard, Schaum’s outline series, McGraw Hill Object oriented programming with C++, E Bslguruswamy, Tata McGraw Hill

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

16/52

BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY IN CIVIL ENGINEERING

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

17/52

S.Y. B. Tech. Semester III Course Name:-Applied Mathematics – I 1 Laplace Transforms Function of bounded variation. Laplace transforms of standard functions such as1, tn eat, sinat, cosat, sinhat, coshat, erf(t), Linear property of Laplace- Transform. First shifting theorem, second shifting theorem, L {tn f(t)}, L {f ’(t)}, L {f(t)/t} L{ o∫t f(u) du}, L {dn / dtn f(t)} Change of scale property: Unit step functions, Heaviside, Dirac delta functions, Periodic functions and their Laplace Transforms. Inverse Laplace Transform using linear property, theorems, partial fractions and convolution theorem. Application to solve ordinary differential equations with one dependent variable. 2 Matrices Types of matrices. Adjoint ( Adjugate) of a matrix. Inverse of a matrix. Elementary transformations of matrix, rank of a matrix. Reduction to a normal form. Partitioning of matrix. System of Homogeneous and non-homogeneous equations, their consistency and solution. Eigen values and Eigen vectors of square matrix, Cayley Hamilton’s theorem and functions of square matrix. 3 Fourier series and integrals Orthogonal and orthonormal functions, Expression for a function in a series of orthogonal functions. Dirchlet's Conditions. Fourier series of Periodic function with period 2π and 2l, Dirchlet’s theorem, Even and Odd functions. Half range expansions, Parseval’s relations. Complex form of Fourier series. Fourier integral. 4 Vector calculus Scalar and vector point functions. Directional derivative Curl and Divergence, Consecervative, Irrotational and Solenoidal field. Line integral and its properties, Grren’s theorem, Stoke’s theorem, divergence theorem and its applications Recommended Books: Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr B S Grewal, Khanna Publications A text book of Applied Mathematics, P N & J N Wartikar, Pune Vidyarthi Griha Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erurin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Limited Engineering Mathematics for Semester III, T Veerrajan, Tata McGraw Hill Matrices, A R Vasishtha

Course Name:-Geomatics – I 1 Introduction Various types of surveying- based on methods and instruments, classifications, uses and necessity of geodetic surveying, photographic, astronomy and hydrographic surveying Diagonal scale, various types of venires, micrometers on surveying instruments,

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

18/52

2

3

4

5

6

principles of surveying Chain surveying, instruments required for linear measurement, minor instruments for setting out right angle Leveling and contouring Definitions, technical terms, different types of levels such as dumpy, quickset, precise, auto Temporary and permanent adjustments of dumpy and auto level Different methods of leveling, reduction of levels, problems Difficulties in leveling work, corrections and precautions to be taken in leveling work Contour – definitions, contour interval, equivalent, uses and characteristics of contour lines, direct and indirect methods of contouring Running a level line, L section, cross section, methods of interpolation Grade contour- definition, use, setting out in field Computation of volume by trapezoidal and prismoidal formula, volume from spot levels, volume from contour plan Plane table surveying Definitions, uses and advantages, temporary adjustments Different methods of plane table surveying Two point problem Errors in plane table survey, use of telescopic alidade Traverse Surveying Compass: Bearings- different types, compass – prismatic, surveyor, whole circle, reduced bearings, Local Attraction Theodolite:- Various parts and axis of transit, technical terms, temporary and permanent adjustments of a transit, horizontal and vertical angles, methods of repetition and reiteration Different methods of running a theodolite traverses, Gales’ traverse table, balancing of traverse by Bow-Ditch’s transit and modified transit rules Problems on one-plane and two-plane methods, omitted measurements Precautions in using theodolite, errors in theodolite survey Use of theodolite for various works such as prolongation of a straight line, setting out an angle Setting out works General horizontal and vertical control, setting out of foundation plan for load bearing and framed structure, batter board, slope and grade stakes, setting out with theodolite Setting out of sewer line, culvert, use of laser for works Setting out center line for tunnel, transfer of levels to underground work Project / route survey for bridge, dam and canal Checking verticality of high rise structures Areas Area of a irregular figure by Trapezoidal rule, average ordinate rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule, various co ordinate methods Planimeter: types of planimeter including digital planimeter, area of zero circle, use of planimeter

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

19/52

Practicals: Use of Amslar polar planimeter for finding the area of irregular figures and certifying it by using Digital Planimeter Use of optical theodolite / Electronic theodolite for measurement of horizontal and vertical angles Theodolite traverse, Gale’s traverse table A two day project on theodolite traversing and plane table detailing, Use of optical theodolite / Electronic theodolite for one plane and two plane methods Simple and compound leveling by using Dumpy / Auto Level, booking methods Methods of plane tabling:- Radiation . Intersection and Traversing Setting out a simple foundation plan in the field Recommended Books: Surveying and Leveling, Vol I & II, Kanetkar & Kulkarni, Pune Vidyarthi Griha, Pune Surveying and Leveling, N N Basak, Tata McGraw Hill Surveying, R Agor, Khanna Publishers

Course Name:-Building Materials and Construction 1 Introduction Types of structures – framed, load bearing and composite, suitability and economic aspects of each type 2 Building materials Classification of Building materials, requirements of building materials and products, functional, aesthetical and economic Study of properties of materials: physical, mechanical, chemical, biological, aesthetical and other complex properties like durability, reliability, compatibility, and economic characteristics 3 Surface finishes Pointing: types, plastering: materials and types, painting, Building facia, Materials and products based on mineral binders, gypsum, lime, plaster of paris, cement, hydraulic lime, mortars and concrete, gypsum-concrete products. Paints and Varnishes: types and uses 4 Masonry Construction Structural Clay products, Classification, Common clay brick, face bricks and tiles, ceramic tiles, paving blocks Brick masonry, stone masonry and block masonry

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

20/52

5 Doors and windows Types, materials used, manufacture of doors and windows, fixtures Grill work – materials used, manufacture Metal and metal alloys: Products made of ferrous and non ferrous metals, Aluminum alloys, Types and Uses, Anticorrosive treatment Glass Types and uses Wood varieties and uses, defects in timber, preservative treatments, and wood composites. 5 Floors and roofs Floors – types of floors, floor finishes, suitability Roofs – materials used, types, wooden and steel trusses, roof coverings, roof drainage Synthetic Polymer resins and resins based materials, floor covering, wall facing, heat insulating and sound proofing plastics, water proofing and sealing resins, Method of Fixing. 6 Excavation and foundations Excavation in soils and rocks, shoring and strutting, dewatering Simple foundations like isolated, strip, continuous and raft, Pile Foundation 7 Concrete construction Batching and mixing, transportation and placing, curing Pre-cast concrete – advantages, suitability, manufacturing – storage – curing and erection methods for pre-cast componentsFormwork – design of simple form work, materials for formwork, centering and staging, scaffolding 8 Damp proofing and water proofing materials and methods Bitumen, tars and asphalt: Properties and uses Recommended Books: Building Construction, B.C. Punmiya Building Construction, Mackay, Vol I to VII Building Drawing, M G Shah, C M Kale, S Y Patki, Tata McGraw Hill Services in Building Complex, V K Jain, Khanna Publishers Engineering Materials, Rangwala Materials of Construction, Ghosh, Tata McGraw Hill Publications Relevant IS Codes

Course Name:-Fluid Mechanics 1 Properties of Fluid: Mass density, specific weight, specific gravity, specific volume, vapour pressure, compressibility, elasticity, surface tension, capillarity; Newton’s law of viscosity, classification of fluids, dynamic viscosity and kinematics viscosity, variation of viscosity with temperature; Basic concept applicable to fluid mechanics. 2 Fluid Statics Measurement of Pressure: Pressure variation in a static fluid, PASCAL’s law, Units and scales of pressure

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

21/52

3

4 5

6

measurement –Atmospheric pressure, Absolute Pressure, Gauge Pressure and Vacuum Pressure, Hydrostatic Paradox. Piezometer,U-Tube Manometer, Single Column Manometer,U-Tube Differntial Manometer , Inverterd U-Tube Differntial Manometer, Micromanometers. Mechanical Pressure Gauges. Hydrostatic force on plane and curved surface: Total Pressure and Center of Pressure, Pressure Diagram, Total Pressure on Plane Surfaces and Depth of Center of Pressure, Total Pressure on Curved Surfaces, Practical applications of Total Pressure and Center of Pressure Buoyancy and Flotation: Buoyant force, Buoyancy and Center of Buoyancy, Archimedes Principle, Principle of Floatation Metacentre and Metacentric Height, Equilibrium of Floating bodies and Submerged bodies Evaluation of Metacentric Height –Theoretical Method and Experimental Method Oscillation of Floating Body Fluids in Relative Equilibrium: Static fluid subjected to uniform linear acceleration Liquid containers subjected to constant horizontal acceleration and constant vertical acceleration, Liquid containers subjected to constant rotation Fluid Kinematics Fluid flow Methods of analysis of fluid motion, Streamlines, Pathlines, Streaklines and Streamtubes. Types of fluid flow Steady and unsteady flow, Uniform and non-uniform flow, Laminar, Transitional and Turbulent flow Reynolds number, Reynolds Experiment, Rotational and Irrotational flow, Subcritical , Critical and Supercritical flow, Compressible and Incompressible Flow , One , Two and Three dimensional Circulation and vorticity, Velocity potential and Stream function, Flow net Fluid Dynamics Euler’s equation, Bernoulli’s equation, Energy correction factor Flow Measuring Devices Measurement of discharge- Venturi meter, Orifice meter, Nozzle meter, Bend meter, Rotometer. Measurement of velocity-Pitot tube. Orifice - Classification, Flow through a Reservoir Opening i.e. Orifice, Trajectory of free –jet, Hydraulic Coefficients, Experimental determination of hydraulic coefficient, Small and large orifice, Time of emptying a tank with orifice Mouthpieces-Classification, External cylindrical mouthpiece, Convergent – divergent mouthpiece, Borda’s mouthpiece Notches and Weirs -Discharge over a rectangular notch and a triangular notch, Velocity of approach, End contractions, Cippoletti Notch, Discharge over a stepped notch, Time of emptying a tank with notch or weir, Ventilation of weir, Proportional Weir or Sutro Weir Compressible flow: Basic equations of flow (elementary study), Mach number, Mach cone,

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

22/52

Area – Velocity relationship, Stagnation Properties 7 Ideal fluid flow Uniform flow, source and sink, doublet, free vortex. List of Experiments: Hydrostatics Calibration of Flowmeter Measurement of viscosity Calibration of Orifices Study of Pressure Measuring Devices Calibration of Mouthpieces Stability of Floating Body Calibration of Notches Hydrostatics Force on Flat Calibration of Weirs Surfaces/Curved Surfaces Flow Visualisation -Ideal Flow Bernoulli’s Theorem Recommended Books: Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics, Dr. P.M. Modi and Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard Book House Theory and Applications of Fluid Mechanics, K. Subramanya, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing co. Ltd. Fluid Mechanics, Dr. A.K. Jain, Khanna Publishers Engineering Fluid Mechanics, K.L. Kumar, S.Chand & Company Ltd

Course Name:-Mechanics of Solids 1 Axial Force, Shear Force and Bending moment Diagram Axial force, shear force and bending moment diagrams for statically determinate beams and frames. 2 Simple Stress & Strain Definitions of Stress, Strain, Modulus of elasticity, Modulus of Rigidity, Bulk Modulus, Yield stress, Ultimate stress, Factor of safety, Shear stress, Poisson ratio, Bars of varying sections, Stress due to self weight. Composite sections, Temperature stresses. 3 Theory of Pure Bending Flexure formula for straight beams, moment of inertia, product of inertia and polar moment of inertia of plane areas, principal axes of inertia, moments of inertia about principal axes, Transfer theorem, flitched beams. Unsymmetrical bending. Flexural stresses due to bending in two planes for symmetrical sections, bending of unsymmetrical sections. 4 Shear Stress in Beams Distribution of shear stress across plane sections, shear connectors. Shear center of thin walled sections such as angle, tee, channel and I sections. 5 Simple theory of torsion Torsion of circular shafts – solid and hollow, stresses in shaft when transmitting power, close-coiled helical springs under axial load. 6 Bending moment combined with axial loads Application to members subjected to eccentric loads, core of a section, problems on chimneys, retaining walls etc., involving lateral loads. B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08 23/52

7 Stresses and strains in thin cylindrical and spherical shells under internal pressure. 8 Principal stresses General equations for transformation of stress, principal planes and principal stresses, maximum shear stress, determination using Mohr’s circle, principal stresses in beams, principal stresses in shafts subjected to torsion, bending and axial thrust, concept of equivalent torsional and bending moments. Recommended Books: Mechanics of Materials, E. P. Popov, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.. Mechanics of Materials, Timoshenko & Gere, Tata McGraw Hill Book Publishing Co. Ltd.. Engineering Mechanics, Timoshenko & Young, Tata McGraw Hill Book Publishing Co. Ltd.. Mechanics of Structures, S.B. Junnarkar, Charotar Publishers. Mechanics of Materials, James M. Gere, Brooks/Cole. Strength of Materials, G.H. Ryder, MacMillan. Mechanics of Materials, Peter & Singer, McGraw Hill. Strength of Materials, Schaum’s Outline Series, William A. Nash, McGraw Hill Book Co. Mechanics of Materials, Beer & Johnston, McGraw Hill Books Publishing Co. Ltd..

Course Name:-Concrete Technology 1 Properties of Ingredients: Properties of coarse and fine aggregates and their influence on concrete, types of cement and their use, physical properties of 33 Grade, 43 Grade, 53 Grade ordinary Portland cement, Portland pozzolana cement, rapid hardening Portland cement, hydrophobic cement, low heat Portland cement and sulphate resisting Portland cement as per relevant I.S. codes Stone types and properties, preservative treatments, stone aggregates. 2 Grades of concrete: Concrete for ordinary work, light weight concrete, high density concrete, workability, durability and strength requirements, effect of w/c ratio, acceptability criteria, laboratory testing of fresh and hardened concrete. 3 Concrete mix design: Mix design for compressive strength by I.S. methods, road note method and British method, mix design for flexural strength. 4 High performance concrete: Constituents of high grade concrete, various tests and application of high performance concrete. 5 Admixtures: Plasticizers, retarders, accelerators and other admixtures, test on admixtures, chemistry and compatibility with concrete. 6 Ready mix concrete: requirements of ready mix concrete, transit mixer details, mix B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08 24/52

design of RMC. 7 Concrete for repairs and rehabilitation of structures: Polymer concrete, fiber reinforced concrete, polymer impregnated concrete, polymer modified cement concrete and Ferro cement, different tests. 8 Non-Destructive testing of concrete: hammer test, ultrasonic pulse velocity test, load test, carbonation test, half cell potentio-meter, corrosion of steel, core test and relevant provision of I.S. codes. List of experiments: Effect of w/c ratio o workability (slump cone, compaction factor, V-B test, flow table) Effect of w/c ratio on strength of concrete, Mix design in laboratory Non destructive testing of concrete – some applications (hammer, ultrasonic) Secant modulus of elasticity of concrete & indirect tensile test on concrete. Study of admixtures & their effect on workability and strength of concrete. Modulus of rupture of concrete. Permeability test on concrete Tests on polymer modified mortar / concrete Tests on fiber-reinforced concrete Flexture test on beam (central point load and two point load) (plotting of load deflection curve and finding value of E) Recommended Books: Plain & reinforced concrete, Vol. I, O.P. Jain & Jaikrishna, Concrete technology, theory and practice, M.S. Shetty. Properties of concrete, Neville, El, Society & Pub. Relevant I.S. codes. Special Publication of ACI on Polymer concrete and FRC. Proceedings of International Conferences on Polymer Concrete and FRC.

Course Name:- Construction Materials Laboratory Following experiments to be performed as per relevant IS standards: Physical properties of Cement :  Consistency,  compressive strength,  initial & final setting time,  soundness. Bricks:  water absorption  compressive strength Wood:  Tension  Compression

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

25/52

Tiles:  transverse test  water absorption test Steel:  Tension test on mild steel bars (stress-strain) behavior, Young's modulus determination)  Test on tour steel bar ( tension,bend & rebend)  Test on cast iron (transverse, tension)  Shear test on mild steel bar / cast iron bar  Torsion test on mild steel, cast iron bar  Brinell hardness test  Rockwell hardness test  Izod impact test / charpy test Aggregates:  sieve analysis  crushing value  shape test  impact test  abrasion test  crushing test  Los angels abrasion test  soundness test Bitumen:  Penetration test  Ductility test  Softening point test  Viscosity test  Flash & fire point test

S.Y. B. Tech. Semester IV Course Name:- Applied Mathematics- II 1 Statistics Review of measures of central tendency, measure of variation and probability, Discrete and continuous Random variable Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution. Random sampling, sampling distribution, Standard error, Central limit theorem. Estimation of parameters, point estimation, interval estimation, confidence internal. Testing of Hypothesis, Large sample and small sample tests. ‘t’ test and ‘F’ test, Chi-square test Correlation and regression, Coefficient of correlation and Rank correlation, Regression analysis. Curve fitting, method of least square

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

26/52

Statistical quality control and control charts Analysis of variance 2 Numerical Methods Solutions of systems of linear algebric equations. Gauss Elimation, Gauss Jordan, Crout’s (LU) method, Gauss Seidal and jacobi iteration Differential equation ,Taylor Series method, Picard method, Rungakutta method, Euler method Recommended Books: Mathematical Statistics, Kapur & Saxena Statistics, Schaum’s Series Numerical Methods for Engineers, S K Gupta Introductory methods of numerical analysis, S S Sastry

Course Name:- Geomatics- II 1 Curves Definitions of different terms, necessity of curves and types of curves Simple circular curves and compound curves, office and field work, linear methods of setting out of curves Angular methods for setting out of curves, two theodolite and Rankine deflection angle methods Reverse and transition curves, their properties and their advantages, design of transition curves, shift, spiral angle Composite curves – office and field work, setting out of curve by angular method, composite curve problems Vertical curves – definitions, geometry and types, tangent correction and chord gradient methods, sight distance on a vertical curve, difficulties in setting out curves and solutions for the same 2 Modern surveying instruments Electronics in surveying, general principles used in the instruments Auto levels, self compensating instrument , Digital Level Electronic distance measurements - types, principles, applications of Total Station in surveying, corrections for field observations Electronic digital theodolite – types, uses and applications, concept of total station Use of computer in survey work for level computation and plotting contour plan 3 Tacheometric surveying Principles and uses, advantages, stadia formula, different methods of tacheometer, subtense bar method, location details by tacheometer, stadia diagram and tables, error and accuracy in tacheometry survey work 4 Global Positioning System (G.P.S) G.P.S. Segments: Spaces Segment, Control Segment, User Segment Features of G.P.S. Satellites, Principle of Operation Surveying with G.P.S.: Methods of observations, Absolute Positioning, Relative Positioning, differential G.P.S., Kinematics of G.P.S.

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

27/52

G.P.S. Receivers: Navigational Receivers, Surveying Receivers, Geodetic Receivers, Computation of Co- ordinates:- Transformation from Global to Local Datum , Geodetic Coordinates to map co- ordinates , G.P.S. Heights and mean sea level Heights Applications of G.P.S. 5 Remote Sensing: Electromagnetic remote sensing process Physics of radiant energy: Nature of Electromagnetic radiation, Electromagnetic spectrum Energy Source and its Characteristics Atmospheric influences: Absorption, Scattering Energy interaction with Earth Surfaces: Spectral reflectance Curve Image Acquisition: Photographic sensors, Digital Data, Earth Resource satellites, Image resolution Image Interpretation Application of Remote Sensing 6 Geographical Information System: Information systems, spatial and non- spatial information, geographical concept and terminology, advantages of GIS, Basic component of GIS Commercially available GIS hardware and Software Field data, statistical data, maps, aerial Photographs, satellite data, points , lines, and areas features, vector and raster data, data entry through keyboard, digitizer and scanners, preprocessing of data rectification and registration , interpolation techniques Practicals: To find the constants of a tacheometer and to verify field distances A project for preparing L section and cross section, block contouring and tacheometric survey Height and distance problems in tacheometric surveying Study of satellite images and its interpretation Determination of horizontal, sloping and vertical distance between any two points by using Total Station Geo-registration of map and its digitization by using suitable GIS software. Map editing, vector and raster analysis of digitized map by using suitable GIS software Collection of field data like point data, line data and area data by using surveying and mapping GPS receiver Recommended Books: Surveying and Leveling, Vol I & II, III, B.C.Punmiya , Laxmi Publication Surveying and Leveling, N N Basak, Tata McGraw Hil Surveying, R Agor, Khanna Publishers Concepts and Techniques of Geographical Information System, Lo C.P.Yeung A K W, Prentice Hall India Introduction to Geographical Information System, Kang-tsung Chang, Tata mcGraw Hill

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

28/52

Remote sensing and Geographical information sysytem, K. Anjali Rao , BS Publications

Course Name:- Engineering Geology 1 Introduction Branches of geology useful to civil engineering, importance of geological studies in various civil engineering projects 2 General geology Internal structure of the earth & use of seismic waves in understanding the interior Agents modifying the earth surface, study of weathering & its significance in physical & engineering properties of rocks like strength & water tightness, durability etc. Geological action of river, wind & glaciers, erosion; transport & depositional landforms created by them Volcanism- central type & fissure type, products of volcanoes Earthquakes- earthquake waves, construction and working of seismographs, earthquake zones of India Geological aspects for earthquake resistant structures 3 Mineralogy Methods of mineral identification, physical properties of minerals, rock forming minerals, megascopic identification of common primary & secondary minerals, study of common ore minerals - as prescribed under Practicals 4 Petrology Study of igneous, sedimentary rocks, distinguishing properties between igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks to identify them in field Igneous petrology- mode of formation, textures, structures etc., Hatch’s scheme of classification, study of common igneous rocks Sedimentary petrology- mode of formation, textures, characteristics of shallow water deposits like lamination, bedding, current bedding etc., classification of secondary rocks, types, residual deposits, true clastic deposits, chemically formed and organically formed deposits, commonly occurring sedimentary rocks Metamorphic petrology- mode of formation, agents and types of metamorphism, metamorphic minerals, rock cleavage, structures & textures in metamorphic rocks, classification, commonly occurring metamorphic rocks 5 Structural geology Structural elements of rocks- dip, strike, outcrop patterns, unconformities, outliers & inliers, study of joints, faults and folds, importance of structural elements in engineering operations 6 Stratigraphy Principle of stratigraphy & co-relation, geological time scale, physiographic divisions of India- study of formations occurring in peninsular India 7 Geological investigations Preliminary geological investigations & their importance to achieve safety &

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

29/52

8

9

1 0 1 1 1 2

economy of the projects, supporting case histories of dams and tunnel projects in Maharashtra state Methods of surface & sub-surface investigations- trial pits, trenches, drill holes, geological logging, inclined drill holes, resistivity method & seismic methods Use of aerial photographs & satellite imageries in civil engineering projects Ground water Sources & zones, water table, unconfined & perched aquifers, springs Factors controlling water bearing capacity of rocks, pervious & impervious rocks, cone of depression & its use in civil engineering Geology of dam and reservoir site Importance of geological conditions while selecting the type of dam, ideal geological conditions for dam and reservoir site, favorable & unfavorable conditions in different types of rocks in presence of various structural features, precautions to be taken to counteract unsuitable conditions, significance of faults, folds, crushed zone, dykes & fractures on the dam site and treatment giving to such structures, tail channel erosion Tunneling Importance of geological considerations while choosing sites and alignment of the tunnel Ideal site conditions for tunneling, geological conditions to be avoided Stability of hill slopes Land slides, their types, causes and preventive measures for landslides Building stones Geological factors controlling properties of good building stones, consideration of common rocks as building stones, study of different building stone from various formation in Indian peninsula, geological factors controlling location of quarries, quarrying methods and quarrying operations Practicals: Study of physical properties of the minerals Identification of minerals- crystalline, crypto-crystalline and amorphous silica & their varieties, Orthoclase, Microcline, Plagioclase, Muscovite, Biotite, Hornblende, Asbestos, Augite, Olivine, Tourmaline, Garnet, Natrolite, Actinolile, Calcite, Dolomite, Gypsum, Beryl, Bauxite, Graphite, Galena, Pyrite, Hematite, Magnetite, Chalcopyrite, Chromite, Corundum, Talc, Fluorite, Kyanite Identification of rocks – Igneous: Granite and its varieties, Synite, Dionite, Gabbro, Pegmatite, Porphyry, Dolerite, Rhyolite, Pumice, Trachyte, Basalt and its varieties, Volcanic Breccia, Volcanic Tuffs. Sedimentary: Conglomerate, Breccia, Sandstone & its varieties, Shales, Limestone, Melliolite, Laterite, Slate, Phyllite, Mica, Schists, Hornblende schists, Granite gneiss & its varieties, Augen gneiss, Marbles & quartzite Structural geological maps Study of core samples, percentage recovery, RQD, core logging. Recommended Books: A Text Book of Engineering Geology, Dr R B Gupte A Text Book of Engineering & General Geology, Parbin Singh A Text Book of Engineering Geology, Dr Kesavalu

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

30/52

Course Name:- Building Planning & Graphics – I 1 Principles of modular planning, Architectural Planning , massing & composition, Concept of built environment & its application in Planning, Recommendations of National Building Organisation 2 Planning of Buildings such as: Building For Residence: Bungalows, Row Houses, Hostels, Apartment Houses Building for Education: Schools, College, Libraries Buildings for Health: Hospitals, Health Centers, Dispensaries, Maternity Homes, Sanatoriums Industrial Structures Buildings for Entertainment: Theaters, Cinema Hall, Club House, Sport Clubs Other Structures: Offices, Hotels, Rest Room 3 Preparation of constructional details and drawings of foundations, floors, roofs – flat and pitched, doors and windows, staircases, plumbing items, columns, beams and slabs 4 Staircase: Types, size and location, layout, design considerations, materials for stair case construction 5 Perspective Drawing: One point Perspective and Two Point perspective 6 Town planning : Objectives and principles, master plan, Road Systems, Zoning, Green Belt, Slums , D.C.Rules 7 Recommended Books: Building Drawing, M G Shah, C M Kale, S Y Patki, Tata McGraw Hill Building Drawing , Y.S.Sane Civil Engineering Drawing, M Chakraborty

Course Name:- Applied Hydraulics – I 1 Laminar Flow Laminar flow through: circular pipes, annulus and parallel plates. Stokes law, Measurement of viscosity. 2 Turbulent Flow: Reynolds experiment, Transition from laminar to turbulent flow. Definition of turbulence, scale and intensity, Causes of turbulence, instability, mechanism of turbulence and effect of turbulent flow in pipes. Reynolds stresses, semi-empirical theories of turbulence, Prandtl’s mixing length theory, universal velocity distribution equation. Resistance to flow of fluid in smooth and rough pipes, Moody’s diagram. 3 Boundary Layer Analysis: Assumption and concept of boundary layer theory. Boundary-layer thickness, displacement, momentum & energy thickness, laminar and Turbulent boundary layers on a flat plate; Laminar sub-layer, smooth and rough boundaries. Local and average friction coefficients. Separation and Control. 4 Flow Past immersed bodies: B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08 31/52

5

6

7

8

9

1 0

1 1

Drag and lift ,Types of drag , Drag on a sphere, cylinder ,flat plate and Airfoil, Karman Vortex Street, effect of free surface and compressibility on drag .Development of lift on immersed bodies ,Lift ,Magnus Effect and Circulation, lift characteristics of airfoils , polar diagram. Dimensional Analysis and Hydraulic Similitude: Dimensional homogeneity, Rayleigh method, Buckingham’s Pi method and other methods. Dimensionless groups. Similitude, Model studies, Types of models. Application of dimensional analysis and model studies to fluid flow problem. Introduction to Open Channel Flow Comparison between open channel flow and pipe flow, geometrical parameters of a channel, classification of open channels, classification of open channel flow, Velocity Distribution of channel section. Uniform Flow Continuity Equation ,Energy Equation and Momentum Equation , Characteristics of uniform flow , Chezy’s formula , Manning’s formula Factors affecting Manning’s Roughness Coefficient ‘ n ’. Most economical section of channel. Computation of Uniform flow Normal depth . Non-Uniform Flow Specific energy, Specific energy curve, critical flow, discharge curve Specific force Specific depth , and Critical depth .Channel Transitions . Measurement of Discharge and Velocity – Venturi Flume, Standing Wave Flume , Parshall Flume ,Broad Crested Weir. Measurement of Velocity- Currentmeter , Floats, Hot-wire anemometer. Gradually Varied Flow Dynamic Equation of Gradually Varied Flow, Classification of channel bottom slopes , Classification of surface profile, Characteristics of surface profile. Computation of water surface profile by graphical, numerical and analytical approaches. Direct Step method, Graphical Integration method and Direct integration method. Hydraulic Jump Theory of hydraulic jump, Elements and characteristics of hydraulic jump in a rectangular Channel, length and height of jump, location of jump, Types ,applications and location of hydraulic jump. Energy dissipation and other uses, surge as a moving hydraulic jump. Positive and negative surges. List of Experiment Length of establishment of flow Uniform Flow Velocity distribution in pipes Velocity Distribution in Open Laminar Flow channel flow Flow Visulisation Venturi Flume Studies in Wind Tunnel Standing Wave Flume Boundary Layer Gradually Varied Flow Flow around an Aerofoil / circular cylinder Hydraulic Jump Flow under Sluice Gate Recommended Books Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics, Dr. P.M. Modi and Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard Book

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

32/52

House Theory and Applications of Fluid Mechanics, K. Subramanya, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing co. Ltd. Fluid Mechanics, Dr. A.K. Jain, Khanna Publishers Fluid Mechanics and fluid pressure Engineering, D. S. Kumar, F.K. Kotharia and sons. Open channel Flow , K. Subramanya, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing co. Ltd. Open channel Hydraulics , Ven Te Chow , Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Course Name:- Structural Analysis – I 1 General theorems : Theorems relating to elastic structures, Principle of virtual work, Strain energy in elastic structures, complementary energy, Castigliano’s theorem, Betti’s and Maxwell’s reciprocal theorems. 2 Deflection of statically determinate structures: Deflection of determinate beams by Double integration Macaulay’s, Moment area and Conjugate beam methods, Principle of virtual work (unit load method) and Castigliano’s theorem, Deflection of determinate pin jointed trusses and rigid jointed frames by principle of virtual work (unit load method) ,Starin Energy and Castigliano’s theorem. 3 Influence lines for statically determinate structures : Influence lines for cantilever, simply supported beam, overhanging beam and pin jointed trusses, criteria for maximum shear force and bending moment under moving loads for simply supported beams, absolute maximum bending moment 4 Elastic arches : determination of normal thrust, shear force and bending moment for parabolic and segmental three hinged arches, Influence lines for normal thrust, shear force and bending moment for three hinged parabolic arch. 5 Suspension bridges : Suspension cable with three hinged stiffening girder, influence line diagrams for horizontal tension in the cable, shear force and bending moment at any section of the stiffening girder. 6 Struts : struts subjected to axial loads, concept of buckling, Euler’s formula for strut with different support conditions, Euler’s and Rankine’s design formulae. Structs subjected to eccentric and lateral loads, struts with initial curvature. Recommended Books: Basic Structural Analysis, C.S. Reddy., Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. Theory of Structures, Timoshenko & Young, Tata McGraw Hill Book Publishing Co. Ltd. Intermediate Structural Analysis, C. K. Wang, McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Structural Mechanics Vol I & II, Junnarkar S.B., Charotar Publisher. Elementary Structural Analysis, Norries & Wilbur, McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Structural Analysis, Laursen, H.I., McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Structural Analysis, Bhavikatti, Vikas Publishers. Structural theorems and their application, B.G. Neal, Pergaman Press.

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

33/52

Course Name:- Computer Aided Drafting 1 To create CAD files and draw basic elements (lines, circles, arcs, curves and polygons) in the file 2 To manipulate elements in the file by using manipulation tools like: move, delete, copy, rotate, mirror and extend, to change colors , styles, types and weights of existing elements, To use various view controls, 3 Terminology: extension line, dimension line, arrowhead, leader, diameter symbols, radius symbol, aligned and unidirectional dimensioning 4 To draw title block, to print / plot drawing/s at different scales 5 To draw objects to an exact size and combining the same to create different shapes, To produce sectional drawings, to create multi-view drawing using orthogonal projections Practical: Typical wall section of LB and framed structures Door and Window section Roof Section – flat and sloping roofs Staircase sections D.P.C. treatment

T.Y. B. Tech. Semester V Course Name:-Soil Mechanics 1 Introduction: 1.1 Definitions: soils, soil mechanics, soil engineering, rock mechanics, geotechnical engineering. 1.2 Scope of soil engineering. 1.3 Comparison between soil and rock. 2 Basic Definitions and Relationships: 2.1 Soil as three-phase system in terms of weight, volume, voids ratio, and porosity. 2.2 Definitions: moisture content, unit weights, degree of saturation, void ratio, porosity, specific gravity, mass specific gravity etc. 2.3 Relationship between volume- weight, void ratio- moisture content, unit weightpercent air voids, saturation- moisture content, moisture content- specific gravity etc. 2.4 Determination of various parameters such as: 2.4.1 Moisture content by oven dry method, pycnometer, sand bath method, torsional balance method radioactivity method, and alcohol method. 2.4.2 Specific gravity by density bottle method, pycnometer method, measuring flask method. B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08 34/52

2.4.3 3

4

5

6 7

8

1 0

1 1

1

Unit weight by water displacement method, submerged weight method, core cutter method, sands replacement method. Plasticity Characteristics of Soil: 3.1 Introduction to definitions of: plasticity of soil, consistency limits-liquid limit, plastic limit, shrinkage limit, plasticity, liquidity and consistency indices, flow & toughness indices, definitions of activity and sensitivity. 3.2 Determination of: liquid limit, plastic limit and shrinkage limit. 3.3 Use of consistency limits. Classification of Soils: 4.1 Introduction of soil classification: particle size classification, textural classification, unified soil classification, Indian standard soil classification system. 4.2 Identification: field identification of soils, general characteristics of soil in different groups. Permeability of Soil: 5.1 Introduction to hydraulic head, Darcy’s law, validity of Darcy’s law. 5.2 Determination of coefficient of permeability 5.2.1 Laboratory method: constant head method, falling head method. 5.2.2 Field method: pumping- in test, pumping- out test. 5.3 Permeability aspects: permeability of stratified soils, factors affecting permeability of soil. Seepage Analysis: Introduction, stream and potential functions, characteristics of flow nets, graphical method to plot flow nets. Effective Stress Principle: 7.1 Introduction, effective stress principle, nature of effective stress, effect of water table. 7.2 Fluctuations of effective stress, effective stress in soils saturated by capillary action, seepage pressure, quick sand condition. Compaction of Soil: 8.1 Introduction, theory of compaction, laboratory determination of optimum moisture content and maximum dry density. 8.2 Compaction in field, compaction specifications and field control. Consolidation of Soil: Introduction, comparison between compaction and consolidation, initial, primary & secondary consolidation, spring analogy for primary consolidation, consolidation test results, basic definitions, Terzaghi’s theory of consolidation, final settlement of soil deposits, consolidation settlement: one- dimensional method, secondary consolidation. Shear Strength: Principle planes parallel to the coordinate axes, Mohr’s circle, important characteristics of Mohr’s circle, Mohr-Coloumb theory, types of shear test: direct shear test, merits of direct shear test, triaxial compression tests, test behaviour of UU, CU and CD tests, relation between major and minor principal stresses, unconfined compression test, vane shear test. Stability of Slopes:

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

35/52

2 Introduction, different factors of safety, types of slope failures, analysis of finite and infinite slopes, wedge failure Swedish circle method, friction circle method, stability numbers and charts. 1 Soil Exploration:Introduction, methods of investigation, methods of boring, soil 3 samplers and sampling, number and deposition of trail pits and borings, penetrometer tests, borehole logs, geophysical methods. Practicals: List of tests : 1. Field Density using Core Cutter method. 2. Field Density using Sand replacement method. 3. Natural moisture content using Oven Drying method. 4. Field identification of Fine Grained soils. 5. Specific gravity of Soil grains. 6. Grain size distribution by Sieve Analysis. 7. Grain size distribution by Hydrometer Analysis. 8. Consistency limits by Liquid limit 9. Consistency limits by Plastic limit 10. Consistency limits by Shrinkage limit. 11. Permeability test using Constant Head test method. 12. Permeability test using Falling Head method. 13. Compaction test: Standard Proctor test. 14. Compaction test: Modified Proctor test. 15. Relative density. Text Books: 1. Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering by B.C. Punmia, Laxmi Publications 2. Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering by K.R. Arora, Standard Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi. 3. Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering by by V.N.S. Murthy, Saitech Publications. 4. Geotechanical Engineering by C. Venktatramaiah, New Age International. 5. Soil Engineering in Theory and Practice by Alam Singh, Standard Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi. References: 1. Fundamentals of Soil Engineering by Taylor, John Wiley & Sons. 2. An Introduction to Geotechanical Engineering by Holtz, R.D., Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 3. Soil Mechanics by Craig, R.F. Chapman & Hall. 4. Soil Mechanics by Lambe T.W. & Whitman R.V., John Wiley & Sons. 5. Theoretical Soil Mechanics by K. Terzaghi. 6. Relevant Indian Standard Specifications & Codes.

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

36/52

Course Name:-Building Planning & Graphics – II Preparation of Constructional Details and drawings of residential buildings, buildings for health, industry , buildings for entertainment and other structures like offices , hotels , restrooms by using suitable Computer aided drafting Software The detailing Should include:1) Typical floor plan , roof plan , foundation plan 2) Front Elevation , side elevations 3) Sectional elevation passing through rooms , staircase, bathrooms and toilets 4) Furniture arrangements of a typical Room 5) Site layout 6) Schedule for doors and windows 7) Area statement Practicals: Plan, elevation, sections foundation plans furniture arrangement , site plan and area statements for 1. residential buildings 2. auditorium 3. primary health center 4. office 5. Guest house Recommended Books: • Building Drawing, M G Shah, C M Kale, S Y Patki, Tata McGraw Hill • Building Drawing , Y.S.Sane • Civil Engineering Drawing, M Chakraborty • Introduction to AutoCAD 2005 : 2D and 3D Design , Alf Yarwood • AutoCAD : The Complete Reference : Cohn, David S

Course Name:- Construction Equipment and Techniques 1 Construction Equipment:1.1 Standard types of equipment , special equipment, cost of owning and operating equipment, depreciation costs, investment and operating costs, economic life, sources of construction equipment, factors affecting selection of construction equipment, balancing of equipment 1.2 Study of equipments with reference to available types and their types and their capacities, factors affecting their performance 1.2.1 Earthmoving Equipment :- Tractors and attachments, dozers and rippers, scrapers , shovels, draglines, trenching machines, clamshell, hoes, trucks B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08 37/52

2

3 4 5 6 7

and wagons, dumpers, rollers and compactors 1.2.2 Drilling and blasting equipments :- Bits, jackhammers, drifters, drills, blasting material, firing charge, safety fuse, electric blasting caps, drilling patterns, transporting and handling of explosives. 1.2.3 Pile driving equipments:- Types, pile driving hammers, single acting and double acting, differential acting hammers, hydraulic and diesel hammers, vibratory drivers 1.2.4 Pumping equipments:- Reciprocating, diaphragm & centrifugal pumps, well point system 1.2.5 Stone crushing equipment:- jaw, gyratory and cone crushers, hammer mills, roll crushers, rod and ball crushers, aggregate screens and screening plants, portable plants 1.2.6 Concrete manufacture, transport, placing and compacting equipment, mixers, central batching and mixing plants, pavers, transit mixers, concrete pumps shotcrete 1.2.7 Air Compressor 1.2.8 Equipments for moving materials, builder’s hoists, forklifts , cranes, beltconveyors, cableways, ropeways Tunneling:- Geo-technical investigations, selection of alignment, methods of tunneling in soft soils and in hard rock, sequence of operations for drilling and blasting method, mechanical moles, boomers, tunnel boring machines, mucking, ventilation of tunnels, dust control, types of tunnel supports, sequence of lining operation, lining with pneumatic placers and by pump crete method. Bridge Construction:- Geo-technical investigation , Site selection , Launching of bridges by incremental launching, using false work , balanced cantilever construction method Steel Construction :- Planning for field operations, selection of equipments and erection tools and method of welding, tools and methods of cutting and joining , safety measures during fabrication and erection Concrete Construction:- Concreting under water, concreting in different weather conditions, mass concreting, vaccum concreting , Self Compacted Concrete , Roller Compacted Concrete Ground Improvement Techniques:- Sand drains , stone column, diaphragm wall , rock anchors , Reinforced earth technology Information related to special equipments and their application to Off-shore construction, cofferdams , Foundation grouting Reference books:i) Varma Mahesh , Construction Equipment and its Planning & Applications ii) R.L. Purifoy & Ledbetter - Construction Equipment and its Planning , Mgraw hill iii) Jagdish Lal , Construction Equipment iv) Thomas baron , Erection of Steel structures v) Stubbs, handbook of heavy construction vi) Dr. P. Purushothama Raj, Ground Improvement Techniques , Laxmi Publications

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

38/52

vii) viii) ix)

Punnoswami, Bridge Construction Wadell , Concrete Construction Handbook Journals of Civil Engineering and Construction Engineering

Course Name:- Transportation Engineering – I 1 Introduction Role of transportation in society, Objectives of transportation system, different types of modes, planning & co-ordination of different modes for Indian conditions 2 Railway Engineering 2.1 Merits of rail transportation, railway gauges and gauge problems 2.2 Cross section of permanent way and track components: Sleepers-functions and types, sleeper density, ballast functions and different ballast materials. 2.3 Rails: Coning of wheels and tilting of rails, rail cross sections, wear and creep of rails, rail fastenings. 2.4 Geometric design: Gradients, transition curves, widening of gauges on curves, cant and cant deficiency. 2.5 Point and crossing: Design of turnouts and description of track junctions. 2.6 Yards: details of different types of railway yards and their functions. 2.7 Signalling and interlocking: classification of signals, interlocking of signals and points, control of train movements. 2.8 Construction and maintenance of railway track, methods of construction, material requirements, special measures for high speed track, maintenance of tracks and traffic operations 3 Airport Engineering 3.1 Aircraft characteristics and their influence on airport planning. 3.2 Airport planning: topographical and geographical features, air traffic characteristics, and development of new airports, factors affecting airport site selection. 3.3 Airport obstruction: Zoning laws, classification of obstruction, imaginary surfaces, approach zones, turning zones. 3.4 Airport layout: runway orientation, wind rose diagrams, and basic runway length. Correction of runway length, airport classification, geometric design, airport capacity, runway configuration, taxiway design, geometric standards, exit taxiways, holding aprons, location of terminal buildings, aircraft hangers and parking. 3.5 Airport marking and lighting: marking and lighting of runways, taxiways and approach areas 3.6 Terminal area and airport layout: Terminal area, planning of terminal building, Apron: size of the gate position, number of gate position, aircraft parking system; Hanger: general planning considerations, blast considerations.

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

39/52

3.7 Air traffic control: Air traffic control aids, Enroute aids, landing aids. 3.8 Airport Drainage: requirement of airport drainage, design data, surface drainage design, subsurface drainage design 4 Water Transportation 4.1 Harbours: Selection of site, entrance and channel requirement, ship characteristics and their influence on ports management and operations, harbour maintenance. 4.2 Harbour layout: harbour works, break waters, jetties, wharves, piers, berthing facilities, types and construction, dolphins. 4.3 Navigational aids: buoys and lighthouses etc. 4.4 Port facilities: docks, transit sheds and warehouses, general layout, containers and container yard, layout and handling equipment Recommended books: 1. Saxena S.C. and Arora S. P., A course of railway engineering, Dhanpat Rai and sons, New Delhi 2. Khanna and Arora, Airport planning & design, Nemchand Bros, Roorkee 3. Agarwal, M. M. (1991). Indian Railway Track, Sachdeva Press, Mayapuri, New Delhi 4. Bindra S.P., Docks & Harbour engineering, Dhanpat Rai and sons. 5. R Shrinivasan, Harbour dock and tunnel engineering 6. Rao G.V., Airport engineering, Tata McGraw Hill References: 1. Horonjeff &Mcklerey, Planning & design of Airport 2. Quinn A D, Design and construction of ports and marine structures.

Course Name:-Structural Analysis – II 1 General: Types of structures occurring in practice and their classification, Stable and unstable Structures, statical and kinematical determinacy and indeterminacy of structures, symmetric structure, Symmetrical and anti symmetrical loads, distinction between linear and non linear behavior, material and geometric non-linearity 2 Deflection of Statically Determinate Structures: Review of general theorems based on virtual work and energy methods, introduction to the concept of complimentary energy, absolute and relative deflections caused by loads, temperature changes and settlement of supports, application to determinate beams, pin jointed frames and rigid jointed frames 3 Analysis of Indeterminate Structures by Flexibility Method: Flexibility coefficients and their use in formulation of compatibility equations, Castigliano’s theorem of least work, application of above methods to propped cantilevers, fixed beams, continuous beams, simple pin jointed frames including effect of lack of members, simple rigid jointed frames and two-hinged arches 4 Analysis of Indeterminate Structures by Stiffness Method: Stiffness coefficients for prismatic members and their use for formulation of B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08 40/52

equilibrium equation, direct stiffness method slope deflection method, moment distribution method, applications of the above methods to indeterminate beams and simple rigid jointed frames, rigid jointed frames with inclined member but having only one translational DoF in addition to rotational DoF’s, including the effect of settlement of supports 5 Text Books: 1. Basic Structural Analysis, Reddy C.S; Tata McGraw Hill. 2. Matrix method in Structural Analysis, Pandit & Gupta; Tata McGraw Hill. 3. Structural Mechanics Vol. II, Junnarkar S.B; Charotar Publishers. Recommended Books: 1. Modern Methods in structural Analysis, Dr. B.N. Thadani & Dr. J.P. Desai; Weinall Book Corporation. 2. Intermediate Structural Analysis, Wang C.K; Tata Mcgraw Hill. 3. Analysis of Framed Structure, Gare & Weaver. 4. Structural Analysis Vol. I & II, Gupta & Pandit, Tata Mcgraw Hill. 5. Analytical Methods in Structural Engineering, Sarwar A. Raz, New Age International Publishers. 6. Structural Analysis, L.S. Negi & R. S. Jangid, Tata Mcgraw Hill. 7. Structural Analysis – A Unified Approach, Prakash Rao D.S; Universities Press. 8. Elementary Theory of Structures, Yuan Yu Hsieh, Prentice Hall. 9. Structural Analysis, Chajes A; Prentice Hall.

Course Name:-Applied Hydraulics – II 1 Dynamics of Fluid Flow: Momentum principle, applications: Force on plates, pipe bends, moments of momentum equation 2 Flow through Pipes: Loss of head through pipes, Darcy-Wiesbatch equation, minor losses, total energy equation, hydraulic gradient line, Pipes in series, equivalent pipes, pipes in parallel, flow through laterals, flows in dead end pipes, siphon, power transmission through pipes, nozzles. 3 Analysis of pipe networks : Hardy Cross method, water hammer in pipes and control measures , branching of pipes , three reservoir problem 4 Impact of jets and jet propulsion: Jet striking stationary, moving, inclined and perpendicular flat plates, hinged flat plates, impact on stationary, curved vane, series of curved vanes . 5 Turbines: General layout of hydroelectric power plant, heads and efficiencies of turbine, classification . Pelton wheel, Reaction turbines, Francis and Kaplan turbine, Draft

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

41/52

6 7

8 9

1 0

tube theory, specific speed, Unit quantities, characteristics curves, Governing of turbines, cavitation. Pumps : General classification , selection of pumps ,Heads and efficiencies of pumps . Submersible pumps – components, working and applications Centrifugal Pumps : Work done, heads and efficiencies, minimum speed series and parallel operation, multistage pumps, specific speed, model testing, priming, characteristics curves, cavitation. Hydraulics machinery: Hydraulic ram, press, accumulator, intensifier, crane and lift. Computational Fluid Dynamics :Basic equations of fluid dynamics, Grid generation, Introduction to inviscid incompressible flow , Boundary layer flow as applicable to C.F.D. . Introduction to different software in fluid mechanics , Simulation techniques , Introduction to multi criterion decision support system , components for modeling software .Introduction to Artificial Neural Network ,Genetic Algorithm Hydro informatics :Concept of hydro informatics –scope of internet and web based modeling in water resources engineering. List of experiments Flow through pipes Turbulent flow through pipes Flow visualisation Laminar flow through pipes Major losses / Minor losses in pipe Impact of jets Centrifugal Pumps Performance of Centrifugal pumps Performance of Pelton Wheel Performance of Francis Wheel Hydraulics ram Text Books : 1. Modi P.M. and Seth S.M. Hydraulics and fluid mechanics, Standard Book House 2. Subramanya K., Theory and applications of fluid mechanics, Tata McGraw Hill 3. Dr. Jain A.K. Fluid Mechanics, Khanna Publishers 4. Fluid Mechanics and fliud pressure Engineering, D.S.Kumar, F.K. Kataria and sons

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

42/52

Course Name:-Site Visits The students should visit at least six project sites in all during Semester V and VI taken together. The sites should be selected in such a way that during various visits, they should be able to observe / study: Most of the activities related to building construction like, concreting of footings and columns, bar bending, concreting of slab, flooring, plastering, plumbing, painting, cladding, false ceiling, air conditioning. And at least four of the following: Structural steel fabrication and erection Ground improvement methods (Grouting / geosynthetics / reinforcement) iii. Tunneling by conventional method or by TBM iv. Cassion foundations and piling v. Asphalt laying and concreting of roads vi. Ready mix concrete plant and ready mix asphalt plant vii. Earth work for dam or transport project viii. Fabrication and erection of pre-cast concrete elements ix. Mass concreting (roller compacted concrete / hot weather concrete / cold weather concrete / under water concrete) x. Mechanized canal construction (excavation, leveling and lining) xi. Repairs, rehabilitation works xii. Pre-stressing The students are expected to observe method of work, operations involved, tools used, quality checks, site layouts, productivity of workmen, gang size, equipment used etc. The student shall prepare and submit detail report for every site visited during Semester V and semester VI at the time of Oral examination to be conducted at the end of Semester VI. The report should clearly indicate observations made during such visits supplemented with ample sketches / drawings. i. ii.

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

43/52

T.Y. B. Tech. Semester V Course Name:-Foundation Engineering 1 Lateral Earth Pressures Theories: 1.1 Introduction: applications of earth pressure theories, different types of earth pressure at rest, active and passive pressure. 1.2 Rankine’s Earth Pressure Theory: Rankine’s earth pressure theory, active earth pressure and passive earth pressure for horizontal and inclined backfill including the direction of failure Planes for cohesionless and cohesive soils. 1.3 Coloumb’s Wedge Theory: coloumb’s active pressure in cohesionless soils, expression For active pressure, coloumb’s passive earth pressure. 1.4 Rebhann’s Construction for Active Pressure, Culmann’s graphical solutions for active soils, Wedge Method, passive pressure by friction circle method for cohesionless and cohesive Soils. 2 Earth Retaining Structures: Rigid and flexible retaining structures, stability analysis of retaining walls, cantilever retaining Walls, construction details, drainage and wall joints. 3 Bearing Capacity of Shallow Foundation: 3.1 Definitions of ultimate bearing capacity, gross, net and safe pressures, allowable bearing pressure, types of shallow foundations modes of failures. 3.2 Bearing capacity theories: Rankine’s approach, Prandtl’s approach and Terzaghi’s approach, concept behind derivation of equation, general bearing capacity equation, bearing capacity equations for square and circular footings, factors influencing bearing capacity, performance of footings in different soils, Vesic’s chart, ultimate bearing capacity in case of local shear failure. 3.1 Plate load test in detail with reference to IS1888 and its applications and estimation of settlements, bearing capacity based on Standard Penetration Test. 4 Axially Loaded Pile Foundations: 4.1 Introduction to pile foundations, necessity of pile foundation, classification of piles, construction methods of bored piles, concrete bored piles, driven cast insitu piles. 4.2 Pile capacity based on static analysis, piles in sand, piles in clay, dynamic methods and their limitations, in- situ penetration tests and pile load test as per IS 2911 specifications, negative skin friction. 4.3 Pile groups ultimate capacity of groups, settlement of pile groups in sand and in clay as per IS 2911 and critical depth method. 5 Underground Conduits: Classes of underground conduits, load on a ditch conduit, settlement ratio, ditch condition and projection condition, imperfect ditch conduit. 6 Open Cuts: Difference in open cuts and retaining walls, apparent pressure diagrams, average B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08 44/52

apparent pressure diagrams for sand and stiff clay, estimation of loads on struts. Practicals: List of Tests: 1. Consolidation Test. 2. Triaxial Test (UU) 3. Direct Shear Test. 4. Unconfined Compression Strength Test. 5. California Bearing Ratio. Application of the test performed to foundation problems should be demonstrated by solving at least two problems using data from the tests. Text Books: 1. Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering by B.C. Punmia, Laxmi Publications 2. Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering by K.R. Arora, Standard Pub. and Distributors, New Delhi. 3. Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering by by V.N.S. Murthy, Saitech Publications. References: 1. Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice by K. Terzaghi & R.B. Peck II Edn. 2. Foundation Engineering by R.B. Peck, W.E. Hansen & T.H. Thornburn, Wiley Eastern 3. Design Aids in Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering by S.R. Kaniraj, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 4. Foundation Design Manual by N.V. Nayak, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi. • Relevant Indian Standard Specifications & Codes.

Course Name:- Transportation Engineering – II 1 Highway Planning Classification of roads, brief history of road development in India, present status of roads in India, road patterns, saturation systems, highway alignment: basic requirements for an ideal alignment, factors governing highway alignment, highway location surveys and studies, highway alignment in hilly areas, drawings and reports, highway project preparation 2 Geometric design of highways Terrain classification, design speed, vehicular characteristics, highway cross-section elements Sight distance: introduction to sight distance, reaction time, analysis of safe sight distance, analysis of overtaking sight distance, intersection sight distance Design of horizontal alignment: horizontal curves, design of super elevation and its provision, radius at horizontal curves, widening of pavements at horizontal curves, analysis of transition curves Design of vertical alignment: different types of gradients, grade compensation on

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

45/52

3

4

5

6

7

curves, analysis of vertical curves, summit curves, valley curves Intersection: at grade and grade separated intersections, speed change lanes, Canalization, Design of rotary intersection and mini roundabout Traffic Engineering and Control Traffic engineering definitions: functions, organization and importance, necessity of understanding the behaviour of road user and vehicle characteristics, human factors governing the road user behaviour- power performance and other vehicular characteristics Traffic studies and surveys: Speed studies: presentation of data, journey time and delay studies, uses and various methods, relative merits and demerits Vehicular volume counts: types, various available methods, relative merits and demerits, planning of traffic counts, vehicle occupancy surveys Origin: destination surveys, need and uses, various available methods, checks for accuracy, presentation of data Parking surveys: needs and types Study of various photographic techniques available for traffic studies Traffic signs and marking: types, location, height etc., miscellaneous traffic control aids like roadway delinators, hazard markers, object marker, speed breakers, rumble strips etc., Street lighting: needs, definitions, laws of illumination, methods of discernment, glare problem, light lantern arrangement, types of lamps, planning and designing Pavement materials Stone aggregates: desirable properties, tests, requirements of aggregates for different types of pavements Bituminous materials: types, tests on bitumen, desirable properties, selection of grade of bitumen Bituminous mix design: principle, methods, modified binders Design of pavements Types of pavements, comparison of different types of pavements, functions of pavement components, pavement design factors, design wheel load, equivalent single wheel load, repetition of loads, equivalent wheel load factors, strength characteristics of pavement materials, climatic variation; design of flexible highway pavement as per IRC approach, design of flexible airport pavements, Stresses in rigid highway pavements, critical load positions, stresses due to loads, stresses due to temperature change, combined loading and temperature stresses, Joints in rigid pavements: transverse joints, longitudinal joints, fillers and sealers Highway Construction Equipment used for construction, embankment design and construction, construction of different Types of roads: water bound macadam, different types of bituminous pavements, cement concrete pavements, Construction of soil stabilized roads: different soil stabilization methods, use of geotextiles and geo-grids Highway maintenance and rehabilitation Pavement failures: flexible pavement failures, rigid pavement failures, maintenance of different types of pavements: assessment and need for maintenance, pavement

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

46/52

management system, evaluation of pavements: structural evaluation of pavements, functional evaluation of pavements, strengthening of existing pavements: object of strengthening, types of overlays, design of different types of overlays 8 Bridge Engineering Importance, investigations, site selection, collection of data, determination of flood discharge, waterway, afflux, economic span, scour depth, consideration of loads and stresses in load bridges, piers and abutments, bearings and joints in the bridges, culverts: classification, types and design of simple culverts 9 Highway drainage and drainage structures Necessity, surface draining, highway sub drainage, draining of city streets Recommended Books: • L R Kadiyali, Principles and practice of highway engineering, Khanna Tech Publications • S E Sehgal, K L Bhanot, A text book on highway engineering and airports, S Chand & Co • D R Phatak, Bridge Engineering, Satya Prakashan References: • Oglesby & Hicks, Highway engineering, John Wiley • Ponnuswamy, Bridge Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill • Morlok, E. R. (1970). An Introduction to Transportation Engineering and Planning, McGraw Hill Kagakusha International Student Edition. • Hay, W. W. (1988). 2nd Ed. Introduction to Transportation Engineering. John Wiley and Sons, New York. • Papacostas, C. S. (1987). Fundamentals of Transportation Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

Course Name:-Technical Communication and Presentation Skills 1 Communication in a Business Organisation: Channels,media,internal and external, formal and informal, upward and downward, nonverbal. 2 Technical Writing Skills: definition, importance, qualities, choosing words, sentences and paragraphs; audience recognition.; principles of Business correspondence; job application and resumes 3 Report Writing: types, qualities, , defining objectives and scope, organizing and interpreting information,, individual and group reports, formal and informal reports. 4 Technical proposal 5 Presentation Skills 6 Group Discussion Assignments: Written One assignment each from topics 1 to 4 Oral

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

47/52

One presentation One group discussion Books recommended: 1. Lesiker & Petit “ report Writing for Business “ McGraw Hill 2. Meenakshi Raman , Sharma Sangeetha “ Technical Communication – Principles & Practices” Oxford University Press

Course Name:- Design of Steel Structures 1 Joints: Introduction to riveted connection , Design of bolted and welded connections, axially and eccentrically loaded joints, simple connection of bracket plates to columns, beam to beam and beam to column connections, design of framed, unstiffened and stiffened seat connections. 2 Roofing System: Imposed loads on flat and sloping roofs and floors, wind loads on sloping roofs and vertical cladding including effect of degree permeability and wind drag, analysis of pin- jointed trusses under various loading cases, computation of design forces in members, design and detailing of connections and supports, wind bracing for roof system, supported on columns. 3 Flooring System: Concept of floor system with secondary beams, main beams and columns, design of simply supported beams using rolled steel sections, design of built-up sections. 4 Welded Plate Girder: Proportioning and design of section and connections, curtailment of flange plates, design of web splices, design of stiffeners. 5 Columns and Bases: Design of columns under axial loads using single or multiple rolled steel sections, design of lacing and battens, columns subjected to axial load and bending, design of slab and Gusseted base. Recommended Books: 1. Design of Steel Structures, Negi L.S; Tata McGraw Hill. 2. Design of Steel Structures, Kazimi S.M.A. & Jindal R.S; Prentice Hall of India. 3. Design of Steel Structures, Krishnamachar B.S; & Ajitha Sinha D. 4. Design of Steel Structures, Arya & Ajmani, New Chand & Sons. 5. Design of Steel Structures, Vol. I & II, Ramchandran. 6. Design of Steel Structures, Dayaratnam. 7. Design of Steel Structures, Breslar, Lin & Scalzi. 8. Design of Steel Structures, Mac. Ginley T. 9. Structural Steel Work, Reynolds T.J., Kent L.E. & Lazenby D.W. 10. Comprehensive Design of Steel Structures, Punmia, A.K. Jain & Arun Kumar

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

48/52

Jain, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd. 11. Relevant I.S. Codes. 12. Design of Steel Structures, I.C. Sayal & Satinder Singh, Standard Publishers & Distributors.

Course Name:- Engineering Economics 1 Fundamental concepts ;- demand and supply, cost and revenue, price and income, consumer behavior: demand, elasticity of demand, demand forecasting 2 Cost socepts, cost-volume-profit analysis, break even analysis and its applications to decision making 3 Importance of good accounting and audit practice, double entry book keeping system, profit and loss statement and balance sheet 4 Engineering economy: equivalence, value of time, present value and annual equivalence cost, rate of return 5 Market structure: pricing and output decisions under different market conditions, technological considerations under competitive economical and global business environments 6 Investment decisions : identification of investment opportunities, government regulatory framework, scouting for ideas, preliminary screening, project identification, project development cycle 7 Project appraisal: market, technical, financial, economic, social, ecological, organizational, tools of analysis: profitability, payback period, net present value, social cost-benefit analysis Recommended books: 1. Engineering Economics and financial accounting ( ASCENT SERIES): Aryasri, A Ramana Murthy, V V, Tata Mcgraw Hill 2. Prasanna Chandra , Projects: Preparation, appraisal, budgeting & implementation, Tata Mcgraw Hill

Course Name:- Environmental Engineering Ecology and Environment: Basic principles, food chain, food web, tropic levels, Bio geo chemical cycles, limiting factor, Eco systems, Important stable and unstable ecosystems Environmental Pollution :- Introduction Water:Water Supply systems: Need for planned water supply schemes, Components of water supply system Quality of water: Water quality standards

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

49/52

Treatment of water : Impurities in water – processes for their removal – typical flow-sheets Water Pollution Sewage: Conveyance of sewage: Sewers, shapes design parameters, operation and maintenance of sewers, Sewage pumping:: Characteristics of sewage: Composition, chemistry of sanitary sewage, B.O.D. , C.O.D. , Aerobic and anaerobic decomposition Sewage Disposal: Introduction , River pollution Sewage treatment: aims, methods of treatment and various flow-sheets for preliminary, primary, secondary and tertiary treatment Industrial waste waters: Introduction and properties Air : - Composition and properties of air Air pollution : Definition, history –episodes, sources of air pollution, Effects of air pollution on human beings, animals, plants and materials, Sources of air pollution, natural and manmade Noise:- Basic concept, measurement and various control methods Solid waste management:Definition of solid waste: Domestic, garbage, ashes, rubbish, dust, debris Commercial : wastes from offices, shops and markets etc. Hazardous waste : Household, Industrial Sources of solid wastes: Household wastes, waste from commercial establishments, offices and vegetable markets, and fish and meat markets, stables, solid waste from construction activities, hospital wastes, dead animals Quantity , composition and properties of solid wastes ;Collection, segregation, storage and transportation of solid waste, Effects of solid waste on environment: effects on air, soil, water surface and ground health hazards Disposal of solid waste: segregation, reduction at source, recovery and recycle Disposal methods Hazardous waste:- Introduction to hazardous waste; generation, minimization at source, treatment and disposal, legal aspects of solid waste disposal Building Plumbing and services: Introduction to various types of house plumbing systems for water supply and waste water disposal, high rise building plumbing, various kinds of fixtures and fittings used Practicals: 1. Ambient Air Sampling 2. Measurement of Noise Level 3. Solid waste: Determination of pH 4. Solid waste: Determination of moisture content 5. Solid waste: Determination of organic matter 6. Plumbing Demonstration of accessories, fittings, and fixtures. Reference Books: 1. Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering, S.K. Hussain. 2. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, (latest Ed.), Ministry of Works & Housing, New Delhi. 3. Introduction to Environmental Engineering, Vesilind, PWS Publishing

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

50/52

Company. 4. Water Supply and Sewerage, E.W. Steel 5. Water Supply and Sewerage, T.J. McGhee 6. Water Supply and Pollution Control, J.W. Clark, W. Veisman, M.J. Hammer 7. Relevant Indian Standard Specifications. 8. CPHEEO Manual on Water Supply & Treatment 9. Ecology, Eugene P. Odum 10. Integrated Solid Waste Management, Tchobanoglous, Theissen & Vigil. McGraw Hill Publication. 11. Plumbing Engineering. Theory and Practice, S.M. Patil. 12. Solid Waste Management in Developing Countries, A.D. Bhide& B.B. Sundaresan 13. Manual on Municipal Solid Waste Management – Ministry of Urban Development, New Delhi 14. Basic Environmental Engineering, Nathanson J A, Prentice Hall of India 15. Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, C S Rao, New Age International

Course Name:-Site Visits The students should visit at least six project sites in all during Semester V and VI taken together. The sites should be selected in such a way that during various visits, they should be able to observe / study: Most of the activities related to building construction like, concreting of footings and columns, bar bending, concreting of slab, flooring, plastering, plumbing, painting, cladding, false ceiling, air conditioning. And at least four of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Structural steel fabrication and erection Ground improvement methods (Grouting / geosynthetics / reinforcement) Tunneling by conventional method or by TBM Cassion foundations and piling Asphalt laying and concreting of roads Ready mix concrete plant and ready mix asphalt plant Earth work for dam or transport project Fabrication and erection of pre-cast concrete elements Mass concreting (roller compacted concrete / hot weather concrete / cold weather concrete / under water concrete) 10. Mechanized canal construction (excavation, leveling and lining) 11. Repairs, rehabilitation works

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

51/52

12. Pre-stressing The students are expected to observe method of work, operations involved, tools used, quality checks, site layouts, productivity of workmen, gang size, equipment used etc. The student shall prepare and submit detail report for every site visited during Semester V and semester VI at the time of Oral examination to be conducted at the end of Semester VI. The report should clearly indicate observations made during such visits supplemented with ample sketches / drawings.

[for record 2007-08]
B.TECH. - CIVIL ENGINEERING) (FINAL) Semester VII

Sr. No.

Course Code

Course Title

Contact Cr Evaluation Hours weightage % L P T TW MS ESE A T 3 5 4 3 2 0 2 0 5 5 6 3 8 15 10 15 10 15 6 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 70 70 70

ESE (The ory) Hrs 3 3 3 3 3 3

1 2 3 4 5 6

301200 301210 301220 301230 -

Water and Waste Treatment Theory of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Irrigation Engineering Entrepreneurship and Management Elective - I Elective - II TOTAL

3 2 3 2 21 8

5 8 15 5 8 15 29 50

Semester VIII

Sr. No. 1 2 3 4

Course Code 301240 301250 301260 -

Contact Cr Evaluation ESE Hours weightage % (Theory) Hrs L P T TW MS ESE A T Quantity Surveying Estimation 5 0 5 10 15 15 70 3 & Valuation Design & Drawing of R.C.C 4 2 6 10 15 15 70 3 Construction Management 5 0 5 10 15 15 70 3 Elective – III 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3

Course Title

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

52/52

5

-

Elective – IV TOTAL

3 2 20 6

5 8 26 4 6

15

15

70

3

Project: Sr. Course No. Code 1

Course Title Project

L

P

T

401900

Cr TW MS ESE ESE A T (Theory) Hrs 8 See note below

• •

The project is evaluated in two stages. The first stage evaluation shall be done at the end of pre-final semester by a Committee of Institute faculty (at least two faculty members including project guide). The Project Guide along with an external examiner shall do the second stage evaluation at the end of final semester. The first stage assessment shall have 25% weightage. Another 25% weightage shall be given for the initiative, interest, effort and sincerity shown by the student during the entire project work. The second stage assessment shall have 50% weightage. The first stage evaluation is to be carried out after a minimum of 12 weeks of work. The project report should be submitted in the prescribed format at least three weeks prior to the end of final semester or by the prescribed date and second stage assessment can be done in the last week of semester. The project shall carry 08 credits. The grade for the project shall be declared only after second stage evaluation. Electives:

GROUP I (For Elective I and Elective III)

Sr. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Course Code 401010 401020 401030 401040 401050 401060 401070

Contact Cr Evaluation Hours weightage % L P T TW MS ESE A T Advanced Structural Analysis 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 Advanced Structural Mechanics 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 Plastic Analysis of Steel 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 Structures Structural Dynamics 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 Advanced Foundation 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 Engineering Advanced Engineering Geology 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 Rock Mechanics 3 2 5 8 15 15 70

Course Title

ESE (Theory) Hrs 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 53/52

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

401080 401090 401100 401110 401120 401130 401140 401150 401160 401170

Soil Dynamics Digital Photogrammetry Space Geodesy Terrain Data Analysis Geographic Information System Advanced Design of Steel Structures Prestressed Concrete Bridge Engineering Advanced Design of R.C.C. Structures Earthquake Engineering

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15

15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15

70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

GROUP II (For Elective II and Elective IV)

Sr. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Course Code 401180 401190 401200 401210 401220 401230 401240 401250 401260 401270 401280 401290 401300 401310 401320 401330

Course Title

Advanced Construction Engineering Building Maintenance & Repairs Building Services Rehabilitation of Structures Construction & Law Pavement Design and Construction Traffic Planning & Design Pavement Management System EIA and Audit Project Appraisal Risk & Value Management Solid and hazardous waste Management Air Pollution Industrial Waste Treatment Water Resource Engineering & Management Systems Approach to Civil Engg.

Contact Cr Evaluation ESE Hours weightage % (Theory) Hrs L P T TW MS ESE A T 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

301200: Water and Waste Water Treatment

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

54/52

Detailed Syllabus: Water: 1.1. Man's environment: Importance of environmental sanitation. 1.2. Quality of water: Wholesomeness and palatability; physical, chemical, bacteriological standards. 1.3. Treatment of water; impurities in water-processes for their removal - typical flow-sheets. 1.4. Sedimentation: factors affecting efficiency, design values of various parameters, tube settlers. 1.5. Coagulation and flocculation: mechanisms, common coagulants, rapid mixing and flocculating devices, G and GT values, Jar test, coagulant aids polyelectrolyte etc. 1.6. Filtration: classification, slow and rapid sand filters, dual media filters, sand, gravel and under-drainage system, mode of action, cleaning, limitations, operational difficulties, performance, basic design consideration, pressure filters: construction and operation. 1.7. Water softening: lime soda and Base Exchange methods, principle reactions, design considerations, sludge disposal. 1.8. Miscellaneous treatments: removal of iron and manganese, taste, odour and colour, principles and methods; de-fluoridation, reverse osmosis. 1.9. Disinfection: chlorination, chemistry of chlorination, kinetics of disinfection, chlorine demand, free and combined chlorine, break point chlorination, super chlorination, de-chlorination, chlorine residual, use of iodine, ozone, ultraviolet rays and chlorine dioxide as disinfectants, well water disinfection 1.10. Introduction to advanced treatment methods : reverse osmosis, electro – dialysis, floatation , microfilteration, ultra filtration , Nan filtration.

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

55/52

2

Sewage: 2.1 Characteristics of sewage: composition, chemistry of sanitary sewage, B.O.D., C.O.D., aerobic and anaerobic decomposition. 2.2 Sewage Disposal: discharge of raw and treated sewage on land and water, standards for disposal of raw and treated sewage on land and water, limits of dilution. 2.3 Self purification of streams: oxygen economy, sewage farming. 2.4 Sewage treatment: aims, methods of treatment and various flow-sheets for preliminary, primary, secondary and tertiary treatment, screens, grit chambers, primary and secondary clarifiers, disposal of screenings and grit. 2.5 Biological treatment methods; principles, trickling filter operation, recirculation, activated sludge process and its modifications, hydraulic design of trickling filter and activated sludge process, sludge volume index, operational problems in activated sludge process and trickling filters, stabilization ponds. 2.6 Sludge digestion: principles of anaerobic digestion, quantity and characterizations of sludge, design of sludge digestion tanks, disposal of digested sludge, drying beds 2.7 Low cost sanitation: septic tanks and Anaerobic Filter - principles, operation and suitability, design values, disposal of treated effluent. 2.8 Tertiary Treatment methods – general description Practicals: List of experiments on water and sewage samples: 1. Alkalinity 2. Hardness 3. pH 4. Turbidity 5. Jar test 6. Residual chlorine 7. Chlorides 8. Solids: suspended solids, dissolved solids, total solids, volatile solids 9. Dissolved oxygen 10. Chemical oxygen demand (COD) 11. Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) 12. Sludge volume index (SVI) 13. Most probable number (MPN) Text books: 1. Water supply and sanitary engineering , S.K.Hussain 2. Manual on sewerage and sewage treatment (latest ed.) and Manual on water supply and treatment, Ministry of works and Housing, New Delhi.

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

56/52

Reference books: • Water supply and sewerage, E.W. Steel • Water supply and sewerage, T.J.McGhee • Water supply & pollution control, J.W.Clark, W.Viesman, M.J.Hammer. • Relevant Indian Standard Specifications. • CPHEEO Manual on Water supply and treatment • CPHEEO Manual on Sewerage and sewage treatment

301210: Theory of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Detailed Syllabus: 1 Reinforced Concrete Fundamentals (working Stress Method): Concept of reinforced concrete, stress strain characteristics of concrete and steel reinforcement , elastic theory, singly reinforced, balanced section, under reinforced section and over reinforced section, analysis and design of singly reinforced doubly reinforced rectangular and Tsections, design of one way and two way slab as per IS-456( latest), shear and bond stresses and design for shear and bond, design of axially loaded columns, analysis of sections subjected to bending and axial forces( tension or compression) 1.2 Brief introduction to fundamentals of ultimate strength theory: curved stress distribution, compressive stress block, simplified rectangular stress block as per Whitney's approach, ultimate moment of resistance of singly reinforced section 2 Limit state method of design as per IS 456 (latest edition): concepts of probability and reliability, characteristic loads, characteristic strength, partial safety factors for loads and materials, introduction to limit states of collapse in flexure, direct compression, shear and limit states of serviceability in deflection and cracking, design of singly and doubly reinforced rectangular and T sections for flexure, design of members in shear and bond, design of axially loaded columns, design of one-way and two-way slabs, design of beam subjected to bending and torsion 3 Pre-stressed Concrete 3.1 Basic principles of pre-stressed concrete: materials used and their properties, methods and systems of pre-stressing, losses in pre-stress, analysis of various types of sections subjected to pre-stress and external loads 3.2 General design principles: concepts of center of compression, kern of a section, efficiency of the section, pressure line and safe cable zone, principal tension in pre-stressed concrete members

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

57/52

Text books: 1. Plain and Reinforced Concrete, Vol. I, Jain & Jaikrishna, Nemchand Brothers. 2. Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures, Dayaratnam P, Oxford & IBH. 3. Design of Pre-stressed Concrete Structures, Lin T Y & Ned Burns John Wiley. 4. Prestressed Concrete, Krishna Raju, Tata McGraw Hill. 5. Ultimate Strength Design for Structural Concrete, Arthur P D & Ramkrishnan V, Wheeler & Co. Pvt Ltd 6. Limit State Theory for Reinforced Concrete Design, Huges B P, Pitman. 7. Limit State design - Reinforced Concrete. Jain A K, 8. Reinforced Concrete, Warner R F, Rangan B C & Hall A S, Pitman. 9. Reinforced Concrete, H.J. Shah, Charotar Publisher. 10. Theory of Reinforced Concrete, Shina & Roy 11. Prestressed Concrete, Evans R H & Benett E W, Chapman & Hall. 12. Limit State Design - Reinforced Concrete, Shah & Karve, 13. Illustrated Reinforced Concrete Design, Dr. V.L. Shah & Dr. S.R. Karve, Structures

301220: Irrigation Engineering Detailed Syllabus: 1 Introduction: irrigation, water resources in India, need of irrigation in India, development of irrigation in India, impact of irrigation on human environment, irrigation systems: minor and major, command area development 2 Hydrology: hydrologic cycle, rainfall – runoff process, factors affecting runoff, runoff hydrograph, runoff computations, flood discharge calculations, unit hydrograph method, S-hydrograph 3 Water requirement of crops: 3.1 Crops and crop seasons in India, cropping pattern, duty and delta 3.2 Quality of irrigation water 3.3 Soil-water relationships: soil characteristics significant from irrigation considerations, root zone soil water, infiltration, consumptive use, irrigation requirement, frequency of irrigation 3.4 Methods of applying water to the fields: surface, sub-surface, sprinkler and trickle / drip irrigation 4 Ground water and well hydrology 4.1 Ground water resources, occurrence of ground water, methods of ground water exploration, well irrigation 4.2 Well hydraulics: steady state flow in wells, equilibrium equations for confined and unconfined aquifers, aquifer tests, design of water wells

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

58/52

5

6

7

8

9

Distribution system: 5.1 Canal systems, alignment of canals, canal losses, estimation of design discharge 5.2 Design of channels: rigid boundary channels carrying clear and sediment laden water, alluvial channels carrying clear and sediment laden water, Kennedy’s and Lacey’s theory of regime channels 5.3 Canal outlets: non-modular, semi-modular and modular outlets 5.4 Waterlogging: causes, effects and remedial measures 5.5 Lining of canals: economics of lining, types of lining 5.6 Drainage of irrigated lands: necessity, methods Canal structures: 6.1 Surface and sub-surface flow considerations for design of canal structures: hydraulic jump, seepage forces, uplift forces 6.2 Canal falls, cross regulator, distributary head regulator, canal escapes: types, components and design considerations 6.3 Cross drainage works: need, types, design considerations Canal headworks: 7.1 Weir and barrage, different units of headworks, types of weirs, sediment control in canals, river training for canal headworks 7.2 Theories of seepage for design of weirs: Bligh’s creep theory, Lane’s weighted creep theory, Khosala’s method of independent variables Dams and spillways: 8.1 Embankment dams: Classification, selection of site for dam, design considerations, estimation and control of seepage, slope protection 8.2 Gravity dams: forces on gravity dams, causes of failure, stress analysis, elementary and practical profile, structural joints, keys and water seals, galleries, outlets 8.3 Arch and buttress dams: types 8.4 Spillways: components of spillways, types, terminal structures, types of gates for spillway crests Reservoirs: Types, capacity of reservoirs, yield of reservoir, reservoir regulation, sedimentation, economic height of dam, selection of suitable site, flood routing Text books: 1. G L Asawa, Irrigation Engineering, Wiley eastern 2. S K Garg, Irrigation Engineering & Hydraulic Structures, Khanna Publishers 3. P N Modi, Irrigation Engineering & Hydraulic Structures, Reference books: 1. J D Zimmerman, Irrigation, John Wiley & Sons 2. Varshney, Gupta & Gupta, Theory and Design of Irrigation Structures, Nem Chand & Bros 3. Punmia B C & Pande B B lal, irrigation Engineering and Water Power Engineering, Laxmi Publications

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

59/52

301230: Entrepreneurship and Management Detailed Syllabus: 1 Entrepreneurial perspective : Nature and importance of entrepreneurs, entrepreneurial and intrapreneurial mind, individual entrepreneur. 2 Creating and starting a venture : Creativity and business idea, legal issues for entrepreneur, Business plan, marketing plan, financial plan, organizational plan. Financing the venture: 3
Sources of capital, institutional assistance and finance to entrepreneurs. Govt. policies on small scale industries , evolution of small scale / ancillary sectors , role and performance of SSI in India , starting a SSI . Forms of Organization: Proprietorship, partnership, joint stock company, co-operatives. Management Definition, , functions of management Development of management Contribution of Fredrick Taylor, Henri Fayol and Gilbreath, Recommended books: 1. Entrepreneurship , Tata McGraw Hill , R. D. Hisrich and M. P. Peters 2. Management, McGraw Hill, Koontz 3. Entrepreneurship and Management , Vipul Prakashan , R. S. Mascarenha References : Entrepreneurship Development, Tata McGraw Hill

4 5 6

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

60/52

301240: Quantity Survey, Estimation & Valuation Detailed Syllabus: 1 Estimates: Various types, their relative importance. factors to be considered, complete set of Estimate. Approximate estimates: importance, purpose, different methods. Use of CBRI Equations for the same. Methods of preparation of estimates for projects such as i) Building R.C.C., Load bearing ii) Road , Culvert iii) Irrigation and iv) Water supply and sewerage: miscellaneous works like Manhole, water storage tank, septic tanks v) Trusses of steel , Industrial Shed 2 Measurements for various items: Use of relevant Indian Standard Specifications for the same, taking out quantities from the given requirements of the work, comparison of different alternatives, Bar bending schedules, Mass haul Diagrams , Earthwork Calculations 3 Material survey: Thumb rules for computation of materials requirement for different materials for buildings, percentage breakup of the cost, cost sensitive index, market survey of basic materials 4 Specifications: Types, requirements and importance, detailed specifications for the buildings, roads, minor bridges and industrial structures 5 Rate analysis: Purpose, importance and necessity of the same, factors affecting, task work, daily output from different equipment 6 Tender: Preparation of tender documents, importance of inviting tenders, contract types, relative merits, prequalification. general and special conditions, termination of contracts, extra work and items, penalty and liquidated charges, Settlement of disputes, R.A. Bill & Final Bill, Payment of advance , insurance, claims, price variation, etc. 7 Introduction to acts pertaining to : Minimum wages, Workman's compensation, Contracts, Arbitration, Easement rights

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

61/52

8

Valuation: Different terms used, the role of a valuer, purpose and necessity of the same. Capitalised Value, Years purchase ,sinking fund, depreciation, types of values, Purpose of valuation Different methods of valuation for i. open plots. ii. open plots with existing residential & commercial structures iii. lease hold properties Use of valuation tables and formulae Use of computers in quantity surveying Termwork Term work shall include (in addition to other work assigned by instructor) i. To find out the approximate estimate of a multistoried building by approximate method. ii. Detailed estimate of the following with the required material survey for the same. a. a ground plus three storied building (RCC) b. a bridge with minimum 2 spans c. a factory building d. a road work e. a cross drainage work f. a load bearing structure iii. Preparation of valuation report in standard Government form. iv. Assignments on rate analysis, specifications and simple estimates. v. Detailed estimate of minor structure vi Bar bending schedule Text Books: 1. M Chakravarty, Estimating, Costing Specifications & Valuation 2. Joy P K, Handbook of Construction Management, Macmillan 3. B.S. Patil , Building & Engineering Contracts References: 1. Relevant Indian Standard Specifications 2. World Bank approved contract documents 3. FIDIC contract conditions 4. Bare Acts related to Minimum wages, Workman’s compensation, Contract, and Arbitration.

9

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

62/52

301250: Design and Drawing of Reinforced Concrete Structure Detailed Syllabus: 1 Design of Foundations: (limit state method of design) Isolated square and rectangular footings subjected to axial load and moments, Design of combined foundations, Rectangular foundations and simple raft 2 Design of staircases: (limit state method of design) Doglegged, Open well type 3 Complete design of residential, office or industrial building including staircase and foundations (limit state method of design) 4 Design of retaining walls: (limit state method of design) Cantilever, Counterfort type 5 Design of water tanks: (working stress method) Circular and rectangular, at ground level, underground and overhead- both by IS coefficient and approximate methods, supporting structure for overhead water tanks. For all topics, relevant and latest IS codes of practice should be followed. Term work: A design report and at least four A1 (imperial) size drawings sheets for three projects covering the above syllabus shall be submitted as term work. All drawing work is to be done in pencil only. Exposure to design by available software for design is to be provided. There shall be a sketching examination of 30 minutes duration followed by oral examination. Recommended Books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Limit State Theory for Reinforced Concrete Design, Huges B. P., Pitman Limit State Design – Reinforced Concrete, Jain A. K. Reinforced Concrete, Warener R. F., Rangan B.C. & Hall A. S. Illustrated Design of G+3 Building, Shah & Karve, Structural Publishers Reinforced Concrete, S. N. Sinha Reinforced Concrete, H. J. Shah, Charotar Publisher Relevant I.S. codes

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

63/52

301260: Construction Management Detailed Syllabus: 1 Construction: Unique features of construction, construction project, types and features, phases of a project, agencies involved and their methods of execution. Construction project planning: 2
Stages of project planning: pre-tender planning, pre-construction planning, detailed construction planning, role of client and contractor, level of detail.

Process of development of plans and schedules, work break-down structure, activity lists, assessment of work content, estimating durations, sequence of activities, activity utility data 3
Techniques of planning: Bar charts, Networks: basic terminology, types of precedence relationships: finish to start, start to start, finish to finish, start to finish, preparation of CPM networks: activity on link and activity on node representation, analysis of single relationship (finish to start) networks, computation of float values, critical and semi-critical paths, calendering networks Resource Scheduling: Bar chart, line of balance technique, resource constraints and conflicts, resource aggregation, allocation, smoothening and leveling PERT: Assumptions underlying PERT analysis, determining three time estimates, analysis, slack computations, calculation of probability of completion Planning and organizing construction site and resources: Site: site layout, developing site organization, record keeping at site, Manpower: planning, organizing, staffing, motivation, Materials: concepts of planning, procurement and inventory control, Equipment: basic concepts of planning and organizing, Funds: cash flow, sources of funds

4 5 6

7 8

Construction costs: Classification of costs, time cost trade-off in construction projects, compression and decompression
Monitoring & control:

Supervision, record keeping, periodic progress reports, periodical progress meetings Updating of plans: purpose, frequency and methods of updating Common causes of time and cost overruns and corrective measures Quality control: concept of quality, quality of constructed structure, use of manuals and checklists for quality control, role of inspection, basics of statistical quality control Safety and health on project sites: accidents; their causes and effects, costs of accidents, occupational health problems in construction, organizing for safety and health

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

64/52

Recommended books: 1. Barrie D.S. & Paulson B C, Professional Construction Management, McGraw Hill 2. Chitkara K K, Construction Project Management, Tata McGraw Hill 3. P K Joy, Handbook of Construction Management 4. King & Hudson, Construction Hazard and Safety Handbook, Butterworths 5. Antill J M & Woodhead R W, Critical Path Methods in Construction Practice, Wiley

401010: Advanced Structural Analysis Detailed Syllabus: 1 Introduction to Stiffness Method in Matrix Form: Basic concepts of stiffness coefficients, member stiffness matrix for truss and beam elements, properties of stiffness matrix, co-ordinate transformation matrix, stiffness matrix in local and global co-ordinate axes system, assemblage of structure stiffness matrix and application of boundary conditions, equivalent joint loads, method of solution for displacements and computation of internal forces in members, application of stiffness method to beams, pin jointed trusses and rigid jointed plane frames. 2 Conventional form of Stiffness Method, Moment Distribution Method: Application to frames involving sideways, consideration of symmetry and antisymmetry of loads on symmetrical structures, modification of stiffness and carryover factors for symmetric and antisymmetric loads 3 Flexibility Method in Matrix Form: Review of concepts of flexibility coefficients, selection of primary structure, concept of structure flexibility matrix, compatibility equations and solution for redundant forces, computation of internal forces and jointed displacements, applications to continuous beams, pin jointed trusses and rigid jointed plane frames 4 Conventional Form of Flexibility Method: Elastic centre method and its application to rectangular box, rigid jointed portal frames, and fixed arches, introduction to column analogy method and its application to the determination of stiffness coefficients, carry over factors and fixed and moments for non prismatic member. 5 Use of Muller Breslau’s Principle: For drawing influence line diagrams for statically indeterminate structures. Influence line diagrams for propped cantilevers, fixed beams and continuous beams. 6 Approximate Methods for Analysis of Building Frames: Substitute frame, cantilever and portal methods 7 Introduction to Plastic Analysis of Steel Structure: Concept of plastic hinge and plastic moment carrying capacity, shape factor, determination of collapse load for single and multiple span beams. B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08 65/52

Recommended Text Books: 1. Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis, Livesley R.K. 2. Analysis of Framed Structure, Gere J.M. & Weaver W. 3. Elementary Structural Analysis, Wilber. 4. Analytical Methods in Structural Analysis, S.A. Raz, New Age Int. Publishers. 5. Modern Methods in Structural Mechanics, B.N. Thadani. 6. Elementary Structural Analysis, C.S. Reddy. 7. Plastic Methods of Structural Analysis, B.G. Neal. 8. Structural Analysis, Laursen. 9. Structural Analysis, Vol. I & II, Gupta & Pandit, Tata McGraw Hill. 10. Intermediate Structural Analysis, Wang C.K., Tata McGraw Hill. 11. Matrix Method in Structural Analysis, Pandit & Gupta, Tata McGraw Hill.

401030: Plastic Analysis of Steel Structures Detailed Syllabus: 1 Plastic Analysis. Concepts of plastic analysis of steel structures, stress strain relations . 2 Shape factors Plastic modulus, Plastic hinge, fully plastic moment, moment curvature relations. 3 4 5 6 7 Determination of collapse loads Single and multiple span beams, carrying various types of loads. Collapse load analysis of pin jointed frames, Single/multiple span rigid jointed portal frames and single bay gabble frames. Use of statical and mechanism methods for calculation of collapse load, Lower and upper bound theorems, various types of failure mechanisms. Effect of axial force and shear force on the fully plastic moment of a section Design of beams and single span rigid jointed frames subjected to a system of proportionate loading as per Indian code provisions. Recommended Books: (i) (ii) (iii) Timoshenko S., Theory of Elastic Stability, McGraw Hill Book Co. Baker and Hayman, Plastic Design of Steel Frames, Cambridge University Press. Hodge, Plastic Analysis of Structures, McGraw Hill Book Co. 66/52

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

(iv)

B.G Neal Plastic Analysis of Steel Structures

401230: Pavement Design and Construction Detailed Syllabus 1 Pavement structure and functional attributes, factors affecting pavement design, types of wheel loads for highways and airports, development of design method for highway and airport pavements. 2 Stresses in flexible pavements 1-layer, 2-layers, 3-layer theories, EWF, ESWL load coverage 3 Stresses in rigid pavement: load and temperature stresses, combined stresses. 4 4.1 Evaluation of subgrade and pavement materials: group index, FAA classification, CBR, Triaxial compression, Dynamic/ Resilient modulus, embankment design and construction 4.2 Grading requirements for aggregates, selection of bases and subbase materials (including stabilized materials), selection of different grades of bitumen, types of bituminous surfaces, skid qualities, bituminous mix design, design aspects of paving concrete 5 Flexible Pavement Design 5.1 Airport pavement: Corps of Engineers (CBR) method, FAA Method, CDOT method, Asphalt Institute method 5.2 Highway pavement: Empirical methods using no soil strength criteria, Empirical method based on soil strength-CBR, Design procedure in Road Note 29(U.K.), IRC(1984) guidelines, AASHO method, Asphalt Institute method 6 Rigid pavement Design 6.1 Airport pavement: PCA methods, corps of engineers method, FAA method 6.2 Joints and reinforcement requirement 6.3 Highway pavement: current British procedure, IRC method 7 7.1 Drainage: importance, principles of good drainage, surface drainage, subsurface drainage, role of shoulders, Use of geotextiles 7.2 Culverts, Causeways; Importance, types, site selection 8 Evaluation and strengthening: Flexible and rigid pavement distresses, condition and evaluation surveys, present serviceability index, Roughness measurement, Benkalman Beam deflections, design of overlays, skid-resistance and its measurement 9 Economics of pavement types, basis for comparison, period of analysis, cost of initial construction, cost of maintenance, cost of vehicle operation, equivalencies in thickness. 10 Economic evaluation of highway scheme basic principles of economic evaluation, Net present value method, Benefit/cost ratio method, internal rate of return method

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

67/52

Recommended Books:

401290: Solid & Hazardous Waste Management

Detailed Syllabus
1 2 3 Solid Wastes – sources, types, composition, physical, chemical, and biological properties of solid wastes / sources and types of hazardous and infectious wastes in municipal solid wastes. Solid waste generation and collection, Handling, Storage, Processing, Transportation Disposal of Solid waste – materials separation and processing, thermal conversion, biological and chemical conversion, recycling of material in municipal solid wastes, Landfilling, Composting, gas generation, closure of landfills Hazardous Wastes – Fundamentals, fate, & Transport of contaminants, Toxicology origin, quantity and quality parameters. Biomedical / infectious Waste: Composition, Collection, Handling and Disposal Legal aspects of Hazardous Waste Management : Collection, Conveyance, Treatment and Disposal Hazardous Waste Management Practices : Environmental Audits, Pollution Prevention Treatment and Disposal Methods Physicochemical processes, Biological Methods, Stabilization & Solidification, Thermal Methods, Land Disposal Site Remediation : Site & Subsurface Characterization, Remedial Technologies

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

68/52

Recommended Books:

401180: Advanced Construction Engineering Detailed Syllabus: 1 Large and heavy engineering projects: characteristics and complexities, methods statement for major activities like excavation, concreting, steel fabrication and erection for projects like earthen dams, hydropower projects, nuclear power plant, refineries and other industrial projects etc. 2 Excavation for heavy engineering projects Excavation in various types of soils, selection of equipment, safety measures in excavation, drainage in excavation 3 Concrete construction for heavy engineering projects Selection of equipment for batching, mixing, transporting, placing and compacting for various types of jobs, safety measures during concreting, Special concretes and mortars: preplaced aggregate concrete, roller compacted concrete, grouting 4 Prefabricated construction Planning for pre-casting, selection of equipment for fabrication, transport and erection, quality measures, safety measures during erection 5 Steel construction Planning for field operations, selection of equipment and erection tools, tools and methods of welding, tools and methods of cutting and joining , bridge erection, quality measures, safety measures during fabrication and erection 6 Specific issues related to planning, site layouts, equipment selection and preproject activities for large size construction projects like earthen dams, concrete dams, thermal power stations, nuclear power stations, light houses, airports and ports, bridges 7 Information related to special equipments and their applications to Off-shore construction, underground utility construction 8 New materials and equipment for construction 9 Case studies of heavy construction projects

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

69/52

Reference Books: 1. Thomas baron, Erection of steel structures 2. Stubbs, handbook of heavy construction 3. Journals of Civil Engineering and Construction Engineering

401100: Space Geodesy Detailed Syllabus:1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Classical Definitions 1.2 Branches of Geodesy 1.3 Geodetic Boundary Value Problem 1.4 Geodetic Reference Surfaces 1.5 Temporal Variations 1.6 Historical Developments 1.7 Organisation of Geodesy 2 PHYSICAL (GRAVIMETRIC) GEODESY - THE GRAVITY FIELD OF THE EARTH 2.1 Applications 2.2 Gravity Field of Earth 2.3 Gravitational Force and Potential 2.4 Gradient, Divergence and Curl 2.5 Centrifugal Force 2.6 Gravity Acceleration 2.7 Level Surfaces 2.8 Height Systems 2.9 Normal Gravity Field 2.10 Gravity Anomaly 2.11 Temporal Variations 2.12 Gravity Measurements 2.13 Gravity Reference System 2.14 Reduction of Gravity to Geoid GEOMETRIC GEODESY 3.1 Basic Mathematical Formulae 3.2 Ellipsoid of Revolution 3.3 Co-ordinate Systems 3.4 Computation of Co-ordinates & Datum Transformations 3.5 Spherical Excess 3.6 Deflection of Vertical 3.7 Derivation of M and N

3

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

70/52

4

SPACE GEODESY & GEODETIC ASTRONOMY 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Reference Systems in Space Geodesy & Geodynamics 4.3 Theory of Satellite Geodesy SPACE GEODETIC TECHNIQUES 5.1 Doppler Satellite Surveying 5.2 NAVSTAR Global Positioning System (GPS) 5.3 Very Long Baseline Interferometry (VLBI) 5.4 Space VLBI 5.5 Satellite Laser Ranging (SLR) 5.6 Lunar Laser Ranging (LLR) 5.7 Satellite Altimetry 5.8 New Global Navigation Satellite Systems Developments and their impact on Geospatial Industry. Reference Books:A. General : 1. Geodesy, an Introduction; W. Torge, 2001 (3rd Revised Edition), de gruyter, Germany 2. Geodesy; G. Bomford, 1980 (4th Edition) 3. Geodesy, the Concept; P. Venacek & E. Krakiwsky, 1982 4. A Course in Higher Geodesy; Zakatov, 1953 5. Plane & Geodetic Surveying, vol.2; David Clarke, 1957 B. Gravimetric Geodesy : 1. Physical Geodesy; Heiskanen & Moritz, 1966 2. The Earth & it’s Gravity Field; Heiskanen & Meinesz, 1958 C. Geometric Geodesy : 1. Geometric Geodesy, Part I & II; Rapp, The Ohio State University, 1984 2. Course in Spheroidal Geodesy; Bagratuni, 1962 3. Jordan’s Handbook of Geodesy; Jordan - Eggert, 1962 4. Geodesy, Tobey W.M., 1928 C. Geodetic Astronomy : 1. Spherical & Practical Astronomy; Mueller, 1964 2. Textbook on Spherical Astronomy, W.M. Smart 3. Earth Rotation; Mueller & Moritz, 1986 D. Satellite Geodesy : 1. Introduction to Satellite Geodesy; Mueller, 1964 2. Satellite Doppler Positioning; Ashkenazi, Gough, Sykes, 1977 3. The Global Positioning System; Anderle, Royal Society of London 4. GPS - Theory & Practice; B. Hoffmann - Wellenhof, H. Lichtenegger, & J. Collins, 5th

5

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

71/52

Edition, 2001, Spriner Wien, New York E. Geodetic Journals : 1. Journal of Geodesy 2. The Australian Surveyor, Sydney 3. The Canadian Surveyor, Ottawa 4. Geodesy, Mapping & Photogrammetry, Washington 5. Marine Geodesy, New York 6. Survey Review, CASTLE, UK

401050: Advanced Foundation Engineering Detailed Syllabus: 1 Planning of subsurface investigation: Purpose and scope, Influence of soil conditions and type of foundation on exploratory programme, Subsurface soundings – static and dynamic methods, Planning of subsurface investigations, Type and sequence of operations, Lateral extent and depth of exploration, Interpretation of field and laboratory data 2Consolidation: Terzaghi’s theory of one-d consolidation – derivation of equation (solution in detail need not be covered), Estimation of Cc and Cv from laboratory tests, Estimation of Pc by various methods, Field consolidation curves, Quasi preconsolidation and secondary consolidation, practical applications 3Stress and strain behavior of soil: Triaxial test - drained and undrained behavior of sand and clays, Failure criteria in soils – only Mohr – Coulomb’s criteria, Ideal, plastic and real soil behavior, Shear strength of sand and clays 4 Estimation of stresses: Boussinesq’s theory, Westergard’s theory, Newmarks charts 5 Bearing capacity and settlement analysis of shallow foundations: Modes of failure, Failure criteria, Prandtl Reissner solutions, Buisman – Terzaghi solution, Assumptions in estimates of ultimate loads, Effect of shape, embedment of footing, eccentricity in loading, compressibility (including critical rigidity index), Choice of factor of safety, Settlement of foundations on sand – Schmertmann method, Foundations on collapsing and swelling soils, non-uniform soils, compressible soils and on rock, R.C.C. design of isolated and combined footings 6 Pile foundations: Use of load tests, Estimation of single pile capacity by static and dynamic methods, Group capacity, Separation of skin friction and end bearing capacity, Settlement of single and group of piles

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

72/52

7

Ground improvement: Improvement of deep cohesionless soils and cohesive soils (including stone columns), geological properties of reinforced soils, Instrumentation – mainly pore pressure gauges and settlement gauges and their applications. Recommended Books: 1. Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Volume I and II, V. N. S. Murthy, Saitech Publication 2. Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice, K. Terzaghi and R. B. Peck – Second Edition, Wiley International Edition 3. Principles of Foundation Engineering, Das B M, PWS Publications 4. Foundation Engineering Handbook, Winterkorn and Fang, Galgotia Publications

401060: Advanced Engineering Geology Detailed Syllabus: 1 Introduction Importance of geological studies in engineering investigations, precautions to avoid misleading conclusions likely to be drawn while interpreting drilling data with particular reference to RQD, case histories illustrating economies made possible by proper geological studies 2 Engineering geology of Deccan Trap basalts Factors affecting strength and water tightness, stability of cuts and ability to stand without support, significance of features like gas cavities, jointing, waeathering, hydrothermal alteration, volcanic bracias, techylytes, dykes, fractures, field structures of flows, stratigraphic sequence of flows etc. and their significance in civil engineering projects 3 Dams Strength and water tightness of Deccan trap rocks from foundation point of view, physical properties such as compressive strength, water absorption etc. of basalts, effect of weathering and hydrothermal alteration on engineering properties of rocks, deterioration of rock masses on exposure to atmosphere and suitable treatment for such rocks Investigations for determining the foundation treatment for adverse geological features, determination of foundation levels / cutoff levels for dams, groutability of rocks, correction of adverse feature by grouting, purpose of consolidated and curtain grouting, determining depth and zones of grouting, relation of zones of grouting with height of dams, foundation treatment for fractures having different manifestation, jointed racks, tachylytes and dykes Erosion of tail channel as a factor in selecting site for spllway, causes of rapid erosion from side spillways, geological conditions leading to erosion Case histories

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

73/52

4

5

6

7 8

Tunneling Methodologies of investigations for different types of tunnels for different purposes, location, spacing, angles and depths of drill holes for different types of tunnels, difference in behaviour of basalts because of jointing as exemplified by compact basalts and amygdaloidal basalts. Difficulties introduced by tachylytes, volcanic breccias, tuffs, intertrappean beds, fractures, dykes, hydrothermal alteration, flow contacts and unfavourable field characters. Computing structural discontinuities in rock masses, RQD, joint frequency index, RMR values, Q system, standup time. Selection and provision of protective measures such as guniting, rock bolting, shotcreting, steel fibre shotcreting, permanent steel supports, lagging, concreting and contact grouting above steel supports depending on geological conditions. Suitability of TBM for tunneling. Case histories Bridges Investigations for bridge foundations, computing SBC for bridge foundation based on nature and structure of rock, foundation settlements Case histories Geology of soil formation Residual and transported soils. Rock weathering conditions favourable for decomposition and disintegration, influence of climate on residual and transported soils in the deccan trap area. Nature of alluvium of deccan trap rivers and its engineering character. Effect of deposition of calcium carbonate. Scarcity of sand in the rivers in deccan trap area Geophysical investigations Seismic and electrical resistivity methods of explorations Construction material Deccan trap basalts as construction material. Use of compact basalts and amygdaloidal basalts as rubble for masonry, metal for concrete making Practicals: • Logging of drill core, preparation of lithologs and interpreting drilling data, calculation of RQD and joint frequency index. Preparing geological crosssections from drill hole data and using them for designing of civil engineering structures • Use of electrical resistivity method for determining depth of bed rock • Study of geological aspects of an engineering projects and writing a report based on studies carried out during visits to civil engineering projects Reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. PWD handbook, Engineering Geology, Government of Maharastra Textbook of Engineering Geology, R E Gupte, PVG Prakashan Geology of India, D H Wadia Geology of India and Burma, M E Krishnan

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

74/52

401280: Risk & Value Management Detailed Syllabus 1 Project Risks Definition, dynamic and static risk, uncertainty and risk, Risk and construction project time, money and technology, the people and the risks, processes and risks, risks and clients, consultants and contractors, risk allocation in contracting 2 Human Aspects Personnel attitude towards risk, perceptions and risks, individuals and groups , communication in risk management, concept of utility and risks. 3 Risk management system Risk identification, sources of risks, risk classification, types, impact and consequences of risk, risk analysis, Sensitivity analysis, breakeven analysis ,scenario analysis, risk response: retention, reduction, transfer, avoidance 4 Qualitative and quantitative methods in risk management Qualitative risk assessment , risk register, probability – Impact matrix, project appraisal, cost benefit analysis, Monte- Carlo technique, portfolio theory , Delphi method, influence diagrams , decision trees 5 Disasters: Natural and manmade, possible effects, Disaster recovery plan 6 Value Engineering : Value, Reasons of poor value in constructed facilities, habits, road blocks and attitudes 7 Value management: Value Engineering job plan, function analysis, purpose and implications of life cycle costs, Impact of energy on cost of constructed facilities, managing value engineering study 8 Disaster recovery plan: basic requirements, documenting disaster recovery plan, rehearsing the disaster recovery plan, example disaster recovery plan Text books: 1. N J Smith , Managing Risk in Construction Projects 2. R Flagnan R and G Norman, Risk management and Construction, Blackwell Scientific 3. Thompson P A and Perry J G, Engineering Construction Risks- A guide to Project risk analysis and risk management, Thomas Telford 4. L W Zimmerman and G D Hart, value Engineering, CBS Publishers.

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

75/52

401060: Advanced Design of R.C.C. Structures Detailed Syllabus:1 Design of Flat Slabs: Modes of failure of flat slabs. I.S code Provisions for the design of simple and continuous flat slabs. Special detailing requirements of flat slabs. 2 Large Span Roofs. Folded Plate Roofs - Whitney’s Method , Simpson’s Method and Design of single and multibay folded plate roofs, design based on IS codes of practice. Circular Cylindrical Shell Roofs: Beam theory of cylindrical shells, single and multiple bays with various edge conditions. Silos and Bunkers: Lateral Pressures in bunkers as per Rankine’s and Coulomb theories, Lateral pressures in silos as per Janssen’s and Airy’s theories , design considerations for square, rectangular and circular shapes of silos , design of hoppers and supporting structures of bins. I. S. Codal Provisions for design of Silos and Bunkers. Design OF Deep Foundations : Design considerations for piles and pile groups. Codal provisions for the design of pilecaps, Rectangular, circular and triangular pile caps for group of piles. Truss Analogy method for the analysis of pilecaps. Design Of R.C.C, Chimney: I.S. Codal provisions, principles of design under various types of loadings, behaviour of chimneys and stack structures under wind. Design of Cooling Towers: Principles of design of various types of cooling towers. I.S. Codal provisions for the design, analysis and design umder wind and earthquake loads.

3

4

5

6

7

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

76/52

RECOMMENDED BOOKS: V.Ramakrishna and P.D. Arthur, Ultimate Strength Design for structural Concrete, Wheeler Publishimg Co. Karve S.R. and Shah V.C., Design of Reinforced Cement Concrete Structures using Limit State Approach, Structures Publishers. G.S. Ramaswamy , Design and Construction of Concrete shell Roofs, McGraw Book Co. Jain O.P. and Jaikrishna , Plain and Reinforced Concrete , Vol. II, Nemchand and Bros. Markfintel Hand Book Of Concrete Design

401040: Structural Dynamics Detailed Syllabus: 1 Introduction: To structural dynamics, definition of basic problem in dynamics, static v/s dynamic loads, different types of dynamic loads. 2 Introduction to single degree of Freedom (SDOF) systems: Undamped vibration of SDOF system, natural frequency and period of vibration, damping in structures, viscous damping and coulomb damping, effect of damping on frequency of vibration and amplitude of vibration, logarithmic decrement, forced vibration, response to periodic loading, response to periodic loading, response to pulsating forces, dynamic load factors, response of structure subjected to general dynamic load, Dulhamel’s integral, numerical evaluation of dynamics response of SDOF systems, response of structure in frequency domain subjected to general periodic and nonperiodic/impulsive forces of short duration, use of complex frequency response function, use of Fourier Series for periodic forces, introduction to vibration isolation, distributed mass system idealized as SDOF system, use of Rayleigh’s method, response of SDOF system subjected to ground motion. 3 Generalized Single-Degree of Freedom System: Generalized properties: Assemblages of Rigid Bodies, Systems with distributed mass and elasticity, expressions for generalized system properties.

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

77/52

4

5

6

7

Lumped mass multidegree of freedom (MDOF) system: Coupled and uncoupled systems, direct determination of frequencies of vibration and mode shapes, orthogonality principle, vibration of MDOF systems with initial conditions, approximate methods of determination of natural frequencies of vibration and mode shapes-vector iteration methods. Energy methods and use of Lagrange’s method in writing equations of motions, decoupling of equations of motion, modal equation of motion, concept of modal mass and modal stiffness, forced vibration of MDOF system, modal analysis, application to multistorey rigid frames subjected to lateral dynamic loads. Structure with distributed mass system: Use of partial differential equation, free vibration analysis of single span beams with various boundary conditions, determination of frequencies of vibration and mode shapes, forced vibration of single span beams subjected to the action of specified dynamic loads. Random Vibrations: Random processes, stationary and ergodic processes, autocorrelation function, power spectral density function, relationship between power spectral and autocorrelation functions, power spectral density and autocorrelation functions for derivatives of processes, superposition of stationary processes, stationary Gaussian processes, stationary white noise, probability distribution for maxima and extreme values. Stochastic Response of Linear SDOF Systems: Transfer functions, relationship between input and output autocorrelation functions, relationship between input and output power spectral density functions, response characteristics for narrowband systems

B. Tech (Civil Engineering) Sem VII & VIII / 07 – 08

78/52

Experimental Work: Experimental determination of frequency of vibration and damping coefficient using simple displacement pickups. Recommended Text Books: 1. Structural Dynamics-An Introduction to Computer Methods, John Wiley & Sons. 2. Dynamics of Structures, Anil K. Chopra, Prentice Hall, India. 3. Dynamics of Structures, Cloguh & Penzein, Tata McGraw Hill. 4. Structural Dynamics, John M. Biggs, Tata McGraw Hill.

79

401170: Earthquake Engineering Detailed Syllabus: 1 Definitions of basic problems in dynamics, static v/s dynamic loads, different types of dynamic loads, undamped vibration of SDOF system, natural frequency and periods of vibration, damping in structure, response to periodic loads, response to general dynamic load, response of structure subject to gravitational motion, use of fourier series for periodic forces 2 Direct determination of frequencies and mode shapes, orthogonality principle, approximate methods for determination of frequencies and mode shapes, modal error of , forced vibration of MDOF system, modal analysis, applications to multistoried rigid frames subject to lateral dynamic loads 3 Seismological background: Seismicity of a region, earthquake faults and waves, structure of earth, plate tectonics, elastic-rebound theory of earthquake, Richter scale, measurement of ground motion, seismogram. 4 Characterization of graund motion: earthquake response spectra, factors influencing response spectra, design response spectra for elastic systems, peak ground acceleration, response spectrum shapes, deformation, pseudo-velocity, pseudo-acceleration response spectra, peak structural response from the response spectrum, response spectrum characteristics 5 Deterministic earthquake response: types of earthquake excitation, lumped SDOF elastic systems, translational excitation, , lumped MDOFelastic systems, translational excitation time history analysis, multistoried buildings with symmetric plans, multistoried buildings with unsymmetric plans, torsional response of symmetric plan building, distributed-parameter elastic systems, translational excitation, combining maximum modal responses using mean square response of a single mode, SRSS and CQCC combination of modal responses 6 I. S. code method of seismic analysis: seismic co-efficient method and its limitation, response spectrum method, I. S. code provision for seismic analysis of buildings and water towers. 7 Review of damages during past earthquakes and remedial measures, seismic design considerations, allowable ductility demand, ductility capacity, reinforcement detailing for members and joints

80

Recommended Books: 1. Structural Dynamics-An introduction to Computer Methods, Roy R. Craig. 2. Dynamics of Structures, Anil K. Chopra, Prentice Hall, India. 3. Dynamics of Structures, Cloguh & Penzien, Tata McGraw Hill 4. Structural Dynamics, John M. Biggs, Tata McGraw Hill 5. Fundamentals of earthquake engineering, N. M. Newmarks & E. Rosenblueth, Prentice Hall. 6. Earthquake Design Practice for building, D. Key, Thomas Telford, London, 1988. 7. Earthquake Engineering, R. L. Wiegel, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, London, 1989 8. Design of Multistoried Buildings for Earthquake Ground Motions, J. A. Blume, Portland Cement Association, Chicago, 1961 9. Proceedings on World Conference on Earthquake Engineering, 1956-2000. 10. I. S. codes No. 1893, 4326, 13920. (all latest codes)

401110: Terrain Data Analysis Detailed Syllabus:1 Terrain Attributes and Their Significance Topographic Relief, Slope and Aspects, Land use , Drainage- density, Pattern texture etc Geology, lithology and Structure Soil and their Properties 2 Sources of Terrain Data: Field Surveys, Topographic and other maps, Arial Photographs, satellite Images Digital Terrain Modeling and Analysis: Sources, Representation and interpolation Products of Digital Elevation Models( DEMs) and their use: Profiles, Sections, Contours, Slope, Shape and 3-D Views Applications of DEMs: Alignment Selection, Earth Works, Water resources potential, soil erosion potential Etc. Meteorological / Hydrological data: Rainfall, Humidity, Sunshine, Wind speed etc, Flow and sediment measurement etc Data Base Development : Principles, Programming and utilization

3 4 5

6

7

81

8

Compilation of Thematic maps: Visual Interpretation and Digital analysis, Digitisation and Rasterisation, information analysis systems: Principles and applications Reference Books: 1. Concept and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems - C.P. LO Albert K.W.Yeung, Edition 2002, Prentice – Hall of India, New Delhi. 2. Principles of Geographical Information Systems for Land Resources Assessment, Burrough P.A. , Edition 1986 Oxford science Publications, U.K.

401250: Pavement Management System Detailed Syllabus:1. Pavement distresses ●Distresses in flexible/rigid pavements causes & remedies. ●Visual Surface distress survey procedures and techniques. ●Serviceability Indicators for roads ●Measurement of Serviceability Indicators using various equipments like Bump Indicator, Skid tester, Distress surveys & Benkelman Beam ●Functional evaluation of pavements: Serviceability Concepts, Visual Rating, Pavement Serviceability Index, Roughness Measurements, Skid Resistance, Roughness, and Safety Aspects. Inventory System 2 Maintenance operations/alternatives ●Classification of maintenance operations, Routine, Periodic, Special. ●Common types of maintenance: Potholes, Cracked surface, Ruts & undulations, Resurfacing, Interface treatments, ●Bituminous Thin Surface Cources: Seal Coat, Surface Dressing, Premixed carpet, Mixed seal surfacing, Micro asphalt concrete (MAC) ●Bituminous Surface Cources: Semi-Dense Bituminous Concrete, Bituminous Concrete, and Bitumen Mastic. ●Road maintenance in high rainfall areas. Choice of materials. Modified bitumen & geo-fabrics. Maintenance alternatives including recycling Pavement Management/ Maintenance Management System Components of PMS and their Activities, Major Steps in Implementing PMS, Inputs, Design, Construction and Maintenance, Rehabilitation and Feedback Systems, Examples of HDM package, Highway Financing, Fund Generation, Evaluating Alternate Strategies and Decision Criteria. Prediction Deterioration Models(5) ●Factors that affect performance, ●Types of prediction models, ●Prediction deterioration model development, ● Method to assess the precision and accuracy of the developed model

3

4

82

5 6

Pavement Structural Design and Economic Analysis Emerging Technology in Pavement Management Systems References:

401210: Rehabilitation of Structures Detailed Syllabus 1 General Quality Assurance for concrete construction as Built Concrete property Strength, Permeability, Thermal Properties and Cracking. 2. Influence on Serviceability and Durability Effects due to climate, Temperature, Chemicals, Wear and Erosion, Design and Construction errors, Corrosion Mechanism, Effects of Cover thickness and Cracking, Methods of Corrosion protection, Corrosion Inhibitors, Corrosion Resistant Steels, Coatings, Cathodic Protection. 3. Maintenance and Repair Strategies Definitions: Maintenance, repair and rehabilitation, Facets of Maintenance, Importance of Maintenance, Preventive Measures on Various Aspects, Inspection, Assessment Procedure for Evaluating for Damaged Structures, Causes of Deterioration, Testing Techniques. 4. Materials for Repair Special Concretes and Mortar, Concrete chemicals, Special Elements for accelerated strength gain, Expansive cement, Polymer Concrete, Sulphur Infiltrated Concrete, Ferro Cement, Fibre Reinforced Concrete 5. Techniques for Repair Rust Eliminators and polymers coating for rebars during repair, foamed concrete, mortar and dry pack, vacuum concrete, Gunite and shotcrete, Epoxy Injection, Mortar Repairs for cracks, shoring and underpinning 6. Examples of Repair to Structures Repairs to overcome low member strength, deflection, cracking, chemical disruption, weathering wear, fire, leakage, marine exposure. 7 Engineered demolition techniques for dilapidated structures – case studies. Recommended Books: 1. “Concrete Structures – Materials, Maintenance and Repair”, Dennison Campbell, Allen and Harold Roper, Longman Scientific and Technical UK, 1991. 2. “Repair of Concrete Structures”, R.T. Allen and S.C. Edwadrs, Blakie and Sons, UK, 1987

83

References: 1. “Concrete Technology -Theory and Practice” M.S. Shetty, S.Chand and Company, New Delhi, 1992. 2. “Training Course Notes on Damage Assessment and Repair in Low Cost Housing”, “RHDC – NBO” Santhakumar A.R., Anna University, July 1992 3. “Learning from Failures – Deficiencies in Design”, R.N.Raikar, Construction and Service – R & D Centre (SDCPL), Raikar Bhavan, Mumbai, 1987 4. “Estate Management, Anna Institute of Management”, N. Palaniappan, Chennai, 1992 5. Metal Lecture Notes of Workshop on “Repairs and Rehabilitation of Structures”, Lakshmipathy, 29 – 30 October 1999

401220: Construction & Law Detailed Syllabus 1. Construction contracts Indian Contracts Act-Elements of Contracts-Types of contracts-FeaturesSuitability-Design of Contracts Documents-International contract documentstandard contract Document-Law of Torts 2. Tenders Prequalification-Bidding-Accepting-Evaluation of Tender from Technical, Contractual and commercial points of view – contract formation and interpretation – Potential contractual problems – World Bank Procedures and Guidelines 3. Legal Requirements Insurance Bonding – Laws Governing Sale, Purchase and use of Urban and Rural Land – Land Revenue codes – Tax Laws, Sales Tax, Excise and custom duties and their influence on construction costs – Legal requirements for planning – Property Law – Agency Law – Local Government Laws for Approval – Statutory regulations 4. Labour Regulations Social Security, Welfare Legislations, Laws Relating to Wages, Bonus and Industrial Disputes, Labour Administration, Insurance and safety regulations, Workmen’s Compensation Act, other Labour Laws Recommended Books: References • • • “Laws Relating to Building and Engineering Contracts in India” M. M. Triphati Pvt. Ltd., Bombay, Gajaria G.T. “Construction Contracts” Second Edition, McGraw Hill, Jimmie Hinze “Contracts and Legal Environment for Engineers and Architects” 6th Edition, McGraw Hill, Joseph T. Bockrath

84

401310: Industrial Waste Treatment Detailed Syllabus 1 General: liquid wastes from industries - their volumes and characteristics, effect of disposal into natural water courses, municipal sewers and on land, river standards and effluent standards 2 Sampling and analysis of industrial wastes, treatability study 3 Stream sanitation: effects of industrial wastes on self-purification of streams and fish life, statement and significance of the parameters of Streeter and Phelp's equation and BOD equations, deoxygenation and reaeration, oxygen sag 4 General treatment of industrial wastes: neutralization, equalization, segregation. Modification of conventional aerobic and anaerobic biological treatment methods. Dewatering and disposal of sludges - flotation, vacuum filtration, centrifugation, filter press Detailed considerations of wastes produced from following industries: processes normally followed, volume and effects of raw and treated effluents on streams, sewers and land, treatment methods, reuse-recovery i. Textiles: cotton, wool, rayons, ii. Pulp & paper - sulphate process iii. Electroplating iv. Dairy v. Sugar - sugarcane vi. Distilleries vii. Tanneries Provisions of various acts pertainng to industrial wastes / effluents, introduction to environmental impact assessment and environmental audit Term work: Term work shall include (in addition to other work assigned by instructor) a report comprising design criteria and flow sheet of the proposed treatment scheme including laboratory analysis for any one industrial waste. Demonstration of available software for design of effluent treatment plant is to be done. Recommended Books: 1. Waste Water Treatment, Rao & Datta, Oxfoord & IBH Publishing Co. 2. Industrial Water Pollution Control, W W Eckenfelder Jr, McGraw Hill 3. Industrial Water Pollution Management, E F Gurnham, John Wiley 4. Biological Waste Treatment, Eckenfelder & 'Connor, Pergamon Press 5. Theories and Practices of Industrial Waste Treatment, Addisoon Wesley 6. Pollution Control in Process Industries, S P Mahajan, Tata McGraw Hill 7. Indusrial Wastes, W Rudolfs, (Ed), L E C Publishers Inc 8. The Treatment of Industrial Wastes, E D Besselievre, McGraw Hill 9. Industrial Waste Disposal, R D Ross, (Ed), Reinhld Bok Corp

5

6

85

401320: Water Resource Engineering & Management

Detailed Syllabus:
1 2 3 Planning for water resources development, levels of planning and objectives, project formulation and evaluation. System analysis in planning, trends in water resources development Objectives and evaluation criteria: Technological objectives, social benefit-cost analysis, practical project appraisal, environmental - ecological objectives and evaluation criteria, Multi-objective analysis Hydrologic input analysis: surface sub-system (watershed) functional analysis, hydrograph and IUH, wash and Clark model, hydrologic forecasting computer simulation of basin. Soil subsystem analysis, ground water subsystem, stream flow generation Demand analysis: categories of demand, demand projections and policy formulation for various demands System elements and sub-system planning, water conveyance and distribution systems, reservoir systems, conjunctive surface and ground water development Multipurpose developmental issues: flood management, conjunctive flood mitigation and water resources enhancement, hydro-electric development and the power sector, inland water transportation, micro-level planning, erosion and sedimentation, water shed management, conjunctive use of surface water and ground water, rainwater harvesting Text books: 1. Arthur Mass et.el., Design of Water Resources Systems, Macmillan 2. L D James & R R Leo, Economics of Water Resources Planning, McGraw Hill 3. W A Hall & J A Dracup, Water Resources Systems Engineering, McGraw Hill 4. M C Chaturvedi, Water Resources Systems Planning and Management, Tata McGraw Hill 5. K N Duggal, J P Soni, Elements of water resources engineering, New Age India 6. Wurbs R A, James W P, Water resources engineering, Prentice Hall (India)

4 5 6

86

401130: Advanced Design of Steel Structures Detailed Syllabus: 1. Moment Resistant Beam End Connections: Design of moment resistant riveted and welded beam end connections. 2. Round tubular structural members: Properties of steel tubes. Design of tension and compression members, Design of welded connections. Design of flexural members. Analysis and design of tubular trusses including purlins and supports. 3. Elevated steel tanks and stacks : Loads acting on tanks including wind and earthquake. Design of circular tanks with conical bottom, supporting ring beam, staging for circular tanks. Design of rectangular steel tanks. Design of foundation for columns. 4. Gantry Grider : Loads acting on gantry girder. Analysis and design of gantry girder. 5. Lattice Tower : Loads acting on lattice towers. Analysis and design of lattice tower including welded or riveted connections for members. 6. Steel Chimney: Forces acting on chimney. Design of self supporting welded chimney including design of foundation. Note : Relevant provisions of IS codes shall be referred in design of aforesaid topics. Term Work: The term work shall consist of a design report and detailed drawings on three projects as indicated below: 1. Design of tubular trusses. 2. Design of elevated circular tank with conical bottom or rectangular steel tank. 3. Design of lattice tower or steel chimney. The drawings should be drawn with pencil only on minimum of A-1 (Imperial) size drawing sheets. Each student is to appear for at least one written test during the term. The graded answer paper of test shall be submitted as term-work. Recommended Books : 1. Design of steel structures, Negi L.S., Tata McGraw Hill. 2. Design of steel structures, Kazimi S.M. A. & Jindal R.S., Prentice Hall of India. 3. Design of steel structures, Krishnamachar B.S., & Ajitha Sinha D., 4. Design of steel structures, Arya and Ajmani, New Chand & Bros. 5. Design of steel structures, Vol I & II, Ramchandran. 6. Design of steel structures, Dayaratnam. 7. Design of steel structures, Breslar, Lin and Scalzi. 8. Design of steel structures, Mac. Ginely T. 9. Structural steel work, Reynolds T.J., Kent L.E. & Lazenby, D.W. 10. Relevant I.S. codes. 11. Comprehensive design of steel structures, Punma, A.K. Jain & Arun Kumar Jain, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd. 12. Design of steel structures, IC Sayal & Satinder Singh, Standard Publishers & Distributors.

87

401020: Advanced Structural Mechanics (Course Code – 401020) Detailed Syllabus: 1 Unsymmetrical Bending: Principal axes of inertia, flexural stresses due to bending in two planes, shear centre, bending of unsymmetrical section. 2 Bending of beams: With initial curvature loaded in their plane of curvature, application to the analysis of hooks, chain links etc. 3 Beams Curved in Plan: Loaded perpendicular to their own plane, simply supported and continuous curved beams. 4 Theories of Failure: Maximum stress theory, maximum shear stress theory, maximum strain theory, maximum strain energy density theory, maximum distortion energy theory, Von Mises & Tresca’s yield criteria. 5 Beams on Elastic Foundation: Beams of unlimited length, semi infinite length and beam of finite on elastic foundation 6 Classification Plate Theory: Naviers solution, finite difference method. Recommended Text Books: 1. Strength of Material Part I & II, Timoshenko. 2. Mechanics of Solids, Shames I. 3. Beams on Elastic Foundation, Hetency M. 4. Theory of Plates and Shells, Timoshenko. 5. Theory of Plates, Jagar, Macmillan. 6. Analysis of Plates, Theory of Problems, T.K. Vanadan & K. Bhaskars, Narosa Publishers

401190: Building Maintenance & Repairs Detailed Syllabus 1. Structures and their characteristics with reference to maintenance: Buildings, High Rise Residential Buildings, High Rise Commercial Buildings, Hospitals, Five Star Hotels, Educational Institution with Hostels, Roads – Concrete Asphalt, pavement maintenance management, Bridges, Flyovers, Pipeline – Water, Sewer, Heritage Structures, Tunnels 2. Maintenance Management: Terms, functions, Inspection

88

3.

Maintenance: Periodic one time, Long Span Routine, Cost Preventive Maintenance, Organization Structure Repairs & Rehabilitation of structures: estimating costs Use of Construction Materials: Chemicals used in Repairs, methods of application, costs Non Destructive Testing of Structures Equipments, procedures, drawing inferences, cost Case Studies of various types of structures Specifications and detailing for important items of work in restoration Investigation of structures and report on proposed restoration procedure Post occupancy evaluation References:

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

89

401200: Building Services

Detailed Syllabus:
1 Planning norms for various Services & Utilities, Township facilities; Schools, Hospitals, Housing, Commercial Complexes etc. Importance of building services, type of services required to keep the facility usable, planning of services, organization structures of services management. Role and administrative functions of supervisors. Fire fighting – Basis requirement for the work fighting system, various components of fire fighting system, maintenance required of the system, fire fighting in high rise buildings, commercial / industrial complexes, public buildings, check list for fire safety. Lifts/ Elevators, escalators: legal formalities for Elevators, various types of lifts, working mechanisms of lift and escalators. Indian standard codes for planning and installations of elevator, inspection and maintenance of lifts. Plumbing services: Basics of plumbing systems, Requirement of Plumbing works, Agency, Activity Flow Chart for plumbing work, Quality, checking of materials. Water supply system : Water supply distribution system in high rise builders and other complexes, pumps and pumping mechanism, operation and maintenance of fittings and fixtures of w/s. Do’s and Don’ts for water pipe networks. Sewerage Networks – norms for drainage and manholes; Septic tanks, Modern Sewage Treatment Plants. Electrical system – norms, Single phase and 3 – phased circuitry, planning for safety in design stage; Substations, H.T. cabling, L.T. cabling, Captive power; Firefighting – Statutory requirements, The Comprehensive Scheme, Permissions and procedures in the system. Landscaping and Horticulture: Building maintenance and management. Air conditioning and Heating: Flowcharts of air conditioning & heating. Centralized systems, monitoring working of the equipments, checklist of inspection, Performance testing. Waterproofing, Damp proofing & Termite proofing: Working procedure & stages of work of water proofing for bathrooms, Terrace, Sloping roof, Basements, tanks. Use of chemicals for water proofing treatment. Role of consultants. Damp proof course, Causes and precautions for Dampness.

2

3

4

5

6

7 8

9

90

Text Books: 1. “The A to Z of practical building construction and its management”, Mantri, Sandeep, Mantri Projects and Consultancy Pvt. Ltd., Pune, 2001 2. “Maintenance of Buildings” , Panchadhari, A.C., New Age International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2000 References: 1. BIS, National Building Code of India, 1983, Indian Standard institution, New Delhi, 1984 2. “Building Estate Maintenance Administration”, Milne, R.O., E & F. N. Spon, London. 3. “Dampness in building: Diagnosis, Treatment, Instrument” ,Oxley, T.A. & Gobert E.G., Butterworth, Heinmann Ltd., Oxford, 1994

401070: Rock Mechanics

Detailed Syllabus:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Sub-surface investigations in rocks and engineering characteristics or rocks masses Structural geology of rocks Classification of rocks Field and laboratory tests on rocks Stress - deformation of rocks Failure theories and shear strength of rocks Bearing capacity of rocks Stability of rock slopes Opening in rocks – lined and unlined tunnels, pressure tunnels and tunnels for other purposes Friction in rocks – time dependent properties of rock masses Rock bolting and grouting Practicals: Practicals shall include confined and unconfined compression test, point load test, Brazilian tensile test, permeability and modulus of elasticity of rocks Term Work: Term work shall include (in addition to other work assigned by instructor) a project report covering the selection of design parameters, design analysis including drawings if any on any aspect of rock mechanics included in the theoretical course above.

91

Recommended Books: 1. C. Jagger and N.G.W.Cock, Fundamentals of rock mechanics 2. Obert, Leon and and W.I.Duvall, Rock mechanics and design of structures in rock 3. I.W.Farmer, Engineering properties of rocks 4. K.G.Stag and O.C. Zienkiewicz, Rock mechanics in engineering practice 5. Jumikis, Rock mechanics Vol. I & II

401080: Soil Dynamics Detailed Syllabus 1 Vibration of elementary system, Degrees of freedom, Analysis of system with one degree of freedom, spring-mass system, harmonic vibration, uniform circular motion, natural frequency, free and forced vibrations with and without damping, types of damping. 2 Wave propogation in elstic rods, in an elastic infinite medium, and in semielastic half space, wave generated by surface footing. 3 Liquefaction of soils, criterion and factor affecting liquefaction of soil, laboratory and field studies on liquefaction, liquefaction studies in oscillatory simple shear, evaluation of liquefaction potentials, liquefaction of clay. 4 Principles of machine foundation, design criteria for satisfactory machine foundation, degrees of freedom of a block foundation analysis of vertical and sliding vibration of a machine foundation, mass of soil participating in vibration. 5 Vibration isolation and screening methods, improvement of distressed machine foundation. 6 Field and laboratory tests for evaluation of dynamic properties of soil under vertical vibration, coefficient of elastic uniform compression, coefficient of elastic uniform shear, spring constant damping modulus of elasticity typical values of soils. 7 IS code method of design and IS code provisions for dynamic analysis of buildings Term work: Term work shall include (in addition to other work assigned by instructor) a project report covering the selection of design parameters, design analysis including drawing if any aspect of soil dynamics included in the theoretical course above. Recommended Books: 1. Soil Dynamics by Shamsher Prakash 2. Fundamentals of Soil mechanics by B. M. Das, Elsevier 3. Dynamics of Bases and foundations by D. D. Brakan. McGraw-Hill Book Co. 4. Vibration Analysis and Foundation Dynamics by N. S. V. Rao, Wheeler Publishing.

92

401300: Air Pollution Detailed Syllabus: 1 Composition of dry ambient air. Properties of air. Functions of air, Definition of air. Definition of air pollution, Classification of air pollutants, Units for quantification of air pollution. History of air pollution, global and national, Scope of the problem - general, urban, rural and specific. 2 Sources of air pollution, Natural and man made. Major pollutants from different sources in Greater Bombay area (or any metropolis of Maharashtra), Emission factors Effects of air and noise pollution on human health , plants, animals, properties and visibility, indoor air pollutin and personal exposure to air pollution, Simple numerical problems based on COH, CoHb. Meteorological aspects of air pollution: Large scale wind circulation: geostrophic wind, gradient wind, cyclone, anticyclone, planetary boundary layer. Lapse rate, stability conditions, wind velocity profile, maximum mixing depth, Topographic effects. Plume patterns, Plume dispersion, Gaussian model for predicting concentration, downwind from a single source, diffusion coefficients, Turner's stability categories and graphs for dispersion estimates. Maximum ground level concentration, inversion effects, distance touching ground, Modification of Gaussian model to predict particulate dispersion. Plume rise, Modified Holland equation for small source. ASME equation for large source, Brigg's equations for buoyant plume rise, Brigg's equation for momentum plume rise. Methods and instruments for sampling and analysis of air for stack and ambient air monitoring. Government of India's air pollution laws. Indian standards - emission and air quality standards. Control Devices: Principles, operations and types, Simple hoods and ducts. Settling chambers, cyclones, electrostatic precipitators (ESP), filters, scrubbers, absorption towers and incinerators. Collection efficiencies for laminar and turbulent flows for settling chambers, particle cut size for cyclone, ESP. Concept of fractional and overall efficiencies. Design criteria for filters, scrubbers, absorption towers and incinerators.

3

4

5

6 7 8

93

Term Work: Term work shall include (in addition to other work assigned by instructor) a project report on at least one of the following: i. a stack monitoring report of at least one stack describing the methods of sampling and analysis used ii. a report on ambient air quality survey of a particular location. Recommended Books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Air Pollution, Henry C.Perkins, McGraw Hill Publication. Air Pollution: Part A - Analysis and Part B - Prevention and control, J.O. Ledbetter, Mace Dekker Inc., New York. Air pollution, Wark and Warner. Air pollution Control Guidebook for Management, Edited by A.T. Rossano, Environ Science Service Divn. ERA inc., USA Air Pollution Control Theory, Martin Crawford, McGraw Hill Publication Government of India's publication of laws related to air pollution, Maharashtra Pollution Control Board's (MPCB) Publication of standards. Indian Standards relevant to air pollution monitoring, definitions, standards etc. Air Pollution, Rao M N & Rao H V N, Tata McGraw Hill Pub., New Delhi. Air Pollution Vol.1, Tripathi A.K. (editor), Ashish Publication House, New Delhi. Air Pollution (biopollutants in air), Srivastava A.K., Ashish Publication House, New Delhi.

7. 8. 9.

Handbooks & Journals: 1. Environmental Engineers' Handbook Vol.II: Air Pollution, B.G.Liptak (ed.), Chilton Book Co., USA. 2. Air Pollution Handbook, P.L. Magill and others, McGraw Hill Publications, New York. 3. Industrial Air Pollution Handbook, A Parker, Tata McGraw Hill Publication. 4. Journal of Air & Waste Management Association (formerly known as Journal of Air Pollution Control Association) published from USA
5. Air Pollution, M N Rao, H V N Rao, Tata McGraw Hill

94

401260: EIA and Audit Detailed Syllabus 1 Environmental Impact Environmental inventories, Environmental assessment, evaluation. 2 Socioeconomic Impact Assessment Financing of capital expenditure, increase in user charges, sociological impacts. Role of EIA in Planning and Decision making Processes, Rapid EIA Environmental Impact Statement Environmental Auditing Post Audit reviews of EIA Case studies Term work: Term work shall include (in addition to other work assigned by instructor) a project report on at least one aspect of EIA. References: “Environmental Impact Analysis”, R.K. Jain, L.V. Urban, and G.S. Stacay ,Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, 1997

3 4 5 6

401270: Project Appraisal Detailed Syllabus 1 Projects, Capital expenditure: Importance and difficulties, Phase of capital budgeting, project development cycle, aspects of appraisal 2 3 4 5 Project Conception, scouting for ideas and alternatives, Preliminary screening Technical appraisal materials and other resources, choice of technology, selection of site, plans and works schedules Market analysis; demand, past, present and future, govt policies, demand forecasting techniques Project estimates, sources of financing, cost and financing, financial projections – balance sheet, sources and uses of funds, cash flow statement

95

6 7

Financial appraisal ; Urgency, payback period, accounting rate of return, net present value, internal rate of return Risk analysis; measures of risk, mathematical analysis of cash flows, sensitivity and scenario analysis, decision tree analysis, Social cost benefit analysis ;- rationale, different approaches. Term work: Term work shall include (in addition to other work assigned by instructor) a project report on at least one aspect of appraisal. Reference Books:• Prasanna Chandra, Project Preparation, appraisal, budgeting and implementation, Tata McGraw Hill. • OECD : Manual of Industrial Projects analysis in developing countries – methodology and case studies, OECD Paris • Planning Commission: Guidelines for the Preparation of Feasibility reports of Industrial Projects, Controller of Publications, New Delhi. • UNIDO ; Guidelines for Project evaluation , UN • UNIDO ; Guide Practical Project Appraisal, UN

401140: Prestressed Concrete

Detailed Syllabus
1 Introduction to prestressed concrete: basic concept and general principles, materials used and their properties, methods and techniques of prestressing, prestressing systems, loss of prestress Analysis of prestressed concrete sections: loading stages and computation of section properties, critical sections under working load for pretensioned and post tensioned members, load balancing method of analysis of prestressed concrete beams. Design of prestressed concrete sections for flexure: general philosophy of design, design approaches in working stress method and limit stress method, critical conditions for design, limit state of collapse in flexure, permissible stresses in concrete and steel, kern points, choice and efficiency of sections, cable profiles and layouts, cable zone, deflections of prestressed concrete members

2

3

96

4

Design for shear: calculation of principle tension under working load, permissible principle tension, shear strength calculation under limit state of collapse for both sections cracked and uncracked in flexure End zone stresses in prestressed concrete members: pretension transfer bond, transmission length, end block of post-tensioned members Design of prestressed concrete beams: design of simply supported pretensioned and post tensioned slabs and beams, introduction to application of prestressing to continuous beams, linear transformation and concordancy of cables Term work: Term work shall include (in addition to other work assigned by instructor) a project report on design of a post tensioned prestressed concrete beam with one imperial size drawing sheet on design. Recommended Books: 1. Plain and Reinforced Concrete Vol. I, Jain & Jaikrishna, Nemchand Brothers. 2. Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures, Dayaratnam P, Oxford & IBH. 3. Reinforced Concrete Structures, Sayal & Goel, Wheeler. 4. Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures, T. Y. Lin & N. H. Burns 5. Prestressed Concrete, R. H. Evans & E.W. Bennet. 6. Prestressed Concrete, N. Krishna Raju. 7. Modern Prestressed Concrete, James Libby, 8. Prestressed Concrete Analysis and Design, Antoine F. Naaman. 9. Prestressed Concrete, Vol. I, I. Y. Guyon

5 6

7

401150: Bridge Engineering

Detailed Syllabus
1 2 Introduction Types of bridges, economic spans, aesthetics, selection of suitable type of bridge Design loads and their distribution IRC loads, railway loading, analysis of deck slab and IRC loads, load distribution among longitudinal beams of a bridge Design of superstructures Design of balanced cantilever concrete bridge, introduction to design of RC arch bridge, prestressed concrete and box girder bridge. Design of lattice girder railway bridge

3

97

4

Design of substructure Different types of foundations, their choice and method of construction, design of well foundation, design of piers and abutments, various types of bearings and their design Construction methods Erection of bridge superstructures, cantilever construction Text books: Victor D J, essentials of Bridge Engineering, Oxford & IBH Raju N K, Design of Bridges, Oxford & IBH Ponnuswamy S, Bridge Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Raina V K, Concrete Bridge Practice, Tata McGraw Hill

5

401090: Digital Photogrammetry Detailed Syllabus 1 Image Acquisition: Mathematical model of the geometry of the aerial image – Radiometric effects of the atmosphere and the optics Colorimetry – Geometry of aerial and spatial pictures – Digital Images acquisition with airborne CCD Cameras – Radar images in Photogrammetry – Use of airborne laser ranging systems for the determination of DSM Use of Scanners for the digitization of aerial Pictures – Relations between radiometric and geometric Precision in digital imagery 2 Techniques for plotting Digital Images: Image Improvements – Compression of Digital images – Use of GPS in Photogrammetry – Automationzation of aerotriangulation – Digital Photogrammetric workstations Generation of Digital Terrain and Surface Models Overview of Digital Surface models – DSM Quality: Internal and External validation – 3D data acquisition from Visible images – from the digital surface model ( DSM) to the digital terrain model ( DTM) – DSM reconstruction – Extraction of characteristic lines of the relief – from the aerial image to orthophotography:- different levels of rectification – Production of digital orthophotographics – Problems relating to orthophotoraphies - production Metrological applications of Digital Photogrammetry Architectural Photogrammetry – Photogrammetric metrology

3

4

98

Reference Books: Digital Photogrammetry Michel Kasser and Yves Egles – Edtion 2002 , The Book Syndicate , Hyderabad.

401240: Traffic Planning and Design Detailed Syllabus: 1 Traffic Engineering and control 1.1 Review of various traffic surveys and traffic studies 1.2. Statistical methods for traffic engineering and their applications : Distributions, sampling theory and Significance testing, Regression and Correlation. 1.3. Intersection design: Principles, various available alternatives, rotary design, mini roundabout, traffic signals: types of traffic signals, advantages, determination of optimal cycle time and signal setting for an intersection with fixed time signals, co-ordination of signals, types, area traffic control, delay at signalized intersection. 1.4. Accident and road safety: accident causes, recording system, analysis and preventive measures, accident cost, alternative methodologies for calculation. 1.5. Traffic management: various measures and their scope, relative merits and demerits. 1.6. Highway capacity: passengers car units, level of service, factor affecting capacity and level of service, influence of mixed traffic. 1.7. 2 Transportation Planning and management 2.1 Introduction to the process of urban transport planning. 2.2 Travel demand forecasting: 2.2.1 Trip generation analysis, trip classification, multiple regression analysis, category analysis 2.2.2 Modal split analysis: introduction, earlier modal split models, modal split models with behavioral basis. 2.2.3 Trip distribution analysis: introduction, methods of trip distribution, uniform and average factor method, Fratar method, Furness method, The Gravity model, Intervening and competing, Linear programming approach to trip distribution. 2.2.4 Traffic Assignment: purpose of traffic assignment, traffic flow characteristics, Assignment techniques: All or nothing assignment, Multiple route assignment, Capacity restraint assignment, Diversion curves. Rout building algorithms. 2.3 Land-use transport models: Introduction, selection of Land-use transport models, The Lowry model, Grain – Lowry model, Applications of Lowry model.

99

3

Theory of traffic flow Scope, definitions and basic relationship, review of flow density speed studies, hydrodynamic analogies, Application of hydrodynamic analogy, Carfollowing theory and its application to traffic engineering, probabilistic description of traffic flow, an introduction to queuing theory as applied to traffic flow problems for study state conditions, simulation studies.
Transport Economics

4

Economic evaluation of highway schemes, need for economic evaluation, cost and benefits of transportation projects, basic principles of economic evaluation, Net present value method, benefit/cost ratio method, internal rate of return method. Vehicle operating costs, Value of travel time saving, Accident costs.
Public Transportation Mass transit systems: Bus and rail transit, characteristic capacities etc. Introduction to intelligent transportation systems, Introduction to advanced computational techniques for transportation planning. Term work: Term work shall include (in addition to other work assigned by instructor) a project report on One of the following: Traffic studies- data collection and analysis, proposals for new facilities or improvement to existing facility OR Project work based on transportation planning or economic analysis of a highway project. Recommended Text / Reference Books:

5 6

1. Traffic engineering and transport planning by L.R. Kadiyali, Khanna publishers Delhi 2. G.J. Pingnataro, Principles of Traffic Engineering, Mc Graw-Hill, 1970. 3. Wohl and Martin, Traffic System Analysis for Engineering and Planners, Mc Graw Hill, 1983. 4. B.G. Hutchinson, Introduction to Urban Transport Systems, Planning, McGraw-Hill, 1970. 5. Fair and Williams, Economics of Transportation, Harperand Brothers, Publishers, New York, 1959. 6. Winfrey, Robley, Economic Analysis for Highway ,International Textbook Co., Pennsylvania, USA, 1969. 7. Partha Chakraborty and Animesh das, Principles of Transportation Engineering, Prentice Hall (India) 8. Subhash Saxena, A Course in Traffic Engineering and Design, Dhanpat Rai & sons 9. Manual of Economic Evaluation of Highway PRojects in India (SP30), Indian Road Congress

1

401120: Geographic Information System

Detailed Syllabus
1
Basic concepts of GIS

Information systems, spatial and non-spatial information, geographical concepts and terminology, advantages of GIS, basic components of GIS, commercially available GIS hardware and software, organization of data in GIS
GIS data Field data, statistical data, Maps, aerial photographs, satellite data, points, lines and areas features, vector and raster data, advantages and disadvantages, data entry through keyboard, digitizers and scanners, digital data, preprocessing of data-rectification and registration, interpolation techniques Data management

2

3

DBMS, various data models, run-length encoding, quadtrees, data analysis-data layers, analysis of spatial and non-spatial data, data overlay and modeling, data processing: raster based and vector based, data presentation –hardcopy devices, softcopy devices
Remote sensing and GIS integration Principles of electromagnetic remote sensing, imaging characteristics of remote sensing systems, extraction of metric and descriptive information from remotely sensed images, integration of remote sensing and GIS Application of GIS

4

4

Map revision, land use, agriculture, forestry, archeology, municipal geology, water resources, soil erosion, land suitability analysis, change detection Term Work: Each student is to appear for at least one written test during the term. At least 10 assignments based on above syllabus and the graded answer paper for the term test shall be submitted as term work. Recommended Books: Lo C P, yeung A K W, Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems, Prentice Hall India. Kang-tsung Chang, Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, Tata mcGraw Hill

1

401340: SYSTEMS APPROACH TO CIVIL ENGINEERING

Detailed Syllabus: 1 Concept of systems approach: system, boundaries of system, goals and objectives, optimality, mathematical models, objective function and constraints, problem solving mechanism, types of problems, modeling / problem formulation, sub-optimization, solution techniques, sensitivity analysis
2

Basic concepts of probability and probability distributions, regression and curve fitting Decision theory: classification of decision situations, decision tables and decision tree, criteria for decision making under certain, uncertain and risk conditions
Index numbers: basic requirements of index numbers, constructing index numbers: using relatives, using aggregates

3

4 5

Linear programming: general nature of problem, graphical method of solution, simplex method, dual, sensitivity analysis Distribution models: transportation and assignment problems and their solutions Queuing models: various situations, queue discipline and customer behavior, single server model Simulation: general approach, Monte Carlo simulation, simple problems using hand calculations Reference Books: • • • • Benjamin J R & Cornell C A, “Probability, statistics and decisions for civil engineers”, Mc Graw Hill Jewell T K, “ A systems approach to civil engineering planning and design”, Harper & Row Ossenbruggen P J, “Systems analysis for civil engineers” Shrivastav, Shenoy & Sharma, “Quantitaive techniques for managerial decisions”, Wiley Eastern

6

7

8

1

BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY IN
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

1

Second Year B. Tech. ( Mechanical), Semester : III Course Name:- Applie Mechanics 1. Complex Variable Functions of complex variable. Continuity (only statement) derivability of a function Analytic, Regular function. Necessary conditions for the function to be analytic. (Statement of sufficient conditions) Cauchy Riemann equation in polar co-ordinates. Harmonic functions, orthogonal trajectories. Regionsand paths in the z-plane. Path/Line integral of a function. Inequalities conditions for the path integral to be independent of the path joining two points. Contour integral. Cauchy’s theorem for analytic function with continuous derivative. 2. Vector Calculus Scalar and vector point functions, Directional derivative, Level surfaces, gradient. Surface and volume integrals. Definitions of curl, divergence. Use of operator. Conservative, irrotational, Solenoidal fields, green’s theorem for plane regions and properties of line integral in a place. Statements of Stoke’s theorem, Gauss’s divergence theorem, related identities, deductions. 3. Partial different equations Partial differential equation governing Transverse Vibrations of an elastic string, its solution using Fourier Series, Heat Equation, Steady-state configuration for heat flow and Laplace equation in two and three dimensions. 4. Laplace Transforms Function of bounded variation (statement only) Laplace transforms of 1, tn, eat, sin (at), Sinh (at), cosh (at), shifting properties Expressions (without proofs) for unit step functions and their Laplace transform. Laplace transform of periodic functions. Application to solve initial and boundary value problems involving ordinary differential equations with one dependent variable. 5. Statistics Frequency distribution, Measures of central tendency, Mean, Median and Mode, Measures of variability, Range, Percentiles, Variance, Standard Deviation, Skewness, Moments, Discrete random variables and their probability distributions, Binomial and Poisson’s distributions, continuous random variables, Normal distribution, Properties of Normal distribution, coefficient of Correlation, Lines of Regression – Rank Correlation, Test of significance. Theory of Probability and reliability

1

II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Elements of Applied Mathematics Vol. I / Vol. II: P.N. Wartikar & J.N. Wartikar Engineering Mathematics Vol. II: S.S.Sastry Prentice Hall of India Second Edition: 1994 2. Matrices: Vasistha, 3. Complex Variable: Churchil, 4. Matrices: Shanti Narayan, 5. Theory of function of complex variables: Shanti Narayan, 6. Laplace transforms: (Schaum’s outline series), 7. Basic Mathematics for College students by Allen Tussy – Thomson Learning, REFERENCES, College Mathematics through Applications – John C Peterson William J. Wagner Stephen S Willoughby – Delmar Publications. III TERM WORK, Assignments, IV MID SEMESTER TEST

1

Cousrse Name:-Steength Of Material 1. Simple Stress and Strain Stress, strain modulus of elasticity, modulus of rigidity, bulk modulus, yield stress, ultimate stress, factor of safety, shear stress, Poisson ratio, bars of varying sections, composite sections, temp stress. 2. S. F. and B. M. in Beams Axial force, shear force and bending moment diagrams for statically determinate beams including beams with internal hinges for different types of loading, relationship between rate of loading, shear force and bending moment. 3. Simple Theory of Bending Flexure formula for straight beams, Moment of inertia, Product of inertia and Polar moment of inertial of plane areas, principal axes of inertia, moments of inertia about principal axes, transfer theorem, simple problems involving application of flexure formula, section modulus, moment of resistance of a section, flexural stresses in beams subjected to oblique bending, bending of unsymmetrical sections, beams of uniform strength, leaf springs. 4. Shear Stress in Beams Distribution of shear stress across plane sections used commonly for structural purposes, shear connectors, shear stresses and flow in beams of thin walled open cross sections, shear centre of thin walled sections such as angle, Tee channel and I – section. 5. Simple Theory of Torsion Torsion of circular shafts – solid and hollow, stresses in shaft when transmitting power, close-coiled helical springs under axial load. 6. Bending moment combined with Torsion and Axial Loads Application to members subjected to eccentric loads, core of a section, problems on chimneys, shaft etc.

1

7. Principal Stresses General equations for transformation of stress, principal planes and principal stresses, maximum shear stress, determination using Mohr’s circle, maximum principal and maximum shear stress theory of failure. 8. Deflection of Beams Deflection of cantilevers, simply supported and overhanging beams using double integration and Macaulay’s methods for different types of loadings. 9. Strain Energy Strain energy due to axial force and bending moment, stresses in axial members and simple beams due to impact loading. 10. Stress and strain in thin Cylinders and Sphere subjected to internal pressure 11. Bonding of curved bars Flexural stresses in beams with initial curvature. Application to crane hooks, chain links and rings. 12. Theories of failure Maximum principal stress theory, Maximum shear stress theory, strain theory, maximum distortion strain energy theory. II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. 3. 4. Mechanics of Materials Theory of Elastic Stability Engineering Mechanics Mechanics of Structure - E P Popov, Prentice Hall of India - Timoshenko & Gere, Tata McGraw Hill - Timoshenko & Young, Tata McGraw Hill - S B Junnakar, Charotar Publishers

REFERENCES 1. Mechanics of Materials 2. Mechanics of Materials 3. Strength of Materials III TERM WORK • Assignments • Laboratory Experiments IV MID SEMESTER TEST - James Gere – Thomson Learning - Ferdinand P Beer, E Russell - S Ramamarutham

1

Course Name :- Machine Drawing 1. Solid Geometry Intersection of surfaces and solids: Intersection of prisms or cylinders with prism, cylinder or cone, both solids in simple position. Primary Auxillary views, projections of simple machine parts. 2. Machine Drawing Free hand sketches of Machine Elements Nuts, bolts studs washers with different types, locking arrangements of nuts. Conventional representation of threaded parts in external and internal views with sections and assembly. Types of keys – Parallel, sunk, woodcut, saddle feather etc. Types of bearings: Simple, Solid, bushed, I. S. conventional representation of ball and roller bearings. Pipe Joints: Different types of pipe fittings like sockets, nipples, plugs, bends, Tees, elbows, crosses etc. Power transmission elements – Flat belt, V belt, ? chain, duplex chain, ropes etc. sprockets, types of pulleys like flat, V etc. Oil seals, O rings, circlips etc. 3. Detailed and Assembly Drawings Types of bearings II: Plummer block, foot step bearings etc. Pipe Joints II: Flanged joints, spigot and socket joint, gland and stuffing box, expansion joint etc. Power transmission elements II: Fast and loose pulleys, built up pulley Types of Couplings: Simple, mutt flanged, protected, Oldham, universal. Types of Valves: Gate Valve, stop valve, non return valve, needle valve. IC Engine parts: Piston, connecting rod, crankshaft etc. Types of Pumps: Centrifugal and gear pumps Mechanism for Types of Gear Boxes: worm and worm reduction gear box, helical gearbox, synchromesh gearbox etc. Clutches and Brakes: Single and multiple clutch, internal shoe brake, rope brake etc. Jigs and fixtures 4. Limits, Fits and Tolerances Dimensioning with tolerances indicating various types of fits, as applicable to assembly and detailed drawing covered above. II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Machine Drawing by N.D.Bhatt 2. A text book on Machine drawing by Laxminarayan and M.L. Mathur. ( Jain Brothers, New Delhi)

1

3. Machine Drawing by Kamat and Rao. 4. Machine drawing by M.B.Shah 5. A text book of machine drawing by R.B.Gupta ( Satya Prakasham Tech India Publictions) REFERENCE BOOKS Machine drawing by Parkinson. III TERM WORK Assignments IV MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title :-Production Process I 1. Ferrous, Non-ferrous metals and Alloys Composition, properties testing and use - Destructive and Non-destructive tests Radiographic, Ultrasonic, Liquid Dye Penetrant and Magnetic Particle Test. 2. Heat Treatment of Metals and Alloys Annealing, Normalizing, Hardening, Nitriding and Carburizing. 3. Foundry Pattern Materials, Pattern Making, Types of Patterns, Cores, Core Making, Core Boxes, Molding Tools and Equipments; Molding Sand – types, contents, additives, preparation and testing. Molding Methods. Molding problems. Furnaces – types, Construction and Operation, practices. Die – casting methods. Solidification of castings. Casting defects – Inspection and testing, Modernization of foundries. 4. Mechanical Working of Metal Rolling, Forging, Extrusion, Wire Drawing, Spinning Forming and Powder Metallurgy. 5. Molding of Plastics Engineering Plastics – types, properties and uses. Molding Processes – Injection, Blow, Transfer, Extrusion, Calendaring and Thermoforming. 6. Metal Surface Treatments Electroplating, Galvanizing, Anodizing, Metal spraying, Plastic and Ceramic coating. 7. Welding & Joining Welded Joints – types, Position, Edge preparation, IS-Representation of welds. Welding processes – Gas, Arc, Inert Gas, Resistance, Thermit, Solid state, Electron Beam, Laser Beam, welding equipment, welding defects – inspection and testing. Weld ability. Soldering, Brazing, Riveting, Fastening and Adhesive Bonding.

1

8. Lathes Types, specifications, construction, working, operations, tools, attachments and accessories. Capstan and Turret Lathes. Fundamentals of C. N. C. Lathes. 9. Shaping and Planning Machines Parts, tools, accessories, construction, working and operations. 10. Drilling Machines Types, parts, tools, accessories, construction, working and operations. 11. Milling Machines Types – Horizontal, Vertical, Universal Tools, Accessories and operations. Simple and Compound Indexing. 12. Boring Machines Horizontal, Vertical and Jig Boring Machines – Parts, tools and operations. 13. Grinding Machines Parts, Types, Operations, Grinding Wheel – Specifications, selection, truing and dressing. Lapping, Honing and Super finishing. II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. 3. 4. Elements of workshop Technology (Vol I & II) by Hajra & Choudhary. Production Technology (Vol I & II) by Lal & Prakash – Dhanpatrai Publications. Text Book of Production Technology by Jain & Gupta – Khanna Publishers. Text Book of Production Technology by P. C. Sharma - S. Chand Publishers.

REFERENCES 1. Manufacturing Processes and Materials for Engineers by Doyle and others. 2. Manufacturing Processes by Roy A. Lindenburg. 3. Manufacturing Technology by P. N. Rao – TMG. III TERM WORK • Assignments • Industry visit: Report on industrial visit to factory and machine shop IV MID SEMESTER TEST

1

Course Title:- Electrical Machines 1. Thyristors and Their Applications Introduction Applications Symbolic Representations Specifications Thyristor Ratings Thyristor Construction Principle of Operating of an SCR Two – Transistor Analogy of SCR DIAC TRIAC UnInjunction Transistor (UJT) Solid State Switching Circuits using Thyristors 2. Inverters, Choppers, Dual Converters and Cycloconverters Controlled single phase and three phase rectifiers Inverters Choppers Dual Converters 3. Solid State Control of DC. and AC. motors Introduction Advantage of Electronic Control of Devices D.C. motor speed control Speed Control of DC. shunt motors using Thyristor-technology Over-voltage Protection of DC. motors Overload Protection of DC. motors An AC. motor control Speed control of Types of motors Principal of stepper motor and control II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. 3. 4. S. K. Bhattacharya / S Chatterjee, Tata McGraw Hill :Publishing Co. Ltd. Industrial Electronics, by James Humphries, Leslie Sheets, 4e – Delmar Industrial Electronics, by Biswanath Paul PHI Industrial Electronics for Technicians – by J. A. Sam Wilson Joseph Rissi, Prompt Publications.

III TERM WORK • • Assignments . Laboratory experiments

1

IV MID SEMESTER TEST Course Title:- Thermodynamics I 1. Thermodynamic Concepts System, surrounding, state, path, property, Reversible and irreversible process, cycle thermodynamic work, heat, temperature, thermal equilibrium, zeroth law of thermodynamics. 2. First Law of Thermodynamics Statement. First law applied to cyclic and non cyclic process, internal energy, Application to non flow processes viz. constant volume, constant pressure, and constant temperature, adiabatic and polytrophic processes. Heat and work calculations. Application of first law to open systems, flow work, steady flow energy equation, work done in steady flow processes in terms of pressure and volume. Throttling process. Joule’s porous plug experiment. Joule – Thomson coefficient, SFEE applied to boiler, nozzle, condenser compressor, turbine, etc. 3. Air Standard Cycles Thermodynamics of Otto, Diesel, semi-Diesel and Brayton cycle. Comprision and representation on P-V, T-S diagram. 4. Second Law of Thermodynamics Limitations of first law of thermodynamics. Heat engine, thermal efficiency, reversed heat engine, coefficient of performance, Kelvin – Planck and Clausius statements and their equivalence, Carnot cycle, Carnot’s theorem, Thermodynamic temperature scale. Entropy – Clausius inequality, Entropy changes for an ideal gas during reversible processes. Entropy of isolated system in real processes. Principle of increases of entropy. 5. Availability Available and unavailable energy. AE when heat is withdrawn from a finite reservoir and when heat is withdrawn from infinite reservoir. Availability of closed system and steady flow system, irreversibility. 6. Properties of Steam Dryness fraction, enthalpy, internal energy and entropy, Steam table and Miller chart, First law applied to steam processes and representation on P – V and T – S diagrams. Carnot and Rankine cycle, Modified Rankine cycle (Reheat , Regeneration). 7. Thermodynamics of ‘One Dimensional’ Fluid Flow Propagation of sound waves through compressible fluids, Sonic velocity and Mach number, Application of continuity, momentum and energy equations for steady state conditions. Steady flow energy equation applied to nozzles. Isentropic flow through ducts of varying cross sectional area. Effect of varying back pressure on nozzle performance. Area ratio. Critical pressure ratio. Normal shock, basic

1

equations of normal shock, change of properties across normal shock. Rayleigh and Fanno lines. Adiabatic flow through constant area duct with friction. II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Engineering Thermodynamics - M.A. Saad, McGraw Hill Engineering Thermodynamics – R. K. Rajput , Laxmi Publications Fundamentals of Compressible Fluid Flow – S. M. Yahya Thermodynamics – J. P. Holman, McGraw Hill Engineering Thermodynamics – P. K. Nag – McGraw Hill

REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Engineering Thermodynamics M. Achutan, PHI Thermal Engineering - Ballaney Engineering Thermodynamics – J. B. Jones & Dugan Engineering Thermodynamics Through Examples – Y. V. C. Rao Theory and Problems in Thermodynamics - Y. V. C. Rao A course in Thermal Engineering – Domkundwar Thermodynamics & Heat Engines – R. P. Yadav Vol. II.

III TERM WORK Assignments IV MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title:- Data Structure Introduction to C or C++ Basic language, Functions ( recursive and non recursive ) User defined data, Pointers, Dynamic memory allocation, Files, Macros. 1. Lists Abstract data types Stacks: ADT, Representation, Operations, circular and priority queues, Double ended queue, Examples, Applications. Other lists and their implementations. 2. Linked Lists ADT Dynamic Representation: Insertion and deletion of nodes, Linked stacks and q queues Linked list as data structure, operations on the link list Comparison of dynamic and array representation

1

3. Sparse Matrix: Sparse matrix representation Sparse matrix in doubly link list Matrix operations on sparse matrices keeping them in doubly link list 4. Binary Tree Binary tree operations and applications Binary tree traversal Application of trees Expression trees, conversion of inorder expression to post / pre order expression Evaluation of expression II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Y.Langsam, M.J.Augustein and A.M.Tannenbaum, “Data Structures Using C and C++”, Prientice Hall India, Second Edition. 2. G.Brassard and P.Brately, “Fundamentals of Algorithmics” Prientice Hall India. 3. R.F.Gilberg, “Data Structure: A Pseudocode Approach with C “ , Thomson Learning. REFERENCES 1. Aho, J.E.Hopcroft and J.D.Ullaman, “ Data Structures and Algorithms”, Addision Wesley, Low Price Edition. 2. M.A.Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++, Addision Wesley Longman, International Student Edition. 3. R.Kruse, “ Data Structures and Program Design in C”, Prentice Hall India. 4. Tremble and Sorenson, “ Data Structures and Algorithms”, Tata McGraw – Hill. III TERM WORK • Assignments

IV MID SEMESTER TEST

1

Semester IV Course Title :-Applied Mechanics II 1. Fourier Series and Integrals Orthogonal and orthonormal functions Expression for a function in a series of orthogonal functions. Since and cosine functions and their orthogonally properties. Fourier series, Dirichlet’s theorem (only statement). Periodic function with Even and odd functions. Half range sine and cosine series. Complex form of Fourier series introduction to Fourier Integral. 2. Matrices Type of matrices. Adjoint of a matrix. Inverse of a matrix. Elementary transformation rank of a matrix. Linear dependent and independent of rows and columns of a matrix over a real field. Reduction to a normal form. Partition of matrices. System of homogeneous and non homogeneous equations their consistency and solution. Brief revision of vectors over real field inner product, Norm, Linear independence, orthogonality. Characteristic values and vectors, and their properties for Hermitian and real symmetric matrices. Characteristic polynomial. 3. Numerical Methods Solution of simultaneous equations Guass sidel and Gauss elimination methods Solution of differential equations Solution of Partial Differential equations Runga Kutta 4th order and Eulers modified rule. Numerical Interpolation Neuton’s Forward and Backward interpolation methods Lagrange’s Interpolation formula Numerical Integration Simpsons Rulee, Trapezoidal rule, Gauss quadrature Double Integration techniques Solution of lenear and transcendental equations Neuton Rapson method Bisection method Secant method Numerical differentiation Neuton’s Forward and Backward difference formula (No derivation is expected, Only application level study is required)

1

II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A text book of Applied Mathematics Vol. I - P. N. Wartikar A text book of Applied Mathematics Vol. II – J. N. Wartikar A text book of Vector Calculus – Shanti Narayan, J. N. Kapur Vector Analysis – Murray R. Spiege, Schaum’s Series Matrices – Shanti Narayan Theory of functions of complex Variables – Shanti Narayan

REFERENCES 1. Applied Numerical Methods For Engineers Using Matlab & C – Robert J Schilling, Sandra L Harris 2. Numerical Analysis – Richard L Burden J Douglas Faires 3. Numerical Methods for Engineers with programming and Software Applications – Steven C. Chapra Raymond P. Canale III TERM WORK Assignments IV MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title- Kinematics of machinery 1. Basic Kinematics Structure, Machine, Link and its types Kinematics pair: Lower pair and higher pair. Form closed pair and force closed pair. Based on relative motion permitted such as revolute, prismatic, cam, helical, globular Kinematic chain and mechanism Grublers criteria for movability of chains and mechanisms as Locked, constrained, Unconstrained based on grubler’s criteria. Limitations of grubler’s criteria. 2. Inversion of chain Study of various mechanisms derived from inversions of following chains with regard to motion of links of mechanism, motion modification, quality of motion transmission (uniform, non uniform, SHM, non – SHM), limiting positions, dead positions, quick return property, applications. Four bar chain (Grashoffian, non Grashoffian), Single slider crank chain, Double slide crank chain. 3. Special Mechanisms Straight line generating mechanisms

1

Exact straight line generating mechanisms – Mechanism – Peueillier, Hart Approximate straight line generating mechanisms – Watts, Roberts, Evans, Tchiebicheff. Offset slider crank mechanism Pantograph Hook joint single and double Steering gear mechanisms – Ackerman, Devis. 4. Velocity Analysis of mechanisms Velocity analysis by instantaneous centre of rotation method (Graphical approach) Velocity analysis by relative velocity method (Graphical Approach). Analysis is extended to find rubbing velocities at joints, mechanical advantage (graphical approach), ( mechanisms upto 6 links) 5. Velocity and Acceleration analysis of Mechanism. Velocity Acceleration analysis by relative method (mechanism upto 6 links) including pairs involving coriolis acceleration (Graphical approach) Velocity acceleration analysis of mechanisms (upto 4 links) by complex variable method (Analytical approach) Velocity acceleration analysis of mechanism (upto 6 links) by Equivalent Methods (Graphical or analytical approach) 6. Flexible connector mechanisms Belt – Types of belts, velocity ratio, slip, length of belt Chains – Types of chains, chordal action, variation in velocity ratio, chain length 7. Spur gear mechanism Law of gearing Conjugate profile and its graphic construction Involute and cycloid gear tooth profile. Construction of involute profile Path of contact arc of contact, contact ratio for involute and cycloid tooth profile. Interference in involute gears. Critical Numbers of teeth for interference free motion. Methods to control interference in involute gears. 8. Cam Mechanism Cams and its Classification. Followers and its Classification Motion analysis and plotting of displacement – time, velocity time, acceleration time, jerk-time graphs for uniform velocity, UARM, SHM and Cycloid motions (combined motions during one stroke excluded) Motion analysis of simple cams – R-R cam, D-R-R and D-R-D-R cam operating radial translating follower Pressure angle and methods to control pressure angle II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES

1

TEXT BOOKS 1. Theory of Mechanisms and Machines by A. Ghosh and A. Kumar Mallik 2. Theory of Machines and Mechanism by Shigley 3. Theory of Machines – Ballaney REFERENCES 1. Kinematics of Machines by R. T. Hinckle - Prentice Hall Inc. 2. Kinematics by V. M. Fairs - McGraw Hill 3. Mechanism Design: Analysis and Synthesis Vol. I - A. Erdman and G. N. Sander – Prentice Hall 4. Kinematics and Dynamics of Planer Mechanisms - Jeremy Hirsihham – McGraw Hill. III TERM WORK Assignments IV MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title:- Fluid Machinery 1. Fluid Definition and Properties Definition of a fluid, concept of continuum, Newton’s law of viscosity, Types of fluids Newtonian and Non – Newtonian, Ideal and Real fluids. 2. Fluid Statics Definition of body forces and surface forces, static pressure, Pascal’s law, Derivation of basic hydrostatic equation, Forces on surfaces due to hydrostatic pressure, Buoyancy and Archimedes’ principle. 3. Fluid Kinematics Understanding of Eulerian and Lagrangian approach to solutions, Velocity and acceleration in an Eulerian flow field, Definition of streamlines, path lines and streak lines. Definition of steady / unsteady, uniform / non-uniform, one two and three dimensional flows. Understanding of differential and integral methods of analysis. Definition of a control volume and control surface , types of control volumes. 4. Fluid Dynamics Equations for the control volume Integral equations for the control volume; Reynold’s transport theorem with proof., application to mass, energy and momentum transport (linear and angular). Differential equations of the control volume: Conservation of mass (two and three dimensional), Navier – Stokes equations (without proof) for rectangular and cylindrical co-ordinates.

1

Exact solutions of Navier – Stokes equations: viscous laminar flow of a fluid through a pipe, viscous laminar flow of a fluid through planes ( both stationary, one plane moving with a uniform velocity). Euler’s equations in two, three dimensions; Bernoulli’s equation. Ideal Fluid Flow Theory Definition of stream functions and velocity potential functions, rotational and irrotational flows in two dimensions, definition of source, sink, vortex, circulation. Combination of simple flow patterns – eg. Flow past Rankine full Doublet, body and Rankine half body,

flow past cylinder with and without circulation, Kutta – Joukowsky law.

Real Fluid Flows Definition of Reynold’s number, Turbulence and theories of turbulence – Prandtl’s mixing length theory, Eddy viscosity theory, k – epsilon theory. Velocity profiles for turbulent flows: one – seventh power law, universal velocity profile, velocity profiles for smooth and rough pipes, Darcy’s equation foe head lost in pipe flows, pipes in series and parallel, hydraulic gradient line, Moody’s diagram. Boundary Layer Flows Concept of boundary layer and definition of boundary layer thickness, displacement thickness, momentum thickness, energy thickness. Growth of boundary layer, laminar and turbulent boundary layers, laminar sub-layer, VonKarman momentum integral equations for the boundary layers, analysis of laminar and turbulent boundary layers, calculation of drag., separation of the boundary layer and methods to control it, concept of streamlined and bluff bodies. Aerofoil theory: definition of an aerofoil , lift and drag on aerofoils, induced drag. Flow Meters: Classification of flow meters, Head type flow meters: Orifice, Venturi, Nozzle, Pitot tube; Variable area flow meters: Rotameter; Mechanical flow meters Positive displacement vane and impeller type meters, Turbine type flow meters, Electromagnetic flow meter and Hot wire Anemometer 4.6 Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: Basic concepts, finite volume method of analysis, solutions to simple flow problems. II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS

1

1. 2. 3. 4.

Fluid Mechanics – Streeter, Wylie Fluid Mechanics – B. M. Massey Fluid Mechanics – F. M. White Fluid Mechanics – K. L. Kumar REFERENCES

1. 2. 3. 4.

Advanced Fluid Dynamics – Muralidhar and Biswas Applied Hydrodynamics – Valentine Fluid Mechanics – Douglas, Et Al. Computational Fluid Dynamics – Anderson.

III TERM WORK • • Assignment Laboratory Experiments

IV MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title:- Production Process II 1. Press Tool Design Press – Types, classifications, operations, specifications and selection. Press tool components. Types of Dies – Piercing, Blanking, Progressive, Compound and Combination. Cutting Action in shearing of metals in Press Tool operations. Effect of clearance. Cutting force calculations. Methods of reducing cutting forces. Blanking and Piercing Die Design. Design principles of Bending Dies. 2. Jigs and Fixtures Parts, construction, types and operations on Jigs and Fixtures. Principles of Jigs and Fixture design location, clamping, clearance, stability and handling. Design of Jigs and Fixture of simple components. 3. Metal Cutting Theory Features of commonly used machining processes and machining parameters. Cutting Tools types, materials, properties and tool geometry. Mechanism of chip formation, orthogonal and oblique cutting, chip flow direction in turning, shaping, drilling and milling with force analysis. Measurement of cutting forces, dynamometer power calculation and efficiency of machine tools. 4. Tool Wear, tool life and Machinability Tool wear – types, mechanisms and measurement. Tool life equations. Effect of machining parameters on tool life. Machinability criteria and its measurement. Coolants – functions, types, selection, effect on cutting forces, tool life and surface finish. 5. Economics of Machining

1

Costs associated with machining operations. Calculation of optimum cutting for minimum cost and maximum production rate. 6. Gear Manufacturing Gear materials and methods of gear manufacture. Form and generation methods of gear cutting – milling, shaping, planning and ?. cutting of spur, helical and straight bevel gears. Gear finishing operations – shaving, grinding, lapping and honing. 7. Non conventional Machining Processes Principles, operations and applications of EDM, ECM, EBM, LBM, AJM and Ultrasonic machining. Tool Geometry Tool signature of single point cutting tools – ASA, ORS, MRS and NRS systems. Tool geometry of drills, reamers, milling cutters, broaches, gear hobs. 8. Metrology Concept of precision and accuracy. Properties of measuring instruments. Types and sources of errors. Introduction to linear measurement – rules, vernier calipers, micrometers, surface plates, vee blocks, bench centres, slip gauges. Use of angular measurements – sine bars, clinometers and optical dividing heads. Use of comparators. Metrology screw threads, measurements of gear parameters, flatness and surface finish. B. S. and I. S. specifications of limits and fits. Types of gauges. Principles of gauge design. II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Introduction to Production Engineering by P. C. Sharma – S. Chand & Co. 2. Fundamentals of Metal Cutting and Machine Tools by B. L. Juneja & Sekhon – New Age Intl. 3. Tool Design by Donalson – Tata McGraw Hill 4. Engineering Metrology by R. K. Jain – Khanna Publishers REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. Production Technology Handbook by H. M. T. Metal Cutting Theory and Practice by Amitabha Bhattacharya Die Design Fundamentals by J. R. Pacawin Introduction to Jigs and Total Design by M. H. A. Kempster

III TERM WORK • • • Assignments Experiments Industrial Visit: Industrial visit to Press shop and Machining centre.

1

IV MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title :-Metallurgy 1. Solid Crystalline Structure Crystallization of liquid into solid state. Nucleation and growth in metals and alloys. Formation of polycrystalline and single crystals. Classification of crystal structure. FCC, BCC and HCP lattice. Lattice structure, unit cell, packing density and co-ordination number. Their importance. Crystallographic notations – Methods for planes and directions. 2. Lattice Imperfections Definition, classification and significance of imperfections. Point defects, vacancy, inerstitialcy and impurity atom defects. Their formation and effects. Dislocations: Edge and screw dislocations Burger’s reactor. Motion of dislocations and their significance. Surface defects, Grain boundary, sub-angle grain boundary and stacking faults. Their significance Generation of dislocation. Frank Reed source, conditions of multiplications and significance. Dislocation interactions, Elimination, multi-component dislocation, Dislocation pile up. Dislocation jog, dislocation climb. 3. Deformation Definition, elastic and plastic deformation and their significance in design and shaping. Deformation in single crystal and polycrystalline materials. Mechanisms of deformation. Critical stress for deformation. Deformability of FCC, HCP and BCC lattice, slip systems. 4. Strain Hardening Definition and importance of strain hardening. Dislocation theory of strain hardening, effects of strain hardening on engineering behaviour of materials. Recrystallization Annealing. Theory and stages of recovery. Recrystallization and grain growth. Factors affecting recrystallation. Recrystallization temperature. Hot and cold working theory. Their advantages, limitation and applications. 5. Fracture Definition and types of fracture. Brittle fracture. Griffth’s theory of fracture. Growan’s modification. Dislocation theory of fracture. Critical stress and crack propagation velocity for brittle fracture. Ductile fracture. Notch effect on fracture. Fracture toughness. Ductility transition. Definition and significance. Conditions of ductility transition and factors affecting it.

1

6. Fatigue Failure Definition of fatigue and significance of cyclic stress. Mechanism of fatigue and theories of fatigue failure. Fatigue testing. Test data presentation and statistical evaluation. S. N. Curve and its interpretation. Influence of important factors on fatigue. Notch effect surface effect. Effect of pre-stressing, corrosion fatigue. Thermal fatigue. 7. Creep Effect of temperature on mechanical behaviour of materials. Definition and signification of creep. Creep testing and data presentation. Mechanisms and types of creep. Analysis of classical creep curve. Creep Resistant materials. 8. Theory of Alloys and Alloy Diagrams Significance of alloying, Definition, Classification and properties of different types of alloys. Different types of alloy diagrams and their analysis. Importance of iron as engineering material, Allotropic forms od iron, Influence of carbon in iron-carbon alloying. Iron-iron carbode diagram and its analysis. Classification of steels and cast irons. 9. Graphitisation of Iron Grey Iron, White iron, Mehanite iron, Alloy cast irons, Nodular and malleable irons, their microstructure, properties and applications. 10. Alloy Steels Effect of alloying elements on the structures, properties and applications of steels, such as manganese, nickel, chromium, tungsten, molebdenum and silicon steels. 11. Theory of Heat treatement Definition of significance of heat treatment, equilibrium and non equilibrium transformation of austenite. 12. Time temperature Transformation (TTT) diagram Isothermal Austenite decomposition. Mechanism of Pearlite, Bainite and Martensite transformations. 13. Heat treatement Process Technology of heat treatment. Classification of heat treatment process. Annealingprincipal process, properties and applications of full annealing, diffusion annealing, process annealing and cyclic annealing, annealing defects and their remedies. Normalisisng, hardening heat treatment, hardening baths, hardening media, salt baths, hardenability. Tempering, subzero treatment, austempering, martempering, maraging and austoforming processes.

1

14. Surface Hardening and diffusion coating processes Hardening and surface hardening methods, their significance and applications, Carburising, Nitriding, Cyaniding, Carbonitriding, induction hardening and flame hardening processes. Diffusion coating processes of calorising, chromosong, siliconizing and boron diffusion. 15. Effect of alloying elements in steels Limitations of plain carbon steels, significance of alloying elements. Effects of major and minor constituents. Effect of oying elements on ferrite, carbide, austenite, effect of alloying elements on phase transformation, decomposition, hardening and tempering. Classification of tool steels and metallurgy of tool steels and special steels. 16. Strengthening mechanism Theory and applications of strain hardening, Age hardening, precipitation hardening and disperson hardening. II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Mechanical metallurgy : G.E.Dieter, McGraw Hill International New Delhi. 2. The structure and properties of Materials Vol I: M.G..Moffet, G.T.W. Pearsall and J.Wulff. 3. The structure and properties of materials Vol III: Mechanical BehaviourH.W.Hayden, M.G..Moffet, J.Wulff., Willey- Eastern Pvt Ltd. New Delhi. 4. Metallurgy for Engineers- E.C.Rollason, ELBS Soc. And Edward Arnold, London. 5. Mechanical behaviuor of materials- Courteny, McGraw Hill International New Delhi. REFERENCES 1. Engineering Metallurgy Part I AND II. – R.A.Hinggis, ELBS nad Holder Stoghton, London. 2. A text book of metallurgy- A.R.Baily- Macmillan & co. Ltd. London. 3. Introduction to solids- L.V.Azaroff, McGraw Hill International New Delhi 4. Structure and properties of Engineering Alloys- W.F.Smith, McGraw Hill International New Delhi 5. Strengthening of metals- D.Packner, Reinhold Publishing Corp, New York. 6. Engineering Physical Metallurgy- by Y. Lakhtin, Mir publishers, Moscow. 7. Physical Metallurgy for Engineers, by Donald S. Clarke and Wibur R. Varney, D.Van Nostrand Co. INC 8. engineering metallurgy Part I & II, by Raymond A. Hinggins, English Language Book Society & Hodder & Strangton. 9. structure and Properties of Alloys, by Robert M. Brick, Robert B. Gordon. McGraw Hill International New Delhi 10. Metallurgy for Engineers by E.C.Rollason, English Language Book Society & Edward Arnold Publisher Ltd.

1

11. Introduction to Engineering Materials, by B.K.Agrawal, Tata McGraw Hill Publications Co. Ltd. 12. The scoence and Engineering of Materials, by Donald R. Askeland- PWS Publishing co. III TERM WORK • • • Assignments: Experiments;: Seminar: Group seminar reports based on topics from above syllabus IV MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title :-Thermodynamics II 1. Fuels and Combustion Types of Fuels, Higher Calorific value and Lower Calorific value, calorimeters to measure the calorific values – bomb and boys calorimeter. Calorific value at constant pressure and constant volume. Combustion reactions, stoichiometric air fuel ratio, Exhaust Gas Analysis – Orsat Apparatus and Gas Chromatography. Actual A/F ratio, Gravimetric analysis and volumetric analysis. 2. Compressors Single stage reciprocating compressor neglecting clearance. Multistaging of compressors. Tow stage air compressor, perfect inter-cooling. Ideal inter cooler pressure. Minimum work, Free air delivered, volumetric efficiency, isothermal and adiabatic efficiency. Effect of clearance volume on F. A. D. and volumetric efficiency. Work, power and efficiency calculations. Rotary – Centrifugal and Axial flow compressor. Application of one dimensional flow equation. Input work, isentropic work, polytropic work. Representation as area under curve on T-S diagram, power input factor. Multistage compression. Relation between stage efficiency and compressor efficiency, inter-cooling. 3. Steam Generator Fire tube and Water tube boiler, Low pressure and high pressure boilers, once through boiler, examples, important features of HP boilers, Mountings and accessories. Layout of a modern HP boiler. Equivalent evaporation of boilers. Boiler performance. Boiler efficiency. Steam Turbine: Flow through steam nozzle – velocity at exit and condition for maximum discharge, nozzle efficiency. Basic of steam turbine, Classification,

1

compounding of turbine, impulse turbine – velocity diagram, condition for max efficiency. Reaction turbine – velocity diagram, degree of reaction, Parson’s turbine. Condition for maximum efficiency. Gas Turbine: Application of gas turbine, Air standard and Actual Brayton cycle, open and closed cycle gas turbine, methods to improve efficiency and specific output, open cycle with intercooling, reheat, and regeneration. Effect of operating variable on thermal efficiency and work ratio. II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Thermal Engineering by Ballaney – Khanna Publishers 2. Thermal Engineering by Kothandraman, Domkundwar, Khajuria, Arora – Dhanpatrai & Sons 3. Thermal Engineering by R. K. Rajput 4. Steam and Gas turbine by R. Yadav 5. Thermodynamics by P. K. Nag – Tata McGraw Hill 6. Thermodynamics and Heat Engines Vol. II by R. Yadav – Central Publishing House REFERENCES 1. Principles of Thermodynamics 2. Applied Thermodynamics foe Engineers and Technologists 3. Thermodynamics – Holman – McGraw Hill III TERM WORK • • Assignments Laboratory Experiments

IV MID SEMESTER TESTS Course Title :-Analysis of Algorithms 1. Sorting Methods Efficiency considerations in sorting Different sorting methods: Bubble sort, selection sort, quick sort, shell sort, merge sort, bucket sort, insertion sort, heaps and heap sort. Best case, worst case and average case calculations of difference sorting methods. 2. Searching Methods Efficiency considerations in searching

1

Basic searching techniques: Sequential search, searching ordered table, Index sequential search, Binary search, Interpolation search. Hashing: Hash function, resolving clashes, hashing in external storage, dynamic hashing. 3. Graph as Data Structure Graph representation: Adjacency matrix, Adjacency list. Graph traversal Minimum spanning tree Shortest path problem Connectivity in graph 4. Algorithms Greedy method Divide and conquer method Dynamic programming Back tracking method 0/1 Knapsack problem Traveling salesman problem NP – hard and NP – complete problems, NP – hard graph problems, NP – ha d scheduling problems, NP – hard code generation problems. Analysis of all above algorithms II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 4. Y.Langsam, M.J.Augustein and A.M.Tannenbaum, “Data Structures Using C and C++”, Prientice Hall India, Second Edition. 5. G.Brassard and P.Brately, “Fundamentals of Algorithmics” Prientice Hall India. 6. R.F.Gilberg, “Data Structure: A Pseudocode Approach with C “ , Thomson Learning. REFERENCES 5. Aho, J.E.Hopcroft and J.D.Ullaman, “ Data Structures and Algorithms”, Addision Wesley, Low Price Edition. 6. M.A.Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++, Addision Wesley Longman, International Student Edition. 7. R.Kruse, “ Data Structures and Program Design in C”, Prentice Hall India. 8. Tremble and Sorenson, “ Data Structures and Algorithms”, Tata McGraw – Hill. III TERM WORK • Assignments

IV MID SEMESTER TESTS

1

Course Title :-Machine Shop II Assembly job/s involving following specifications: • • • • • • Turning, Precision turning, screw-cutting Shaping, milling, grinding. Practical Examination: End Semester Examination Two jobs, one each of the following subgroups Turning, Precision turning & Screw cutting. Shaping, milling, & grinding.

Duration: 3 hours each Marks: 100.

1

Semester V Course Title :- Dynamics of Machinery I 1. Clutches Clutches Positive clutches friction clutches. Friction Cluthces-Analysis of frictional torque , power transmission. Power loss in Friction in single plate, multiple clutch and cone clutch. Centrifugal Clutches- construction, working. 2. Governors Comparison between governors and flywheel. Types-centrifugal governors, inertia governors. Force analysis of gravity loaded governors- Watt.Porter. Proell Force analysis of spring loaded governors- Harnell.hartung.Wilson Hartnell Force analysis of spring gravity loaded governor. Performance characteristics of governors- stability, isochronisms, Hunting, governor effort and governor power, coefficient of insensitiveness. 3. Gyroscope Introduction Gyroscopic couple and its effect on spinning bodies. Gyroscopic effect on naval ships during steering ,pitching and rolling. Ship stabilization with gyroscopic effect. Two wheeler and four wheeler on curved path– effect of gyroscopic and centrifugal couples, maximum permissible speeds on curve paths. Gyroscopic effect due to lateral misalignment of rigid disc mounted on shaft. 4. Brakes and Dynamometers Types of Brakes, Analysis of Block Brakes- external and internal. Band Brake simple and differential . Band and block brake- simple and differential Braking of vehicles- front wheels, rear wheels, all wheels on level and inclined roads. Types of dynamometers- Absorption and transmission dynamometers. Study and analysis of absorption type dynamometer- Proney brake, Rope brake dynamometer. Study and analysis of transmission type dynamometers- Belt transmission Epicyclic torsion dynamometrs. 5. Gear Trains Kinematics and dynamic analysis of – simple gear trains, compound gear trains, reverted gear trains, epicyclic gear trains with spur or bevel gear combination. 6. Static and Dynamic Force Analysis. static and dynamic force analysis in slider crank mechanism neglecting mass of connecting rod and crank. Turning moment diagram, fluctuation in energy , function of flywheel estimating inertia of flywheel for reciprocating prime moves and machines. Static force analysis in gears-spur, bevel , helical worm and worm gear.

1

Static and dynamic force analysis – in linkage mechanism(upto – 4 links) by virtual work method. Dynamic equivalent system to convert rigid body to two mass system with and without correction couple. 7. Belt and Rope Drive Types- flat belt, v belt, rope belt Kinematic Analysis- velocity ratio, slip and creep of belt, length of belt for open and crossed belting dynamic analysis - driving tensions, centrifugal tension, initial tension Power transmission, condition for max. power transmission condition. TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS • Theory of Machines.- Thomas Bevan – C.B.S.Publishers • Theory of machines- S.S.Ratan Tata McGraw Hill • Theory of Machines – P.L. Ballaney Khanna Publishers Delhi. • Mechanics of Machines- Elementary Theory and Examples- by J.Hannah and R.C.Stephens- Arnold international Students Edition. • Mechanics of machines , Advanced Theory and Examples- J Hannah and R.C Stephens Arnold international Students Edition. REFERENCES • Dynamic of machines- Norton • Theory of Mechanism and machines – A Ghosh and A.Malik – Affiliated East –West Press Pvt.Ltd.New Delhi. • Theory of Machines- W.G.Green –Bluckie & Sons Ltd. • Theory of Machines- R.S.Khurmi J.K.Gupta. • Theory of Machines R.K.Bansal • Mechanics & Dynamics of Machinery – J.Srinivas Sci-tech. III TERM WORK • Assignments • Laboratory Experiments MID SEMESTER TEST

IV

Course Title:- Fluid Mechanics II 1. Hydro Turbines General Advantages of a hydro power plant over other types of power plants. Elements of hydro power plant, types of hydro turbines- impulse and reaction, definition of various turbine parameters like gross head, discharge, work done, input power output power , efficiencies etc. Eulers equation applied to a turbine, turbine velocities and velocity triangles, expression for work done.

1

Pelton Turbines Components of Pelton turbine, definition of design parameters like speed ratio, jet ratio, estimation of various parameters like head, discharge, efficiency etc., determination of number of buckets. Reaction Turbines Types of reaction turbines- inward and outward flow, radial mixed and axial: elements of the turbine, estimation of various parameters. Similiarly relations in turbines, definition of unit quantities and specific quantities, caviation parameter. Characteristics of turbines governing of turbines. 2. Pumps General Classification of pumps- positive displacement and non-positive displacement concept of system and system characteristics, priming of pumps. Positive –Displacement pumps. Types and applications, general features of rotary pumps like gear pumps, vane pumps etc. general feature of reciprocating pumps,definition of head, discharge, work done and efficiency, types of reciprocating pumps, indicator diagram, use of air vessel Centrifugal Pump Application types- radial flow, mixed flow and axial flow ,components of the pump, Eulers equation and velocity triangles, correction factors for the head designconstant etc.types of blade profiles, aerofoil theory of axial flow pumps, pressure recuperating devices similarly relations and affinity laws, characteristics of pumps, vavitation and NPSH. Series and parallel operation of pumps, radial thrust and axial thrust and methods used to balance them, seals use din centrifugal pumps., trouble shooting in centrifugal pumps, self priming pumps. 3. Centrifugal Compressors Types and applications, components, and design features definition of pressure Ratio, mass flow rate, work done, efficiencies etc. performance characteristics surging in compressors. TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Hydraulic machinery – Jagdish lal 2. Hydraulic Machines – Vasanadani 3. Centrifugal pumps and blowers- Church and Jagdish Lal. REFERENCES 1. Impeller pumps- Troskolansky and Lazerkiewicz

1

2. Centrifugal and axial flow pumps.- A.J., Stepanoff 3. Pump handbook- Karassik et al. 4. Hydraulic Turbines – Nechleba. TERM WORK 1. Assignments 2. Laboratory Experiments MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title :- Mechanical Measurements 1. Significance of Measurements, Mechanical Measurements, Classification of Measuring Instruments, Generalized Measurements Systems, Types of Inputs: Desired, Modifying and Interfering Inputs. 2. Static Characteristics: Static Calibration, Static Sensitivity, Accuracy, Static Error, Precision, Reproducibility, Threshold, Resolution, Hysteresis, Drift, Span, Range. 3. Mathematical Modelling of Physical Systems, Linear time invariant systems, Laplace Transforms, Transfer Functions, Order of systems. 4. Dynamic Characteristics of Measurement Systems: Standard Inputs: Step. Ramp, Impulse and Sinusoidal Inputs. Time domain and frequency domain analysis of first and second order systems. 5. Errors in Measurements: Types of Errors and Uncertainty Analysis in Measurements. Probable Errors. 6. Displacement Measurement: Potentiometers, LVDT, Capacitance type, Nozzle Flapper Transducer, Optical Encoders. 7. Strain Measurement: Theory of Strain gauges, Gauge Factor, Temperature compensation, Bridge Circuits, Orientation of strain gauges for force and torque measurements, strain gauge based load cells, torque sensors, pressure cells. 8. Measurement of angular velocity: RPM Measurement : Tachometers, Tachogenerators, Digital Tachometers, Strboscopic methods. 9. Pressure Measurements: Pressure Standards, Elastic Pressure Transducers viz. Bourdon Tubes, Diaphragms and Bellows. Piezoelectric Sensors, High Pressure Measurement: Bridgman Gauge. Calibration of pressure gauges. 10. Vacuum Measurements: McLeod Gauge, Ionization Gauge, Thermal Conductivity gauge. 11. Acceleration Measurement and Practical Accelerometers. 12. Temperature Measurement: Thermodynamic temperature scale and IPTS. Resistance Thermometers, Thermistors and Thermo couples. Pyrometers. 13. Humidity Measurement: Relative humidity and different types of hygrometers. II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Measurement Systems ( Application and Design) : by E.O. Doebelin ( McGraw Hill)

1

2. Mechanical Engineering Measurements: Thomas Beckwith & N. Lewis Buck (Marangoni Narosa Publising House) 3. Mechanical Engineering Measurements: A.K. Sawhney . ( Dhanpatrai & Sons) REFERENCES Instrumentation Devices & Systems: C.S.Rangan & G.R. Sharma (TMGH) III TERM WORK 1. Assignments 2. Laboratory Experiments IV MID SEMESTER TEST Course Title:- Heat & Mass Transfer 1. Conduction Mechanism of hear transfer by Conduction. Fourier’s three-dimensional differential equation for Conduction with heat generation in unsteady state in the Cartesian co-ordinates. Solution of Fourier’s equation for one-dimensional steady state Conduction through isotrophic materials of various configurations such as plane wall, plane composite wall, cylindrical and spherical composite walls.(For cylindrical and spherical walls, derivation of Fouriers’s three-dimensional equation is NOT included.) Critical thickness of insulation and its importance. Unsteady state Conduction through a plane wall having no internal resistance. Use of Heisler charts. Extended surfaces, Solutions for heat transfer through rectangular fins. Types of fins and their applications . Effectiveness and efficiency of fins 2. Convection Mechanism of heat transfer by convection. Natural and Forced convection. Hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layers, Similarity between velocity profile and temperature profile. Heat transfer coefficient (film coefficient)for Convection , Effect of various parameters such as physical properties of the fluid, system geometry, fluid flow etc. on heat transfercoefficient. Heat pipe. Principle of dimensional analysis . Application of dimensional analysis to Convection for finding heat transfer coefficient. Empirical relations for Convection , Physical significance of dimensionless numbers such as Nusselt’s Number, Grashoff’s Number, Prandtl’s Number,Reynolds Number and Stanton’s Number. Reynolds analogy between momentum and heat transfer. Heat transfer in condensation Nusselt’s theory of laminar film Condensation. Heat transfer in boiling & critical heat flux. 3. Radiation Mechanism of heat transfer by Radiation.

1

Concept of black body and grey body. Emissive power and Emissivity. Basic laws of Radiations Planck’s law, Kirchof’s law, Steafan- Boltzman law, Wien’s displacement law and Lambert’s Cosine law, Intensity of Radiation Radiosity. Shape factors for simple geometrical shapes.Properties of shapefactor. Radiation heat exchange between two black bodies. Electrical network analogy for radiation heat exchange between two and three grey bodies. 4. Heat Exchangers. Classification of heat exchangers. Overall heat transfer coefficient. Fouling factor, Pressure drop in fluids across heat exchangers. Logarithmic Mean Temperature Difference, Correction factor and effectiveness of heat exchangers. Effectiveness as a function of Number of Transfer Units and heat capacity ratio 5. Mass Transfer Mechanism of mass transfer Importance of mass transfer in engineering. Fick’s law of diffusion , Steady State diffusion of gases and liquids through plane, cylindrical and spherical walls, Equimolal diffusion. Isothermal evaporation of water into air. Convective mass transfer and mass transfer coefficient . Empirical relations for mass transfer , in terms of Sherwood Number , Reynolds Number and Schmiddt’s number. TEXT BOOKS REFERENCES

TEXT BOOKS 1. Heat Transfer – J.P.Holman 2. Heat and Mass Transfer- C.P.Arora. 3. Heat and Mass Transfer –Prof. Sachdeva. 4. Heat and Mass Transfer: R.Yadav. 5. Heat Transfer- Y.V.C. Rao University Press. 6. Heat and Mass Transfer- R.K. Rajput- S.Chand & Company Ltd. REFERENCES 1. Heat and Mass transfer- Domkundwar. 2. Elements of Heats Transfer- Jakole and Hawkins. 3. Heat Transfer – James Suvec-JIACO Publishing House, 4. Heat Transfer – Donald Pitts & L.E.Sisson Schaums Series-Mc Graw Hill International. 5. Engineering Heat Transfer- James R.Weity 6. Engineering Heat Transfer- Shao Ti Hsu. 7. Heat and Mass Transfer- Eckert and Drake 8. Heat Transfer – Oszisik 9. Heat Transfer-Ineropera and Dewitt- Willey. TERM WORK 1. Assignments

1

2. Laboratory Experiments MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title :- Resource Optimization 1. Definition , Need and Scope Real life problem analysis and formulation, decision options, deterministic and probabilistic problem situations. 2. Mathematical Models Formulation and optimization; Euclidean vector space, simplex, bases, convex set of feasible solutions, vertices as promising candidates, matrices and linear algebra, Gauss Jordan method for solving simultaneous linear equations. 3. Linear Programming Model Formulation, objective function, constraints, decision variables; canonical and standard forms, parameters and variables; Graphical method for two variables problem, simplex algorithm and tabular representation, types of solution such as feasible / infeasible, degenerate / non degenerate, optimal / sub optimal, unique / alternate / infinite optimal, bounded / unbounded value and solution, and their interpretations from simplex table, cycling phenomenon; manual solution of problems involving up to three iterations. Duality concept, dual problem formulation, dual simplex method, primal sub optimal – dual infeasible, and other primal dual relations; interpretation of dual variables. Duality properties, sensitivity analysis for variation of one parameter at a time. 4. Transportation, transshipment and Assignment Models As special cases of LP model; problem formulation and optimality conditions in Vogel’s penalty and Hungarian methods of solution; traveling salesman problem as a special case of assignment problem, sensitivity analysis; manual solution of problem involving upto three iterations. 5. Integer LP Models Gomory’s cutting plane algorithm; branch and bound technique. 6. Scheduling Models Flow shop sequencing in two/three machines, n job problem; job shop scheduling for two jobs n machine problem, graphical and analytical methods. 7. Game Theory or Competitive strategies Limited to two person zero sum games; domination, saddle point, pure and mixed strategies, graphical and analytical methods; LP model formulation.

1

8. Inventory Models Deterministic static models for ordering, inventory and shortage costs for single item, uniform demand, instantaneous and gradual replenishment; backlog, price breaks; Safety stock. 9. Queuing / Waiting Line Models Steady state analysis for M/M/1/ / / system, hazard rate and system performance criteria; waiting period, queue length, system length and time spent in system in M/M/1 system with finite and infinite system size and infinite population (no derivation). 10. Replacement Models Equipment deteriorating with time; resale and operational costs; discounted value of money, policies for bulk and individual replacement. 11. Simulation Models Monte Carlo or experimenting method based on probabilistic behavior data and random numbers, application in probabilistic real life problems II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Operations Research : Hira and Gupta, S. Chand and Company publication, First edition, Reprint 1993. 2. Operations Research : S. D. Sharma, Kedarnath Ramnath and company, eleventh edition, Reprint 1997. 3. Operations Research (Prob. & solutions) by V. K. Kapoor. Sultanchand and Sons publication, Fourth edition, Reprint 2000. 4. Quantitative Techniques in Management : N. D. Vora. Tata Mc-GrawHill publication, Sixth edition, Rpeint 1995. REFERENCES 1. Operations Research Techniques for Management: B. Banergee, Business book publishing house, Seciond edition April 1989 2. Operations Research : H. Taha, Prentice, Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, Sixth edition, July 1997. III TERM WORK 1. Assignments 2. Laboratory Experiments IV MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title:- Technical Writing & Presentation Skills 1. Communication in a business organisation 2. Report Writing : Types, qualities, defining objectives and scope, organizing and interpreting information, individual and group reports, formal and informal reports.

1

3. Technical Writing : Definition, Importance, Qualities, Choosing words, Sentences & paragraph structures, steps in technical writing. 4. Technical Proposals 5. Presentation Skills : 6. Group Discussion : II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Lesiker & Petit ‘Report Writing for Business’ McGraw Hill REFERENCES Meenakshi Raman, Sharma Sangeetha ‘Technical Communication – Principles & Practices’ Oxford University Press III TERM WORK Assignments : Written One from topic 1 Two from topic 2 Two from topic 3 One from topic 4 Oral Participation in group discussion in class. Presenting a project.

Course Title:- Graphic User Interface + DBMS 1. GUI Features of G U I, Icons and graphics, Identifying visual cues, clear communication, color selection, GUI standard, planning GUI Design Work. Goal Directed Design, Software design, Visual Interface design, Menus, Dialog Boxes, Toolbars, Gizmo-ladden dialog boxes, Entry gizmos, extraction gizmos, visual gizmos 2. Visual Basic basics Main window, Form design window, tool box window, project explorer window, properties window, form layout window, Visual Basic over view.

1

3. Sharing Data and Code Working with Projects, Introduction to basic language, Making component available in Visual Basic, creating and using classes-Objects and classes-the collection class, visual basics built in collections-windows common controlsActiveX Components-creating an ActiveX server – dynamic data exchange, object linking and embedding 4. Database programming Data base basics, Visual Basic’s database tools- designing the database Program’s Main Form- ODBC-ADO –RDO-OLE DB-Relational databases-the Data Object Model –forma and fields- validation code- Client Server Programming-COM-DCOM. 5. Data base concepts and Systems Introduction- Purpose of Database Systems, Views of data, Data Models, Database language, Transaction Management, Storage Management, Database Administrator, Database Users, Overall System Structure, Different types of Database Systems 6. E-R Model Basic Concepts, Design Issues, Mapping Constraints, Keys, E-R Diagram, Weak Entity set, Extended E-R features, Design Of an E-R Database Schema, Reduction of an E-R schema to Tables 7. Relational Model Structure of Relational Database, The Relational Algebra, The tuple relational calculus, The Domain Relational Calculus, Views 8. SQL 9. Background, Basic Structure, SET operations, Aggregate functions, Null Values, Nested Sub queries, Derived Relations, Views, Modification of Database, Joined Relations, DDL, Other SQL features 10. Transaction Transaction Concepts, State, Implementations of Atomicity and durability, Concurrent Executions, Serializability, Recoverability, Transaction Definition in SQL. 11. Query Optimization Relational Database Design- Pitfalls in Relational-Database Design, Decomposition, Normalization Using Functional Dependencies, and Normalization Using Multi valued Dependencies, Normalization Using Join Dependencies, Domain-Key Normal Form and Alternative Approaches to Database Design 12. SQL SERVER 7.0 SQL Server Database Architecture- Physical Architecture- logical Architecture SQL server administration tasks and tools – The SQL Sever Enterprise Manager Security and user administration, SQL Server Command- Line utilities, Database Maintenance, Data base design and performance.

1

II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Database Systems and Concepts, Henry F. Korth, Sliberschatz, Sudarshan, MGH 2. Visual Basic 6 programming Bible, Eric Smith, IDG Books India Pvt. Ltd. 3. GUI Design for dummies, IDG books. 4. The Essentials of User interface Design, Alan Cooper IDG Books India 5. SQL Server 2000 Black Book, Patrick Dalton, IDG Books India Pvt. Ltd. 6. Visual Basic6 Programming Blue Book by Peter G. Aitken—Technology Press 7. Microsoft SQL Server 7.0 Bjeletich,S.: Mable. G. Techmedia 8. The Essentials of User interface Design, Alan Cooper IDG Books India REFERENCES 1. Using visual basic 6 / Reselman, Rob: Peasley, R.: Pruchniak PHI 2. Visual Basic 6 : In Record Time/ Brown, S. B P B Publication 3. SQL Server 2000 Black Book Patrick Dalton, Paul Whitehead, Dreamtech Press 4. Beginning SQL Server 2000 for VB developers Willis thearon Shroff publishers 5. An Introduction to Database System, C.J. Date 6. Principles of Database System, Ullman, Galgotia Publications 7. Database Management Systems Majumdar/ A K Bhattacharyya, TMGH 8. Object Oriented MultiDatabase System, Omran A. Bukhares & A.K Elmagar

III TERM WORK Assignments At least three of the following database application with G U I to be developed as a part of the course using Microsoft SQL server 7 and Microsoft Visual Basic Assignment No 1 : Student Mark sheet problem Assignment No 2 : Engineering admission Software Assignment No 3 : Income Tax calculation problem Assignment No 4 : salary sheet preparation Assignment No 5 : Library software Assignment No 6 : Software for student (including alumni)database management

1

Third Year B. Tech. ( Mechanical), Semester : VI Course Title :-Dynamics of Machinery II 1. VIBRATIONS Basic concepts of vibrations Vibrations and oscillations, causes and effects of vibrations. Vibration parameters- spring, mass, damper. Damper models. Motions: periodic , non periodic, harmonic , non harmonic Degree of freedom , static equilibrium position. Classification of Vibrations. 2. Free undamped single degree of freedom vibration system. Longitudinal , transverse, torsional vibrotary systems. Formulation of differential equations by Newton Energy .Lagragian .methods Effect of springs mass and shaft inertia on natural frequency. Effect of flexible bearings on natural frequency. 3. Free Damped single degree of freedom vibration system Viscous damped system-under damped, critically damped, over damped systems Logarithmic decrement. Coulomb’s damping. Combined viscous and coulombs damping. 4. Equivalent single degree of freedom Vibration system. Conversion of multi –springs , multi masses, multi dampers into a single spring mass and damper with linear of rotational co-ordinate system. 5. Free Undamped Multi degree of freedom Vibration systems Hoizer, Dunkerlay Rayleigh methods , Two rotors, three rotors geared system. 6. Forced single degree of freedom vibratory system Analysis of linear and torsional systems subjected to harmonic force and harmonic motion excitation(excluding elastic damper). 7. Vibration measuring instruments. Principle of seismic instruments, damped. vibrometer, accelerometer undamped,

8. Vibration Isolation Force isolation, motion isolation, type of isolators. 9. Rotor Dynamics Critical speed of single rotor with and without damping 10. Cam Dynamics Cam Dynamics: Mathematical Model ,Differential Equation, Response Phase Plane Method, Follower Jump Phenomenon.

1

11. BALANCING Static and dynamic balancing of multi rotor system. Balancing of revolving masses Balancing of reciprocating masses - In- line engines, Radial Engines, V.Engines. TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Mechanical Vibrations- G.K.Grover 2. Mechanical Vibrations- V.P.Singh-Dhanat Rai & Sons. 3. Mechanical Vibrations- S.S.Rao-Addison Wesley Publishing. 4. Fundamentals of Mechanical Vibration- Graham Kelly-Tata McGraw 5. Theory of Machines – Khurmi and Gupta – Chand Publishers REFERENCES 1. Mechanical Vibration Analysis- P.Srineevasan- Tata McGraw Hill 2. Mechanical Vibrations- Schaum’s outline series- McGraw Hill 3. Theory and Practice of mechanical vibrations J.S.Rao K.Gupta – New Age International Publications. 4. Theory of vibrations with applications- W.T.Thompson-Prentice Hall of India Mechanical Vibrations- Den TERM WORK 1. Assignments: 2. Laboratory Experiments MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title:- Mechanical Control Systems . 1. Introduction to Automatic Control systems Types of control systems, open loop and closed loop systems; servomechanisms and regulatory systems; negative and positive feedback systems; feed forward systems etc. 2. Mathematical modeling of dynamic systems Basic steps in mathematical modeling of control system components, review of laplace transforms, transfer function, block diagram representation, block diagram algebra, and signal flow graphs. 3. Characteristics of closed loop systems Sensitivity to parameter variations, transient response, effect of external advantages and disturbances, disadvantages of feedback systems. 4. Control system components

1

Linear approximations of non linear systems, modeling of control system components, electro mechanical systems, servo motors, stepper motors, hydraulic and pneumatic systems. 5. Time response of control systems Time domain specifications of control systems, step response of second order systems. 6. Control system classification Error constants and steady state errors to unity feedback systems 7. Basic Control Actions Effects of Integral and Derivative actions on system performance PID Controllers. 8. Stability Analysis of Control systems Concepts of stability, necessary conditions for stability, the Routh’s stability Criterion and Hurwitz’s stability criterion. 9. Relative stability analysis Frequency Response Analysis: Bode Plots, Polar plots, Nyquist Stability criterion. 10. Root Locus Analysis Concepts of Root Locus, Root Locus Plots, Root Locus Analysis of control systems. Concepts of State Space Representation of Control Systems. 11. Introduction to MATLAB Examples on Root Locus, Bode Plots and Nyquist Plots. construction using MATLAB. TEXT BOOKS 1. Control System Engineering: Nagrath I.J. and Gopal .M. (Wiley Eastern Ltd) REFERENCES 2. Modern Control Engineering : by K. Ogata. ( Prentice Hall) 3. Automatic Control Engineering: by Francis H. Raven. ( McGraw Hill) TERM WORK 1. Assignments 2. Laboratory Experiments MID SEMESTER TEST

1

Course Title :-Refrigeration & Airconditioning REFRIGERATION 1. Defiinition of Refrigeration 2. Reversed heat engine air standard cycles: Carnot, Joule(Bell Coleman) cycle Refrigerator, Heat Pump, Performance Parameters like Tonnes of Refrigeration(TR), co-efficient of performance(COP),kw(power)per TR, TR per KW etc. 3. Application of various air standard refrigeration cycles used for cooking Air-Craft cabins. 4. Vapour Compression Cycles (VCC): Carnot, actual vapor compression cycle comparison of VCC with air refrigeration cycles. 5. Refrigerants & their nomenclature, types and properties. Study of Performance parameters, primary & secondary refrigerants. 6. Alternate refrigerants, ozone depletion potential & global warming & global warming potential GWP; Montreol Protocol & Kyoto Protocol 7. Types of evaporators, compressors, condensers & expansion devices 8. Study of refrigeration application – Household Refrigerator, Ice Plant, cold storage, Deep freezers etc. 9. Modification in V.C.C. Multiple compression, Multiple evaporation, flash chamber, flash intercoolers, water inter coolers, individual and multiple expansion valves , heat exchangers. Cascade Systems. 10. Modern & Alternate Refrigeration Systems. 11. Introduction to Electrolux Refrigeration, Thermo electric Refrigeration, Magnetic Refrigeration, Three fluid refrigeration System , Steam Jet Refrigeration, Absorption Refrigeration Vapour Absorption Machines(LiBr-H²O, NH³ - H²O) 12. Introduction to Cryogenics, liquifaction of gases. AIR CONDITIONING 1. Definition of Air Conditioning 2. Psychrometry–Psychrometric properties , processes,Chart. Adiabatic mixing of air streams . By pass Factor, Humidifying efficiency of Apparatus Dew Point(ADP) like coil ADP, Room ADP . Various types of sensible heat factors(SHF) like Room SHF,Grand SHF,Effectiv SHF. 3. Study of Psychrometers, Air Washers. 4. Combination of various basic processes to achieve desired room conditions for specified outside conditions. Heating & cooling load calculation. Mixing of fresh air with recirculated air before & after A.C. 5. Air-Conditioners- Summer, Winter. Year Round Window A.C., Split A.C , Central A.C. Plant, Advances in A.C. 6. Comfort Air Conditioning- Effective Temperature, comfort, comfort charts (DBT-WBT for const. velocity & variable velocity). Comfort Zone. 7. Various controls/switches/measuring instruments used in airconditioning. TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES

1

TEXT BOOKS 1. Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning – Arora, Tata McGraw Hill 2. Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning Arora, Domkundwar, Dhanpat Rai 3. Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning Khurmi, Gupta, Urasia Pub. House. 4. Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning Manohar Prasad, New Age Internl. 5. R.A.C.Tables & Charts - Domkundwar 6. R.A.C.Tables & Charts Manohar Prasad. REFERENCES 1. Principles of Refrigeration - Dossat, Wiley 2. Refrigerration & Air-conditioning - Ballney , Khanna 3. Basic R.A.C. Anant Narayanan , Tata McGraw Hill, 4. HVAC - Mcquiston Parkeretal, Wiley. TERM WORK 1. Assignments 2. Laboratory Experiments 3. Report of a Visit to R.A.C.Plant. MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title :- Internal Combustion Engines 1. Classification of I.C.Engines: Four stroke and two stroke engines. Types of engines- Stationery , Automotive , and marine engines. Comparative study of Two stroke and Four stroke engines. Different methods of Scavenging and scavenging blowers. 2. Cycle Analysis of I.C.Engines. Air standard cycles(Revision of Otta Dual & Diesel Cycle. Variable specific heat and its effect on Air Standard Cycles, Fuel Air Cycles.Dissociation and other losses. Actual cycles. 3. S.I.Engines. Carburetion- Theory of Carburetion. Simple carburetor, various systems of actual Carburetor. Types of Carburetors (refer mfg. Manuals of present day vehicles) 4. Ignition System – Battery and Magnetic Ignition Systems, Electronic Ignition Systems delay, Velocity of flame propogation, pressure - crank angle diagram, detonation, factors affecting combustion & detonation, types of combustion chambers. Comustion Ignition. 5. C.I. Engines.

1

Requirement of Fuel Injection Systems. Types of fuel injection systems viz. Common rail, individual pump, distributor and unit injector systems. High pressure fuel injection pump. Type of Nozzles. 6. Necessity of Governor in Diesel engines. 7. Combustion: Combustion phenomenon in C.I.Engines, Stages of combustion, delay period, Knocking, Pressure –Crank angle diagram. Factors affecting combustion and knocking. Types of combustion chambers. 8. Supercharging/Turbo charging: Objectives of Supercharging /Turbo charging Effect of Supercharging / Turbo charging on power output & efficiency of engine. Methods of Supercharging / Turbocharging Types of Superchargers / Turbochargers. Limit of Supercharging / Turbo charging 9. Performance Characteristics of S.I. & C.I.Engines Effect of load and speed on mechanical, indicated, brake thermal & volumetric efficiencies. BMEP and Brake specific fuel consumption Heat balance test. Method of determining indicated power of the engine. 10. Air Pollution due to I.C.Engines. Air/Fuel Ratio Revision Air Pollution due to engine exhaust. Pollution control devices and EURO standards/Bharat Standards. 11. Fuels of I.C.Engines Physical and Chemical properties of fuels. Rating of Fuels- Octane No,Cetane No.& Performance No. Determination of Octane and Cetane Nos. Non-Conventional fuels for I.C.Engines(Only introduction). 12. Engine Lubrication. Types of lubricants used in I.C.Engines. Properties of Lubricants. SAE Ratings of Lubnricants. Types of Lubrication Systems. 13. Engine Cooling Systems of Cooling- Air, Water- cooling . General arrangements. 14. Introduction to CNG, LPG, Stratified Charge and Wankel engines. 15. Recent Developments in I.C.Engines. TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS: 1. Internal Combustion Engine- Mathur and Sharma

1

2. Internal Combustion Engine- E.E.Obert. 3. Internal Combustion Engine V.Ganesan-Tata McGraw Hill. REFERENCES 1. Internal Combustion Engines: Richard stone- Palgrave publications 2. Internal Combustion Engines- S.L.Behohar. 3. Internal Combustion Engines Gills ands Smith 4. Internal Combustion Engines- P.M.Heldt. 5. Power Plant Engineering.-Morse 6. Internal Combustion Engines- V.L.Maleeve 7. Internal Combustion Engines-Taylor 8. Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals- John B.Heywood.

TERM WORK 1. Assignments 2. Laboratory Experiments MID SEMESTER TEST

Course Title :- Design of Machine Elements I Introduction 1. Mechanical Engineering Design, Design methods, Asthetic and Ergonomics considerations in design. 2. Material properties and their uses in design. 3. Manufacturing consideration in design Tolerance , types of fits, selection of fits Design consideration of casting and forging. 4. Basic principles of Machine Design, Modes of failures , Factor of safety, Design stresses, Principal Stresses , Theories of failure standards. I.S.codes Preferred Series and Numbers. 5. Design against static loads / Elements like 1. Cotter joint, knuckle joint, strap end connecting rod. 2. Bolted and Welded joints concentric and eccentric loading. 3. Screw Jack, toggle screw jack, screw presses lock- gate mechanism 4. Press fitted connections. Design against fluctuating Load 6. Variable stresses, reversed , repeated , fluctuating stresses 7. Fatigue failure 8. Static and fatigue stress concentration factors. 9. Endurance limit- estimation of endurance limit. 10. Design for finite and infinite life. 11. Soderberg and Goodman design criteria. 12. Fatigue design under combined stresses.

1

13. Design of shaft-power transmitting, power distribution, shafts (excluding Crank shaft) under static and fatigue criteria. 14. Design of keys- Taper Keys, parallel keys, Gib-headed key, Woodroff key 15. Design of Couplings 16. Muff, split muff, solid flange, flexible bush coupling. 17. Design of Pressure Vessels18. Cylindered pressure vessels with flat and disced heads 19. Design of bolted joint20. With and Without gaskets under static and fatigue ctriteria. 21. Design of springs 22. Helical compression, tension springs under static and variable loads, Laminated Springs.

TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Design of machine elements V.B.Bhandari, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. 2. Machine Design- An Integrated Approach- Robert L.Norton-Pearson Education Asia. 3. Machine Design- Pandya Shah-Charotar Publishing 4. Mechanical Engineering Design- J.E.Shiglay-McGraw Hill. REFERENCES: 1. Machine Design –Reshetov-Mir Publication 2. Machine Design – Black Adams McGraw Hill 3. Fundamental of Machine Elements- Hawrock, Jaconson,-McGraw Hill. TERM WORK 1. Assignments 2. Laboratory Experiments MID SEMESTER TEST

1

Course Title:- Principles of Management 1. The growth of management as a science. Contributions of Taylor, Fayol Gilbreth, Bernard and Drucker. 2. The functions of a manager. 3. Planning - its nature and objectives, types of plans, language planning, management by objectives (MBO) and making planning effective. 4. Organising - departmentalization, decentralization. 5. Staffing – selection and recruitment, appraisal, management development. 6. Leading and directing – leadership, motivation and communication. 7. Controlling - its nature, techniques, management synthesis. TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. H. Weihrich & H. Koontz, Management – a global perspective, McGraw Hill, 1993 REFERENCES 2. F.A.Massie, Cases in management, Tata McGraw Hill, 1977. 3. Management – Daft, Thomson Learning. TERM WORK 1. Assignments 2. Laboratory Experiments

1

Course Title:- JAVA & Applications . 1. Contemporary software paradigms-Platform independence, portability, scalability, interoperability, Java Virtual Machine, Byte Code, Object orientation 2. Data types, control structures, Arrays, vectors 3. Visibility control and Inheritance in Java 4. Interface , Multi threading 5. Packages, Exception Handling in Java 6. User interface, AWT, Swing, event handling 7. Java Data Base connectivity(JDBC) 8. HTML, XML, Applet programming 9. Servelets TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES 1. Core Java 2: Volume I, Fundamentals, Cay S. Horstmann, Gary Cornell, PHI 2. Universal Data Access for the Java 2 Platform written by Seth White, Maydene Fisher, Graham Hamilton, Rick Catell, and Mark Hapner. Published by Addison Wesley Longman, Inc. June 1999. 3. Programming with JAVA, E Balagurusamy 2nd Edition, Tata McGRAW-Hill, New Delhi 4. The Complete Reference, JAVA 2, Fifth Edition, Herbert Schildt, Tata McGRAWHill, New Delhi TERM WORK Java Programs for the following 1. Forecasting techniques 2. Sequencing problems 3. simplex method 4. Inventory control 5. PERT and CPM Techniques 6. Statistical Quality Control Techniques 7. applets for E-transactions Servelets for ERP practices

1

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING V J Technological Institute, Matunga, Mumbai 400019. B.TECH. (MECHANICAL) PROGRAMME: 102: B.TECH. ( MECHANICAL)

Class

: Final Year B. Tech. (Mechanical)

Semester : VII
S r. N o. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Course Code Course Title L P T Cr Evaluation Weightage TWA MS T 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 ESE (Theor y) Hours 4 3 3 3 3 3

302212 Design of Machine Elements 302240 Mechatronics 302250 Finite Element Method 302260 Manufacturing Planning & Control 302270 E Commerce and Engineering Economics Elective -I TOTAL

4 3 3 3 2 4 1 9

1 1 2 1 1 2 8

5 4 5 4 3 6 2 7

9 7 8 7 5 10 46

ES E 70 70 70 70 70 70

Semester : VIII
S r. N o. 1 2 3 4 5 Course Code Course Title L P T Cr Evaluation Weightage TWA MS T 10 15 15 8 8 10 10 46 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 ESE (Theor y) Hours 3 3 3 3 3

302280 Design of Machine Systems 302290 Power Plant Engg. 302300 Industrial Engg and ERP 302310 Cad/CAM Elective- II TOTAL

4 3 3 4 4 1 8

2 2 1 2 2 8

6 5 4 6 6 2 6

ES E 70 70 70 70 70

1

Project: Sr. Course No. Code Cr TW MS ESE ESE A T (Theo ry) Hrs 1 402900 Project 8 See note below ● The project is evaluated in two stages. The first stage evaluation shall be done at the end of pre-final semester by a Committee of Institute faculty (at least two faculty members including project guide). The Project Guide along with an external examiner shall do the second stage evaluation at the end of final semester. • The first stage assessment shall have 25% weightage. Another 25% weightage shall be given for the initiative, interest, effort and sincerity shown by the student during the entire project work. The second stage assessment shall have 50% weightage. • The first stage evaluation is to be carried out after a minimum of 12 weeks of work. • The project report should be submitted in the prescribed format at least three weeks prior to the end of final semester or by the prescribed date and second stage assessment can be done in the last week of semester. • The project shall carry 08 credits. The grade for the project shall be declared only after second stage evaluation. LIST OF ELECTIVES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 402011 402020 402030 402040 402012 402050 402060 402070 402080 402090 402100 402110 402120 402130 402140 402150 402160 Automobile Engg. I Total Quality Management Welding Engineering Alternative Energy Sources Automobile Engineering II Advanced Finite Element Method Optimisation Business Process Reengineering Supply Chain Management Kinematics Synthesis of Linkages Industrial Robotics Croyogenic Engineering Enterprise Networking and Internet Computer Integrated Manufacturing Nondestructive Testing Dynamics System ,Modelling and Analysis Inventory Management and Controlled Systems 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 6 6 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Course Title L P T

2 6 10 2 6 10 2 6 10 2 6 10 2 6 10 2 6 10 2 6 10 2 6 10 2 6 10 2 6 10 2 6 10

1

Class: Final Year B. Tech. (Mechanical) Semester: VII Sr. Course No. Code 1 Course Title L P T Cr Evaluation Weightage TWA MST ESE 4 1 5 9 15 15 70 ESE (Theory) Hours 4

302212 Design of Machine Elements II DETAILED SYLLABUS

I.

1. Design of Gears Spur, Helical, Bevel & Worm Gears 2. Design of Flexible curvature drive Flat belt, V-belt, Chain drive 3. Design of Friction clutches Single plate clutch, Multiple plate clutch, Cone clutch 4. Design of Brakes Shoe brakes, Bevel brakes 5. Design of Cam mechanism Radial translating roller follower 6. Design of Flywheel Disc flywheel, Rimmed flywheel

7. Bearings 7.1. Design of Sliding contact bearing 7.2. Selection of Rolling contact bearing 8. System Engineering Analysis to generate the data for design of system components

1

II.    

TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES Design of m/c elements Machine Design Design of Machine element Design Data Book Spott Norton Bhandari PSG Data Book

III. • •

TERM WORK Assignment Detail design & drawing of one unit

IV.

MID SEMESTER EXAM

S r. N o. 2

Course Code 30224 0 I.

Course Title

L P T C r 3 1 4 7

Mechatronics

Evaluation Weightage TWA MS T 15 15

ESE 70

ESE (Theor y) Hours 3

DETAILED SYLLABUS

1. Introduction to Mechatronics, Definition of Mechatronics, Mechatronics in factory, office and home automation. 2. Overview of Microprocessors, Micro controllers and microcomputer systems, Hardware and software, Assembly level and higher level programming. 3. Introduction to microprocessor architecture of 8085 A: Data and Address Bus, Register Array, Instruction Register and Decoder, Timing and Control Unit, ALU, Serial I/O & Interrupt Controller, Stack and Stack Pointer Register. 4. Single Chip Micro Computers and Microcontrollers and their applications. 5. Microprocessor Programming: Review of Number Systems, Instruction types, addressing modes, instruction format, instruction timings and operations, 8085 Instruction Set and its basic instructions. 6. Programming techniques with additional instructions, Counter and time delays, branching looping and indexing, stack and subroutines.

1

7. Interfacing of peripheral devices. Interfacing of Key boards, Output devices, Memory, 8255A Peripheral I/O, 8253 Programmable Interval Timer, 8257 DMA Controller. 8. Data Converters: ADC, DAC and Interfacing of Data Converters. 9. Electrical drives and actuators, Relays , Servo motors, Stepper motors etc. 10. Electro pneumatic and Electro Hydraulic Systems and their applications in industry and low cost automation. Graphical symbols used in pneumatics and hydraulics, Control Valves and Actuators, Pneumatic/ electro pneumatic circuits for cascading of linear acuators,etc. 11. PLC : Functional block Diagram, Applications and Programming, Ladder diagrams. 12. Computer Controls in Manufacturing, Adaptive Controls. 13. Case studies involving Machine Tools and Automation II. TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES

TEXT BOOKS

1. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with 8085. By R.S.Gaonkar 2. Assembly Language Programming: By L.A. Laventhal 3. Mechatronics: By HMT 4. Mechatronics. By W. Bolton 5. Pneumatic Circuits and Low Cost Automation: By Fawcett J.R. 6. Engineering Applications of Pneumatics & Hydraulics: By Ian C Turner 7. Automation, Production Systems and CIM. By Mikell P Groovar. 8. Industrial Pneumatic Controls: By Z.J Lansky, Lawrence F Schrader, JR. 9. Mechatronics System Design : By Shetty and Kolk.

1

REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. III. Computer graphics- Hearn & Baker Computer graphics- Foley Van Dam Mathematical elements for computer graphics - Roger & adams Procedural Elements for computer graphics- Roger. M/c Tool Design - N.K.Mehta. N/C of M/C tools –Koren. TERM WORK

Assignment Laboratory Experiments

IV.

MID SEMESTER EXAM

S Course r. Code N o. 3 30225 0

Course Title

L P T C r 3 2 5 8

Finite Element Method

Evaluation Weightage TWA MS T 15 15

ESE 70

ESE (Theory ) Hours 3

I. SYLLABUS :
Introductory Concepts : Introduction to FEM. Brief History. General FEM procedure. Applications of FEM in various fields. Advantages and disadvantages of FEM. 2. A. Differential Equations in different fields : Types of Differential Equations. Primary and Secondary Variables and types of Boundary Conditions. Matrix Algebra : Matrix operations, Gauss Elimination Method to get inverse of a Matrix, Partitioning of Matrix. Method of Elimination & Penalty Approach. Finite Difference Method : To solve 1st and 2nd order differential equations. FEM Procedure : A. Terminology : Element, types of elements, order of the element, internal and external node/s, degree of freedom, primary and secondary variables, essential boundary conditions, natural boundary conditions, homogeneous and nonhomogeneous boundary conditions, discretization, band-width, topology etc. B. General Procedure : Pre-processing, Processing and Post-processing. C. Element Matrix Equations for linear element: For various fields of Engineering. Significance of various terms, consistent units.

1

Direct Application of Element Matrix Equations (linear element) to one – dimensional problems in various Fields like : Solid Mechanics : Analysis of Stepped and Taper Bars in Horizontal and Vertical position. Structural and Thermal Effects. Mechanical Engineering: Springs, Spring-Cart systems. Torsion. Thermal Engineering : Conduction, Conduction and Convection-Fins. Fluid Flows : Fluid Network. Electrical Engineering : Electrical Circuits Diffusion : Through porous media. 4. Weighted Residual Method : To evaluate Matrix Equations by Non-weak form Type : Sub-domain Method, Galerkin Method. B. Weak form Type : Rayleigh-Ritz Method (mapped over a general linear element). Use of Lagrange’s linear shape functions and interpolation function. Numerical Integration : Newton-Cotes Method. Cartesian Co-ordinate system. Error Analysis : Sources of Error. Measures to be taken for reduction in Error II. TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS Sr. no. 1 2 3 Title Finite Element Method Author Reddy J. N. Publisher McGRAWHILL Prentice Hall

Introduction to FEM in Engineering Chandrupatla, Belugundu Finite Element Method REFERENCES: Fagan

Sr. no. 1 2 3 4

Title FEM in Engg. Applied FEA FEA for undergraduates Textbook of FEAnalysis

Author Rao S. S. Segerlind Akin J. Ed P.Seshu

Publisher Pergamon Press John Wiley Academic Press Prentice Hall

1

II.

TERMWORK At least one assignment on each sub-topic. Demonstration of a FEM package : I-DEAS Master Series or ANSYS OR SOLIDWORKS -- to cover tasks like a simple Model-preparation, Mesh generation, Simulation, Postprocessing. A brief report writing is to be submitted.

IV. MID SEMESTER EXAM

Sr . N o. 4

Course Code 30226 0

Course Title

L P T C r 3 1 4

Evaluation Weightage TWA MST 15 15

Manufacturing Planning And Control

7

ESE (Theory ESE ) Hours 70 3

I.

DETAILED SYLLABUS

1. Manufacturing planning and control
MPC System, Framework, Objectives, Functions, Functional Relationship Input/Output, Payoffs, Customer Expectations, Manufacturing Improvement Plant, Production/Logistics processes, Material Flow, Management Problems. Decision Making Techniques and Supporting Database. Matching the MPC system with the needs of Firm. Requirements of Effective MPC systems. Performance Indices.

2. Material Requirements planning
MRP Requirements, Aims, Structure, Inputs Linkage with other MPC functions, MRP & MRP II. Record Processing. The Basic MRP Record, Linking the MRP Records, Technical issues. Lot Sizing, Safety Stock and Safety Lead. Time, Low Level Coding, Pegging, Firm Planned Order Releases Using the MRP System. The MRP Planner, Bottom-Up Replanning. An MRP Output. The MRP Database.

3. Master Production Scheduling Basic concepts, Purpose, Manufacturing Environment, Technique, Process of setting up and running MPS. Managing Demand, Time Fencing Stability, Rough Cut Planning, MPS Format and Logic, Managing MPS.

1

4. Capacity Planning The Roll of Capacity Planning in MPC System, Hierarchy of capacity Planning, Decisions Links to Other Systems Modules, Capacity Planning & Control Techniques, Capacity Planning using Overall Factors (CPOF). Capacity Requirements. Planning (CRP). Input/Output Control Capacity Management. Capacity Planning in MPC System. Choosing the Measures of capacity. Data Base Requirements. 5. Shop-Floor Control Framework for Shop-floor Control MPC System Linkages. The Company Environment Shop Floor Control Techniques, Basic Shop-Floor Control Concepts, Priority Sequencing Rules. Finite Loading Using the Shop Floor Control System. Matching the SFC System to the Company, Performance Measurement and Lead Time Management. 6. Purchasing Purchasing in Manufacturing Planning and Control, Breadth of the Purchasing Function. The MPC Focus. Vender relationship, Quantity Planning, Price planning, Vendor Scheduling, Uncertainty Protection, Quality Improvement Programs, Purchasing Systems and Data Base. The Procurement Functions. The Data Base, Vender Performance, Electronic Interchange (EDI), Organizational Change. 7. Just-In-Time JIT in manufacturing and Control, Major Elements of Just-in-Time. The impact of JIT on Manufacturing Planning and Control, The Hidden Factory JIT Corner stones and the Linkage to MPC. A JIT Example, Product Design Process Design, Bill of Material implications. JIT Applications. 8. Production Planning Production Planning infirm, Production Planning and Management. S.O.P. Production Planning and MPC Systems Payoffs, Routinizing Production and Game Planning, The Basic Trade-Offs, Evaluating Alternatives, Top Management Role, Functional Roles, Integrating Strategic Planning. Controlling the Production Plan, Operating Production –Planning System. 9. Demand Management Demand Management in Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems, Demand Management and Production Planning, Demand Management and Master Production Scheduling Outbound Product Flow, Data Capture, Dealing with Day-to-Day Customer Order. Demand Management Techniques, Aggregating and Disaggregating Forecasts, Make-to-Stock, Demand Management, Assemble ro Order Demand Management, Managing Demand, Organizing for Demand Management, Managing Service Levels.

1

10. Advance Concepts in Material Requirements planning Determination of Manufacturing order Quantities, Economic Order Quantities (EOQ). Periodic Order Quantities (POQ). Part Period Balancing (PPB). Determination of Purchase Order Quantities, The Purchasing Discount problem, Look Ahead Failure, Performance Comparisons, Buffering concepts, Concepts of Uncertainty, Safety Stock and Safety Lead Performance Comparisons Nervousness Sources of MRP System Nervousness. Reducing System Nervousness. 11. Advance Concepts in Scheduling A Scheduling Framework, Performance Criteria Shop Structure, Product Structure, Wok Center Capacities, Basic Scheduling Research, Static Scheduling Approaches Johnson’s Rule, The One Machine case, The Two Machine case, Assignment Models, Scheduling Priority Rules.

12. Forecasting Types, Steps, Techniques, Approaches-Moving Averages, Weighed averages, Regression Analysis, Exponential smoothening Models, Trend Projection, Casual Role of Computers in Forecasting. 13. Project Scheduling Network Design, Gantt Charts, Framework of PERT and CPM Project planning Scheduling and Monitoring through Network Control, Probability aspects 14. MPC Developments Supply Chain Development framework, Competitive drivers/challenges, cross firm MPC Design. II . TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES

 TEXT BOOKS 1. Manufacturing Planning & Controls systems Thomas E.Vollman William l Berry and others Galgotia publications/T.M.H 2. Productions and Operations Management - S.N.Chary T.M.H. Publishing Company. 3. Operations Management -Joseph G. Monks, Schaum’s outline Series.  REFERENCES • • Production and Operations Management strategies and Tactics by Jay Heizer & Barry Render, Prentice Hall Material Requirement Planning by Orlicky J McGraw Hill.

1

• • • • • III.

Operations Management Problems &models by E.S.Buffa, JOHN Wiley. Introduction to Materials management by J.R.Tony and others Pearson education. Production- Inventory systems Planning & Control by Buffa E.F. and J.G. Miller. Operations Research by Hamdy H.Taha. Quantitative Techniques for managerial Decisions by L.C. Jhamb Everest Publishing House.

TERM WORK

The term work shall comprise of at least ten class assignments (problems or Class Studies) covering different topics of the syllabus & one seminar presentation report IV. MID SEMESTER EXAM Course Title L P T C r 2 1 3 5 Evaluation Weightage TWA MS T 15 15 ESE (Theory ) Hours 3

Sr Course . Code N o. 5 30227 0

ESE 70

E Commerce & Engineering Economics I.

DETAILED SYLLABUS

Emergence of commerce Virtualization, globalization and intellectualization exploiting technology change. A generic business model for e-commerce; Local business drive, business map; b 2 b, b 2 c, e-commerce roles. E Commerce Application areas Retail, auctions and advice, procurement, inventory exchange and real time collaboration. Open issues Legal, technical, market issues. Engineering economics and decision-making. Demand, supply and market equiibrium. Elasticity of demand. Alternative investment decision techniques. Payback time, rate of return, net present value, DCF rate of return and annual worth methods. Replacement decisions. Depreciatio

1

II.

TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES  TEXT BOOKS

1. The business of E-commerce 2. Engineering Economy

-

Paul May James Riggs

 REFERENCES 1. Electronic commerce
2. E-Commerce

-

Schneider & Perry, Thomson 2002
David Whitley,Tata McGrow Hill 2001

3. Engineering Economy III. Assignment Laboratory Experiments TERM WORK

-

D Garmo & Canada

IV.

MID SEMESTER EXAM

S r. N o. 6

Course Code -

Course Title

L P T C r 4 2 6 1 0

Elective - Total Quality Management

Evaluation Weightage TWA MS T 15 15

ESE 70

ESE (Theor y) Hours 3

1

V.

DETAILED SYLLABUS

1. Quality - Def., characteristics, product standard and requirements, quality of process, design, system, conformance. Quality control, Quality audit, company wide quality control, TQC, Quality culture. 2. TQM - Def.,Philosophy, Organization structure, pillar customer focus , Management commitement , Total participation , SQC , Systematic problem , Solving ( PDCA ) , Continuous improvement . 3. Quality Policy And Objectives – Need for Quality Policies , examples , leadership concepts, quality objectives , role of senior Management , quality statement , vision and mission , goals. 4. Cost of quality – Prevention, appraisal, failure aspects of quality, consolidation and analysis, performance indices, cost reduction program and optimum cost. 5. Organization of Quality - Steering committee, quality related task, inspection of quality, performance measures, conformance to specifications. 6. TQM Tools and Techniques- Statistical quality control tools- Data collection, checksheets and ckechlist. Pareto diagram, Cause and effect diagram. Stratification. Graphs and histograms. Scatter diagrams. Control charts. Flow charts and Flow diagrams, Networks, Design review and SWOT analysis. 7. Customer focus- Customer relation and satisfaction, product knowledge, cuatomer complaints, redressal, product safety, reliability, service quality and benchmarking. 8. 9. Vendor- Relations, assessment, rating, development managing vendor quality. , certification and

Quality Assurance- Manual and form design for quality assurance, quality audit, and process and product audit, conducting TQM audits.

10. Designing for Quality- Quality of design and quality of conformance, reliability, design review, failure mode and fault tree analysis, evaluating design by test, maintainability and safety in design. Experimental design, testing hypothesis. 11. Training for Quality-Training of workers, supervisors, managers for quality, methods and approaches motivation and performance appraisal. Quality circles-roll, organization, objectives and benefits. 12. Continuous Improvement Cycle – PDCA, Q.F.D>, Failure Mode and Effect analysis (FMECA), Systematic Problem Solving. Deming wheel, S.P.C, Taguchi Methods, J.I.T., T.P.M., Reliability and Maintainability Study. Poka-Yoke. Kaizen.

1

VI.

TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES

TEXT BOOKS 1. Quality assurance and Total quality Management by K.C. Jain and A.S>ChitaleKhanna Pub . 2. Total Quality Managemnt by M.SundraRaju – Tata McGraw Hill Pub.

REFERENCES 1. Total Quality Control by Armand V. Feigenbaum. 2. Quality Planning Management by M. Sundra Raju – Tata McGraw Hill Pub. VII. • TERM WORK Assignment The term work should consist of atleast 10 assignment based on above topics and one Seminar Presentation Report. • Laboratory Experiments

VIII. MID SEMESTER EXAM Sr Course . Code N o. 6 Course Title L P T C r 4 2 5 8 Evaluation Weightage TWA MS T 15 15 ESE (Theor y) Hours 3

ESE 70

Elective (Automobile Engg.)

IX.

DETAILED SYLLABUS

1 . AUTOMOBILE TRANSMISSION 1.1 Function of Transmission 1.2 Types of Transmission 1.3 Power Transmission to Wheels 1.4 Two Wheel Drive and four wheel drive Transmission

1

2. CLUTCHES 2.1 Necessity and requirement of Clutch 2.2 Types Of Clutches 2.3 Single Plate clutch. Borg and Beck Clutch. Diaphragm Clutch. Centrifugal Clutch 2.4 Cone Clutch. Multi Plate clutch 2.5 Fluid Flywheel 2.6 Clutch Plate , Clutch Facing 2.7 Clutch Overhaul and trouble shooting 3. VECHILE PERFORMANCE 3.1 Resistance to motion of vehicle. Air, rolling and gradient resistance. 3.2 Total Resistance – Vehicle speed curves for different gradient. 3.3 Tractive force (effort) 3.4 Tractive Force – Vehicle Speed Curves for different gear ratios. 3.5 Power, acceleration and grad ability calculation. 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 5. 5.1 5.2 6. GEAR BOX Necessity of gearbox. Types of gearboxes. Sliding mesh, constant mesh gear box. Synchromesh devices synchromesh gearbox. Gear selector Mechanism Epicyclic Gearbox Wilson Gear box. Three element and five element torque converter. Borg – warner automatic gear box Over drive Design of gear box PROPELLER SHAFT AND UNIVERSAL JOINT Types of construction of propeller shaft Types of universal joints. Constant velocity joints. REAR AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL Final drive, straight bevel, spiral bevel,. Hypoid and worm and worm wheel drive. Necessity of differential Conventional and non – slip differential. Different Lock. Types of live axles. Semi, three quarter and fully floating axles. Hotchkiss drive. Torque tube drive. Radius rods. WHEEL AND TYRES Requirement of wheel and tyres. Types of wheels. Parts of tyre.

7.

1

Cross ply, radial ply and bolted bias ply tyres. Factor affecting tyre life. Tyre designations. 8. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Purpose of battery types of batteries. Lead acid, Alkaline, Zink air battery. Rating, charging testing and maintenances of lead acid battery. Dynamo operation, construction and working. Cut out combined current and voltage regulator. Alternator. Requirement of starting system. Standard bendix drive. Compression spring bendix drive overrunning clutch drive. Starter motor solenoids and switches. LIGHTING Lighting system wiring circuit. Head lamps: Construction and types setting and control. Reflector; parabolic, bifocal, semifocal, ply-ellipsoidal. Lighting switches. Gauges: Fuel, temperature, oil pressure etc. Accessories: Electric horn. Direction indicators, flashing indicators, wind screen wipers. Speedometer.

9.

VECHILE MAINTENANCE Preventive , breakdown and corrective maintenance Major and minor overhaul. Chassis lubrication

X.

TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES

TEXT BOOKS 1. 2. 3. 4. Automobile Engineering VOL-I , VOL- II , 8th edition – Dr. Kripal Singth Automobile Engineering 2nd – edition – R.B.Gupta Automobile Engineering-2nd edition –K.K/ Ramlingam . Automobile Engineering- 2nd edition – R.B. Gupta .

REFERENCES 1. Motor vehicle – 4th editions – Newton, Steeds. 2. automotive Mechanics – 4th edition Joseaph Heitner 3. Transaction of society of Automotive engineers vol; 1 to 6

1

TERM WORK • Assignment

1) Study of automobile Transmission 2) Study of clutch 3) Study of gear boxes. 4) Study of propeller shaft and universal joints. 5) Study of rear axle and differential. 6) Study of wheel and tyres. 7) Study of electrical system. 8) Study of lighting system. 9) Study of vehicle mainainance. 10) Problems on vehicle performance. • Laboratory Experiments 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) XI. Disassembly and assembly of clutch. Calculation of gear box gear ratios. Removal and fitting of wheel and tyres. Removal and fitting of axle shafts. Testing of battery. MID SEMESTER EXAM

Sr . N o. 6

Course Code

Course Title

L P T C r 4 2 6 1 0

Welding Engineering

Evaluation Weightage TWA MS T 15 15

ESE 70

ESE (Theor y) Hours 3

XII.

DETAILED SYLLABUS

1. Solders and Soldering Welding characteristics, capillary attraction, bond formation, metallurgy of solders, and foreign materials in the solders alloy. Designing the solder joint. Soldering iron, special technique, thermal free solder, and low temperature soldering, expanding type solders.

2. Brazing
Metallurgical aspect of brazing. Design of joint, brazing fluxes, method of heating, furnace brazing. Resistance brazing, salt bath brazing, brazing solders, silver solders.

1

3. Special welding processes
Electron beam welding, plasma arc welding, laser welding, bronze welding, under water welding.

4. Weldability of steels
Plain carbon steels- mild steels, medium carbon steel, high carbon steels, tool steels, high alloy steels, stainless steels, austenite manganese steels.

5. Weldability of aluminums and alloys
Metallurgical behavior during welding, choice of methods, welding rods & welding methods.

6. Weldability of cast iron & steels Gray cast iron, malleable cast iron, spheroidal graphite cast iron, and selection of cast iron, electrodes & methods of welding. 7. Wedability copper & alloys
Copper alloys, bronzes, phosphorous bronzes, aluminum bronze, welding of dissimilar metal joints on copper & copper alloys, methods of welding.

8. Metallurgical concept of weldability
Temperature changes in welding, concept of weldability& carbon equivalent, cracking of welds, weldability testing, welding metallurgy of dissimilar metals, and heat treatments of welds. 9. Hard facing Types of wear, hard facing metallurgy, preparing for hard facing, basic hard facing procedure, spray hard facing, basic treatment of welding 10. Design and fabrication Design for welding–types of welded joints, stress distribution, layer sequence, deposition rates, expansion, contraction and residual stresses in welded structure. 11. Principles of welding fixture design.

1

12. Indian standards for welding electrodes, fluxes, properties and electrode selection.

XIII.

TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES

TEXT BOOKS 1. Welding and welding technology 2. Welding design and process 3. Welding engineering REFERENCES 1. Welding Engineers Hand Book Oates J.A, George Newnes. Richard L. Little, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Hilton and Richard Chapman & Hall Pub. Gupta & Kaushik.

2. Welding Hand Book Vol-V-American Welding Society. XIV. TERM WORK • Assignment Atleast 10 Assignments on the topics based on the above syllabus. MID SEMESTER EXAM

XV.

1

Class : Final Year B. Tech. ( Mechanical ) Semester : VIII Sr Course . Code N o. 1 30228 0 Course Title L P T Cr Evaluation Weightage TW MST A 4 2 6 10 15 15 ESE (Theor ESE y) Hours 70 3

Design Of Mechanical Systems

XVI. DETAILED SYLLABUS 1. EOT Cranes 1.1 Hoisting Mechanism 1.2 Trolley Traveling Mechanism 1.3 Bridge Traveling Mechanism 2. Pumps 2.1 Centrifugal Pump 2.2 Gear Pump 3. Conveyors Design of Belt Conveyors 4. Hydraulic- Pneumatic Circuits 4.1Study Of Construction and Working of Components used in power hydraulic and pneumatic circuits. 4.2 Determination of Specifications and selection of components for given application XVII. TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES

TEXT BOOKS REFERENCES 1. Mechanical Handling Equipments - Rudenko (Mir Publication Moscow) 2. Material Handling Equipment - Alexandrove (Mir Publication Moscow) 3. Conveying Machines - Spivakosky & Dyachkov (Mir Publication Moscow) 4. Power Hydraulic - A. B. Goodwin (B. H. Publication) 5. Hydraulic System Analysis - J. D. Stringer (Macmillan London) 6. Hydraulic Controls in Machine Tool- Kaimovich 7. Manual published By Sperry Virkers Ltd.

1

8. IS Nos. IS: 807 IS: 3443 IS: 3777 IS: 3815 IS: 3973 9. Design Data Book PSG Design Data Book XVIII. TERM WORK • • Assignment Laboratory Experiments

MID SEMESTER EXAM Sr. No Course Code Course Title L P T Cr Evaluation Weight T W A 15 MS ES T E 15 70 15 70 ESE (Theory Hours)

2

302290

Power Plant Engineerin g

3

2

5

8

3

I DETAILED SYLLABUS 1 MODERN THERMAL POWER PLANT 1.1 Layout of modern high pressure Water Tube boiler and Power Plant. 1.2 Steam drum ,water wall. 1.3 Drum Level control, Steam pressure control, Steam temperature control. 1.4 Methods of controlling nitrogen oxides. 1.5 Regimes of fluidized bed combustion. Bubbling and circulating fluidized bed boiler. Pressurized fluidized bed boiler. 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 ECONOMICES OF POWER PLANT. Load cueve ,Load duration curve. Load factor,demand factor ,capacity factor Diversity factor,etc. Effect of fluctuating Load on operation and design of power plant.Methods of meeting fluctuating load. Base load plant .Peak load plant. Load sharing . Selection of generating equipment. Cost of electrical energy.Fixed cost.Operating cost. Tarrif methods Performance and operating characterstic of power plant.

1

DESIEL AND GAS TURBINE POWER PLANT. 2.9 General layout of desiel power plant. 2.10 Fuel,cooling,lubrication and starting system of diesel power plant. 2.11 Cycles of gas turbine power plant. 2.12 Performance of gas turbine power plant 2.13 Series flow, parallal flow gas turbine plant. 2.14 Gas turbine combustion chamber. 2.15 Free piston engine plant. 2.16 Combined gas turbine-stem turbine plant. 2.17 Repowering. 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 NUCLEAR POWER PLANT. Radioactive decay ,Half time. Types of nuclear reactions. Nuclear materials. Nuclear reactor. Boiling water reactor, Pressurised water reactor.Heavy water CANDU reactor. Gas cooled reactor. Liquid metal fast breeder reactor. Reactor control. HYDRO POWER PLANT. Rainfall .Run off and its measurement. Hydrograph.Flow duration curve. Mass curve and reservoire storage capacity. Classification of Hydro plants.Run of river plant,Storage river plant. Essential feature of hydro plant Pumped storage plant. surge tank. Selection of water turbine. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT OF POWER PLANT. Harmfull effects of power plant pollutants. Green house effect.acid rain. Air pollution and its control. Thermal pollution and its control. Disposal of nuclear waste.

II TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS: TITLE 1. Power plant engineering- 2nd Edition ,Domkundwar ,Arora. 2. Power plant engineering- 1st Edition.Rajput. 3. Power plant engineering- 2nd Edition.P.C. sharma. 4. Power plant engineering- 1st Edition, P.K.Nag. 5. Power plant engineering- 3rd Edition Morse.

1

REFERENCES 1 Power plant engineering- 2nd Edition –M.M.El-Wakil. 2 Power plant theory and design- 2nd Edition-P.J.plotter. 3 The elements of nuclear power -2nd edition –Bennat,Thomson. 4 A.S.ME.Journal of Engineering for Power. 5 A.SM.E Journal of Engineering for gas turbine. III TERM WORK • Assignments 1 study of Modern thermal power plant. 2. Study of coal handling and firing. 3. Study of feed water treatment. 4. Study of ash handling system. 5. Numerical problems on economics of power plant. 6. Study of diesel and Gas turbine power plant. 7. Study of nuclear power plant. 8. Study of hydro power plant. 9. Study of power plant pollution and control.

Labrotary Experiments

1. Plant efficiency test on turbine. IV MID SEMISTER TEST S r. N o. 3 Course Code 30230 0 Course Title L P T C r 3 3 6 Evaluation Weightage TWA MS T 30 ESE (Theor y) Hours 3

ESE 70

Industrial Engineering & ERP

I.

DETAILED SYLLABUS

PART I INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 1.1 .INTRODUCTION System approach in manufacturing organization, Feature, Identification of different types of manufacturing systems (Mass, Batch, Job and Continuous) 1.2. ORGANISATION STRUCTURE AND BEHAVIOUR

1

Definition , Need , Types , Hierarchy , Functional matrix relationship , Responsibility , Authority delegation , Span of control , Recent developments (Lean , network , Virtual , SBU’S), Theories of motivation and leadership) 1.3 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Production, planning & control – Definitions and objectives. Inventory control – Deterministic models, statistical Quality Control - Control chart for variables -Concepts of variation, Central limit theorem. Control chart techniques: Quality characteristics, trial control limits, revised control limits of mean, range and standard deviation chart, state of control, Out of control conditions. Control charts of attributes:- Control chart for fraction defectives(p), Control chart for number of defectives(np), Control for number of defects ( c), Control chart for number of defect per unit (u) . Acceptance Sampling : single, double, multiple and sequential plans, producers and consumers risk, AQL, RQL, AOQ, AOQL, ATI,ASN, Total quality management – Policies and objectives , Organization for Quality , Cost of Quality , Designing for quality , Quality systems & Standards.

1.4 WORK STUDY, METHODS ENGINEERING & ERGONOMICS Definition and Objectives , Work content – Basic work content, Total work content – in- effective time method of their reduction, Method study : Definition- Objectives and basic procedure- Different techniques used in method improvement- Process chart symbol- Process chart for operator or material process chart- Process chart for assemblies, Flow diagram- analysis and critical examination of operations and development of improved methods, Man machine chart, Multiple activity chart, Use of micro motion and memotion study , Work measurements , Significance and procedures of work measurement , Techniques of time study: Steps in making a time study - Selection of operator, Break-up of an operation in to elements, Different timing method- Recording time study data- Form used ,Different rating practices , Normal time, Different types of allowances, Standard time. Maynard operation sequencing training (MOST) , Ergonomics , Safety , Safety devices , Occupational health and hazards , Design of Work Place. Industrial psychology, Fatigue, Physical environment, Sound, Lighting, Ventilation.

1.5 FACILITIES PLANNING Types of layout, Location of facilities, (Product, Process, Line, cellular/group) Techniques for layout design for process ad product layouts, Assembly line balancing – Numerical problems.

1

1.6 MODERN DVELOPEMENT IN INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING MRP-I ( Material requirement planning ) , MRP-ii ( Manufacturing resources planning ) , JIT , KANBAN , Push and pull production systems , Theory of constraints , BRP ( Business process Re engineering ) , Lean manufacturing , Agile manufacturing , Supply chain Management , Enterprise Resources Planning – ERP,Quality function deployment . 1.7 PRODUCT RELIABILITY Introduction , Definition , Failure , Causes of failure , Nature of failure , Phases of failure , Measuring of Reliability , Reliability function Derivation , Hazard Rate z( t ) , Reliability & Hazard functions for well known distributions. PART II ERP (ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING) 2.1 INTRODUCTION What is ERP? Why ERP system is required? Managing enterprise with ERP – The new paradigm, Evolution of ERP, Material requirement planning (MRP) , Manufacturing Resources Planning (MRP-II) 2.2 THE EMERGENCE OF ERP SYSTEMS Salient feature of of ERP systems, Different perspectives of ERP systems, Information systems perspective, Manufacturing perspective, ERP systems and management perspectives. 2.3 ERP & SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT (SCM) ERP & Business Process Reengineering (BPR) ERP & Integrated Management Systems ERP & Multiplant management ERP & Enterprise Paperless Management 2.4 JUSTIFICATION OF ERP SYSTEMS Cost / Benefit analysis, Tangible and intangible benefits, challenges in their computation & subsequent measurement and associated best practices, Selection of ERP systems.

1

2.5 ERP SYSTEM IN INDIA ERP: Perspective of Indian Industries. Recent trends in ERP

II.

TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES

TEXT BOOKS 1.Management A Global Perspective , 10th Edition, Heinz Weihrich, Harold, Koontz, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd (international Edition).Production and Operation Management, Chase, Acquilano & Jacks, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd 2.Time and Motion study – Ralph M. Barnes 3.Total Quality Management – J.S. Oakland 4.Work Study and Ergonomics - H.S. Sham , Dhanpatrao 5.ERP and beyond integrating your entire organization, Gang A. LangenWalter, The St. Lucas Press/ Apics Series on resources management 6. Industrial Engineering & production Management – By Martand Telsang

REFERENCES i. E-Business & ERP transforming the Enterprise Grant Norries , James R.Hurley , Kenneth M. Hurtley , John R.D. , John D.B. ii. Plant Layout , Facilities planning By M.Apple iii. TQM ( Total Quality Management ) By Besterfield iv. Business Process reengineering Myths & Realities By Colen Coulsan , Thomson Press v. Business process redesign A View from the inside By Ashley , Bragenza, Andrew Myers ( International Thomson Business Press ) III. • TERM WORK Assignment At least five assignments on concepts, Case studies And analysis based on the topics mentioned above. • IV. Laboratory Experiments MID SEMESTER EXAM

1

Sr. Course No. Code 4 I.

Course Title

L P T Cr Evaluation Weightage TWA MST ESE 4 2 6 10 15 15 70

ESE (Theory) Hours 3

302310 CAD / CAM DETAILED SYLLABUS

1. Introduction The design process, product life cycle & CAD/CAM, computer for design process. 2. Computer graphics 2.1 Introduction, functions of graphics package, graphics devices. 2.2 Scan conversion: - scan converting line, circle ellipse. 2.3 2D-3D Transformations. 2.4 2D clipping & viewing:-line clipping, polygon clipping. 2.5 Curves: - Introduction, parametric, non parametric curves, Hermite, Bezier, B-spline Curves. 2.6 Surfaces: - Introduction, surface of revolution, sweep surfaces, bilinear surface, Coons patch, Bezier Bspline surfaces. 2.7 Hidden surface elimination: - Introduction, Visibiliti techniques, z-buffer, painters algorithm. 2.8 Solid Modeling:-Introduction, solid representation, B-rep, CSG schemes. 2.9 Graphics standards: - DXF, IGES, STEP 3. CAM 3.1 Fundamentals of NC, CNC, DNC, Basic components of Nc system, Nc procedure, Nc Co-ordinate system. 3.2 Introduction to NC part programming, Tape coding and formatting, Manual part programming. 3.3 Introduction to computer aided part programming APT language, Macro statement. 3.4 CMM & Rapid Prototyping, 4. Development of computer program for components in mechanical Engg. Design II. TEXT BOOKS & REFERENCES TEXT BOOKS 1. Computer graphics 2. CAD/CAM 3. CAD/CAM 4. CAD/CAM 5. Schaum series Ibrahim Zeid P.N.Rao. Groover.

1

REFERENCES 7. Computer graphics- Hearn & Baker 8. Computer graphics- Foley Van Dam 9. Mathematical elements for computer graphics - Roger & adams 10. Procedural Elements for computer graphics- Roger. 11. M/c Tool Design - N.K.Mehta. 12. N/C of M/C tools –Koren. III. • • IV. TERM WORK Assignment Laboratory Experiments MID SEMESTER EXAM

1

BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING

1

Second Year of Bachelor of Technology
Engineering Mathematics III 1 Complex Variables: Function of complex variable; Continuity (only statement), derivability of a function analytic, regular function; Necessary condition for f (z) to be analytic (statement of sufficient conditions); Cauchy Riemann. equation in polar coordinates; Harmonic function, orthogonal trajectories; Analytical and Milne Thomson method to fmd fez) from its real or imaginary parts. Mapping: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping with geometrical interpretations. Fourier Series and Integrals Orthogonal and orthonormal functions expression for a function in a series of orthogonal functions;' Sine and cosine function and their orthogonal properties; Fourier series, diricWet's theorem (only statement); Periodic function with period 2 and 21; Even and odd function; Half range sine and cosine series; Parseval' s relations. Complex form of Fourier series: Introduction to Fourier integral; Relation with Laplace transforms. Laplace Transforms: Function of bounded variation (statement only), Laplace transform of!, tn" eat, sinh(at), cosh(at), crf(t), shifting properties; Expressions (with proofs) for dn i) L{ f f(t)} ii) L{ f(t)/ t} iii) La f( u) du} iv) L {f(t)} dtn Unit step functions, Heaviside, Dirac functions and their Laplace transformation; Laplace transform of periodic function. Evaluation of inverse Laplace transforms, partial traction method Heaviside development, convolution theorem. Application to solve initial and boundary value problems involving ordinary differential equation with one dependent variable. Matrices Types of matrices; Adjoint of a matrix; Inverse of a matrix; Elementary transformations of a matrix; Linear dependent and independent of rows and columns of a matrix over a real field; Reduction to a normal form; Partitioning of a matrices. System of homogeneous and non homogeneous equations, their consistency and solution. References P. N. Wartikar and J. N. Wartikar, "Element of applied mathematic", Volume I and Volume II, A V. Griha, Pune. S. S. Shastri, ''Engineering Mathematics", Vol-2, Pill, Second edition, 1994. A. R. Vasistha, "Matrices", Krishna Prakasan, Meerut, 1988-89. Churchil , "Complex Variable", McGraw Hill, Tokyo. Shanti narayan, "Matrices", S. Chand Publishing House, Delhi. Shanti narayan, "Theory of function of complex variable", S. Chand Publishing House, Delhi. "Laplace transforms", Schaum's outline series, McGraw Hill. T. Veerarajan, "Engineering mathematics", TMH.

2

3 4

5

1

Name Of Course:- Electronics devices and circuits 1 Review of transistors (BJT and FET) BJT principle, Biasing, Simple remodel, Voltage and Current amplification. CE, CB, CC amplifier configurations, FET principle, Biasing, FET amplifier configurations Differential Amplifier Introduction, Circuit configurations, DC and AC analysis, FET differential amplifier, Current mirror circuit Operational Amplifier Block diagram representation, Ideal op-amp, Equivalent circuit, Op-amp with negative feedback, Open-loop configurations, Frequency response, Compensating networks, Popular 741 op-amp specifications and performance characteristics. Operational Amplifier Applications Basic op-amp applications, Instrumentation amplifier, AC amplifier, Analysis of integrator and differentiator circuits Active Filters First order and second order low pass, high pass Butterworth and band pass filter configurations Oscillators and Converters Oscillation principle, Phase shift oscillator, Wein bridge oscillator, Voltage controlled oscillator Comparators and Converters Op-amp used as basic comparator, Zero crossing detector, Schmitt trigger comparator, Voltage limiter, Comparator specifications and performance characteristics. Analog to digital converter and Digital to analog converter principles, Practical A-D converter with binary weighted resistors, Successive approximation A-D converter, Monolithic A-D converters, AD808 and 809, A-D and D- A converter specifications and performance characteristics Voltage Regulators Fixed voltage series regulators, Variable voltage regulator using IC 723, Principle of switching regulator. PWM IC voltage regulator specifications and performance characteristics. Practical power supply circuits Specialized IC applications 555 timer IC and its use as monostable and astale multivibrator, Specifications and performance characteristics

2

3

4

5

6 7

8

9

1

Name of Course :- Electrical Networks 1 2 Solution of Network with Independent Sources Linear Graphs Introductory definition; The incidence matrix A; The loop matrix B, Relationship between sub matrix of A and B cutsets and cutset matrix, Fundamental cutsets and fundamental Tiesets, Planner graphs, A & B matrices, Loop, Node, Node pair equations, Duality. 3 Network Equation in the Time Domain First and second order differential equations initial conditions; Evaluation and analysis of transient and steady state response to step, ramp, impulse and sinusoidal input functions. 4 Laplace Transform Laplace transform and it's application to analysis of network for different input functions described above Network Functions Driving point and transfer functions; Two port network, Open circuit and short circuit parameter; Transmission parameter, Hybrid parameter, Chain parameter; Interconnection of two port network, Cascade connection, Series and parallel permissibility of connection

5

6

Representation of Network Functions Pole zeros and natural frequencies, Location of pole, Even and Odd pairs of a function; Magnitude and angle of function; The delay function; All pass and minimum phase function, Net change in angle, Azimuth polynomials, Ladder network, Constant resistance network, Maximally flat response Chebyshev response; Calculation of a network function form a given angle and real part Bode method.

7

Fundamentals of Network Synthesis Energy function passive, reciprocal network; The impedance function; Condition on angle, Positive real function; Necessary and sufficient conditions; The angle property of a positive real function; Bounded real function; The real part function; Reactance functions; Realization of reactance functions; Ladder form of network, Azimuth polynomials and reactance function; Impedance and admittance of RC network under

1

network realization; Resistance inductance networks. References Franklin F. Kuo, "Network analysis and synthesis", John-Wiley & Sons M. E. Venvalkenberg, "Network analysis", Prentice Hall (I) Ltd, third edition. Willam Hayt and Jack KemmerIy, "Engineering Circuit analysis", TMH. Nolman Balbanian, T. A. Bickkart, Sundaram, "Electrical Networks", John-Wiley

1

Name of Course :- Data Structures 1 2 Introduction in C Static and Dynamic Structures, Unions, Strings, Files, Macros. Abstract Data Types, Stacks: ADT; Representation; Operations; Example; Applications; Queues: ADT; Representation; Operations; Circular and Priority Queues; Examples; Applications; Other Lists and their Implementations. Linked Lists ADT; Dynamic Memory and Pointers; Dynamic Representation; Insertion and Deletion of Nodes; Linked Stacks and Queues; Linked Lists as Data Structures; Array Implementation of Linked List; Comparison of Dynamic and Array Representations. Recursion: Recursive Definition and Processes; Recursion in C; Writing Recursive Programs; Efficiency in Recursion. Binary Tree: Binary Tree Operations and Applications; Binary Tree Representations; Node Representation; Array Representation; Binary Tree Traversals; Threaded Binary Tree; The Huffman Algorithm; Representing Lists as Binary Trees; Finding and Deleting Elements; Tree-Represented Lists; Applications of Trees: Expression Trees; Game Trees. Refrences Y. Langsam, M. 1. Augenstein and A. M. Tannenbaum, "Data Structures Using C and C++", Prentice-Hall India, Second Edition. R. Kruse, "Data Structures and Program Design", Prentice-Hall India, Third Edition. R. F. Gilberg, "Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach with C", Thomson Learning. Tremble and Sorenson, "Data Structures and Algorithms", Tata McGraw-Hill. M. A. Weiss, "Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in CH", Addison Wesley Longman, International Student Edition. Aho, 1. E. Hopcroft and 1. D. Ullman, "Data Structures and Algorithms", Addison Wesley, Low Price Edition

3

4

5

1

Name of Course :- Digital Logic design and applications 1 Number Systems Decimal, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal number system and conversion, Binary weighted codes, Signed number binary order, l's and 2's complement codes, Binary arithmetic Boolean Algebra Binary logic functions, Boolean laws, Truth tables, Associative and distributive properties, DeMorgan's Theorems, Realization of switching functions using logic gates. 3 Combinational Logic Switching equations, Canonical logic forms, Sum of product & Product of sums, Karnaugh maps, Two, three and four variable Karnaugh maps, Simplification of expressions, Quine-McCluskey minimization techniques, Mixed logic combinational circuits, Multiple output functions Analysis and Design of Combinational Logic Introduction to combinational circuit, Code conversion, Decoder, Encoder, Priority encoder, Multiplexers as function generators, Binary address, Subtractor, BCD adder, Binary comparator, Arithmetic and logic units. 5 Sequential Logic Sequential circuits, Flip-flops, Clocked and edge triggered flip-flops timing specifications counters asynchronous and synchronous, Counter design with state equations registers, Serial in serial out shift registers, Tristate register, Register transfer timing considerations Sequential Circuits State diagrams and tables, Transition table, Excitation table and equations. Examples using flipflops. Simple synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuit analysis, Construction of state diagram and counter design. 7 Programmable Logic Programmable logic devices, Programmable logic arrays and programmable array logic, Design using PAL, Field programmable gate arrays Digital Integrated Circuits Digital circuit logic levels, Propagation delay times, Power dissipation, Fan-out and

2

4

6

8

1

fan- in, Noise margin for popular logic families, TTL, LSTTL, CMOS, and ECL integrated circuits and their performance comparison, Open collector and Tri-state gates and buffers.

References John M. Yarbrough, "Digital logic", Thomson Learning. T. C. Bartee, "Digital Computer Fundamentals", McGraw Hill. D. P. Leach, A. P. Malvino, "Digital Principles and Applications", TMH. John P. Uyemura, Brookes, "Digital Systems Design", Cole publishing Co. M. Morris Mano, "Digital Logic and Computer Design", PHI. A. B. Marcontz, "Introduction to Logic Design", McGraw Hill

1

Name of Course :- Discrete Structures 1 Set Theory Sets, Venn diagrams, Set membership of tables, Laws of set theory, Partitions of sets, Power set. 2 Logic Propositions and logical operations, Truth tables, Equivalence, Implications Laws of logic, Mathematical induction and Quantifiers. 3 Relations, Digraphs and Lattice Relations, paths and digraphs; Properties and types of binary relations, Manipulation of relations, closures, Warshall's algorithm; Equivalence and Partial ordered relations; Po sets and Hasse diagram; Lattice Functions and Pigeon Hole Principle Defmition and types of functions: injective, surjective and bijective; Composition, identity and inverse; Pigeon-hole principle. Graphs Defmition; Paths and circuits: Eulerian, Hamiltonian; Planer graphs. Groups Monoids, Semigroups, Groups; Product and quotients of algebraic structures; Isomorphism, homomorphism, automorphism; Normal subgroup; Codes and group codes. Rings and Fields Rings, integral domains and fields; Ring Homomorphism. Generating Functions and Recurrence Relations Series and Sequences; Generating functions; Recurrence relations; Applications: Solving Differential equations, Fibonacci etc.

4

5

6

7

8

1

Name of Course :- Engineering Mathematics IV 1. Complex Variables Regions and Paths in Z plane; Taylor's and Laurent's development; Singularities, Poles, residue at isolated singularity and its evaluation; Residue theorem: Application to evaluate real integrals. 2 Matrices Vectors; real field inner products; Norm; Linear independence; orthogonality; Characteristic values and vectors; their properties for Hermitian and real symmetric matrices; Characteristic polynomial; Cayley Hamilton theorem; Functions of square matrix; Minimal polynomial; Diagonalizable matrix. Numerical Methods Errors: Types and Estimation; Solutions to Transcendental and polynomial equations: Bisection method; Gauss Jordan method; Newton-Raphson method; Solutions to system of linear algebraic equations: Gauss elimination method; Gauss Jordan method; Gauss Siedel iteration method; Interpolation: Linear interpolation; High order interpolation using Lagrange and Newtons methods; Finite difference operators and difference tables; Numerical Integration: Trapezoidal rule; Simpson's 1/3rd and 3/Sth rules. . Solutions to ordinary differential equations: Taylor's series method; Euler's predictor-corrector method; Rungekutta method of second and fourth order. References: P. N. Wartikar and J. N. Wartikar, "Element of applied mathematic", Vol INol II, A V. Grilia, Pune. Shanti Narayan, "Matrices", S. Chand Publishing House, Delhi. Shanti Narayan, "Theory Of Functions Of Complex Variables", S. Chand Publishing House, Delhi. S. S. Shastri, "Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis", V 01-2, PHI, Second edition, 1994. John S. Mathews, ''Numerical Method for Mathematics, Science and Engineering". Salvadari and MacCraken, ''Numerical Methods".

3

1

Name of Course :- Principles of analog and digital communication 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Introduction Introductions to signals Analysis and transmission of signals Amplitude Modulation Angle Modulation Sampling and pulse code modulation Principles of digital data transmission Emerging digital communication technologies and recent development Behavior of analog systems in the presence of noise Behavior of digital communication systems in the presence of noise Error Correcting codes.

References: • “Modern digital and analog communication systems”, B.P. Lathi; Oxford university press. “Principles of communication systems”, Taub. Schilling; TMH. “Digital communications fundamentals and applications”, Bernard Sklar; Pearson Education. “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Leoun W Couch; Pearson Education.

1

Name of Course:- Computer Organization and Architecture 1 Overview General organization and architecture; Structural/functional view of a computer; Evolution/brief history of computers. 2 System Buses Computer components-memory, cpu, i/o; Interconnection structures; Bus interconnection, multiple bus hierarchies, pci bus structure. Memory Organization Internal memory-characteristics, hierarchy; Semiconductor main memory - types of ram, chip logic, memory module organization; Cache memory-- elements of cache design, address mapping and translation, replacement algorithms; advanced dram organization; Performance characteristics of two-level memories; External memory: magnetic disk, tape, raid, optical memory; High speed memories: associative and interleaved memories. Data Path Design Fixed point representation; Floating point representation; Design of basic serial and parallel high speed adders, subtractors, multipliers, Booth's algorithm; The arithmetic and logic unit (ALU): Cmbinational and sequential ALU's. The Central Processing Unit Basic instruction cycle; Instructions sets, formats and addressing; Processor organization; Register organization; Instruction pipelining; Co-processors, pipeline processors; RISC Computers, RISC versus CISC characteristics. The Control Unit Micro- operations; Hardwired implementation; Microprogrammed control; Micro Instruction format; Applications of microprograming. Input and Output Unit External devkes-: keyboard, monitor, disk drive and device drivers; I/O modules: programmed I/O, interrupt driven I/O, DMA, I/O channels and I/O processors; Serial transmission and synchronization. Multiple Processor Organizations Flynn's classification of parallel processing systems; Pipelining concepts.

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

Second Year of Bachelor of Technology 1

Computer Technology Semester Four 307090: Analysis of algorithms

Algorithm Analysis Mathematical Background; The Model; The Time Complexity: How to Analyze and Measure; Big-Oh and Big-Omega Notations; Best Case, Average Case and Worst Case Analyses.

2

Sorting Methods Efficiency Considerations in Sorting; Different Sorting Methods: Bubble Sort; Quicksort; Straight Selection Sort; Binary Tree Sort; Heaps and Heapsort; Heap as Priority Queue; Insertion Sort; Shell Sort; Bucket Sort; Merge Sort; Radix Sort; Time Complexity Calculation; Best Case, Worst Case and Average Case Calculations of the Different Sorting Methods. Searching Methods Efficiency Considerations in Searching; Basic Searching Techniques: Sequential Search; Efficiency Considerations for Sequential Search; Searching Ordered Table; Indexed Sequential Search; Binary Search; Interpolation Search. Binary Search Tree: Implementation; Insertions and Deletions; Efficiency Considerations; General Search Trees: Multiway Search Trees; B- Trees; B+- Trees; Tries; A VL Trees Hashing: Hash Functions; Resolving Clashes (Open and Closed Hashing); Hashing in External Storage; Dynamic Hashing. Graph Graph Traversal; Application of Graph Structures: Shortest Path Problem; Topological Sorting; Minimum Spanning Tree; Connectivity in a Graph; Euler's and Hamiltonoan Graph Algorithms Analysis of all the above Algorithms; Greedy Method; Divide and Conquer Method; Dynamic Programming; Back-Tracking Method. References: Y. Langsam, M. 1. Augenstein and A. M. Tannenbaum, "Data Structures Using C and C++", Prentice Hall India, Second Edition. G. Brassard and P. Bratley, "Fundamentals of Algorithmics", Prentice-Hall India. R. F. Gilberg, "Data Structure: A Pseudocode Approach with C", Thomson Learning. Aho, J. E. Hopcroft and 1. D. Ullman, "Data Structures and Algorithms", Addison Wesley, Low Price Edition. M. A. Weiss, "Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++", Addison Wesley Longman, International Student Edition. R. Kruse, "Data Structures and Program Design in C", Prentice-Hall India. Tremble and Sorenson, "Data Structures and Algorithms", Tata McGraw-Hill. Ellis Horwitz, Sartaj Sohoni “Fundamentals of `computer algorithms” Galgotia publication.

3

4

5

1

Second Year of Bachelor of Technology

Computer Technology Semester Four 307100: Industrial Economics and Management

1

Nature and significance of economics, science, engineering, technology and their relationship with economic development, appropriate technology for developing countries Demand, supply, elasticity of demand and supply, Competition, monopoly, oligopoly, monopolistic competition, causes creating categories of monopoly organization, price determination under perfect competition and monopoly, Price discrimination, equilibrium of firm under competition and monopoly.

2

3

Functions of money,' supply and demand for money, money price level and inflation, black money, meaning, magnitude and consequences.

4

Functions of commercial banks, multiple credit creation, banking system in India, shortcomings and improvement.

5

Central Banking: Function of central banking illustrated with reference to RBI, Monetary policy - meaning, objectives and features.

6

Sources of public revenue, principles of taxation, direct and indirect taxes, distribution of incidence, tax structure, reform of tax system.

7

Theory of International Trade, balance of trade and payment, theory of protection, tariffs and subsidies, foreign exchange control, Devaluation.

8 9

New Economic Policy: Liberalization, extending privatization, globalization, marketfriendly state, export-led-growth. Causes of underdevelopment, determinants of economic development, economic and non-economic factors, stages of growth, strategy of development-big push, balanced and unbalanced, critical minimum effort strategy.

1

10

Management functions, responsibilities of management to society, development of management thought, contribution of F.W. Taylor, Henri Toylor Elton Ma'o, System contingency approaches to management.

11

Nature of planning, decision-making process, management by objectives.

12

Organization: line and staff authority relationships, decentralization of delegation of authority, span of management, flat organization.

13 14

Communication process, media channels and barriers to effective communication Maslow, Herzberg and Macgregor's theory of motivation. McClelland's achievement motivation, Blanchard's situational leadership theory.

15

Production management: Production planning and control, Inventory control, Quality control and Total quality management.

16

Project management: Project development like cycle, project feasibility, project planning, organization and control, Tools of project management - CPM, PERT. Project information systems.

17

Need for good cost accounting system, cost control techniques of financial control, financial statements, financial ratios, break-even analysis, budgeting and budgetary control.

18

Marketing functions, managements of sales and advertising, marketing research.

19

Human resource management: Function, Application of industrial psychology for selection, training, machine design and man-machine systems.

20

Engineering economics: Investment decision, present worth, Annual worth and rate of

1

return methods. Payback time.

Refrences: • N. Agarwal, "Indian Economy". Koonz and Odonne~ "Essentials of Management". K. Chatterji, "Finance for Non-Finance Managers". Prasanna Chandra, "Project Management". Samuelson, "Economics". Dewet and Warma, "Modem Economic Theory". V. S. Ramaswamy, "Marketing Management". Hampton David, "Management".

1

Third Year of Bachelor of Technology

Computer Technology Semester Four 200035 - Engineering Mathematics V

DETAILED SYLLABUS 1)Review of probability. Baye’s theorem. Discrete and continuous random variables. Probability mass function and density function. Expected value. (Expectation) Moments and moments generating functions. Relation between Raw moments and Central moments. 2) Probability, distribution : Binomal, Poisson, Normal, Student’s distribution, x2 (Chisquare), F distribution. 3) Sampling theory : Sampling distribution. Test of hypothesis. Level of significance. Critical region. One- tailed and two-tailed tests. Degree of freedom. Estimation of population parameters. Central limit theorem. Large and Small samples : Test of significance for large samples. Test of significance of the difference between sample proportion and population proportion. Test of significance of the difference between the sample proportions. Test of significance of the difference between sample mean and population means. Test of significance of the difference between the means of two samples. Test of significance for small samples : Test of significance of the difference between sample mean and population mean. Test of significance of the difference between means to two small samples drawn from the same normal population Paired- t test. F-test of significance of the difference between population variances. Test of the Goulners of fit and independence of attribute. Contingency table. Yate’s correction. 4) Fitting of curves : Least square method. Fitting of the straight line and parabolic curve. Bivariate frequency distribution. Co-relation, Co-variance. Karl Pearson’s Coefficient and Sperman’s Rank Co-relation coefficients, Regression coefficients and lines of regression. 5) Analysis of variance. 6) Statistical quality control and control charts.

1

Third Year of Bachelor of Technology

Computer Technology Semester Five 307110- Object Oriented Analysis and Design

DETAILED SYLLABUS Introduction: Overview Of OOL; Object Classes; Meta Types. Object Oriented Methodologies; The Unified Approach Modeling; Why Modeling? Static And Dynamic Models; Functional Models. Object Modeling: Object. Links. Association. Inheritance. Grouping Constructs; Problems On Object Modeling; Advantages Of Object Modeling. 3.Analysis: Problem Analysis. Problem Domain Classes. Identify Classes And Objects Of Real World Problems. Using Use Case Analysis; Recording Analysis. Basic Object Modeling: Multiplicity. Constraints. Aggregation. Component. Sequence Diagram: Modeling Scenarios. Mapping Events To Object. Interfaces. Discovering Attributes. Modeling Simple Collaboration Modeling. Logical Database Schema. Activity Diagram. Modeling Workflow. Class Diagram: Test Scenarios. Interfaces. Classes. Methods. Stress Testing. System Testing. Scalability Testing. Regression Testing. Behavioral Modeling. State Chart Diagram. Design: Architectural Design. Refining The Model. Refactoring. Coupling And Cohesion . Who Should Own The Attribute? Who Should Own The Operations? Process And Threads. Design Classes: Classes Visibility; User Interface. Subsystem Interface. Deponent Diagram: Modeling Source Codes. Physical Databases. Deployment Diagram: Modeling In A C/S System. Distributed System And Embedded Systems.

TOPICS FOR EXPERIMENT Use any UML/OOAD tool and do the following:

1

Use case diagram. Sequence diagram. Collaboration diagram. Activity diagram. Use case realization. Class diagram. Testing, Debugging, Porting. Component diagram. Change management using MAKE/SCCS utility. BOOKS Text Books: Ali Bahrami, “Object Oriented System Development “, McGraw Hill. Grady Booch, J. Rambaugh, Ivar Jacobson, ”The UML Users guide”, Pearson Education. J. Rambaugh, etal,, “Object Oriented Modeling and Design” 1. Andrew Haigh, “Object Oriented Analysis and Design”, Tata McGrawHill References: Simon Benett, Steve McRobb, Ray Farmer, “Object Oriented System Analysis and Design Using UML” McGrawHill. Timothy C. Lethbridge, Robert Laganiere, “Object Oriented Software Engineering” McGrawHill. 1. Stephen R. Schach, “Object Oriented and Classical Software Engineering”

Third Year of Bachelor of Technology

Computer Technology Semester Five 307120- Computer Network

DETAILED SYLLABUS 1.Introduction: Network Applications. Network Hardware. Network Software. Reference Models. The Physical Layer Guided Transmission Media. Wireless Transmission. Communication Satellites. The Public Switched Telephone Network. The Mobile Telephone System. Cable Television. The Data Dink Layer: Data Link Layer Design Issues. Elementary Data Link Protocols. Sliding Window Protocols. Example of Data Link Protocols: HDLC: High-Level Data Link Control, The Data Link Layer In The Internet. The Medium Access Sub-layer: The Channel Allocation Problem. Multiple Access Protocols. Ethernet. Wireless LANS.

1

Broadband Wireless. Blue Tooth. Data Link Layer Switching. The Network Layer: Network Layer Design Issues. Routing Algorithms. Congestion Control Algorithms. Quality Of Service. Internetworking. The Network Layer In The Internet: The IP Protocol, IP Addresses, Internet Control Protocols, The Interior Gateway Routing Protocol: OSPF. The Exterior Gateway Routing Protocol: BGP, Internet Multicasting, Mobile IP, Ipv6. The Transport Layer: The Transport Service. Elements Of Transport Protocols. A Simple Transport Protocol. The Internet Transport Protocols: UDP; TCP: Introduction To TCP, The TCP Service Model, The TCP Protocol The TCP Segment Header, TCP Connection Establishment, TCP Connection Release, Modeling TCP Connection Management, TCP Transmission Policy, TCP Congestion Control, TCP Timer Management, Wireless TCP And UDP, Transactional TCP. Performance Issues: Measuring Network Performance, System Design For Better PERFORMANCE, FAST TPDU Processing, Protocols For Gigabit Networks. The Application Layer: DNS: The Domain name system; Electronic Mail; SNMP. ATM Network: ATM Layer. ATM Application Layer. ATM Signaling. PNNI Routing. Case study with Window2000/Linux Text Books: A.S.Tanenbaum, ”Computer Networks”, 4th edition, Prentice Hall. B.F.Ferouzan, ”Data and Computer Communication”, Tata McGraw Hill References: Peterson & Davie,” Computer Networks”, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann. Kurose, Ross, “Computer Networking”, Addison Wesley 1. Leon-Garcia And Widjaja, “Communication Networks”, Tata Mcgraw Hill S.Keshay,”An Engg. Approach To Computer Networking”, Addison Wesley. W.Richard Stevens,”TCP/Ip Volume1, 2,3 “, Addison Wesley. D.E.Comer, ”Computer Networks And Internets”, Prentice Hall Warland, Varaiya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Morgan Kaufmann. B.F.Ferouzan, ”TCP/IP Protocol Suit”, Tata McGraw Hill

1

Third Year of Bachelor of Technology

Computer Technology Semester Five 307130- Microprocessors

DETAILED SYLLABUS 1. Introduction to Microcomputer Systems: Introduction to Microprocessors & its evolution, Overview of 8086 Family, Case study of PC System Architecture of 8086/88 Family: Memory organization & Architecture of 8086 family, 8086 Hardware Design, System clock (8284) & reset signal, buffering & latching circuits, Minimum mode & Maximum mode Operation, Study of bus controller 8288 & its use in maximum mode Connection, System Timing diagrams for 8086. 8086 Instruction Set & Programming: Addressing modes, Instruction Set in detail, ALP, Mixed language programming, Stacks, Strings, Procedures, Macros, Timers, Counters & delay. Programming examples using DOS And BIOS Interrupts, Device Drivers Programming. 8086 Interrupt System: 8086 Interrupt structure, types and applications: Study of Programmable Interrupt Controller 8259A & Interrupt Priority Management using 8259A, Memory System Design & I/O Interfacing: Interfacing SRAM, ROM and DRAM to 8086, Address decoding & Timing Considerations. I/O interfacing in 8086: Serial communication interface includes Synchronous & Asynchronous Protocols, parallel communication Interface includes I/O Mapped I/O, Memory Mapped I/O, Handshaking Signals. 6. I/O Controllers for 8086 and Data communication: Study of 8255AH Programmable Peripheral Interface & its modes; Study of 8250 UART, DMA Concepts & transfer types: Study of DMA controller 8237, Study of Programmable Timer 8254 & its modes. Data communication includes EIA RS-232C Standard, IEEE 488 GPIB. 7. 8087 Numeric Co-processor: 8087 NDP Architecture, Data types & formats, Numeric Instruction Set, Stacks in 8087, Interface of Coprocessor (8087) to Host (8086), ALP for 8086-8087 systems; Study of IOP 8089, its interaction with 8086.

1

8. Multiprocessor Systems: 8086/88 based Multiprocessor systems, Study of Multiprocessor configurations, Study of Bus Arbiter 8289, Bus arbitration & control using 8289. BOOKS Text Books: 1. Douglas Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware”, Tata McGraw-Hill.1999, Second Edition. 2. John Uffenback, ”8086/8088 Interfacing, Programming and Design”, 1987,PHI. 3. Yu-Cheng Liu, Glenn A. Gibson, “The 8086/8088 Family Architecture, Programming and Design”, PHI. 1986, Second Edition. 4. Peter Able, “IBM PC, Assembler Language Programming “, PHI.

References: 1. A. K. Ray, K. M. Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2000. 2. B. B. Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors”, PHI, 2003, Sixth Edition. Peter Norton, “IBM PC, Assembly Language programming”, BPB publication. Manuals from Intel. Third Year of Bachelor of Technology Computer Technology Semester Five 307140- Theoretical Computer Science DETAILED SYLLABUS Regular Sets And Automata Theory: Regular Sets, Regular Grammars and Languages; Regular Expressions, Grammars and Languages, Pumping Lemma, Closure properties, Decision problems, Myhill-Nerode theorem. Finite automata and Finite State Machines, NFA, DFA, FSM, Moore and Mealy Machines, Converting NFA to DFA, Minimization of Automata and FSM, Kleene’s Theorem. Context Free Grammars And Push Down Automata: Context Free Grammars and Languages, Parse Trees, CNF and GNF, Pumping Lemma, Closure properties; Push Down Automata, Concept of Stack, PDA for CFG. Turing Machine: Construction of Turing Machine for problem solving, TM as Acceptors and Generators, Variations and Equivalence of TM, TM Languages, Post Machine, Universal Turing Machine, Church’s Hypothesis. 4.Undecidability: Undecidability and Halting problem, Rice’s Theorem, Post Correspondence Problem; Unsolvable problems using TM, Unsolvable problems using CFG, Greibach Theorem; Enumerable and Recursively Enumerable Languages.

1

BOOKS Text Books: J.C. Martin, “Introduction To Languages and the Theory of Computation“, TMH, 2003,3rd Edition. Peter Linz, “Introduction Formal Languages and Automata“, Narosa. Michael Sipser, “Introduction to the Theory of Computation”, Thompson Learning, 1997.

References: J.E.Hopcroft, J.D.Ullman, “Introduction To Automata Theory, Languages And Computation”, Addison-Wesley.

Third Year of Bachelor of Technology

Computer Technology Semester Five 200020- Presentation and Communication Techniques

2

DETAILED SYLLABUS Communication in a Business Organisation: Channels,media,internal and external, formal and informal, upward and downward, nonverbal. Technical Writing Skills: definition, importance, qualities, choosing words, sentences and paragraphs; audience recognition.; principles of Business correspondence; job application and resumes. Report Writing: types, qualities, , defining objectives and scope, organizing and interpreting information,, individual and group reports, formal and informal reports. Technical Proposals Presentation Skills Group Discussion Assignments: Written One assignment each from topics 1 to 4 Oral One presentation One group discussion Books Recommended; 1 Lesikar and Petit; Report Writing for Business:McGraw Hill 2 Meenakshi Raman, Sharma Sangeetha Technical Communication:Oxford University Press .

Third Year of Bachelor of Technology

Computer Technology Semester Five 307150- Computer Programming Lab

DETAILED SYLLABUS Programming Assignments: Students will implement programs adhering to good programming practices. Problems selected should be able to use the selected programming style and language appropriately. Suggested programming style is object-oriented programming and languages may be C++, java, VC++. The assignments should be approximately 10 in number and to be completed in about 5 weeks. Problem solving assignment: This will be a mini group project to be completed within the Institute in a span of about 10 weeks. Student group should select any one stream area like database programming, network programming, multimedia programming, system programming etc. and use the appropriate skill set to design and implement the mini project.

2

References: A.D.Smith and P.D. Smith , “Graded Problems in Computer science “,Addison-Wesley.

Third Year of Bachelor of Technology

Computer Technology Semester Six 307160- System Programming

DETAILED SYLLABUS 1.Language Processors: Fundamentals of Language Processing and Language Specification. Classification of Programming Language Grammars. Static and Dynamic Binding. Language Processor Development Tools. System Software And Machine Architecture: Introduction to Systems Programs. Introduction to Data Formats. Registers and Addressing Modes for Traditional CISC Machines and RISC Machines. Assemblers: Basic Assembler Functions. Assembler Algorithm and Data Structures. Design of Single Pass Assembler. Design of Multi-pass Assemblers. Implementation Examples: MASM Assembler and SPARC Assembler. Macros And Macro Processors: Macro Definition and Expansion. Conditional Macro Expansion. Macro Parameters. Recursive Macro Expansion. Nested Macro Calls. Design of Macro Preprocessors. Implementation Examples: MASM Macro Processor; ANSI C Macro Language. Loaders And Linkers: Basic Loader Functions. Design of an Absolute Loader. Relocation and Linking Concepts. Linkage Editors. Dynamic Linking. Bootstrap Loaders. Design of a Linker. Implementation Examples: A Linker for MS-DOS. 6.Scanning And Parsing: Introduction to Regular Expressions and Finite State Automata. Optimization of DFA Based Pattern Matchers. Top-down and Bottom-up Parsing Techniques. Recursive Descent Parsing. LL (1) Parsing. LALR Parsing and Operator Precedence Parsing. LEX and YACC. Syntax Directed Translation. 7.Compilers And Interpreters: Aspects of Compilation. Memory Allocation: Run time storage organization, Static, Dynamic, Heap Storage and Garbage Compaction. Phases of Compilation: Lexical Analysis; Syntax Analysis; Intermediate Code Generation; Machine Independent and Machine Independent Code Optimization. Compilation of Expressions and Control Structures. Interpreters. Java Compiler and Environment. YACC Compiler-Compiler.

2

8.Software Tools: Software Tools for Program Development. Editors. Debug Monitors. Programming Environments. User Interfaces. BOOKS Text Books: D.M. Dhamdhere “Systems Programming And Operating Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Revised Edition, 2002. Leland L. Beck, “Systems Software”, Addison Wesley. A.V. Aho, Ravi Sethi & J.D. Ullman, “Compilers Principles and Techniques”, Pearson Education. References: 1. J.J Donovan, “Systems Programming”, TMH. Third Year of Bachelor of Technology Computer Technology Semester Six 307170- Operating Systems with UNIX DETAILED SYLLABUS Operating System Overview. Operating System Objectives and Functions. The history and evolution of Operating Systems; Characteristics of Modern Operating Systems; Windows 2000 Overview; Traditional UNIX Systems; Modern UNIX Systems. Basic concepts. Processes; files; system calls; shel;, layered structure vs monolithic structure of O.S. Processes: Process Model; Process states; Process Description; Process Control; PCB; creation of processes; context switching; exit of processes; UNIX SVR4 Process Management. Threads, SMP. Processes and Threads; Symmetric Multiprocessing; Windows 2000 Thread and SMP Management; Linux Process and Thread Management. Process Scheduling: Objectives; premptive vs non-premptive scheduling; Multiprocessor Scheduling; Real-Time Scheduling; Linux Scheduling; UNIX SVR4 Scheduling; Windows 2000 Scheduling; comparative assesment of different scheduling algorithms. Concurrency. Mutual Exclusion and Synchronization; Principles of Concurrency; Mutual Exclusion; Software Approaches; Mutual Exclusion; Hardware Support; Semaphores; Monitors; Message Passing; Readers/Writers Problem. Concurrency. Deadlock and Starvation; Principles of Deadlock; Deadlock Prevention; Deadlock Avoidance; Deadlock Detection; An Integrated Deadlock Strategy; Dining Philosophers Problem; UNIX Concurrency Mechanisms; Windows 2000 Concurrency Mechanisms.

2

3.Memory Memory Management Requirements. Memory Partitioning; Virtual memory; Paging; Segmentation; Design and implementation issues in paging and segmentation; page replacement algorithms; page fault handling; working set model; UNIX and. Linux Memory Management; Windows 2000 Memory Management. I/O Management and Disk Scheduling. I/O Devices. Organization of the I/O Function; Operating System Design Issues; I/O Buffering; Disk Scheduling; RAID; Disk Cache; UNIX SVR4 I/O; Windows 2000 I/O; File Management. Overview; File Organization; File Directories; File Sharing; Record Blocking; Secondary Storage Management; UNIX File Management; Windows 2000 File System. Case Studies: Unix. Internal representation of files; system calls for the file system; implementation of processes; process scheduling; memory management policies. Windows NT; Layered structure; interpretability BOOKS Text Books: William Stallings, “Operating Systems” Silbershatz, A., Peterson, J., Galvin, P., “Operating System Concepts”, Addison Wesley. Maurice J Bach, “The Design of the Unix Operating system”, Prentice Hall.

References: Tannenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems” Milan Milenkovic, “Operating System”, Mc Graw Hill Tannenbaum, A., “Operating Systems: Design and Implentation”, Prentice Hall

Third Year of Bachelor of Technology

Computer Technology Semester Six 307180- Web Technology

DETAILED SYLLABUS Introduction: Introduction to WEB Technology, TCP/IP, Protocols, Telnet, Electronic Mail (Email) File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Word Wide Web, Domain Name System (DNS), Uniform Resource Locator (URL), HTML: Introduction to Hypertext Markup Language, Tags, Anchors, Backgrounds, Images, Web page

2

structure, Hyper linking, Lists, Character Formatting, Color Control, Images, Tables, Frames, Multimedia, Cascading style sheet, Application with layers. Dynamic Web Pages: HTML/DHTML: Introduction to DHTML, Forms, Client-side Forms, JavaScript, Incorporating JavaScript in HTML, JavaScript expressions, Control flow and functions, String and Arrays, JavaScript objects. JavaScript Forms, Cookies, history, location. XML, CGI Scripting with Perl. Active Server Pages & Servlets: ASP Objects: Application, Request, Response, Server, Session, Forms, Query Strings, Cookies, Connectivity with databases, Using ActiveX Objects, JSP, Java Servlets. Applications: Electronics Commerce: An Introduction, Types, Solution, e-shop, Online Payment , Internet Banking BOOKS Text Books: Kriss Jamsa, Konrad King,”HTML & Web Design”, TMH 2. Achyut Godbole ,”Web Technologies”, TMH References: Box ,”Essential XML” David Whiteley,”E-Commerce”, TMH . Douglas E Comer,”Internetworking with TCP/IP”, Volume I, Pearson education Steven Holzner, “HTML Black Book”, Dreamtech. Vivek Sharma, Rajiv Sharma,”Developing e-commerce Site”,Addison Wesley. Microsoft Commerce Solutions ,Web technology, PHI Jason Hunter & William Crawford,”Java Servlet Programming”,O’REILY. Tom Negrino and Dori Smith,”JavaScript for The World Wide Web”,3rd Edition,

Third Year of Bachelor of Technology

Computer Technology Semester Six 307190- Computer Graphics

DETAILED SYLLABUS Introduction: Application Areas. Input and Output Devices. Video Display Devices: Refresh CRT; Raster scan display; Color CRT monitor; Flat panel display; Co-ordinate representation. Basic Raster Graphics Algorithm for drawing 2-D primitives: Output Characteristics: Aspect ratio; Alising and Anti-alising. Line Drawing Algorithms: DDA algorithm; Bresenham’s algorithm. Circle Generation Algorithm: Midpoint circle

2

algorithm. Ellipse Generation Algorithm: Mid-point ellipse algorithm. Area filling: Scan line polygon filling algorithm; Inside-outside test; Boundary fill algorithm; Flood-fill algorithm. 2-D Geometric Transformation: Window and Viewport: Window and Viewport relationship; World co-ordinates; Normalised device co-ordinates and Homogenous co-ordinates. Basic Transformations: Translation; Rotation and Scaling. Other Transformation: Reflection and Shear. Composite Transformation. 2-D Viewing and Clipping: Window to Viewport Co-ordinate Transformation. Clipping: Point clipping; Line: CohenSutherland algorithm, Liang Barsky clipping, Mid-point Subdivision; Polygon: Sutherland Hodgman algorithm. 3-D Concepts: 3-D Display Methods: Parallel and Perspective projections; Depth Cueing. 3-D Transformation: Basic Transformations: translation, rotation and scaling; Other Transformation: reflection and shear; Composite Transformation. 3-D Viewing and Clipping. Hidden Surface Elimination Methods: Backface Detection, Depth or Z-buffer Method, Scan Line Method, Area Subdivision Method. Curves: Spline Representation, Bezier Curves, B-spline. Light Shading: Illumination Model. Shading: Constant Intensity shading; Gouraud shading; Phong shading. Halftoning. Ray Tracing. BOOKS Text Books: Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics with C version “, Low Price Edition, 2nd Edition, 2002. 1. Newman and Sproll, “Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2002. References: Rogers and Adams, “Mathematical Elements for Computer Graphics “, TMH Xiang and Plastok, “Schaum’s Outlines Computer Graphics”, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2002. Harrington, “Computer Graphics”, McGraw Hill Rogers, “Procedural Elements for Computer Graphics“, TMH

2

Third Year of Bachelor of Technology

Computer Technology Semester Six 307200- Advance Database

DETAILED SYLLABUS 1.The Extended Entity Relationship Model And Object Model: The ER model revisited, Motivation for complex data types, User Defined Abstract Data Types And Structured Types, Subclasses, Super classes, Inheritance, Specialization and Generalization, Constraints and Characteristics of Specialization and Generalization. Relationship Types of Degree Higher Than Two. 2.Object-Oriented Databases: Overview of Object-Oriented Concepts. Object Identity, Object Structure, and Type Constructors, Encapsulation of Operations, Methods, and Persistence, Type Hierarchies and Inheritance, Type extents and Queries, Complex Objects; Database Schema Design for OODBMS; OQL, Persistent Programming Languages; OODBMS Architecture And Storage Issues; Transactions and Concurrency controlExample of ODBMSs, - O2 3.Object Relational and Extended Relational Databases: Database Design For An ORDBMS - Nested Relations and Collections; Storage And Access methods, Query processing and Optimization; An Overview of SQL3, Implementation Issues for Extended Type ;Systems. Comparison Of RDBMS, OODBMS, ORDBMS 4.Parallel and Distributed Databases and Client-Server Architecture: Architectures For Parallel Databases, Parallel Query Evaluation; Parallelizing Individual Operations, Sorting, Joins; Distributed Database Concepts, Data Fragmentation, Replication, and Allocation techniques for Distributed Database Design; Query Processing in Distributed Databases; Concurrency Control and Recovery in Distributed Databases. An Overview of Client-Server Architecture 5. Databases On The Web And Semi structured Data Web Interfaces To The Web, Overview Of XML; Structure Of XML Data, Document Schema, Querying XML Data; Storage Of XML Data, XML Applications; The Semi structured Data Model, Implementation Issues, Indexes For Text Data 6. Data Warehousing and Data Mining. Introduction To Data Warehousing, Star Schemas; Multidimensional Data Model and OLAP, Introduction To Data Mining; Mining For Rules, Tree Methods, Clustering Approaches To Data Mining; Applications Of Data Warehousing and Data Mining

2

7.Enhanced Data Models for Advanced Applications. Active Database Concepts. Temporal Database Concepts.; Spatial Databases, Concepts and architecture; Deductive Databases and Query processing; Mobile Databases, Geographic Information Systems.

BOOKS Text Books: Elmasri and Navathe, ”fundamentals of database systems “ , 4th Edition , Pearson Education Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke ,“ database management systems”, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill

References: Korth, Silberchatz, Sudarshan ,”Database System Concepts”, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill. Peter Rob and Coronel,”Database systems, Design, Implementation and Management, Fifth Edition,Thomson Learning. C.J.Date, Longman, ”Introduction To Database Systems”, 7th Edition, Addison Wesley

2

Programme: B Tech (Computer Engineering)
Semester VII Course Course Title Code 307210 307220 307230 307240 Advanced microprocessors Intelligent Systems Digital Signal Processing Software Engineering Elective-I Total

L 4 4 4 4 4 20

Contact hours P / Total T 2 2 2 2 2 10 6 6 6 6 6 30

Cr

Evaluation Weightage 10 10 10 10 10 50 TWA 15 15 15 15 15 MST 15 15 15 15 15 ESE 70 70 70 70 70

ESE (Theory) Hours 3 3 3 3 3

Elective - I
Course Code 407010 407020 407030 407040 407050 Course Title L 4 4 4 4 4 Contact hours P/T 2 2 2 2 2 Total 6 6 6 6 6 Cr 10 10 10 10 10 Evaluation weightage TWA MST ESE 15 15 70 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 70 ESE (Theory) Hours 3 3 3 3 3

407060

Image Processing Pattern Recognition Mobile Computing Embedded Systems Computer Simulation and Modeling Advanced Computer Networks

4

2

6

10

15

15

70

3

Semester VIII 307250 System Security 307260 Distributed Computing 307270 Multimedia Systems Elective-II Total

4 4 4 4 16

2 2 2 2 8

6 6 6 6 24

10 10 10 10 50

15 15 15 15

15 15 15 15

70 70 70 70

3 3 3 3

2

Elective II
Course Code 407110 407120 407130 407140 Course Title L 4 4 4 4 Contact hours P/T 2 2 2 2 Total 6 6 6 6 Cr 10 10 10 10 Evaluation weightage TWA MST ESE 15 15 70 15 15 70 15 15 15 15 70 70 ESE (Theory) Hours 3 3 3 3

407150

407160

Robotics Computer Vision Parallel Processing Data Warehousing and Mining Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems Software Testing

4

2

6

10

15

15

70

3

4

2

6

10

15

15

70

3

Project: Sr. Course No. Code 1

Course Title Project

L

P

T

407900

Cr TW MS ESE ESE A T (Theory) Hrs 8 See note below

• •

The project is evaluated in two stages. The first stage evaluation shall be done at the end of pre-final semester by a Committee of Institute faculty (at least two faculty members including project guide). The Project Guide along with an external examiner shall do the second stage evaluation at the end of final semester. The first stage assessment shall have 25% weightage. Another 25% weightage shall be given for the initiative, interest, effort and sincerity shown by the student during the entire project work. The second stage assessment shall have 50% weightage. The first stage evaluation is to be carried out after a minimum of 12 weeks of work. The project report should be submitted in the prescribed format at least three weeks prior to the end of final semester or by the prescribed date and second stage assessment can be done in the last week of semester. The project shall carry 08 credits. The grade for the project shall be declared only after second stage evaluation.

2

(307210) ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS

Objective: To study microprocessor basics and the fundamental principles of architecture related to advanced microprocessors. Pre-requisite: Microprocessors

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Overview of new generation of modern microprocessors. 2. Advanced Intel Microprocessors: Protected Mode operation of x86 Intel Family; Study of Pentium: Super-Scalar architecture & Pipelining, Register Set & special Instructions, Memory Management, Cache Organizations, Bus operation, Branch Prediction Logic. 3. Study of Pentium Family of Processors: Pentium I, Pentium II, Pentium III, Pentium IV, Pentium V: Architectural features, Comparative study. 4. Advanced RISC Microprocessors: Overview of RISC Development and current systems, Alpha AXP Architecture, Alpha AXP Implementations & Applications. 5. Study of Sun SPARC Family: SPARC Architecture, The Super SPARC, SPARC Implementations & Applications. 6. Standard for Bus Architecture and Ports: EISA, VESA, PCI, SCSI, PCMCIA Cards & Slots, ATA, ATAPI, LPT, USB, AGP, RAID 7. System Architectures for Desktop and Server based systems: Study of memory subsystems and I/O subsystems. Integration issues

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Daniel Tabak, “Advanced Microprocessors”, McGraw-Hill. 2. Barry Brey , “The Intel Microprocessors, Architecture, Programming and Interfacing” 3. Tom Shanley, “Pentium Processor System Architecture”, Addison Wesley Press.

2

References:
1. 2. 3. 4.

Ray and Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals”, TMH James Antonakos, “The Pentium Microprocessor”, Pearson Education. Badri Ram, “Advanced Microprocessors and Interfacing”, TMH Publication.
Intel Manuals.

(307220) INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS

Objectives: To understand and apply principles, methodologies and techniques in design and implementation of intelligent system. Prerequisite: Data Structures, Programming Languages, and Algorithms

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Artificial Intelligence: An overview, Intelligent Systems: Evolution of the concept. 2. Intelligent Agents: How agent should act, Structure of intelligent agents, Environments 3. Problem Solving: Solving problems by searching, Informed search methods, Game playing 4. Knowledge and Reasoning: A knowledge based agent, The wumpus world environment, Representation, Reasoning, Logic, Proportional logic, First order logic: Syntax and Semantics, Extensions and Notational variation, Using first order logic 5. Building a Knowledge Base: Properties of good and bad knowledge base, Knowledge engineering, General ontology 6. Interfacing First Order Logic: Interface rules involving quantifiers, An example proof, Forward and backward chaining, Completeness 7. Acting Logically: Planning, Practical planning: Practical planners, Hierarchical decomposition, Conditional planning 8. Uncertain Knowledge and Reasoning: Uncertainty, Representing knowledge in an uncertain domain, The semantics of belief networks, Inference in belief networks 9. Learning: Learning from observations: General model of learning agents, Inductive learning, learning decision trees, Learning in neural and belief networks: Introduction to neural networks, Perceptrons, Multilayer feed-forward network, Application of ANN, Reinforcement learning: Passive learning in a known environment, Generalization in reinforcement learning, Genetic algorithms 10. Agents that Communicate: Communication as action, Types of communicating

2

agents, A formal grammar for a subset of English 11. Expert system: Introduction to expert system, Representing and using domain knowledge, Expert system shells, Explanation, Knowledge acquisition 12. Applications: Natural language processing, Perception, Robotics

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Struart Russell and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach” 2. George F.Luger, “Artificial Intelligence: Structures and Strategies for Complex Problem Solving”, Pearson Education

References:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Nils J. Nillson, “Artificial Intelligence: A New Synthesis”, Harcourt Asia Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight, “Artificial Intelligence”, TMH Patrick Winston, “Artificial Intelligence”, Pearson Education Ivan Brakto, “Prolog Programming for Artificial Intelligence”, Pearson Education Efraim Turban Jay E.Aronson, “Decision Support Systems and Intelligent Systems” Ed. M. Sasikumar and Others, “Artificial Intelligence : Theory and Practice” Proceedings of the International Conference KBCS-2002, Vikas Publishing House

(307230) DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

Objective: Digital Signal Processing continues to play an increasingly important role in the fields that range literally from A (astronomy) to Z (zeugmatography, or magnetic resonance imaging) and encompass applications such as Compact Disc player, Speech Recognition, echo cancellations in communication systems, image Enhancement, geophysical exploration, and noninvasive medical imaging. This course aims to build concepts regarding the fundamental principles and applications of Signals, System Transforms and Filters. Pre-requisites: Nil

2

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Discrete Time Signals & System: Discrete–time signals, Discrete–time systems, Analysis of discrete-time LTI systems, Discrete-time systems described by differential equations, Implementation of discrete-time systems, Correlation of discrete-time systems 2. Z-Transform: Definition and Properties of Z-transform, Rational Z-transforms, Inverse Z-transform, one-sided Z-transform, Analysis of LTI systems in Z-domain 3. Frequency Analysis of Signals and Systems: Frequency analysis: Continuous time signals and Discrete-time signals, Properties of the Fourier transform for discrete-time signals, Frequency domain characteristics of LTI systems, LTI system as a frequency selective filter, Inverse systems and deconvolution 4. Discrete Fourier Transform: Frequency domain sampling, Properties of DFT, Linear filtering method based on DFT, Frequency analysis of signals using DFT, FFT algorithm, Applications of FFT, Goertzel algorithm, Quantisation effects in the computation of DFT 5. Implementation of Discrete Time Systems: Structure of FIR systems, Structure of IIR systems, quantization of filter coefficients, round-off effects in digital filters 6. Design of Digital Filters: Design of FIR filters, Design of IIR filters from analog filters, frequency transformations, Design of digital filters based on least-squares method digital filters from analogue filters, Properties of FIR digital filters, Design of FIR filters using windows, Comparison of IIR and FIR filters, and Linear phase filters. 7. Introduction to DSP co-processors: TMS 320C40/50, Analog Devices. 8. Applications : Image processing, Control, Speech, Audio, Telecommunication

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. J.G. Proakis, “Introduction to Digital Signal Processing”, PHI 2. Oppenhiem and Schaffer, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”

References:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. S.K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing”, TMH. T.J. Cavicchi, “Digital Signal Processing”, John Wiley. L.C. Ludeman,” Fundamentals Of Digital Signal Processing”, John Wiley. E.C. Ifeachor, B.W. Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing”, Pearson Education. S Sallivahanan, “Digital Signal Processing”, TMH. Ashok Ambardar, “Analog and Digital Signal Processing”, Thompson Learning.

2

(307240) SOFTWARE ENGINEERING

Objectives: Apply various software Engineering principles and methodologies while dealing with the various phases of software development. Pre-requisite: Programming concepts.

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Product: Evolving role of software, Software Characteristics, Software Applications, Software myths. 2. Process: Software Process, Process Models, Linear sequential model, Prototyping model, RAD model, Evolutionary software models, Component-based development, Formal methods model, Fourth generation techniques, Process technology, Product and process. 3. Project Management: Management spectrum, People, Product, Process, Project, W5HH principle. 4. Software Process and Project Metrics: Measures-Metrics-Indicators, Metrics in the process and project domains, Software measurement, Metrics for software quality, Integrating metrics within the software engineering process, Statistical quality control, Metrics for small organizations, Establishing a software metrics program. 5. Software Project Planning: Objectives, Software scope, Resources, Software project estimation, Decomposition techniques, Empirical estimation models, Make/Buy decision, Automated estimation tools. 6. Risk Analysis and Management: Reactive versus proactive risk strategies, Software risks, Risk identification, Risk projection, Risk refinement, Risk mitigation-monitoringmanagement, Safety risks and hazards, RMMM plan. 7. Project Scheduling and Tracking: Basic concepts, Relationship between people and effort, Defining a task set for the software project, Selecting software Engineering tasks, Refinement of major tasks, Defining a task network, Scheduling, Earned value network, Error tracking, Project plan. 8. Software Quality Assurance: Quality concepts, Quality Movement, Software quality assurance, Software reviews, Formal technical reviews, Formal approaches to SQA, Statistical software quality assurance, Software reliability, Mistake-proofing for software, ISO 9000 quality standards, SQA plan. 9. Software Configuration Management: Introduction, SCM process, Identification of objects in the software configuration, Version control, Change control, Configuration audit, Status reporting, SCM standards. 10. System Engineering: Computer-based systems, System engineering hierarchy, Business process engineering, product engineering, Requirements engineering, System modeling. 11. Analysis Concepts and Principles: Requirement Analysis, Requirement elicitation for software, Analysis principles, Software prototyping, Specification. 12. Analysis Modeling: Introduction, Elements of analysis model, Data modeling,

2

Functional modeling and information flow, Behavioral modeling, Mechanics of structured analysis, Data dictionary, Other classical analysis methods. 13. Design Concepts and Principles: Software design and software engineering, Design process, Design principles, Design concepts, Effective modular design, Design heuristics for effective modularity, Design model, Design documentation. 14. Architectural Design: Software architecture, Data design, Architectural styles, Analyzing alternative architectural designs, Mapping requirements into a software architecture, Transform mapping, Transaction mapping, Refining architectural design. 15. User Interface Design: The golden rules, User interface design, Task analysis and modeling, Interface design activities, Implementation tools, Design evaluation. 16. Component-Level Design: Structured programming, Comparison of design notation. 17. Software Testing Techniques: Software testing fundamentals, Test case design, White-box testing, Basis path testing, Control structure testing, Black-box testing, Testing for specialized environments, architectures and applications. 18. Software Testing Strategies: Strategic approach to software testing, Strategic issues, Unit testing, Integration testing, Validation testing, System testing, Art of debugging. 19. Technical Metrics for Software: Software quality, framework for technical software metrics, Metrics for the analysis model, Metrics for the design model, Metrics for source code, Metrics for testing, Metrics for maintenance.

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Roger Pressman, “Software Engineering”, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition. 2. James Peter, “Software Engineering An Engineering Approach”, John Wiley 3. Ian Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, Pearson Education.

References:
1. 2. 3. 4. W.S. Jawadekar, “Software Engineering”, TMH. Pankaj Jalote, “An Integrated Approach To Software Engineering “, Narosa. R. Mall, “Fundamentals of Software Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India A. Behferooz & F. J. Hudson, “Software Engineering Fundamentals”, Oxford University Press 5. S. L. Pfleeger, “Software Engineering Theory and Practice”, Pearson Education

2

(407010) IMAGE PROCESSING (ELECTIVE-I)

Objective: Digital Image Processing is a rapidly evolving field with growing applications in science and engineering. Image processing holds the possibility of developing the ultimate machine that could perform the visual functions of all living beings. There is an abundance of image processing applications that can serve mankind with the available and anticipated technology in the near future. Pre-requisites: Digital Signal Processing, & Computer Graphics

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Digital Image Processing Systems: Introduction, Structure of human eye, Image formation in the human eye, Brightness adaptation and discrimination, Image sensing and acquisition, Storage, Processing, Communication, Display. Image sampling and quantization, Basic relationships between pixels 2. Image Transforms (Implementation): Introduction to Fourier transform, DFT and 2D DFT, Properties of 2-D DFT, FFT, IFFT, Walsh transform, Hadamard transform, Discrete cosine transform, Slant transform, Optimum transform: Karhunen - Loeve (Hotelling) transform. 3. Image Enhancement in the Spatial Domain: Gray level transformations, Histogram processing, Arithmetic and logic operations, Spatial filtering: Introduction, Smoothing and sharpening filters 4. Image Enhancement in the Frequency Domain: Frequency domain filters: Smoothing and Sharpening filters, Homomorphic filtering 5. Wavelets and Multiresolution Processing: Image pyramids, Subband coding, Haar transform, Series expansion, Scaling functions, Wavelet functions, Discrete wavelet transforms in one dimensions, Fast wavelet transform, Wavelet transforms in two dimensions 6. Image Data Compression: Fundamentals, Redundancies: Coding, Interpixel, Psychovisual, Fidelity criteria, Image compression models, Error free compression, Lossy compression, Image compression standards: Binary image and Continuous tone still image compression standards, Video compression standards. 7. Morphological Image Processing: Introduction, Dilation, Erosion, Opening, Closing, Hit-or-Miss transformation, Morphological algorithm operations on binary images, Morphological algorithm operations on gray-scale images 8. Image Segmentation: Detection of discontinuities, Edge linking and Boundary detection, Thresholding, Region based segmentation 9. Image Representation and Description: Representation schemes, Boundary

2

descriptors, Regional descriptors

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. R.C.Gonsales R.E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Second Edition, Pearson Education 2. Anil K.Jain, “Fundamentals of Image Processing”, PHI

References:
1. William Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Wiley 3. Milan Sonka,Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision” Thomson Learning 2. N Ahmed & K.R. Rao, “Orthogonal Transforms for Digital Signal Processing” Springer

3. B. Chanda, D. Dutta Majumder, “Digital Image Processing and Analysis”, PHI.

(407020) PATTERN RECOGNITION (ELECTIVE-I)

Objective: This course teaches the fundamentals of techniques for classifying multidimensional data, to be utilized for problem-solving in a wide variety of applications, such as engineering system design, manufacturing, technical and medical diagnostics, image processing, economics, psychology. Pre-requisite: Linear Algebra, Probability and Statistics

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Introduction: Machine perception, Pattern recognition systems, Design cycle, Learning and Adaptation

2

2. Bayesian Decision Theory: Bayesian decision theory: Continuous features, Minimumerror rate classification, classification, Classifiers, Discriminant functions and Decision surfaces, Normal density, Discriminant functions for normal density, Bayes Decision theory: discrete features 3. Maximum-Likelihood and Bayesian Parameter Estimation: Maximum likelihood estimation, Bayesian estimation, Bayesian parameter estimation: Gaussian caseand General theory, Prolems of dimentionality, Hidden Markov Model 4. Nonparametric Techniques: Density estimation, Parzen windows, kn-NearestNeighbor estimation, Nearest-Neighbor rule, Matrics and Nearest-Neighbor classification 5. Linear Discriminants Functions: Linear discriminant functions and decision surfaces, Generalised linear discriminant functions, 2-Category linearly separable case, Minimising the Perceptron criterion function, Relaxation procedure, Non-separable behavior, Minimum squared error procedure, Ho-Kashyap procedures, Multicategory generalizations 6. Nonmetric Methods: Decision tree, CART, ID3, C4.5, Gramatical methods, Gramatical interfaces 7. Algorithm Independent Machine Learning: Lack of inherent superiority of any classifier, Bias and Variance, Resampling for estimating statistic, Resampling for classifier design, Estimating and comparing classifiers, Combining classifiers 8. Unsupervised Learning and Clustering: Mixture densities and Identifiability, Maximum-Likelihood estimations, Application to normal mixtures, Unsupervised Bayesian learning, Data description and clustering criterion function for clustering, Hierarchical clustering 9. Applications of Pattern Recognition

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Duda, Hart, and Stock, “Pattern Classification”, John Wiley and Sons. 2. Gose, Johnsonbaugh and Jost, “Pattern Recognition and Image analysis”, PHI

(407030) MOBILE COMPUTING (ELECTIVE-I)

Objective: Recent developments in portable devices and high-bandwidth, ubiquitous wireless networks has made mobile computing a reality. Indeed, it is widely predicted that

2

within the next few years’ access to Internet services will be primarily from wireless devices, with desktop browsing the exception. Such predictions are based on the huge growth in the wireless phone market and the success of wireless data services.This course will help in understanding fundamental concepts, current developments in mobile communication systems and wireless computer networks. Pre-requisites: Computer Networks.

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Introduction: Applications, A short history of wireless communication 2. Wireless Transmission: Frequency for radio transmission, Signals, Antennas, Signal propagation, Multiplexing, Modulation, Spread spectrum, Cellular systems. 3. Medium Access Control: Motivation for a specialized MAC: Hidden and Exposed terminals. Near and Far terminals; SDMA, FDMA, TDMA: Fixed TDM, Classical Aloha, Slotted Aloha, Carrier sense multiple access, Demand assigned multiple access, PRMA packet reservation multiple access, Reservation TDMA, Multiple access with collision avoidance, Polling, Inhibit sense multiple access; CDMA: Spread Aloha multiple access. 4. Telecommunication Systems: GSM: Mobile services, System architecture, Radio interface, Protocols, Localization And Calling, Handover, Security, New data services; DECT: System architecture, Protocol architecture; TETRA, UMTS and IMT-2000: UMTS Basic architecture, UTRA FDD mode, UTRA TDD mode 5. Satellite Systems: History, Applications, Basics: GEO, LEO, MEO; Routing, Localization, Handover, Examples 6. Broadcast Systems: Overview, Cyclic repetition of data, Digital audio broadcasting: Multimedia object transfer protocol; Digital video broadcasting 7. Wireless LAN: Infrared vs. Radio transmission, Infrastructure and Ad hoc Networks, IEEE 802.11: System architecture, Protocol architecture, Physical layer, Medium access control layer, MAC management, Future development; HIPERLAN: Protocol architecture, Physical layer, Channel access control. Sublayer, Medium access control Sublayer, Information bases And Networking; Bluetooth: User scenarios, Physical layer, MAC layer, Networking. Security, Link management. 8. Wireless ATM: Motivation for WATM, Wireless ATM working group, WATM services, Reference model: Example configurations, Generic reference model; Functions: Wireless mobile terminal side, Mobility supporting network side; Radio access layer: Requirements, BRAN; Handover: Handover reference model, Handover requirements, Types of handover, Handover scenarios, Backward handover, Forward handover; Location management: Requirements for location management, Procedures and Entities; Addressing, Mobile quality of service, Access point control protocol 9. Mobile Network Layer: Mobile IP: Goals, assumptions and requirements, Entities and Terminology, IP packet delivery, Agent advertisement and discovery, Registration, Tunneling and Encapsulation , Optimizations, Reverse tunneling, Ipv6; Dynamic host configuration protocol, Ad hoc networks: Routing, Destination sequence distance vector, Dynamic source routing, Hierarchical algorithms, Alternative metrics 10. Mobile Transport Layer: Traditional TCP: Congestion control, Slow start, Fast retransmit/fast recovery, Implications on mobility; Indirect TCP, Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Fast retransmit/fast recovery, Transmission/time-out freezing, Selective retransmission, Transaction oriented TCP

2

11. Support for Mobility: File systems: Consistency, Examples; World Wide Web: Hypertext transfer protocol, Hypertext markup language, Some approaches that might help wireless access, System architectures; Wireless application protocol: Architecture, Wireless datagram protocol, Wireless transport layer security, Wireless transaction protocol, Wireless session protocol, Wireless application environment, Wireless markup language, WML script, Wireless telephony application, Examples Stacks with Wap, Mobile databases, Mobile agents

BOOKS
Text Books: 1. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile communications”, Addison wisely , Pearson Education 2. Wiiliam Stallings, “Wireless Communications and Networks” References : 1. Rappaort, “Wireless Communications Principals and Practices” 2. YI Bing Lin , “Wireless and Mobile Network Architectures”, John Wiley 3. P. Nicopolitidis , “Wireless Networks”, John Wiley 4. K Pahlavan, P. Krishnamurthy , “Principles of Wireless Networks” 5. M. Richharia , “Mobile Satellite Communication: Principles and Trends”, Pearson Education

(407040) EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE-I)

Objective: Embedded system tools and products are evolving rapidly. This course deals with various approaches to building embedded systems. It introduces unified view of hardware and software. The aim of this course is to make the students aware of the various applications of embedded systems. Pre-requisites: Microprocessors and C Programming

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. An overview of embedded systems: Introduction to embedded systems, Categories and requirements of embedded systems, Challenges and issues related to embedded software development, Hardware/Software co-design, Introduction to IC technology, Introduction to design technology

2

2. Embedded Software development: Concepts of concurrency, processes, threads, mutual exclusion and inter-process communication, Models and languages for embedded software, Synchronous approach to embedded system design, Scheduling paradigms, Scheduling algorithms, Introduction to RTOS, Basic design using RTOS 3. Embedded C Language: Real time methods, Mixing C and Assembly, Standard I/O functions, Preprocessor directives, Study of C compilers and IDE, Programming the target device 4. Hardware for embedded systems: Various interface standards, Various methods of interfacing, Parallel I/O interface, Blind counting synchronization and Gadfly Busy waiting, Parallel port interfacing with switches, keypads and display units, Memory and high speed interfacing, Interfacing of data acquisition systems, Interfacing of controllers, Serial communication interface, Implementation of above concepts using C language 5. Study of ATMEL RISC Processor: Architecture, Memory, Reset and interrupt , functions, Parallel I/O ports, Timers/Counters, Serial communication, Analog interfaces, Implementation of above concepts using C language, Implementation of above concepts using C language 6. Case studies and Applications of embedded systems: Applications to: Communication, Networking, Database, Process Control, Case Studies of: Digital Camera, Network Router, RTLinux

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems”, TMH 2. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer ", Pearson Education 3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillispie Mazidi, “The 8051Microcontroller and Embedded Systems", Pearson Education

References:
1. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design: A Unified Hardware/Software Introduction", John Wiley 2. Craig Hollabaugh, “Embedded Linux", Pearson Education 3. Daniel Lewis, “Fundamentals of Embedded Software”, Pearson Education. 4. Barnett, Cox, O’Cull, “Embedded C Programming and the Atmel AVR ", Thomson Learning 5. Myke Predko, “Programming and Customizing the 8051 Microcontroller”, TMH

2

(407050) COMPUTER SIMULATION AND MODELING (ELECTIVE-I)

Objective: In the last five decades digital computer simulation has developed from infancy to a full-fledged discipline. The field of modeling and simulation is as diverse as of man. The application of simulation continues to expand, both in terms of extent to which simulation is used and the range of applications. This course gives a comprehensive and state of art treatment of all the important aspects of a simulation study, including modeling, simulation software, model verification and validation, input modeling. Pre-Requisite: Probability and Statistics

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Introduction to Simulation: System and System environment, Components of system, Type of systems, Type of models, Steps in simulation study, Advantages and Disadvantages of simulation. 2. Simulation Examples: Simulation of Queueing systems, Other examples of simulation. 3. General Principles: Concepts of discrete event simulation, List processing, 4. Simulation Software: History of simulation software, Desirable software features, General-purpose simulation packages, Object oriented simulation, Trends in simulation software. 5. Statistical Models in Simulation: Useful statistical model, Discrete distribution, Continuous distribution, Poisson process, Empirical distribution. 6. Queueing Models: Characteristics of Queueing systems, Queueing notations, Long run measures of performance of Queueing systems, Steady state behavior of infinite population Markovian models, Steady state behavior finite population model, Network of Queues. 7. Random Number Generation: Properties of random numbers, Generation of pseudo random numbers, Techniques for generating random numbers, Tests for random numbers. 8. Random Variate Generation: Inverse transform technique, Convolution method, Acceptance rejection techniques 9. Input Modeling: Data Collection, Identifying the Distribution of data, Parameter estimation, Goodness of fit tests, Selection input model without data, Multivariate and Time series input models. 10. Verification and Validation of Simulation Model: Model building, Verification, and Validation, Verification of simulation models, Calibration and Validation of models. 11. Output Analysis for a Single Model: Types of simulations with respect to output analysis, Stochastic nature of output data, Measure of performance and their estimation, Output analysis of terminating simulators, Output analysis for steady state simulation 12. Comparison and Evaluation of Alternative System Design: Comparison of two

2

system design, Comparison of several system design, Meta modeling, Optimization via simulation. 13. Case Studies: Simulation of manufacturing systems, Simulation of computer systems, Simulation of super market, Simulation of pert network

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Jerry Banks, John Carson, Barry Nelson, David Nicol, “Discrete Event System Simulation” 2. Averill Law, W. David Kelton, “Simulation Modeling and Analysis”, McGRAW-HILL

References:
1. Geffery Gordon, “System Simulation”, PHI 2. Bernard Zeigler, Herbert Praehofer, Tag Gon Kim, “Theory of Modeling and Simulation”, Academic Press 3. Narsing Deo, “System Simulation with Digital Computer”, PHI 4. Donald W. Body, “System Analysis and Modeling”, Academic Press Harcourt India 5. W David Kelton, Randall Sadowski, Deborah Sadowski, “Simulation with Arena”, McGRAW-HILL.

(407060) ADVANCED COMPUTER NETWORKS (ELECTIVE-I)

Objectives: In first part, Advanced technologies like High speed Devices etc. are to be considered. Second part Network programming is to be studied. Not just SOCKETS but also protocols, Drivers, Simulation Programming. In third part we should study Network Design, Protocols designs and analysis considering deterministic and non-deterministic approach. We expect natural thinking from student. For example he should able to consider different constraints and assume suitable data and solve the problems. Pre-requisites: Computer networks

2

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Data Communications: Business Drivers and Networking Directions : Data communication Past and future. 2. Understanding the standards and their maker: Creating standards: players and Process, Current forums, Standard protocols, Layered reference models: The OSIRM, Standard computer architectures. 3. Introduction to Transmission Technologies: Hardware selection in the design process. 4. Optical Networking: SONET/SDH standards, Dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM), Performance and Design considerations. 5. Physical Layer Protocols and Access Technologies: Physical Layer Protocols and Interfaces, Accessing the Network, Copper access technologies, Cable Access Technologies, Fiber Access Technologies, Air Access Technologies. 6. Common Protocols and Interfaces in the LAN environment: Data link layers protocols, LLC and MAC sub layer protocol, Ethernet, Token Ring, Token Bus and FDDI, Bridge protocols, Switching in the LAN environment. 7. Frame Relay: FR specification and design, VoFR: Performance and Design considerations, Advantages and disadvantages of FR. 8. Common WAN Protocol: ATM: Many faces of ATM, ATM protocol operation (ATM cell and Transmission), ATM networking basics, Theory of operations, B-ISDN protocol reference model, PHY layer, ATM layer (Protocol model), ATM layer and cell (Definition), Traffic descriptors and parameters, Traffic and Congestion control defined, AAL Protocol model, Traffic contract and QoS, User plane overview, Control plane AAL, Management plane, Sub-DS3 ATM, ATM public services. 9. Common Protocols and Interfaces in the Upper Layers(TCP/IP): Background (Routing protocols), TCP/IP suite, Network layer (Internetwork layer), Transport layer, Application layer, Addressing and routing design. 10. Mature Packet Switched Protocol: ITU Recommendation X.25, User connectivity, Theory of Operation, Network layer functions, X.75 Internetworking protocol, switched multimegabit data service (SMDS), SMDS and IEEE 802.6, Subscriber Interface and Access protocol, Addressing and Traffic control. 11. Requirements Definition: User requirements, Traffic sizing, Traffic characteristics, Protocols, Time and Delay considerations, Connectivity, Availability, Reliability and Maintainability, Service aspects, Budget constraints,. 12. Traffic Engineering and Capacity planning: Background (Throughput calculations) , Traffic engineering basics (Traffic characteristics), Traditional Traffic engineering, Queued data and packet switched traffic modeling, Designing for peaks, Delay or Latency, Availability and reliability, Network performance modeling, Creating the traffic matrix, Capacity planning and Network vision, Design tool, Categories of tools, Classes of design tool, Components of design projects, Types of design projects. 13. Technology Comparisons: Circuits-message-packet and cell switching methods, Packet switching service aspects, Generic packet switching network characteristics, Private verses public networking, Public network service selection, Business aspects of Packet-Frame and cell switching services, High speed LAN protocols comparisons, Application performance needs. 14. Access Network Design: Network design layers, Access layer design, Access network capacity, network topology and hardware, completing the access network design. 15. Backbone Network Design: Backbone requirements, Network capacities, Topologies,

2

Topologies strategies, Tuning the network.

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Darren L Spohn, “Data Network Design”, TMH 2. D. Bertsekas, R. Gallager, “Data Networks”, PHI

References:
1. W.R. Stevens, “Unix Network Programming”, Vol.1, Pearson Education 2. J.Walrand, P. Varaiya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Morgan Kaufmann 3. Y. Zheng, S. Akhtar, “Networks for Computer Scientists and Engineers”, Oxford 4. A.S. Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks” 5. Peterson & Davie, “Computer Networks”, Harcourt Asia. 6. James D. McCabe , “Practical Computer Analysis and Design”, Harcourt Asia.

( 307250) SYSTEM SECURITY

Objectives of the course: Learn about the threats in computer security. Understand what puts you at a risk and how to control it. Controlling a risk is not eliminating the risk but to bring it to a tolerable level. Pre-requisites: Computer Networks, Operating system.

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Introduction: Security, Attacks, Computer criminals, Method of defense 2. Cryptography: Basic Cryptography: Classical Cryptosystems, Public key Cryptography, Cryptographic checksum, Key Management: Key exchange, Key generation, Cryptographic key infrastructure, Storing and revoking keys, Hash algorithm, Digital signature, Cipher Techniques: Problems, Stream and block ciphers: AES, DES, RC4. 3. Program Security: Secure programs, Non-malicious program errors, Viruses and other malicious code, Targeted malicious code, Controls against program threats

2

4. Operating System Security: Protected objects and methods of protection, Memory address protection, Control of access to general objects, File protection mechanism, Authentication: Authentication basics, Password, Challenge-response, Biometrics. 5. Database Security: Security requirements, Reliability and integrity, Sensitive data, Interface, Multilevel database, Proposals for multilevel security 6. Security in Networks: Threats in networks, Network security control, Firewalls, Intrusion detection systems, Secure e-mail, Networks and cryptography, Example protocols: PEM, SSL, IPsec 7. Administrating Security: Security planning, Risk analysis, Organizational security policies, Physical security. 8. Legal, Privacy, and Ethical Issues in Computer Security: Protecting programs and data, Information and law, Rights of employees and employers, Software failures, Computer crime, Privacy, Ethical issues in computer society, Case studies of ethics Books Text Books: 1. Stallings, “Cryptography And Network Security: Principles and practice” 2. C. P. Pfleeger, and S. L. Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”, Pearson Education. 3. Matt Bishop, “Computer Security: Art and Science”, Pearson Education. References : 1. Kaufman, Perlman, Speciner, “Network Security” 2. Eric Maiwald, “Network Security : A Beginner’s Guide”, TMH 3. Bruce Schneier, “Applied Cryptography”, John Wiley. 4. Macro Pistoia, “Java network security “, Pearson Education 5. Whitman, Mattord, “Principles of information security”, Thomson

2

(307260) DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING

Objective: This course aims to build concepts regarding the fundamental principles of distributed systems. The design issues and distributed operating system concepts are covered. Pre-requisites: Operating Systems and Computer Networks

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Introduction to Distributed System: Goals, Hardware concepts, Software concepts, and Client-Server model. Examples of distributed systems. 2. Communication: Layered protocols, Remote procedures call, Remote object invocation, Message-oriented communication, Stream-oriented communication. 3. Processes: Threads, Clients, Servers, Code Migration, Software agent. 4. Naming: Naming entities, Locating mobile entities, Removing un-referenced entities. 5. Synchronization: Clock synchronization, Logical clocks, Global state, Election algorithms, Mutual exclusion, Distributed transactions. 6. Consistency and Replication: Introduction, Data centric consistency models, Client centric consistency models, Distribution protocols, Consistency protocols. 7. Fault Tolerance: Introduction, Process resilience, Reliable client server communication, Reliable group communication. Distributed commit, Recovery. 8. Security: Introduction, Secure channels, Access control, Security management. 9. Distributed File System: Sun network file system, CODA files system. 10. Case Study: CORBA, Distributed COM, Globe, Comparison of CORBA, DCOM, and Globe.

BOOKS
Text Books: 1. A. Taunenbaum, “Distributed Systems: Principles and Paradigms” 2. G. Coulouris, J. Dollimore, and T. Kindberg, “Distributed Systems: Concepts and Design”, Pearson Education References: 1. M. Singhal, N. Shivaratri, “Advanced Concepts in Operating Systems”, TMH

2

(307270) MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS

Objectives of the course: This course teaches students to collect, and intelligently integrate multiple media on computers. Students learn the issues involved in capturing, compressing, processing, manipulating, searching, indexing, storing, and retrieving various kinds of continuous media in the text section. Pre-requisites: Operating Systems, Computer Networks

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Multimedia Systems Introduction: Multimedia application, Multimedia system architecture, Evolving technologies for multimedia systems, defining objects for multimedia systems, Multimedia data interface standards 2. Compression and Decompression: Types of compression, Binary image compression schemes, Color, Gray scale, Still video image compression, Video image compression, Audio compression, Fractal compression, Data and File Format Standards: Rich text format, TIFF, RIFF, MIDI, JPEG, AVI, MPEG 3. Multimedia Input/Output Technologies: Key technologies issues, Pen input, Video and Image display system, Printout technology, Image scanners, Digital Voice and Audio, Full motion video 4. Storage and Retrieval Technologies: Magnetic media technology, Optical media, Hierarchical storage management, Cache management for storage system, Image and video databases: Indexing and Retrieval 5. Architectural and Telecommunications Considerations: Specialized computational processors, Memory systems, Multimedia board solutions, LAN/WAN connectivity, Multimedia transport across ATM networks, Multimedia across wireless, Distributed object models 6. Multimedia Networking: Multimedia networking applications, Streaming stored audio and video, RTP, Scheduling and policing mechanisms, Integrated services, RSVP 7. Multimedia Application Design: Multimedia application classes, Types of multimedia systems, Virtual reality design, Components of multimedia systems, Organizing multimedia databases, application workflow design issues, Distributed application design issues, Applications like Interactive, Television, Video Conferencing, Videoon-demand, Educational applications and authoring, Industrial applications, Multimedia archives and digital libraries 8. Multimedia Authoring and User Interface: Multimedia authoring systems, Hyper media application design considerations, User interface design, information access, Object display/playback issues 9. Hyper Media Messaging: Mobile messaging, Hyper media message components, Hypermedia linking and embedding, Creating hypermedia messages, integrated multimedia message standards, Integrated document management, The world-wide web, Open hypermedia systems, Content based navigation.

2

10. Distributed Multimedia Systems: Components of distributed multimedia systems, Distributed client server operations, Multimedia object servers, Multi-server network topologies, Distributed multimedia database, Managing distributed objects 11. Multimedia System Design: Methodology and considerations, Multimedia systems design examples.

Books

Text Books:
1. Prabhat K. Andheigh, Kiran Thakrar, “Multimedia Systems Design”, PHI John F, 2. Koegel Buford, “Multimedia Systems”, Pearson Education.

References :
1. Free Halshall, “Multimedia Communications”, Pearson Education. 2. R. Steimnetz, K. Nahrstedt, “Multimedia Computing, Communications and Applications”, Pearson Education 3. K.R. Rao, D. Milovanovic, “Multimedia Communication Systems: Techniques, Standards, and Networks” 4. Subrahmanian, “Multimedia Database Systems”, M. Kaufman 5. J. D. Gibson, “Multimedia Communications: Directions and Innovations”, Academic Press, Hardcourt India 6. J.F. Kurose, K.W. Ross, “Computer Networking”, Pearson Education

(407110) ROBOTICS (ELECTIVE-II)

Objective: The goal of the course is to familiarize the students with the concepts and techniques in robot manipulator control, enough to evaluate, chose, and incorporate robots in engineering systems. Pre-requisite: Exposure to linear algebra and matrix operations. Exposure to programming in a high level language

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Robotic Manipulation: Automation and Robots, Classification, Application,

2

2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8.

Specification, Notations. Direct Kinematics: Dot and cross products, Co-ordinate frames, Rotations, Homogeneous, Co-ordinates, Link co-ordination arm equation, (Five-axis robot, Four axis robot, Six axis robot). Inverse Kinematics: General properties of solutions tool configuration Five axis robots, Three-Four axis, Six axis robot (Inverse kinematics). Workspace analysis and trajectory planning work envelop and examples, workspace fixtures, Pick and place operations, Continuous path motion, Interpolated motion, Straight-line motion. Robot Vision: Image representation, Template matching, Polyhedral objects, Shane analysis, Segmentation (Thresholding, region labeling, Shrink operators, Swell operators, Euler numbers, Perspective transformation, Structured Illumination, Camera calibration). Task Planning: Task level programming, Uncertainty, Configuration, Space, Gross motion, Planning, Grasp planning, Fine-motion Planning, Simulation of Planer motion, Source and goal scenes, Task planner simulation. Moments of Inertia. Principles of NC and CNC Machines.

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Robert Shilling, “Fundamentals of Robotics-Analysis and control”, PHI. 2. Fu, Gonzales and Lee, “Robotics”, McGraw Hill 3. J.J, Craig, “Introduction to Robotics”, Pearson Education

References:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Staughard, “Robotics and AI”, PHI. Grover, Wiess, Nagel, Oderey, “Industrial Robotics”, McGraw Hill Walfram Stdder, “Robotics and Mecatronics”, TMH. Niku, “Introduction to Robotics”, Pearson Education Klafter, Chmielewski, Negin, “Robot Engineering”, PHI Mittal, Nagrath, “Robotics and Control”, TMH

2

(407120) COMPUTER VISION (ELECTIVE-II)

Objective: To introduce the student to computer vision algorithms, methods and concepts which will enable the student to implement computer vision systems with emphasis on applications and problem solving Pre-requisite: Introduction to Image Processing.

DETAILED SYLLABUS
9. Recognition Methodology: Conditioning, Labeling, Grouping, Extracting, Matching. Edge detection, Gradient based operators, Morphological operators, Spatial operators for edge detection. Thinning, Region growing, region shrinking, Labeling of connected components. 10. Binary Machine Vision: Thresholding, Segmentation, Connected component labeling, Hierarchal segmentation, Spatial clustering, Split & merge, Rule-based Segmentation, Motion-based segmentation. 11. Area Extraction: Concepts, Data-structures, Edge, Line-Linking, Hough transform, Line fitting, Curve fitting (Least-square fitting). 12. Region Analysis: Region properties, External points, Spatial moments, Mixed spatial gray-level moments, Boundary analysis: Signature properties, Shape numbers. 13. Facet Model Recognition: Labeling lines, Understanding line drawings, Classification of shapes by labeling of edges, Recognition of shapes, Consisting labeling problem, Back-tracking, Perspective Projective geometry, Inverse perspective Projection, Photogrammetry – from 2D to 3D, Image matching : Intensity matching of ID signals, Matching of 2D image, Hierarchical image matching. 14. Object Models And Matching: 2D representation, Global vs. Local features. 15. General Frame Works For Matching: Distance relational approach, Orderedstructural matching, View class matching, Models database organization. 16. General Frame Works: Distance –relational approach, Ordered –Structural matching, View class matching, Models database organization. 17. Knowledge Based Vision: Knowledge representation, Control-strategies, Information integration.

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. David A. Forsyth, Jean Ponce, “Computer Vision: A Modern Approach” 2. R. Jain, R. Kasturi, and B. G. Schunk, “Machine Vision”, McGraw-Hill.

2

References:
1. Milan Sonka,Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision” Thomson Learning 2. Robert Haralick and Linda Shapiro, “Computer and Robot Vision”, Vol I, II, AddisonWesley, 1993.

(407130) PARALLEL PROCESSING (ELECTIVE-II)

Objective: Upon completion of this course students will be able to understand and employ the fundamental concepts and mechanisms which form the basis of the design of parallel computation models and algorithms, recognize problems and limitations to parallel systems, as well as possible solutions Pre-requisite: Computer architecture, Data structures

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Introduction: Parallel Processing Architectures: Parallelism in sequential machines, Abstract model of parallel computer, Multiprocessor architecture, Pipelining, Array processors. 2. Programmability Issues: An overview, Operating system support, Types of operating systems, Parallel programming models, Software tools 3. Data Dependency Analysis: Types of dependencies loop and array dependences, Loop dependence analysis, Solving diophantine equations, Program transformations 4. Shared Memory Programming: General model of shared memory programming, Process model under UNIX 5. Algorithms for Parallel Machines: Speedup, Complexity and cost, Histogram computation, Parallel reduction, Quadrature problem, Matrix multiplication, Parallel sorting algorithms, Solving linear systems, Probabilistic algorithms 6. Message Passing Programming: Introduction, Model, Interface, Circuit satisfiability, Introducing collective, Benchmarking parallel performance 7. Parallel Programming languages: Fortran90, nCUBE C, Occam, C-Linda 8. Debugging Parallel Programs: Debugging techniques, Debugging message passing parallel programs, Debugging shared memory parallel programs 9. Memory and I/O Subsystems: Hierarchical memory structure, Virtual memory

2

system, Memory allocation and management, Cache allocation and management, Cache memories and management, Input output subsystems 10. Other Parallelism Paradigms: Data flow computing, Systolic architectures, Functional and logic paradigms, Distributed shared memory 11. Performance of Parallel Processors: Speedup and efficiency, Amdahl’s law, Gustafson-Barsis’s law, Karf-Flatt metric, Isoefficiency metric

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Hawang Kai and Briggs F. A., “Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing”, McGraw Hill 2. Jorden H. F. and Alaghaband G., “Fundamentals of Parallel Processing” 3. M.J. Quinn, “Parallel Programming”, TMH

References:
1. Shasikumar M., “Introduction to Parallel Processing”, PHI 2. Wilson G.V., “Practical Parallel Programming”, PHI 3. D. E. Culler, J.P. Singh, A. Gupta, “Parallel Computer Architecture”, Morgan Kaufman

(407140) DATA WAREHOUSING AND MINING (ELECTIVE-II)

Objectives of the course: The data warehousing part of module aims to give students a good overview of the ideas and techniques which are behind recent development in the data warehousing and online analytical processing (OLAP) fields, in terms of data models, query language, conceptual design methodologies, and storage techniques. Data mining part of the model aims to motivate, define and characterize data mining as process; to motivate, define and characterize data mining applications. Pre-requisites: DBMS

2

DETAILED SYLLABUS
Data Warehousing: 1. Overview And Concepts: Need for data warehousing, Basic elements of data warehousing, Trends in data warehousing. 2. Planning And Requirements: Project planning and management, Collecting the requirements. 3. Architecture And Infrastructure: Architectural components, Infrastructure and metadata. 4. Data Design And Data Representation: Principles of dimensional modeling, Dimensional modeling advanced topics, data extraction, transformation and loading, data quality. 5. Information Access And Delivery: Matching information to classes of users, OLAP in data warehouse, Data warehousing and the web. 6. Implementation And Maintenance: Physical design process, data warehouse deployment, growth and maintenance. Data Mining: 1. Introduction: Basics of data mining, related concepts, Data mining techniques. 2. Data Mining Algorithms: Classification, Clustering, Association rules. 3. Knowledge Discovery : KDD Process 4. Web Mining: Web Content Mining, Web Structure Mining, Web Usage mining. 5. Advanced Topics: Spatial mining, Temporal mining. 6. Visualisation : Data generalization and summarization-based characterization, Analytical characterization: analysis of attribute relevance, Mining class comparisons: Discriminating between different classes, Mining descriptive statistical measures in large databases 7. Data Mining Primitives, Languages, and System Architectures: Data mining primitives, Query language, Designing GUI based on a data mining query language, Architectures of data mining systems 8. Application and Trends in Data Mining: Applications, Systems products and research prototypes, Additional themes in data mining, Trends in data mining

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Paulraj Ponnian, “Data Warehousing Fundamentals”, John Wiley. 2. M.H. Dunham, “Data Mining Introductory and Advanced Topics”, Pearson Education. 3. Han, Kamber, “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Morgan Kaufmann

References:
1. 2. 3. 4. Ralph Kimball, “The Data Warehouse Lifecycle toolkit”, John Wiley. M Berry and G. Linoff, “Mastering Data Mining”, John Wiley. W.H. Inmon, “Building the Data Warehouses”, Wiley Dreamtech. R. Kimpall, “The Data Warehouse Toolkit”, John Wiley.

2

5. E.G. Mallach, “Decision Support and Data Warehouse systems”, TMH.

(407150) NEURAL NETWORKS & FUZZY SYSTEMS
(ELECTIVE-II)

Objective: This course covers basic concepts of artificial neural networks, fuzzy logic systems and their applications. Its focus will be on the introduction of basic theory, algorithm formulation and ways to apply these techniques to solve real world problems. Pre-requisite: Knowledge of calculus, and basic probability and statistics are required. Background in the following subjects desirable: numerical analysis (including optimization). Programming skills in one of the following would be desirable: Matlab, MathCad, C, Java, C++

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Introduction: Biological neurons, McCulloch and Pitts models of neuron, Types of activation function, Network architectures, Knowledge representation. Learning process: Error-correction learning, Supervised learning, Unsupervised learning, Learning Rules. 2. Single Layer Perceptron: Perceptron convergence theorem, Method of steepest descent - least mean square algorithms. 3. Multilayer Perceptron: Derivation of the back-propagation algorithm, Learning Factors. 4. Radial Basis and Recurrent Neural Networks: RBF network structure, theorem and the reparability of patterns, RBF learning strategies, K-means and LMS algorithms, comparison of RBF and MLP networks, Hopfield networks: energy function, spurious states, error performance . 5. Simulated Annealing: The Boltzmann machine, Boltzmann learning rule, Bidirectional Associative Memory. 6. Fuzzy logic: Fuzzy sets, Properties, Operations on fuzzy sets, Fuzzy relations, Operations on fuzzy relations, The extension principle, Fuzzy measures, Membership functions, Fuzzification and defuzzification methods, Fuzzy controllers.

2

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. 2. 3. 4. Simon Haykin, “Neural Network a - Comprehensive Foundation”, Pearson Education Zurada J.M., “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems, Jaico publishers Thimothy J. Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw Hill Ahmad Ibrahim, “Introduction to Applied Fuzzy Electronics”, PHI

References:
1. Yegnanarayana B., “Artificial Neural Networks”, PHI 2. Driankov D., Hellendoorn H. & Reinfrank M., “An Introduction to Fuzzy Control”, Norosa Publishing House 3. Berkan R.C., and Trubatch S.L., “Fuzzy Systems Design Principles”, IEEE Press

(407160) SOFTWARE TESTING (ELECTIVE-II)

Objectives To improve your understanding of software testing - its purpose and nature and raise your awareness of issues and constraints around testing. To provide a professional qualification widely recognized by employers, customers and peers. To learn standard terminology. Discover good sources of information. To provide a complete picture of the test activities and processes from requirements review to system implementation. Pre-requisites: Software Engineering, OOAD

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Introduction: Defect, Defect Vs failures, Process problems and defect rates, The business perspective for testing 2. Building a Software Testing Strategy: Computer system strategic risk, Economics of testing, Common computer problems, Economics of SDLC testing, Testing- an organizational issue, Establishing a testing policy, Structured approach to testing, Test strategy, Testing methodology

2

3. Establishing a Software Testing Methodology: Introduction, Verification and validation, Functional and structural testing, Workbench concept, Considerations in developing testing methodologies 4. Determining Software Testing Techniques: Testing techniques/tool selection process, Selecting techniques/tools, Structural system testing techniques, Functional system testing techniques, Unit testing techniques, Functional testing and analysis 5. Selecting and Installing Software Testing Tools: Testing tools-Hammers of testing, Selecting and using the test tools, Appointing managers for testing tools 6. Software Testing Process: Cost of computer testing, Life cycle testing concept, Verification and validation in the software development process, Software testing process, Workbench skills 7. Software Testing Process: Access Project Management Development Estimate and Status, Test Plan, Requirements Phase Testing, Design Phase Testing, Program Phase Testing, Execute Test and Record Results, Acceptance Test, Report Test Result, Testing Software Installation, Test Software Change, Evaluate Test Effectiveness 8. Testing Specialized Systems and Applications: Client/Server systems, RAD, System documentation, Web based systems, Off-the-self software, Multi platform environment, Security, Data Warehouse 9. Building Test Document: Uses, Types, Responsibility, Storage, Test plan documentation, Test analysis report documentation

Books

Text Books:
3. W.E. Perry, “Effective Methods for Software Testing”, John Wiley. 4. Kaner C., Nguyen H., Falk J., “Testing Computer Software”, John Wiley.

References :
1. Boris Beizer, “Software Testing Techniques”, Dreamtech 2. Louise Tamres, “Introducing Software Testing”, Pearson Education.

2

BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

2

Second Year B.Tech, Semester-3, Electrical SUBJECT: NETWORK ANALYSIS

DETAILED SYLLABUS 1. Network Topology and Kirchoff’s Laws. Concept of dependent sources. Application of KCL, KVL, Thevenin and Norton’s theorem to circuits having dependent sources. Steady state Analysis of AC and DC circuits using Nodal, mesh loop analysis. Superposition, source transformation, Thevenin and Norton’s theorem. Maximum transfer therorem, millman and Tellegens theorem.Compensation, reciprocity and substitution theorem, phasor diagrams 2. Linear Graphs: Introductory definitions: The incidence matrix A; The loop matrix B, Relationship between sub matrix of A and B cutsets and cutest matrix, Fundamental cutsets and fundamental Tiesets, Planner graphs, A & B matrices, Loop, Node, Node pair equations, Duality. Solving electrical circuits using graph theory. Source-free RL and RC circuits. Inductor, capacitor, integral relationship for inductor. Simple RL and RC circuit. Properties of exponential response. Initial conditions in networks. Initial conditions in elements. Geometrical interpretation of derivatives. Procedure for evaluating initial conditions. Initial state of a network D.C. Transients : Formations of first and second order differential equations. General and particular solutions of the equations with and without initial conditions. Time constants, integrating factor. Plotting the current and voltage response under transient conditions for different inputs. The R-L-C circuit. Application of unit-step forcing function.Natural and forced response.Source-free parallel/series RLC circuit.Overdamped, critical and underdamped RLC circuit. Lossless LC circuit. 4 A.C. Transients Sinusoidal forcing function. Characteristics of sinusoids.Forced response to sinusoidal forcing function. Concept of phasor. Phasor relationships for R, L, and C; impedance and admittance. Polyphase circuits. Effective values of current and voltage.instantaneous and average power, apparent power and factor, complex power three phase three- wire system, three phase Y. delta connections. Measurement of three phase power for balanced and unbalanced loads. Magnetically coupled circuits. Dot convention, mutual inductance, energy consideration.Linear transformer. Ideal transformer.

2

References: W.H. Hayt, Jr. and J.E. Kemmerly: Engineering circuit analysis , Tata McGraw Hill publication, fifth edition, 1993. M.E. Van Valkenburag: Network analysis , Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Limited. Eastern Economy edition, 1999. Bruce Carlson: Circuits, Thomson Asia Pvt. Limited, 2002. Schaum’s Outline Series: Electrical networks. 1990. Term work: The term work shall consist of at least five computer simulations using software such as MATLAB, Pspice etc., covering the whole syllabus, duly recorded and graded as well as least five tutorials, duly recorded and graded. This will carry a weightage of fifteen marks. A test shall be conducted and will carry a weightage of ten marks.

2

B.Tech, Semester-3, ELECTRICAL SUBJECT: BASIC ELECTRONICS –I SEMESTER-III DETAILED SYLLABUS Semiconductor Materials and Diodes Review of Semiconductor Materials and Properties. The PN Junction, Introduction to Semiconductor Diode Theory. Diode Circuits: DC Analysis and Models, AC Equivalent Circuits, Other Diode Types – Solar Cell, Photodiode, Light-Emitting Diode, Schottky Barrier Diode, Zener Diode. Diode Circuits Design of Rectifier Circuits, Half Wave Rectification, Full Wave Rectification, Filter, Ripple Voltage and Diode current, Voltage Doubler Circuit, Zener Diode Circuits, Clipper and Clamper Circuits, Multiple-Diode circuits, Photodiode and LED Circuits. The Bipolar Junction Transistor Basic Bipolar Junction Transistor, Transistor Structures, NPN Transistor: Forward-active mode operation, PNP transistor: Forward-active mode operation, Circuit symbols and Conventions, Current-Voltage characteristics, Non ideal Transistor leakage currents and Breakdown. DC Analysis of Transistor circuits, Common-Emitter circuits, Load line and Modes of operation, Common bipolar circuits: DC analysis, Basic transistor applications – Switch, Amplifier, Bipolar transistor biasing – Single base resistor biasing, Voltage divider biasing and Bias stability, Integrated circuit biasing, Multistage circuits. Basic BJT Amplifiers Analog Signals and Linear Amplifiers, The Bipolar Linear Amplifier, Graphical Analysis and AV Equivalent Circuit, Small Signal Hybrid –  Equivalent Circuit of the Bipolar Transistor, Hybrid –  Equivalent circuit including the early effect, Expanded hybrid -  Equivalent Circuit, other small – Signal Parameters and Equivalent Circuits, Basic Transistor Amplifier Configurations, Common Emitter Amplifiers, AC load line Analysis, Common Collector Emitter follower Amplifier, Common Base Amplifier, The Three Basic Amplifier Configurations : Summary and Comparison, Multistage Amplifiers, Power Considerations, Environmental Thermal Considerations in Transistor Amplifiers, Manufacturer’s Specifications. The Field Effect Transistor Junction Field-Effect Transistor, MOS Field-Effect Transistor, MOSFET DC Circuit Analysis, Basic MOSFET Applications: Switch, Digital Logic Gate and Amplifier. Temperature Effects in MOSFETs, Input Protection in MOSFET. The VMOS FET . Basic FET Amplifiers The MOSFET Amplifier, Basic transistor Amplifier Configurations, the Common Source Amplifier, The Source Follower Amplifier, The Common Gate Configuration, The Three Basic Amplifier Configuration: Summary and Configuration, Single – Stage Amplifier.

2

Text Books: 1. Theodore F. Bogart Jr., Jeffery S. Beasley, Guillermore Rico, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, First Indian Edition 2004 2. Donald A. Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design, Second Edition, McGraw Hill International Edition 2001. 3. Martin Roden, Gordon Carpenter, William Wieserman, Electronic Design, Fourth Edition, Shroff Publishers, 2002.

Additional Reading: 1. Donald Schilling and Charles Belove, Electronic Circuits Discrete and Integrated, Third edition, McGraw Hill International edition, 1989. Term Work The Term work shall consist of at least Eight laboratory experiments covering the whole of syllabus, duly recorded and graded as well as at least Ten computer simulations using EDA tools like PSPICE duly recorded and graded. This will carry a weightage of fifteen marks.

2

B.Tech., Semester-3, Electrical Electrical Machines – I Electromechanical energy conversion (4-L) Principle of energy conversion Singly excited machine Reluctance motor Doubly excited machine Basic concepts of rotating electric machine & D.C. generator (4-L) General terms Generated e.m.f. in full pitch coil Detail construction of D.C. generator & its types Commutation Armature reaction D.C. motors (15-L) EMF & torque equation Types of motors & motors characteristics Losses & efficiency Starters for D.C. shunt & series motors & their design principle Speed control Testing of D.C. machine Single phase transformer (15-L) Construction of core type & shell type transformer, working principle Equivalent circuit & phasor diagram O.C./S.C. test, polarity test, Sumpner’s test, efficiency & regulation calculation, condition for maximum efficiency Difference in power transformer & distribution transformer, all day efficiency Autotransformer, tap-changing transformer Parallel operation of transformer 3-phase Transformer (4-L) Vector groups Excitation phenomenon in transformer Transformer harmonics & oscillating neutral Switching current transient Mechanical forces (Elementary treatment)

244

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS O.C. / S.C. test on single-phase transformer. Load test on single-phase transformer. Load test on D.C. shunt motor. Speed control of D.C. Shunt motor. Swinbur’s test on D.C. motor. Field’s test on D.C. series motor. Hopkinson’s / back-to-back test on D.C. shunt motor. Sumpner’s / back-to-back test on two transformers. Vector groups of three phase transformers. Break test on D.C. motor. Parallel operation of 3- phase transformer Retardation test Polarity test Starters of D.C. Motors Term work: Term work shall consists of minimum 10 experiments duly performed & graded, carrying weightage of 15 marks. A class test will carry weightage of 10 marks. Text book: A.E.Fitzgerald & C.Kingsley, “Electrical Machines”, TMH Publication Bimbhra P.S. “Electrical Machinery” Khanna Publisher Nagrath I.J. & Kothari D.P., “Electrical Machines”, TMH Publications. Reference books: Stefen J. Capman, “Electric machinery & power system fundamentals”, McGraw Hill International Edition Nasar S.A. “Electrical Machinery & power system” TMH Publications

245

B.Tech, Semester-3, ELECTRICAL SUBJECT : NUMERICAL TECHNIQUES DETAILED SYLLABUS Errors in numerical computation: Their types, analysis and estimation. Error propagation. Floating point arithmetic, errors due to storage. Absolute ,relative and percentage error. Binary representation of numbers. Roots of Equation- (Including relevant engineering applications). Bracketing methods- The Bisection method, the false position method. Open methods- the Newton-raphson method. The secant method., successive approximation method, comparison of different methods. Solutions of Linear Algebraic equations- (Including relevant engineering applications). Gauss- Elimination method- Technique, pitfalls, improvement. Gauss-Jordan method. LU decomposition and matrix inversion. Gauss- seidel method. 3.5 condition of convergence of iterative methods. Curve fitting- (Including relevant engineering applications). Interpolation –Newton’s divided difference, Lagrange interpolating polynomicals. Approximation – Least square approximation technique, linear regression, and polynomical regression. Numerical differentiation- (Including relevant engineering applications)Methods based on interpolation and finite differences. Numerical integration- (Including relevant engineering applications)The Trapezoidal rule. Simpon’s 1/3 rule. Simpon’s 3/8 rule. Solution to ordinary differential equations- (Including relevant engineering applications). Taylor series method, Picard’s method of successive approximation. Runge –Kutta methods – Euler’s method, Euler’s predicator- corrector method, Runga-Kutta methods of second and fourth order. Boundary-value and Eigen value problems.

References:

246

Seven C. Chapra, Raymond P. Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, Third edition, Tata McGraw –Hill, 2000. Applied Numerical methods for engineering (Using MATLAB and C0, Robert J. Schilling, Sandra L. Harris, Thomosn Asia Pte. Ltd. 2002. Term Work: The term work shall consist of at least ten programs(Implemented in C) based on methods covering the whole syllabus, duly recorded and graded as well as at least five computer simulations using software like MATLAB etc.

247

B.Tech. – Semester-3 – Electrical Industrial Economics and Management Introduction to economics: Ten principles of economics. Micro and macro economics. Nonnative and positive economics. Economist as scientist and policy advisor. Demand and Supply. Elasticity and its applications. Demand, supply and government policies. Externalities and market inefficiencies. Public goods and common resources. The cost of production. Equilibrium of firm in perfect competition, monopoly and monopolistic competition. Banking : Money & Functions of money. Money supply. Banks and Money. Central Banking and control of money supply. International trade : Law of comparative advantage. Trade restrictions : Tariffs and quotas. Balance of payments. Exchange rates. Economic development : Growth and development. Factors affecting growth. Productivity and economic growth. Management : Definition, Functions, levels, skills & roles. System theory, contingency view. Managerial decision making : Types of decision, decision making, process and models. Organisation Structures: Key considerations, span of managements delegation and decentralisation of authority, departmentalisation Product, Function, Matrix. Leadership & Motivation : Leadership functions and styles, behaviour and contingency approaches. Maslow, Herzberg Mclelland's theories. Job design for motivation. Empowennent. Controlling and Financial Control: The control process, qualities of effective control. Creative control, budgetary control, Breaker analysis, Financial statements and ratios. Production and operations management. Organisation as production system, Product and service design, facilities layout and location. Inventory management, Quality and cost controls. . Human resource management: Role of HRM, Human Resource Planning, recruiting, selecting and developing effective work force, Performance appraisal, wage and salary administration. Text books and references : 1) Management: Richard L.Daft, V ed:, Thomson, zool. 2) Management: David R.Hampton, Mcgraw-Hill book Co. 1986 3) Principles of economics: N.Gregory Mankiw, II ed, Thomson 2002. 4) Economics: Samuelson & Nordhans, 16thed, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2000

248

B.Tech, Semester-4, Electrical SUBJECT: NETWORK SYNTHESIS AND DESIGN DETAILED SYLLABUS Objectives of the course: This course attempts at analytical insight of the students which enhances their abilities to solve a large and complex problem. The subject network synthesis gives the idea about concept of sythesis and stability of the given circuits and network functions. It also gives some fundamentals for different waveforms and their synthesis

Fourier Analysis Trigonometric form, complex form of Fourier series.Use of symmetry. Complete response to periodic forcing functions. Fourier Transform Techniques. Properties of fourier transform. FT of some simple time functions. FT of general periodic time functions. Convolution and time response in time domain. System function and response in frequency domain. Physical significance of system function. Laplace Transform Techniques. Properties of Laplace transform. Laplace Transform of some simple time functions. Basic theorems for Laplace transform. Solution of electrical circuits using Laplace transform. Complete response. Transforms of other signal waveforms. Shifted unit step, ramp and impulse functions. Waveform synthesis. Initial and final value of f(t) from F(s). Convolution integral and convolution as summation. Complex frequency and frequency response. Complex frequency. Frequency response as a function of sigma. Complex frequency plane, natural response and s-plane. Network functions; poles and zeros. Terminal pairs or ports.Network function for one port and two port. Calculation of network function for ladder and general networks. Poles and zeros of network functions. Restrictions on pole and zero locations for Driving point functions.Transfer functions. Time domain behavior from pole-zero plot .Stability of active networks. Two port networks. Relationship of two port variables.Admittance parameters, impedance parameters, hybrid parameters.Relationship between parameter sets. Parallel combination of two port networks.

249

Network synthesis. Routh Hurwitz polynomials. Properties of positive real function. Testing of positive real functions. Driving point synthesis of LC, RC and RL networks, Foester and Cauer forms. Filters : Introduction to concepts of filters. Low pass and high pass filters. Study of Chebyshev and butterworth filters. References: M.E. Van Valkenburg: Network analysis , Prentice- Hall of India Pvt. Limited, Eastern Economy Edition, 1999. W.H. Hayt, Jr. and J.E. Kemmerly: Engineering Circuit Analysis, Tata McGraw –Hill publication, fifth edition, 1993. M.E. Van Valkenburg: Introduction to Modern Network Synthesis, Wiley Eastern Limited, Fifth Reprint, 1986. Franklin F. Kuo: Network Analysis and Synthesis, Wiley eastern publication, 1980. Term work: The term work shall consist of at least three computer simulations using software such as MATLAB etc. covering the whole syllabus, duly recorded and graded as well as at least three tutorials, duly recorded and graded. This will carry a weightage of fifteen marks. A test shall be conducted and will carry a weightage of ten marks.

250

B.Tech, Semester-4, ELECTRICAL SUBJECT: BASIC ELECTRONICS –II SEMESTER-IV 1. Frequency response:

General concepts, decibels, low frequency response characteristic, Gain Bandwidth product, high frequency response, frequency response of cascade amplifiers, effect of low frequency and high frequency on coupling and bypass capacitors. 2. Multistage amplifiers:

RC coupled, transformer coupled, direct coupled, Low and high frequency considerations, cascade amplifier, darlington pair, their performance, Analysis and design considerations of multistage amplifiers, effect of source and load resistance. 3. Feedback amplifiers:

Feedback concept, ideal feedback amplifier, classification of feedbacks, Topology, analysis and design of different types of negative feedback, General analysis of multistage feedback and multiloop feedback amplifiers. 4. Large signal amplifiers:

Harmonic distortion and power efficiency of Class A, B, AB and C amplifiers, Thermal considerations and design selection of heat sinks. 5. Oscillators:

Principle of oscillation, RC oscillator, Wein bridge oscillator, twin T oscillator, oscillator with LC feedback, Colpitt oscillator, clapp oscillator, Armstrong oscillator, Crystal controlled oscillator. 6. Operation Amplifiers:

Differential amplifiers, their types, small signal analysis, differential stage, level shifter & other blocks integrated OP-Amp, Study of OP- Amp parameters like open loop / closed loop response, frequency Response, positive and negative feedback, stability, slew rate OP-Amp using MOS, BiCMOS, JFET. 7. Applications of OP-Amp: differentiator,

Comparator, adder, subtractor, integrator, instrumentation amplifier, log, antilog amplifier. List of Experiments:

251

1. Frequency response and performance parameters of two stage BJT amplifier. 2. Frequency response and performance parameters of two stage FET amplifier. 3. Cascade amplifier and finding its parameters

4. Voltage series feedback using BJT/ FET. It’s effect on frequency response. 5. Current series feedback using BJT / FET. It’s effect on frequency response. 6. 7. 8. 9 10. Op-Amp in inverting / non-inverting mode. Op-Amp as an integrator and differentiator. RC Phase shift oscillator for different amplitude and frequency. Colpitt / Hartley oscillator. Class C amplifier and its efficiency.

In addition At least 5 experiments using simulation software. Term Work: Each student has to appear for written test during the term. Report on experiments (at least eight from the list of suggested experiments) along with a graded answer paper shall be submitted as term work. Report on experiments will further include at least five using simulation software making a total of eight experiments. The distribution of term work works will be as follows: Report on experiments – 20 marks. Written Test – 30 marks.

252

Text Books: 1. 2. Electronic devices – Floyd Pearson Education Asia publication. Microelectronic Circuits analysis & design – Rashid PWS Publishing Company

Reference Books: 1. 2. 3. Electronics devices and circuit theory – Robert L. Boylestad Microelectronics – Jacob Millman & Arcin Grabel Mc-Graw Hill publication. Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design – Neamen Mc-Graw Hill publication.

253

B.Tech, Semester-4, Electrical Electrical Machines – II Basic concepts of 3-phase a.c. machines. (4-L) Terms pertaining to rotating machines, pole pitch, flux per pole, emf equation for full pitch & short pitch coil, distribution factor, coil span factor etc. Rotating magnetic field Synchronous machines (20-L) Flux & MMF phasors in cylindrical & salient pole machines Phasor diagram of synchronous generator & motor Voltage regulation by EMF, MMF, ZPF, new ASA & saturated synchronous reactance method Physical concepts of synchronous machines operation Operating characteristics of alternator Power flow through inductive impedance Circle diagram of synchronous machines i.e. excitation circle & power circle. Power factor control of synchronous motor & generator Blondel’s two reaction theory of salient pole machine Phasor diagram of salient pole machines. Synchronizing power & synchronizing torque Physical concept of synchronizing power Synchronous machine stability Hunting & damper winding Slip test Synchronization Parallel operation of two alternators & effect of change in mechanical input & excitation on load sharing. Speed load characteristics Synchronous machine on infinite bus Starting of synchronous motor 3-Phase Induction Motor (15-L) Induction motor as transformer Flux & mmf phasors, rotor frequency, slip Rotor emf, current & power Losses & efficiency Phasor diagram & equivalent circuit Analysis of equivalent circuit Torque slip characteristics Operating or performance characteristics No load & blocked rotor test Circle diagram Starting of 3-phase I.M. Speed control of 3-phase I.M. Single phase induction motor (3-L) Two field revolving theory

254

Equivalent circuit & performance. LIST OF EXPERIMENTS O.C.C. / S.C.C./ Z.P.F.C. on synchronous machine. Synchronization of alternator with infinite bus & ‘V’ curves of synchronous motor. Slip test on synchronous machine. ‘V’ curves of synchronous induction motor. No load & blocked rotor test on 3-ph induction motor. Load test on 3-ph induction motor. Speed control of 3-ph induction motor. No load & blocked rotor test on 1- phase transformer. Parallel operation of two alternators Induction Generator Term work: Term work shall consists of minimum 10 experiments duly performed & graded, carrying weightage of 15 marks. A class test will carry weightage of 10 marks. Text book: A.E.Fitzgerald & C.Kingsley, “Electrical Machines”, TMH Publication Bimbhra P.S. “Electrical Machinery” Khanna Publisher Nagrath I.J. & Kothari D.P., “Electrical Machines”, TMH Publications. Reference books: Stefen J. Capman, “Electric machinery & power system fundamentals”, McGraw Hill International Edition Nasar S.A. “Electrical Machinery & power system” TMH Publications

255

B.Tech. Semester-4, ELECTRICAL SEMICONDUCTOR POWER DEVICES AND CIRCUITS 1. INTRODUCTION Application of power-electronics Power semiconductor devices Control characteristics of power devices Characteristics and specifications of switches Types of power electronic circuits Design of power electronics equipment Determining of root mean square values of waveforms Peripheral effects Power modules Intelligent modules 2. POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DIODES AND CIRCUITS Introduction Semi-conductor basics Diode characteristics Reverse recovery characteristics Power diode types Silicon carbide diodes Spice diode model Series connected diodes Parallel connected diodes Diodes with RC and RL loads Diodes with LC and RLC lodes Freewheeling diodes 3. POWER TRANSISTORS Bipolar junction transistors Power mosfets COOLMOS SITs IGBTs Series and parallel operations di/dt and dv/dt limitations Spice models 4. THYRISTORS Thyristors characteristics Two transistor model of thyristors Thyristor turn on Thyristor turn off Thyristor types Series operation of thyristors Parallel operation of thyristors di/dt protection dv/dt protection

256

5. STATIC SWITCHES Single phase ac switches Three phase ac switches Three phase reversing switches Ac switches for bus transfer Dc switches Solid state relays Microelectronic relays Design of static switches 6. PROTECTION OF DEVICES AND CIRCUITS Cooling and heat sinks Thermal modeling of power switching devices Snubber circuits Reverse recovery transients Supply and load side transients Voltage protection by selenium diodes and metals Current protection Electromagnetic interference References : 1) Power electronics: circuit devices and applications, M.H Rashid 2) Power electronics: converters application and design by Mohan

257

Class : S.Y. B. Tech. Electrical Semester IV Presentation & Communication TechniqueContacts per Week (in hours) Evaluation Weightage in marksLectures : 2ESE: 50Practicals / Tutorials 2+ 2MST: 30TA: 20 Communication in a business organisation Report Writing : Types, qualities, defining objectives and scope, organizing and interpreting information, individual and group reports, formal and informal reports. Technical Writing : Writing definition of processes and products, description of a product for varied audiences, description of a process, writing instructions / manuals for products / processes. Technical Proposals : Presentation Skills : Group Discussion : Assignments : Written : One from topic 1 Two from topic 2 Two from topic 3 One from topic 4 Oral : Participation in group discussion in class. Presenting project based on social or technical topics. Books recommended : Lesiker & Petit ‘Report Writing for Business’ McGraw Hill Huckin & Olsen ‘Technical Writing & Professional Communication’ McGraw Hill Herta Murphy ‘Effective Business Communication’ McGraw Hill Mary Ellen Guffey ‘Business Communication’ Thomson Process & Product Meenakshi Raman, Sharma Sajeetha ‘Technical Communication – Principles & Oxford University Press Practices’ 6. IEEE Standards of Communication and Documentation IEEE Standard for Software Unit Testing IEEE Standard for Software User Documentation

258

Third Year Semester V 200040: Engineering Statistics 1)Review of probability. Baye’s theorem. Discrete and continuous random variables. Probability mass function and density function. Expected value. (Expectation) Moments and moments generating functions. Relation between Raw moments and Central moments. 2) Probability, distribution : Binomal, distribution, x2 (Chisquare), F distribution. Poisson, Normal, Student’s

3) Sampling theory : Sampling distribution. Test of hypothesis. Level of significance. Critical region. One- tailed and two-tailed tests. Degree of freedom. Estimation of population parameters. Central limit theorem. Large and Small samples : Test of significance for large samples. Test of significance of the difference between sample proportion and population proportion. Test of significance of the difference between the sample proportions. Test of significance of the difference between sample mean and population means. Test of significance of the difference between the means of two samples. Test of significance for small samples : Test of significance of the difference between sample mean and population mean. Test of significance of the difference between means to two small samples drawn from the same normal population Paired- t test. F-test of significance of the difference between population variances. Test of the Goodness of fit and independence of attribute. Contingency table. Yate’s correction. 4) Fitting of curves : Least square method. Fitting of the straight line and parabolic curve. Bivariate frequency distribution. Co-relation, Co-variance. Karl Pearson’s Coefficient and Spearman’s Rank Co-relation coefficients, Regression coefficients and lines of regression. 5) Analysis of variance: one way and two way classification 6) Statistical quality control and control charts. Text Books: S G Gupta, V K Kapur, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics, S Chand & Co T Veerrajan, Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, Tata McGraw HillR P Hooda, Statistics for Business and Economics, Macmillan

259

303050: Integrated Circuits Logic Families RTL, DTL, TTL, Schottky clamped TTL. Tristate gate ECL, I2L, NMOS and CMOS gates. Comparison of logic families. Interfacing different families e.g. TTL with CMOS, NMOS, ECL & TTL, I2L and TTL etc. (2) 9809. IC (3) CCD, PAL and PLA. OPAMP linear application. Voltage follower. Inverting non-inverting amp. Adder Substractor. V to I and I to V converter, with floating load and ground load. Howland current source. 3 mode integrator. Frequency response of differentiatior and compensated differentiator, gyrator (simulation of inductance). Nonlinear applications of OPAMPS Precision rectifier, Half wave and full wave. Clipping clamping circuits. Sample and Hold circuit (performance parameters); Peak detectors, log amplifiers, temp. Compensated log Amp. Antilog amplifier, multiplier divider. Instrumentation amplifier. Comparator. Threshold detector zero crossing detector. Schmitt trigger. Free running multivibrator, weinbridge oscillator. Phase shift oscillator. Voltage Regulator Series, Shunt, break down protection, thermal shutdown. 78XX series. Negative 75XX series. Adjustable IC regulator 723 & its applications. Switch mode IC regulator. 555 Timer Astable and monostable multivibrator using 555 with one application of each. Power control ICs like SL 440, CA 3059 & CA 3095. Miscellaneous ICs like. LM335, LM336 Function generator ICs like 8038,566. Active Filters. First and second order LP, HP, BP & band reject filters. Switched filters. All methods of conversion of analog to digital, DAC 0808 and ADC 7107 functional diagram and description. Memories. RAM, ROM. The basic cell. IC bipolar. CMOS, RAM, AND dynamic RAM cell. Magnetic core memory, NVRAM, bubble Memory.

260

REFERENCES: Design with OPAMP analog ICs by Sergio Franco. McGraw Hill 1998 2nd edition. OPAMP and Linear ICs by Ramakant Gaykwad-1998 2nd edition Linear ICs by Roy Choudhary Wiley Eastern – 1987 Analog / Linear ICs by N.K. Jog Technical publications – 1997 SCR Manual – General Electric – Prentice Hall, 1979 Suggested List of experiments: Study of TTL and CMOS Characteristics. a) V to I and I to V Converter with grounded load & floating load b) Adder Substractor. (3) Differentiator and Integrator using & 741 IC. (4) a) Clipping clamping circuits using b) Log amp. (5) a) Schmitt trigger. Free running multivibrator using IC 555 b) Wien bridge oscillator. (6) Astable and monostable multivibrator using IC 555 (7) Butterworth and chebychev filter. Frequency response. (8) Adjustable voltage regulator using IC 723. (9) Application of any one of the miscellaneous ICs.

261

303060: Signal Processing Preprocessing in analog domain- Concept of tyransducer, Preprocessing of signal & sampling theory Introduction to signals & Systems ( CT and DT domain ) Definition of Signal Signal classification Signal manipulations Periodicity in CT ( Continuous Time) & DT( Discrete Time) domain Concept of a system System representations & classification Concept of Impulse Response Convolution in CT domain 3. Review of Fourier Series (FS) & Fourier Transform (FT) for CT systems 4. Fourier Series & Fourier Transform for DT systems( DTFS & DTFT): Concept, properties and uses Amplitude & phase spectra Energy Spectral Density Power Spectral Density 5. Review of the Laplace Transform Definition & properties of Two-sided & one-sided Laplace Transform Region of Convergence (ROC) System transfer function Relationship with Fourier Transform & mapping Zero state & zero input responses 6. Z Transform Definition & properties of Two-sided & one-sided Z Transform Region of Convergence (ROC) Relationship with Fourier and Laplace Transform , & mapping Inverse Z Transform 7. Introduction to DT Systems Difference equation FIR & IIR systems System transfer function System realization: Direct forms, Cascade & parallel forms Linear and circular Convolution BIBO stabillity 8. Time Domain Analysis of DT Systems System Transfer function & Impulse response Solution of a difference equation zero input & zero state response calculations 9. Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) DTFT & DFT DFT Properties Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) DITFFT and DIFFFT Algorithms

262

Divide and Conquer Algorithms DFT analysis of Sinusoidal signals Limitations of DFT Text- Books Signal & Systems by Haykin , Wiley Publication Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms and applications by J.G. Proakis, D. G. Manolakis, PHI publications (1995) Analog and Digital Signal Processing: by Ashok Ambardar, Thomson Learning Publication, second edition, (2001) Discrete- Time Signal Processing by Oppenheim and Schafer with Buck, PHI publications (2000) Additional Reading : Signal Processing & Linear Systems by Lathi , Oxford University Press, First Indian Impression 2000

263

303071: Control System –I Modeling in frequency domain Laplace Transform review The transfer function Electric network transfer function Translational mechanical system transfer function Rotational mechanical system transfer function Electromechanical system transfer function Electrical circuit analogs 2. Modeling in the time domain The general state-space representation Applying the state-space representation Converting the transfer function to state-space Converting from state-space to transfer function 3. Time response Poles, Zeros, & System response First order system Second order system : Introduction The general second order system Under damped second order system System response with additional poles System response with zeros Laplace transform solution of state equations Time domain solution of state equations Reduction of multiple systems Block diagrams Analysis and design of feedback system Signal flow graphs Mason's rule Signal flow graphs of state equations Stability Routh Hurwitz criterion Routh Hurwitz criterion : special cases Routh Hurwitz criterion :Additional examples Stability in state space Steady state error Steady state error for unity feedback systems Static error constants and system type Steady state error specification Steady state error for disturbances Steady state error for non unity feedback systems Sensitivity Steady state error for systems in state space

4.

5.

6.

264

7.

Root locus techniques Defining the root-locus Properties of root-locus Sketching the root-locus Pole sensitivity Frequency response techniques Asymptotic Approximations: Bode plots Introduction to the Nyquist criterion Sketching the Nyquist diagram Stability via the Nyquist diagram Gain margin and phase margin via the Nyquist diagram Stability Gain margin and phase margin via the Bode-plots Relation between closed loop transient and closed loop frequency response Relation between closed loop and open loop frequency response Relation between closed loop transient and open loop frequency response Steady state error characteristic from frequency response

8.

Term work: Term work shall consists of at least six assignments and at least 3 computer programs/simulation carrying weightage of 15 marks and a test covering center syllabus carrying weightage of 10 marks Text Books: 1. Norman S. Nise,"Control system engineering",3rd edition, John Wiley and sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd.2001 2. K.Ogata: Modern Control Engineering, 4th edition (LPE),Pearson Education Asia,2000 Reference Books: 1. R. Bishop and R. Dorf," Modern Control system ", 8 th edition (LPE) Addison Wesley,1998 2. G. Franklin, J. D. Powell & Abbas Emami- Naeni," Feedback control of Dynamic system, 4 th edition(LPE) Pearson Education asia, 2000. Erononi Umez-Erononi: System dynamics and control, 1st edition, Thomson Asia

265

303080: Electromagnetic Field Electrostatics Coloumb’s Law, The Electric Field, Gauss’s Law, Divergence Theorem, Electric Potential, and Relationship between Electric field intensity and potential gradient. The electric dipole, Electrostatic energy density. Dielectrics, Polarisation, the polarized electric field, relative and effective permitivity, Boundary conditions between two dielectrics, Boundary conditions between conductor and dielectric, Dielectric strength. The analysis of parallel plate capacity with single and multiple dielectrics. Coaxial cable and energy stored in capacitor, Poisson’s and Laplace equatons,The method of electric images, point plane and sphere-sphere problem. Energy and mechanical forces in electric field. 2. Current The electric current in metallic conductor, conduction, convection and displacement current. Equation of continuity. 3. Magnetic Fields Forces in moving electric fields, The Gauss’s law of magnetic fields, character of B lines, line integral of magnetic field vector, self and mutual inductance. The automatic model and magnetism inside a material medium, magnetic field intensity H, Boundary conditions at magnetic surfaces. Magnetic dipole and magnetic polarization, the various magnetic materials, domain theory and magnetization curve. Magnetic circuit of transformer, toroid etc, permanent Magnets. Magnetic scalar and vector potential, application of vector potential, the energy and forces in magnetic fields. 4. Time dependent electric and magnetic fields Maxwell’s Equations in point form, in integral form, for static harmonic etc fields, physical significance of Maxwell’s Equations, wave equation. Plane electromagnetic waves in space in pure and glossy dielectric media, importance of characteristic impedance and propagation constant, the wave travel, concept of phase velocity and group velocity in wave travel, voltage standing wave ratio, current standing wave ratio. Travelling waves in transmission lines, concept of power transmission in the form of study of Poynting theorem and Poynting vector. TestBooks: W.Hayt, “Engg Electromagnetics”,Mcgraw Hill,4th edition,1987. Edminister, “Schaum’s Series in electromagnetic”, McGraw Hill Pub, 3rd Edition,1986. N.Narayan Rao, “Elements of Engg. Electromagnetics ”,PHI Pub,4th edition, 2001. Refernce Books: Feynmann,”Lectures of Physics”,Vol-2,Addition Wesley,1965

266

S.Seely,”Introduction to Electromagnetics”,McGraw Hill,1958 David K.Chen,”Fields and wave Electromagnetics”, Addition Wesley,2nd edition,1999 Corson and Brain,”Electromagnetics”,CBS Pub,2nd

267

303090: Applied Power Electronics Controlled Rectifier Principle of Phase-Controlled Converter Operation Single Phase Full Converters, with RL load Single Phase Dual Converters Principle of Three-Phase Half- Wave Converters Three Phase Full Converters Three Phase Full Converters with RL load Three Phase Dual Converter Power Factor Improvements Extinction Angle Control Symmetric Angle Control PWM control Single-Phase Sinusoidal PWM Three Phase PWM Rectifier Single Phase Semi-Converters with RL load Three Phase Semi-Converters with RL load AC Voltage Controllers Introduction Principle of On-Off Control Principle of Phase Control Single Phase Bidirectional Controllers with Resistive Loads Single Phase Controllers with Inductive Loads Cycloconverters 1) Single Phase Cycloconverters 2) Three Phase Cycloconverters 3) Reduction of Output Harmonics AC voltage Controller with PWM Control Inverters Principle of Operation Performance parameters Typical Inverters : series Inverters, Self commutated Inverters. Parallel Inverters, Bridge Inverters, Three Phase Inverters, Current Source Inverters Static Frequency Conversion Voltage Control of Inverters Harmonic neutralization of Inverters PWM Inverters Simple Application of Inverters with Motor load, etc Chopper Principle of Chopper operation Step-up Chopper, Step-down Chopper, Step-up/ Step-down Chopper Chopper Commutation Jone’s Chopper Morgan’s Chopper Switch mode regulators-Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost & Cuck Regulator

268

AC Regulators Single Phase AC Regulator Sequence control of AC Regulator Three Phase AC Regulator AC Regulator to feed Transformers Power Supplies DC Power Supplies Switched-Mode DC Power Supplies Flyback Converter Forward Converter Push-Pull Converter Half Bridge Converter Full Bridge Converter Resonant DC Power Supplies Bidirectional Power Supplies AC Power Supplies Switched Mode AC Power Supplies Resonant AC Power Supplies Bidirectional AC Power Supplies Text Books: 1) Rashid M. H., “ Power Electronics-Circuits, Devices and Application”, PHI Publication, second edition ,2001 2) Mohan, Undeland Robbias,” Power Electronics-Converters, application design ,” John Wily & Sons, second edition,1995 3) Vedam Subrahmanyam,” Power Electronics,” New Age International Pvt.Ltd 1997 Reference Book: Bose B.K. ,” Modern Power Electronics and AC drives”,Pearson Education Asia.

269

Semester VI 303101: Electrical Power System I 1. Basic structure of power system Conventional & non- conventional sources of energy Thermal, hydro, nuclear power plant, solar, wind, geothermal, tidal power plant Influence of working voltage on size of feeders & distributors in DC system Choice of working voltage for transmission. Factors affecting cost of generation. Choice of generation unit. 2. Mechanical design of overhead transmission line Introduction to Main components of overhead lines Introduction to Line supports, towers, single circuit, double circuit lines& types of conductors used Sag calculation for supports at equal levels Sag calculation for supports at different levels Effect of wind & ice on sag 3. Transmission line parameters Inductance Definition of Inductance Inductance of a single phase two wire line Conductor type & bundle conductors Inductance of composite conductor line, three phase line & double circuit three phase line Capacitance Potential difference between two conductors of a group of parallel conductors Capacitance of two wire line, three phase line with equilateral spacing, three phase line with unsymmetrical spacing Earth effect on transmission line capacitance Bundled conductors, method of GMD Resistance Resistance Skin effect & proximity effect 4. Representation of power system components Introduction 1-ph solution of balanced three phase networks, one line diagram, impedance and reactance diagram Per unit (p.u.) system, per unit impedance diagram of a power system. Representation of loads 5. Transmission line model & performance Short line model Medium line model nominal T method (ii) nominal µ § method Long line model Interpretation of long line equation

270

Ferranti effect, tuned power lines Equivalent circuit of a long line Surge impedance loading Power flow through transmission lines, power transmission capability Method of voltage control 6. Overhead insulators Types of insulators Potential difference over a string of suspension insulators Method of equalizing potential 7. Insulated cables Insulation, Extra high voltage cables , grading of cables Insulation resistance of a cable, capacitance of single core able Heating of cables, current rating Overhead lines versus underground cables 8. 8.1 Neutral grounding Underground system, effectively grounded system, resonant grounding Method of neutral grounding , grounding practices 8.2 Earthing & safety Techniques Objective and definitions Soil resistivity , earth resistance Tolerable limit of body currents, tolerable step and touch voltage, actuial step and touch voltage Design of earthing grid, concrete encased electrodes and tower footing. Measurement of earth resistance, soil resistivity Impulse behavior of earthing system Text Books: 1. Nagrath I.J. and Kothari D.P., “Modern Power System Analysis,” TMH Publication third edition 2003 2. Wadhawa C.L.,’Electrical Power System,” Wiley Eastern Ltd. Second edition 1991 3. Gupta B.R.,”Power System Analysis and design,” Wheeler Publication,3rd edition,1998 4. Saadat Hadi,” Power System Analysis,” TMH Publication,1st edition 2002 5. S.N.Singh,” Electrical Power Generation, Transmission, and distribution,” PHI Publication,2003 6. Sony, Gupta ,Bhatnagar & Chakrabharti,” Electrical Power System, Dhanpat Rai & Son’s 7. J. B. Gupta,” Electrical Power System,” S K Kataria Publication 8. B. M. weedy,” Electrical Power System”.

271

303110: Microprocessor Introduction Introduction to Microprocessors, Microcomputers, and Assembly Language Microprocessor Architecture and Microcomputers Systems Microprocessor Architecture and its operation Input and output (I/O) devices. 8085 Microprocessor Architecture and Memory Interfacing The 8085 architecture Instruction cycle, machine cycles and T-sate, concept of wait states. Minimum system design Memory interfacing with timing considerations. Clock reset and buffering circuits. 8085 Assembly Language Programming The 8085 programming model Instruction classification, Instruction and Data format Process of writing, assembly and execution of assembly language programs. 8085 Instructions Data transfer operations Arithmetic & Logic operations Branch operations Writing assembly language programs Debugging a program Programming Techniques Looping Counting and indexing, counters and timers Code conversion, BCD arithmetic and 16 bit data operations Stack & subroutines Concept of stack and subroutines Parameter passing techniques Re-entrant and recursive subroutines. I/O data transfer techniques Basic interfacing concepts Interfacing input and output devices with examples. Memory mapped I/O and I/O Mapped I/O. Testing and troubleshooting I/O interfacing circuits. I/O data transfer classification. Programmable I/O , Interrupt driven program controller I/O, Hardware I/O (Direct Memory Access) Interrupts Requirements Single level interrupt. Multi level interrupt, Vectored interrupt. 8085 interrupt structure and operation 8259A programmable interrupt controller features and operations. Programmable Interface Devices Features and operating modes of working of 8155 multipication device 8255A programmable peripheral interface 8254 programmable interval timer

272

Direct Memory Access(DMA) and DMA controller 8237 8279 programmable keyboard/display interface. Serial I/O and Data Communication Basic concept in serial I/O 8085 serial I/O lines Microprocessor Applications Microprocessor based Over Current relay operation D.C. Motor speed Control Temperature Control Traffic Light Control Stepper Motor control Text Books: Gaonkar R.S.,” Microprocessor architecture, Programming & application with 8085 “, Penram International (India), 4th edition, 2000. Pal Ajit – Microprocessor- Principle & application, TMH Publication, 1990. Leventhal L.A.-,”Introduction to microprocessor-Software, Hardware & Programming, PHI Publication, 1983.

273

303072: Control System II

Design specifications Relative stability Steady state accuracy (error) Transient response Frequency response characteristics Control configurations Series (cascade compensation Feedback compensation State feedback compensation Series feedback compensation Feed forward compensation Design via root locus techniques Transient response design via gain adjustment Improving steady state error via cascade compensation Improving transient response via cascade compensation Improving steady state and transient response Feedback compensation Design via frequency response a. Transient response via gain adjustment b. Lag compensation c. Lead compensation d. Lag-lead compensation Design via state space Advantages of state space Analysis of the state equations Control law design for full-state feedback Selection of pole locations for good design Estimator design Compensator design: combined control law and estimator Introduction to the reference input with the estimator Integral control and robust tracking Digital control Digitization Dynamic analysis of discrete systems Design by emulation Discrete design State space design methods Hardware characteristics Analog to Digital (A/D) converters Digital to analog (D/A) converters

274

Anti-alias prefilters The computer Word size effects Random effects Systematic effects Sample rate selection Tracking effectiveness Disturbance rejection Effect of anti alias prefilters Asynchronous sampling Text Books: G. Franklin, J.D.Powell & Abbas Emami-Naeini : Feedback control of Dynamic systems, 4th edition (LPE), Pearson Education Asia. J. Wilkie, M.Johnson, & R. Katebi: Control engineering : an introductory course, 1st edition, Palgrave Norman S.Nise: Control system engineering, 3rd edition, John wiley and sons, Inc B.Kuo & F.Golnaraghi: Automatic control systems, 8th edition, john Wiley and sons, Inc K. Ogata: Modern Control Engineering, Prentice-Hall, 3rd edition, 1996.

275

303120: Wave Theory & Radiating System Maxwell’s equation Introduction Faraday’s law Transformer and Motional EMFs Displacement Current Maxwell’s Equations in Final Forms Time-Harmonic Fields Electromagnetic Wave Propagation Introduction Wave Propagation in Lossy Dielectrics Plane Waves in Lossless Dielectrics Plane Waves in Free Space Plane Waves in Good Conductors Power & the Poynting Vector Reflection of Plane Wave at Normal Incidence Transmission Lines Introduction Transmission Line Parameters Transmission Line Equations Input Impedance, SWR and Power The Smith Chart Some applications of Transmission Line Waveguides Introduction Rectangular Waveguides Transverse Magnetic(TM) Modes Transverse Electric (EM) Modes Wave Propagation in the Guide Power Transmission and Attenuation Waveguide Resonator Antennas Introduction Hertzian Dipole Half-Wave Dipole Antenna Quarter-Wave Monopole Antenna Small Loop Antenna Antenna Characteristics Antenna Arrays

Text Book:

276

Matthew N. O. Sadiku,”Elements of Electromagnetics,” second edition 1995, Oxford University Press Engineering Electromagnetics by John. D. Krons Engineering Electromagnetics by Jordans & Balmoin.

277

200050: Industrial Economics & Management Basic economic problems. Resource constraints and welfare maximization. Nature of economics. Positive and normative economics, micro and macroeconomics. The role of the state in economic activity; market and government failures. Theories of demand, supply and market equilibrium. Market structures, perfect and imperfect competition commercial and central banking. International trade. Foreign exchange and balance of payments. Management : Definition process. The functions of a manager. Planning – its nature, objectives, types of plans. Decision – making. Organising – departmentalization, delegation decentralization, span of management. Staffing – selection and recruitment, appraisal, management development. Leadership motivation and communication. Controlling – its nature techniques. Books recommended Economics : Samuelson & Nordhaus Principles of Economics : Mankiw Essential of Management : Koontz & O’donnell Management : David R. Hampton

278

303130: - Principles of Communication Engineering Signal Representation Types of signal Signal Spectrum Orthogonality Mean Square Wave Lagendre Polynomial Complex Fourier Spectrum Properties of Fourier Transform Convolution Theorem IEEE frequency Spectrum Modulation Techniques Amplitude Modulation and circuits Sideband transmission Frequency modulation and circuits Phase Modulation and circuits Pulse Modulation techniques Delta Modulation and adaptive delta modulation Companding Demodulation Techniques AM detection and circuit VSB detection and circuits FM detection and circuits PM demodulation and circuits Radio receivers TRF and Superhetrodyne receivers AGC methods Communication receivers and features FM receivers Propagation of Waves Reflection and refraction of Radio Waves Groundwave, line of sight waves. Sky waves Fading and echo scattering Aerials Radiation pattern form short Dipole Radiation Pattern form short ground aerial Shortwave and medium wave aerials Reference: Simon Hykin –Communication System, John Wiley & Sons Inc 2001 4th edition Lathi B.P.- Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Oxford University Press 1998 3rd edition Dennis Roddy and John Coolen –Electronic Communication, Prentice Hall of India 1992 3rd edition

279

B.TECH (Electrical)

SEMESTER-VII
Sr. No . 1 2 3 4 5 6 Course Code Subject L P/ T Total Cr. Evaluation Weightage TWA 303140 303150 303160 303170 303180 Advanced communication system Digital signal processing Switchgear and protection Electrical drives and control Power system design Elective-I Total 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 2 2 2 2 2 2 12 5 5 5 5 5 5 30 8 8 8 8 8 8 15 15 15 15 15 15 MST 15 15 15 15 15 15 ESE 70 70 70 70 70 70 3 3 3 3 3 3 ESE (Theory) Hours

SEMESTER – VIII
Sr. No . 1 2 3 4 Course Code Subject L P/ T Total Cr. Evaluation Weightage TWA 303190 303200 Power System Analysis Industrial controllers Elective - II Elective-III Total 4 4 4 4 16 2 2 2 2 8 6 6 6 6 24 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 MST 15 15 15 15 ESE 70 70 70 70 3 3 3 3 ESE (Theory) Hours

280

LIST OF ELECTIVES: 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 403010 403020 403030 403040 403050 403060 403070 403080 Elective – I Project Management 3 Optimization of Power Supply 3 Power Quality 3 HVDC Transmission 3 Elective – II H.V. Engineering 4 Electric Traction 4 PLC 4 Advanced microprocessor and 4 application Elective – III FACTS 4 SCADA 4 Medical electronics 4 Robotics & Automation 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

1 2 3 4

403090 403100 403110 403120

2 2 2 2

6 6 6 6

10 10 10 10

15 15 15 15

15 15 15 15

70 70 70 70

3 3 3 3

Project: Sr. Course No. Code 1

Course Title Project

L

P

T

403900

Cr TW MS ESE ESE A T (Theory) Hrs 8 See note below

• •

The project is evaluated in two stages. The first stage evaluation shall be done at the end of pre-final semester by a Committee of Institute faculty (at least two faculty members including project guide). The Project Guide along with an external examiner shall do the second stage evaluation at the end of final semester. The first stage assessment shall have 25% weightage. Another 25% weightage shall be given for the initiative, interest, effort and sincerity shown by the student during the entire project work. The second stage assessment shall have 50% weightage. The first stage evaluation is to be carried out after a minimum of 12 weeks of work. The project report should be submitted in the prescribed format at least three weeks prior to the end of final semester or by the prescribed date and second stage assessment can be done in the last week of semester. The project shall carry 08 credits. The grade for the project shall be declared only after second stage evaluation.

281

B.Tech. (Electrical) SEM-VII Advanced Communication (Course Code – 303140)
OBJECTIVES This subject aims at giving system-oriented introduction to advancements in communication system in the areas of digital and wireless communication. The orientation of the syllabus will be to discuss the system using the block diagram approach, the various technical issues related to that system and its application. Overview of Basic information theory Concept of information, Entropies of discrete system, Rate of transmissionredundancy, Efficiency and channel capacity, source encoding Huffman technique, Transmission rate and channel capacity of noisy channels, Shannon’s theorem, sampling theorem. Digital modulation Techniques ASK, FSK, PSK, DPSK, QPSK, M-PSK, MSK QAM, TFM and QPRS Digital demodulation Techniques Probability of error, Integrator, optimum filter, matched filter and correlation receiver. Coding Techniques( Algorithmic approach) Linear block codes, cyclic codes and convolution codes. Introduction to Advanced communication techniques * Satellite communication – Orbital aspects, satellite system link models. * Microwave communication – transmission lines, wave guides, microwave oscillators, microwave amplifier. * Optical fiber communication – type of fibers, optical source, detectors. * Wireless cellular communication – Term work: Report on at least six experiments performed and minimum three assignments given based on the above syllabus duly graded carrying weightage of 15 marks and a test covering the entire syllabus carrying weightage of 10 Marks. Text Books:1. Tomasi W., Advanced Electronics Communication Systemsz, PHI, 4th Ed., 1998. 2. Haykin S. Communication Systems, John Wiley & sons, 3rd Ed.,1995. 3. Taub & Schlling, Principles of Communication Systems, McGraw Hill, 2nd Ed., 1987. 4. Roddy & Collen “ Electronic Communications”, PHI, 3rd Ed., 1995

282

B.Tech (Electrical) Sem. VII Digital Signal Processing (Course Code – 303150)
1. Review of transforms ♦ Z- transform ♦ DTFS, DTFT, DFT and FFT 2. Frequency Domain Analysis of DT Systems ♦ Pole-zero diagram ♦ Frequency domain analysis using analytical & graphical techniques ♦ System classification based on pass-band as low pass, high pass, Band pass & band reject ♦ System classification based on phase response as Minimum phase, maximum phase, mixed phase or linear phase systems ♦ Stability Analysis ♦ Finite word-length effect on system poles 3. Linear Phase FIR Systems ♦ Need for linear phase, concept of phase delay & group delay ♦ Condition for Linear Phase ♦ Magnitude & phase response for Four types of Linear Phase systems ♦ Location of zeros 4. FIR Filter Design ♦ FIR versus IIR filters ♦ Design of FIR filters by windowing technique: -Gibb’s phenomenon -Use of different windows: rectangular, triangular, hamming, hanning ♦ Design of FIR filters using Frequency sampling techniques ♦ Structures for implementation: canonic and lattice 4. Design of IIR filters ♦ The design process Methodology ♦ Different types of analog approximations: Butterworth, Chebyshev, Inverse Chebyshev. ♦ Spectral transformations ♦ Conversion techniques like bilinear transformation, impulse invariance, matched Z-transform ♦ Intuitive approaches 5. Quantization Effects ♦ Quantization methods ♦ Limit cycle oscillations due to Quantization ♦ Errors in frequency response due to coefficient Quantization 6 DSP processors ♦ Need for Special architecture ♦ Difference between DSP processor & microprocessor ♦ A general DSP processor

283

Reference Books
♦ Discrete – Time Signal Processing: by Oppenheim & Schafer , PHI Publication ♦ Digital Filters: Analysis Design and Applications by A. Antoniou, Tata McGraw-Hill Publication (.2001) ♦ Analog and Digital Signal Processing: by Ashok Ambardar, Thomson Learning Publication, second edition, (2001) ♦ Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms and applications: J.G. Proakis, D. G. Manolakis, PHI publications (1995)

284

B. Tech (Electrical) SEM-VII Switchgear & Protection (Course code – 303160)
1. Principles of Circuit Braking 1.1 Initiation of arc, arc extinction, D.C and A.C.circuit breaking, arc voltage and current waveforms in an A.C. circuit. 1.2 Definition of transient recovery voltage, rate of rise of TRV, expression for TRV for different values of arc resistance, current chopping. 1.3 Theories of arc extinction, arc control devices, HRC fuse. 1.4 Ratings and specifications of circuit breakers, making and breaking capacities, short circuit testing, Acquaintance of ISI standards. 2. Low Tension Switchgear 2.1 Different types of LT Switchgears: (a) Air Circuit Breaker (ACB): construction and working (b) Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) and Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) 2.2 Contact shapes and materials, Contact bounces. 3. Medium and High Tension Switchgear Principle of arc quenching in (a) Air Blast Circuit Breaker (ABCB) (b) Minimum Oil Circuit Breaker (MOCB) (c) Vacuum Circuit Breaker (d) SF6 Circuit Breaker. 4. Protective Relaying 4.1 Objective of protective relaying (a) Protective zones, Primary and backup protection. (b) Desirable qualities of protective relaying. 4.2 Principle and characteristics of (a) Overcurrent Relays - Time setting, plug setting, IDMT relays. (b) Directional Relays. (c) Distance Relay- Resistance, Reactance, Impedance, MHO relays. (d) Differential Relay. 5. Power System Protection 5.1 Relevant protection for different types of Earth faults. 5.2 Protection of Transmission lines & feeders. Pilot wire relaying. 5.3 Protection of Transformers, Buchholz relay. 5.4 Protection of Generators, protection against loss of prime mover and loss of excitation, field suppression, out of step relaying. 5.5 Protection of Induction Motors against single phasing and overcurrent. 5.6 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers. 6. Types of Relays 6.1 Static Relays, µP based protective schemes (programming or interfacing excluded). 6.2 Introduction to DSP based protection (only simple schemes, advantages, etc.) Term Work: Term work shall consist of at least six tutorials/assignments/computer programs carrying weightage of 15 marks and a test covering the entire syllabus carrying weightage of 10 marks. Text Books:

285

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Badri Ram and Vishwakarma D.N. Power System Protection and Switchgear,TMH Publication,1st Ed. 1994 Ravindranath and Chander, Switchgear and Protection, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 1st Ed. 1977. Paithankar Y.G. and Bhide S.R., Fundamentals of Power System Protection, PHI Publication, EEE 2003. Rao Sunil S. Switchgear and Protection, Khanna Publication, 4th Ed., 1997. Rao Madhav, Static Relays, TMH Publication, 2nd Ed., 1994.

Reference Books: GEC Relay Guide. Phadke A.G. and Thorp J.S, “Computer Relaying for Power Systems”, John Wiley & sons, 1st Ed. 1990.

286

B.Tech (Electrical) Sem. VII Sub: Electrical Drives and Control (Course code – 303170)
1 Electrical Drives – An introduction • Electrical Drives • Advantages of Electrical Drives • Parts of Electrical Drives • Choice of Electrical Drives • Status of dc and ac Drives Dynamics of Electrical Drives • Fundamental Torque Equations • Speed Torque conventions and multiquadrant operation • Equivalent values of Drive parameters • Components of load torques • Natures and classification of load torques • Calculation of time and energy-loss in transient operations • Steady state stability • Load equalization Control of Electrical Drives • Modes of operation • Speed control and Drive classification • Closed loop control of Drives Selection of Motor power rating • Thermal model of motor for heating and cooling • Classes of motor duty • Determination of motor rating DC Motor Drives • Dc Motors and their performance • Starting • Braking • Transient Analysis • Speed control • Methods of armature voltage control • Ward Leonard Drives • Transformer and uncontrolled rectifier control • Controlled rectifier fed dc Drives • Control of fractional hp Motors • Chopper-controlled dc Drives Induction Motor Drives • Three phase Induction Motors • Operation with unbalanced source voltages and single phasing • Operation with unbalanced Rotor Impedances • Analysis of Induction Motor fed from non-sinusoidal voltage supply • Starting • Braking • Transient Analysis 287

2

3

4

5

6

• Speed control • Pole changing • Pole Amplitude Modulation • Stator voltage control • Variable frequency control from voltage sources • Variable frequency control from a Current source • Eddy current Drives • Rotor resistance control • Slip power recovery • Variable speed constant frequency generation • Single phase Induction Motors • Starting methods and types of Single phase Induction Motors • Braking of Single phase Induction Motors • Speed control of Single phase Induction Motors • Linear Induction Motor and its control 7 Synchronous Motor Drives • Synchronous Motors • Operation from fixed frequency supply • Synchronous Motor Variable speed drives • Starting large Synchronous Machines 8 Brushless dc Motor, Stepper Motor and Switched Reluctance Motor Drives • Brushless dc Motors • Stepper Motors • Switched (or Variable) Reluctance Motors 9 Solar and battery powered Drives • Solar panels • Motors suitable for pump Drives • Solar powered pump drives • Battery powered vehicles • Solar-powered Electrical vehicles and boats 10 Energy Conservation in Electrical Drives • Losses in Electrical Drive system • Measures for Energy Conservation in Electrical Drives • Use of efficient semiconductor converters • Use of efficient Motors • Use of variable speed Drives • Energy efficient operation of Drives • Improvement of power factor • Using a Motor of right rating • Improvement of quality supply • Use of single to three phase semiconductor converters in rural applications • Regular and preventive maintenance of motors ,transformers and coupled equipments. 11 Electrical drive system and components • Electrical drive system • Components used for obtaining signals for interlocking and sequencing operations and protection

288

References :Fundamentals of Electrical Drives By :- G. K. Dubey.

289

B.Tech. (Electrical) SEM-VII Sub -: Power System Design (Course code – 303180)
1) Corona • Phenomenon • Disruptive critical voltage, visual critical voltage • Power loss calculation using Peek’s formula & Peterson’s formula • Advantages , disadvantages, effects of corona • Charge voltage relation 2) Symmetrical fault calculation • Short circuit of synchronous machine on no load • Short circuit of a loaded synchronous machines • Selection of circuit breaker • Algorithm for short circuit studies • Zbus formulation 3) Sequence components • Symmetrical component transformation • Phase shift in star delta transformer • Sequence impedances & network of synchronous machine • Sequence impedance of transmission lines • Sequence impedances & networks of transformers • Construction of sequence networks of power system 4) Unsymmetrical fault calculation • Various types of unsymmetrical faults • L-G, L-L, L-L-G • LG, LL, LLG with fault impedance Zf • Open conductor faults 5) Traveling waves • Traveling waves on transmission lines, velocity, surge impedance of transmission line • open end line • Short end line • Line termination through a resistance • Reflection & refraction at a T- junction 6) Lightning arrestor & surges • Lightning phenomenon • Wilson’s theory • Types of lightning arrestors 7) Design of transmission line • Introduction • Choice of voltage 290

• • • • •

Selection of conductor size Choice of span, number of circuits, conductor configuration Insulation Design Selection of ground wire Evaluation of line performance

8) HVDC • Introduction • Comparison of EHV-AC & HVDC

Text Books: 1) Nagrath I.J. and Kothari D.P., Modern Power System Analysis, TMH Publication, second edition, 1989. 2) Saadat Hadi, Power System Analysis, TMH Publication, first edition, 2002 3) Wadhawa C.L., Electrical Power Systems, Wiley Eastern Ltd, Second Edition 1991. 4) Gupta B.R., Power System Analysis and Design, Wheeler Publishing, Third Edition,1998. Reference Book: 1) Soman S.A., Khaparde S.A. and Shubha Pandit, Computational Methods for Large Sparse Power System Analysis, An Object Oriented Approach, Kluwer Academic Publisher, New York 2001. 2) Glover D.J. and Sarma M.S., Power System Analysis and Design, Thomson Asia Pte Ltd, 2003

291

B.E. (Electrical) SEM-VIII Power System Analysis (Course code – 303190)
1. Load Flow Studies • Introduction • Network Model Formulation • Formulation of YBUS by singular transformation • Load Flow Problem • Gauss-Seidel Method • Newton-Raphson Method • Decoupled Load Flow Methods • Comparison of Load Flow Methods • Control of Voltage Profile 2. Automatic Generation and Voltage Control • Introduction • Load Frequency Control (Single Area case) • Load frequency Control and Economic Dispatch Control • Two-area Load Frequency Control • Optimal (two-area) Load Frequency Control • Automatic Voltage Control • Load Frequency Control with Generation Rate Constraints (GRCS) • Speed Governor Dead-band and its Effect • Digital LF Controllers • Reactive Power Control 3 . Power System Stability • Introduction • Dynamics of Synchronous Machine • Power Angle Equation • Node Elimination Technique • Steady State Stability • Transient Stability • Equal Area Criterion • Numerical Equation of Swing Equation • Multi-machine Stability • Factors Affecting Transient Stability 4. Power Quality • Introduction • Harmonics in power supply • Defining quality of power 6. Interconnected System • Introduction • Grid formation

292

Operation & control of an interconnected system

Text Books: 5) Nagrath I.J. and Kothari D.P., Modern Power System Analysis, TMH Publication, second edition, 1989. 6) Saadat Hadi, Power System Analysis, TMH Publication, first edition, 2002 7) Wadhawa C.L., Electrical Power Systems, Wiley Eastern Ltd, Second Edition 1991. 8) Gupta B.R., Power System Analysis and Design, Wheeler Publishing, Third Edition,1998 Reference Book: 3) Soman S.A., Khaparde S.A. and Shubha Pandit, Computational Methods for Large Sparse Power System Analysis, An Object Oriented Approach, Kluwer Academic Publisher, New York 2001. 4) Glover D.J. and Sarma M.S., Power System Analysis and Design, Thomson Asia Pte Ltd, 2003

293

B.E. (Electrical) SEM VIII Industrial Controllers (Course code – 303200)
1. Controller assessment framework  Close loop stability  Disturbance rejection performance  Reference tracking performance (Proportional control, Integral control,  derivative control, PI and PID controller formula) 2. Simple tuning method  Choice of controller structure  Manual tuning method  Proportional control of a system with a first order model  Proportional and Integral control of a system with a first order model  Proportional and Derivative control procedure  PID controller design by pole-placement 3. The practical aspects of PID controller  Understanding common notation for industrial PID controllers  Industrial PID control technology  The issues in implementing an industrial PID controller  Integral wind-up and anti windup circuits  Implementing the derivative term  Industrial PID controller structures  Different forms of industrial PID controllers  Reverse acting controllers  Digital PID control 4. PID controller tuning methods  oscillation or quarter amplitude Understanding PID tuning procedures  Process reaction curve PID tuning method  Sustained oscillation PID tuning  Damped decay PID tuning procedure  The relay experiment 5. Introduction to programmable controllers  Introduction to PLC functions o Industrial motor control circuits o Relay ladder logic circuits o Building a ladder diagram o Motor control starter circuits  Introduction to PLC components o Rack assembly o Power Supply o PLC programming units o Input output sections o Processor unit o Addressing o Relationship of data-file addresses to I/O modules 6. Fundamental PLC programming  PLC program execution

294

       

Ladder diagram programming language Ladder diagram programming Relay logic instructions Timer instructions Counter instructions Data manipulation instructions Arithmetic operations Writing a program

7. Advanced programming PLC interfacing and troubleshooting  Introduction o Jump commands o Data manipulation  Programmable controller interfacing  Discrete I/O modules  Troubleshooting I/O interfaces  Analog I/O signals  Special purpose modules  Troubleshooting programmable controllers Term Work The term work will consist of at least 6 experiments/assignments duly performed, properly recorded and graded, which will carry a weightage of 15 marks & the test will carry a weightage of 10 marks. Text Books: 1. Bartelt T., Industrial Control Electronics : Devices, Systems and Applications, Delmar Thomson Learning, 1st Ed, 1997.

2. Dunning G. : Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers, Delmar Thomson
Learning, 2nd Ed.,2001

3. Wilkie J., Johnson M. & Katebi R. : Control Engineering : An Introductory Course,
Palgrave-MacMillan, 1st Ed., 2001

295

B.E. (Electrical) SEM VIII Elective - I Project Management (Course code – 403010)
Lectures/week: 4 Hours Practicals/week: 2 Hours Paper: 100 Marks Duration: 3 Hours Oral : 25 Marks Term work: 25 Marks

Objectives of the course: This course deals with the project management processes and their application to meet specific scope, time, cost , quality and people expectation goals related to a project.

1. Introduction to Project management Definition and History; 2. Project Management Knowledge areas • Project Integration Management • Project Scope Management • Project Time Management • Project Cost Management • Project Quality Management • Project Human Resource Management • Project Communications Management • Project Risk Management • Project Procurement Management 3. Project Management Process:  Initiating  Planning  Executing  Controlling  Closing Term work : Term work shall consist of at least 2 case studies implemented using the tool set like Microsoft project 2000 and a test carrying a weightage of 10 marks.
Text Books:

Kathy Schwalbe, “Information Technology Project management”, Thomson Learning, 2nd Edition. Philips “Project Management”, TMH Publication Reference Books: 296

1. “A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge “( PMBOK Guide), Project Management Institute , Newtown Square, Pennsylvania , USA. 2. Gido and Clements, “ Successful Project Management”, 2nd Edition, Thomson Learning B.E. (Electrical) SEM-VII Elective – 1

Optimization of Power System (Course code – 403020)
1) Optimal System Operation • Introduction • Optimal Operation of Generators on a Bus-bar • Optimal Unit Commitment • Reliability Considerations • Optimum Generation Scheduling • Optimal Load Flow Solution • Optimal Scheduling of Hydrothermal System • Power System Security 2) Unit commitment • Introduction o Constraint in unit commitment : introduction o Spinning reserve o Thermal unit constraint o Other constraint o Hydro constraints o Must run o Fuel constraints • Unit commitment solution methods o Priority list methods o Dynamic programming solution 3) Interchange evaluation & power pools • Introduction • Economy interchange • Economy interchange evalution • Interchange evaluation with unit commitment • Multiple interchange contracts • After-the – Fact production costing • Transmission losses in transaction evaluation • Other types of interchanging • Power pools 4) Power system security • Introduction • Factors affecting power system security • Contingency analysis:- detection of network problems o Network sensitivity methods 297

o Calculation of network sensitivity o AC load flow Correcting the generation dispatch o Correcting the generation dispatch by sensitivity methods o Compensated factors o Correcting the generation dispatch using linear programming

5) An introduction to State Estimation in Power Systems • Introduction • Power system state estimation • Maximum likelihood Weighted Least- Squares Estimation • State Estimation of an AC network • An Estimation to advanced topics in State Estimation • Application of Power System State Estimation Text Books: 9) Allen J.Wood & Bruce F. Wollenberg, Power Generation, Operation, & Control , John Wiley & sons Publication 10) Nagrath I.J. and Kothari D.P., Modern Power System Analysis, TMH Publication, second edition, 1989 11) Saadat Hadi, Power System Analysis, TMH Publication, first edition, 2002 12) Glover D.J. and Sarma M.S., Power System Analysis and Design, Thomson Asia Pte Ltd, 2003 13) Gupta B.R., Power System Analysis and Design, Wheeler Publishing, Third Edition, 1998.

298

B.E. (Electrical) SEM-VII Elective – 1

POWER QUALITY (Course code – 403030)
• • • • • • • • • Power quality: factors defining power quality, Harmonics: Analytical and experimental evaluation, measurement principals and practices. IEEE std.-512, detail study of important causes along with their theoretical and analytical basis. The theory of load compensators. The theory of steady state reactive power control in electric transmission lines. Reactive power compensation and the dynamic performance of transmission systems. Principles of static compensators. Reactive compensation and the electric arc furnace. Study of various compensators like TCR-FC, TCR-SC, Shunt compensation, Series compensation, UPFC, IPFC

Text Books:1) Power quality By Haytt 2) Reactive Power Control by T. J. E. . Miller

B.E. (Electrical) SEM-VII Elective – 1

HVDC Transmission (Course code – 403040)

1. HVDC System configuration and components  Classification of HVDC links  components of HVDC transmission system. 2. Converter Theory and Performance Equation  Valve characteristics, converter circuit  converter transformer rating, multiple bridge converter. 3. Converter Faults and Protection  Converter faults  Protection against overcurrents  Overvoltage in converter stations  Protection against overvoltages. 4. Control of HVDC Systems  Basic principle of control , control implementation  Converter firing control system , valve blocking and bypassing  Starting and stopping , power flow reversal  Controls for enhancement of AC system performance

299

5. Harmonics and Filters Ac side and DC side harmonics. 6. Influence of AC systems strength on AC / DC system Interaction
    Short circuit ratio, reactive power and AC system strength Problem with low effective short circuit ratio (ESCR) Solution to problems associated with weak systems Effective inertia constant, forced commutation.

7. Responses to AC and DC system Faults  Dc Line fault, converter fault , Ac system fault . Termwork Termwork shall consist of at least six experiments/assignments carrying weightage of 15 marks and a test covering the entire syllabus carrying weightage of 10 marks. Text Books: 1. Padiyar K.R., HVDC Transmission Systems,1st Ed., Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1991 2. Kimbark E.W., HVDC Transmission,1st Ed. Wiley, 1965

B.E. (Electrical) SEM-VIII Elective – II

High Voltage Engineering (Course code – 403050)
1. Electrostatic Fields, their control and estimation.  Electric field stress, its control and estimation.  Analysis of Electrical field intensity in Homogenous Isotropic Single dielectric and multi dielectric system.  Introduction to Numerical methods for the estimation of Electric Field Intensity. 2. Conduction and breakdown in air and other gaseous dielectrics in electric fields.  Ionization processes, Townsend’s current growth equation-Primary and secondary processes, Townsend’s criterion for breakdown in electronegative gases.  Paschen’s law, breakdown in non-uniform fields and corona discharges.  Post-breakdown phenomena and application.  Practical considerations in using gas for insulation purposes. 3. Conduction and breakdown in liquid dielectrics  Conduction and breakdown in pure liquids  Conduction and breakdown in commercial liquids. 4. Breakdown in solid dielectrics  Intrinsic, Electro-mechanical and Thermal breakdown  Breakdown of solid dielectrics in practice  Breakdown of composite insulation  Solid dielectrics used in practice  Application of insulating materials in electrical power apparatus, electronic equipments.

300

Generation of High Voltage and Currents.  Generation of HV DC, HV AC and Impulse Voltage  Generation of impulse currents  Tripping and Control of impulse generators. Measurement of high voltage and currents  Measurement of HV DC, HV AC and impulse voltage and currents.

7. Testing and evaluation of dielectric materials and power apparatus.       Non-destructive testing of dielectric materials DC resistivity measurement Dielectric and loss factor measurement, Partial discharge measurements. Testing of insulators, bushing, isolators, circuit breakers, cable, transformers, high voltage motors, surge diverters. Radio interference measurement.

8. High Voltage laboratory- Design, Planning and Layout   Size and dimensions of the equipment and their layout. Earthing and its importance.

Term work At least 6 experiments including a report on visit to a high voltage laboratory covering the topics mentioned in the above syllabus. Text Books

1. Naidu M.S. and Kamaraju V, High Voltage Engineering, TMH Publication, 2nd edition.,
1995

2. Wadhwa C.L. “High Voltage Engineering” Wiley Eastern Ltd, 1st edition., 1994. 3. Kuffel E. and Abdullah M., Introduction to High Voltage Engineering, Pergamon, 1970. 4. Kuffel E., High Voltage Engineering, Pergamon, 1984.

301

B.E. (Electrical) SEM-VIII Elective – II

ELECTRIC TRACTION (Course code – 403060)
1. Traction Systems Steam engine drive – Internal combustion engine drive – Electric drive – Diesel Electric traction – Mechanical transmission – Electric transmission – Types of electric transmission – Electrical transmission employing d.c generator d.c series motor – Electric transmission system employing 3 phase alternator supplying d.c traction motors – Electrical transmission employing 3 phase alternator supplying induction motors – Choice of traction systems for India. 2. Power Supply Systems for Track Electrification Historical background – Direct current system – Single phase low frequency a.c systemSingle phase high frequency a.c system – three phase low frequency system – Composite system – Kando system – Single phase to d.c system – Problems of single phase traction system – Current unbalance – Voltage unbalance – Production of harmonics – Induction effects – Electrostatic induction – Electric magnetic induction – Booster transformer – Rail connected booster transformer – Booster transformer with return feeder – Comparison between pure a.c and d.c systems. 3. Traction mechanics Units used in traction mechanics – types of services – Speed time curve – Equivalent straight line braking – Construction of speed time curve – Simplified speed time curve – Average speed and schedule speed – Traction effort – Traction effort speed characteristic - Power of traction motor – Specific energy consumption – Factors affecting specific energy consumption – Mechanics of train movement – Weight transfer due to torque exerted by traction motor – Weight transfer due to drawbar pull – Methods of reducing weight transfer – Weight transfer during braking – Coefficient of adhesion – Factors affecting slip – Influence of track on the coefficient of adhesion – Influence of electrical parts – Wheel slip detection device – Permissible speed of train on curves. 4. Power Supply Arrangements High voltage supply – Substations – Feeding post – Feeding and sectioning arrangements – Sectioning and paralleling post – Subsectioning and paralleling post – Subsectioning post – Elementary section – Miscellaneous equipment at control posts or switching stations –Major equipment at substation - Transformer – Circuit breaker – Interruptor – protection system for a.c system – Remote control centre – Functions of d.c traction substations - Major equipment of d.c substation. 5. Overhead Equipment OHE – Principles of design of OHE – composition of OHE – Height of contact wire – Contact wire gradient – Encumbrance – span length –Automatic weight tensioning temperature compensation – Stagger – Uninsulated over lap – Insulated over lap – Neutral section – Turn out – Section insulator – Isolator – System of stringing – Curvilinear OHE – Polygonal OHE – Single catenary construction – Compound catenary construction – Stitched catenary construction – Modified compound catenary – Continuous mesh catenary – Composed compound catenary – Catenary with variable dropper spacing – Effect of speed on OHE – Push up and oscillations of OHE – Clearance – OHE in tunnels – Basic sag and tension calculations- Dropper design – Dropper length for span with 302

unequal encumbrances – Use of aluminium for OHE – Recording car – Precautions for working on electrified sections – Track bonding – Earthing – Communication facilities – protection of underground installations against corrosion – Method of crossing – Overhead crossings – Cable crossings – Maintenance of OHE – OHE v/s power transmission line – Inspection of OHE – Maintenance schedule – Maintenance depots. 6. Current Collection Systems Conductor rail equipment – Current collection gear for OHE – Cable collector – Pole collector – Bow collector – Pantograph collector – Quality of current collection . 7. Traction Motors Desirable characteristics of traction motors – Straight d.c series motor – Suitability of series for traction duty – Constructional details of d.c traction motors – Series motor using undulating d.c – Suitability of shunt motor for traction duty – Single phase series motors – Behaviour of d.c armature in a.c field and commutation of series motors – Commutation – Constructional features – repulsion motor – Compensated repulsion motor – Induction motor – Variable frequency inverter employing SCR – Linear induction motor. 8. Traction Motor Control Control of d.c traction motors – Series parallel control – Shunt transition – Bridge transition – Drum control employing shunt transition – Contactor type bridge transition controller – Double series parallel control – Advantages of series parallel starting – Buck and boost method of starting and speed control – Metadyne control – tap changer control – Thyristor control – Thyristor control on a.c side – Cycle selection method of control of SCR – Thyristor control on d.c side or chopper control – Multiple unit control – Nonautomatic type master controller – Master controller for automatic acceleration – Multiple operation of locomotives. 9. Supervisory Control Advantages of remote control – Systems of remote controls – Remote control system equipment and network – Mimic diagram – Control desk for TPC – Remote control switching equipment – FMVFT – Power supply – Controlled station equipment – General principle of operation – Supervisory and alarm facilities – frequency allocation. 10. Track Circuits and Track Equipments D.C track circuit – Coded track circuit - A.C track circuit – Audio frequency track circuit – High frequency track circuit – Jemount track circuit – Aster J.E.S track circuit – Axis counting – Axle counters- Last vehicle proving – Automatic train stop – Point machine – Signals – Semaphore signals – Warner signals – Stop signals fo approach trains – Stop signals for departing trains – Coaching signals – Position of signals – shunt signals – Point indicator – Colour, light signals – Multi lamp route indicator – Junction direction indicator – Centralised traffic control. 11. Protection of Electric Locomotive Equipment and Circuits: Safety Considerations and Monitoring Introduction – Board strategy for protection – Surge protection – Overload protection of Main power circuits – Earth fault protection of power of auxiliary circuits – Protection from over voltages and under voltages – Differential current protection of traction circuits – Protection against high and low air pressure in the compressed air circuit – Temperature

303

monitoring - protection transformer by bucholz relay – Protection against accidental contact with H.T equipment – Protection against fires

References: 1. Modern Electric Traction by H.Partab, Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Ltd.
2. Electric Traction by J Upadhyay, S N Mahendra Allied Publishers Ltd. B.E. (Electrical) SEM-VIII Elective – II

PLC (Programmable Logic Controllers) (Course code – 403070)
Syllabus 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PLC ArchitectureControllers, hardware, internal architecture, commercial PLC problems Input/Output DevicesInput devices, output devices, examples of applications programs Input/Output ProcessingSignal conditioning, remote connections, networks Ladder and functional block programmingLadder diagram, ladder functions, latching, function blocks IL,SFC and ST programming methodsInstruction lists, sequential function charts Internal relaysLadder programs, battery-backed relays, set and reset Jump and Call Timers and countersTypes of timers, off-delay timers, programming, timers with counters Shift registers

10 Data handlingArithmetic functions, closed loop control problems 11 Designing systemsProgram development, safe systems, fault finding 12 Testing and DebuggingTemperature control, valve sequencing 304

13 Programs Text Book: Programmable Logic Controllers and Industrial Automation: An Introduction By Madhuchhanda and Samarjit Sen Gupta Reference Book: 1 Programmable Logic Controllers: Programming Methods and Applications By John R. Hackworth [Old Dominion University] and Frederick D.Hackworth Jr. 2 Programmable Logic Controllers By W. Bolton, Fourth Edition

B.Tech. (Electrical) SEM-VIII Elective – II

Advanced microprocessor and application (Course code – 403080)

(1) Advanced architectures:Vonnumen and Harvard architecture, non-pipelined, super pipelined, superscalar processor, memory banking, interleaved memory, big endian and little endian, RISC and CISC processors

(2) Memory system:Virtual memory concepts, segmentation and paging, MMU, cache memory, principle of locality, cache architecture like look through, look aside, unified cache, split cache, cache organization like k-way associative, direct associative, fully associative, cache coherence.

(3) Introduction to embedded system:Features, comparison between desktop and embedded system, classification, marketing trends, selection of embedded system, types of embedded memory, various types of I/O devices like LCD, LED, keyboard, ADC, DAC, control valves, sensors, timers, and printers.

(4) Microcontroller:8051 and it’s derivatives, architecture, addressing modes, instruction sets, timers, serial port, I/O ports, interrupts, power saving, Boolean processor, 8051 programming in assembly and C language, CAN bus, SPI, I2C, flash programming of 89CX051, enhanced 8051 features in Intel 80251, Dallas HSM microcontroller.

(5) Embedded System design methodology:System development process, requirements engineering, design tradeoff, implementation integration, testing on host system, testing on target board, 8051 based software development system like KEIL, 8051 based hardware development boards.

305

(6) Applications:Microcontroller in SCADA, Xmas lights, robotic applications, tomia wall hanging mouse, temperature controller, aircraft controller, PWM motor control, ultrasonic measurement, LCD interface, small printer interface.

Books:1. Computer architecture by Stallings, Pearson publication. 2. Embedded/real time system by Prasad, Dreamtech publication. 3. Programming and customizing of 8051 microcontroller by Myke Predko, TMH

B.Tech. (Electrical) SEM VIII Elective-III

Flexible AC Transmission Systems (FACTS) (Course code – 403090)
1. Load Compensation  Reactive Power (VAR) Compensation for isolated loads  Power Factor correction  Voltage Regulation  V-Q characteristics for an inductive load  System load line  Effect of shunt capacitor / reactor bias on the system V-Q characteristic  V-Q characteristics of VAR compensators in terms of shirt circuit levels  Load balancing in 3-phase loads with parallel compensation 2. Transmission Line  Wave equation  Standing waves  Surge impedance and SIL  Voltage and current profile along unloaded line  Ferranti effect  Effect of loading on reactive power requirement 3. Voltage control  Tap changing transformers  Booster transformers  Static voltage regulators  Thyristorised series voltage injection 4. Converters and Inverters  Real and reactive power enhancement of a power system in time domain (using series and parallel configurations)  Protection of valves 5. Types of compensators  Passive and active compensators  Shunt reactor / capacitor compensators o Single o Multiple

306

o Mid-point Static compensators o Control schemes and characteristics of  FC – TCR  TCR – TSC  TSC and other combinations

6. Dynamic compensation  Introduction  Effect on stability of a power system 7. Unified Power Flow Controller (UPFC)  Basic relationships for power flow control  Synchronous voltage sources  Implementation of synchronous voltage source  Shunt compensation by synchronous voltage source o Reactive power compensation scheme  Series compensation by synchronous voltage source o Reactive series compensation  Unified power flow concept 8. Harmonics  Harmonics generated by FACTS and their mitigation  Different power quality problems that could be solved using flexible sub-systems. Term Work The term work will consist of at least 6 assignment/experiments duly performed, properly recorded and graded, which will carry a weightage of 15 marks & the test will carry a weightage of 10 marks. Text Books:

1. Miller T.J.E., Reactive Power Control in Electric Systems, Wiley Europe, 1st Ed. 1983. 2. Hingorani N.G. & Gyugyi L., Understanding FACTS: Concepts and Technology of
Flexible AC Transmission Systems, Wiley-IEEE Press, 1st Ed. 1999

B.Tech (Electrical) Sem. VIII Elective - III

SCADA (Course code – 403100) 1 SCADA System
• • • Systems used for Monitoring, Switching, & Controlling Electric Apparatus in Manned & Unmanned Sub-stations and generating stations. Functional Characteristics (master-RTU Data/Control flow.)-Strategic Benefits. Typical Equipment Functional Diagram- master station functional Block Diagram- (Both Centralized & Distributed ) Single Master Station & Single RTU, Single Master Station & Multiple RTUs, Multiple Master Stations & Multiple RTUs 307

2 Interfaces
• • • • • • • • •

• • • •

RTU Functional Block Diagram. Concept of coordinated Control systemSystem functionality – ( Bay Level & Substation level ) Master Station & Remote Station Equipments. Time Synchronization. Mechanical Interfaces Grounding Interfaces- safety or Equipment Ground, Signal or Instrumentation Circuit ground Electrical power Interfaces-Requirement of chargers, Batteries & back-up arrangements Power quality –( internal Noise, Surge withstand Capability ) Data & Control interfaces Communication Interfaces. Master station RTU links,- Block diagram Digital Data transmission, Asynchronous & Synchronous Transmission, error handling Standards., protocols –( MODbus, DNP 3.0 ) Communication media & configuration –Fibre optic Communication, Satellite Communication , LAN & WAN. Communication Application in Power Systems, Number of channels, Channel considerations, Channel switching & Redundancy. Number of RTUs per channel. RTU – : o General Features, Technical Specifications of any one type of RTU ( like NELCo, GE, SIEMENS ) o Description & function of various cards, (DI, DO, AI, AO, Power supply) o Communication Ports o Communication Protocols o Types of Transducers & IEDs.

3 Communication Management

4 Field Equipments

5 Digtal Signal Processing
• • • • • •

6 Numeric Protection

Analog to Digital Converter – Ramp Converter& successive approximation converters Sample & Hold Amplifiers , Multiplexers, A/D Conversion in protective Relays, Continuous Vs Discrete Waveforms, sampling, Digital Filtering Spectral Analysis, Digital Filtering in Protection relays Various Protective Schemes for Transformers, Generators, Motors Overload, short circuit Earth fault protection schemes. Typical application examples for REM 543. Protection Functions- Symbols & Notations as per IEEE Standards, and corresponding IEC symbol. Numeric Relay hardware Features of Numeric Relay (as applicable to REM 543/545 or any similar model)

308

7 SCADA software
• •

Main Functions, Protection functions, measurement functions, Disturbance functions , Control functions ,Condition monitoring functions, communication functions Application Software ; ( SIEMENS or any other ) Important Features.- MMI Functions, System Security, Zoning, Downloading Database from master to RTU, safety tagging, Periodic data update, Auto fault isolation, Online reporting of module failure, Time stamping of events, ladder logic implementation Picture editing , maintenance, Database Organization.

References : Telecommunication facilities for operation & maintenance of oil and gas pipeline –: IS-15655 of 2006  IEEE Std. – Defination, specification and analysis of systems used for SCADA -: IEEE Std C-37.1 of 1994  IS SCADA system for oil & gas pipe line -: IS-15654 of 2006  Digital Protection and Numerical Relays – IEE Book – Vol IV  ABB Relay Manual

B. TECH. (ELECTRICAL) Sem - VIII

Elective - III Medical Electronics (Course code – 403110)
Rationale : This subject introduces an interdisciplinary field and shall provide knowledge of the combination of Biomedical Engineering as well as the technology of instrumentation. This subject teaches application of Electronics Engineering to Medicine. DETAILED SYLLABUS : Study of Human Body Anatomy and Physiology of the human body, Body system – Skeletal, Muscular, Circulatory, Respiratory, Digestive, Excretory, Nervous, Endocrine, Reproductive. Study of the Human Cell Average Human Cell, Transport across the cell membrane and membrane potential – Na+ and K + transport, Action Potential, Electrical Equivalent Circuit of a cell. Bio-Electronics, transducers and amplifiers Electrode – Electrolyte Interface, different electrode types, Stimulating electrodes, Biomedical Amplifiers.Transducers for measurement of physiological events. Electrocardiogram

309

Origin of the heart beat and the electrical activity of the heart, the ECG and its analysis, the Einthoven Triangle, Bipolar leads, Unipolar leads, Vector cardiography, Measurement of cardiac output, ECG electrodes, ECG Amplifiers, Cardiac Arrhythmias. Bioelectric Signals Study of Characteristics of various Bioelectric Signals such as EEG, EMG, ERG, EOG and their recording. Signal Measurement • Measurement of blood pressure, blood flow and cardiac output. • Impedance Plethysmography. • Measurements in the respiratory system.

Biomedical Instruments Stimulators , Defibrillators , Pacemakers , Respirators , Bedside Monitor , Audiometer and hearing aids. Oximetry , Ear Oximeter , Pulse Oximeter , Blood Gas Analyzer, Spirometry , Pulmonary Function Analyzers. Prosthesis Introduction to Prosthesis. Electrical Safety Electrical safety of patient and medical equipment. BOOKS: Textbooks: 1. Cromwell L. Weibell and Pfeiffer, Biomedical Instrumentation and measurements, Prentice Hall of India, 1993. 2. Khandpur R. S., Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, Tata Mcgraw Hill, Second edition, 2003. Additional Reading: 1. Ganong W. F., Review of Medical Physiology, Prentice Hall Inc., USA, 1995. 2. Webster J. G. – Medical Instrumentation – Application and Design, Wiley and Sons Inc., Third edition, 1999. 3. Carr and Brown, Introduction to biomedical equipment technology, Fourth edition, Pearson Press, 2003. TERM WORK: 1. Term work shall consist of at least eight practicals and assignments covering the topics of the syllabus.

BE Electrical ( Sem-VIII)
310

Elective - III Robotics and Automation (Course Code: 403120)
Detailed Syllabus 1. Introduction : Introduction to robotics, components and structure of robotics, common kinematic arrangements. 2. Rigid Motions and Homogeneous Transformations : Rotations, Compositions of rotations, Properties of rotations, Homogeneous transformations, Skew symmetric matrices, Angular velocity and acceleration, Addition of Angular velocities 3. Forward Kinematics: Kinematics chains, Denavit-Hartenberg representation 4. Inverse kinematics: Kinematic decoupling, inverse position, Inverse orientation. 5. Velocity kinematics – The manipulator Jacobian: Derivation of Jacobian, singularities, inverse Velocity and Acceleration. 6. Dynamics: Euler –Lagrange equations, expression for kinetic and potential energy, equations of motions, some common configurations, Newton-Euler formulations. 7. Independent joint control: Actuator dynamics, set point tracking, drive train dynamics, trajectory interpolation, feedforward control and computed Torque. 8. Multivariable control: PD control, inverse dynamics, implementation and robustness issues, robust outer loop design. References: 1) Mark W.Spong, M.Vidyasagar, Robotic dynamics and control ,Wiley student edition – 2004. 2) Asade.H, Robot analysis and control, John Wiley – 1986. 3) Kozlowski, Krzyszfof(Ed), Robot motion and control: recent developments, Bezlin: Spinzervalag.

311

BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY IN ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

SECOND YEAR SEMESTER III 312

S.Y. B.TECH. (ELECTRONICS) SEMESTER III Electronic Circuit Analysis & Design I Semiconductor Materials and Diodes Review of Semiconductor Materials and Properties, The PN Junction, Introduction to Semiconductor Diode Theory. Diode Circuits: DC Analysis and Models, AC Equivalent Circuits, Other Diode Types – Solar Cell, Photodiode, Light–Emitting Diode, Schottky Barrier Diode, Zener Diode, Temperature Effects, Understanding Manufacturer’s Specifications. Diode Circuits Design of Rectifier Circuits, Half Wave Rectification, Full Wave Rectification, Filter, Ripple Voltage and Diode Current, Voltage Doubler Circuit, Zener Diode Circuits, Clipper and Clamper Circuits, Multiple–Diode Circuits, Photodiode and LED Circuits. The Bipolar Junction Transistor Basic Bipolar Junction Transistor, Transistor Structures, NPN Transistor : Forward–active Mode Operation, PNP Transistor : Forward–active Mode Operation, Circuit Symbols and Conventions, Current–Voltage Characteristics, Non ideal Transistor Leakage Currents and Breakdown, DC Analysis of Transistor Circuits, Common–Emitter Circuits, Load Line and Modes Of Operation, Common Bipolar Circuits: DC Analysis, Basic Transistor Applications – Switch, Amplifier, Bipolar Transistor Biasing – Single Base Resistor Biasing, Voltage Divider Biasing and Bias Stability, Integrated Circuit Biasing, Multistage Circuits. Basic BJT Amplifiers Analog Signals and Linear Amplifiers, The Bipolar Linear Amplifier, Graphical Analysis and AC Equivalent Circuit, Small Signal Hybrid – π Equivalent Circuit of the Bipolar Transistor, Hybrid – π Equivalent Circuit Including the Early Effect, Expanded Hybrid – π Equivalent Circuit, Other Small – Signal Parameters And Equivalent Circuits, Basic Transistor Amplifier Configurations, Common Emitter Amplifiers, AC Load Line Analysis, Common Collector Emitter Follower Amplifier, Common Base Amplifier, The Three Basic Amplifier configurations: Summary and Comparison, Multistage Amplifiers, Power Considerations, Environmental Thermal Considerations in Transistor Amplifiers, Manufacturers’ Specifications. The Field Effect Transistor Junction Field–Effect Transistor, MOS Field–Effect Transistor, MOSFET DC Circuit Analysis, Basic MOSFET Applications: Switch, Digital Logic Gate and Amplifier. Temperature effects in MOSFETs, Input Protection in MOSFET. The Power FET (VMOS). Basic FET Amplifiers The MOSFET Amplifier, Basic Transistor Amplifier Configurations, the Common Source Amplifier, The Source Follower Amplifier, The Common Gate Configuration, The Three Basic Amplifier Configuration: Summary and Configuration, Single – Stage Integrated Circuit MOSFET Amplifiers, Multistage Amplifiers, Basic JFET Amplifiers 313

Text Books: Donald A. Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design, Second edition, McGraw Hill International edition 2001 Martin Roden , Gordon Carpenter, William Wieserman, Electronic Design, Fourth edition, Shroff Publishers, 2002 Additional Reading: Donald Schilling & Charles Belove, Electronic Circuits Discrete and Integrated, Third edition, McGraw Hill International edition, 1989

314

S.Y`. B.TECH. (ELECTRONICS) SEMESTER III Electrical Technology Measuring Instruments Review of Permanent Magnet Moving Coil (PMMC), Moving Iron Instruments, Electrodynamometer, Electrostatic Instruments, Rectifier type Instruments. Extension of ranges of voltmeters and ammeters. Principle of Power Factor & Frequency meter. Use of Current & Potential Transformers. Measurement of R, L, and C Measurement of low, medium & high resistances – Wheatstone & Kelvin bridge, Ohmmeter, Megger. A.C. bridge circuits for measurement of inductance & capacitanceMaxwell’s, Hay’s & Anderson’s bridge, Schering bridge. Potentiometers Principles of D.C & A.C. Potentiometers & their applications. Magnetic Properties of Materials The magnetic dipole movement, diamagnetism. The origin of permanent magnetic dipoles in matter, Paramagnetism, Ferromagnetism. Three Phase Induction Motors Rotating magnetic field, construction & principle of operation, slip, rotor frequency, development of equivalent circuit, torque equation, maximum torque, torque – speed characteristics, speed control. Starting methods, motor ratings. Stepper Motor Principle of working, characteristics & applications. Text Books: Sawhney A.K., A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation, Dhanpatrai and Sons, 1993. Golding, Electrical Measurements & Measuring Instruments, Wheeler Publishing, fifth edition, 1994. Nagrath & Kothari, Electrical Machines, Tata McGraw Hill, second edition, 1997 Dekker A. J., Electrical Engineering Materials, Prentice Hall of India, twelfth reprint, 1987. Srinivasan M. P., Stepping Motors, CEDT: Indian Institute of Science, 1985.

315

S.Y. B.TECH. (ELECTRONICS) SEMESTER III Electronic Material Science Review of Atomic structure, wave particle duality, quantum mechanics, Schrödinger wave equation, interpretation of wave function. Uncertainty principle & statistical mechanics. Conducting Material: Factors affecting the resistivity of electrical materials, ohm’s law and relaxation time of electrons, relaxation time, collision time and mean free path electron scattering and resistivity of metals, heat developed in a current carrying conductor, Thermal conductivity of metals, superconductors. Dielectric properties of insulators: Static Dielectric constant polarization, atomic interpretation of dielectric constant of monoatomic gases. Dielectric constant of polyatomic molecules, internal field in solids and liquids. Static dielectric constant of solids, Ferroelectric materials, spontaneous polarization and piezo electricity. Frequency dependence of electric and ionic polarizability. Complex dielectric constant of non dipolar solids, bipolar relaxation, dielectric losses. Magnetic properties of materials: Magnetic field, magnetic dipole moment of current loop, magnetization from macroscopic view point, orbital magnetic dipole moment and angular momentum, lenz’s law and induced dipole moments. Classification of magnetic materials, diamagnetism, origin of permanent magnetic dipoles in matter materials, spontaneous ferromagnetic materials, spontaneous magnetization and curieweiss law, ferromagnetic domain and coercive force, antiferromagnetic materials, ferrimagnetic materials. Semi conducting Materials: Crystal structure of semiconductor, conduction process in semiconductor, density of carriers in intrinsic semiconductor extrinsic semiconductor, density of carriers and the position of fermilevel in extrinsic semiconductors. Compensation doping, electrical conduction in semiconductor, the continuity equation. Optical properties of solids: Light semiconductor interaction, photosensitive semiconductors, absorption of light direct and indirect band gap semiconductors, photo conductive and photo emissive materials. Textbooks: A.J.Dakkar: Electrical Engineering Materials, Prentice Hall of India. C.S.Indulkar: An introduction to Electrical Engineering Materials, S. Chand and company. John Allison: Electronic engineering semiconductors and devices, McGraw Hill International edition (II)

316

S.Y. B.TECH. (ELECTRONICS) SEMESTER III Numerical Techniques Errors in numerical computation Error types, analysis and estimation. Error propagation. Roots of Equations – (including relevant engineering applications) Bracketing Methods – The Bisection method, The False position method. Open Methods – The Newton-Raphson method, The Secant method. Systems of Linear Algebraic equations- (including relevant engineering applications) Gauss-Elimination method – Technique, pitfalls, improvement. Gauss-Jordan method. LU decomposition and matrix inversion. Gauss-Seidel method. Curve fitting -(including relevant engineering applications) Interpolation – Newton’s divided difference, Lagrange Interpolating polynomials. Approximation - Least square approximation technique, linear regression, and polynomial regression. Numerical differentiation (including relevant engineering applications) Methods based on interpolation and finite differences. Numerical Integration- (including relevant engineering applications) The Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule, Simpson’s 3/8 rule Solution to Ordinary differential equations (including relevant engineering applications) Taylor series method, Picard’s method of successive approximation. Runge – Kutta methods – Euler’s method, Euler’s predicator-corrector method, Runga-kutta method of second and fourth order. Boundary – value problems, Eigen value problems (concepts only). Optimization - (including relevant engineering applications and transportation problems) One-dimensional unconstrained - Golden-section Search, quadratic Interpolation, Newton’s method. Multidimensional unconstrained – Direct method, Gradient method. Linear programming - Graphical solution and simplex method. Text Books Seven C. Chapra , Raymond P. Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers ,Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002. Robert J. Schilling , Sandra L. Harris, Applied Numerical Methods for Engineers (Using MATLAB and C), first edition, Thomson Asia Pte. Ltd., 2002

317

S.Y. B.TECH. (ELECTRONICS) SEMESTER III Digital Design I Introduction to digital systems Analog VS Digital systems, digital devices, integrated circuits, programmable logic devices, digital design levels, software aspects of digital design. Number systems and codes Positional number systems, Binary and Hexadecimal number systems, general positional number systems conversions, arithmetic operations, representation of negative numbers, arithmetic operations on signed numbers, binary and gray codes, character codes, codes for detecting and correcting errors. Logic circuits Logic signals and gates, Boolean Algebra, theorems, combinational circuit analysis, combinational circuit synthesis – minimization, Karnaugh Maps, sum of products and product of sums expressions and their minimization, programmed minimization methods – Quine McCluskey minimization algorithm, timing hazards – static and dynamic hazards, introduction to VHDL hardware description language. Combinational logic design practices Documentation standards, Circuit timing, Combinational PLDs. Design using SSI and MSI devices Decoders, Encoders, Three state buffers, Multiplexers, Parity circuits, Comparators, Adders, Subtractors, ALUs, Combinational multipliers. Using VHDL and PLDs Combinational circuit design examples – barrel shifter, simple floating – point encoder, cascading comparator. Logic families CMOS logic; MOS transistors review, basic CMOS inverter circuit, CMOS NAND and NOR gates, fan – in, fan – out, Electrical behavior of CMOS circuits, propagation delay, power consumption, multi source busses, CMOS logic families, bipolar logic introduction, review of BJT, TTL NAND and NOR gates, fan – in, fan – out, Electrical behavior of TTL circuits, propagation delay, power consumption. CMOS / TTL interfacing, Introduction to Emitter – coupled logic. Interpreting Manufacturers’ data sheets Sequential logic principles Bistable elements, Latches and flip–flops, S-R latch, D latch, Edge triggered D flip–flop, Master/slave flip–flops, T flip–flop. Textbooks: John F. Wakerley, Digital Design Principles and Practices, third edition updated, Pearson Education Singapore, 2002. Stephen Brown & Zvonko Vranesic, Fundamentals of Digital logic with VHDL design, first edition, McGraw Hill International edition, 2000.

Additional Reading:

318

Robert K. Dueck, Digital Design with CPLD Applications and VHDL, Thomson Asia Pte. Ltd., Singapore, 2001. Alan B. Marcovitz, Introduction to logic design, first edition, McGraw Hill International edition 2002. James Bignell & Robert Donovan, Digital Electronics, fourth edition, Thomson Asia Pte. Ltd., Singapore, 2001.

319

S.Y. B.TECH. (ELECTRONICS) SEMESTER IV Electronic Circuit Analysis & Design II Frequency Response of Amplifiers Amplifier Frequency Response, System Transfer Functions, S – Domain Analysis, First – Order Functions, Bode Plots, Short–Circuit and Open–Circuit Time Constants, Frequency Response: Transistor Amplifiers with Circuit Capacitors, Frequency Response: Bipolar Transistor, Frequency Response: The FET, High Frequency Response of Transistor Circuits. Sinusoidal Oscillators: The phase shift Oscillator, The Wien Bridge Oscillator, The Tuned Circuit Oscillator, The Colpitts Oscillator and Hartley Oscillator. Output Stage and Power Amplifiers Power Amplifiers, Power Transistors – Power BJTs, Power MOSFETs, Heat Sinks, design of heat sinks, Classes Of Amplifiers – Class–A Operation, Class–B Operation, Class–AB Operation, Class–C Operation, Class–A Power Amplifiers, Class–AB Push Pull Complementary Output Stages. Differential and Multistage Amplifiers The Differential Amplifier, Basic BJT Differential Pair, Basic FET Differential Pair, Differential Amplifier with Active Load, BICMOS Circuits, Gain Stage and Simple Output Stage, Simplified BJT Operational Amplifier Circuit, Differential Amplifier Frequency Response. The Darlington Amplifier and Cascode Amplifier. Feedback and Stability Introduction to Feed Back, Basic Feedback Concepts, Ideal Close–Loop Gain, Gain Sensitivity Bandwidth Extension, Noise Sensitivity, Reduction of Nonlinear Distortion, Ideal Feedback Topologies, Series–Shunt, Shunt–Series, Series–Series, Shunt–Shunt Configurations, Voltage (Series – Shunt) Amplifiers, Current (Shunt – Series) Amplifiers, Trans Conductance (Series – Series) Amplifiers, Trans Resistance (Shunt – Shunt) Amplifiers, Loop Gain, Stability of The Feedback Circuit, The Stability Problem, Bode Plots: One – Pole, Two – Pole, and Three – Pole Amplifiers, Nyquist Stability Criterion, Phase and Gain Margins, Frequency Compensation Basic Theory, Closed Loop Frequency Response, Miller Compensation. Text Books: Donald A. Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design, Second edition, McGraw Hill International edition 2001 Martin Roden , Gordon Carpenter, William Wieserman, Electronic Design, Fourth edition, Shroff Publishers, 2002 Additional Reading: Donald Schilling & Charles Belove, Electronic Circuits Discrete and Integrated, Third edition, McGraw Hill International edition, 1989 Adel Sedra & Kenneth Smith, Microelectronic Circuits, Fourth edition, Oxford University Press, 1998

320

S.Y. B.TECH. (ELECTRONICS) SEMESTER IV Basics of Communication Engineering Introduction: Elements of a communication system, modulation and demodulation. Noise in Communication systems, Signal-to-Noise ratio, Noise factor and Noise Figure, Equivalent Noise Temperature. Amplitude Modulation: DSB Full carrier AM – principles, modulator circuits, transmitters. Different types of AM, Suppressed – carrier AM, SSB, ISB – Principles, transmitters. Angle Modulation: Frequency modulation, Phase modulation, Effect of noise, FM modulators, Transmitters. Radio receivers: Receiver characteristics, TRF and Superheterodyne receivers, AM detectors, FM detectors, Receiver circuits. Radio wave propagation: Electromagnetic waves, Properties of radio waves, Propagation of waves, Propagation terms and definitions. Analog Pulse Modulation: Sampling Theorem for Low – pass and Band – pass signals – proof with spectrum, Aliasing. Sampling Techniques – principle, generation, demodulation, spectrum. PAM, PWM, PPM – generation and detection. Digital Transmission: Quantization, Quantization error, Non-uniform quantizing, Encoding. PCM, DPCM, Delta modulation, Adaptive Delta modulation – transmission system, bandwidth. Multiplexing: TDM, FDM – Principles, Hierarchy. Text Books: Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communication Systems, Pearson Education, third edition, 2001. Roy Blake, Electronic Communication Systems, Thomson Asia Pte. Ltd., Singapore, second edition, 2002. Leon W Couch, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Pearson Education, sixth edition. Herbert Taub and Donald Schilling, Principles of Communication Systems, Tata McGrawHill, second edition.

321

S.Y. B.TECH. (ELECTRONICS) SEMESTER IV Electrical Network Analysis Review D.C. & A.C circuits. Mesh & Node Analysis Mesh & Node Analysis of circuits with independent & dependent sources. Linearity, Superposition & Source Transformation Linearity, Superposition, Current & Voltage Source Transformation. Network Theorems Thevenin’s & Norton’s Theorem (with independent & dependent sources), Maximum power transfer theorem. Circuit Analysis Introduction to Graph Theory. Tree, link currents, branch voltages, cut set & tie set. Mesh & Node Analysis, Gauss Elimination Technique, Duality. Time & Frequency Response of Circuits First & second Order Differential equations, initial conditions. Evaluation & analysis of Transient and Steady state responses using Classical Technique as well as by Laplace Transform (for simple circuits only). Transfer function, Concept of poles and zeros. Frequency response of a system (concepts only). Two - port Networks Concept of two- port network. Driving point & Transfer Functions, Open Circuit impedance (Z) parameters, Short Circuit admittance (Y) parameters, Transmission (ABCD) parameters. Inverse Transmission (A’B’C’D’) parameters. Hybrid (h) parameters. Inter Relationships of different parameters. Interconnections of two - port networks. T & Pi representation. Terminated two - port networks. Fourier series Orthogonal basis functions, Representation of a signal in terms of weighted Orthogonal basis functions, Calculation of weights (coefficients) in MSE sense, Extension to periodic signal in terms of Fourier Series Representation Complex and Trigonometric Fourier series, Properties of Fourier series, Power Spectral Density. The Fourier Transform (FT) Definition & Properties, FT of basic signals, FT of periodic signals, Energy Spectral Density. Text books: A. Sudhakar & S. P. Shyammohan, Circuits and Networks, Tata McGraw Hill, thirteenth reprint, 2000. William. H. Hayt, Jack E. Kemmerly & Steven M. Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis, McGraw Hill International, sixth edition, 2002.

322

Raymond A. DeCarlo & Pen-Min Lin, Linear Circuit Analysis, Oxford University Press, second edition, 2001. Additional Reading: Artice M. Davis, Linear Circuit Analysis, Thomson Asia Pte. Ltd., Singapore, first edition, 2001 M. E. Van Valkenburg, Network Analysis, Prentice Hall of India, third edition.

323

S.Y. B.TECH. (ELECTRONICS) SEMESTER IV Principles of Microprocessor Systems

Introduction Introduction to Microprocessors, Microcomputers, and Assembly Language.

Microprocessor Architecture and Microcomputer Systems Microprocessor Architecture and its operations, Input and output (I/O) devices.

8085 Microprocessor Architecture and Memory Interfacing The 8085 architecture, Instruction cycles, machine cycles and T states. Concept of wait states. Minimum system design. Memory interfacing with timing considerations. Clock, Reset and buffering circuits. Testing and troubleshooting memory interface circuits. 8085 Assembly Language Programming The 8085 programming model, Instruction classification, Instruction and Data format, process of writing, assembly and execution of simple assembly language programs. 8085 Instructions Data transfer operations, Arithmetic & Logic operations, Branch operations, Writing assembly language programs, Debugging a program. Programming Techniques Looping, Counting and indexing, counters and timers, Code conversion, BCD arithmetic and 16 bit data operations. Software Development Systems and Assemblers. Stack and Subroutines Concept of Stack and subroutines, parameter passing techniques, Re-entrant and recursive subroutines. I/O data transfer techniques Basic interfacing concepts, Interfacing input and output devices with examples, Memory mapped I/O and I/O mapped I/O. Testing and troubleshooting I/O interface circuits. I/O data transfer classification, Programmed I/O, Interrupt driven program controlled I/O, Hardware I/O (Direct Memory Access). Interrupts Requirements, Single level interrupt, Multi level interrupt, Vectored interrupt. 8085 interrupt structure and operation. 8259A programmable interrupt controller features and operation. 324

Programmable Interface Devices Features and operating modes of working of 8155 multifunction device, 8255A programmable peripheral interface, 8254, programmable interval timer. Direct memory access (DMA) and DMA controller 8237, 8279 programmable keyboard/display interface. Serial I/O and Data Communication: Basics concepts in serial I/O, 8085 serial I/O lines. Microprocessor Applications: Interfacing scanned multiplexed displays and liquid crystal display, interfacing matrix keyboard, Introduction to emulators and logic analyzers. Textbooks: Ramesh S. Gaonkar, Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with the 8085, fourth edition, Penram International Publishing (India), 2000. Microprocessors and Programmed Logic, second edition, Prentice Hall of India, 1987.

325

S.Y. B.TECH. (ELECTRONICS) SEMESTER IV Digital Design II Sequential logic design Clocked synchronous state machine analysis, Clocked synchronous state machine design, designing state machines using state diagrams, state machine synthesis using transition lists, decomposing state machines, feedback sequential circuits, VHDL sequential circuit design features. Sequential logic design practices Sequential circuit documentation standards, use of latches and flip–flops in examples like switch de-bouncing, bus holder circuit, counters – ripple and synchronous, MSI counters and applications, decoding binary counter states, counters in VHDL. Shift registers, structure, MSI shift registers, serial / parallel conversion, shift register counters, ring counters, Johnson counters, linear feedback shift register counters, shift registers in VHDL. Synchronous design methodology, impediments to synchronous design, synchronizer failure and metastability. Design examples like a few simple machines, and traffic light controller, done in VHDL. Memory, CPLDs and FPGAs Types of memory devices, Read-Only Memory (ROM), Read / write memory, Static RAM, Dynamic RAM, Introduction to Xilinx XC9600 CPLD family and Xilinx XC 4000 FPGA family. Additional topics Computer Aided Design (CAD) tools, Concept of design for testability, concept of digital system reliability, introduction to transmission lines, reflections and termination. Textbooks: John F. Wakerley, Digital Design Principles and Practices, third edition updated, Pearson Education Singapore, 2002. Stephen Brown & Zvonko Vranesic, Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Design, first edition, McGraw Hill International edition, 2000. Additional Reading: John M. Yarbrough, Digital Logic Applications and Design, first edition, Thomson Asia Pte. Ltd., Singapore, 2001

326

THIRD YEAR 200040: Engineering Statistics 1)Review of probability. Baye’s theorem. Discrete and continuous random variables. Probability mass function and density function. Expected value. (Expectation) Moments and moments generating functions. Relation between Raw moments and Central moments. 2) Probability, distribution : Binomal, Poisson, Normal, Student’s distribution, x2 (Chisquare), F distribution. 3) Sampling theory : Sampling distribution. Test of hypothesis. Level of significance. Critical region. One- tailed and two-tailed tests. Degree of freedom. Estimation of population parameters. Central limit theorem. Large and Small samples : Test of significance for large samples. Test of significance of the difference between sample proportion and population proportion. Test of significance of the difference between the sample proportions. Test of significance of the difference between sample mean and population means. Test of significance of the difference between the means of two samples. Test of significance for small samples : Test of significance of the difference between sample mean and population mean. Test of significance of the difference between means to two small samples drawn from the same normal population Paired- t test. F-test of significance of the difference between population variances. Test of the Goodness of fit and independence of attribute. Contingency table. Yate’s correction. 4) Fitting of curves : Least square method. Fitting of the straight line and parabolic curve. Bivariate frequency distribution. Co-relation, Co-variance. Karl Pearson’s Coefficient and Spearman’s Rank Co-relation coefficients, Regression coefficients and lines of regression. 5) Analysis of variance: one way and two way classification 6) Statistical quality control and control charts.

Text Books: S G Gupta, V K Kapur, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics, S Chand & Co T Veerrajan, Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, Tata McGraw Hill R P Hooda, Statistics for Business and Economics, Macmillan 306090: Electromagnetics & Wave Propagation

327

Maxwell Equations: Derivation of various basic electro magnetic laws using Maxwell’s Equations, Conditions at a Boundary Surface, Basic idea of inductance & capacitance. Electromagnetic waves Solution of free space conditions, Uniform plane-propagation, Uniform plane waves, The wave equation for conducting medium, Sinusoidal Time Variations, Conductors & Dielectrics, Polarization, Direction cosines, Reflection by a perfect conductor-Normal Incidence, Reflection by a perfect conductor-Oblique Incidence, Reflection by a perfect dielectric-Normal Incidence, Reflection by a perfect insulator-oblique Incidence, Reflection at surface of a Conductive Medium, Surface Impedance, The Transmission-line analogy. Poynting vector & flow of power Poynting’s Theorem, Note on interpretation of E×H, Instantaneous, Average & Complex Poynting vector, Power Loss in a Plane Conductor. Guided Waves Waves between parallel planes, Tranverse electric waves (Ez≡0), Transverse Magnetic waves (Hz≡0), Characteristics of TE & TM waves, Transverse electromagnetic waves, Velocities of propagation, attenuation in parallel-plane guides, Wave impedances, Electric field & current flow within the conductor, Transmission line, Circuit representation of of the parallel-plane transmission line, Parallel plane transmission line with loss, E & H about long parallel Cylindrical conductors of arbitrary cross section, Transmission –line theory, Low loss radio frequency & UHF transmission lines, UHF lines as circuit elements, Transmission-line charts, Impedance matching by means of stub lines. Radiation Potential Functions & the electromagnetic field, Potential functions for sinusoidal oscillations, The alternating current element (or Oscillating Electric Dipole), Power radiated by a current element, Application to short antennas, assumed current distribution, Radiation from a quarter-wave monopole or half-wave dipole, Sine integral & cosine integral, Electromagnetic field close to antenna, Solution of the potential Equations, Farfield approximation. Transmission Lines Transmission Line equations, Transmission Line parameters, Transmission Line examples, Use of Smith Chart, Impedance matching. Text Book E. C. Jordan & K. G. Balmain-Electromagnetic Waves & Radiating Systems, PHI, Second Edition, 1988. Additional Reading John D Krauss – Engineering Electromagnetics, McGraw-Hill, sixth edition, 2001. J. Edminister- Engineering Electromagnetics, Schaum series, Tata McGraw-Hill, second edition,1992.

328

306100: Control Systems Introduction to control system analysis Introduction, examples of control systems, open loop control systems, closed loop control systems. Transfer function and impulse response of systems. Control system components DC and AC servomotors, servoamplifier, potientiometer, synchro transmitters, synchro receivers, synchro control transformer, stepper motors. Mathematical modeling of systems Importance of a mathematical model, Block diagrams, signal flow graphs, Masan’s gain formula and its application to block diagram reduction. Transient-Response Analysis Impulse response function, First order system, second order system, time domain specifications of systems, analysis of transient-response using Second order model. Steady – state Error Analysis Classification of control systems according to “Type” of systems, Steady – state errors, static error constants, Steady – state analysis of different types of systems using step, ramp and parabolic input signals. Stability Analysis Introduction to concept of stability, Stability analysis using Routh’s stability criterion, Absolute stability, Relative stability. Root-Locus Analysis Introduction, Root–Locus plots, summary of general rules for constructing Root– Locus, Root–Locus analysis of control systems. Frequency-Response Analysis Introduction, Frequency domain specifications, resonance peak and peak resonating frequency, relationship between time and frequency domain specification of systems. Frequency-Response Plots Bode plots, Polar plots, Log–magnitude Vs phase plots, Nyquist stability criterion, stability analysis, Relative stability, gain margin, phase margin, stability analysis of system using Bode plots. Closed-Loop Frequency Response Constant gain and phase loci, Nichol’s chart and their use in stability study of systems. Introduction to State Space Analysis The general state-space representation, applying the state-space representation, converting a transfer function to state-space, converting from state-space representation to a transfer function. Textbooks:

329

K. Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, third edition. Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Prentice Hall of India, seventh edition. Madan Gopal, Control Systems Principles and Design, Tata McGraw Hill, seventh edition, 1997. Additional reading: 1. Norma S. Nise, Control Systems Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, third edition.

330

306110: Signal Processing Introduction to signals & Systems ( CT and DT domain ) Definition of Signal Signal classification Signal manipulations Periodicity in CT ( Continuous Time) & DT( Discrete Time) domain Concept of a system System representations & classification Concept of Impulse Response Convolution in CT domain Review of Fourier Series (FS) & Fourier Transform (FT) for CT systems Fourier Series & Fourier Transform for DT systems( DTFS & DTFT): Concept, properties and uses Amplitude & phase spectra Energy Spectral Density Power Spectral Density Review of the Laplace Transform Definition & properties of Two-sided & one-sided Laplace Transform Region of Convergence (ROC) System transfer function Relationship with Fourier Transform & mapping Zero state & zero input responses Z Transform Definition & properties of Two-sided & one-sided Z Transform Region of Convergence (ROC) Relationship with Fourier and Laplace Transform , & mapping Inverse Z Transform Introduction to DT Systems Difference equation FIR & IIR systems System transfer function System realization: Direct forms, Cascade & parallel forms Linear and circular Convolution BIBO stabillity Time Domain Analysis of DT Systems System Transfer function & Impulse response Solution of a difference equation zero input & zero state response calculations 8. Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) DTFT & DFT DFT Properties Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) DITFFT and DIFFFT Algorithms Divide and Conquer Algorithms DFT analysis of Sinusoidal signals Limitations of DFT

331

Text- Books: S. Haykin, Signals and Systems , Wiley Eastern Publication J.G. Proakis, D. G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms and applications, Prentice Hall of India, 1995 Ashok Ambardar, Analog and Digital Signal Processing, Thomson Learning, second edition, 2001 Oppenheim and Schafer with Buck, Discrete- Time Signal Processing, Prentice Hall of India, 2000 Additional Reading: 1. Lathi, Signal Processing & Linear Systems, Oxford University Press, First Indian Impression, 2000

332

306120: Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Overview Overview of microcomputer systems. Hardware and software principles. Intel MCS 51 family Introduction to Single chip microcontrollers of Intel MCS 51 family. Architectural and operational features. Its instruction set. CPU timing and machine cycles. Interrupt structure and priorities. Internal Timer / counters, serial interface. Connection of external memory. Power saving modes. Interfacing of 8051 with EPROM programming for EPROM versions. 8051 variations Intel 8086/8088 microprocessor family Architecture and organisation of 8086/8088 microprocessor family. Study of its Instruction set. Assembly language programming, Introduction to mixed language programming using C and Assembly language. 8086 family minimum and maximum mode operation. Timing diagram for 8086 family, detailed study of maximum mode connection: study of 8288 bus controller. 8086 interrupt structure. Memory & I/O design Memory system design for 8086 family including interface of dynamic Read/ write memory, timing considerations for memory interfacing. Connection of I/O Controllers 8255AH programmable peripheral Interface, Programmable Interrupt Controller 8259A, UART 8250, programmable D.M.A. Controller 8237. Data communications, EIA RS-232C serial interface and IEEE 488 General purpose interface. Error detection and correction - parity and cyclic redundancy check. 8087 Math Co-processor Study of architecture of 8087 floating point co- processor. Data types supported by 8087. Host and co - processor interface, Assembly language Programming for 8086 - 8087 based systems. Introduction to Multiprocessor systems Multiprocessor configurations. Study of the 8289 bus arbiter. Design of 8086 based multiprocessor systems (without timing considerations). Text Books: John Uffenback, 8086 / 8088 Design, Programming and Interfacing, second edition, ninth Indian reprint, Prentice Hall of India, 2001 Kenneth Ayala, The 8051 Microcontrollers Architecture, Programming & Applications, Penram International (India) Douglas Hall, Microprocessors interfacing and programming, Tata McGraw Hill, third edition Additional Reading: Muhammad A Mazidi, The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems, Pearson Education Asia, first Indian reprint, 2002 John Uffenback, The 80X86 family Design, Programming and Interfacing, third edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2002 Intel Corporation, Data manuals

333

200080: Industrial Economics & Management Basic economic problems. Resource constraints and welfare maximization. Nature of economics. Positive and normative economics, micro and macroeconomics. The role of the state in economic activity; market and government failures. Theories of demand, supply and market equilibrium. Market structures, perfect and imperfect competition commercial and central banking. International trade. Foreign exchange and balance of payments. Management : Definition process. The functions of a manager. Planning – its nature, objectives, types of plans. Decision – making. Organising – departmentalization, delegation decentralization, span of management. Staffing – selection and recruitment, appraisal, management development. Leadership motivation and communication. Controlling – its nature techniques. Books recommended Economics : Samuelson & Nordhaus Principles of Economics : Mankiw Essential of Management : Koontz & O’donnell Management : David R. Hampton

334

306140: Electronics Workshop Soldering Soldering techniques, stripping and tinning stranded wires, installing and soldering tinned wires, mounting components – plated through hole and surface mount technology, hand soldering and wave soldering, de-soldering techniques, electrostatic discharge. Analog Troubleshooting Electronics troubleshooting basics, troubleshooting with meters and Oscilloscopes, signal injection and signal tracing, system analysis, diagnostics and statistical methods, servicing close loop circuits, troubleshooting noise and intermittents. Digital Troubleshooting Introduction to troubleshooting digital logic, use of logic probes, understanding and use of logic analyzers, working with microprocessor / microcontroller systems, use of logic analysis system for troubleshooting microprocessor / microcontroller systems, use of incircuit emulators. PC Hardware PC hardware basics – how computers work, how software and hardware work together, system board, floppy and hard drives, troubleshooting fundamentals, supporting I/O devices, multimedia technologies, power supplies. Textbooks: H. (Ted) Smith, Quality hand soldering and circuit board repair, second edition, Delmar publishers J. A. Sam Wilson, et. al., Electronic troubleshooting and servicing techniques Volume I, 1998, Howard W. Sams publication Jean Andrews, Enhanced guide to managing and maintaining your PC, Enhanced third edition, 2001, Course Technology – Thomson learning publishers 4. Jan Axelson, The Microcontroller Idea Handbook, Penram Publishing (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2002 Termwork: The termwork shall consist of at least four laboratory experiments on designing, fabricating, testing and troubleshooting simple electronic circuits already studied. A mini project to design, fabricate, test and troubleshoot a simple digital electronic system based on a microprocessor / microcontroller.

335

SEMESTER VI 306150: Electronic Measuring Instruments Introduction: Fundamentals of operational amplifier circuits, Principles of working of an electronic meter Electronic Voltmeters: Principles of operation, advantages over conventional type analog voltmeters, factors involved in selection of voltmeters, basic voltmeter, peak reading, average reading true RMS reading, sampling type, FET voltmeters , sensitivity considerations & calculations. Digital Voltmeters: Methods of analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion, principles of operation and typical specifications of a digital voltmeter, description of various types of DVMs with block diagrams, Resolution and Sensitivity of a digital meter, digital displays for meters. Frequency Meters: Analog-schematic & operational details, limitations. Digital Frequency meters, Time interval measurements, frequency ratio measurements Phase Meters: Phase measurement by voltage addition method, balanced modulation type, phase meters using flip-flops, advantages & limitations of each type. Digital Phase meters for entire A.F. range & their limitations. Oscilloscopes: Block diagram study of C.R.O., Description of panel layout & implementation of controls. Requirement of time base , triggered time base, delayed time base, external triggering etc. Lissagios patterns, circular time base, intensity modulation, velocity modulation, use of these in phase & frequency measurements. Frequency time base, Wobbler scope & its applications, Dual trace, multi trace, Double beam, Sampling; Storage, Digital read-out oscilloscopes. Use of CRO in square wave testing of amplifiers, tracing of diode & transistor characteristics. Signal Generators : Requirement of a good laboratory type signal generator, A.F. signal genrators, Beat frequency oscillator & its advantages. Q meter: Principle of operation, Sources of Error, Measurement of a).Stray capacitance ,b) Impedance , c) Characteristic impedance of transmission line using Q meter. Text books: 1. Cooper W. D. & Helfrick A.D., Electronics Instrumentation & Measurement Techniques, third edition Prentice Hall of India, 1985 2. Kalsi H.S., Electronic Instrumentation, first edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997. 3. Doebelin E.O., Measurement Systems, Applications and Design, fourth edition,Tata McGraw Hill, 1990. 4. Oliver Cage, Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation, McGraw Hill ,1975.

336

306160: Integrated Circuits and Applications Operational Amplifier Fundamentals Basic Op Amp Configurations, Ideal Op Amp Circuits Analysis, Negative Feedback, Feedback in Op Amp Circuits. Circuits with Resistive Feedback Current-to-Voltage Converters, Voltage-to-Currents Converters, Current Amplifiers, Difference Amplifier, Instrumentation Amplifier ( Three Op-amp and IC AMP-01), Instrumentation Applications, Flying capacitor techniques (LTC 1043), Active Guard drive, Current Input Instrumentation Amplifier Active Filter The Transfer function, First-Order Active Filters, Audio Filter Applications, Standard Second- Order Responses, KRC Filters, Multiple-Feedback Filters, State-Variable and Biquad Filters, Sensitivity, Filter approximations, generalized impedance converters, direct design, Switched capacitor filters. Static Op Amp Limitations Simplified Op Amp Circuits Diagram, Input Bias and Offset Currents, Low-Input-BiasCurrent Op Amps, Input Offset Voltage, Low-Input-Offset-Voltage Op Amps, Input Offset-Error Compensation, Maximum Ratings. Dynamic Op Amp Limitations Open-Loop Response, Closed-Loop Response, Input and Output Impedances, Transient Response, Effect of Finite GBP on Integrator Circuits, Effect of Finite GBP on Filters, Current-Feedback Amplifiers. Nonlinear Circuits Voltage Comparators, Comparator Applications, Schmitt Triggers, Precision Rectifier(half wave and full wave), Analog Switches, Peak Detectors, Sample-and-Hold Amplifiers. Opamps for high current, voltage and power applications, high speed amplifiers, voltage followers and buffers, operational trans-conductance amplifiers. Waveform Generators Sine Wave Generators using Op-Amps, Multivibrators using Op-Amps, Monolithic Timer – NE555 with applications, Triangular Wave Generator using Op-Amps, Saw tooth Wave Generator using Op-Amps, Monolithic Waveform Generator - ICL8038, V-F and F-V Converters. Voltage References And Regulators Performance Specifications, Voltage References, Voltage-Reference Applications, Linear Regulators, IC 723 low voltage, high voltage and high current designs, three terminal Linear Regulators and Applications, Switching Regulators, Monolithic Switching Regulators, IC LM 3525.

337

D-A and A-D Converters D-A Conversion Techniques, R – 2R ladder, Multiplying DAC with Applications, A-D Conversion Techniques, Dual slope ADC, Ramp ADC, Successive approximation ADC, half flash and flash ADC, Delta modulation. Nonlinear Amplifiers and Phase-Locked Loops Log / Antilog Amplifiers, Analog Multipliers, VCO IC NE 566, Phase-Locked Loops, IC NE 565, 4046, Analog multiplexer and de-multiplexer, IC CD 4051. Operational Amplifier Circuit Design Introduction, Differential Amplifier, current mirror, output stage, General Op-Amp circuit design, Detailed circuit description and working of 741 Op-Amp, small signal analysis, frequency response.

Text Books: 1. Sergio Franco, Design with operational amplifiers and analog integrated circuits, Third edition, McGraw Hill International edition, 2002. 2. James M. Fiore, Op Amps and Linear Integrated circuits, First reprint, Thomson Asia Pte. Ltd., 2001. 3. William D. Stanley, Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated circuits, Pearson Education Asia, fourth edition. 4. Robert Coughlin and F Driscoll, Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated circuits, sixth edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2001. Additional Reading: Donald A. Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design, Second edition, McGraw Hill International edition 2001

338

306170: Communication Systems Antennas The half-wave dipole, Antenna characteristics, Ground effects, Effects of Antenna height, Antenna coupling, Antenna arrays, Special purpose Antennas, UHF and microwave Antennas. Television Principles Television system and standards, The composite video signal, Blanking and Synchronizing pulses, Monochrome Television transmission and reception, Horizontal and Vertical deflection circuits, Synchronizing circuits, Colour transmission, Colour reception, Cable TV, Digital TV, HDTV. Satellite Communication Kepler’s Laws, Satellite allocation, Look angles, Orbital perturbations and Spacecraft subsystems, Satellite system link models, Direct broadcast satellite services, Applications of satellites. orbits, Spacing and frequency corrections, Satellite Launching, Link equations, Multiple access, LEO, MEO and Geo-stationary

Radar Systems Basic principles, Radar performance factors, MTI and Pulse Doppler radar, Continuous wave Doppler radar, Radar antenna, Phased array radars. Text Books Wayne Tomasi - Electronic Communication Systems, Pearson Education, fourth edition, 2001 Kennedy, Davis - Electronic Communication Systems, Tata McGraw - Hill, fourth edition, 1999 Roy Blake - Electronic Communication Systems, Thomson Learning, second edition, 2002 Gulati - Monochrome and Colour Television, New Age International (P) Limited, 1983 Additional Reading Pratt, Bostian - Satellite Communication, John Wiley and Sons, 1986 Dennis Roddy - Satellite Communications, McGraw - Hill, third edition, 2001 Skolnik - Introduction to Radar Systems, McGraw - Hill, third edition, 2001 Gulati - Colour Television Principles and Practice, New Age International (P) Limited, 1988 Jordan, Balmian - Elecromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, PHI, second edition, 1988

339

306180: Filter Theory and Applications Frequency Domain Analysis of DT Systems Pole-zero diagram Frequency domain analysis using Analytical & graphical techniques System classification based on pass-band as low pass, high pass, Band pass & band reject System classification based on phase response as Minimum phase , maximum phase , mixed phase or linear phase systems Stability Analysis Finite word-length effect on system poles Linear Phase FIR Systems Need for linear phase, concept of phase delay & group delay Condition for Linear Phase Magnitude & phase response for Four types of Linear Phase systems Location of zeros FIR Filter Design FIR versus IIR filters Design of FIR filters by windowing technique: -Gibb’s phenomenon -Use of different windows: rectangular, triangular, hamming, hanning, Kaiser Design of FIR filters using Frequency sampling techniques Design of optimal linear phase FIR filters Structures for implementation: canonic and lattice Design of IIR filters The design process Methodology Different types of analog approximations: butterworth, chebyshev, inverse chebyshev, elliptical, Bessel etc. Spectral transformations Conversion techniques like bilinear transformation, impulse invariance, matched Z-transform Intuitive approaches Quantization Effects Quantization methods Limit cycle oscillations due to Quantization Errors in frequency response due to coefficient Quantization DSP processors Need for Special architecture Difference between DSP processor & microprocessor A general DSP processor Text Books: Oppenheim and Schafer with Buck, Discrete- Time Signal Processing, Prentice Hall of India, 2000 A. Antoniou, Digital Filters: Analysis Design and Applications, Tata McGraw-Hill, . 2001 Ashok Ambardar, Analog and Digital Signal Processing, Thomson Learning, second edition, 2001 J.G. Proakis, D. G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms and applications, Prentice Hall of India, 1995

340

306190: Computer Organization Performance measure Definition, Throughput and Response time, Measuring performance (MIPs, FLOPs etc.). Preliminaries Computer Arithmetic – Number representation and Arithmetic, Floating-point representation, Multiplication and Division algorithms and circuits. Operation on Data structures like Arrays, Lists, Stacks, and Queues. Instruction types and sequencing, addressing modes with case study for Pentium processor Input / Output Organization I/O devices types and access methods, interrupts, DMA, I/O processors, types of busses and bus arbitration, various bus standards, I/O interface – serial and parallel ports Basic Processing Unit The data path and components of Instruction Execution, Bus Organization, Hardwired control, Micro-programmed control, Exceptions and their handling. Performance Enhancement using pipelining – Pipelining Introduction, Instruction set, Hazards, Case study Memory organization RAM organization – SRAM and DRAM, ROM and Flash memory, addressing, Cache – mapping , handling cache miss , multi level caches, Virtual memory – Concept , Address translation, paging, TLB, segmentation Peripherals Storage Devices – Organization, Access techniques, Input andOutput devices Organization, Access techniques, Network devices – modems, serial communication links Multiprocessor systems Introduction to Multiprocessor systems, Connection techniques, Cache issues Text Books Hamacher , Vranesic, Zaky ,Computer Organization , Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002. Additional Reading Patterson & Hennessy, Computer Organization, Second Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 1998 John Carpinelli, Computer Systems Organization and Architecture, first Indian reprint, Addison Wesley Longman – Indian Branch, 2001 200030 :- Technical Communication and Presentation Skills

341

Detailed Syllabus 1 Communication in a Business Organisation: Channels,media,internal and external, formal and informal, upward and downward, nonverbal. 2 Technical Writing Skills: definition, importance, qualities, choosing words, sentences and paragraphs; audience recognition.; principles of Business correspondence; job application and resumes 3 Report Writing: types, qualities, , defining objectives and scope, organizing and interpreting information,, individual and group reports, formal and informal reports. 4 Technical proposal 5 Presentation Skills 6 Group Discussion Assignments: Written One assignment each from topics 1 to 4 Oral One presentation One group discussion Books recommended: Lesiker & Petit “ report Writing for Business “ McGraw Hill Meenakshi Raman , Sharma Sangeetha “ Technical Communication – Principles & Practices” Oxford University Press

342

SCHEME OF INSTRUCTION & EXAMINATION At B.TECH. (Electronics Engineering) (Revision 2004) Programme: B Tech (Electronics Engineering) Semester VII Course Course Title code Contact Hours L 3 3 Evaluation ESE weightage (Theory)Hours P/T Total Cr TWA MST ESE 2 5 8 15 15 70 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3 2 2 2 10 6 6 6 28 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 3 3 3

306200 Basics of VLSI 306210 Instrumentation Systems 306220 Digital 4 Communication Elective I 4 Elective II 4 18 Course Code 406010 406020 406030 406040 406050 406060

Elective I & II Advanced Digital Signal Processing Biomedical Instrumentation Microcomputer System Design DSP Architectures and Systems Wireless Communication Mechatronics Contact Hours L 4 4 Evaluation ESE weightage (Theory)Hours P/T Total Cr TWA MST ESE 2 6 10 15 15 70 3 2 6 6 6 24 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 3 3 3

Semester VIII Course Course Title code 306230 Power Electronics 306240 Microwave & RF Circuit Design Elective III Elective IV Total

4 2 4 2 16 8

Course Code
406070 406080 406090 406100 406110 406120 406130

Elective III & IV
Image Processing Process Control & Instrumentation Robotics Telecom Network Management VLSI Design Embedded Systems Data Communication & Networking

343

Project: Sr. Course No. Code 1

Course Title Project

L

P

T

406900

Cr TW MS ESE ESE A T (Theory) Hrs 8 See note below

• •

The project is evaluated in two stages. The first stage evaluation shall be done at the end of pre-final semester by a Committee of Institute faculty (at least two faculty members including project guide). The Project Guide along with an external examiner shall do the second stage evaluation at the end of final semester. The first stage assessment shall have 25% weightage. Another 25% weightage shall be given for the initiative, interest, effort and sincerity shown by the student during the entire project work. The second stage assessment shall have 50% weightage. The first stage evaluation is to be carried out after a minimum of 12 weeks of work. The project report should be submitted in the prescribed format at least three weeks prior to the end of final semester or by the prescribed date and second stage assessment can be done in the last week of semester. The project shall carry 08 credits. The grade for the project shall be declared only after second stage evaluation.

344

Basics of VLSI ( Course Code 306200) Physics of FET NMOS, PMOS, enhancement and depletion mode transistor, MOSFET, threshold voltage, flatband condition, threshold adjustment, linear and saturated operation, FET capacitance, mobility saturation, thermal variation, short channel and hot electron effect. Silicon semiconductor technology Wafer processing, mask generation, oxidation, epitaxy ion implantation, diffusion, metallization, basic NMOS and PMOS processes. Process simulation using CAD tools. Scaling Scaling of MOS circuits, type of scaling, functional limitations of scaling, scaling of wires and interconnects. Design rules and layout Purpose of design rules, NMOS and CMOS design rules and layout, Design of NMOS and CMOS inverters, NAND and NOR gates. Interlayer contact6s, butting and buried contacts, stick diagrams, layout of integrated circuits, use of layout tools like MAGIC for integrated circuits. MOS Inverters MOSFET aspect and inverter ratio, Enhancement VS Depletion mode pull ups, standard CMOS inverter, transit time and switching speed of NMOS and CMOS inverters, NMOS and CMOS gates, transistor sizing and power dissipation, noise margin calculations, SPICE models and circuit simulation using PSPICE. Design of basic VLSI circuits Design of circuits like multiplexer, decoder, priority encoder, Flip flops, shift registers using MOS circuits. CMOS circuits and Logic Design CMOS Logic structures, Basic physical design of simple logic gates, clocking strategies, physical and electrical design of logic gates, 10 structures. TEXT BOOKS: 1. E.D. Fabricious, Introduction to VLSI design, McGraw Hill Publications, first edition 1990 2. Neil H.E. Weste Kamran Eshraghian, Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A Systems Perspective, second edition, Addison Wesley Publications, 1993 3. S.M.Sze, VLSI Technology, McGraw Hill Publications, second edition. Additional Reading : 1. John P. Uyemura, Introduction to VLSI circuits & systems, John Wiley & sons.

345

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VII Instrumentation Systems ( Course Code 306210) Fundamental Concepts of Measurement and Performance Characteristics An Instrumentation System: System Configuration-Block diagram of a generalized measurement system, Generalized measurement-Transfer function representation & sinusoidal transfer function. Zero order system. First order system- Response of a system to step, ramp, and impulse input and frequency response. Second order system-- Response of a system to step, ramp, impulse input and frequency response of Second order system Dead time element. Dynamic response of measurement systems. Transducers: Classification and requirements. Displacement- Principle of transducers, potentiometric, displacement transducer, LVDT, Variable capacitance transducer, Hall effect-angular displacement transducer, Digital transducer. Strain- Types of strain gauge , theory of operation of resistance strain gauge, types of electrical strain gauge, materials of strain gauge, Gauging techniques, strain gauge circuits, temperature compensation, Application. Vibration- Vibration sensing devices-Velocity transducer, Bonded strain gauge accelerometer, Piezoelectric accelerometer, Servo accelerometer, Digital accelerometer. Signal conditioners for vibration transducer output. -Voltage amplifier, Charge amplifier. Application. Temperature- Classification of temperature sensors Resistance type temperature sensors, Platinum resistance thermometer. Thermistors. Thermocouple-properties, material used for construction, Reference junction compensation, Thermocouple output linearizing circuits. Temperature Measurements by radiation method- optical pyrometer, Solid-State Transducers Pressure- Diphragram, Capsule, Bourdon tube, Bellows, Variable Reluctance type, Variable capacitance type, Thin film pressure transducer, Digital pressure transducer, Piezoelectric transducer. Force and Torque- Different types of load cell configuration, Effect of temperature variation, dynamic response of elastic transducer, digital force transducer. Torque Measurement- Absorption type, Transmission type, stress type, deflection type Flow- Classification of flow meter, Head type flow meters, Electromagnetic type, Rotameter, Anemometer, and Ultrasonic flow meter. Photoelectric transducerPhoto Multiplier tube, Photo conductive cell, Photo voltaic cell, Semiconductor Photo Diode, Photo transducer. Data Acquisition: Generalized data acquisition system, Multi-channel DAS, Data logger, PC based Data acquisition system. Text Books: 1. Rangan Sharma & Mani, “Instrumentation Devices and System”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2nd Edition.

346

Additional Reading: 1. Doebelin E. O., “Measurement Systems-Application and Design”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 4th Edition, 1990. 2. Jones and Chin, “Electronic instruments and measurements”, John-Willey & Sons, 1987. 3. Nakra and Chaudhary, “Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2003 4. Neubert H. K., “Instruments Transducers”, Oxford Univ. Press., 2nd edition.

347

FINAL B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING semester VII Digital Communication ( Course Code 306220) Random Variables Review of probability theory, communication examples, Random variables, probability distribution function, probability density function, joint cumulative distribution and probability density, Average value and variance of a random variable, the error function, The Gaussian probability density, The Rayleigh probability density, the central limit theorem. Information Theory Discrete messages, the concept of amount of Information, Entropy, Information rate, coding to increase average Information per bit – Huffman coding, Lempel Ziv coding, Shannon’s Theorem, Channel capacity, Capacity of a Gaussian channel, Bandwidth – S/N trade-off. Error control coding Rationale for coding and types of codes, Discrete memory less channel, some Algebraic concepts-code efficiency and Hamming bound, Linear block codes, Cyclic codes, Convolution codes, maximum likelihood decoding of convolution codes. Base band shaping for data transmission Discrete PAM signals, Power spectra of discrete PAM signals, Inter symbol Interference, Nyquist’s criteria for distortion less base band, Binary transmission, Correlative coding eye pattern, Base band M-ary PAM systems. Base band Detection Correlation receiver, Matched filter receiver, Detection of signals with unknown phase in noise, Equalization concepts [No Algorithms expected], Trapped-Delay Lines equalization, linear predictive vocoders Digital Modulation Techniques Digital Modulation formats, coherent binary modulation Techniques, Coherent quadrature modulation Techniques, Non coherent binary modulation techniques, Comparison of binary and quaternary modulation techniques-ary modulation, Power spectra, Bandwidth efficiency, Applications of Digital modulation Techniques. Spread spectrum modulation Pseudo-noise sequences, Base band spread spectrum system, DS-BPSK, Processing gain, Probability of error, Jamming Margin, Frequency – Hop spread spectrum, Applications Text Books: 1. Symon Haykin-Digital Communication John Wiley and sons (Topics 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) 2. Taub and Schilling –principles of communication systems-Tata Mc Graw Hill second edition Additional Reading:

348

1. John G.Proakis, Digital communications, McGraw Hill 2. Bernad Shlar, Digital Communication, Pearson Education 3. K. Sam Shanmugam-Digital and Analog communication systems –PRISM Indian Edition.

349

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VII ELECTIVE – Advanced Digital Signal Processing ( Course Code 406010)_ 1. Multirate Digital Signal Processing: Decimation Interpolation Filter design and implementation Sampling rate conversion Application of multirate signal processing. 2. Review of Linear Algebra 3. Filtering Discrete Time random processes 4. Spectral Factorization Minimum phase signals & systems Partial energy & minimum delay Minimum phase & minimum delay property Spectral factorization theorem 5. Spectral Estimation by Classical methods The periodogram The modified periodogram Barlett, Welch&Blackman-Tuckey, approach 6. Wavelets: Introduction to time frequency analysis Short-time Fourier transform Wigner-Ville transform Continuous time wavelet transform Discrete wavelet transform Tiling of the time-frequency plane and wavepacket analysis Construction of wavelets. 7. Multiresolution analysis. Introduction to frames and biorthogonal wavelets.

Textbooks:
1.

S.M. Kay, Modern Spectral Estimation, Prentice hall, 1988.

2. J. G. Proakies, D.G. Manolakis, and D. Sharma, “Digital Time Signal Processing: principles, algorithms, and applications,” Pearson Education, 2006. 3. DaFatta, D. J., Lucas, J. G., and Hodgkiss, W. S. “Digital Signal Processing: A system design approach,” Wiley publications, 1988. 4. R. M. Rao, and A.S. Bopardikar, “Wavelet Transforms,” Pearson Education, 2001. 5. C. S. Burrus, R. A. Gopinath, and H. Guo,. “Introduction to Wavelets and Wavelets Transforms,” PrenticeHall, 1998. 6. P. P. Vaidyanathan, Multirate Systems and Filter Banks, Prentice Hall, 1993.

350

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VII ELECTIVE – Biomedical Instrumentation ( Course Code 406020) Study of Human Body Anatomy and Physiology of the human body, Body System – Skeletal, Muscular, Circulatory, Respiratory, Digestive, Excretory, Nervous, Endocrine, Reproductive. Study of the Human Cell Average Human Cell, Transport across the cell membrane and membrane potential – Na+ and K+ transport, Action Potential, Electrical Equivalent Circuit of a cell. Bio Electrodes, transducers and amplifiers Electrode – Electrolyte Interface, different electrode types, Stimulating electrodes, Biomedical Amplifiers. Transducers for measurement of physiological events. Electrocardiogram Origin of the heart beat and the electrical activity of the heart, the ECG and its analysis, the Einthoven Triangle, Bipolar leads, Unipolar leads, Vector cardiography, Measurement of cardiac output, ECG electrodes, ECG Amplifiers, Cardiac Arrhythmias. Bioelectric Signals Study of Characteristics of various Bioelectric Signals such as EEG, EMG, ERG, EOG and their recording. Signal Measurement Measurement of blood pressure, blood flow and cardiac output, Impedance Plethysmography, Measurements in the respiratory system. Biomedical Instruments Stimulators, Defibrillators, Pacemakers, Respirators, Bedside Monitor, Audiometer and hearing aids. Oximetry, Ear Oximeter, Pulse Oximeter, Blood Gas Analyzer, Spirometry, Pulmonary Function Analyzers. Prosthesis Introduction to Prosthesis. Electrical Safety Electrical safety of patient and medical equipment

Textbooks:
1. 2. Cromwell L. Weibell and Pfeiffer, Biomedical Instrumentation and measurements, Prentice Hall of India, 1993. Khandpur R. S., Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill, Second edition, 2003

Additional Reading:
1. Ganong W. F., Review of Medical Physiology, Prentice Hall Inc., USA, 1995.

351

2.

Webster J. G. – Medical Instrumentation – Application and Design, Wiley and Sons Inc., Third edition, 1999. 3. Carr and Brown, Introduction to biomedical equipment technology, Fourth edition, Pearson Press, 2003.

352

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VII ELECTIVE – Microcomputer System Design ( Course Code 406030) The Pentium Processor Functional units of Pentium processor. Overview of cache operation and cache types. Pentium cache overview. Pentium signals interface. Address bus, data bus, misaligned transfers, Communications with 8, 16, 32 and 64 Bit devices, bus control signals, bus master signals, System test and initialization. System management tools. Reliability and error reporting. Code cache and Instruction pipeline. Introduction to the prefetcher, Instruction branch prediction, code cache organization and operation, the floating point pipeline. The data cache and burst bus cycles. Introduction to internal data cache, structure of internal data cache, the bus cycle state machine, anatomy of write hit and miss, inquire cycles. Bus cycle overview, burst cycles, single transfer bus cycle - pipelined and non pipelined, special cycles. Interrupt acknowledge bus cycle, bus cycle state machine, bus and bus state transition. PCI Bus Local Bus concept. Introduction to PCI Bus operation; Introduction to Reflected wave switching; PCI Bus functional signal groups. PCI Bus Arbitration, Arbiter, Arbitration algorithms, hidden bus arbitration, example of arbitration between two masters, bus access latency, PCI read and write transfers, PCI I/O addressing, Interrupt acknowledge. Interrupt routing, Interrupt chaining. Peripheral Bus Interfaces The IDE interface, timing specifications, IDE protocol, Model of an IDE Disk Drive. SCSI Bus. SCSI hardware. SCSI Bus Protocol. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Introduction to USB,PC requirements, Bus topology, understanding the host and the peripheral, the development process. USB transfer basics, Elements of a transfer, successful transfers. Transfer types, Control transfer, Bulk transfer, Interrupt transfer, Isochronous transfer, time critical transfers.

Text Books:
1. 2. 3. 4. Tom Shanley et al, Pentium Processor System Architecture, Addison Wesley Press. Tom Shanley et al, PCI System Architecture, Addison Wesley Press. F. Schmidt, SCSI Bus and IDE Interface, Addison Wesley Press. Jan Axelson, USB Complete, Penram Publication, second edition

353

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VII ELECTIVE – DSP Architecture & Systems ( Course Code 406040) Introduction to Real Time Digital Signal Processing Review of DSP fundamentals. DSP hardware elements - Multiplier, ALU, Shifter, Address Generator, etc. Input-output channels DSP versus Microprocessor Circular buffering Different architectures, Fixed versus floating point DSP system design Issues involved in DSP processor design - speed, cost, accuracy, pipelining, parallelism, quantization error, etc • Introduction to Digital Signal Processors Different families of processors TMS 320C6X Architecture Assembly Language Instruction Pipelining Application An Overview of ADSP 2100 and 21000 family architecture and instruction set. An Overview of Motorola DSP 563XX Processors

• •

Text Books
1. B.Venkataramani and Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processors: Architecture, Programming & Applications”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publication, 2002

Additional Reading:
1. A. Bateman & W Yates, “Digital Signal Processing Design”, Wheeler Publication, 1988
2. S. M. Kuo and B.H. Lee, “Real Time Digital Signal Processing”, John Wiley and sons, 2001

354

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VII ELECTIVE – Wireless communication ( Course Code 406050)

Introduction Introduction to wireless communication systems. The cellular concept. Frequency reuse, hand- off strategies, interference and system capacity, tracking and grade of service, Improving coverage and capacity in cellular systems. Mobile radio Propagation Large scale path Loss: Reflection, ground reflection (2 ray model), diffraction, Scattering, Practical link budget – design using path loss models, small scale fading and multipath: small scale Multipath propagation, Parameters of mobile multipath channels, Types of small scale fading, Rayleigh and Riceaw distributions. Diversity Techniques. Wireless systems and standards Analog cellular systems: AMPS and ETACS – System overview, cell Handling, Air Interface, N – AMPS Digital cellular systems: GSM – Services and Features, system architecture, Radio subsystem channel types, frames structure, signal processing, typical call Flow sequences in GSM, CDMA digital cellular standard – Frequency and channels specifications, forward CDMA channel, Reverse standard channel ,Cordless telephones : CT2, standard, DECT ,PACS(Personal Access Communication system), PHS(Personal Handy Phone system) Mobile data communications Specialized packet and mobile radio networks, circuit switched data services on cellular Networks, Packet switched data services on cellular networks, data over low power wireless and cordless networks. Text Books: 1. Theodre S Rappaport : Wireless Communication – Pearson Education, second edition 2. Raj Pandya, Mobile and Personal Communications system and services, Prentice Hall of India Additional Reading: 1. David J. Goddman, wireless Personal Communications systems, Addison Wesley Publication 2. Joachim Tesal, GSM cellular radio, John Wiley publication.

355

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VII ELECTIVE – Mechatronics ( Course Code 406060) Introduction to Mechatronics Mechatronics key elements, Mechatronics design process, approaches in Mechatronics. Modeling and Simulation of Physical System Simulation and Block Diagrams, Analogies and Impedance Diagrams, Electrical Systems, Mechanical Translation Systems, Mechanical rotational System, Electromechanical Coupling, Fluid Systems. Sensors and Transducers Introduction to Sensors and Transducers, Sensors for Motion and Position Measurement, Force, Torque, and Tactile Sensors, Flow Sensors , Temperature - Sensing Devices , Ultrasonic Sensors, Range sensors, Active Vibration Control Using Magnetostrictive Transducers, Fiber Optic Devices in Mechatronics. Actuating Devices Direct Current Motor, Permanent Magnet Stepper Motor, Fluid Power Actuation, Fluid Power Design Elements, Piezoelectric Actuators. Hardware Components for Mechatronics Transducer Signal Conditioning and Devices for Data Conversion, Programmable Controllers. Signals, Systems, and Controls Introduction to Signals, Systems, and Controls, System Representation, Linearization of Nonlinear Systems, Time delays, Measures of System Performance, Root Locus and Bode Plots. Real - Time Interfacing Introduction, Elements of a Data Acquisition and Control System, Overview of the I/O Process, Installation of the I/O Card and Software, Installation of the Application Software, Examples of interfacing. Closed Loop Controllers Continuous and discrete processes, control modes, two step mode, proportional mode, derivative control, integral control, PID controller, Digital controllers, Control system performance, Controller tuning, Velocity Control and Adaptive control. Advanced Applications in Mechatronics Sensors for Condition Monitoring , Mechatronic Control in Automated Manufacturing, Artificial Intelligence in Mechatronics , Fuzzy Logic Applications in Mechatronics , Fuzzy Logic Applications in Mechatronics, Microsensors in Mechatronics.

Text Books:
1.Devdas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, Mechatronics System Design, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., Second Reprint, 2001 2.W. Bolton, Mechatronics, Pearson Education Asia, Third Indian Reprint 2001

356

Additional Reading:
1. David G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement Systems, Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, 2003

357

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VIII Power Electronics ( Course Code 306230) Power Devices Construction, ratings, characteristics: - (including SOA Rating) Power transistors, SCR, TRIAC, GTO - SCR, IGBT, MCT. Drive Circuits Using BJT, UJT, DIAC. Isolation circuits using an optocoupler and transformer. Protection circuits Snubbers, MOVs, di / dt inductor, semiconductor fuses. Cooling of semiconductor devices Basic theory - thermal resistance, simple heat sink calculations. Types of cooling : a) natural convection b) forced air cooling c) liquid cooling d) vapour phase cooling . Half wave and full wave uncontrolled and controlled rectifier circuits With resistive load and R-L load. Output average and RMS voltages. Effect of freewheeling diode. A.C. phase control circuits Using BJT, OP-Amps, Special IC's such as TCA 785. Firing scheme for 3 phase supply. Power Inverters Series, parallel and bridge inverter (single phase) working, important waveforms, control circuits and applications. Choppers Principle of operation, Jones chopper (working, important waveforms, control circuit and applications). Motor Controllers A.C. motor controllers: Induction squirrel cage motor control - voltage control, V /F control, torque - speed characteristics. Control of wound rotor motor. Slip power recovery. D.C. motor controllers: armature voltage control of separately exited DC shunt motor. IR compensation. Field current control, torque - speed characteristics. Micro controller based control circuit for motor control- (Block diagram and working.) BOOKS

Text Books:
1. M . Rashid, Power Electronics , Prentice Hall of India Publication.

Additional Reading:
1. Alok Jain, Power Electronics and its applications, Penram Publication, second edition, 2006.

358

2. Ned Mohan, Undeland, Robbins, Power Electronics, John Wiley Publication 3. Landers, Power Electronics, McGraw Hill 4. Dubey G.K., Electrical Drives, Narosa Press 5. General Eiectric, SCR Manual 6. M.D. Singh & K.B.Khanchandani, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill, first edition 7. P.C. Sen, Modern Power Electronics, Wheeler Publication.

359

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VIII Microwave & RF Circuit Design ( Course Code 306240)

Introduction
Microwave bands, Microwave characteristics, Microwave system, traditional, Industrial and Bio medical applications, Microwave hazards.

Transmission line theory
Circuit representation of transmission line, Transmission line equation,Sinusonoidal excitation of transmission line, Impedance and its transformation, Smith chart and its applications,Impedence matching techniques.

Microwave Transmission lines
Co-axial line, Rectangular and Circular wave guides, Introduction to Strip lines, Microstrip lines and Co-planar wave-guides.

Wave guide components
Transmission line Resonators, Rectangular and Circular cavity Resonators, s-parameters, Hybrid junctions, Directional couplers, Circulators, Isolators, Wave-guide terminations, Attenuators, Phase-shifter.

Microwave tubes
Reflex klystrons, Multi cavity Klystron, Helix TWT, Coupled cavity TWT, Backward wave oscillator, Magnetron, Forward wave cross field Amplifiers.

Microwave semiconductor devices
Point contact diodes, Schottky barrier diodes, PIN Diodes, Varactor diodes, Tunnel diodes, Gunn devices, IMPATT diode, parametric devices, Detectors and Mixers.

Microwave measurements
VSWR, Frequency, Power, Noise Factor, Impedance, Attenuation, Dielectric constant, Antenna Gain.

Text Books
1. Microwave Devices and circuits-Samuel Liao - PHI Publication 2. Microwave Engineering and Applications- O.P.Gandhi -Pargamon press publication

Additional Reading
1. Microwave Engineering-David Pozar. - John Wiley and Sons publication 2. Electromagnetic Field theory fundamentals-Guru and Hisiroglu, Thomson Learning publication 3. Microwave engineering passive circuits-Peter A.Rizzi - PHI publication 4. Basic Microwave Techniques and laboratory manual-M.L.Sisodia, G.S.Raghuvamsi, Wiley Eastern Limited publication

360

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VIII ELECTIVE – Image Processing ( Course Code 406070) Digital image processing systems Image acquisition, storage, processing, communication and display. Visual perception Structure of human eye, mage formation in the human eye, brightness, adaptation and discrimination. Image model Uniform and non uniform sampling and quantization. Discrete 2-D linear processing Superposition and convolution, unitary tansforms, linear processing techniques. Image transforms 2-D DFT/FFT, Walsh, hadamard transforms, discrete cosine and sine transforms, Haar transform, slant transform, hotelling transform. Image enhancement Contrast manipulation, histogram modification, noise cieaning, edge sharpening, frequency domain methods like low-pass and high-pass filtering, homomorphic filtering. Image segmentation Detection of discontinuity, point line and edge linking and boundary detection, Thresholding, image interpretation. Image compression Coding redundancy, Psycho-visual redundancy, Variable length coding, bit plane coding, Loss-less predictive coding, Lossy predictive coding transform coding DPCM, DM, ADM.

Text Books:
1. W. Pratt, digital image processing, Wiley publication, third edition, 2002. 2. Gonzalez & Woods, digital image processing, Pearson Education, second edition. 3. A.K. Jain, fundamentals of image processing, Prentice hall of India publication, 1995. 4. A. Rosenfold and A. C. Kak, Digital image processing, Vols. 1 and 2, Prentice Hall, 1986.

361

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VIII ELECTIVE – Process Control Instrumentation ( Course Code 406080) Introduction to Process Control, Feedback Control, Types of Processes, Performance Characteristics of measuring systems. Measurement methods of different process parameters like pressure, force, torque, velocity, acceleration (Review). Fluid flow measurement methods – Measurement of fluid density, viscosity, specific gravity, pH, humidity and liquid level. Controllers – Modes of control like ON/OFF, proportional, derivative, integral, PD, PI and PID controllers. Selection of a proper control mode for a given process, Pneumatic control mechanisms, electronic controllers, Electronic and Pneumatic signal transmission. Control valves like globe, pinch, butterfly ball valve etc., characteristics of valves, cavitation and flashing, selection of control valves for a process, valve sequencing. Introduction to PLC, PLC ladder logic, drawing of ladder diagrams, Programming of PLC. Generalized data acquisition and data distribution systems, Multichannel DAS, Data Logger

Text Books:
1. Anderson N. A., Instrumentation for Process Measurement and Control, Third edition, Chilton Company, 1980 2. Johnson C., Process Control Instrumentation Technology, Fourth edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2001

Additional Reading:
1. Dunning Gary, Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers, Delmar – Thomson Learning, 2001. 2. Patranabis D, Principles of Process Control, Tata McGraw Hill, Second edition, 2001.

362

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VIII ELECTIVE – Telecommunication Network Management( Course Code 406100) Foundations Network management standards, network management model, organization model, information model, abstract syntax notation I (ASN.1), encoding structure, macros, and functional model Network management applications functional requirements Configuration management, fault management, performance management, Error correlation technology, security management, accounting management, common management, report management, polity based management, service level management, management service, community definitions, capturing the requirements, simple and formal approaches, semi formal and formal notations. Telecommunication management network (TMN) architecture Terminology, functional architecture, information architecture, physical architecture, TNN cube, TMN and OSI. Common management information service element (CMISE) CMISE model, service definitions, errors, scooping and filtering feature, synchronization, functional units, association services, common management information protocol (CMIP) specification. Information Modeling for TMN Rationale for Information Modeling, management information model, object oriented modeling paradigm, structure of management information, managed object class definition, management information base (MIB). Simple network management protocol (SNMP) SNMPv1: managed networks, SNMP models, organization model, information model, SNMPv2: communication model, functional model, major changes in SNMPv2, structure of management information (SMI), MIB, SNMPv2 protocol, compatibility with SNMPv1, SNMPv3: architecture, applications, MIB security, remote monitoring (RMON) SMI and MIB, RMON1 and RMON2. Network Management examples: ATM integrated local management interface, ATM MIB, M1, M2, M3, M4, interfaces, ATM digital exchange interface management, digital subscriber loop (DSL) and Asymmetric DSL (ADSL) technologies, ADSL configuration management, performance management. Network Management tools: Network statistics management, network management system, management platform case studies : OPENVIEW, ALMAP. Text Books: 1. Mani Subramanian, Network Management : Principles and Practice, Addison Wesley, Pearson Education Asia publication

363

2. Lakshmi Raman, Fundamentals of Telecommunication Network Management, IEEE Communication Society, Prentice Hall of India Edition 1999. Additional Reading: 1. Airdarous Salah, Plevyak Thomos, Telecommunication Network 2. Management: Technologies and Implementations, Prentice Hall of India. 3. Haojin Wang, Henry Haojin Wang, Haifiang Haojin Wang, Telecommunication Network Management.

364

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VIII ELECTIVE – VLSI Design ( Course Code 406110) Circuit Characterization and Performance Estimation Resistance and capacitance estimation, Switching characteristics, CMOS gate transistor sizing, power dissipation, Sizing Routing conductors, charge sharing designing margining yield and reliability. Standard Sequential Components Registers, Counters, Register files, SRAM, larger memories. Data Paths Designing dedicated data paths, Using dedicated data paths with examples. General data paths and their uses. Timing issues, VHDL for data paths. Control Units Construction, Stand alone Controller, ASM charts, VHDL for Control unit. Dedicated Microprocessors Dedicated Microprocessors with examples. VHDL for dedicated Microprocessors. General Purpose Microprocessors Overview of CPU design, EC-1 General purpose microprocessor, EC-2 General purpose microprocessor, VHDL for general purpose microprocessors.

Text Books:
1. Neil H.E. Weste Kamran E Shraghian, Principles of CMOS VLSI Design : A system perspective, Addison Wesley Publication 2. Enoch O. Hwang, Digital logic and Microprocessor design with VHDL, Thomson learning Indian print,2002

Additional Reading:
1. John P Vyemura, Introduction to VLSI circuits and systems, John Wiley & sons 2. Cohen, Ben :VHDL coding style and methodologies.

365

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VIII ELECTIVE – Embedded Systems ( Course Code 406120)

Introduction To Embedded Systems Software Embedded into a System. Processor and Memory Organization Structural Units in a Processor, Processor Selection For an Embedded System, Memory Devices, Memory Selection for an Embedded System, Allocation of Memory To Program Segments and Blocks and Memory Map of a System, Direct Memory Access, Interfacing Processor, Memories and I/O Devices. Devices and Buses For Device Networks I/O Devices, Timer and Counting Devices, Serial Communication Using the ‘I2C’, ‘CAN’ and Advanced I/O Buses between the Network Multiple Devices, Host system or Computer Parallel Communication between the network I/O Multiple Devices Using the PCI, PCI -X and Advanced Buses. Device Drivers and Interrupts Servicing Mechanism Device Drivers, Parallel Port Device Drivers in a System, Serial Port Device Drivers in a System, Device Drivers For Internal Programmable Timing Devices, Interrupt Servicing (Handling) Mechanism, Context and the Periods of Context-Switching, Deadline and Interrupt Latency. Programming Concepts and Embedded Programming in C and C++ Software Programming in Assembly Language (ALP) and in High Level Language ‘C’, ‘C’ Program Elements: Header and Source Files and Preprocessor Directives, Program Elements: Macros and Functions, Program Elements: Data Types, Data Structures, Modifiers Statements, Loops and Pointers, Queues, Stacks, Lists and Ordered Lists, Embedded Programming in C++, ‘C’ Program Compiler and Cross-Compiler, Source Code Engineering Tools For Embedded C/C++, Optimization of Memory Needs. Program Modeling Concepts For Software Development Process Modeling Processes For Software Analysis Before Software Implementation, Programming Models For Event Controlled or Response Time Constrained Real Time Programs. Software Engineering Practice in the Embedded Software Development Process Software Algorithm Complexity, Software Development Process Life Cycle and its Models, Software Analysis, Software Design, Software Implementation, Software Testing, Validating and Debugging, Real Time Programming Issues During the Software Development Process, Software Project Management, Software Maintenance, Unified Modeling Language (UML). Inter-Process Communication and Synchronization of Processes, Tasks and Threads Multiple Processes in an Application, Problem of Sharing Data By Multiple Tasks and Routines, Inter Process Communication.

366

Real Time Operating Systems Operating System Services, I/O Subsystem, Network Operating Systems, Real-Time and Embedded System Operating Systems, Interrupt Routines in RTOS Environment: Handling of Interrupt Source Call by the RTOSs, RTOS Task Scheduling Models, Interrupt Latency and Response Times of the Tasks as Performance Metrics, Performance Metrics in Scheduling Models For Periodic, Sporadic and Aperiodic Tasks, IEEE Standard POSIX 1003.1b Functions For Standardization of RTOS and Inter-Task Communication Functions, List of Basic Actions in a Preemptive Scheduler and Expected Times Taken at a Processor, Fifteen-point strategy for synchronization between the processor, ISRs, OS Functions and Tasks and for Resource Management. Hardware-Software Co-Design in an Embedded System Embedded System Project Management, Embedded System Design and Co-Design Issues in System Development Process, Design Cycle in The Development Phase for an Embedded System, Uses of Target System or Its Emulator and In-Circuit Emulator (ICE), Use of Software Tools for Development of an Embedded System, Use of Software Tools for development of an Embedded system, The Software Build Process For Embedded Systems – Preprocessing, Compiling / Cross Compiling, Linking, Locating, Loading on the target, Uses of Oscilloscopes and Logic Analyzers for System Hardware Test, Issues in Embedded System Design.

Text Books:
1. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems – Architecture, Programming and Design, Tata McGraw Hill, First Edition, 2003 2. Sriram Iyer and Pankaj Gupta, Embedded Realtime Systems Programming, Tata McGraw Hill, First Edition, 2003

Additional Reading:
1. Qing Li and Caroline Yao, Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems, Cmpbooks Press, First Edition, 2003

367

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VIII ELECTIVE – Data Communication and networking (Course Code 406130) Introduction Network, Protocols and standards, line configuration, Topology, Transmission modes, categories of networks, Internetworks, Transmission media, the OSI model, TCP/IP, DTE – DCE interface. Multiplexing FDM, Synchronous TDM, Statistical TDM, Asymmetric Digital subscriber lines, XDSL. Data Link Control :Flow control, Error detection-two dimensional Parity checks, Internet checksum, CRC. Error control, Transmission efficiency of ARQ protocols, HDLC point to point protocol. Circuit switching : Circuit switching networks, circuit switches- space division switches, time- division switches, Time-space-time switches, Routing in circuit switching, Networks, control signaling, SS7. Packet Switching Networks Network services and internal network operation, packet network topology, Datagram and Virtual circuits, Routing in packet networks, shortest path algorithms – The Bellman – Ford algorithm, Dijkstra’s algorithm, other routing approaches, congestion control. ATM and Frame Relay ATM protocol Architecture, logical connections, ATM cells, Transmission of ATM cells, ATM Adaptation Layer, Frame Relay, Frame Relay protocol Architecture. Local Area Network LAN Applications, LAN architecture, Bus LAN’s Ring LANs Star LANs, Wireless LAN, LAN Bridges, IEEE 802.3 Medium Access control for 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps LAN, Token Ring and FDDI. ISDN Architecture, ISDN channels, User Access, ISDN Protocols, Broadband ISDN. Text Books: 1. William Stallings, Data and computer communication –Pearson Education, sixth edition 2. Leon Garcia and Widjaja, Communication Networks, Tata McGraw Hill, Second edition Additional Reading 1. Forouzan, Data Communication and Networking, Tata McGraw Hill, third edition 2. William A Shay – Understanding Data Communications and Networks-Thomson Learning. 3. Andrew Tenenbaum, Computer Networks, Prentice Hall of India.

368

Final B.TECH. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SEMESTER VIII ELECTIVE – ROBOTICS (Course Code 406090)

DETAILED SYLLABUS
18. Robotic Manipulation: Automation and Robots, Classification, Application, Specification, Notations. 19. Direct Kinematics: Dot and cross products, Co-ordinate frames, Rotations, Homogeneous, Co-ordinates, Link co-ordination arm equation, (Five-axis robot, Four axis robot, Six axis robot). 20. Inverse Kinematics: General properties of solutions tool configuration Five axis robots, Three-Four axis, Six axis robot (Inverse kinematics). 21. Workspace analysis and trajectory planning work envelop and examples, workspace fixtures, Pick and place operations, Continuous path motion, Interpolated motion, Straight-line motion. 22. Robot Vision: Image representation, Template matching, Polyhedral objects, Shane analysis, Segmentation (Thresholding, region labeling, Shrink operators, Swell operators, Euler numbers, Perspective transformation, Structured Illumination, Camera calibration). 23. Task Planning: Task level programming, Uncertainty, Configuration, Space, Gross motion, Planning, Grasp planning, Fine-motion Planning, Simulation of Planer motion, Source and goal scenes, Task planner simulation. 24. Moments of Inertia. 25. Principles of NC and CNC Machines.

BOOKS

Text Books:
4. Robert Shilling, “Fundamentals of Robotics-Analysis and control”, PHI. 5. Fu, Gonzales and Lee, “Robotics”, McGraw Hill 6. J.J, Craig, “Introduction to Robotics”, Pearson Education

References:
7. Staughard, “Robotics and AI”, PHI. 8. Grover, Wiess, Nagel, Oderey, “Industrial Robotics”, McGraw Hill 9. Walfram Stdder, “Robotics and Mecatronics”, TMH. 10. Niku, “Introduction to Robotics”, Pearson Education 11. Klafter, Chmielewski, Negin, “Robot Engineering”, PHI 12. Mittal, Nagrath, “Robotics and Control”, TMH

369

BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY IN PRODUCTION ENGINEERING

370

S.Y B.TECH Name of Course :- Applied Mathematics – I Applied Mathematics – I 1 Laplace Transforms Function of bounded variation. Laplace transforms of standard functions such as1, tn eat, sinat, cosat, sinhat, coshat, erf(t), Linear property of Laplace- Transform. First shifting theorem, second shifting theorem, L {tn f(t)}, L {f ’(t)}, L {f(t)/t} L{ o∫t f(u) du}, L {dn / dtn f(t)} Change of scale property: Unit step functions, Heaviside, Dirac delta functions, Periodic functions and their Laplace Transforms. Inverse Laplace Transform using linear property, theorems, partial fractions and convolution theorem. Application to solve ordinary differential equations with one dependent variable. 2 Matrices Types of matrices. Adjoint ( Adjugate) of a matrix. Inverse of a matrix. Elementary transformations of matrix, rank of a matrix. Reduction to a normal form. Partitioning of matrix. System of Homogeneous and nonhomogeneous equations, their consistency and solution. Eigen values and Eigen vectors of square matrix, Cayley Hamilton’s theorem and functions of square matrix. 3 Fourier series and integrals Orthogonal and orthonormal functions, Expression for a function in a series of orthogonal functions. Dirchlet's Conditions. Fourier series of Periodic function with period 2π and 2l, Dirchlet’s theorem, Even and Odd functions. Half range expansions, Parseval’s relations. Complex form of Fourier series. Fourier integral. 4 Vector Calculus Scalar and vector point functions. Directional derivative Curl and Divergence, Consecervative, Irrotational and Solenoidal field. Line integral and its properties, Grren’s theorem, Stoke’s theorem, divergence theorem and its applications Recommended Books:

371

Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr B S Grewal, Khanna Publications A text book of Applied Mathematics, P N & J N Wartikar, Pune Vidyarthi Griha Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erurin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Limited Engineering Mathematics for Semester III, T Veerrajan, Tata McGraw Hill Matrices, A R Vasishtha

Name of Course :- Strength Of Material

372

1.

Stress Strain Analysis: Simple stress and strain, St. Venant’s Principle, Stress-strain diagram, Deformation of rectangular and circular, uniform and tapering bars, deformation due to self weight, shear stress and shear strain, Poisson’s ratio, Volumetric strain, Bulk modulus, relationship between Young’s modulus and Modulus of elasticity, Factor of Safety 2 Shear Force :- Fluid Mechanics And Machines Name of Course and bending moment: Axial force, shear force and bending moment diagrams for statically determinate beams including beams with internal hinges for different types of loading, relationships between rate of loading, shear force and bending moment. 3 Simple theory of Bending: Flexure formula for straight beams, principal axes of inertia, moments of inertia about principle axes, transfer theorem, simple problems involving application of Flexure formula, section modulus, moment of modulus of a section, flitched beams Shear Stress in beams: Distribution of shear stress across plane sections used commonly for structural purposes, shear connectors. Simple Theory of Torsion: Torsion of circular shafts-solid and hollow, stresses is shaft when transmitting power, closed-coiled helical spring under axial load. Bending Moment combined with axial loads: Application to members subjected to eccentric load, core of a section. Principal stresses: General equations for transformation of stress, principal planes and principal stresses, maximum shear stress, determination using Mohr’s circle, principle stresses in beams, principal stresses in shafts subjected to torsion, bending and axial thrust, concept of equivalent torsional and bending moments. Deflection of beams: Deflection of cantilevers simply supported and overhanging beams using double integration and Macaulay’s methods for different types of loadings. Struts: Struts subjected to axial loads, concept of buckling, Euler’s formula for struts with different support conditions, Euler’s and Rankine’s design formulae. Strain Energy: strain energy due to axial force and bending moment, stresses in axial members and simple beams due to impact loading. Term work I. Atleast one class test must be conducted in the middle of the semester and 10 marks weightage must be assigned during the evaluation of the term work. II. Report on laboratory experiments based on the above chapters, and atleast 6 experiments must be conducted from the list given as above in ‘list of experiments’. III. At least 5 assignments consisting of minimum 5 problems in each assignment from among the 10 chapters of the detailed syllabus must be submitted along the laboratory report and test paper References: 1. Theory of Elastic Stability by Timoshenko and Gere, Tata McGraw Hill Book 373 2. Mechanics of Structures by S. B. Junnarkar, Charotar Publishers. 3. Strength Of Materials by Schaum’s Series.

4

5

6 7

8

9

1 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

General Properties of fluids and fluid statics. Viscous fluids, Newtonian and non-Newtonian, their stress strain relationship (general description only), pressure at a point in fluid, variation of pressure with depth, fluid application to manometer, transmission of pressure in a fluid, thrust on plane surface, centre of pressure horizontal and vertical plane surfaces, forces on immersed bodies Fluid Dynamics: Various types of flow (general description only), continuity equation, energy equation, momentum equation. Application of energy and continuity equation for fluid flow measurement in closed conduit (No derivations, only applications are to be imparted) Flow in Pipes: Laminar and turbulent flow in pipes (elementary treatment only), Larcy’s equation, and laminar flow between flat parallel stationary plates. Laminar flow between parallel plates one of which is moving, losses in bends, couplings and valves Hydraulic pumps and motors Introduction, variable capacity and fixed capacity types-gear, vane and piston pumps, ram units and rotary actuators, performance curves for variable speed drives, combination of pump and motor units Valves: Introduction, types of valves viz. check valve, relief valve, speed control valves, pressure compensating valves, pressure compensated flow control valves, unloading valves, direction control valves, sequence valves and counter balance valves Oil hydraulic circuits: Introduction, basic circuit, general classification of valves in circuit, meter-in circuit, meter-out circuit Term Work: 1. Report on laboratory experiments on the above chapters. At least 6 experiments are to be conducted. 2. At least five assignments comprising of minimum 5 problems in each assignment must be submitted along with the laboratory reports from among the above 6 chapters. 3. At least one class test must be conducted at the middle of the semester and 10 marks weightage must be assigned for the evaluation of test in the term work. 4. The final report should contain all of the above as shown in 1,2 and Refrences: 1. Fluid Mechanics e.B.Wylie. 2. Fluid Mechanics and hydraulic machines 3. Power Hydraulics 4. Industrial Hydraulics Manual 5. Hydraulics and Pneumatics power for Production by V.L.Streeter and by by by by R.K.Bansal. A.B.Goodwin. Sperry & Vickers Co. H.L Stewart.

Text Books 1. Fluid Mechanics and hydraulic machines by Ramamurtham. 2. Fluid Mechanics and hydraulic machines by Modi & Seth. Name of Course :-Theory Of Machines

374

1

2

3 4

Kinematics : Basic concepts : Links, kinematics pairs, kinematics pairs giving one, two and three degrees of freedom Kinematics chains, degree of freedom and move ability criterion. Constrained kinematics Chains as mechanism. Inversions of single and double slider crank chains and their Applications. Introduction, pantograph, straight line motion mechanism, engine indicators Viz., Simplex, Crossby, Thomson and Dobbie mckines indicators, automobile steering Gears. Motion characteristics of mechanisms : Velocity and acceleration analysis of mechanisms with single degree of freedom system Using graphical method. Instantaneous centre, kennedt’s theorem; analysis of velocities of mechanism using instantaneous centre method. Analytical technique applied to only Slides crank mechanism, Bennet’s construction and Ritterhau’s construction. Static and dynamic force analysis: For linkage mechanism as applied to only slider crank chain and four bar chains with lower pairs CAMS : Introduction, types of cams, types of followers. Follower motion, viz. simple harmonic motions, constant velocity, uniform and constant acceleration & retardation and cycloidal motion, layout of cam profile for specified displacement characteristics. Cams with oscillating follower system. Clutches Brakes and Dynamometers; Study and analysis of single plate clutch, multiple plate clutches and cone clutches. Introduction, types of brakes, viz.block and shoe brakes , band brakes, band and block Brakes, braking of vehicles. Types of dynamometers, viz. Prony brake, Rope brake, belt transmission dynamometers Dynamics : Gears : Introduction, condition of constant velocity ratio-conjugate profiles -- profiles used in Gears, interference of involutes teeth, methods of preventing interference, under cutting, Length of path of contact, arc of contact and contact ratio Turning moment diagram and flywheel Balancing Introduction, Rotary masses—serial masses in same plane, several masses in different Planes, balancing of reciprocating masses, primary balance and secondary balance. Balancing of locomotives -- hammer blow and variation of tractive efforts. Static and Dynamic balancing of machines Vibrations : Introduction, free vibration, longitudinal, transverse and torsional vibrations, Dunkerly’s Empirical equation, critical or whirling speed of shaft. Torsional vibrations of two rotor system and three rotor system – torsional equivalent shaft – free torsional vibrations of a geared system. (Damped and forced vibrations are excluded). Gyroscope : Introduction-- Gyroscopic couple and precision stabilization of ships and air crafts only. Governors : Introduction, types of governors, centrifugal governors—gravity controlled and spring controlled governors. (Mathematical derivations, and analytical problems are not to be covered in governors) Term work: 1. At least five sheets consisting of four problems in each chapter from chapter No. 1 to No. 5 , on half imperial drawing sheets in kinematics section. 2. At least four assignments consisting of four problems in each assignment from chapter No. 6 to chapter no. 10 from dynamics section. 3. At least six experiments to be conducted from dynamics section and the 375 report must be Submitted along with all the assignments as stated above and test papers. 4. At least one class test in the middle of the semester must be conducted and a

5

6

7

8

9

Name of Course :- CAD and Production Drawing

376

1

2 3

4

5 6

Interpenetration of solids : Cylinder to cylinder, cone to cylinder, prism to prism, prism to cylinder, pyramid to prism, pyramid to cylinder of only regular solids with axis of solids perpendicular to/or parallel to the reference planes (neglecting the axis of solids inclined to any reference plane) Auxiliary and oblique projections: Of solids using front view, top view and side views Production Machine Elements : Screwed fasteners : Thread nomenclature, forms of screw threads, V threads, Square thread, ACME, Buttress, and Whitworth. Representation of threads, Hexagonal headed bolts and nuts, square headed bolts & nuts, locking devices for nuts. Keys, cotters and pin joints : Keys such as saddle keys, sunk keys, round keys, Cotter joints such as Socket and Spigot joint, Gib and Cotter joint, Cotter and Sleeve Joint. Pin joint (Knuckle joint). Couplings : Rigid couplings, Split, Muff, and Flanged protected type, Flexible bush pin type Assembly & Detail Drawings: Machine tools parts: Machine swivel vice, pipe vice, screw jack, tailstock, tool head of shaper, Simple drill jig & milling fixture, simple press tool assembly. Bearings: Plummer block, foot step bearing, bracket with pedestal bearing. IC Engine parts : I.C. Engine connecting rod, stuffing box, and eccentric. Valves : Feed checks valve, Non Return valve, stop valve, Relief valve Computer Aided Design and Draughting: Auto-CAD commands, Editing commands, Basic Dimensioning, Creating 2-D and 3-D objects of simple machine parts Limits, fits and tolerances: Selection of tolerances, methods of placing limit dimensions, fits. Term Work 1. One sheet comprising of at least 4 problems from chapter No.1 2. One sheet comprising of at least 4 problems from chapter No. 2 3. One sheet of “Free hand sketches” drawn on A2 size paper comprising of at least 6 problems from chapter No. 3. 4. 2 sheets of Assembly & 2 sheets of part or detail drawing from chapter No. 4 comprising of at least 2 problems in assembly and 2 problems in part drawing. 5. 2 sheets comprising of at least 4 problems from chapter No.4 using Auto CAD. References: 1. Engineering Drawing 2. Machine Drawing by N.D. Bhatt. by N.D. Bhatt

Text Books: 1. Machine Drawing by Siddeshwara Shastri. 2. Engineering Drawing with AUTO CAD2000. by Jeyapoovan., Vikas Publications.

Name of Course:- Manufacturing Engineering I

377

1 2

3

4

5

6

7 8

Definition , need and classification of machine tools: Brief history and development , typical features, associated with cutting tools and Performance measure of machine tools Turning machines and processes: Lathes as general purpose turning machines, principle of generating surfaces, lathe. Specifications, description and functions of lathe, principle parts, back gear-all gear. drive, feed mechanism, lathe accessories, and attachments—chucks, collets, mandrel, Face plate. Lathe operations, Taper turning methods, thread cutting, cutting tools, and tool geometry. Capstan and turret lathes: Principle parts of capstan and turret lathes, difference between capstan and turret lathe, work holding devices, tool holding devices, tool dies, chasers, taps, etc. tool layout for simple components like bolt, nut, pin, shafts. Single point cutting tools: Types, geometry, materials Drilling machine and processes: Types: sensitive, upright, radial, gang, multiple spindle, automatic drilling machine, Work and tool holding devices, drilling machine operation, types and materials of drills. Twist drill nomenclature. Counter-boring-taper of counterbores. Spot facingtypes of Spot facers. Countersinking — types of countersinks. Reaming – types of reamers. Tapping—hand tap and machine tap. Machining time for drilling. Deep hole drilling (only fundamentals to be covered): Gun drills, deep hole drilling machine Reciprocating machine tools: Shaping machines : types of shapers, working of shaper machine, quick return Mechanisms, shaper operations, machining time. Planing machine: types of planning Machines, planer mechanism, feed mechanism, work holding devices, shaper vs planer. Slotting machine : types of slotting machines, quick return mechanism Milling machine : types of milling machine-- column and knee type, fixed bed type, planer type and special type, milling processes, conventional and climb milling, milling cutters, peripheral, face and shell milling cutters, geometry and materials of milling cutters, attachments and special accessories, for milling, universal dividing head, indexing method, direct, plane, compound, and differential indexing mechanisms, arbors adaptors, and collet chucks , calculations of machining time, copy milling machines. Broaching machine : Broaching process, elements of typical internal broach, types of broaches, broaching Machines— vertical, horizontal, surface, and continuous broaching vs. other processes (design of broaches omitted) Cutting off machines : Power hacksaws, band saw, and circular saw, friction saw and abrasive cutting off Machines, field of applications and limitations, tools and accessories Finishing processes : Honing: process, machine, honing stone and tools, abrasive grit size. Lapping: process, hand and machine lapping, flat, internal and external, cylindrical Lapping, lap materials, medium, vehicles. Super finishing: process, equipments, Stones, fluids. Roller burnishing—process, tools, applications References: 1. Production technology vol. II 2. Workshop technology vol. I & II 3. Production technology 4. Materials and Processes in 5. Manufacturing, Edi. 8th 6. Production Technology by by by by by Raghuvanshi. Chapman. HMT. E. Paul De Garmo,J T Black, Ronald A Kosher. R K Jain

Text Books: Metal Cutting by P.N. Rao. Elements of workshop technology Vol. II Hajara Chwdhari Manufacturing Engg. & Technology by Seropr Kalpakjian.

378

Name of Course :- Thermodynamics-I Name of Course :- Workshop Practice-III 1 Revision of Thermodynamics Concept System, Surrounding, state, Path Property, Reversible and irreversible process, thermodynamic work, heat. Temperature, thermal equilibrium. Zeroth law of thermodynamics First Law of Thermodynamics Jouel’s experiment to verify first law. First law applied to non-cyclic process. Tnternal energy as a property. Jouel’s experiment of internal energy. Equation of states of ideal gas. Universal and specific gas constant. Application of First law to non flow processes, viz. constant volume, constant pressure, constant temperature, adiabatic and polytropic processes, heat and work calculations First law of Thermodynamics applied to flow processes: Flow work, enthalpy, control volume. Application of first law to open system steady flow energy equation. Throttling process. Joule’s porous plug experiment, Joul Thomson coefficient. Work done in steady flow processes in terms of pressure and volume. Application to boiler, nozzle, condenser etc. Second law of Thermodynamics: Limitations of first law of thermodynamics. Heat engine, thermal efficiency, rversed heat engine, coefficient of performance. Carnot cycle. Kelin-Plank and Calusius statements and their equivalence. Perpetual motion machines of first and second kind. Carnot’s theorm. Thermodynamic temperature scale Entropy: Clausius inequality. Entropy, temperature-entropy diagrams. Entropy changes for an ideal gas during reversible processes. Entropy of isolated system in real process. Principle of increase of entropy. Entropy and disorder References: Term Work: 1. Report on laboratory experiments based on the above chapters. At least 6 experiments are to be conducted. 2. At least five assignments comprising of minimum 5 problems in each assignment must be submitted along with the laboratory reports from among above 10 chapters. 3. At least one class test must be conducted at the middle of the semester and 10 marks weightage must be assigned for the evaluation of test in the term work. 4. The final report should contain all of the above as shown in 1,2, and the test paper Reference Books:: 1. Thermal Engineering 2. A Course in Thermal Engineering Publications 3. Engineering Thermodynamics 4. Engineering Thermodynamics 5. Thermodynamics for Engineers 6. Thermal Engineering by R.K.Rajput, Laxmi Publications by Domkundwar, Kothandaraman Khajuria, Dhanpatrai by by by by P.K. Nag G.F.C Rogers, Y.R. Mayhew. M.L.Mathur and S.C.Gupta. Ballanney, Khanna Publication

2

3

4

5

Text Books: Thermodynamics and Heat Engines Vol.I, by R.Yadav 379 Thermodynamics and Heat Engines Vol. I & II by Patel & Karamchandani.

Name of Course :- Applied Mathematics – II 1 Statistics Review of measures of central tendency, measure of variation and probability, Discrete and continuous Random variable Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution. Random sampling, sampling distribution, Standard error, Central limit theorem. Estimation of parameters, point estimation, interval estimation, confidence internal. Testing of Hypothesis, Large sample and small sample tests. ‘t’ test and ‘F’ test, Chi-square test Correlation and regression, Coefficient of correlation and Rank correlation, Regression analysis. Curve fitting, method of least square Statistical quality control and control charts Analysis of variance 2 Numerical Methods Solutions of systems of linear algebric equations. Gauss Elimation, Gauss Jordan, Crout’s (LU) method, Gauss Seidal and jacobi iteration Differential equation ,Taylor Series method, Picard method, Rungakutta method, Euler method Recommended Books: Mathematical Statistics, Kapur & Saxena Statistics, Schaum’s Series Numerical Methods for Engineers, S K Gupta Introductory methods of numerical analysis, S S Sastry

380

1

2

3

4

5

Analysis of I.C. engines: Otto, Diesel and dual combustion cycles, air standard effeicency and mean effective pressure. Study of constructionable details of I.C. engines. Four and two stroke cycle I.C. engines. S.I. and C.I. engines. Study of simple carburetor, fule pump, fuel injector and nozzle of I.C. engines. Cooling and lubrication systems of I.C. engines. Ignition syatem of S.I. engines. Governing of I.C. engines. Valve timing diagrams. Calculation of I.P, F.P. and B.P., determination of indicated and brake thermal efficiency and specific fuel consumption. Testing of I.C. engines. Heat balance sheet Air Compressors: Uses of compressed air. Classification, single stage reciprocating air compressor without clearance. Work and power calculation, isothermal and adiabatic efficiency, two stage air compressor with perfect inter cooling. Ideal intercooler pressure. F.A.D. and volumetric efficiency. Effect of clearance volume. Air motor Gas Turbines: Advantages and disadvantages of gas turbines. Constant pressure Joules cycle with isentropic and irreversible adiabatic expansion. Open cycle gas turbine, work, power and thermal efficiency. Closed cycle gas turbine, constant volume cycle gas turbine Heat Transfer One dimensional, steady state, heat transfer by conduction through plane wall, radial heat transfer by conducting through hollow cylinder and hollow sphere. Conduction through a composite plane and cylindrical wall. Heat flow by convection. Free and forced convection. Nusselt, Reynold and Prandlt number; heat transfer between two fluids separated by composite plane and cylindrical wall. Over all heat transfer coefficient. Heat exchangers. Types of heat exchangers. Log Mean Temperature Difference. Radiation heat transfer, Absoptivity, reflectivity and transmissivity. Monochromatic emissive power. Wien’s law, Stefan Boltzman’s and Kirrchoff’s Laws Refrigeration and Air Conditioning. Applications of refrigeration, relative C.O.P. and ton of refrigeration, Bell Coleman cycle or PV and T.S. diagram, C.O.P. and power calculations. Vapour compression refrigeration system. Representation on T-S and P-H diagram. C.O.P power, capacity and mass flow rate calculations, effect of dub cooling, vapour absorption system of refrigeration. Desirable properties of an ideal refrigerant. Compression of ammonia, SO2, CO2, Freon (R-11 and R-22) as refrigerants. Sudy of domestic refrigerator and water cooler. Enthalpy of moist air, Adiabatic saturation temperature. Study of mixing, sensible heating and cooling, heating and humidification, cooling and humidification, cooling and humidification Process. Representation on psychrometric chart. Calculation of capacity of cooling coil, sensible heat added, mass of water removed, capacity of heating coil, etc. applications of air conditioning processes required for winter and summer air conditioning. Central air conditioning systems, study of window air conditioner and package air conditioner Term Work: 1.Report on laboratory experiments based on the above chapters. At least 6 experiments are to be conducted. 2. At least five assignments comprising of minimum 5 problems in each assignment must be submitted along with the laboratory reports from among above 10 chapters. 3.At least one class test must be conducted at the middle of the semester and 10 marks weightage must be assigned for the evaluation of test in the term work. 4. The final report should contain all of the above as shown in 1,2, and the test paper. References: 1 Thermal Engineering by R.K.Rajput, Laxmi Publications 2. A Course in Thermal Engineering by Domkundwar, Kothandaraman Khajuria, Dhanpatrai Publications 3. Engineering Thermodynamics by P.K. Nag 4. Engineering Thermodynamics by G.F.C Rogers, Y.R. Mayhew. 381 5. Thermodynamics and Heat Engines by R.Yadav. 6. Thermodynamics for Engineers by M.L.Mathur and S.C.Gupta.

Name of Course :-Thermodynamics –II

382

Name of Course :-Engineering Design 1 2 3 Curved Members and Crane Hooks: With the following cross sections only- circular, triangular square, rectangular, T. trapezoidal (circular rings and chain links are excluded) Operational Joints : Introduction and strength of following joints : cotter joint, knuckle joint, sleeve type cotter joint, gib and cotter joint, pinned joint. Riveted Joints: Design of joints subjected to eccentric loading. Boiler joints-longitudinal and circumferential joints-single riveted, double riveted and triple riveted joints having equal/ unequal cover straps, chain and zigzag riveted arrangements, use of Indian Boiler Regulation(IBR) in design Shafts ,keys and couplings: Shafts subjected to axial, twisting and bending moments, design of square and rectangular keys, Muff coupling, split muff coupling, flange coupling, protected type flange coupling, bush pin type coupling, marine type coupling Machine Elements: Machine parts subjected to direct and eccentric loading, finding area of cross section of machine members or frames having following cross sections- circular, rectangular, box, square, triangular, T, I and trapezoidal sections only, design of rivets or bolts subjected to eccentric loading on the above types of frame fastenings. Pressure Vessels: Thick and compound cylinders, determination of wall thickness of cylinders, hoop and radial stresses, plotting hoop and radial stress distribution curves Gear Wheels: Types of gears, terminology and applications: design of spur gears, simple gear calculations based on Lewis equation, design of gears for wear and mounting of gears Design of IC Engine Parts: IC engine connecting rods, piston, crank, eccentric References: 1. .Engineering Design by Schaum’s Series. 2. Engineering Design by Keval Pujara. 3. Engineering Design by Black. 4. Engineering Design by Patel, Pandya. 5. Machine Design by R.K.Jain. 6. Engineering Design by J.E. Taylor & J.S. Wrigley. Text Books: 1. Engineering Design by Bhandari. 2. Elements of Machine Design by N.C.Pandya & C.S. Shah. 3. Design of Machine Elements by M.F. Spotts.

4

5

6 7 8

Name of Course :-Electrical And Electronics Engineering

383

384

1

2 3

4 5 6

Electromechanical Energy Conversion: Three phase induction motor: Working principle, construction, types, torque speed characteristics, equivalent circuit, starting methods of 3 phase induction motors. DC Machines, DC Generator – Working principle, EMF equation, classification. DC Motor – Working principle, torque equation, types, characteristics, speed control of DC motor, starting methods and steeper motors Digital Systems: Primary Logic: theory, simplifying and implementation of logical functions, components of digital systems Integrated Circuits and Devices: Operational Amplifiers – basics, ideal OP-OMP ratings, OP-AMP applications, linear and digital IC’s, counters, resisters, multiplexers, de-multiplexers, decoder and encoder Instrumentation and Measurements: Oscilloscope, Maxwell Bridge, Kelvin double bridges Solid State Controls and Applications: Timers and Relays, applications of silicon controlled rectifiers (SCR) in control of DC & AC motor, resistance welding (welding control with solid state circuits Microprocessors and Applications: Memory systems, Microprocessor (only 8085 Architecture and instructions), Programmable controllers, regulation of voltage and motor speed (microprocessor based, block diagram and flow chart approach only) List of Experiments: i) Characteristics of three phase induction motor ii) DC Motor Characteristics iii) Speed control of DC motors iv) Starting methods of DC motors v) Study of logic gates vi) OP- AMP applications vii) Study of counters viii) Kelvin Double Bridge ix) Application of timers x) SCR application in AC & DC motors xi) Microprocessor programming (simple programs without any interfacing circuits) xii) Study of PLC. Term Work: 1. At least one class test must be conducted in the middle of the semester and 10 marks weightage must be assigned to it during the evaluation of term work. 2. Report on laboratory experiments based on the above chapters, and at least 8 experiments must be conducted from the list given as above in the list of experiments. 3. At least 5 assignments consisting of minimum 5 problems in each assignment from among the 6 chapters must be submitted along with the laboratory report and the test papers. References: 1. Electric Machines and Transformers by Abderson Leonard D. &Jack Macneil 2. OP- Amplifier by Gayakwad 3. Microprocessor by Gaonkar 4. Digital Principle and Applications by Malvino & Leach 5. SCR by G. E. Mamal 6. Electrical Technology by Cotton 7. Electrical Machines by M. G. Say. Text Books: 1. Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory by Bolyestad & Nashelsky 2. Applied electrical Engineering Vol. IV by B.L. Theraja. 385

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8

9 10 11 12

Solidification and structure of metals Formation of solids from liquids of pure metals and alloys, ingot defects and their remedies, Single crystal and polycrystalline structure, Classification and crystal structure, unit cell, co-ordination number, atomic packing, crystallographic notations Crystal imperfection: Definition, classification, Significance, Point defects: vacancy, interstitial, impurity atoms, their formation and effects. Dislocation: Edge and screw dislocations, their significance. Surface Defects: Grain boundary, sub-angle grain boundary, stacking fault, and their significance. Dislocation generation at Frank Reed sources, significance and effects, Dislocation interactions: Sessile dislocation, multicomponent dislocation, dislocation pile up, dislocation jog, and dislocation climb Deformation: Definition, elastic & plastic deformations and their significance. Deformation in single and polycrystalline materials. Mechanism of deformation, critical resolved stress. Deformability of FCC, BCC, HCP metals, slip system Strain Hardening: Definition and significance. Dislocation theory of strain hardening. Recystalization annealing and its stages, factors affecting recystalization. Hot and cold working, their advantages, limitations and importance Alloys and Theory of Alloying: Definition and importance. Classification and characteristics of different types of alloys. Phase diagram and its importance, different types of phase diagrams and their interpretation. Eutectic, Eutectoid, Peritectic alloys, conditions of their formation and importance. Solid solutions, conditions and importance of their formation. Intermediate alloys. Types and conditions of their alloys. Types and conditions of formation with importance. Important alloys of aluminium, copper, nickel, tin and zinc, their specifications and applications Principles of heat treatment. Equilibrium transformations in iron-iron carbide systems. Non-equilibrium transformations., Time Temperature Transformations of austenite. Mechanisms of Pearlite, Bainite & Marrtensite Transformations. Principles of heat treatment of steels from T.T.T. diagram Technology of heat treatment: Significance of austensization, homogenization and controlled decomposition of Austenite. Heat treatment furnaces, salt baths and cooling media, heat treatment in controlled atmosphere Heat treatment Processes: Annealing, different annealing processes. Normalizing, Hardening, Hardening media, hardenability, its method of determination, factors affecting hardenability. Tempering, transformations in tempering, temper embrittlement, temper colors. Austempering, Martempering. Case Hardening. Carburising, Nitriding, Cyaniding, Carbonitriding Surface Hardening: Induction hardening, Flame hardening Diffusion Coating Processes. Calorising, Chromising, Siliconising, Boran diffusion coating Effects of alloying elements: Minor alloying elements. Major alloying elements. Alloy steels, tool steels, stainless steels

386

13 14

Powder Metallurgy: Powder making methods. Powder compaction, Sintering, sintering mechanism. Applications of power metallurgy Metallurgy of joining processes: Metallurgy of welding, brazing and soldering Term Work: 1. At least five assignments of topics mentioned above. Each assignment consist of 4 to 5, questions supported with A-4 sheet containing technical information,. 2. At least one report on equipment set-up and practice in industrial units. 3. At least one class test of 10 marks to be conducted in the middle of the semester and weightage should be considered while evaluating the term work. 4. The report should contain the assignments as shown in 1& 2 above, and the test papers as shown in 3. References: 1. Mechanical Metallurgy by G.E. Dieter. 2. Engineering physical Metallurgy by Y.Lakhtin 3. Applied metallurgy for engineers by E.C. Rollason. 4. Engineering Materials & Metallurgy by B.K. Agarwal. 5. Engineering Materials part I & II by R.A. Higgins. 6. Introduction to Physical Metallurgy by Sydney Avner Text Books: 1. Material Science & Metallurgy by Dr. v.D. Kodghire., Everest Publication House Pune. 2. Physical Metallurgy By V.Raghvan.

387

Name of Course :- Manufacturing Engineering II 1 Automats: Major classification, horizontal and vertical, single spindle and multi-spindle, bar type and chuck type, screw type and Swiss type, tool and tool holders, typical tooling setup for simple work pieces, special attachments, threading attachments, high speed drilling attachments, chutes, magazines, and hoppers for feeding Copying Lathes: NC and CNC lathes. CNC turning centers, paper tape, magnetic tapes, working principles and fundamentals of programming Grinding machines: Grinding Process, grinding machines- cylindrical, center type, universal, plain, plunge center type, chucking type, centreless grinding machines-through feed, in feed, end feed, internal grinding machines- horizontal, vertical spindle-rotary/reciprocating types, tool and cutter grinders, special grinding machines Grinding wheels: Types of abrasives-natural, artificial, grain size, types of bonds, grade, structure, shape and sizes, IS for marking system of grinding wheel, selection of grinding wheels, grinding fluids, balancing of grinding wheels, truing and dressing, mounting of grinding wheels, safety Screw Thread Cutting Machines. Thread production process, thread chasing, thread milling, thread whirling, die threading and tapping, thread rolling, thread grinding, self opening die heads, chasersradial, and tangential (tool geometry omitted.) Gear Teeth Cutting Machines. Gear Milling, Gear Hobbing- Principles of Hobbing (Kinematics omitted) , hobbing techniques, hob size, material (tool Geometry omitted), gear shaper cutter (tool geometry omitted). Gear finishing processes-gear shaving, gear lapping, gear grinding, gear burnishing Modern developments: Machining centers, special purpose machines Unconventional machining processes (only basic principles, machines and application) Electrical Discharge Machines (EDM) Electrochemical Machining (ECM) Chemical Machining (CHM) Ultrasonic Machining (USM) Abrasive Jet Machining (AJM) Laser Beam Machining (LBM) Electron Beam Machining (EBM) Plasma Arc Machining (PAM)

2 3

4

5

6

7 8

388

1

2

3 4

5

6

7. 8

9

Theory of Metal Cutting General:Common features of machining processes, basic wedge of cutting tools, concept of speed, feed and depth of cut; distinct6on between wood and metal chip formation. Mechanics of Metal Cutting Various types of chips, discontinuous, with built up edge; shear plane and shear plane angle, cutting ration; orthogonal cutting and oblique cutting, Merchant’s circle of forces and expression of shear stress and strain, normal force on shear plane in terms of measurable cutting forces and shear plane angle, velocity relations. Merchant’s theory, Merchants modified theory, Ernest-Merchant equation. Machinability of Metals: Cutting force, tool life and surface finish as measures of machine ability. Cutting Forces:Gross power, net power in machining, efficiency of machine tools, tangential cutting force; effect of speed, feed, depth of cut, tool material and angles, material variables on cutting force; empirical formula for estimating cutting force and power, concept of specific cutting force, specific power consumption and material removal factor,. Tool Life:Definition. Flank wear and crater wear. Preliminary failure and ultimate failure, mechanism of tool wear, effect of speed, feed, depth of cut, tool material and geometry on tool life. Surface finish:Height of feed ridges and built up edges as primary factors effecting surface finish; effect of speed, feed, depth of cut, tool material and angles, and material variables on surface finish. Coolant:Functions of coolant; effect on cutting force, tool life and surface finish, types of coolants, choice of coolant for various machining processes. Economics of Machining:Components of machining, cost, machine cost, non-production cost, tool cost, components of tool cost; tool change cost; tool regrinding cost; tool inventory cost, tool depreciation cost. Materials for Cutting Tools Properties required for cutting tool materials. Carbon tool steel; plain and alloyed, oil hardened, water hardened, properties and field of application, limitations, high speed steel, standard and special H.S.S., properties, field of application and limitations. Carbides:-Method of manufacturing, different grades, I.S.O. specifications, field of application, limitations. Ceramics; manufacturing methods, properties, different compositions, field of applications, advantages, limitations. Term Work 1. At least one class test. 2. Numerical Problems. 3. Studying chip formation References:1. Manufacturing Science by Amitabh Ghosh & Mullick. 2. Metal cutting ; A.Bhattachrya 3. Metal cutting and machine tools; Junenja and sekhon, Wiley. 4. Production technology; HMT Hand Book 5. Metal Cutting by Trent. 389 Text Books: Theory & Practice in Metal Cutting by Amitabh Bhattacharya.

Name of Course : Machining Science –I Name of Course:-Workshop Practice-IV

1

Machine Shop: 1. One composite job consisting minimum four parts employing operations on lathe, viz., precision turning, screw cutting, boring etc; and involving use of shaping, milling, drilling, grinding operations. 2. Assembly and dissembly some of machining fixture, drill jig etc. 3. Assembly and dissembly of machine tool sub assembly. Practical examination: Practical examination will be held for 4 hours only and shall consists of preparation of jobs in precision turning, boring, screw cutting, drilling, milling, shaping, grinding etc.

2

390

T.Y B.TECH Name of Course : WORK STUDY AND ERGONOMICS

391

1 2

Definition: Purpose of study, objectives, brief history and evolution, work study and productivity, human factor in application of work study. Methods Engineering: Definition and objectives of method study; selecting the work for studies, recording the facts, evaluation techniques, methods of improvement, use of micromotion and memomotion study. Flow and handling of materials; process charts, symbols for process charts, flow diagram, analysis and critical examination of existing methods and development of improved methods, activity charts, two handed charts, cycle graph, chrono cycle graph; presentation, installation and maintenance of improved methods. Organization and methods, application of methods engineering in office work. Work Measurement: Definition, significance of work measurement; origin, development and procedure of work measurement, various work measurement techniques. Time study: definition, equipment for basic time study, time study forms and other equipment. Steps in use of techniques of time study; selecting the job, breaking the job into elements, approach to the worker, the elements, timing each element, Maynard Operation Sequencing Technique (MOST),small group activity. Time Study Rating : Average and qualified worker, rating procedures, criteria affecting the choice of rating procedures, continuous timing, flyback timing, accumulative timing; standard ratings, comparison of observed and standard ratings, factors affecting the rate of working, scales of rating, rating factors, recording the rating, summarizing the study, allowances, calculation and application of allowances. Work sampling and production studies; introduction to standard data and synthetic time standards, special timing devices and equipment, introduction of work study in an organization, introductory idea about incentives, problems in India in increasing productivity through work study and wage incentives. Ergonomics: Safety; safety devices, occupational health and hazards, anthropometry; stress measurement and control, design of work place / equipment design. Industrial psychology, fatigue. Physical environment; sound (noise), lighting, ventilation.
Term Work

3

4

5

1. Two assignments on rating and report of results. 2. Two experiments on time study of machine operations and report of results. Problems on flow diagram and process charts.
TEXT BOOKS :

1. Work Study ; International Labour Office, Geneva, 2. Work Study and Ergonomics; H.S. Sham; Dhanpat Rai, 1992. Time and Motion Study; Ralph Barnes; Asia Publishing, 1976.
References:

1. Most Work Measurement Systems; Kjell B. Zandin; Marcel Decker Inc N.Y., 1990. 2. Human Factors in Engineering and Design; Mark S. Sanders and Ernest J. McCormick; McGraw Hill, 1982. 3. Introduction to Ergonomics; R.S. Bridger; McGraw Hill, 1995.

392

Name of Course :- METROLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6. 7.

8.

Introduction to metrology, need for inspection, precision and accuracy; fundamental principles and definition. Standards of Measurement; line, end and wave length standards, primary, secondary and tertiary standards, sub division of standards. Limits, Fits and Tolerances Requirement of interchangeable manufacture, allowance and tolerance, limits and fits, hole based and shaft based systems, IS 919 : 1963, tolerance grades IT 01 to IT 05, types of fits, general requirements of “GO” & “NO GO” gauging; Taylor’s principle in design of GO & NO GO gauges Comparators Need for comparators and amplifying system; mechanical, mechanical-optical, electrical, electronic and pneumatic comparators; principle, construction and operation of various comparators, advantages; limitations and applications of above comparators. Interferometry Principles of interference, monochromatic source, concept of flatness, flatness testing, optical flats, interference patterns and their significance, optical interferometer, laser interferometer. Surface Texture Measurement Profile geometry, importance of surface condition, roughness and waviness, definition and significance of terms; band width selection, roughness standards specifying surface roughness parameters, Ra, Rz, Rp, etc.; RMS number, surface roughness measuring instruments such as Tomlinson’s surface meter, Taylor Hobson Talysurf, Mecrin (only), surface roughness symbols. Measurement of Screw Threads Types of screw threads, definitions, measurement of major and pitch diameters, two wire and three wire methods, floating carriage micrometer; and their applications. Measurement and Gauging of Gears Types of gears, gear terminology and standard proportions; pitch circle diameter, circular pitch, diametral pitch and module, base pitch, addendum, dedendum, tooth thickness and width, base tangent method, gear tooth comparator, gear measurement using rollers, master gears and Parkinson tester. Special Measuring Machines and Methods Profile projector, 3-D coordinate measuring machine, Tool makers microscope

393

9.

Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation Transducers for displacement, force, torque, pressure and other mechanical measurements; strain gauges, inductive, capacitive and piezoelectric transducers; use of these transducers for mechanical measurement (elementary treatment only). Text Books: 1. Metrology ;R.K.Jain 2. Engineering Metrology; I.C. Gupta 3. Experimental Methods for Engineers; J.P. Holman 4. Instrumentation Devices and System; C.S. Rangan, G.R. Sarma, V.S. Mani; TMH, 1983. 5. Industrial Instrumentation and Control; S.K. Singh; TMH, 1987. 6. Engineering Metrology; Shotbolt 7. Practical Engineering Metrology; K.W.P. sharp

394

2.

DESIGN OF PRESS TOOLS

a) Shearing of Sheet Metal : Theory of shear action in metal cutting, clearance, cutting force, stripping force, and energy requirement with and without shear, on press tools, strip layout for blanking; die block and punch block design, design and selection of die sets, design of stripper, methods of fixing punches, location, stock stops, types of shearing operation, design of piercing die, blanking die, perforating die, shaving die, trimming die and compound die. b) Drawing of sheet Metal : Metal forming operations, metal flow in drawing, reduction factors and redrawing limits, drawing, ironing and blank holding pressures. clearance, punch and die radii, wall thickening, thinning and ironing theory, defects in deep drawn parts, drawing test, single and double action presses, design of drawing die and combination die. c) Bending and Forming of Sheet Metal : Metal movement in bending and forming, bend radius, development of blank and bend allowances, spring back, flaring holds, bending and bottoming forces, design of press brake dies, and bending and forming press dies. d) Progressive Dies for Sheet Metal Parts : Selection of progressive dies, stock guides, stock lifters, strippers, pilots, cam stage, basic types, bridges and carriers, strip development for progressive die, rules of strip design, development of die around the strip design, splitting the die block for manufacture, basic layout practice, design of various types of progressive dies. e) Equipment for Sheet Metal Operations : Type of presses, effective utilisation of presses; load, torque and energy considerations, feeding equipment, safety in press working.

Text books:1.Jig and Fixture Design Manual: Erik Henriksen 2.An introduction to Jig and Tool Design: M.H.A.Kempster. 3.Jigs and Fixtures: P.H.Joshi TMH 2005 4.Tool Design :C.Donaldson 5.Press Working; Eary and Reed 6.Fourteen steps of die Design;Paquin 7.Basic Tool Design;Ostergard 8.Advanced Die Design;Ostergard

Name of Course :- Tool Design

395

1.

Design of Jigs And Fixtures: a) Operation planning, sequencing of operations, locating faces. b) Component Analysis: Geometry, accuracy, material, machinability, quantity, modifications so as to assist production. c) Design Analysis: Selection of location and clamping faces/points, component distortion under clamping and cutting forces; compensating for component variation, choice of cutting tool and means of guiding and supporting. d) Line diagrams of locating and clamping system; mathematical analysis of forces, stresses, stiffness and proportions, economics and costs of alternative methods of design e) Jigs and Fixtures : Principles of design and construction with reference to interchangeability, simplicity, ease of operation, economy of motion, rigidity, durability, swarf disposal; study of typical examples and of geometric location f) Jig and Fixture Details: Locations, clamps, jacks and supporting devices. drill and tool guide bushes, multiple clamping and equalizing devices, quick acting clamping mechanisms such as link, toggle, cam, eccentric and interrupted thread, pneumatic, electric and hydraulic devices. g) Design applications of typical jigs and fixtures for given component including plate, channel; latch and box type drill jigs and jigs for drilling combined with reaming, tapping, counter boring and spot facing, milling fixtures, including multistation and indexing types. h) Fixtures for Planing and shaping, turning fixtures and work holding devices with expanding and contracting registers; reference to balance. i) Fixture for profiling, broaching, grinding fixtures for cylindrical and surface grinding, through type and rotating table type; assembly fixtures and combined jig and inspection fixtures j) Incidence of work study on jig and fixture design and applications; alternative tooling methods with respect to factors such as batch size, total quantity, frequency of setup, etc; standardization; universal jig components. k) Types of construction; cast, fabricated and welded; standardization of details; cost consideration with respect to quantity, quality and effectiveness l) Fixtures for inspection in mass production processes; fixtures for various heat treatment processes

396

Name Of Course :- Machining Science-II  Design of Cutting Tools a) Single Point Tools: Definition of various angle of single point tool as per American, British and German Standards; (American nomenclature will be followed in further discussion); factors influencing the choice of shape, size and angles of single point tools for various machining condition, constructional features of solid tools, tipped tools, mechanically held regrindable insert type tools throw away tip type tools. b) Form Tools: Various types such as flat form tool, tangential form tool, circular form tool; constructional details and fields of application; relation between side clearance and front clearance on form tools, profile correction in all types of form tools with and without rake angle. c) Drills : Constructional features of two fluted drills, nomenclature, choice of point angle, helix angle for different machining conditions, rake and clearance angles in drills, web thinning , margin relieving, double point angle, spiral lip and special grinding to reduce the effect of chisel edge; carbide tipped drills. Design features of core drills, countersinks, counter bores and spot facers. d) Reamers : Constructional features of hand reamer, machine reamer, adjustable reamer, expansion reamer; solid, carbide tipped and insert type, nomenclature. Design of reamer; diameter, chamfer, choice of helix angle, number of teeth, tooth form, back taper, etc. e) Milling Cutters: Peripheral milling cutters, various types, choice of diameter and number of teeth, rake angle, clearance and form of flutes, helix angle of flutes and relief angle. Form milling cutters ; design of form relieving, profile correction in form tools with rake angle. Constructional features of inserted blade milling cutters. f) Face milling cutters: Solid and inserted blade type; nomenclature of details and angles, selection of angles, diameter and number of teeth, constructional details of inserted blades, throwaway tip type face mills. Design of end mills. g) Broaches: Details and nomenclature, design of internal and external broaches. h) Taps: Hand taps and machine taps; constructional features, nomenclature, design of thread profile, number of flutes, flute shape, chamfer, length; helical fluted taps, collapsible taps. i) Tools for Gear Cutting: Gear milling cutters, standard set of cutters, limitations on accuracy. Design of gear milling cutters both disc & end mill type. j) Gear hobs: design of rake profile, lead; straight and helical gears, diameter and length of hob; preshave, pregrinding, semitoping, full topping hobs, carbide tipped hobs. k) Gear shaper cutters; disc type and shank type cutters, details and angles, preshave, pregrinding, semi topping cutters.

397

References Books:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Metal Cutting ; A. Bhattacharya ; Central Books. Tool Design; Donaldson Production Technology ; HMT Hand Book ; TMH Metal Cutting and Cutting Tools Design ; Arshinov.

398

Name of Course :- OPERATIONS RESEARCH
Linear Programming Models : Formulation, objective function, constraints, decision variables; canonical and standard forms, parameters and variables; classical problems such as crew scheduling, knap sack, napkin, product mix. Graphical method for two variables problem, simplex algorithm and tabular representation, types of solution such as feasible/infeasible, degenerate/non degenerate, optimal/suboptimal, unique/alternate/infinite optimal, bounded/unbounded value and solution, and their interpretations from simplex table, cycling phenomenon; manual solution of problems involving upto three iterations. Duality concept, dual problem formulation, dual simplex method, primal suboptimaldual infeasible and other primal-dual relations; interpretation of dual variables. Duality properties, sensitivity analysis for variation of one parameter at a time. Assignment, Transportation & Network Models : Assignment models: Minimisation models, ,Maximisation , conditional assignment , Formulation-Flight scheduling problem Transportation model- Minimization models, maximization, unbounded problems, Northwest corner rule, Vogel’s Approximation Method, Optimisation, MODI method ( u-v method), Degeneracy Dynamic Programming Models : Bellman’s optimality principle, functional equation, backward and forward recursions, stage-state identification and solution of problems involving up to three stages, Game Theory or Competitive Strategies : Limited to two person zero sum games; domination, saddle point, pure and mixed strategies, graphical and analytical methods; LP model formulation. Queuing/Waiting Line Models: Steady state analysis for M/M/1/00/00/. System, hazard rate and system performance criteria; Erlangian distribution in queues in series; waiting period in M/G/1, G/M/1, and M/M/1 system with finite population (no derivation for these four cases). Simulation Models : Monte Carlo or experimenting method based on probabilistic behavior data and random numbers, application in probabilistic real life problems.

Text Books:

1) Operations Research Techniques for Management; B. Banerjee; Business book publishing house. 2) Operations Research; An introduction; Hamdy A. Taha, Macmillan, 1995 3) Operations Research; Hira and Gupta. 4) Quantitative Techniques in Management; N.D. Vora; TMH, New Delhi. 5) Operations Research; SD Sharma; Kedar Nath Ramnath & Co, Meerut, 1992. 6) Operations Research ; J.K.Sharma McMillan India.2005 7) Theory and Problems of Operations Research; Richard Bronson; Schaum’s Outline Series; McGraw Hill, 1982.

399

Name of Course:- METAL CASTING
1 2 Introduction: Casting process, historical background, materials that can be cast, importance and limitations of casting processes. Sand Casting: Tools for making sand moulds, patterns, pattern allowances, types of patterns, pattern materials and their suitability, pattern design, characteristics of pattern and selection; core boxes ; types of core boxes; moulding sand characteristics, constituents and additives, types of sand, their suitability; sand testing, conditioning and reusing. Core sand: characteristics and constituents, core making, baking and handling techniques; moulding and core making machines. Design of moulds and cores; core support; gating and risering; types of gating and its characteristics, sprue, runner and in gates ; risers- types, significance, riser efficiency; design of complete gating and riser system; pouring, fettling and inspection of castings; casting defects, causes and remedies; casting design. Other Casting Processes: Shell moulding CO2 moulding, investment casting; their characteristics, processes, advantages, limitations and applications. Die Casting : Types, application and limitations; materials for die casting, die materials, die manufacturing and heat treatment, die-casting machine; design of dies, number and layout of cavities, cores, gating and ejection systems, recent advances in casting methods Melting and solidification : Furnaces; cupola, electric and induction furnaces; comparative study and their suitability; charge calculation, handling of molten metal; ferrous and nonferrous foundry practice Solidification: Solidification of pure metal and alloys, their characteristics; free solidification and solidification under force. Moulds for Plastic Materials; Different types of plastics; structure, properties and uses; processing of plastics, injection moulding, blow moulding, compression moulding, extrusion, thermoforming, calendaring and other allied processes; design of injection moulding dies, study of plastic mounding machines Text Books:

3

4

5

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Principles of Metal casting; Heine & Rosenthal. Foundry ; Taylor Manufacturing Technology ; P.N. Rao TMH 2005 Foundry Engineering; P.L. Jain TMH 2005 Die Casting ; Doehler Fundamentals of Tool Design ; ASTME 1985 Metals Hand Book; ASM

400

Name of Course: Technical Communication and Presentation Skills
1 2 3 4 5 6 Communication in a Business Organisation: Channels,media,internal and external, formal and informal, upward and downward, nonverbal. Technical Writing Skills: definition, importance, qualities, choosing words, sentences and paragraphs; audience recognition.; principles of Business correspondence; job application and resumes Report Writing: types, qualities, , defining objectives and scope, organizing and interpreting information,, individual and group reports, formal and informal reports. Technical proposal Presentation Skills Group Discussion Assignments: Written One assignment each from topics 1 to 4 Oral One presentation One group discussion Books recommended: 3. Lesiker & Petit “ report Writing for Business “ McGraw Hill 4. Meenakshi Raman , Sharma Sangeetha “ Technical Communication – Principles & Practices” Oxford University Press

401

Name of Course :- PROCESS ENGINEERING & TOOLING
1 Product Engineering : Factors to be considered while developing the product development principles, interaction of product engineering with process engineering functions. Study of manufacturing processes, critical analysis, selection of optimum processes, organization chart and functions of process engineering department. Process Design : Tolerance chart, purpose and use of tolerance chart, definitions and symbols, rule for adding and subtracting determining layout of tolerance chart, stock removal, constructing and balancing of tolerance chart. Preliminary Part Print Analysis : Determining the principal processes, alternate processes, functional surface s of the work piece, determining the areas used for processing, nature of work to be performed, finishing and identification of operations. Work Piece Control: Equilibrium theories, concept of location, geometric control, dimensional control mechanical control, alternate location theory. Classifying operations, selection of equipment, operation planning, process pictures, operation routing, tool layout for turning and other general machines, tooling for automats, tool layout, tool design, and cam design. In process gauging & multiple gauging Discussion of production machines, SPM and other mass production machines. Text Books: 1. Process Engineering: Eary and Johnson. 2. Fundamentals of Manufacturing Engineering; V.M. Kovan et al, Mir Publication, 1979. 3. Manufacturing Engineering ; V. Danilevsky; Mir Publication, 1973. 4. Westeman Tables for the Metal Trade ; Ed. H. Jutz and E. Scharkas; Wiley Eastern Limited, 1991.

2 3 4

5

402

Name of Course :- Machine Tool Design
1 .

Introduction to machine tools; types, capabilities, features of construction and operations of basic machine tools, classification; general purpose, single and special purpose (elementary treatment only). Design of Machine Tool Drives: Mechanical drives for providing rotational movement, basic principles, stepped and stepless output, requirements for layout of a stepped drive, selection of range of spindle speeds, velocity range for high speed machining, construction of speed diagram, analysis of productivity loss, layout of speeds in arithmetic progression (A.P.) and geometric progression (G.P.) only; Kinematic advantages of G.P. series, selection of values of common ratio and design of gear boxes for feed and speed having 4 to 12 speeds only using geometric progression series; belt and cone pulley drives. Classification of Feed Boxes: Quadrant change gear mechanism, feed boxes with gear cone and sliding key, Norton gear cone, Meander’s gear cone extending the range of cone pulley drive by back gears and its ray diagram, gear boxes with clutched drive preoperative gear box, clutch as speed reducer for back gear drives, Schopke drive, extended Schopke drive and Ruppert drive. Stepless Drives :Mechanical stepless drives; single disc transmission, double disc transmission, cone disc transmission; regulation of speed by epicyclic gear train, Wulfel Kopp tonrator positive infinitely variable (P.I.V.) drive, Svetozarao variator. Design of Machine Tools: Guide ways design calculations, types of slide ways, shapes of slide ways, application of slide way profiles and their combinations, materials of slide ways, methods of adjusting clearances in slide ways, design of slide ways for wear resistance and stiffness; elementary treatment of hydrostatic slide ways. Design of Machine Tool Bearings: Journal, rolling element and hydrostatic bearings, basic principles of selection of bearing; assembly, maintenance and mounting techniques Design of Clutches and Power Screws: Selection and application principles, design of power screws, types, selection and error compensation; elementary treatment of recirculating ball screws. Design of machine tool clutches Acceptance Tests on Machine Tools : Safety, concepts, performance test, geometrical test of lathe, drilling, milling and shaping machines only, maintenance, ergonomic and aesthetic aspects of machine tools.
References:

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Machine Tool Design Handbook ; Central Machine Tool Institute, Bangalore; TMH, 1982

403

Name of Course :-TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT 1. Introduction: Basic concepts and definitions, fitness for use, historical reviews, awareness, quality tasks, quality function, the system concept, factual approach. Policies and Objectives: Need for quality policies, examples of quality policies, leadership concepts, quality objectives, role of senior management, quality council, quality statements, strategic planning. Customer Relation and Satisfaction: Origins of consumerism, product knowledge, who is customer?, customer perception of quality, customer complaints and redressal, product safety and reliability, service quality. Cost of Quality: Prevention, appraisal and failure aspects of cost of quality, planning for investment, return of investment, quality cost data acquisition, consolidation and analysis, performance indices, cost reduction programme, optimum cost. Quality Improvement: Juran trilogy, management controllable defects, operator controllable defects, sporadic and chronic problems of quality. Vendor Relations: Vendor assessment, vendor development, quality of bought out components, managing vendor quality, vendor rating, vendor appraisal, vendor certification, relationship development. Employee Involvement : Employee motivation and quality, empowerment, team building, concept of zero defects, “do it right” first time, theories of motivation. Training for Quality: Training of workers, supervisors and managers for quality, methods and approaches, training and motivation, small group approach, performance appraisal. Quality Circles: Background to QC, essential precondition for successful QC, organizing and training for QC, motivation to QC, benefits of QC. Concurrent Engineering ; benefits, teams, communication models and tools. 8 Designing for Quality : Quality of design and quality of conformance, reliability, selection of tolerances, design review, failure mode and fault tree analysis, evaluating design by test, corrective action, availability, maintainability and safety in design. Experimental design, testing hypothesis, orthogonal design, factorial and fraction factorials. Taguchi’s quality engineering, loss function, orthogonal arrays, parameter and tolerance design. ISO 9000 &14000,QS 9000 Elements, policy, manual, procedures and documentation, internal audit, certification approach, surveillance audit, maintaining of certification. 404

2.

3.

4.

5 6 7

9

10 11 12

Bench Marking: Introduction, definition and significance, collection of data for bench marking and its use. PDCA cycle, problem solving tools, QFD, Customers vice. Productivity improvement techniques, 5S, POKAYOKE, SMED, Kaizen (Continuous process improvement through JIT) TEXT BOOKS: 1. Quality Planning and Analysis; J.M.Juran, F.M.Gryna; TMH. 2. Total Quality Management; D.H.Besterfield, Prentice Hall, 1995. 3. Quality is Free: Philip B.Crosby; Mentor/New American Library, 1979. 4. What is Total Quality Control? The Japanese way; Ishikawa K.; Prentice Hall, 1985. 5. Juran on Leadership for Quality; An Executive Handbook; J.M.Juran; The Free Press, 1989. 6. TQM in New Product Manufacturing; H.G.Menon; McGraw Hill, 1992. 7. Japanese Manufacturing Techniques; R.J.Schonberger; The Free Press, 1982. 8. World Class Manufacturing: The Lessons of Simplicity Applied; R.J.Schonberger; The Free Press, 1986. 9. World Class Manufacturing Casebook : Implementing JIT and TQC ; R.J.Schonberger; The Free Press, 1987. 10. KAIZEN: The key to Japan’s competitive Success; Imai Masaki. 11. Wonderland of Kaizen: A Total Quality Culture for Survival : Shyam Talawadekar.

405

Name of Course :- Mechatronics 1. Automation : Definition, concepts, where, what, how to apply, automation of machining processes, types of automation: low/medium/high cost, hard/flexible automation, semi/fully automated machine tools, special purpose machines, material transfer devices. Control System Fundamentals: Control system concepts, classification of control systems, mathematical representation of system equations, derivation of system equations, response characteristics of components and systems, frequency response analysis, stability of components and systems, root locus method of analysis, feed back control system elements, basic control actions and industrial automatic control. Low Cost Automation Using Pneumatics: Operational principles and uses of pneumatic power systems, design and functioning of pneumatic components (compressors, service units, storage tank, control valves, linear and rotary actuators) and basic controls, construction of pneumatic controls and circuit diagrams for conveying, feeding, clamping, indexing, cutting and non/cutting operations; login control system and sequence control, electro pneumatic control and circuit design. Machine Tool Automation Using Hydraulics : Operational principles and uses of hydraulic power system, design and functioning of hydraulic components (hydraulic pumps, filters, control devices, linear and rotary actuators) in basic circuits, complex hydraulic controls, electro hydraulics, commissioning and safety regulation of electro - hydraulic controls, proportional hydraulics, proportional valves, activation technology, basic controls and practical exercises. Logic, Gates and Controls: Pneumatic logic gates: AND, OR, NAND and NOR; applications of basic control circuits based on these gates; introduction to the design and mode of operation of programmable logic control, conversion and documentation of control problems into run able PLC programme. Electrical Control Devices: Features and design principles of electrical circuits, clutches, brakes, thermal relays, time relays, electrical circuits for machine tools. Transfer Lines: Types, design principles, characterizing features, technical and economic feasibility considerations in applications. Assembly Automation: Mechanisms and devices for various operations associated with handling, locating and orienting work pieces, comparative study of different design options.

2.

3.

4.

5

6

7

8

406

TEXT BOOKS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pneumatic Circuits and Low Cost Automation; Fawce, JR (sections 1,3,5) Fundamentals of Pneumatics; Festo series (section 3) Industrial Hydraulics; Pippenger (sections 1,4,5) Automation, Production Systems and CIM; Mikell Groover (sections 1,2,7) Engineering Systems and Automatic Control; Peter Dransfield (section 2) Design of Machine Tools; S.K.Basu(section 6) Automatic Control System, S.N.Verma (sections 1,2) Machine Tool Design, Vol.IV; Acherkan (section 7) Automated Assembly; Geotfery Boothroyd, Corradopoli, and Lawrence E. Much; Marcel Dekker Inc, 1982 (section 8).

REFERENCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Vickers Manual on Hydraulics.

BOOKS

Pneumatic Applications: Werner Deppert and Kurt Stoll. Mechanization by Pneumatic Control, Vol.1 and Vol.2; Werner Deppert and Kurt Stoll. Hydraulics and Pneumatics for Production; Stewart. Control of Fluid Power; Pippenger and Pace. Control System Technology; C.J.Chemond. Maintenance of Pneumatic Equipment; Festo Series. Industrial Hydraulic Control; Peter Rohner.

407

Name of Course :- PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 1. Introduction Definition of production, value adding conversion process, resources and optimum allocation , system approach, different elements/functions of production, PPC function and its interrelationship with other functions such as marketing, finance , R&D , organisation for production systems, job order , batch production, mass production, their salient features Economic Analysis of Production: Factors to be considered in product design, economics of scale , fixed cost , variable cost , Break even chart, PV chart, Multiple product PV chart makebuy decision. Plant location Factors to be considered in plant location , Process layout , Product layout , Techniques of plant layout, concept of Group Technology , Group layout. Demand forecasting Methods, Time series analysis, Exponential smoothening, Fitting a straight line, fitting a curve , moving average method, seasonal variation, Selection of forecasting method, Accuracy of forecast. Material Management: Bill of material, Quantity planning, Inventory control, Economic order quantity(EOQ), lead time consumption rate, different ordering systems, Q systems, P systems, S system , Two or three bin systems , the store’s function, ABC analysis. Materials Systems: Demand estimation and operations budgeting, procurement to supply process and stages, sourcing and purchasing procedures, administrative, financial, contractual and accounting aspects, specifications, inspections, transportation and storage, classification, codification and computerization, standardization and specification, inventory management and service level; Records, stock taking and disposal, transpiration and storage. PPC functions: Scheduling, progress monitoring, job order scheduling, Dispatching rules, Batch size decision, Production range. Aggregate planning, Capacity planning, MRP, an integrated approach to the requirement planning and scheduling, JIT system ,SMED, Kanban pull system of scheduling, line balancing. Project Management: Programme evaluation and review techniques and critical path method (PERT/CPM), float , critical path, three time estimates, probability of completion before due date , crashing & optimum duration, resource leveling Management Information System: Data & information, feedback system, information system link between different functions computer applications. TEXT BOOKS 1.Modern Production/Operations Management; E.S. Buffa 2.Operation Management; Monks J.G. 3.Production & Operation Management;S.N. Chary 4.Production Systems-Planning , Analysis & Control;Riggs

2.

3. 4.

5

6

7

8.

9

408

Name of Course - INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT & H.R.D. 1. 2. 3. Management: Definition, scope, interpretation, role of scientific management in industrial environment and human relations. Human Resource Management: Unique nature and unlimited capability of this resource; classical, scientific, analytical and new-human resource management approaches. Human Behaviour: Basic processes, attitudes, emotions, perceptions, individual differences and assessment related to individual, group and organization; individual vs. group behavior, goals, conflicts and cohesion, morale and job satisfaction. Personnel Function: Every manager’s function, historical development, profile of a new employee, chronological development, technological, social and other influencing factors, impact of these factors on employees as individuals. Human Resource Development: a. Selection; human resource planning, selection processes, job description, analysis and evaluation, selection from within/external sources; factors for and against, selection test procedures, career planning, case studies. b. Motivation; job design, enlargement and enrichment, relation with productivity, performance appraisal. c. Training and development; for various categories, skills and job requirements; operator, supervisory and managerial, necessitated by changes in factory within and outside the system, training for change of skills, multiple skills, promotions, new responsibilities. Maintenance of human resources; safety and health; quality of work life. Compensation and Salary Administration: Laws governing employee service conditions, benefits and welfare.Management of industrial relations; causes and resolution of conflicts; laws and environment; skills and attitudes for avoiding or minimizing conflicts. a. Regulatory mechanisms in industrial relations; bipartite meetings, role and contribution of trade unions/employee associations, Developments and thinking in India and other countries b. Industrial democracy and employee participation; joint consultations, collective bargaining. c. Employee grievances; machinery for settlement, role of workers education.

4.

5

6

409

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Personnel Management and Human Resources; C.S.Venkataratnam, B.K.Srivastava; TMH, 1995. 2. Human Resources Management; Mirza S. Saiyadain; TMH, 1995. 3. Principles of Management; P.C.Tripathi, P.N.Reddy; TMH, 1991. 4. Organizational Behaviour; Text and Cases; Uma Sekaran; TMH, 1995. 5. Organizational Behaviour; Fred Luthans; McGraw Hill, 1995. 6. Organisational Behaviour; Human Behaviour at Work; John W.Newstrom, Keith Davis; TMH, 1995. 7. Industrial Organization Psychology; John B.Miner; McGraw Hill, 1992. 8. Managing Human Resources; Wayne F.Cascio; McGraw Hill, 1995. 9. Human Factor in Management; Rudrabasavaraj. 10. Factory Administration and Management; A.S.Deshpande.

410

B.TECH (PRODUCTION) Semester VII 404900 Industrial Project 1 1 20 Note** 1. Industrial Project should be of one semester duration. 2. Contact teacher hours for project guidance-One hour per student per week. Semester VIII Course Code Course Title 304240 304250 CAD/CAM/CIM Economics, Finance Accounting And Costing. Plastic Engineering. Sales And Marketing Management. Materials Management. Elective –I Elective –II Total Contact Hours L P/T Total 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 22 2 2 2 2 8 5 4 5 3 3 5 5 30 % Weightage Credit TWA MST ESE 8 8 8 6 6 8 8 52 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 ESE Theory Hours 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

304260 304270 304280 -

411

ELECTIVES: Sr. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Course Code 404010 404020 404030 404040 404050 404060 404070 404080 Contact Cr Evaluation ESE Hours weightage % (Theory) Hrs L P T TW MS ESE A T Production Software. 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3 Artificial Intelligence. 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3 Entrepreneurship Development. 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3 Surface Engineering. 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3 Product Design. 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3 Supply chain Management. 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3 Powder Metallurgy & 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3 Ceramics. Composites Materials & 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3 Technology Course Title

412

Course Code:304240

Course Title: CAD/CAM/CIM

DETAILED SYLLABUS 1 Computer Aided Design (CAD) Fundamentals of CAD : CAD System definition and historical perspective, design process, application of computers for design, manufacturing data base design; work station, graphics terminal, operator input devices, plotters and other output devices, central processing unit. Computer Graphics Software and Data Base : Software configuration of a graphic system, functions of graphics package, constructing the geometry, data base structures and content. Wire frame models, wire frame surfaces and solids, consistency of the models, hidden line removal, real time picture, and animation. Solid modeling, uses of solid models, generation of solid models, editing solid models, parametric solid models, extracting wire frame from surfaces / solids, other CAD features. Computer Aided Manufacture (CAM) CAD hierarchy, numerical control of machine tools, devices of NC system, data processing unit, tape format and tape readers, linear and circular interpolators, control loops, positioning control loops, contouring control loops, incremental and absolute systems, computer control concepts, DNC system CNC system, adaptive control system. Elements of CAM system, CAM data base, fundamental elements of CNC, software interpolation, benefits of CNC, computer assisted part programming; programming aids, canned cycles, parameter programming, NC programming with interactive graphics, NC languages, tooling ;for CNC machines, CNC machine set up, graphical programming. Computer Integrated Manufacture (CIM) Computer applications in manufacturing, automation and robotics, robot performance and evaluation, robot programming and control, sensing devices, gripper technology, robot application, computer aided inspection and quality control, computer integrated production management system, inventory management and material requirement planning, manufacturing resource planning. CAD, CAM implementation and integration; turnkey CAD, CAM systems, selection criteria, evaluation of alternative systems, future of CAD, CAM. Flexible Manufacturing Systems (FMS); components of FMS, work station design, automated work piece handling, layout, cost - feasibility, typical application. Emerging areas, automated factory, remote control, factories of the future. PRACTICALS Report of part programming of two components in word address format using canned programming aids, parameters, etc. Record of practical carried on CNC machine tools and their programmes. Record of practical carried out on CAD software. Report on available software’s on CIM, CAPP, DNC, FMS, Robotics, etc. A seminar report on any topic relating to the syllabus with a critical review of published literature (optional). RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing Mikel P.Groover and Emery W.Zimmers PHI 2004 Numerical Control and Computer Aided Manufacturing : T.K.Kundra, R.N.Rao, TMH 2003 Automation, Production systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing: Mikell P.Groover CAD/CAM/CIM: P.Radhakrishnan and S.Subramanyan TMH 2005 REFERENCE BOOKS Computer Graphics; Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker : R.E.CAD/CAM Handbook: Machever C. and Blauth Programming for Numerical Control Machines; Roberts A.D. and Prentice R.C. Computer Integrated Manufacturing : Alan Weatherall.

2

3

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 3 4 5

413

Course Code:304250 Course Title: Economics, Finance, Accounting And Costing. DETAILED SYLLABUS 1 Economics Economics; nature and scope of subject, ends and means and their adjustment, problem of choice; economic problem and financial problem. 1.2 Basic concepts; utility, wealth, welfare, price, markets, opportunity cost. 1.3 Approaches to economics; micro, macro, classical, social; economics of growth. 1.4 Major areas; consumption, production, distribution and exchange; domestic and international economy. 1.5 Broad classification; markets, structures, regulated and mixed economies. 1.6 Factors influencing functioning of an economy; human needs, social factors, entrepreneurial ventures, levels of infrastructure. 1.7 Markets; demand, supply and price; competition, monopoly and imperfect competition, untapped and created demand; demand behaviour. 1.8 Role of government; monetary, fiscal and trade policies, free trade and protection, industrial policy; instruments of government policy; taxation, incentives, budget. 1.9 Natural factors; natural and human resources, population, environment. 1.10 Indices of economic trends; gross and net national product, balance of payment, level of employment, quality of life, sectoral performances. 2 Finance 2.1 Contours of finance function in business, goal of finance, profit maximization and others. 2.2 Sources of finance and their relative importance. 2.3 Fund allocation, alternative uses of finance. 2.4 Capital budgeting; need, uses, limitations. 2.5 Assessment of capital needs; short and long term capital expenditure, project appraisal. 2.6 Budgetary control; concept, types of budget. 2.7 Financial markets; money markets, bill market, discount houses, call loan market, etc., Capital markets; mutual funds, stock markets, industrial banks, world bank, UTI, IDBI, ICICI, and state finance corporations. 2.8 Corporate planning; taxation and other financial incentives, objectives of corporate planning, capital expenditure and financial management, financial statements, fund flow and cash flow analysis. Accounting 3.1 Nature and scope of subject. 3.2 Financial statements; assets, liabilities, capital, profit, income, expenses. 3.3 Accounting concepts; Fixed and current assets, short and long term liabilities, reserves and owners funds. 3.4 Accounting for income and expenses, cash v/s accrual basis, capital and revenue expenditure, capital and operating income, deferred revenue expenditure; depreciation, depletion and amortization; accounting for fictitious assets and obsolescence, impact of exchange rate variations on corporate financial statements. 3.5 Mechanics of accounting; ledger and trial balance based on double entry book keeping. 3.6 Provision in company law and other legal aspects. 3.7 Balance sheets, profits and loss statements, annual reports of business enterprises. Costing: 4.1 Operating cost; definition, cost of production, cost of sale, labour and material costs, other expenses, variation in elements of operating cost with capacity, production rate; total cost, unit cost, fixed and variable expenses. 4.2 Cost ascertainment; allocation, apportionment, absorption of overheads and non-production cost; overhead analysis, absorption methods, general considerations. 4.3 Job costing; factory job costing, contract cost. 4.4 Unit costing; output and operating cost, simple process costing, normal and abnormal losses in process, waste, scrap, bye-and joint products. 4.5 Marginal costs and breakdown charges. 4.6 Cost planning and control, standard cost and budgetary control, setting standards, variance analysis. 4.7 Cost reduction; tools, techniques and productivity.

3

4

414

1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4. 5 6 7

4.8 Depreciation; causes and significance, methods of providing for depreciation, book values, taxes and depreciation. 4.9 Investments; fixed cost v/s varying capacity, unit cost v/s varying capacity. 4.10 Comparison of alternatives; selection in present economy, accepting or nor accepting a single alternative of providing equal / unequal services, unequal first cost and unequal lives, evaluation of replacement. 4.11 Techniques for comparing alternatives; payout periods, rate of return, discounting methods, minimum acceptable rate, net present value, yield, annual capital charge, cash flow, profit incremental discounted cash flow (DCF) returns. PRACTICALS At least two assignments in each of the four areas. Presentation /seminar on any specialized topic contained in the above syllabus. RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: Economics: Paul A. Samuelson Tata McGraw Hill, 14th Ed. Finance Sense- Text and Cases :Prasanna Chandra; TMH,2004. Cost Accounting: Jawaharlal TMH 2002 REFERENCE BOOKS Management Accounting; M.Y.Khan, P.K.Jain, TMH, 2002 Financial Management : I.M.Pandey Vikas Publication House.2006 Accounting for Management: Bhattacharya S.K. Sultan Chand Publications Fundamentals of Financial Management, Text and Cases Prasanna Chandra;TMH,2006. Advanced Economic Theory :M.L.Jhingan; Vikas Publication House. Managerial Economics: Varshneya Sultan Chand and Sons. Cost Accounting; Prasad N.K., Syndicate Books Pub. Co., 1989.

415

Course Code:304260 Course Title: Plastics Engineering DETAILED SYLLABUS 1 Plastics: Definition, composition, resins, additives and fillers chemistry of resins; types, chemical, physical, processing and engineering properties of plastics. Manufacturing processes of resins and plastics, raw materials finished forms. Contribution and comparatives performance of plastics in various sectors of business and economy. 2 Processing of Plastics: Processes based on type of material, industrial product design and production volume. Casting processes : gravity, still casting, continuous casting, Centrifugal casting. Moulding processes : injection, compression, transfer. Miscellaneous processes : foaming, thermoforming, laminating etc. Joining processes : sealing, welding, adhesive bonding. Continuous extrusion processes for films, sheets, sections, calendaring, laminating etc. Finishing processes : printing, embossing, etc. Processing Equipment: for moulding, extrusion, blowing, calendaring, welding, etc; construction, major units, operational and control features, specifications. Design of Moulds : for injection, compression and transfer moulding; feeding system, overflows, breathers and vents, cooling/heating of moulds, locking, ejection, mounting of moulds; construction and manufacturing aspects; two / three plate moulds, inserts, mould materials, machining, fabricating of moulds, polishing of cavities. Design of extrusion dies for different shapes, die materials, manufacture, mounting, heating / cooling of dies. Product Design: process, materials and tooling related aspects; specific beneficial (or otherwise) design features vis-à-vis other materials. PRACTICALS Design and drawing of at least three moulds / dies along with details drawing and specifications. 2. A seminar report on any topic. RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: A.S.Athalye : Plastics Handbook Plastics Materials; J.A.Brydson; Butterworth, 1980. REFERENCE BOOKS: Text Book of Polymer Science; F.W.Billmeyer; John Wiley and Sons, 1984. Processing of Thermoplastic Materials; E.C.Berhard; Von Nostrand Reinhold Co. Plastics Engineering; R.J.Crawford; Pergamon Press. Principles of Polymer Processing; R.T.Fenner; Macmillan. Plastics Extrusion Technology; A.L.Griff; Von Nostrand Reinhold Co. Injection Moulding Theory and Practice; I.V.Rubin, John Wiley and Sons. Compression and Transfer Moulding; J.Butler, Ilifee and Sons. Dies for Plastics Extrusion: M.V.Joshi, Macmillan India Publication Plastics Products Design; R.D.Beck, Von Nostrand Reinhold Pub.

3 4

5

1 2 1 2 1. 2. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

416

Course Code:304270 Course Title: Sales And Marketing Management. DETAILED SYLLABUS 1 Marketing Management and the Consumer: Marketing strategies, marketing mix, the four P’s; product, place, promotion and price. Final Consumers: Characteristics, population, income, education of house-hold head, geographic location. Buying motives; physiological and learned needs, motives, satisfaction of senses, preservation of species, fear, rest, pride, sociability, striving, curiosity or mystery, where they buy and why. Consumers Behaviour: Basic factors affecting marketing behaviour, behaviour changes, family buying, probable future behaviour. Industrial Buyers: Industrial products, number of buyers, geographical location, buying habits and practices, basic purchasing motives, multiple buying influence, inventory policy, reciprocity, wholesalers, their number and location, buying habits and practices, retailers, buying habits and practices. 2 Product Policy: Strategies for developing separate products or markets, product differentiation, market segmentation, planned obsolescence or progress. Developing a product; Sources of new ideas, packaging, branding, advantages of branding, degree of brand preference. Final consumer products; convenience products, shopping goods; style and fashion, fashion cycle; specialty goods, consumer research. Industrial goods; general characteristics; derived and fairly inelastic demand, rational buying. Developing place Strategies : Degree of market expense, intensive distribution, selective distribution, exclusive distribution, channels of distribution; wholesalers, retailers, direct to final user, factors affecting choice of distribution channel, nature of market and consumer, nature of product, sales effort required, relative costs and benefits. Price Policies: Under the market, above the market: specific price policies, leader pricing, bail pricing, prestige pricing, psychological pricing, new product pricing, geographic pricing, legal restrictions on pricing. Pricing Objectives: Target return, short and long term targets, profit maximization, non-economic objectives, market share, and business stability. Promotional Policies: Variables of promotional competition, personal selling, advertising, publicity and sales promotion, size of promotional effort. Advertising: Functions, factors influencing its use, attributes of products suitable for advertising, size of advertising budget, selection of advertising copy, selection of the media, mechanical features of media, quantitative measures, allocating advertising over time, evaluation effectiveness of advertising. Personal Selling: Recruiting, selecting and training of salesmen, training in the technique of selling, psychological aspects, use of role playing in training. Compensating salesmen; allocation of sales territories, coverage on the basis of number of contacts, frequency, nature of transportation service, establishing call schedules, setting standards, laying out routes, controlling coverage. Expenses control; method of control, honor plan, flat allowance, flexible expenses, combination of flat and flexible. Sales Performance Objectives: Setting volume objectives, determining market potential and sales potential, gross profit, direct sales, expenses, sales activity, combining objectives. Sales Control Record: Salesmen control, customer control, prospect control, internal company records.

3

4

5

6

Marketing Research : Scientific methods, definition of the problem, situation analysis, informal investigation, planning formal research project, research methods, observation method, survey method, experimental method, how research problems arise, analysis of internal data, measuring performance, the iceberg principle, where to get more data, government or private sources; motivation research, need for

417

motivation research, psychological analysis of consumer behaviour, use of motivation research in formulating product, place pricing, advertising policies. 1 2 1 2 3 1. 2 3. PRACTICALS At least Five assignments in the form of seminars, problems and analysis of cases based on the above syllabus. Market Research RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: Marketing Management: Analysis, Planning and Control, Philip Kotler; Prentice Hall of India, 12th Ed. Marketing Management: Ramaswamy and Namakumari McMillan Publication 2004 .Marketing Management : Rajan Saksena, TMH 2006 REFERENCE BOOKS: Marketing: A Managerial Introduction; J.C.Gandhi, TMH, 1994. Principles of Marketing and Salesmanship; J.C.Sinha; S.Chand. Principles of Marketing: , Philip Kotler; Prentice Hall of India.2005 edition.

418

Course Code: 304280 Course Title: Materials Management DETAILED SYLLABUS 1 Introduction to productivity of materials and role of materials management techniques in improving materials productivity, cost reduction and value improvement, role of purchasing in cost reduction value analysis in materials, choice and rationalization of materials, purchasing research, vendor development, vendor rating, standardization, variety reduction; negotiations and purchase, price analysis, organization of purchasing function, product explosion. Role of materials management in production organizations. Materials standardization and codification. 2. Purchasing System: Pre-purchase System. Ordering. Post purchase activity. Price forecasting and analysis. Purchasing under uncertainty vendor development and evaluation. Purchase negotiation and pricing. Purchasing of Capital Equipment. Tendering. Purchase Vs Lease. Import Substitution. Import Regulations and procedures Legal aspects of purchasing Public Buying : Buying procedures related to various Governmental organizations like D.G.S&D Registration of suppliers. Rate and Running Contracts. Indenting procedures Materials Planning: Make or buy decision. Materials Control: Acceptance sampling, vendor certification plans, vendor reliability. Warehousing And Stores Management : Purchase of Stores location and layout. Various types of stores. Stores Procedures. Stores Accounting and Stock checking Management of Scrap : Obsolete, damaged & unwanted stocks Inventory Management: Inventory models, quantity discounts, management of in-process inventory and finished goods inventory, information system for inventory management, stores management and warehousing, optimal stocking and issuing policies. Logistics Management : Genesis of Logistics – Logistics Decision on facility location, Inventory Polity, Transportation, Storage and material Handling Logistics Organization & Control PRACTICALS Five assignments based on these topics. One assignment using Computer Software. Preparation and presentation of Case study. RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: Purchasing and Materials management: K.S.Menon Third Edition Wheeler Publications 1996 Purchasing and Materials Management: Doebler and Burt . TMH Seventh edition 2005 REFERENCE BOOKS Materials Management :Bowersox TMH Sixth Edition 2001 Materials Management Systems; Brown R.G.; Wiley Modern Purchasing Principles and Practice; P.P.Kapoor; S.Chand Inventory Control Theory and practice; Sturr & Miller; Prentice Hall Focus Forecasting Computer Techniques for Inventory Control; Smith B.T.; CBI Pub.

3

4 5

6

7

1 2 3 1. 2. 1 2 3 4 5

Course Code:404010

Course Title: Production Software

DETAILED SYLLABUS 1 Introduction : Information system development, system analysis and design, categories of information systems, transaction processing systems, management information systems, decision support systems, system development strategies, equipment, design, development of software, implementation and evaluation. 2 Tools for Determining System Requirement: Basic requirements, fact-finding techniques, tools for documenting procedures and decisions, decision concepts, decision trees, decision tables, types of table entries.

419

3 4 5

Structured Analysis Development Strategy: Data flow analysis, tools for data flow strategy, development of data flow diagrams, features of a data dictionary, elements and structures. Computer Aided System Tools: Role and benefits of tools, categories of automated tools fronted, backed and integrated tools; computer assisted systems engineering (CASE), tools drawing data flow diagrams. Analysis to Design Transition: Design objectives, elements of design, design of output files, data base interactions, input control, procedures and Programme specifications, design of source documents, input validation, translation validation. Design of Files and Use of Auxiliary Storage Devices: Basic file terminology, data structured diagrams, types of files, methods of files organization, backup and recovery of files. Design of Data Base Interactions: Systems development in data base, relationships in data, data structured diagrams, structuring the data. Design of Data Communications: communications systems, channels, networks, design of local are network, (LAN), distributed systems, design of file processing in a communications environment. Systems Engineering and Quality Assurance: Design of objectives, program structured charts, design of software and documentation. Hardware and Software Selection: Determining size and capacity requirements, computer evaluation and measurement, evolution of software. PRACTICALS Minimum three assignments on above syllabus giving more stress on system analysis, data floor analysis and logic design in the broad area of production management. Assignments will cover following areas : Sales forecasting, production programme, materials requirement planning, manufacturing resources planning, capacity planning, inventory control, stores management, maintenance management, CPM - PERT, scheduling, loading, line balancing, plant layout, plant location, etc Additional problem solving assignments by using standard packages or software’s on above topics (minimum two). RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: Analysis and Design of Information systems; James A Senn, Int.Ed(II) McGraw Hill Pub.1989. Management Information System - Strategy and Action; Charles Parkar and Thomas Case, Iind Ed-1993, Ind.Ed., Mitchel McGraw Hill, N.Y.

6 7 8 9 10

1

2

1 2.

1 2 3

Course Code :404020 Course Title: Artificial Intelligence Introduction: Definition, Underlying assumptions, A.I. Niques, Application areas. Problem Definition & Analysis: Problem as state approach, Production system, control strategies, Heuristic search, Problem characteristics, role of knowledge. Basic Problem methods: Forward Vs. Backward reasoning. Problem Trees Vs. Problem Graphs, Knowledge Representation & the Frame Problem, Heuristic Functions. Weak methods, Hill Climbing, Breadth first-Best first search. Knowledge representation Using Predicate Logic: Introduction, Representing simple facts in logic, augmenting the representation, The basic of resolution, The unification algorithms. Introduction to Expert systems: Structure probabilistic reasoning, Direct inference Vs. search, Interacting with an E.S. (Example Parallel to prospector or Mycin may be considered.)

4 5

420

6

7 8

A.I. in robotics: a) Introduction to machine vision, Sensing & Digitizing Function, Image processing & analysis. b) Robot intelligence & task planning: Introduction, State space search, Problem reduction, Use of predicate logic, Means ends analysis, Problem solving, Robot learning & task planning Introduction to programming in PROLOG & LISP. Application of AI & ES in various fields of Production Engg., like Scheduling, Process planning, Material Handling , Inventory Control, Quality Control etc. (Discussion of case studies only) PRACTICALS Minimum six Exercises based on.: Programming Exercises in Prolog. .Traveling Salesman & Optimum Path. Depth First. Breadth First: Best First Search. Representing Facts Using Logic. Chain coding for Boundary Representation. AI for Machine Vision etc. Case studies on application of A.I. & E.S. in Production Engg. & Management. RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: Artificial Intelligence – Rich. Knight, TMH A comprehensive guide to A.I. & E.S.: Levin, Drang, Edelson Mc Graw Hill Introduction to Artificial intelligence – Eugene Charniak Addison Wesley, Narosa Publishing . Expert System – Theory & Practice – Jean Loise Ermine PHI Industrial Robotics, Technological, Programming & Applications – Grover, Weiss, Nagel, Odrey McGraw Hill Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision & Intelligence Fu. Gonzalez, Lee McGraw Hill International REFERENCE BOOKS Robotic Technology & Flexible Automation – S.R. Deb TMH Hand Book of Expert system in Manufacturing – Rex Mauss. Jessic Keyes (McGraw Hill). Introduction to Artificial intelligence & Expert System – Patterson PHI A.I. Technology – Applications & Management ICC 1993 CAD/CAM Robotics, Factories of the future. (1992) Vol. II & III Juneja, Pujara, Sagar (TMH).

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5

421

Course Code: 404030 Course Title: Entrepreneurship Development DETAILED SYLLABUS 1 . Definition; scope relevant to Indian conditions, significance of entrepreneurship. Selection of product; basis for selection, sources of information about products, institutions rendering help in selection of products such as SIST, MIDC and other state and central government institutions. 2 Resources to be mobilized for entrepreneurship; decision making processes. Product design and development; market survey, identifying market tastes and requirement of prospective buyers. Co-ordination; concept of co-ordination, entrepreneur as coordinator, producer, employer, middle man; bargaining tactics, co-ordination under uncertainty, co-ordination involving public goods, competition threat to entrepreneur. 3 Market making system : making market, internal and external markets, market information, speculative intermediation, organizing the supply of market making services, delegation; incentives and control, growth and dynamics of firm, entrepreneur as vendor. Resources; materials, persons, machines and methods, selection of equipment and other infrastructure; plant location, vicinity of production and marketing; location and layout of plant to suit local requirements. Financing; Self financing, loans from financing institutions, budgeting, investment for capital equipment, working capital, costing and other related economic aspects. Preparation of project report in a accordance with guidelines laid down by government and controlling institutions, feasibility reports, production feasibility, quality feasibility, market feasibility and economic feasibility; organization and maintaining quality specifications and standards. PRACTICALS Preparation of complete feasibility report on any one product including all formalities in accordance with government and other agencies. Five written Assignments. RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: Developing New Entrepreneurs; Entrepreneurs Development Institute of India, Ahmedabad. Entrepreneurship; Planning to win; Gordon Baty; Taraporewala and Sons. Motivating Economic Achievement; David C McClelland and David G.Winter. Industrial Maharashtra: Facts, Figures and Opportunities; Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation. Management of Small Scale Industry; Vasant Desai; Himalaya Publications. The Seven Business Crises; How to Beat These; V.G.Patel, TMH. Starting and Managing the Small Business; Arthur M. Kuriloff, John M.Hemphill, Jr., and Dougless Cloud; McGraw Hill, 1993.

4 5 6

1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

422

Course Code: 404040 Course Title: Surface Engineering DETAILED SYLLABUS 1 Definition and Scope of Surface Coating : Purpose of surface coating, resistance / wear hardness, corrosion resistance, weather resistance, surface coating for conduction and insulation, aesthetics and surface finish, etc. 2 Pretreatment for Surface Coating: Degreasing, pickling, phosphating, de-scaling, cleaning, etc. 3 Metal Coatings: Characteristics; Operational parameters, application and limitations of galvanizing, sherardising, chromating, zinc and aluminum spraying. Hot dipping, gas spraying, arc spraying, plasma spraying. 4 Electro Plating : Vat, barrel, automatic reverse current plating, equipment, operational parameters and electrolytes for electro plating; productivity comparison between metal coating and electroplating, base metals and plating metals, application and limitations. Ceramic Coating: Characteristics of ceramic coating, types of ceramics used for coating, base materials, methods of ceramic coating, vitreous enameling. Polymer Coating: Characteristics, types of polymers and their relative merits and demerits, base materials for polymer coating, equipment for polymer coating; types of polymer coating, spraying, dipping, fluidized bed, powder spraying; use of extrusion, principles, selection of polymers. Paint Coating: Types of paints, their characteristics and properties, selection of paints; technology of application of paints, brush, spray, electrostatic spray, airless spray, dipping flow coating, rumbling, roller coating, etc. Curing of Paint Coatings: air drying, catalyst drying, convention staving, infrared staving, electron beam curing, UV curing. Miscellaneous Processes: Chemical coloring, blackening, bluing, etc; chromating, chemical polishing, lead sheathing, etc. Newer coating processes and advances in surface technology. PRACTICALS Five assignments based on the above syllabus. Seminar report based on the above syllabus using published work RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: Electroplating and Other Surface Treatments; C.D.Varghese; TMH, 1993. Metal Pretreatment; N.D.Banik; TMH, 1992.

5 6

7

8 9

10 1 2 1 2

423

Course Code: 404050 Course Title: Product Design DETAILED SYLLABUS 1 Introduction To Basic Engineering Design Methods: Difference between Prescriptive and Descriptive Design models. Different models of design process such as Cross, Archer, French, Pahl and Beitzs, Roozenberg & Eakels, and French models of design. 2 Product Design Procedure: Market research, planning and positioning of product, understanding of problem areas and limitations. User group and their background. Analysis of ideas from various angles of design – methodologies to fit it to the user 3 Role Of Creativity In Problem Solving: Vertical and lateral thinking, Brainstorming, Synectic technique, Gorden technique, and Morphological techniques of creativity. 4 Industrial Design: Concept and history of ID. Design and sketching. Project planning and project management, Working in teams; role, responsibility and leadership. Project planning and administration. 5 Product Presentation: Visual communication skills related to products and service. Typeface, layouts, sketches for leaflets and instruction. Exploded view for products and service manuals. 2D & 3D presentation, concept drawings, renderings, sketches, computer generated images. 6 Computer aided design (CAD): Modern CAD techniques, parametric design etc. Digital assembly techniques and data management in team environments. Role of computers for Industrial Design. 7 Rapid Prototyping: Principles, Types of Prototyping, methodology, tools and materials, their applications. 8 Design For Production: Process consideration in design – design for easy assembly – manufacturingmaintenance –convenience – operation and safety PRACTICALS 1 At least Six assignments based on above topics. 2 Analysis and presentation of case studies from research papers. 3 Preparation and presentation of at least one group project with Seminar. RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: 1 Product Design & Manufacture : John R. Lindbeck, P.H.I. Publications. 1995. USA. 2 Product Design and Development : Karl T. Ulrich and Steven Eppinger, Tata Mc Graw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2003, New Delhi. 3 Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly : Geoffrey Boothroyd, Peter Dewhurst and Winston Knight, Marcel Dekker, Inc. 1994. New York. 4 Engineering Design Methods : Nigel Cross. John Wiley and Sons 1994. England. 5 Engineering Design, A systematic approach, : G Pahl and W Beitz, the Design Council, Springer Verlag, 1993, London. 6 CAD/CAM, Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing : Mikell P. Groover and Emory W. Zimmers, Jr., P.H.I., 1998, New Delhi. REFERENCES 1 Product Design: Fundamentals and Methods : N.F.M. Roozenberg and J. Eakels. John Wiley and Sons 1995. England. 2 Industrial Design : Van Doran Herold. Mc Graw-Hill Book Company, 1968, London. 3 Product Design, A practical guide to systematic methods of new product development, by Mike Baxter. Chapman and Hall, 1995. London. 4 Design for Excellence :James G Bralla, Mc Graw-Hill Inc, 1996, USA. 5 CAD/CAM/CIM : P. Radhakrishnan, S. Subramanyan, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1994, New Delhi. 6 Product Design and Development by Dr. G.S. Dangayach, Ashish Dutt Sharma, Paritosh Vardhan Jain, College Book Centre, 2003, Jaipur, India.

424

Course Code:404060 Course Title: Supply Chain Management DETAILED SYLLABUS 1 Introduction : SCM : Changing Business Environment , Need ,Conceptual Model of Supply Chain Management ;Evolution - Traditional and Modern Approach Elements in SCM 2 Demand Management In Supply Chain : Demand Planning and Forecasting, Demand Forecasting methods, Characteristics Measures of Forecast Error , Customer Order Decoupling Point (CODP ) . Industries : Classification Based on Nature of Work , Volume , Manufacturing Environment ,Need for Strategy SCM in The Market: A Paradigm Shift - Collaboration Strategy’ , Demand Flow Strategy , Customer Service Strategy , Technology integration Strategy . CPFR( Collaborative Planning Forecasting Replenishment) : Concept and shift to CPFR , Issues and Facts in Collaboration , Connect Interact, integrate, and Collaborate , CPFR Implementations, Profile of a Collaborative Company. 3 Operations Management In Supply Chain : Introduction: Manufacturing System - Mass, Lean, Agile, Quick Response Manufacturing. Lean Manufacturing – Evolution, Toyota Production System, Basic Idea and Framework, Continuous Flow, Standardized Work, Value Stream, Value added Activities, Pull Production, Integration of Lean Manufacturing and SCM. Mass Customization : Meaning ,Evolution , Drivers of Mass Customization: Technology and Globalization , Characteristics ,Approaches, Methods and Levels of Customization , Information Cycle in mass customization, Benefits and Limitations, Supply Chain Management for Mass Customization . Outsourcing and Core Competencies -Working Models ,Strategic Approach to Outsourcing Control Measures Service Operation Management :Role and Peculiarities of Service industry , Nature and types of Service Sector , Service Operations Optimization , World Class Service ,Technological innovation in Services . Growth and Expansion , Growth and Expansion Strategies ,Franchising, Multinational Development 4 Procurement Management In Supply Chain : Introduction, Purchasing Cycle, Type and classification of Purchases , Inventory Models ,Economic Order Quantity , Practicalities, Safety Stock ,Fixed Order interval System and Fixed Order Quantity System . Material Requirements Planning (MRP) ,and Just in Time (JIT ) Vendor Managed Inventory(VMI) - VMI Business Model , Challenges and Limitations of VMI ,Just in Time (JIT)-II ,Multitier Supplier Partnership Logistics Management Introduction, Evolution of Logistics Elements of Logistics Management. Customer Order Processing, Location Analysis, Inventory Control, Material Handling, Packaging, Transportation , Warehousing , Customer Service Distribution Management . Transportation Management : Distribution Strategies - Cross Docking, Milk Runs , Direct Shipping , Hub and Spoke Model ,Pool Distribution . Packaging for Logistics: Concept, Requirements, Trends of Packaging, Functionality ,Participants ,Transportation Formats, Private Fleet , Modes of transportation , Decision Factors ,Transport Documentation .Service innovation, Inter-modal Transportation Mode ,Containerization ,RFID Third-Party Logistics (TPL/3PL) , Operations of Indian 3PLs Fourth-Party Logistics (4PL)- Key Components including GPS and GIS Technology . Technology Component of 4PL .GPS and GIS Technology Warehousing: Types, Operations, Site Selection Process, Warehouse Layout & Design, Warehouse (Logistics) Automation, Warehouse Management Systems (WMS) ,Third-Party Warehousing , Value-added Warehousing .

5.

6

Information Technology For Supply Chain Management Concept of Information Technology ,Need and IT Tools for Business , IT Application in SCM ,Evolution of SCM Systems .Benefits of Integrated SCM Tools ,Role of Internet in SCM ,Issues with

425

SCM System, Advanced Planning and Scheduling (APS), Data Warehouse, Data Mining. Use of Data Mining Tools in SCM, Demand Management. E-business 7 Performance Measurement And Controls Benchmarking: Introduction and Concept Forms ,Gap Analysis , Key Actions in Benchmarking for Best Practices , SCOR (Supply Chain Operations Reference) Modeling Overview of a Process Reference Model SCOR Model Characteristics SCOR Analysis ,Model, Scope and Structure Concept of Configurability .Balanced Scorecard for SCM . PRACTICALS Five assignments based on the above syllabus. Seminar report based on the above syllabus using published work RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: Supply Chain Management: A.S.Altekar PHI Second Ed.2006. Logistics Management :James Stock and Douglas Lambert. McGraw Hill International Ed.2006. REFERENCE BOOKS Supply Chain Management for Global Competitiveness :Ed.B.S.Sahay McMillan Publication 2000 Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Management :Ed.B.S.Sahay McMillan Publication 2000. Logistics Management: Bowersox TMH 2004

1 2 1 2 1. 2. 3.

426

Course Code: 404070 Course Title: Powder Metallurgy and Ceramics DETAILED SYLLABUS Introduction: Over view of PM method of production of sintered component, applications 1 Powder production methods and Properties: 2

Metal production methods: Atomatization, Mechanical (Milling),Electro deposition, Spray drying. Powder Treatment- Screening, cleaning, annealing, and lubrication. Characterisation of metal powder: Sampling of metal powder, particle size and size distribution. Particle shape analysis, surface area, density and porosity ,apparent density, tap density. Compaction and shaping: Compressibility, green strength of compacted metal powder. Dimensional change of sintered metal compacts. Design limitations. Sintering and consolidation: Consolidation of metal powders- Mechanical and physical fundamentals, shape fundamentals. Press and tooling, sintering atmosphere, production of sintering atmosphere, roll compaction, PM forging, Hot Isostatic and cold Isostatic pressing. Secondary Treatment and Quality Control of PM Materials PM Products and their Applications: Electrical and magnetic applications (Resistance welding electrode, Metal graphite brushes, Tungsten etc),PM porous parts, PM Friction materials ,Metal bearings, Dispersions strengthened materials ,Cutting tool materials- Cemented carbides and tools, cermets . Ceramics- Introduction and major applications, Nature and structure of ceramics, types and general characteristics of ceramics- oxide ceramics, carbides, nitrides, silica, glasses, graphite and diamond. General properties and applications- Mechanical Properties, physical properties (density, thermal conductivity, thermal expansion and its anisotropy) Applications in electrical and electronics including high temperature superconductors, frictional ceramics, refractory. Fabrication methods of ceramics. PRACTICALS At least Six assignments based on above topics. Analysis and presentation of case studies from research papers. Preparation and presentation of at least one group project with Seminar. RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: Fundamentals of Powder Metallurgy :G.S.Upadhaya Cambridge International Science Publishing 1998 Fundamentals Principles of Powder Metallurgy : W.B.Jones Edward Arnold Publishing First Course in Powder Metallurgy: Henry Hauser Chemicals Publishing Company REFERENCES Handbook Of Powder Metallurgy : Hausner H.H and Mal M.K. Second Edition , Chemicals Publishing Company Metals Handbook Vol.7 Powder Metallurgy : ASM 1998

3 4

5 6 7

8 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2

427

1

Course Code: 404080 Introduction to Composites

Course Title :Composite Materials and Technology

Definitions. Typical reinforcements and matrices. Typical properties of fibre composites; mechanical, weight, chemical resistance, etc., compared with "standard" materials. Particular composites. Quality assurance, outline of manufacturing methods. Economic aspects. Dependence of properties on manufacturing route; typical manufacturing defects. Applications. Fibre strengthening; fibre flaws, critical length, critical volume fraction. Natural composites (wood, bone, etc.).

2

Fibres Manufacturing methods. Physical and chemical characteristics. Mechanical and other properties of commonly used fibres - carbon, glass, aramid and other organics, ceramics. Fibre coating to achieve compatibility with matrix. Use of statistical methods to characterize fibre behaviour. Naturally-occurring (cellulose) fibres. Whiskers; typical properties, manufacturing methods.

3

Manufacture of Polymer Matrix Composites Principles of manufacturing processes (open and closed mould), including: hand and spray lay-up, press moulding, injection moulding, resin injection, RRIM, filament winding, pultrusion, centrifugal casting, autoclave, prepreg and other "starting" materials, etc. Machine methods for manufacture of composites .Cutting, drilling and other finishing operations Fibre/Matrix Interface Theories of adhesion; absorption and wetting, inter diffusion, electrostatic, chemical, mechanical. Measurement of interface strength. Characterisation of particular systems; carbon fibre/epoxy, glass fibre/polyester, etc. Influence of interface on mechanical properties of composite.

4

5

Plastic Matrix Systems Thermoplastic and thermosetting resins; curing reactions, mechanical properties, glass transition, degradation. Carbon fibre/epoxy, carbon fibre/PEEK, glass fibre/polyester. Short fibre reinforced Nylon 6-6, polypropylene and polycarbonate. Glass and Ceramic Matrix Systems Glasses and ceramics; hot pressing and sintering, vapour phase transport, mechanical and electrical properties. Carbon fibre/carbon. Silicon carbide fibre/lithium alumino silicate glass. Silicon carbide whiskers in silicon nitride and in alumina. Silicon carbide fibre in silicon carbide. Alumina fibres in lithium aluminosilicate glass. Metal Matrix Systems Metals and alloys; solidification processes, diffusion bonding, mechanical properties. Boron fibre reinforced aluminium and titanium alloys. Alumina fibre reinforced aluminium alloys. Silicon carbide fibre reinforced aluminium alloy. Particulate systems.

6

7

Engineering properties Stiffness and Strength Geometrical aspects, volume and weight fraction. Unidirectional continuous fibre systems; stiffness and strength. Discontinuous fibres. Short fibre systems; length and orientation distributions. Woven reinforcements. Hybrids. Failure theories for unidirectional lamina. Micro mechanics theories. Mechanical Testing

428

Determination of stiffness and strengths of unidirectional composites; tension, compression, flexure and shear. Typical standard methods. Use of photo elastic, holographic and other methods of strain measurement.

8

Joining Advantages and disadvantages of adhesively bonded and mechanically fastened joints. Details of typical bonding procedures. Typical strengths; test procedures. Stress analyses. Repair.

9

Design and Economics Design philosophy and procedures ("systems approach"). Simple design studies (pressure vessels, torsion bar, etc.); factors of safety. Use of computer programs and other methods. Case studies to illustrate reasons for failure, design process, materials selection, manufacturing method. (Inductrial lectures). Economic aspects of using composites.

10

Environmental Effects Influence of moisture and other contaminants on fibre, matrix an interface. Effect on mechanical and other properties. stress corrosion cracking. Influence of high and low temperatures. Prediction of long-term behaviour.

1 2 3 1 2 1

PRACTICALS At least Six assignments based on above topics. Analysis and presentation of case studies from research papers. Preparation and presentation of at least one group project with Seminar. RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS: Introduction to Composite Materials Design: Ever J Barbero Taylor and Francis Mechanics Of Composite Materials: Robert Jones Second Edition 1999 Taylor and Francis REFERENCE BOOKS Composites and Processing Methods: Ed.Venkatesan Narosa Publications

429

BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY IN TEXTILE TECHNOLOGY

430

S. Y. B. TECH. ( TEXTILE TECHNOLOGY) - SEM. III & IV

Course Name:-T - 01 Statistics I Measures of Central Tendency (mean, median & mode). Measures of dispersion (range, standard deviation, quartiles, deciles, coefficient of variation – C.V.% Calculations involved in finding C.V.%. Distribution (Bimodal, Poisson & Normal), skewed distribution. Testing of Hypothesis – Large sample (mean, difference in mean, proportions, correlation coefficient) Small Sample – ‘t’ test, test of significance & significance level. Chi-Square distribution & test. F-test and its application. Correlation Regression. Time series & Index Numbers. Probability – single variable Analysis of Variance Sampling – Simple – random sampling References: No. Reference 1. Mathematical Statistics – Kapoor & Saxena, S. Chand 2. Textile Testing – Booth; Newnes,Butterworths, London 3. Textile Mathematics – Booth, The Textile Institute Manchester, 1975. 4. An outline of statistical methods for use in the Textile Industry, Brearley A. , Cox D. R. Wool Ind. research Association, Torridon headingleylane, leeds. 5. Statistics, Tippet L. H. S., Oxford university Press. 6. Statistical Method in research & Production Davies O. L., Oliver & Boyd Pub. 7. Statistical Calculations for Beginners- Chambers E. G., Cambridge University Press, 1998 8. Examples in statistics- H.C. Saxena, Atma Ram & Sons, Delhi, 1961.

431

Course Name:-T - 02 Textile Physics – I Introduction to textile fibres, classification, identification, Cotton morphology, structure & growth mechanism, factors affecting quality of fibres, trash content, neps, fibre quality, staple length, grading & commercial assessment, HVI AFIS (Advanced Fibre Information Service). Other natural fibres–wool, silk, jute: origin, structure, identification, applications and similar information about regenerated and synthetic fibres Principles and method of Sampling need for sampling, significance of statistics while analyzing test results. Moisture in fibres, moisture content, relative and absolute humidity, regain & commercial regain, humidity relations of textiles, hysterisis, estimation of moisture-moisture meter, Standard and Testing atmospheric conditions, effect of moisture content on properties of materials. Fibre length and its variability measurement, cumulative frequency diagram, fibre length distribution, weight distribution curve, Diff. Mehtods of fibre length measurement and associated parameters, Fibre swelling, Hysteresis curve, intermediate curve, Sorption ratio, Limited swelling, Measurement of molecular explanation regain and probable curves, Shirley moisture meter, Heat of Sorption – measurement & technical significance. Fibre fineness, its technical significance, various parameters of fineness and its measurements Maturity of cotton fibre & its significance, maturity ratio, maturity coefficient, degree of thickening, methods of measurement, air-flow, NaOH, dye method, polarizing light method. Tensile testing of fibres, stress-strain relation (different fibres), tensile testing of single fibre, bundle strength-testing at various gauge lengths and analysis of results of single fibre and bundle of fibre. Yarn dimensions and numbering – testing methods and sampling. Standard atmospheric conditions and its significance while testing yarns & fabrics. Moisture control during testing Yarn twist, diameter and count relation, twist factor, optimum twist, effect of twist on fabric properties, twist measurement methods, H.S.C.(Highest Spinnable Count) Term Work : The term work marks are based on satisfactory completion of the journals based on the experiments performed during practicals. Practicals: 1. Study of microscope and fibre identification. 2. Mean fibre length (oiled plate method) and other parameters of length variation. 3. Convolutions and Ribbon width. 4. Baer Sorter and fibre length measurement. 5. Shirley Analyser- Cleaning efficiency of Blowroom & Card- Raw cotton, Lap & Sliver testing. 6. Weight per unit length of fibres. 7. Maximum & minimum width of cotton fibre – microscopically. 8. Crimp of fibre – Wool. 9. Maturity of cotton by NaoH method. 11.Shirley moisture meter. 10. Regain studies in fibres

432

11. Swelling of fibers T - 03 Textile Chemistry_I Class : B. Tech. (Textiles) Contacts per Week (in Hours) Lecturers 2 Practical/ Tutorials 3 Semester III Evaluation Weightage in % ESE 60 MST 20 TA 20

Textile Fibres: Classification of textile fibres according to their origin and constitution, chemistry, properties and applications of principle natural fibres including cotton, jute, flax, wool, silk. Fine structure of cotton, wool & silk. ***Chemical principles involved in production of man-made fibres including rayons, polyesters, polyamides, acrylic and polyolefins and their properties. Chemical modifications of synthetic fibres. Preparatory processes : Principles of singeing, desizing, scouring and bleaching of cotton materials, scouring of wool, degumming of silk, preparatory sequences for synthetic fibrefabric and their common blends. Process control in the above. Mercerising : Chemistry & Technology of mercersing yarn & fabric. Property changes and testing of mercerized material. Chemistry of Carbohydrates, Proteins and their applications in Textiles Term Work : The term work marks are based on satisfactory completion of the journals based on the experiments performed & samples produced during practicals. Practicals : 1. Determination of size content of grey sample. 2. Desizing of a grey cotton fabric by acid. 3. Single stage scouring, bleaching & optical brightner treatment. 4. Enzyme desizing. 5. Hydrogen Peroxide bleaching & optical brightner treatment. 6. Estimation of copper number of a degraded cellulosic material. 7. To determine carboxyl content of a degraded cellulosic material. 8. To find Barium number of mercerized cotton material. 9. To find blend composition of polyester / cotton blend. 10. Identification of fibres. References: No. Reference 1. Technology of Textile Processing - Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. Mumbai 2. Textile Fibres - Vol.I, Dr. V. A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. 1990, Mumbai 3. Chemistry of Dyes & Principles of Dyeing – Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. ,1996 , Mumbai

433

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Technology of Bleaching & Mercerising - Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. ,1990 , Mumbai Technology of Printing – Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. ,1990 , Mumbai Technology of Dyeing – Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. ,1988 , Mumbai Technology of Finishing – Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. ,1999 , Mumbai Production of Synthetic Fibres – A.A. Vaidya, Prentice Hall, 1988, New Delhi Textile Scouring & Bleaching – Trotman E.R., B.I. Pub., 1993, New Delhi Technology of Bleaching & Dyeing of Textile Fibres – R. R. Chakravarty & S.S. Trivedi, VolI Part I & II, 1979, Mahajan Brothers, Ahmedabad. Dyeing of Textile Fibres & Chemical Technology – E.R. Trotman, B.I. Pub.1994, New Delhi Technology & Management – H.A. Shah, N.S.Saraiya & P.C.Gupta, Textile Association Pub., 1982, Mumbai Fibre Science – S.P. Mishra & B.K. Keshavan, S.S.M. Inst. Of Text. Technology, Tamilnadu, 1985 An Introduction to Textile Finishing – J.T. Marsh, Asia Pub. House, 1959, Mumbai Dyeing of Wool, Silk & Man-made Fibres – L.R. Prayag, Dharwar, 1983 Textile Printing – Edited by L.W.C. Miles, SDC Pub., U.K., 1981

434

Course Name:-T - 04 Yarn manufacture – I Fibres : Classification of man-made and natural fibres, idea of staple fibre, continuous filament yarn. Important properties of textile fibres. Cotton cultivation : Climatic and soil conditions, Methods of cultivation and picking of cotton. Hand picking and mechanical picking methods, their merits & de-merits. Chief varieties of cotton grown Ginning and baling : Objects of ginning, Different methods and their limitations. Saw Gin & roller gin method. Baling Process, Standard bale sizes and weights of bales from important cotton growing countries. Different impurities or trash packed with cottons in bales. Blowroom : Mixing, opening, cleaning in blow room, Objects and methods of modern mixing – Concept of Blenders, Bale Pluckers etc. Initial preparatory machinery in Blowroom.. Seed traps, de-dusting units Modern Concepts in Blowroom : Use of CVT type of beaters. Sequence of machinery and opening & cleaning points for various cottons in Blowroom, according to trash content. Cleaning efficiency of Blowroom and idea of lap regularity and lap rejection, Modern developments in Blowroom machinery. Aerodynamic Cleaning: Aerodynamic separation of lint & trash, methods used to avoid their recombination, Carding : Objects of Carding, General Construction & working. Web doffing & Coiling action: Cylinder-Flat region, effect of speeds and settings, various types of flat-tops and their use. Stationary grinding surfaces, influence of cylinder undercasing. Influence of frot & back plate. Transfer of fibres, cylinder-doffer region, factors affecting transfer, transfer-efficiency. Web transferring from doffer, concept of cross-rol verga, off-setting and web crushing. Types of Card wires: On Cylinder, Doffer and Licker-in, their maintenance, grinding and other operations like mounting of wires Card Settings: Influence on the quality and waste extracted. Modern developments: In licker-in region – hi-dome, fibre retriever, comb bar, deflector plate, double licker-in etc. Drawing: Construction and working of a Draw Frame. Modern drafting: Various types of roller arrangement, weighting, new cots available, and other accessories. Irregularity due to drafting wave. Introduction to Shirley drafting. Tutorial: All numerical problems related to theoretical topics will be explained and given for solving as home work which should be submitted at the end of the term. About 50 problems are to be solved. Term Work : It consists of - writing of experiments done in Spinning practical. In the format/; [a]object, [b]sketches and names of parts, [c] function of each part [d]conclusion as fulfillment of the object. The term work is based on satisfactory completion and submission of journal and/or samples. Practicals: 1. Study of Roller & Saw Gin, Different drives & Types of cotton.
2. Study of Hopper Bale Breaker / Hopper Feeder/Porcupine – Construction, flow of

material gearing, settings, speed and production calculations.

435

3. Study of Step Cleaner/Axi Flow - Construction, flow of material gearing, settings,

speed and production calculations.
4. Study of Single Scutcher - Construction, flow of material gearing, settings, speed

and production calculations, Shirley & Condenser cages & Calender rollers, Lap forming mechanism 5. Study of general passage of cotton through Carding machine, importance of various parts involved and their importance in the process. Calculations of speeds, drafts and production. Study of Licker-in zone, function of various cleaning agents around licker-in, their settings and effect on extraction of trash at licker-in. 6. Study of main carding action, construction of flats, and their bearing surface, importance of cylinder-flat setting, actual setting procedure, influence of this setting on the quality of the material processed, important organs around cylinder in the vicinity of flats, flat tops and their function, cylinder undercasing and its setting. Stripping & Grinding 7. Transfer of fibres from cylinder, cylinder-doffer region, setting procedure, factors influencing the transfer of fibres on to doffer, Condensation of card web and its subsequent coiling in the form of web. Influence of tension drafts involved between doffer and final coiling. Card waste and its effect on actual and calculated draft, methods for controlling waste at card. 8. Study of general passage of cotton through Draw Frame. Study of gearing plan, calculations of speeds, draft, production, various constants and change places involved and their importance. 9. Roller diameters and roller settings – Calculations of settings on graduated draft distribution bases and carrying out full setting procedure. 10. Study of features of Shirley draft distribution, features, setting procedure, weighting arrangement etc. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Reference ‘Opening, Cleaning & Picking’ – Szaloki Z.S., The Institute of Textile Technology, 1976, Charlottesville, Virginia (U.S.A.) ‘Blowrrom’ – BTRA Silver Jubilee Monogram, 1981, Mumbai - 400086 “Elements of Raw Cotton & Blowroom” Khare A.R., Sai Book Publication, Mumbai “Carding” – Manual of Cotton Spinning , Byerley W.G., Buckley J.T. etal, Textile Institute publication, 1965, Manchester (U.K.) ‘Cotton Spinning’ – Thornley T. Ernest Benn Ltd. publication, 1927, Bouverie House, Fl.St., London “Spinning Tablets Vol I to V” – Nerurkar, Grover, Owalekar,, Sood, Textile Association (India), Mumbai – 400028 ‘Cotton Drawing & Roving’ and ‘Cotton Combing’ – Merill G.R., 364-Vernum Ave., Lowell, Mass. 1992 “Elements of Carding & Drawing” - Khare A.R., Sai Book Publication, Mumbai “Manual of Cotton Spinning – Carding” – Byerley W.G., Buckley J.T. etal, Textile Institute publication, 1965, Manchester (U.K.) ‘Cotton Spinning’ – Thornley T. Ernest Benn Ltd. publication, 1927, Bouverie House, Fl.St., London “Spinning Tablets Vol I to V” – Nerurkar, Grover, Owalekar,, Sood, Textile Association (India), Mumbai – 400028

436

Course Name:-T - 05 Fabric Manufacture – I Introduction to different methods of Fabric formation. Outline of weaving process. Classification of loom motions. Different types of shedding, heald reversing motions, Negative and positive shedding tappets. Designing of tappets. Picking & checking mechanisms. Over-pick & under-pick. Beat-up mechanism. Eccentricity of sley. Take-up, various types and their calculations and negative let-off mechanism. Side weft fork motion, warp protector mechanism, loose reed and fast reed, brake motion, temple devices, oscillating back-rest. Anti-crack motion. Timing and setting of plain nonautomatic loom. Introduction to weaving Preparatory. Types of Supply and end packages. Different Systems of warp winding. Warp winding Package characteristics Package defects – causes and remedies Mechanisms on warp winding machines. Tensioners, Clearers Specifications of certain non-automatic winding machines. Features of modern winding machines. Factors limiting the speed of winding machines. Beam warping & sectional warping. Creels, Drive, Head-stock etc. Systems of weft preparations. Automatic pirn winding, Unifil loom winder, Box loader etc. Tutorial: All numerical problems related to theoretical topics will be explained and given for solving as home work which should be submitted at the end of the term. About 50 problems are to be solved. Term Work : It consists of - writing of experiments done in weaving practicals. In the format/; [a]object, [b]sketches and names of parts, [c] function of each part [d]conclusion as fulfillment of the object. The term work is based on satisfactory completion and submission of journal and/or samples. Practicals : 1. General study of plain power loom., shedding ,picking ,let-off etc 2. Study of shedding motion and setting of shedding motion. 3. Study and setting of over-pick and underpick motion.,timing,picking force, setting of picking bowl, picking shaft, picking stick, spindle, picker. 4. Study and setting of beating motion and shuttle box.. 5. Study and setting of loose reed and fast reed motion., setting of duck bill heater, organ handle, bow-spring, knock off dagger. 6. Study and setting of side weft fork and let-off motion 7. Study of 5-wheel and 7 – wheel take-up motion with calculations and continuous take-up motion. 8. Study of cheese and cone winding machines. Passage of yarn. 437

9. Calculations of winding machines. Productions of machines. Study of pirn winding machines. 10. Study and calculations of sectional warping machines. 11. Practice for running the loom (with warp & weft mending). NOTE: Practical exercises on dismantling, refitting and setting of cheese and cone winders, beam warpers, sectional warpers, pirn winders including automatic machines. Practice in operating these machines, in piecing breaks and doffing full packages. Dismantling, refitting and setting exercises on plain tappet looms. Practice in running a loom, in piecing ends, drawing-in ends and mending weft breaks.

References: No. Reference 1. “Conversion of Yarn to Fabric” – Lord. P.R. & Mohamed M.H. – Merrow Technical Library, 1982, Durham (U.K.) 2. “Yarn Preparation” – SenGupta R., Popular Prakashan 1963, Mumbai - 400038 3. “Winding, Warping & Sizing” – BTRA Silver Jubilee monograph series, 1963, Mumbai – 400086 4. “Modern preparation and weaving machinery” - Ormerod A., Butterworth publication. 5 “Winding and Warping” – Talukdar M.K.

438

Course Name:-T - 06 Cloth Structure-I Interlacement of warp & weft and its representation on point paper. Different types of drafts and peg-plans. Construction of plain, twill and sateen weaves. Ornamentation of plain weave. Commercial plain - woven fabrics, their constructions & characteristics. Twist and twill interaction. Construction & characteristics of derivatives of plain and twill. Diamond and diaper weaves. Honeycomb, Huck-a-back & Mock-leno weaves. Colour and weave effects for stripes, checks and simple figured designs. Crepe weaves, their construction & characteristics. Rib and cord structures like Bedford cord and Pique. Extra thread figuring fabrics: Extra Warp & Extra Weft. Combination weaves their construction and characteristics.

439

B. TECH. (TEXTILE TECHNOLOGY) - SEM. IV

Course Name :-T- 07 Statistics II Probability – More than one cell, Sampling – Stratified, Systematic sampling techniques. Statistical Quality Control and drawing of control charts. Analysis of Variance – One-way and two-way classification. Experimental design – Basic Experimental Designs – CRD, RBD, LSD, Single Missing value Multiple and partial co-relation regression

440

Course Name :-T - 08 Textile Chemistry II Dyeing : Elementary ideas about the mechanism of dyeing. Principles of dyeing cotton with various classes of dyes such as direct, reactive, vat, sulphur, solubilised vat and azoics. Dyeing of protein fibres with various classes of dyes. Principles of dyeing man-made fibres such as rayons, polyesters, polyamines & modacrylics and their common blends. Dyeing machinery such as package dyeing, jigger, padding mangle and jet dyeing machine. Evaluation of colour fastness to various agencies. Printing : Principles of working of flat bed and rotary screen printing machines, Transfer printing, Steamers, curing chambers, driers used in various processes. Styles of printing, print-paste ingredients. Direct style printing of cotton and synthetic fibres-fabric printing with reactives, vats pigments, dispersed dyes etc. Finishing : Conventional finishing sequences used for cotton fabrics including starching, calendaring, sanforising etc. Functional finishes for various fibre/fabrics including setting, crease recovery finishes, water repellency, flame retardency, anti-static etc. Eco-friendly concepts in wet-processing. Term Work : The term work marks are based on satisfactory completion of the journals based on the experiments performed & samples produced during practicals. Practicals: 1. Dyeing of cotton fabric with Direct Dyes. 2. Dyeing of cotton fabric with Reactive Dyes. 3. Dyeing of cotton fabric with Vat Dyes. 4. Dyeing of cotton fabric with Azoic Dyes. 5. Dyeing of cotton fabric with Solubilised Vat Colours. 6. Dyeing of cotton fabric with Sulphur Colours. 7. Dyeing of Wool with Acid Dyes. 8. Dyeing of Wool with 1:2 metal comp. 9. Dyeing of Polyester with Disperse Dyes. 10. Identification of Class of Dye on Dyed Samples. References: No. Reference 1. Technology of Textile Processing - Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. Mumbai 2. Textile Fibres - Vol.I, Dr. V. A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. 1990, Mumbai 3. Chemistry of Dyes & Principles of Dyeing – Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. , 1996 , Mumbai 4. Technology of Bleaching & Mercerising - Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. , 1990 , Mumbai 5. Technology of Printing – Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. ,1990 , Mumbai 6. Technology of Dyeing – Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. ,1988 , Mumbai

441

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Technology of Finishing – Dr. V.A. Shenai, Sevak Pub. ,1999 , Mumbai Production of Synthetic Fibres – A.A. Vaidya, Prentice Hall, 1988, New Delhi Textile Scouring & Bleaching – Trotman E.R., B.I. Pub., 1993, New Delhi Technology of Bleaching & Dyeing of Textile Fibres – R. R. Chakravarty & S.S. Trivedi, VolI Part I & II, 1979, Mahajan Brothers, Ahmedabad. Dyeing of Textile Fibres & Chemical Technology – E.R. Trotman, B.I. Pub.1994, New Delhi Technology & Management – H.A. Shah, N.S.Saraiya & P.C.Gupta, Textile Association Pub., 1982, Mumbai Fibre Science – S.P. Mishra & B.K. Keshavan, S.S.M. Inst. Of Text. Technology, Tamilnadu, 1985 An Introduction to Textile Finishing – J.T. Marsh, Asia Pub. House, 1959, Mumbai Dyeing of Wool, Silk & Man-made Fibres – L.R. Prayag, Dharwar, 1983

442

Course Name :-T - 09 Textile Physics II Forces in various direction, bending of fibres, flexural rigidity, torsional rigidity, influence of fibre cross-sectional shape, shear modulus, shear strength, experimental methods, breaking twist Static electricity, static charge generation, effect in textile, method of measurement & remedies. Dielectric and electric properties of fibres – general theories. Fabric dimensions, properties and testing, sampling, EPI, PPI, measurement of fabric weight per unit area, thickness measurement, crimp & crimp meter, effect of crimp on fabric properties, compressibility of fabric. Cloth cover factor, air permeability – their interrelation & measurement, fabric bending and stiffness, crease recovery, handle, drape, abrasion, pilling, serviceability, wear, Thermal properties, TIV & its measurement. Tensile testing by CRT, CRL CRE principles – machines involved for yarns & fabrics. Influence of strain rate on tensile strength of textile material – work of rupture, modulus, single thread strength and elongation, analysis of results. Fabric strip-test, crimp interchange, fabric assistance, grab test, ballistic test. Analysis of results: correlation between single thread, lea & ballistic test results. Fabric tensile testing results. Fabric tearing strength and bursting strength : Different Instruments, Working principle & analysis of results. Shape and Dimensional stability – Effect of laundering, relaxation shrinkage, thermal shrinkage, skewness, hygral expansion Colorfastness tests – Fastness to crocking (crockmeter), laundering and bleaching, drycleaning, perspiration (perspirometer), water, light, atmospheric contaminants, sublimation test Appearance retention – soiling, staining Safety Aspects and protective textiles – flammability testing, properties affecting flammability Garment Testing - Seam strength tests

Term Work : The term work marks are based on satisfactory completion of the journals based on the experiments performed during practicals.

Practicals: 1. Count by lea method and lea CSP 2. Tex number and work of rupture of yarn. 3. Single thread strength (Good Brand). 4. Cloth breaking strength. 5. Work of rupture of fabric. 6. Bursting strength of fabric.

443

7. EPI, PPI, cloth thickness and cover factor, porosity determination. 8. Crease recovery. 9. Tearing strength. 10. Crimp % in fabric. 11. Bending length & modulus.

444

Course Name:-T - 10 Yarn Manufacture II Combing : Objects of Combing process. Need for preparatory process for combing – hook direction, pre-comb draft & doublings. Modern concept of lap preparation. Construction and working of Sliver Lap, Ribbon Lap, Super Lap & Lap Former. Construction and working of a Nasmith Comber: Drive to different parts – cylinder, nippers, lap & feed rollers, detaching roller, cradle, top comb, drafting rollers in draw box. Setting and timing of different parts in Comber – time diagram. Various setting involved in changing waste (noil) percentage on comber. Level of waste for different end uses. Different faults & their remedies. Difference in yarn quality of a carded and combed yarn. Speed Frame : Objects of speed frame passages. Construction and working of a speed frame. Introduction to top arm drafting. Construction of Spindles & Flyers for twisting and winding – Flyer & bobbin leading. Contour of cone drum and its construction. Roller settings. Principles of differential motion & building motion. Swing motion. Change Places. Faults & Remedies. Calculations related to speeds, drafts and production in combing and speed frame, calculation of noil percentage in combing, calculations of twist, differential speeds in speed frame. Importance and calculations of various constants and corresponding change wheels. Tutorial: All numerical problems related to theoretical topics will be explained and given for solving as home work which should be submitted at the end of the term. About 50 problems are to be solved. Practicals : 1. General Study of Sliver Lap Machine – Construction, material flow through machine, gearing, setting and speed/production calculations. Stop motions, lap forming . 2. General study of Ribbon Lap Machine - Construction, material flow through machine, gearing, setting and speed/production calculations. Stop motions, lap forming . 3. General study of a comber – name of the parts, flow of material, index cycle. 4. Comber – gearing calculations – feed per nip, nips per min., draft, production, waste%, head to head variation. 5. Comber settings – nipper crank, nipper pivot, step gauge, leaf gauge, feed roller, top comb, plain segment & quadrant setting. 6. Study of combing mechanisms – driving of different parts. Construction of half lap, top comb, nippers & study of stop motions. 7. General study of Fly Frame – Construction, material flow through machine, gearing, setting, speed calculation, twist per inch, production. Truing of rollers and roller stand alignment. 8. Study of Swing motion, stop motions on fly frame, change places, dimensions of staff & gauge. 9. Study of various types of Differential motions. 10. Study of Building mechanism on Fly Frame and related important settings. 11. Study of fly frame creel, hank meter; spindle gauging, traverse mechanism and bobbin defects. References:

445

1. 2. 3.

“Elements of – ‘Raw Cotton & Blowroom’, ‘Carding & Drawing’, ‘Combing’ and ‘Ring Frame & Doubling’ – Khare A.R., Sai Book Centre publication, 1999-2000, Mumbai 400078 ‘Spun Yarn Technology’ – Oxtoby Eric, Butterworths publication, 1987, London (U.K.) “Manual of Cotton Spinning – Draw Frame, Combing & Fly Frame” – Charnley F., Textile Institute publication, 1964, Manchester (U.K.)

446

Course Name:-T - 11 Fabric Manufacture II Sizing: Importance of sizing process. Sizing materials. Selection of a sizing formulae for a particular application such as suiting, shirting, saris, etc. Size pick-up and warp breakage rate. Size recipe for different fabric sorts and yarn such as spun, filament, cotton blended etc. Size mixing equipments including pressure cookers, turbo mixer, homogenisers etc. Machine features: Creel, size box, Drying zone and Beaming unit. Different methods of drying. Factors affecting the drying capacity of a sizing machine. Factors affecting size pick-up. Head stock, lease rods, comb, cut marking motion, slow motion, beam driving mechanism with reference to Two Cylinder and Multi-Cylinder machines and Air Drying. Classification of dobbies. Mechanisms of dobby with reference to Keighley Dobby. Left hand and right hand Keighley dobby and their methods of pegging, cross border dobbies, timing and setting of dobby parts. Cam dobbies, paper cam dobbies, positive dobbies, Rotary dobbies, three-shed dobby Significance of weft patterning system. Comparison of various box motion systems available. Advantages and disadvantages of Drop Box and Circular Box motion. Mechanism of Cowburn and Peck Drop Box motion, card saving device.Pattern chain design using card saving device. Mechanisms of Pick & Pick and Pick at Will. Weft mixing motions. Tutorial: All numerical problems related to theoretical topics will be explained and given for solving as home work which should be submitted at the end of the term. About 30 problems are to be solved. Practicals: 1. General study of various dobbies. 2. Study, Timing and setting of Keighley dobby. 3. Study of Staubly cam dobby with pick finding. 4. Study of cross-border dobbies (two/three cylinder). 5. Study of sizing – headstock, gearing, beam drive, leasing, tape marking. 6. Study of sizing, size box, creel leasing. 7. Pegging of dobby lattice & weaving of dobby sample-pique. 8. Study of positive Zang Dobby. 9. Study of Dobby and of weft mixing mechanism on Northrop dobby. 10. Study of pick finding devices. 11. Study of Cowburn & Peck drop box timing & setting. 12. Study of Drop Box on Zang loom. References: No. Reference 1. “The technology of Warp Sizing” – Smith J.B., Columbine Press, 1964, London (U.K.) 2. “Warp Sizing” – Seydel P.V., Textile Institute, Smith publication, 1958, Atlanta/Georgia (USA) 3. “Sizing” – Talukdar M.K. & Ajgaokar D.B. 4. Fancy Weaving – K. T. Aswani 5. Mechanism of Weaving – Dr. M. K. Talukdar 6. “The Mechanism of Weaving” – Fox T.W., Universal Book Corpn., 1977, Mumbai – 400002

447

7. 8.

“Principles of Weaving” – Marks R. & Robinson ATC, Textile Institute publication, 1986, Manchester (U.K.) “Conversion of Yarn to Fabric” – Lord. P.R. & Mohamed M.H. – Merrow Technical Library, 1982, Durham (U.K.)

448

Course Name:-T - 12 Cloth Structure II Backed fabrics. Double cloths including 4 and 6 colours. Structure of Belts, Elastic Tapes. Gauzes and Leno fabrics. Warp and weft pile (all Varieties). Face to face weaving structures. Carpets- Brussels, Wilton, and Axminister Quality particulars for above. Lappet and swivel fabrics. Damask and Brocade.

449

T. Y. B. TECH. (TEXTILE TECHNOLOGY) - SEM. V Course Name:-T - 13: FIBRE CHARACTERISATION The structural requirements of fibre forming polymers, molecular architecture, fine structure of fibres, Models for fibre structure, concept of order in polymers, crystallinity and orientation, importance of amorphous phase in fibres, molecular structure and Tg. Density and porosity of fibres. Methods of investigation of fibre structure - X-ray diffraction, interpretation of patterns, estimation of crystalline/amorphous ratio, study of orientation factor. Introduction to electron microscopy (transmission, scanning) image formation, magnifying and resolving power, sample preparation, applications. Optical properties of fibres - refractive indices and birefringence, their origin and method of measurement, colours due to interference of polarized light, effect of crystallinity and orientation on birefringence and its measurement; Diachroism; Lustre and its measurement. Mechanical properties of fibres, relation to amorphous, crystalline content, effect of variability, peirce theory for composite specimen, effect of gauge length, effect of time for break on strength, Meredith’s formula, Viscoelasticity, creep and stress relaxation, elastic recovery. Forces in various directions, bending of fibres, flexural rigidity, torsional rigidity, influence of fibre shape, shear modulus, shear strength and experimental method, breaking twist. Static electricity, static charge generation, effect in textiles, methods of measurement & remedies. Dielectric and electrical properties of fibres. Fibre friction and measurement. Non-Newtonian Viscosity of liquids, transition of polymers, crystallization and glass transition, crystalliability of polymers, packing of molecules, flexibility of molecular chains. PRACTICALS: 1) Stelometer (0 and 3 mm gauge length) 2) Pressley fibre bundle strength tester. 3) Fibre rigidity modulus. 4) Digital Fibrograph. 5) Projection drawing of different fibres and their diameter measurement. 6) Cross sectional study of different fibres. 7) Single fibre strength on Instron tensile tester. 8) Maturity of cotton by polarising microscope. 9) WIRA fineness tester. 10) Moisture measurement. 11) Planimeter and circularity disc co-efficient. 12) Micro twist determination of helical angle and diameter of yarn. No. Reference 1. Morton W.E. & Hearle J.W.S. - ‘Physical Properties of Textile Fibres’, Textile Institute, Manchester, U.K. 2. O’Connor R.T. – ‘Instrumental Analysis of cotton cellulose & modified cotton cellulose’, Macal Dekka, Inc., N.Y., 1972 3. Billmeyer F.W.& Wiley J.R.A. – ‘Text Book of Polymer Science’, Interscience Publication, N.Y., Third Ed., 1984 4. Meredith R. – ‘Physical Methods of investigating Textiles’, Textile Book Pub., Interscience Publishers, N.Y., 1959 5. Hearle J.W.S. & Peters R.H. – ‘Fibre Structure’, Butterworth Pub., 1963 6. Gowarikar V.R., Vishwanathan N.V. & Sreedhar Layadev – ‘Polymer Science’, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 1993

450

Course Name:-T - 14: ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES Electrical: D.C.generators - classification - working characteristics and uses. D.C.motors classification - working - characteristics and uses. A.C.Generator (Alternator) Production of single phase - 3 phase A.C., measurement of active and reactive power in A.C. circuits. Two wattmeter method of power measurement. Principle and working of a single phase and three phase transformer, regulation, efficiency and all day efficiency. Principle and working of 3 phase induction motor, single phase A.C. motors fractional horse power motors and synchronous motors. Short description of simple measuring instruments such as P.M.M.C. moving iron and hot wire instruments. Electronics: Brief description of semi-conductors. Half wave, Full wave rectifiers and bridge rectifiers. Zener diode as regulator. Theory of transistors – input / output characteristics, biasing methods of transistors, transistors as amplifier, oscillator, and crystal controlled oscillator. Non-sinusoidal oscillators. Multi-vibrators – Bistable, Mono-stable and Astable. Timer circuits (Delayed ON, Delayed OFF, ON-OFF timer etc.), Phase lock loop circuits. Special semi-conductor devices – varactor, zener diode, multi-element semi-conductor device – UJT, FET & MOSFET. Electronic test instruments: Use of multimeter for various measurements, cathode-ray oscilloscope – operation and uses for various purposes in general and Textile Industry in particular. Theory of special semi-conductor devices like SCR, SUS, SBS, DIAC & TRIAC. Speed control of various types of motors. Photo-electric effect and different types of photoelectric cells and their working principles. Term Work: The term work marks are based on satisfactory completion of the journals based on the experiments performed & samples produced during practical. PRACTICALS: 1. Half wave and Full wave rectifier circuits. 2. Transistor characteristics. 3. Logic gates. 4. Timer circuits. 5. D.C. motor speed control. 6. Study the use of CRO, Signal Generator, Multimeter etc. and their uses in Textile Industry. 7. SCR - firing circuit using UJT. 8. SCR – firing circuit using Phase shifting circuit. No. Reference 1. Mehta V.K., Principal of Electronics, S.Chanda & Co. New Delhi,110055 ,2001 2. Malveno Albert P. & Leach D. P., Digital Principal & Application Tata Mc-Grow Hill pub. New Delhi ,1974 3. Gaikawad R.A., Operantial amplifier & linear integrated Circuits, Prentice Hall of India Ltd. New Delhi- 110001,1991 4. B.L.Theraja, Fundamentals of Electrical & Electronic Engineering, S.Chand & Co.

451

Course Name:-T - 15: YARN MANUFACTURE - III Ring Frame: Objects of ring frame. Construction and working of a ring frame. Details of creel, lappet, traveller (c-shape, elliptical, spiv, and clip), ring (conventional, antiwedge, SU rings etc.) and spindle on ring frame. Pneumafil (bonda) collection. Building mechanism on ring frame - chain building chainless, modern package building. Roving / Cop / Combination build. Winding and binding coils. Setting a frame for a particular count. Twist factors for different counts, strength of the yarn and twist factor, strength for different counts. Change Places, wrapping procedure. Forces acting on the traveller and yarn balloon in ring spinning. Resultant of the forces acting on the traveller. Variation in yarn tension during spinning. Different types of drives to ring frame. Improvements in various parts and features of modern ring frame for high speed spinning. Twist flow in ring spinning - Effect of various parameters. Yarn and Package faults. Linking ring frame to winding (requirements for winding). Doubling: Preparation for Doubling. Objects of doubling, assembly winding machine – its construction & working, stop motion. Construction of a Doubler, dry & wet doubling, different methods of threading the yarn through doubler, Construction of ring, traveler and spindles for doubler. Two for One twister. Defects in doubling process, and doubled yarn. Different types of doubled & cabled yarns used in Industry. Fancy yarns and fancy doubler.

Term Work: Writing of experiments done in Spinning practical. In the format : [a]object, [b]sketches and names of parts, [c] function of each part [d]conclusion as fulfilment of the object. The term work is based on satisfactory completion and submission of journal and/or samples done during practical. Assignments: The assignment marks are based on collection of technical literature on topics assigned to the batches, submission and presentation of the data in the form of seminar. PRACTICALS: 1. General study of a ring frame – construction, material flow through machine, gearing, settings and speed calculation. Calculations of twist, spindle speed, front roller speed and production. 2. Study of ring rail levelling, spindle gauging, thread wire setting, measurement of staff, gauge, ring dia. Study of spinning geometry of ring frame. 3. Study of building mechanism on ring frame. Change Places. Procedure for count changing. 4. Study of various types of drafting systems on ring frame. Study of spindles, pneumafil. 5. Setting of top arm, height setting, use of eccentricity meter and pressure gauge for top arm. 6. General study of Doubling Frame – passage, building mechanism, threading methods, dray & wet doubling. Gearing calculations. 7. Study of a Fancy Doubler – threading, slub forming mechanism & production of fancy yarn. 8. Study of various types of rings & traveller, cots and aprons. 9. Production of yarn from a given roving – deciding the draft & twist involved. Piecing practice. 452

No. References 1 Elements of – ‘Raw Cotton & Blowroom’, ‘Carding & Drawing’, ‘Combing’ and ‘Ring Frame & Doubling’ – Khare A.R., Sai Book Centre publication, 1999-2000, Mumbai - 400078 2 ‘Spun Yarn Technology’ – Oxtoby Eric, Butterworth’s publication, 1987, London (U.K.) 3 ‘Textile Yarn, Technology, Structure & Application’ – Goswami B.C., Martindale J.G., Scardino F.L., Wiley Interscience publication, 1977, U.S.A. 4 “Manual of Cotton Spinning” – The textile Institute & Butterworth Co.Ltd., 1965, London (U.K.) 5. ‘A Practical guide to Ring Frame’- Klein W., Manual of Textile Technology, Vol., The Textile Institute, Manchester, London, U.K., 1990 6. ‘Two For One Twister’ – H.V.S.Murthy, Tecoya Publication.

453

Course Name:-T – 16: FABRIC MANUFACTURE – III Jacquards: Introduction, classification, Mechanisms of ordinary jacquards e.g. Single Lift Single Cylinder, Double Lift Single Cylinder, Double Lift Double Cylinder, Open Shed (V-shed and parallel), Fine pitch jacquards (Vincenzi & Verdol). Principle and working of special jacquards: Cross-Border jacquards, Jacquards for Double Cloth, Leno and Terry-Pile structures, Harness ties and card cutting instructions, mounting of jacquards, casting out. Principles of working of inverted hooks, scale harness, sectional harness, working comber boards, jacquard harness with healds. Modern Jacquards e.g. High Speed Jacquard, Three-Shed position jacquards. Electronically controlled jacquards. Automatic Weaving: Pre-requisites for successful installation of automatic looms, Essential features, Types and their comparison. Weft feeler and pirn changing mechanism with reference to Northrop, Cimco, Ruti-B and Ruti-C type automatic looms. Temple cutters and shuttle eye cutter. Electrical and electronic weft feeler. Three try motion. Mechanism of shuttle changing looms – non-stop changing type. Warp stop motions of Northrop, Cimco, Ruti-B and Ruti-C looms. Electrical warp stop motion, Automatic let-off, multi-shuttle weft replenishment of Northrop, Sakamoto looms. Centre weft fork, center selvedge motion Term Work: Writing of experiments done in Weaving practical. In the format/; [a]object, [b]sketches and names of parts, [c] function of each part [d]conclusion as fulfilment of the object. The term work is based on satisfactory completion and submission of journal and/or samples done during practical. Assignments: The assignment marks are based on collection of technical literature on topics assigned to the batches, submission and presentation of the data in the form of seminar. Practical: 1. Study of Single Lift Single Cylinder Jacquard. 2. Study of Double Lift Single Cylinder & Double Cylinder Jacquard. 3. Study of Cross-Border Jacquard. 4. Study of All-Over Jacquard and Card cutting & Lacing for the same. 5. Study of Double Cloth & Leno Jacquard. 6. Practice of Drawing-in on Jacquard loom and Card cutting. 7. General study of auto loom & Study of feelers & three try motion. 8. Study of warp stop motion on various looms and setting of Ruti warp stop motion. 9. Battery setting on Cimmco loom (cop changing). 10. Study of let-off motion & setting of Roper’s let-off. 11. Study of Vicker Stafford shuttle change loom. 12. Study of let-off motion on Northrop, Ruti & Cimmco. 13. Study of multicolour cop-changing loom.

454

No. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Reference Weaving machine, Mechanisms & Management – Talukdar, Sriramalu & Ajgaonkar, Mahajan Brothers Pvt. Ltd., India, 1998 Principles of Weaving – R. Marks & A. T. C. Robinson, Textile Institute, Manchester, 1976 Fancy Weaving – K.T.Aswani Automatic Weaving – A.S.Wagh

455

Course Name:-T – 17: COMPUTER AIDED TEXTILE DESIGNS AND COLOUR The elements and principles of design. Construction of sketch designs. Bases of textile design - square, rectangular, diamond, ogee, drop and satin bases. Comparison of units with respect to repeats. Aesthetics and colour. Light theory of colour. Mixtures of coloured lights. Pigment theory of colour and its comparison with light theory. Mixtures of coloured pigments - Primary, Secondary, Tertiary and quaternary colours. Attributes of colour - Hue, value and chroma. Modification of colour. Complementary or after image of colour. Young - Helmholtz theory. The chromatic circle. Colours in combination. Kinds of contrast monochromatic contrast and polychromatic contrasts. Effects of contrast - successive contrast and simultaneous contrast, contrast of hue and contrast of value. Principles of colour harmony chromatic, Achromatic, analogous, complementary and High-key colour scheme. Parameters in obtaining good colour harmony. Colours in the context of fabric printing. Factors influencing apparent change of colour in woven and printed designs. Methods of composing jacquard designs by geometric arrangement, by the conventional treatment of natural or artificial forms, by the adaptation or reproduction of earlier designs. Conditions to be observed in designing figured fabrics. Introduction to CAD/CAM system for textile designing: objectives, various available software packages and advantages. Working with Corel draw: understanding Corel photo paint and Corel draw. Demonstration of various tools. Making of a sari design on Corel draw. Working with Photoshop: understanding the software, working with various tools, filters, rendering etc. modifying sari designs on Photoshop Term Work: The term work marks are based on satisfactory completion of the journals based on the experiments performed & samples produced during practical. The work carried during the term should be submitted in a port folio. PRACTICALS: 1. Free hand sketching, arrangement of motifs on different bases. 2. Practice in colour mixing - Light theory, pigment theory charts. Colour modification chart. 3. Preparation of painted designs for stripe, check, spotted and diaper fabrics. 4. Construction of artist design, point paper design for all over jacquard selection of colour and weaves. 5. Preparation of colour harmony charts. 6. Working with Corel draw & Making of a sari design on Corel draw. 7. Working with Photoshop & Editing Designs No. 1. 2. 3. 4. Reference Manual, Corel draw 9 Manual, Adobe Photoshop 7 Decora- Ornamental motifs of the World, Kenshiro Takami Textile Design & Colour Vol.-I & II , Watson

456

Course Name:-T - 18: MECHANICS OF TEXTILE MACHINERY Links, pairs. Velocity & acceleration diagrams of linkage of four bar & slider crank mechanism. Relative velocity and instantaneous method. Application for the sley driving mechanism. Cone & collar friction; types of clutches, power absorbed and transmitted in clutches of above types. Types of brakes and study of brakes, types of dynamometers. Selection of flat belts, V-belts and ropes; H.P. transmitted by gears. Types of gears and its application. Pulley drives. Types of Cams & Followers; Cam profiles for linear, constant velocity & S.H.M. constant acceleration. Study of picking and shedding tappets. Static and Dynamic balancing of machine parts and its application in textile machines; balancing of reciprocating parts. Longitudinal, transverse and torsional vibrations, causes and remedies. Anti frictional bearings. Inertia, Fly wheel. Practical: 1. Identification of different types of linkage mechanisms in textile machinery. 2. Study of clutches in textile machinery. 3. Study of brakes in textile machinery. 4. Study of belts in textile machinery. 5. Study of Cams in textile machinery. 6. Study of picking and shedding tappets. 7. Study of Anti frictional bearings in textile machinery. 8. Kinematics and dynamics of Conventional shuttle loom sley. 9. Kinematics and dynamics of Unconventional loom sley 10. Drives to spindles of Ring spinning machine. No. References: 1. Mechanics for Textile Students –W.A.Hantoon, Textile Institute, Butterworth, 1960. 2. Textile Mechanics – K. Slater, Textile Institute, Manchester, 1977. 3. Textile Mechanics – W.M.Taggart 4. An Introduction to Textile Mechanisms – P. Grosberg, Ernest Benn Ltd., London, 1968

457

Course Name ;-T- 19: TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION & PRESENTATION SKILLS Communication: Communication in a business organization. Report Writing: Types, qualities, defining objectives and scope, organizing and interpreting information, individual and group reports, formal and informal reports. Technical Writing: Definition, importance, qualities, choosing words, sentences & paragraph structures, steps in technical writing. Technical Proposals: Presentation Skills: Group Discussion: Assignments: Based on above topics. Oral: 1. Participation in group discussion in class 2. Presenting a project. No. References: 1. Lesiker & Petit ‘Report Writing for Business’ McGraw Hill. 2. Meenakshi Raman, Sharma Sangeetha ‘Technical Communication – Principles & Practices’ Oxford University Press.

458

B. TECH. (TEXTILE TECHNOLOGY) - SEM. VI Course Name:- T - 20: DESIGN OF TEXTILE STRUCTURES Yarn: Structure, Inter-relation between fibre and yarn properties, FQI, YQI, stress-strain relation of yarns under steady stress, limiting stress, repeated and impact stresses. Causes and effects of yarn irregularity. Interpretation of results of irregularity tests, PMD and CV. Determination of periodical variation (use of irregularity spectrum, spectrogram) and location of sources of periodic variation, interpretation of yarn and fabric faults. Yarn hairiness-measurement methods and hairiness index. Elements of yarn geometry geometry of helix and application to idealized yarn structure, yarn diameter, packing of yarn, specific volume and density; elements of fibre migration. Fabrics: Transmission properties of fabrics, thermal transmission, factor affecting warmth, emmissivity, feel (hot/ cold) Al-am bata testing method. Moisture transmission, moisture permeability, water repellency, and water resistance of fabric, mechanics of wetting, fabric structure and repellency. Crease - Wrinkle - mechanics behind wrinkle resistance of fabric, compressibility and resilience. Light reflection properties of fabrics and yarns, Lustre measurement. Fabric hand - new methods (Kawabata HES, FAST etc). Comfort properties, its concept and assessment. Introduction to Pierce geometry for plain weave, crimp interchange, jamming phenomenon, practical applications, fabric reformation under tension. Introduction to bending and buckling of fabric, shear and drape of fabric (descriptive). PRACTICALS: 1) Cloth rubbing (both motions). 2) Cloth manufacturing calculation. 3) Spectrometer. 4) a) Uster evenness tester. & b) Single yarn testing at different gauge length. 5) Water repellancy of fabric. 6) Air permeability of fabric. 7) Uster dynamate. 8) Water permeability of fabric. 9) Fabric tensile strength on (instron). 10) Thermal Insulation value. 11) Yarn hairiness by microscopic method. 12) Spray test and pressure head test for fabric. 13) Yarn friction recorder. 14) Drape meter. No. Reference 1. Goswami B.S., Martindale J.G. & Scardino F.L. – ‘Textile YarnsTechnology, Structure & Applications’, Wiley Interscience Pub., N.Y., 1977 2. Hearle J.W.S., Grosberg P. & Backer S. – ‘Structural Mechanics of Fibres, Yarns & Fabrics’, Wiley Interscience Pub., N.Y., 1969 3. Kaswell E.R. – ‘Textile Fibres, Yarns & Fabrics’, Reinhold Pub., N.Y., 1953 4. Grover E.B. & Hamby D.S. – ‘Handbook of Testing & Quality Control’, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1988 5. Topic-wise related research Papers.

459

T - 21: YARN MANUFACTURE – IV BLENDING: Objectives, measures and selection of blend constituents, Mechanics of blending and the various considerations during processing of blends at blowroom, card, drawframe, flyframe and ringframe. Properties of ring spun blend yarns, effect of blend ratios and compositions on tensile properties. LONG STAPLE SPINNING: The role of manmade fibres in the fibre market. Suitability of fibres other than cotton for modern methods of fabric manufacturing. Preparation and spinning of fibres other than cotton - wool, jute, silk, linen etc. Comparative study of the varying sequences of machines in relation to that used for cotton. MODERN SPINNING: Different types of break spinning. Concept of open-end spinning. Rotor spinning machines - study of construction and operation. Properties of rotor spun yarns. Unconventional spinning processes like Dref, Air jet, self twisted yarn, Bobtex, faciated spinning. Critical evaluation of modern automated spinning machinery: Assignments: The assignment marks are based on collection of technical literature on topics assigned to the batches, submission and presentation of the data in the form of seminar. Term Work : The term work marks are based on satisfactory completion of the journals based on the experiments performed & samples produced during practical. Practical: 1. Study of High Production Card (Platt’s). 2. Calculation of Beater Cleaning Efficiency, lint loss & trash content in droppings. 3. Calculation of Card Cleaning Efficiency. 4. Analysis of droppings under beater & waste in carding. 5. Study of features of high speed comber. 6. Running comber and calculation of improvement in combing. 7. Calculation of fractionating efficiency (2 turns.). 8. Observation of piecing wave. Verification of piecing wave through Uster. 9. Experiment for calculation of comber waste & head to head variation. 10. Measurement of spinning geometry on Flyer Frame for front & back row and studies of types of flyer constructions. 11. study of rotor spinning machine 12. study of DREF No. Reference 1. Klein W. – ‘New Spinning Systems’, Vol., The Textile Institute, Manchester, London, U.K., 1990 2. Spinning of Man-made fibres and blends on cotton system – By K R Salhotra. 3. Textile Yarns – Technology, Structure and Applications – By B C Goswami, J C 4. 5. Martindale, F L Scardino. Spun Yarn Technology – By Eric Oxtoby. Worsted – Pitman’s Common Commodities and Industries – By Alan Brearly, Sir

Issac Pitman and Sons Ltd. London. 6. Jute – Fibre to Yarn , Heywood – By R R Atkinson. Course Name:- T - 22 : FABRIC MANUFACTURE - IV

460

Unconventional weaving machines: Method of weft insertion – merits and demerits of each type. Limitations of conventional looms, requisites for successful installations of unconventional looms, Selvedges on unconventional looms. Sulzer – Projectile loom, picking mechanism and sley drive, Sequence of weft insertion, weft patterning systems. Rapier Method of weft insertion – Gabler & Dewas systems. Rapier drive for both rigid and flexible rapiers. Two phase weaving on Rapier, Interference of rapier head with warp threads, weft selector system. Air Jet – sequence of weft insertion, confuser, profile reed and relay jet systems, timing of air-jet looms, requirement of air. Water Jet – Requirement of water, sequence of weft insertion, timing on water jet looms. Multiphase looms – Advantages & Problems, warp-way multiphase weaving machines, weft-way multiphase weaving. Circular weaving machines. Weaving of Synthetics: Winding of man-made filament yarn – machine parameters, process parameters, conditioning, problems with winding of man-made filament yarns, package faults. Warping of man-made yarns filaments – package type, modifications in creel, conditioning, process parameters, warping beam faults. Sizing of man-made filament yarns – Sizing of zero-twist flat filament yarns, sizing materials, size pick-up, equipment, creel, processing parameters, good sizing practices, single end sizing systems, problems in sizing filaments. Weft preparation of man-made filaments for conventional looms. Choice of machines, conditioning, processing parameters, profile of pirn. Weft preparation of man-made filament yarn for unconventional looms, choice of supply package, various types of texturised yarn packages. Weaving of man-made filament and blended yarns on conventional looms &unconventional looms. Fabric defects in manmade filament woven fabrics. Techno-economics of filament weaving. Slit film yarns, & weaving of slit yarn fabrics. Fancy weaving mechanism; double plush, lappet, swivel, leno & terry. Terry structures, embroidery & braided textiles. Assignments: The students in batches will be given the assignments on technical work related to the subjects. Along with the submission of the written script, this has to be presented batch-wise. Practical: 1. Study of Maxbo & Harish Air-Jet loom. 2. Study of Rapier loom. 3. Winding of filament yarns. 4. Warping of filament yarns. 5. Sizing of filament yarns. 6. Weaving of filament yarns 7. Study of features of a silk loom. 8. Making of polypropylene non-woven fabrics. 9. Studies of properties of fabrics made in workshop (or) Weaving of fabric samples and their studies. 10. Weaving of a fabric of standard particulars.

No.

Reference

461

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Talukdar, Sriramulu & Ajgaonkar – ‘Weaving Machines Mechanism & Management, Mahajan Publishers, Ahmedabad – 380015 Talukdar M.K. & Ajgaonkar D.B. – ‘Sizing’, Mahajan Publishers, Ahmedabad – 380015 K.T.Aswani – Fancy Weaving Robinson & Marks – ‘Principles of Weaving’, Textile Institute Publication, U.K. 1986 A. Ormerod – ‘Modern Preparation and Weaving Machinery’, Butterworth Publication, U.K. NCUTE – Filament Weaving

462

Course Name:-T - 23: ELECTRONIC CONTROLS AND MICROPROCESSOR APPLICATIONS Fundamentals of Binary number system, D/A and A/D conversion techniques, accuracy, resolution. Basic ideas of process control, different types of controls – Open loop, closed loop and servomechanism & error detector. Control loop and its components. Instruments required for measurement of typical variables required for process control such as speed, temperature, pressure, humidity, level, flow etc. Characteristics of ON-OFF, proportional, Integral and derivative control systems. Working description of some textile process control such as Blowroom feed control, carding machine-sliver variation control, card control. Ring spinning-yarn count control, weft finish detector, warp breakage detector, edge feeler, weft straighter etc. Photo cell and its applications in Textile Industry. Electronic counting techniques in Textile machines. Electronic speed control devices for textile machines. Transducer and its applications as sensing device. Pressure switches etc. Micro-processor control on modern machines. Micro-processor application in the textile industry machines such as Blowroom, spinning machines, winding machines, processing and finishing machines. Assignments: Based on the syllabus, the students will be given topics, which they will have to refer to the technical magazines. The final submission will be in the form of write-up and/or presentation. Assignment marks are based on this. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Reference Mittal G.K. – ‘Industrial Electronics’, Khanna Pub., New Delhi, 110006. 1998 Bhattacharya S.K. Chatarjee S. – ‘Industrial Electronics & Controls’, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2000 Singh S.K. – ‘Industrial Instrumentation & Control’, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 1987 Kadge R.K. – ‘Power & Industrial Electronics’, S.Chanda & Co.Ltd., New Delhi – 110055, 2001 Doebelin Garnet O. – ‘Measurement Systems, Applications & Designs’, McGrawHill KOGAKUSHA Ltd., 1975 Cooper William David – ‘Electronic Instrumentation & Measuring Techniques’, Prentice Hall Pub., New Delhi – 110001, 1976 NCUTE – Electronics in Textiles.

463

Course Name:- T - 24: HUMAN FACTOR IN MANAGEMENT Organizational behavior, meaning, concepts, approaches Communication – upwards, downwards and lateral communication, informal communication, barriers to effective communication. Motivation – Maslow’s need hierarchy, Maintenance-motivation theory. McClelland’s achievement theory, role of money, performance appraisal. Employee attitudes, attitude and job performance, attitude and personality, leadership, traits styles, situational theories. Interpersonal behavior, conflict, conflict resolution, negotiations, assertive behavior, transactional analysis. Group dynamics, groups, teams, committees, group decision making techniques. Stress, causes, stress management, counseling. Term Work : Presentation/Assignments by students on related topics. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. References: Davis Keith – “Organisational Behaviour”, Luthans – “Organisational Behaviour”, Mullins – “Organisational Behaviour”, Robbins – “Organisational Behaviour”,

464

Course Name:-T - 25: NUMERICAL TECHNIQUES Interpolation and extrapolation: Inter polation and finite differences. Newton forward and backward interpolation formulae. Lagrange’s interpolation formula and Newton’s divided difference formula for unequal intervals, use of Stirling formula and Bessel’s formula for interpolation. Numerical differentiation and integration. Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rd rule, Simpson’s 3/8th rule. Difference equations and its applications No. 1. 2. References: S. S. Shastry - Introductory methods of numerical analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Private Ltd.,1995 T.Veerarajan & J.Ramachandran -Theory and Problems in Numerical Methods.

465

Course Name:-T - 26: KNITTING Properties of Knitted fabrics, comparision with woven, Principles of machines and mechanisms used in weft knitting and warp knitting with particular reference to production of single jersey rib and interlock structures on weft knitting machines and tricot and raschel machines in warp knitting. Study of Cotton's patent straight bar machine. Developments in warp and weft knitting machines. Study of basic structures in weft knitting like plain, rib, interlock and purl structures. Basic structures in warp knitting like pillar, tricot, satin, velvette, atlas and locknit fabrics. Calculations with respect to productions in warp and weft knitting machines. Yarns used in warp and weft knitting. Term Work : Analysis of the warp and weft knit fabrics mentioned above. No. References : 1. Knitting Technology - Spencer 2. Knitting technology - Ajgaonkar

466

SCHEME OF INSTRUCTION AND EXAMINATION FOR
B. TECH. (TEXTILE TECHNOLOGY) - SEM. VII Semester VII

Sr. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Course Code 305130 305140 305045 305150 305160 305170

Contact Cr Evaluation ESE Hours weightage % (Theory) Hrs L P T TW MS ESE A T Process Control in Spinning & 3 2 5 8 15 15 70 3
Weaving Garment Manufacturing Fabric Manufacture – V Industrial Engineering Technical Textiles Technology Of Man-Made Fibre & Filament 4 3 3 4 4 0 3 0 0 0

Course Title

4 6 3 4 4

8 9 6 8 8

15 15 15 15 15

15 15 15 15 15

70 70 70 70 70

3 3 3 3 3

TOTAL
Semester VIII

21 05

29 47

Sr. No. 1 2 3 4 5

Course Code 305030 305046 305180 305190

Course Title

Yarn Manufacture – V Fabric Manufacture – VI Textile Management & Costing Textile Mill Planning Organisation ELECTIVE

Contact Cr Evaluation Hours weightage % L P T TW MS ESE A T 4 3 7 11 15 15 70 4 3 7 11 15 15 70 4 0 4 8 15 15 70 & 4 0 4 8 15 15 70
4 0

ESE (Theory) Hrs 3 3 3 3 3

TOTAL
Electives:

20 6

4 8 15 26 46

15

70

Sr. No. 1 2 3 4 5

Course Code 405010 405020 405030 405040 405050

Contact Cr Evaluation ESE Hours weightage % (Theory) Hrs L P T TW MS ESE A T Indian Textile Industry & Marketing 4 0 4 8 15 15 70 3 Textile composites 4 0 4 8 15 15 70 3
Textile export management Textile Machinery Maintenance Man-made Fibre Dyeing & Finishing 4 4 0 0

Course Title

4 4

8 8

15 15

15 15

70 70

3 3

467

Project: Sr. Course No. Code 1

Course Title Project

L

P

T

405900

Cr TW MS ESE ESE A T (Theory) Hrs 8 See note below

• •

The project is evaluated in two stages. The first stage evaluation shall be done at the end of pre-final semester by a Committee of Institute faculty (at least two faculty members including project guide). The Project Guide along with an external examiner shall do the second stage evaluation at the end of final semester. The first stage assessment shall have 25% weightage. Another 25% weightage shall be given for the initiative, interest, effort and sincerity shown by the student during the entire project work. The second stage assessment shall have 50% weightage. The first stage evaluation is to be carried out after a minimum of 12 weeks of work. The project report should be submitted in the prescribed format at least three weeks prior to the end of final semester or by the prescribed date and second stage assessment can be done in the last week of semester. The project shall carry 08 credits. The grade for the project shall be declared only after second stage evaluation.

468

305130 Process Control in Spinning & Weaving Process control in Spinning: Steps involved in the evolution of a system for process control in spinning. The scope, the key variables, norms,standards, collection of data , its interpretation and corrective action for the same. Evaluation and control of raw material quality by the traditional methods of cotton selection and cost control. LP approach for cotton mixing. The applications of AFIS and HVI. Importance of yarn realization , norms and its judgement Assessing the performance of a Blowroom and card with reference to the cleaning efficiency, control of waste, neps and fibre rupture. Locating and improving machines with substandard performance. The importance of lap preparation and the technological considerations involved. Evaluation of comber performance by the optimum waste level, fractionating and combing efficiency. Study of the influence of the various factors on combing performance. Control of count at various stages during processing, computation of within bobbin and between bobbin lea count variations. Measurement and analysis of productivity, means to improve it by control of the end breaks in spinning. Yarn faults and package defects. Maintenance schedules for all spinning machinery, on line and off line monitoring systems. Weaving: Approach, methodology and scope for process control in weaving. Process control in winding- Knot quality, efficient removal of yarn faults and the control of productivity. Process control in warping- Control of end breaks, tension levels, quality and the productivity in warping. Process control in sizing- Choice and the control of size pick-up, yarn stretch and moisture in sized yarns. Improving weavability of the sized yarn and the control of productivity and size losses. Process control in pirn winding- Minimising end breaks and stoppages. Improving the build of the pirn and the productivity. Control of productivity in loomshed- Control of loom speed, efficiency and loom stops. Calculations on loom efficiency. Control of fabric quality in weaving and inspection. Hard waste control at all stages in weaving. PRACTICALS: 1. Spinning of carded yarn sample & testing of yarn properties. (3 turns) 2. Study of effect of break draft in Ring frame on yarn properties. (2 turns) 3. Study of effect of twist multiplier on yarn properties. (2 turns.) 4. Study of effect of traveller weight on yarn properties. (2 turns) 5. Sizing of the carded yarn sample. 6. Weaving of sized carded yarn sample. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Reference Process control in Spinning by A R Garde, T A Subramanian, ATIRA Publication. Monograph series in spinning, BTRA Publication Quality Control in spinning, SITRA Publication End breaks in Ring Spinning, ATIRA Publication. Yarn Hairiness by A Barella, Textile Progress, Vol 13 No 1 , Textile Institute. Process control in weaving by M C Paliwaland P D Kimothi, ATIRA Publication.

469

305140 Garment Manufacturing Introduction to Garment manufacturing: Major steps in manufacturing a garment Different types of machines & associated work aids used for woven & knitted garment manufacturing. Basic operations in garment manufacturing: Cutting: objectives,Planning, drawing and reproduction of marker. Spreading of the fabric to form a lay. Methods of spreading. The cutting operation. Methods of cutting. Sewing : The properties of seam- seam types, stitch types, sewing machine feed mechanism, sewing machine needles, sewing threads. Thread properties and seam performance, testing for sewability and tailorability. Sewing problems and quality control. Sewing machinery, mechanisms and accessories, Alternative Methods of Joining Material, Production Evaluation, Inspection & Care labeling of Apparel. Fashion Designing: Elements and Principles of fashion designing. Role of Fashion Designer, Individual figure analysis. Pattern Industry standards, Principles of proposition, Balance, Unity and Rhythm, Sources of Inspiration. The workroom terms and definitions: pattern making tools, layout preparation, industrial forms, paper pattern, figure analysis, measuring techniques. Methods for drafting the basic pattern: Principles, the bodice draft, the skirt draft, the sleeve draft, collar, fashioning, neck finishes, sleeve insertion, hemlines, waist lines, contour of garments. PRACTICALS: 1. Making of basic patterns on paper (5 Turns) 2. Understanding the mechanisms of sewing machine (2 turns) 3. Sewing practices (4 turns) 4. Stitching a bodies. (4 turn) No. 1. 2. Reference The technology of clothing and Manufacturing – Harold Care and Barbara Latham, Oxford Blackwell Scientific Publication, London,1994 Inside Fashion Design – Sharon Lee Tate, Harper Collins Publication, U.K., 1989

470

305045 Fabric Manufacture – V Nonwovens : Definition, Difference between woven, Knitted, Tufted, Paper and nonwovens classification. Advantages & limitations of nonwovens. Market applications: Disposables, semi-durables & durables. Nonwoven product range. Selection of Fibre or polymer for nonwovens as per requirements of the end products. Popular fibres used for nonwovens & Fibre properties. Web formation process - fibre to fabric: carded, air laid, wet laid. Web Laying process, Random Laid, cross laid webs. Web formation process - polymer to fabric: spunbond, meltblown, SMS (Spunbond + Meltblown + Spunbond). Types of bonding, Chemical, Mechanical and thermal bonding. Spun lace system. Finishes to nonwovens: Converting nonwoven fabric to end products: Slitting, Sheet cutting, Die stamping, Perforations for easy tearing, Sewing, gluing, ultrasonic seaming. Molding, thermoforming, Corrugating, Adding elastic, Fitting into hardware. Braiding: Two dimensional braiding: flat and circular, diamond braid, regular braid, Hercules braid. Tri axial braid. Three dimensional braiding Narrow fabrics: Weaving machines for narrow fabrics. Ribbon, tapes & webbings manufacturing techniques. Tufting: Definition of tufting. Tufting process. Different types of tufting elements. Final products of tufting.
PRACTICALS:

1. Manufacturing of Nonwovens of Cotton, Polyester, Polypropylene fibres. 2. Analysis & Testing of Nonwovens. 3. Product Development of Nonwovens. No. 1. 2. Reference Non-Woven Bonded Fabrics – J. Lunenschloss- W. Albrecht. Development of Nonwovens from Cellulosic Fibre - BTRA

471

305150 Industrial Engineering L.P.P General understanding of linear programming. Formulation and Solution of LPP As applied to Textile Industry. GameTheory: Introduction, Terminology, Two Person Zero sum games and their solution. Transportation :General understanding of transportation problems, solution by north-west corner rule and vogue’s approximations. application to Textile Industry. PERT, CPM, Network analysis. Productivity: Definition, Productivity Index as used in spinning, weaving .Relation between machine allocation and machine efficiency. Problems on machine allocation in spinning and weaving. No. 1. 2. Reference Quantitative Techniques- L.C. Zamb Operation Research -Taha

472

305160 Technical Textiles Definition of "technical textiles"; survey of technical textiles and their applications. Classification and market of technical textiles. , Difference between technical textiles and other textiles. Method of production – weaving, knitting, non-wovens etc. Geo-textiles – Introduction, characteristics, physical & mechanical properties, Fibres and fabrics used in geo-textiles, biodegradable, geo-Membranes, Functions –filtration, reinforcement, drainage, road & railway work, erosion control. Medical Textiles – Characteristics of materials used, Classification – bandages, dressings, surgical stitching threads, implants, Characteristic behaviour of an implant fibres/fabrics. Filtrations: Principles of wet and dry filtrations. Characteristic properties of fibres and fabrics in filtration. Protective clothing: Defence Textiles, Thermal protection: Ballistic protection. Protection against micro organisms, chemicals and pesticides. Protection from electromagnetic radiation and static hazards. Conveyor Belts – Composition of belt, use of textile components-fibre and/or fabric, single ply and multi-ply, V-belt and toothed belt. Ropes and Cordages: application oriented structure and production of ropes, cordages and twines. Tyre cords Automotive Textiles: Fibres used for automotive applications – upholstery, carpeting, pre-formed parts, type, safety devices, filters and engine compartment items. Brief description for the manufacture and application of these devices or parts.

No. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Reference Industrial Textiles – Jarmila Seclova (Editor). Wellingdn Sears Handbook of Industrial Textiles. Encyclopaedia of Man-Made Textiles. Geo-Textiles – NWM John.

473

305170 Technology Of Man-Made Fibre & Filament General discussion on classification & synthesis of various polymers Polymerization : types & reactions : chain growth, step growth, condensation ,addition,free radical,anionic,cationic polymerization. Techniques of polymerization : Bulk, solution, suspension, emulsion, interfacial polymerization, Commercial routes to produce Man-made Fibre raw materials e.g. Hexamethylene diamine, caprolactum, TPA, MEG, ACN etc. General discussion on spinning of man-made fibres. Melt,dry,Wet spinning : stages , speed, product –comparison, Man made fibres vs. synthetics vs .regenerated fibres, Role of various additives used in spinning dope , spinning bath for manmades. Spinning : PET :Esterification & polycondensation, DMT ,TPA routes, Melt spinning variables, structure formation during spinning, quenching & related parameters, study of catalyst used & bi-products, Industrial process for chip forming- extrusion-spin finish application- staple fibre formation, LOY,MOY,POY,HOY, High speed spinning. Melt spinning of poly-olefines. Melt spinning of polyamides. Dry spinning of acrylics & modacrylics. Fibres from addition polymers- PE, PP, PVA, PVC, Elastomeric fibres Rayon fibres : Detail study of manufacturing of regenerated cellulosic fibre with specification of raw materials, chemical principle involved in regeneration & modification, special additives, Process flow chart- significance of the steps, Coagulation & Coagulation bath composition & variables, HWM fibres, Lyocell, Cellulose acetate fibres, introduction to raw materials, reactions, manufacturing process. Introduction to manufactured fibres of High performance: Industrial, Non-conventional application. Comparison of properties of commercial fibres. Post Spinning Operation : Drawing: Necking, variables, machines, draw warping Texturing : Types, special features, uses , properties of yarn & fabric made of it. Flase twist texturing: Process, Feed material, machines. Draw texturing, air jet texturing: Process variables & yarn properties. Gear crimping, Stuffer box crimping, Knit-de-knit, Knife edge crimping. Twisting & mingling. Tow to top conversion. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Reference A Text Book of Man-made Fibre Science & Technology – Mishra S.P., New Age International Publ., New Delhi – 100002 Manufactured fibre technology – V. B. Gupta and V. K. Kothari, Chapman & Hall Publications, 1997. Manmade fibre technology (Vol. 1-3) by Mark Atlas & Cernia Textile Yarns by B. C. Goswami, J. G. Martindale & Seardino. Fundamentals of fibre formation by A. Ziabick Text book of polymer science by Billmeyer & Wiley.

474

305035 Yarn Manufacture – V Basic concepts of carding. Theories of carding action- Classical, Strang’s and Kaufman’s theory. Fibre shedding and fibre transfer efficiency. Auto levelling at card and draw frame. High Drafting systems – drafting wave, machine imperfections, roller nip movement, roller speed variation and roller slip – their causes and effect on drafted material, their measurement. Development of high drafting system – weighting on roller, top arm. Function of different elements of high drafting. Technological design changes in modern draw frame and speed frames. Ring spinning frame – forces acting on traveler, Resultant of the forces acting on the traveller, Yarn Ballooning - variation in the tension during yarn ballooning, balloon collapse, balloon control rings, moving lappets, suppressed balloon spinning. Different types of drives to ring frame, Features of modern ring frame, improvements in various parts, high speed spinning, variable speed spinning and maximum speed limitation. Yarn irregularity – causes of irregularity in drafted material, Use of Uster Imperfection Indicator, Use of Classimat. Economics of spinning – yarn strength, twist variation & yarn appearance, thicknesscompressibility and twist, end breakage rate-causes and remedies, its effect on production. Factors influencing spinning condition – ring dia., traveler wear, power, balloon height, spindle speed etc. Twist contraction & fine count limit. Twist Flow in spinning – Various parameters controlling twist flow Fibre Migration – fibre displacement in drawn & spun yarn, fibre, yarn and process factor. Yarn formation, Structure and properties- Conventional ring spun, Compact spinning, Open end rotor and friction spinning, Self twist and wrap and Twist-less spinning systems. PRACTICALS: 1. Spinning of Combed yarn samples. (6 turns) 2. Spinning of polyester/cotton blended yarn samples. (3 turns) 3. Study of effect of doubling twist direction (s/z & z/z) on doubled yarn properties.(2 turns) 4. Study of effect of doubling twist ratio on doubled yarn properties.(2 turns) No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Reference Advances in Technology of yarn production, R Chattopadhyay, NCUTE Publication. Book of papers on Spinning-Blowroom and Carding, edited by Dr A A Gupte, Dr H V S Murthy, Prof G W Joshi, NCUTE. Manual of cotton spinning.Vol 4 / Part One, The principles of roller drafting by G A R Foster. Eric Oxtoby – ‘Spun Yarn Technology’, Butterworth Publ., London, 1987. ‘Recent Advances in spinning technology’, Int. Confr.-BTRA, 1995 Goswami B.C., Martindale J.G. & Scardino F.L. – ‘Textile Yarns, Technology, Structure & Application’, Willey Interscience Pub. USA, 1977. Manual of cotton spinning by De Barr. The technology of short staple spinning, W Klein. Fundamentals of spun yarn technology, by Carl A Lawrence. Handbook of yarn Production, Peter R Lord, Woodhead Publishing Ltd. Yarn Production- theoretical Aspects, P Grosberg and C Iype, The Textile Institute Publication.

475

305046 Fabric Manufacture – VI Winding : Modern Developments in winding, Ballooning Theory of Unwinding, Optimum yarn clearing and its attainment, electronic yarn clearer. Effect of count, winding speed, balloon height, winding off radius on yarn unwinding tension. Guide distance on short term and long term tension variation during unwinding. Effect of tension variation on the properties of yarn and end packages. Calculation of yarn tension. Concept of Gain and its control with calculation. Modern electronic control system & their advantages for optimizing quality & productivity. Techno-economical aspects of winding. Warping and Sizing : Technological significance in the design developments of warping Machine with respect to creels, design, tensioners, drum design, Drive, geometrical aspects of machines. Modern Electronic control systems. Tension variation in warping and sizing. Different Stretch Zones in Sizing, Measurement and control of stretch in Sizing, Effect of Stretch on the properties of yarn and weaving efficiency. Modern Developments in Sizing, New trends in Sizing such as Foam sizing, Low liquor Sizing, Loom : Vincent’s Theory of shuttle propulsion with respect to linear cam. Factors affecting initial speed of shuttle. Retardation of shuttle on conventional loom. Energy requirements for picking, factors that prevent the increase in loom speed. Mathematical analysis of picking and checking. Picking, Spacing and its control, effect of weft count, loom timing and setting on pick spacing. Kinematics of sley, beat up force, analysis based on 4 bar linkage mechanism. Design of linear and accelerated cams. Effect of loom setting on the properties of fabrics, Cloth setting rules. Common fabric Defects. Weaving of Poplin, Denim, Tyre Cord, tapes, Kevlar, stretch yarns and other Industrial fabrics. Unconventional Weaving : Modern Developments in of Projectile, rapier, Air jet, and water jet machines. Measurement and control of tension variation on Unconventional weaving m/c. Calculations of shuttle-less weaving m/c.
PRACTICALS:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Loom erection – dismantling of various parts & motions. Loom erection - assembly of various of various mechanism. Loom erection – tuning of various parts. Loom erection – beam gaiting on loom. Study of heald displacement on heald-staggering loom. Comparative study of theoretical & actual production cheese winding machine. Picker displacement study. Winding & unwinding study. Study of depth of shed & interference with shuttle. Measurement of power on plain loom for different motions. Study of warp tension – static & dynamic. Applications of oscilloscope for picking timings.

Reference Lord P.R. & Mohamed M.H. – ‘ Conversion of yarn into fabric’ Merrow technical library, Durham-U.K., 1982 ‘Warping & sizing’ – BTRA silver jubilee monograph series, Mumbai – 400086 Paliwal M.C. – ‘ Process Control in Weaving’, ATIRA, silver jubilee monograph, Ahmedabad-380015, 1983. Greenwood K. – ‘Weaving-control of fabric structure’, Merrow tech library, Durham-U.K., 1975 Marks R. &Robinson A.T.C. – ‘ Principles of Weaving’, Textile Inst. Publ., ManchesterU.K., 1986 Talukdar, Sriramulu & Ajgaonkar – ‘Weaving Machines, Mechanisms & Management’, Mahajan Publ., Ahmedabad-380015

476

305180 Textile Management & Costing Mill Management : Personnel Department of Mill & its function – Organisational structure, patterns, communication. Selection, recruitment, training, skill analysis training (SAT), Labour laws, labour welfare activities, methods of wage remuneration, wage determination process, job evaluation, payment by results, motivation, financial & non-financial incentives, disciplinary action – warning, showcause notice, suspension and dismissals, retrenchment & VRS Modernisation – purpose & process, selection of machines, detailed technical analysis, method of selection on the basis of – rate of return, pay-back period, discounted cash flow New Projects – Introduction, plant location, production plan and first projections, detailed analysis. Buildings – Introduction, construction, effects of process and material flow. Textile Industry: Growth, Problems & government policy. Costing : 1. Introduction, costing - its importance & use, Cost classification, Total cost analysis. 2. Job Costing – Introduction, process of job costing, numerical problems. 3. Marginal Costing & break even analysis – Introduction, break even charts & terms associated. P/v ratio – marginal cost equation, contribution and its use in decision making, P/v graph. Numerical problems. 4. Standard costing – Introduction, application of standard cost, standard hour and its use, advantages of standard costing, variance and their application, numerical problems. 5. Store Routine – Function of stores, procedure for material procurement, effective stores management, ABC analysis, basic inventory models, stock evaluation, F1Fo – L1Fo methods, numerical problems. 6. Balance sheet – Structure of balance sheet, introduction to ratio analysis, important ratios, their computation and interpretation, simple numerical analysis on ratio analysis.

No. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Reference Varma D.S. – ‘Textile Mill Planning & Organisation’, Metropolitan Book Co. Ltd. Publ., Delhi – 110006, 1964 Arora C.P. – ‘Refrigeration & Airconditioning’, Tata McgrawHill & Co., New Delhi, 1981. Singh S.K. – ‘Industrial instrumentation & Control’, Tata McgrawHill & Co., New Delhi, 1987. Kulkarni M.G. – ‘Textile Manufacturing’, Current literature Co. Pvt. Ltd., Malhotra House, Mumbai – 400001, 2001

477

305190 Textile Mill Planning & Organisation Selection of suitable site for textile mill, small scale industry, type of area. Preparation of organisation for spinning / weaving mill. (one carded, one combed and one blended organisation to be taken in the class.). Students are required to prepare more organisations using – slow speed, semi high and high production machines. Choice of machinery & its specification for different counts & blends. Principles of machinery lay-outs and different flow plans of material for spinning / weaving department. (students are required to prepare different plans). Different categories of labour required in various section of spinning / weaving departments. Work allotment of machines to direct labour. Production related workload for indirect labour. Idea of productivity calculations of spinning / weaving mill and factors affecting productivity. Approach to need based modernisation. Basic ideas of process control and norms used in spinning / weaving mill. (The norms are required to be discussed in the class and amongst the students). Material handling in spinning / weaving department. Labour welfare provisions, type of building construction- single or multi storied, fire prevention provisions, safety provisions, humidification and air-conditioning provisions, ventilation & air changes.

(#) – The contents are same for both spinning & weaving
No. 1. 2. 3. 4. Reference Varma D.S. – ‘Textile Mill Planning & Organisation’, Metropolitan Book Co. Ltd. Publ., Delhi – 110006, 1964 Arora C.P. – ‘Refrigeration & Airconditioning’, Tata McgrawHill & Co., New Delhi, 1981. Singh S.K. – ‘Industrial instrumentation & Control’, Tata McgrawHill & Co., New Delhi, 1987. Kulkarni M.G. – ‘Textile Manufacturing’, Current literature Co. Pvt. Ltd., Malhotra House, Mumbai – 400001, 2001

478

ELECTIVES : 405010 Indian Textile Industry & Marketing
Indian textile industry – history, growth, some recent problems about location, exports, modernization, profitability and cost. Govt. policy towards textile industry. Recent trends in cotton production, marketing of cotton in India and the role of co-operative and other agencies. Decentralised sector, its importance in textile industry, growth and problems of handloom and power loom industry. Textile labour, characteristics, trade union movement and industrial relations in textile industry. Labour legislations, important provisions of factory act, Bombay industrial relation act. Payment of wages act, minimum wage act, employee state insurance act, provident fund act and employee family pension schemes, payment of bonus and gratuity act. The core concept of marketing, marketing management, production, product, selling, marketing concepts, marketing strategies. Consumers buying behaviour, factors affecting consumer behaviour, buying decision process. Marketing mix, product management, new product development, pricing, pricing methods, channel of physical distribution, their functions, distribution in textile industry, Promotion, advertising, personal selling, sales promotion. Marketing research, scope, process, methods.
No. 1. Reference

Ormerod A. – ‘Management of Textile Production’,

479

405030 Textile Export Management Textile export marketing: Introduction - Marketing Terms - International Marketing Environment - Entry to foreign markets - Strategies - Support Institutes to facilitate exports – Market research and its planning - Groupings of Countries -IMF - World Bank - Export Correspondence and Pricing - Electronic Trade - Theories of Trade - Trade Cycles - Mechanics of protection - Balance of Payment - Channels of Distribution - Export of projects and services etc. Finance: Basic concepts of foreign exchange - Methods of International Payment Settlement International Commercial Terms - Letter of Credit - Exchange Control Regulations for imports and exports - Export Financing - Pre-Shipment finance - Post Shipment Finance - EXIM Bank of India - ECGC - Demand Guarantees and Standby Letter of Credit - Forfeiting and Factoring - Case Studies etc. Export Documentation: Introduction - Exim policy - customs act - other acts relating to export/import - formalities for commencing - customs formalities - export documentation – project exports - export of services export of excisable goods - import documentation - clearance of import goods - 100% export oriented units - export processing zones - special economic zones - duty drawback procedure export/import by post customs house agents - import of different products - import/export incentives - import licenses etc. Export Logistics: Shipping & Marine Insurance Terminology - General Info on Shipping - Types of Containers and Ships - Containerization - Marine Insurance - Air Transportation - Bill of Lading/Air Way Bill/Sea Way Bill - Maritime Fraud - Packaging Introduction - Mechanical tests - Climatic tests - Stretch Wrapping - Cushioning materials - Shrink packaging - packaging cost - Lab testing - International Care labeling code etc.

No. 1. 2. 3.

Reference Asia and World Textiles – Textile Institute. The Textile Industry: Winning Strategies for the New Millennium. Foreign Exchange Markets by Coyle Brian .Graham

480

405020 Textile Composites Introduction: Definition of composites. Classification of composites. Introduction to Textile Composites. Applications of composite materials. Fibres for composites: Various types of fibres used for composite materials and their properties. Fibre-matrix interface. Thermosetting resins. Thermoplastic matrix. Methods of preparations for fibres used as composite materials. Carbon fibres, precursors, carbonization, graphatisation. Structures and properties of high modulus fibres, glass & other inorganic fibres. Composites based on carbon & glass fibres and other inorganic fibres. Composites based on aromatic polyamides.Technology of fabrication, analysis and performance of composites. Textile Composite Manufacturing Techniques: Open mould processes: Hand lay-up, Spray – up, Vacuum bag, filament winding, centrifugal casting. Closed mould processes: Hot press moulding, compression moulding, injection moulding, pultrusion, cold press moulding, resin injection, reinforced reaction injection moulding. Natural fibre Composites: Necessity of natural fibre composites, fibres used for natural fibre composites, applications of natural fibre composites.

No. 1. 2.

Reference Homgu Tatsuya & Phillips Glyn – ‘New Fibres’, Woodhead Pub. Ltd., England,2001 Derek Hull – “An introduction to composite materials” Cambridge University press.

481

405040 Textile Machinery Maintenance Need for maintenance – types of maintenance practices and concepts, planned & unplanned maintenance, , corrective & design maintenance, routine and preventive maintenance Tribology – study of friction, lubrication and wear of moving parts in the machine. Types of bearing, their choice and maintenance Types of lubricants, their properties and applications. Work Study in maintenance, making schedules, planning of maintenance work, recording maintenance activities, control of wastage. Cost of maintenance work – direct & indirect cost, reduction of wastage for economizing. Maintenance Department – functions & power of staff, importance of communication with other departments, , duties of plant engineer 4 Maintenance of some important equipment – PIV, reeves gears, differential gears, cone drum drives, cams & their lubrication, building mechanism on Fly & Ring Frames, oil-submerged and sealed lubrication, pneumatic valves, pressure reducing valves, electronic and electrical installations, control panels & their maintenance, lubrication for crank & arm system, care, maintenance & lubrication of oscillating/vibrating part.

No. 1. 2.

Reference Ratnam T.V., Ramchandran M. & Narayanaswami G. – ‘Maintenance Management n Spinning’, Published by SITRA, Coimbatore Durgesh Chandra – ‘Design-out Maintenance & Instrument Aids’ Universal Book Corpn., Mumbai

482

405050 Man-made Fibre Dyeing & Finishing Chemistry & Mechanism of Dyeing man-made fibres with various dye classes Dyeing of polyester-cotton blends, dyeing of polyester-wool blends, dyeing of texturised polyester. High temperature dyeing equipment such as pressure jiggers, beam dyeing machine, jet dyeing machine, machinery used for washing, soaping of dyed material. Dyeing of Nylon, mechanism of dyeing with acid dyes, high temperature dyeing, low temperature dyeing of nylon-cellulosic blends, nylon-wool blends. Dyeing machinery for nylon yarn and fabric. Selection, chemistry & application of auxiliaries used in dyeing such as levelling agents, swelling agents & solvents. Correction of dyeing. Dyeing of acrylic fibre, mechanism of dyeing with cationic dyes. Dyeing of unmodified & modified polypropylene, dyeing of polyvinyl alcohol, polyurethane, cellulose acetate fibres. Printing of synthetics with particular reference to transfer printing. Screen printing machines. Heat setting of synthetic fibres. Finishing of synthetic fibre materials, optical whitening, mechanism of whitening action, application to polyester and polyester/cotton blend fibre, application to nylon fabric, application to acrylic fabrics, acrylic/cotton blends and acrylic/wool blends, application to cellulose acetates. Efficiency of fluorescent brightening agents. Anti-pilling finishes. Durable press finishes, silk like polyester, anti-static finishes, spin finishes, soil releasing finishes, flame retardant finishes. Energy conservation techniques and energy audit in process house.

No. 1. 2. 3.

Reference Datye K.V. & Vaidya A.A. – ‘Chemical Processing of Synthetic Fibres and Blends’, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y., 1984 Shenai V.A. – ‘Technology of Textile Finishing’, Vol.X, Sevak Pub.Mumbai, 1999 Shenai V.A. – ‘Chemistry of Textile Auxilieries’, Vol.V, Sevak Pub., Mumbai, 2002

483

Programme: B Tech (Information Technology)
Course Code Course Title L Semester III 200033 308010 308020 308030 308040 308050 Contact hours P/T Total Cr Evaluation weightage TWA MST ESE ESE (Theory) Hours

Engineering Mathematics III Electronics Devices and Circuits Electrical Network Foundation of Information Technology Digital Logic Design and Application Discrete Structures Total

3 3 4 3 3 3 19

1 2 2 2 2 1 10

4 5 6 5 5 4 29

7 8 10 8 8 7 48

10 10 10 10 10 10

15 15 15 15 15 15

75 75 75 75 75 75

3 3 3 3 3 3

Semester IV 200034 308060 308070 308080 308090 308100

Engineering Mathematics IV Principles of Analog and Digital Communication Computer Organization and Architecture Data structures and Algorithms Information Theory and Coding Industrial Economics and Management Total

3 3 3 3 4 3 19

1 2 2 3 2 10

4 5 5 6 6 3 29

7 8 8 9 10 6 48

10 10 10 10 10 10

15 15 15 15 15 15

75 75 75 75 75 75

3 3 3 3 3 3

484

Detailed Syllabus: IT-301: Applied Mathematics III 1 Complex Variables: Function of complex variable; Continuity (only statement), derivability of a function analytic, regular function; Necessary condition for f (z) to be analytic (statement of sufficient conditions); Cauchy Riemann. equation in polar coordinates; Harmonic function, orthogonal trajectories; Analytical and Milne Thomson method to fmd fez) from its real or imaginary parts. Mapping: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping with geometrical interpretations.
2

Fourier Series and Integrals: Orthogonal and orthonormal functions expression for a function in a series of orthogonal functions;' Sine and cosine function and their orthogonal properties; Fourier series, diricWet's theorem (only statement); Periodic function with period 2 and 21; Even and odd function; Half range sine and cosine series; Parseval' s relations. Complex form of Fourier series: Introduction to Fourier integral; Relation with Laplace transforms. Laplace Transforms: Function of bounded variation (statement only), Laplace transform of!, tn" eat, sinh(at), cosh(at), crf(t), shifting properties; Expressions (with proofs) for dn i) L{ f f(t)} ii) L{ f(t)/ t} iii) La f( u) du} iv) L {f(t)} dtn Unit step functions, Heaviside, Dirac functions and their Laplace transformation; Laplace transform of periodic function. Evaluation of inverse Laplace transforms, partial traction method Heaviside development, convolution theorem. Application to solve initial and boundary value problems involving ordinary differential equation with one dependent variable. Matrices: Types of matrices; Adjoint of a matrix; Inverse of a matrix; Elementary transformations of a matrix; Linear dependent and independent of rows and columns of a matrix over a real field; Reduction to a normal form; Partitioning of a matrices. System of homogeneous and non homogeneous equations, their consistency and solution.
References:

3

4

P. N. Wartikar and J. N. Wartikar, "Element of applied mathematic", Volume I and Volume II, A V. Griha, Pune. • S. S. Shastri, ''Engineering Mathematics", Vol-2, Pill, Second edition, 1994. • A. R. Vasistha, "Matrices", Krishna Prakasan, Meerut, 1988-89. • Churchil , "Complex Variable", McGraw Hill, Tokyo. • Shanti narayan, "Matrices", S. Chand Publishing House, Delhi. • Shanti narayan, "Theory of function of complex variable", S. Chand Publishing House, Delhi. • "Laplace transforms", Schaum's outline series, McGraw Hill. • T. Veerarajan, "Engineering mathematics", TMH. Detailed Syllabus:

485

486

487

IT-302: Electronics devices and circuits 1 Review of transistors (BJT and FET): BJT principle, Biasing, Simple remodel, Voltage and Current amplification. CE, CB, CC amplifier configurations, FET principle, Biasing, FET amplifier configurations 2 Differential Amplifier: Introduction, Circuit configurations, DC and AC analysis, FET differential amplifier, Current mirror circuit.
3

Operational Amplifier: Block diagram representation, Ideal op-amp, Equivalent circuit, Op-amp with negative feedback, Open-loop configurations, Frequency response, Compensating networks, Popular 741 op-amp specifications and performance characteristics. Operational Amplifier Applications: Basic op-amp applications, Instrumentation amplifier, AC amplifier, Analysis of integrator and differentiator circuits. Active Filters: First order and second order low pass, high pass Butterworth and band pass filter configurations. Oscillators and Converters: Oscillation principle, Phase shift oscillator, Wein bridge oscillator, Voltage controlled oscillator Comparators and Converters: Op-amp used as basic comparator, Zero crossing detector, Schmitt trigger comparator, Voltage limiter, Comparator specifications and performance characteristics. Analog to digital converter and Digital to analog converter principles, Practical A-D converter with binary weighted resistors, Successive approximation A-D converter, Monolithic A-D converters, AD808 and 809, A-D and D- A converter specifications and performance characteristics. Voltage Regulators: Fixed voltage series regulators, Variable voltage regulator using IC 723, Principle of switching regulator. PWM IC voltage regulator specifications and performance characteristics. Practical power supply circuits. Specialized IC applications: 555 timer IC and its use as monostable and astale multivibrator, Specifications and performance characteristics.
References:

4

5

6 7

8

9

Ramakant A. Gayakwad, "OP-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits", PHI Publishers. • D. Roy Choudhary and Shail Jain, "Linear Integrated Circuits", New Age International Publishers. • Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky "Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory", Eighth Edition, Pearson Education Asia. 488 • J. M. Fiore, "Op Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits", Thomson Learning. Sergio Franco, "Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits", McGraw Hill International Edition.

IT-305: Digital Logic design and applications 1 Number Systems: Decimal, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal number system and conversion, Binary weighted codes, Signed number binary order, l's and 2's complement codes, Binary arithmetic. 2 Boolean Algebra: Binary logic functions, Boolean laws, Truth tables, Associative and distributive properties, DeMorgan's Theorems, Realization of switching functions using logic gates. Combinational Logic: Switching equations, Canonical logic forms, Sum of product & Product of sums, Karnaugh maps, Two, three and four variable Karnaugh maps, Simplification of expressions, Quine-McCluskey minimization techniques, Mixed logic combinational circuits, Multiple output functions. Analysis and Design of Combinational Logic: Introduction to combinational circuit, Code conversion, Decoder, Encoder, Priority encoder, Multiplexers as function generators, Binary address, Subtractor, BCD adder, Binary comparator, Arithmetic and logic units. Sequential Logic: Sequential circuits, Flip-flops, Clocked and edge triggered flipflops timing specifications counters asynchronous and synchronous, Counter design with state equations registers, Serial in serial out shift registers, Tristate register, Register transfer timing considerations. Sequential Circuits: State diagrams and tables, Transition table, Excitation table and equations. Examples using flipflops. Simple synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuit analysis, Construction of state diagram and counter design.

3

4

5

6

7

Programmable Logic: Programmable logic devices, Programmable logic arrays and programmable array logic, Design using PAL, Field programmable gate arrays.

8

Digital Integrated Circuits: Digital circuit logic levels, Propagation delay times, Power dissipation, Fan-out and fan- in, Noise margin for popular logic families, TTL, LSTTL, CMOS, and ECL integrated circuits and their performance comparison, Open collector and Tri-state gates and buffers. References: • John M. Yarbrough, "Digital logic", Thomson Learning. • T. C. Bartee, "Digital Computer Fundamentals", McGraw Hill. • D. P. Leach, A. P. Malvino, "Digital Principles and Applications", TMH. • John P. Uyemura, Brookes, "Digital Systems Design", Cole publishing Co. • M. Morris Mano, "Digital Logic and Computer Design", PHI. • A. B. Marcontz, "Introduction to Logic Design", McGraw Hill.

489

Detailed Syllabus:

490

IT-303: Electrical Networks 1 Solution of Network with Independent Sources 2 Linear Graphs: Introductory definition; The incidence matrix A; The loop matrix B, Relationship between sub matrix of A and B cutsets and cutset matrix, Fundamental cutsets and fundamental Tiesets, Planner graphs, A & B matrices, Loop, Node, Node pair equations, Duality. Network Equation in the Time Domain: First and second order differential equations initial conditions; Evaluation and analysis of transient and steady state response to step, ramp, impulse and sinusoidal input functions. Laplace Transform: Laplace transform and it's application to analysis of network for different input functions described above. Network Functions: Driving point and transfer functions; Two port network, Open circuit and short circuit parameter; Transmission parameter, Hybrid parameter, Chain parameter; Interconnection of two port network, Cascade connection, Series and parallel permissibility of connection. Representation of Network Functions: Pole zeros and natural frequencies, Location of pole, Even and Odd pairs of a function; Magnitude and angle of function; The delay function; All pass and minimum phase function, Net change in angle, Azimuth polynomials, Ladder network, Constant resistance network, Maximally flat response Chebyshev response; Calculation of a network function form a given angle and real part Bode method.

3

4

5

Fundamentals of Network Synthesis: Energy function passive, reciprocal network; The impedance function; Condition on angle, Positive real function; Necessary and sufficient conditions; The angle property of a positive real function; Bounded real function; The real part function; Reactance functions; Realization of reactance functions;rm of network, Azimuth polynomials and reactance function; Impedance and admittance of RC network under network realization; Resistance inductance networks. References: • Franklin F. Kuo, "Network analysis and synthesis", John-Wiley & Sons • M. E. Venvalkenberg, "Network analysis", Prentice Hall (I) Ltd, third edition. • Willam Hayt and Jack KemmerIy, "Engineering Circuit analysis", TMH. • Nolman Balbanian, T. A. Bickkart, Sundaram, "Electrical Networks", John-Wiley & Sons 491

Detailed Syllabus: IT-304: Discrete Structures
1

Set Theory: Sets, Venn diagrams, Set membership of tables, Laws of set theory, Partitions of sets, Power set.
2

Logic: Propositions and logical operations, Truth tables, Equivalence, Implications Laws of logic, Mathematical induction and Quantifiers.
3

Relations, Digraphs and Lattice: Relations, paths and digraphs; Properties and types of binary relations, Manipulation of relations, closures, Warshall's algorithm; Equivalence and Partial ordered relations; Po sets and Hasse diagram; Lattice. Functions and Pigeon Hole Principle: Definition and types of functions: injective, surjective and bijective; Composition, identity and inverse; Pigeon-hole principle. Graphs: Defintion; Paths and circuits: Eulerian, Hamiltonian; Planer graphs. Groups: Monoids, Semigroups, Groups; Product and quotients of algebraic structures; Isomorphism, homomorphism, automorphism; Normal subgroup; Codes and group codes Rings and Fields: Rings, integral domains and fields; Ring Homomorphism. Generating Functions and Recurrence Relations: Series and Sequences; Generating functions; Recurrence relations; Applications: Solving Differential equations, Fibonacci etc.
References:

4

5 6

7

8

• • • • • •

Joe Mott, Abraham Kandel and Theodore Baker, "Discrete Mathematics for Computer Scientists and Mathematicians", Second Edition, PHI. K. D. Joshi, "Foundations of discrete mathematics", New Age International Publication. Aln Doerr and K. Levasseur, "Applied Discrete structure for computer Science", Galgotia. Seymour Lipschutz and Marc Lars Lipson, "2000 Solved Problems in Discrete Mathematics", McGraw Hill, International Edition. C. L. Liu, "Elements of Discrete mathematics", McGraw Hill. Trembley and Manohar, "Discrete mathematical structures", McGraw Hill.

492

Detailed Syllabus: Detailed Syllabus:

493

IT-305: Foundations Of Information Technology 1 Information concept & Processing: Definition of Information, Need for Information, Quality of Information, Value of Information, Categories and levels of Information in Business Organization, Data Concepts and Data Processing, Data Representation-Number System. 2 Introduction to Computer Concepts: Need for computer literacy, Computer History, Generations, Characteristics, Applications, Classification The basics Computer System: Hardware CPU, Peripherals, storage Media, Software Definition, Role and Categories system software, Application software. Program Development Strategies: Personal computing, Application and System software, Fourth generation languages, File organization and types, Overview of program development methodologies, Software development life cycle and Software quality. Data Communication and Computer Networks: Issues in Data Communication, Signal sampling, Digital modulation, Multiplexing of signals, Overview of computer Networks, Network access Protocols-Bus and Ring. Fundamentals of ISDN. Internet Technology: Internet structure and components, TCP / IP communication Protocol, Servers and Clients, Gateways, Routers, Internet Service Providers, Hypertext link, World Wide Web, Uniform Resource Locator, Internet (IP) Addresses, Internet Protocols: SMTP and PPP. Services provided by the Internet, Search engines, Electronic- mail, voice over Internet. Internet Applications: E-Commerce: Data ware housing, Data mining, Geographical information system, Multimedia on Internet: Audio, Video and Animation on Web, Multimedia tools and applications, JAVA and HTML. Wireless Application Protocol and Devices.

3

4

5

6

7

8

Internet Security: Security threats to E-commerce, Fundamentals of Cryptography, Models of Cryptography, Viruses, Firewalls. References: • D. S. Yadav, "Information Technology", New Age International Publishers. • Alexis Leon & Mathews Leon, "Fundamentals of Information Technology", Vikas. • Turban, Rainer,Potter "Introduction to Information Technology" • Preston Gralla, "How the Internet works", Tech-media Publishers. • Rajaraman V. "Introduction to Computer" • Morris Mano "Computer Organization" • Hamacher" Computer Organization"

494

Detailed Syllabus:
Course code: Course Name 1 2 3
Refrences:

Text Books:

495

Detailed Syllabus: IT – IV semester IT-401: Applied Mathematics IV 1 Complex Variables: Regions and Paths in Z plane; Taylor's and Laurent's development; Singularities, Poles, residue at isolated singularity and its evaluation; Residue theorem: Application to evaluate real integrals. 2 Matrices: Vectors; real field inner products; Norm; Linear independence; orthogonality; Characteristic values and vectors; their properties for Hermitian and real symmetric matrices; Characteristic polynomial; Cayley Hamilton theorem; Functions of square matrix; Minimal polynomial; Diagonalizable matrix. 3 Numerical Methods: Errors: Types and Estimation; Solutions to Transcendental and polynomial equations: Bisection method; Gauss Jordan method; Newton-Raphson method; Solutions to system of linear algebraic equations: Gauss elimination method; Gauss Jordan method; Gauss Siedel iteration method; Interpolation: Linear interpolation; High order interpolation using Lagrange and Newtons methods; Finite difference operators and difference tables; Numerical Integration: Trapezoidal rule; Simpson's 1/3rd and 3/Sth rules. . Solutions to ordinary differential equations: Taylor's series method; Euler's predictor-corrector method; Rungekutta method of second and fourth order.
References:

• • • • • •

P. N. Wartikar and J.N. Wartikar, "Element of applied mathematic", Vol INol II, A V. Grilia, Pune. Shanti Narayan, "Matrices", S. Chand Publishing House, Delhi. Shanti Narayan, "Theory Of Functions Of Complex Variables", S. Chand Publishing House, Delhi. S. S. Shastri, "Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis", V 01-2, PHI, Second edition, 1994. John S. Mathews, ''Numerical Method for Mathematics, Science and Engineering". Salvadari and MacCraken, ''Numerical Methods".

496

IT-402: Principles of analog and digital communication 1 Introduction 2 Introductions to signals
3

Analysis and transmission of signals
4

Amplitude Modulation
5

Angle Modulation
6

Sampling and pulse code modulation
7

Principles of digital data transmission
8

Emerging digital communication technologies and recent development
9

Behavior of analog systems in the presence of noise
10

Behavior of digital communication systems in the presence of noise
11

Error Correcting codes.
References:

• “Modern digital and analog communication systems”, B.P. Lathi; Oxford university press.
• • • “Principles of communication systems”, Taub. Schilling; TMH. “Digital communications fundamentals and applications”, Bernard Sklar; Pearson Education. “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Leoun W Couch; Pearson Education.

497

IT-403: Computer Organization and Architecture
1

Overview: General organization and architecture; Structural/functional view of a computer; Evolution/brief history of computers.

2

System Buses:
3

4

5

Computer components-memory, CPU, I/O; Interconnection structures; Bus interconnection, multiple bus hierarchies, PCI bus structure. Memory Organization: Internal memory-characteristics, hierarchy; Semiconductor main memory - types of ram, chip logic, memory module organization; Cache memory-- elements of cache design, address mapping and translation, replacement algorithms; advanced dram organization; Performance characteristics of two-level memories; External memory: magnetic disk, tape, raid, optical memory; High speed memories: associative and interleaved memories. Data Path Design Fixed point representation; Floating point representation; Design of basic serial and parallel high speed adders, subtractors, multipliers, Booth's algorithm; The arithmetic and logic unit (ALU): Combinational and sequential ALU's. The Central Processing Unit Basic instruction cycle; Instructions sets, formats and addressing; Processor organization; Register organization; Instruction pipelining; Co-processors, pipeline processors; RISC Computers, RISC versus CISC characteristics.

6

The Control Unit
Micro- operations; Hardwired implementation; Microprogrammed control; Micro Instruction format; Applications of microprograming.

7

Input and Output Unit
External devices-: keyboard, monitor, disk drive and device drivers; I/O modules: programmed I/O, interrupt driven I/O, DMA, I/O channels and I/O processors; Serial transmission and synchronization.

8

Multiple Processor Organizations
Flynn's classification of parallel processing systems; Pipelining concepts.
References:

• • • • • •

William Stallings, "Computer Organization and Architecture", Prentice Hall/ Pearson Education Asia, Fifth Edition. John P. Hayes, "Computer Architecture and Organization", Mc-Grew Hill, Third Edition. Tannenbaum, "Computer Organization", PHI. V. Carl Hamacher and Zaky, "Computer Organization'" Mc-Grew Hill Thomas C. Bartee, "Computer Arcbiteeture aud Logie Desigu", TMH. Moris Mano, "Computer System Arcbitecture", PHI.

498

499

500

IT-404: Data Structures and Algorithms 1 Introduction in C Static and Dynamic Structures; Unions; Strings; Files; Macros.
2

Algorithm Analysis
Mathematical Background; The Model; The Time Complexity: How to Analyze and Measure; Big-Oh and Big-Omega Notations; Best Case, Average Case and Worst Case Analyses. Lists: Abstract Data Types; Stacks: ADT; Representation; Operations; Examples; Applications; Queues: ADT; Representation; Operations; Circular and Priority Queues; Examples; Applications; Other Lists and their Implementations. Linked Lists: ADT; Dynamic Memory and Pointers; Dynamic Representation: Insertion and Deletion of Nodes; Linked Stacks and Queues; Linked Lists as Data Structures; Array Implementation of Linked List; Comparison of Dynamic and Array Representations. Binary Tree: Binary Tree Operations and Applications; Binary Tree Representations: Node Representation; Array Representation; Binary Tree Traversals; The Huffinan Algorithm; Representing Lists as Binary Trees: Finding and Deleting Elements, TreeRepresented Lists. Sorting Methods: Efficiency Considerations in Sorting; Different Sorting Methods: Bubble Sort; Quicksort; Straight Selection Sort; Binary Tree Sort; Heaps and Heapsort; Heap as Priority Queue; Insertion Sort; Shell Sort; Bucket Sort; Merge Sort; Radix Sort; Time Complexity Calculation: Best Case, Worst Case and Average Case Calculations of the Different Sorting Methods. Searching Methods: Efficiency Considerations in Searching; Basic Searching Techniques: Sequential Search; Efficiency Considerations for Sequential Search; Searching Ordered Table; Indexed Sequential Search; Binary Search; Interpolation Search; Binary Search Tree: Implementation; Insertions and Deletions; Efficiency Considerations; General Search Trees: Multiway Search Trees; B- Trees; Hashing: Hash Functions; Resolving Clashes (Open and Closed Hashing); Hashing in External Storage; Dynamic Hashing. Graph as a Data Structure: Representation and Construction of a Graph; Operations on Graph. Algorithms: Greedy Method; Divide and Conquer Method; Dynamic Programming; Back-Tracking Method.
References:

3

4

5

6

7

8 9

• • • • • • • •

Y. Langsam, M. J. Augenstein and A. M. Tannenbaum, "Data Structures Using C and C++", Prentice Hall India, Second Edition. G. Brassard and P. BratIey, "Fundamentals of Algorithmics", Prentice-Hall India R. F. Gilberg, "Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach with C", Thomson Learning Aho, J. E. Hopcroft and J. D. Ullman, "Data Structures and Algorithms", Addison Wesley, Low Price Edition. M. A. Weiss, "Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++", Addison Wesley Longman, International Student Edition. R. Kruse, "Data Structures and Program Design in C", Prentice-Hall India. Tremble and Sorenson, "Data Structures and Algorithms" Tata McGraw-HilI. Ellis Horwitz, Sartaj Sohoni “Fundamentals of `computer algorithms” Galgotia 501 publication

IT-405: Information Theory and coding 1 Introductory Concepts Information Theory: . Entropy and Uncertainty; Information Content; Rate of a language; Redundancy; Complexity Theory: Computational complexity; P , NP , NP Complete; Number Theory; Modular Arithmetic: Fermat's Little Theorem; Chinese Remainder Theorem; Prime Number Generation; Random Number Generation; Discrete Probability.
2

Cryptographic Techniques
Cryptographic Techniques: Cryptographic Protocols; Introduction; One way function; One way hash function; Keys and Keys Management; Public Key Management; Public Key Cryptography; Algorithms: Block Cypher Modes; Multiple Encryption; Stream Cyphers; Block Algorithms; Public Key Algorithms; Encrypting data for storage/communication; Data Encryption Standard ( DES ).

3

Compression Algorithms
Optimal Compression; Compression Algorithms; Huffinan Coding; Adaptive Huffinan Compression; Statistical Modelling; Dictionary Based Compression; Sliding Window Compression; Speech Compression; LZW, RLE; Lossy Compression schemes; Image Compression using DCT. Error Control Coding Coding for reliable digital transmission and storage; Types of codes; Error Checking codes; Error Correcting Codes; Coding Schemes; Linear Block Codes; Cyclic Codes; Error Trapping; Decoding for cyclic codes; Convolution codes.
References:

4

• • • • •

Bruce Schneier, "Applied Cryptography: Protocols, Algorithms and Source code in C", John Wiley and Sons, 1994. Adam Drozdek, "Elements of Data Compression", Thomson Learning. Vera Pless, "Introduction to the theory of error correcting codes", John Wiley and Sons Ranjan Bose, “Information Theory coding and cryptography” TMH. Richard Wells, “Applied coding and information theory for engineers”, Pearson Education.

502

IT-406: Industrial Economics and Management 1 Nature and significance of economics, science, engineering, technology and their relationship with economic development, appropriate technology for developing countries. 2 Demand, supply, elasticity of demand and supply, Competition, monopoly, oligopoly, monopolistic competition, causes creating categories of monopoly organization, price determination under perfect competition and monopoly, Price discrimination, equilibrium of firm under competition and monopoly. 3 Functions of money,' supply and demand for money, money price level and inflation, black money, meaning, magnitude and consequences. 4 Functions of commercial banks, multiple credit creation, banking system in India, shortcomings and improvement. 5 Central Banking: Function of central banking illustrated with reference to RBI, Monetary policy - meaning, objectives and features.
6

Sources of public revenue, principles of taxation, direct and indirect taxes, distribution of incidence, tax structure, reform of tax system.
7

Theory of International Trade, balance of trade and payment, theory of protection, tariffs and subsidies, foreign exchange control, Devaluation.
8

New Economic Policy: Liberalization, extending privatization, globalization, market-friendly state, exportled-growth.
9

Causes of underdevelopment, determinants of economic development, economic and non-economic factors, stages of growth, strategy of development-big push, balanced and unbalanced, critical minimum effort strategy.
10

Management functions, responsibilities of management to society, development of management thought, contribution of F.W. Taylor, Henri Toylor Elton Ma'o, System contingency approaches to management.
11

Nature of planning, decision-making process, management by objectives.
12

Organization: line and staff authority relationships, decentralization of delegation of authority, span of management, flat organization.
13

Communication process, media channels and barriers to effective communication
14

Maslow, Herzberg and Macgregor's theory of motivation. McClelland's achievement motivation, Blanchard's 503 situational leadership theory.

200035- Engineering Mathematics V

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1)Review of probability. Baye’s theorem. Discrete and continuous random variables. Probability mass function and density function. Expected value. (Expectation) Moments and moments generating functions. Relation between Raw moments and Central moments. 2) Probability, distribution : Binomal, Poisson, Normal, Student’s distribution, x2 (Chisquare), F distribution. 3) Sampling theory : Sampling distribution. Test of hypothesis. Level of significance. Critical region. One- tailed and two-tailed tests. Degree of freedom. Estimation of population parameters. Central limit theorem. Large and Small samples : A) Test of significance for large samples. i) ii) iii) iv) Test of significance of the difference between sample proportion and population proportion. Test of significance of the difference between the sample proportions. Test of significance of the difference between sample mean and population means. Test of significance of the difference between the means of two samples.

B) Test of significance for small samples : i) ii) iii) Test of significance of the difference between sample mean and population mean. Test of significance of the difference between means to two small samples drawn from the same normal population Paired- t test.

C) F-test of significance of the difference between population variances. D) Test of the Goulners of fit and independence of attribute. Contingency table. Yate’s correction. 4) Fitting of curves : Least square method. Fitting of the straight line and parabolic curve. Bivariate frequency distribution. Co-relation, Co-variance. Karl Pearson’s Coefficient and Sperman’s Rank Co-relation coefficients, Regression coefficients and lines of regression. 5) Analysis of variance. 6) Statistical quality control and control charts. 504

308110- Object Oriented Analysis and Design

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1.Introduction: Overview Of OOL; Object Classes; Meta Types. Object Oriented Methodologies; The Unified Approach Modeling; Why Modeling? Static And Dynamic Models; Functional Models. 2.Object Modeling: Object. Links. Association. Inheritance. Grouping Constructs; Problems On Object Modeling; Advantages Of Object Modeling. 4.Analysis:
Problem Analysis. Problem Domain Classes. Identify Classes And Objects Of Real World Problems. Using Use Case Analysis; Recording Analysis.

4.Basic Object Modeling: Multiplicity. Constraints. Aggregation. Component. 5.Sequence Diagram: Modeling Scenarios. Mapping Events To Object. Interfaces. Discovering Attributes. Modeling Simple Collaboration Modeling. Logical Database Schema. Activity Diagram. Modeling Workflow. 6.Class Diagram: Test Scenarios. Interfaces. Classes. Methods. Stress Testing. System Testing. Scalability Testing. Regression Testing. Behavioral Modeling. State Chart Diagram. 7.Design: Architectural Design. Refining The Model. Refactoring. Coupling And Cohesion . Who Should Own The Attribute? Who Should Own The Operations? Process And Threads. 8.Design Classes: Classes Visibility; User Interface. Subsystem Interface. 9.Deponent Diagram: Modeling Source Codes. Physical Databases. 10.Deployment Diagram: 505

Modeling In A C/S System. Distributed System And Embedded Systems.

Text Books:
2. Ali Bahrami, “Object Oriented System Development “, McGraw Hill. 3. Grady Booch, J. Rambaugh, Ivar Jacobson, ”The UML Users guide”, Pearson Education. 4. J. Rambaugh, etal,, “Object Oriented Modeling and Design” 5. Andrew Haigh, “Object Oriented Analysis and Design”, Tata McGrawHill

References:
2. Simon Benett, Steve McRobb, Ray Farmer, “Object Oriented System Analysis and Design Using UML” McGrawHill. 3. Timothy C. Lethbridge, Robert Laganiere, “Object Oriented Software Engineering” McGrawHill. 4. Stephen R. Schach, “Object Oriented and Classical Software Engineering”
308140- Automata Theory

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1.Chomsky Hierarchy and Parsing: Types of grammars: Chompsky hierarchy Types 0,1,2and 3; Classification of Languages. Parsing: Parse trees and Ambiguity; Top down parsing (recursive descent parser); Bottom up parsing (SLR); Operator precedence parser. 2.Regular sets and Automata Theory: Regular Sets Regular Grammars and Languages: Regular Expressions, Grammars and Languages; Pumping Lemma; Closure properties. Finite Automata and Finite State Machines: NFA, DFA, FSM, Moor and Mealy machines; Converting NFA to DFA; Minimization of Automata and FSM. 3.Context Free Grammars and Push down Automata: Context Free Grammars and Languages: CNF and GNF; Pumping Lemma; Closure properties. Push Down Automata: Concept of Stack; PDA for CFG. 4.Turing Machine:
Construction of Turing Machine for problem solving. TM as Acceptors and Generators.

5. Complexity:

Time and Space Complexity of a problem. Notations Ω, Θ and Ο. Definition, Understanding and Classification of P, NP, NP Hard and Co-NP problems.

506

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. J.C. Martin, “Introduction to Languages and Theory of Computation “, McGraw Hill. 2.Peter Linz, “Introduction Formal Languages and Automata“, Narosa. 3.Michael Sipser, “Introduction to the Theory of Computation”, Thompson Learning.

References:
1. J.E.Hopcroft, J.D.Ullman, “Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and Computation”, Addison-Wesley.

308120- Computer Network

DETAILED SYLLABUS
2.Introduction:
Network Applications. Network Hardware. Network Software. Reference Models.

3.The Physical Layer
Guided Transmission Media. Wireless Transmission. Communication Satellites. The Public Switched Telephone Network. The Mobile Telephone System. Cable Television.

4.The Data Dink Layer:
Data Link Layer Design Issues. Elementary Data Link Protocols. Sliding Window Protocols. Example of Data Link Protocols: HDLC: High-Level Data Link Control, The Data Link Layer In The Internet.

5.The Medium Access Sub-layer: The Channel Allocation Problem. Multiple Access Protocols. Ethernet. Wireless LANS. Broadband Wireless. Blue Tooth. Data Link Layer Switching. 6.The Network Layer:
Network Layer Design Issues. Routing Algorithms. Congestion Control Algorithms. Quality Of Service. Internetworking. The Network Layer In The Internet: The IP Protocol, IP Addresses, Internet Control Protocols, The Interior Gateway Routing Protocol: OSPF. The Exterior Gateway Routing Protocol: BGP, Internet Multicasting, Mobile IP, Ipv6.

7.The Transport Layer: The Transport Service. Elements Of Transport Protocols. A Simple Transport Protocol. The Internet Transport Protocols: UDP; TCP: Introduction To TCP, The TCP Service Model, The TCP Protocol The TCP Segment Header, TCP Connection Establishment, TCP Connection Release, 507

Modeling TCP Connection Management, TCP Transmission Policy, TCP Congestion Control, TCP Timer Management, Wireless TCP And UDP, Transactional TCP. Performance Issues: Measuring Network Performance, System Design For Better PERFORMANCE, FAST TPDU Processing, Protocols For Gigabit Networks. 8.The Application Layer:
DNS: The Domain name system; Electronic Mail; SNMP.

9.ATM Network:
ATM Layer. ATM Application Layer. ATM Signaling. PNNI Routing.

10.Case study with Window2000/Linux

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. A.S.Tanenbaum, ”Computer Networks”, 4th edition, Prentice Hall. 2. B.F.Ferouzan, ”Data and Computer Communication”, Tata McGraw Hill

References:
Peterson & Davie,” Computer Networks”, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann. Kurose, Ross, “Computer Networking”, Addison Wesley Leon-Garcia And Widjaja, “Communication Networks”, Tata Mcgraw Hill S.Keshay,”An Engg. Approach To Computer Networking”, Addison Wesley. W.Richard Stevens,”TCP/Ip Volume1, 2,3 “, Addison Wesley. D.E.Comer, ”Computer Networks And Internets”, Prentice Hall Warland, Varaiya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Morgan Kaufmann. 9. B.F.Ferouzan, ”TCP/IP Protocol Suit”, Tata McGraw Hill 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

508

308130- Microprocessors

DETAILED SYLLABUS
2.

Introduction to Microcomputer Systems: Introduction to Microprocessors & its evolution, Overview of 8086 Family, Case study of PC System

2. Architecture of 8086/88 Family: Memory organization & Architecture of 8086 family, 8086 Hardware Design, System clock (8284) & reset signal, buffering & latching circuits, Minimum mode & Maximum mode Operation, Study of bus controller 8288 & its use in maximum mode Connection, System Timing diagrams for 8086. 3. 8086 Instruction Set & Programming: Addressing modes, Instruction Set in detail, ALP, Mixed language programming, Stacks, Strings, Procedures, Macros, Timers, Counters & delay. Programming examples using DOS And BIOS Interrupts, Device Drivers Programming. 4. 8086 Interrupt System: 8086 Interrupt structure, types and applications: Study of Programmable Interrupt Controller 8259A & Interrupt Priority Management using 8259A, 5. Memory System Design & I/O Interfacing: Interfacing SRAM, ROM and DRAM to 8086, Address decoding & Timing Considerations. I/O interfacing in 8086: Serial communication interface includes Synchronous & Asynchronous Protocols, parallel communication Interface includes I/O Mapped I/O, Memory Mapped I/O, Handshaking Signals. 6. I/O Controllers for 8086 and Data communication: Study of 8255AH Programmable Peripheral Interface & its modes; Study of 8250 UART, DMA Concepts & transfer types: Study of DMA controller 8237, Study of Programmable Timer 8254 & its modes. Data communication includes EIA RS-232C Standard, IEEE 488 GPIB.

509

7. 8087 Numeric Co-processor: 8087 NDP Architecture, Data types & formats, Numeric Instruction Set, Stacks in 8087, Interface of Coprocessor (8087) to Host (8086), ALP for 8086-8087 systems; Study of IOP 8089, its interaction with 8086. 8. Multiprocessor Systems: 8086/88 based Multiprocessor systems, Study of Multiprocessor configurations, Study of Bus Arbiter 8289, Bus arbitration & control using 8289.

BOOKS

Text Books:
1 1. Douglas Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware”, Tata McGraw-Hill.1999, Second Edition. 2. John Uffenback, ”8086/8088 Interfacing, Programming and Design”, 1987,PHI. 3. Yu-Cheng Liu, Glenn A. Gibson, “The 8086/8088 Family Architecture, Programming and Design”, PHI. 1986, Second Edition. 4. Peter Able, “IBM PC, Assembler Language Programming “, PHI.

510

References: 3. A. K. Ray, K. M. Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2000. 4. B. B. Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors”, PHI, 2003, Sixth Edition.
5. Peter Norton, “IBM PC, Assembly Language programming”, BPB publication. 6. Manuals from Intel.

200020- Technical Writing & presentation Skills

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Communication in a Business Organisation: Channels,media,internal and external, formal and informal, upward and downward, nonverbal. 2 Technical Writing Skills: definition, importance, qualities, choosing words, sentences and paragraphs; audience recognition.; principles of Business correspondence; job application and resumes. 3 Report Writing: types, qualities, , defining objectives and scope, organizing and interpreting information,, individual and group reports, formal and informal reports. 4 Technical Proposals 5 Presentation Skills 6 Group Discussion Assignments: Written One assignment each from topics 1 to 4 Oral One presentation One group discussion Books Recommended; 1 Lesikar and Petit; Report Writing for Business:McGraw Hill 2 Meenakshi Raman, Sharma Sangeetha Technical Communication:Oxford University Press .

511

308150- Computer Programming Lab

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Programming Assignments:
Students will implement programs adhering to good programming practices. Problems selected should be able to use the selected programming style and language appropriately. Suggested programming style is object-oriented programming and languages may be C++, java, VC++. The assignments should be approximately 10 in number and to be completed in about 5 weeks.

2. Problem solving assignment:
This will be a mini group project to be completed within the Institute in a span of about 10 weeks. Student group should select any one stream area like database programming, network programming, multimedia programming, system programming etc. and use the appropriate skill set to design and implement the mini project.

References:
A.D.Smith and P.D. Smith , “Graded Problems in Computer science “,AddisonWesley.

512

308160- Internet Technology and Applications

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Introduction: Introduction to Web Technology. TCP/IP. World Wide Web. Web Server. ClientServer Model. Routing. Gateways. 2. HTML: Introduction to Hypertext Markup Language; Common tags; Anchors; Backgrounds; Images; Web page structure; Hyper linking; Lists; Character Formatting; Color Control; Images; Tables; Frames; Multimedia; Cascading style sheet; Application with layers. 3. Client Side Programming (JavaScript, CGI, XML): Client-side Forms; JavaScript; Incorporating JavaScript in HTML; JavaScript expressions; Control flow and functions; String and Arrays; JavaScript objects; JavaScript Forms: Managing frames in JavaScript; Cookies; history; location. XML, XSL and other markup languages; CGI Scripting with Perl. 4. Servlets, ASP: Introduction to Servlets and Applets in Java. Dynamic Web pages: Need & Technology. Active Server Pages (ASP): Objects; Queries & Forms; Java Server Pages (JSP); ActiveX Controls and its objects; Using Databases on web. Internet Communication: Web architectures; Three Tier architectures; Intranets & Internet architecture; Protocols; IP addresses and Uniform Resource Locator (URL); Domain Name Systems (DNS); HTTP Protocol; Email: SMTP, POP, IMAP, MIME, Telnet, rlogin, FTP, TFTP, Introduction to Firewalls. Application: Introduction to E-Commerce; Business Strategy; Business to Business Electronics Commerce (B to B); Transactions; Electronics Data Interchange (EDI); Business to Consumers Electronics Commerce ( B to C); Element of E-commerce; E-Business; Establishing a Secure business on the Web; Web store; Online Payment; e-business; Internet Banking. Security: Electronic Commerce security issues. Cryptography. Digital Signature & Authentication protocol. Digital Certificates. Online Security: Secure Socket Layer (SSL); Web Security; Payment System Security; Secure Electronics Transaction (SET).

5.

6.

7.

513

TOPICS FOR EXPERIMENT
1. Assignments on Web Technology. (Minimum 2). 2. Practical on HTML Consisting of Tags, Images, Links, Tables, Frames, Animation (6 Practical, Minimum). 3. Practical on JavaScript, CGI/Perls, Java Servlets ( 5 Practical Minimum). 4. Build web store / e-commerce application. 5. Study, Installation and Configuration of WEB server.

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. 2. 3. 4. Kriss Jamsa, Konrad King,”HTML & Web Design”, TMH Publications. Box,”Essential XML” David Whitely,”e-Commerce “, TMH Publication William Stallings,” Cryptography and Network Security”, Pearson Education Publication. 5. Douglas E Comer,”Internetworking with TCP/IP”, Volume I.

References:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Steven Holzner, ”HTML Black Book”, Dreamtech Press. Vivek Sharma, Rajiv Sharma, ” Developing e-commerce Site”, Addison Wesley. Microsoft Commerce Solutions, Web technology, PHI. Jason Hunter, William Crawford. Java,” Servlet Programming”, O’REILY. Achyut Godbole , ” Web Technologies”, TMH Publication. Tom Negrino and Dori Smith, ” JavaScript for The World Wide Web”, 3rd Edition. Lovejoy, ” Essential of ASP for professionals”, Pearson Education.

308170- System Study and Operating System

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Assemblers: Single and two pass. 2. Macros:
Macro Definition; Macro Call; Expansion; Conditional Expansion. Preprocessor.

3. Loaders and Linkers:
Linking and Relocation. Design of Linkers. Self Relocation. Loaders.

514

4. Compilers:
Introduction to phases. Error Handling. Table Management.

5. Operating System:
Functions. Batch Processing. Multitasking. Time Sharing. Multiprogramming.

6. Process: Definition; Control; Data Structures. 7. Process Scheduling: Objective; Schedulers; Preemptive versus Non-preemptive Scheduling. Scheduling Algorithms. 8. Inter Process Communication:
Race condition; Critical section; Mutual Exclusion; Peterson’s Solution; Producer Consumer problem; Semaphores; Monitors; Message passing.

9. Deadlocks:
Condition; Detection; Recovery; Avoidance; Prevention; Banker’s Algorithm

10. Memory Management: Fixed and variable partition; Virtual Memory; Paging; Segmentation; Segmentation with Paging. 11. File Management:
File type and Attribute; Access and Security; File operation; Directory Allocation of disk space; File Sharing. Structure;

12. Devices:
Types; Access; System calls; Drivers.

13. Case Studies: Dos. Windows. UNIX.

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. 2. 3. 4. D.M. Dhamdhere , “System programming And Operating System”, TMH William Stallings ,“Operating Systems” . A.S.Tannenbaum ,“Modern Operating Systems” . John Donovan ,“Systems Programming”, TMH

References:
1. 2. 3. 4. Milan MilenKovic, “Operating Systems”, Tata Macgraw-Hill. Silberschatz, Galvin, Gagne, “Operating System concepts “, John Wiely. Nutt ,Operating Systems”, Pearson Education Dietel , “Operating Systems”, Pearson Education 515

5. Steven S Muchnick ,“Compiler Design implementation”, Morgan Kaufman.

308180- Software Engineering

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Process: Introduction, Processes, Methodology and Tools. Processes Model: Classic Life Cycle; Prototyping; Spiral; Incremental; RAD and Object Oriented Model. 2. Software Project Planning: Project Initiation. Defining a Problem. Developing Solution Strategy. Feasibility Study. Cost/ Benefit Analyses. 3. Project Management: Risk Analysis: Identification; Projection; Assessment; Monitoring and Managing the Risk. Project Scheduling: Task Definition; Project Tracking and Control. 4. Project Estimation: LOC Based Technique. FP Based Estimation. COCOMO Model. Effort Estimation. Empirical Model. Delphi Method of Cost Estimation 5. Requirement Engg: Requirement Gathering for small/medium /large Scale Projects. Requirement Elicitation. Requirement Tractability. Characteristics and Components of SRS: format of SRS (IEEE STD.). Requirement Specification Languages. Requirement Validation, Reviews, Formal Specification, Algebraic Specification, Model based Specification. Mathematical Verification and Validation of Specifications. 6. Software Configuration Management: Baselines. Version Control. Change Control. Configuration Audit. Tools for SCM. 7. Analysis: Principles of Analysis: Elements of Analysis Model; Data Modeling; Function Modeling; Information Flow. DFD.CFD for Real Time Systems. Data Dictionary. 8. Design-concepts: Design Principles and Modular Approach: Coupling & Cohesion. 9. Data Design: ERD. File Design. File Organization and Access Method for Different Applications. 10. Interface design: User Interface Design: Input Validations; Form Design; Menu Design; Subsystem Interface Design.

516

11. Architectural Design: Structured Chart. FDD. Design Metrics. 12. Procedural design: Program Design Language (PDL), Program Specifications (P-SPEC), and CTRL SPEC, Process Activation Table (PAT) for Real Time/Embedded Systems. 13. Testing: Explain Dynamic and Static Testing Methods. Test Plan. Libraries and Test Cases. Defect Tracking System. Exception Handling. Testing Batch Processing System Identification and Experiment with White Box Testing; Black Box Testing. Limitations of Testing Methods. Testing the Documentation. Testing Web Based Systems. Testing C/S Application. Testing RAD Models. 14. Implementation: Plan. Training Conversion. Hardware and Software Acquisition. Benchmarking. Post Implementation Review. 15. Maintenance: Log. Factors to Reduce Maintenance Cost. Maintainability. Metrics. 16. Software reliability and quality assurance: Reliability Matrices. Fault Avoidance Exception Handling. Defensive Programming. Quality Metrics. Quality Reviews Software Standards. Documentation Standards. Process Quality SEI’s CMM Levels. ISO Standards.

BOOKS

Text Books:
4. Roger Pressman, “Software Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 5th edition. 5. Ian Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, 6th edition.

References:
1.1. Pankaj Jalote, “Software Engineering “, Narosa

517

308190- Database Systems

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1.Introductory Database Concepts: Introduction to Data Processing; Overview of Files and File Systems. Drawbacks of File Systems; Concept of a Database. Database Systems Vs File systems. Data abstraction and Data Independence. Data Models; Database Languages; Database Users and Administrators. Transaction Management; Database System Structure.
2.Entity-Relationship

Model: Basic Concepts; Constraints; Design Issues; Entity-Relationship Diagram. Weak Entity Sets; Extended E-R Features. Design of an E-R Database Schema; Reduction of an E-R Schema to Tables.

3.Relational Model: Concept of a Relation: Primary and Secondary Keys, Foreign Keys. Structure of Relational Databases. The Relational Algebra and Extended RelationalAlgebra Operations. Formation of Queries; Modification of the Database; Views. 4. SQL: Background; Basic Structure. Set Operations; Aggregate Functions; Null Values. Nested Queries; Views; Complex Queries; Database Modification. DDL; Embedded SQL; Stored Procedures and Functions. Dynamic SQL; Other SQL Features. 5. Integrity and Security: Domain Constraints; Referential Integrity. Assertions; Triggers; Triggers and Assertions in SQL. Security and Authorization; Authorization in SQL.
6.

Relational-Database Design: First Normal Form; Pitfalls in Relational-Database Design. Functional Dependencies; Decomposition. Desirable Properties of Decomposition. Boyce–Codd Normal Form; 3rd and 4th Normal Form. Mention of other Normal Forms.

7. Transactions: Transaction Concept; Transaction State. Implementation of Atomicity and Durability. Concurrent Executions; Serializability; Recoverability. Implementation of Isolation; Transaction Definition in SQL. 8. Concurrency Control: Lock-Based Protocols; Timestamp-Based Protocols. Validation-Based Protocols; Multiple Granularity. Multiversion Schemes; Deadlock Handling. Insert and Delete Operations; Weak Levels of Consistency.
9.

Recovery System: 518

Failure Classification; Storage Structure. Recovery and Atomicity; Log-Based Recovery. Shadow Paging; Recovery with Concurrent Transactions. Buffer Management. 10. The Extended Entity Relationship Diagram: Motivation for complex data types. Subclasses, Superclasses, and Inheritance; Specialization and Generalization Category. Constraint and Characteristics of Specialization and Generalization. 11. Object-Oriented Databases: Overview of Object-Oriented Concepts; Object Identity, Object Structure, and Type Constructors; Encapsulation of Operations, Methods, and Persistence. Type Hierarchies and Inheritance; Type extents and Queries. Database Schema Design For OODBMS; Storage Issues. OQL; Persistent Programming Languages; Example of ODBMSs, - O2. 12. Object Relational and Extended Relational Databases:
Characteristics Of ORDBMS. Database Design For An ORDBMS: Nested Relations and Collections. Storage And Access methods; Query processing; An Overview of SQL3.

Implementation and Related Issues for Extended Type Systems. Comparison Of RDBMS, OODBMS, ORDBMS.

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Korth, Silberchatz, Sudarshan, “Database System Concepts”, 4th Edition, McGrawHill, 2002. 2. Elmasri and Navathe, “Fundamentals Of Database Systems”, 4th Edition, Addison Wesley.

References:
1. Peter Rob and Coronel, “Database Systems Design, Implementation and Management”, Thomson Learning, Fifth Edition. 2. C. J. Date “ Introduction to Database Systems”, 7th Edition, Addison Wesley. 3. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke “Database Management Systems”, McGrawHill. Third Edition

519

308200- Digital Signal Processing

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1.Discrete Time Signals & System: Discrete Time Signal: Sequences; Discrete Time System, Classification; Linear Time Invariant Systems, Its Properties; Frequency Domain Representation of Discrete Time Signals and Systems; Symmetry properties of the Fourier Transform, Fourier Transform Theorems. 2.Z- Transform L: Definition and Properties, the Region of Convergence; Bilateral Z Transform, Inverse Z – transform; Z transform properties. 3.Discrete Fourier Transform:
Representation of Periodic Sequence: The Discrete Fourier Series- Properties; Sampling in Time and Frequency Domain; Fourier Representation of Finite Duration Sequences: The Discrete Fourier Transform.- Properties ; Linear Convolution using the DFT; Two Dimensional DFT; Discrete Time Fourier Transform.

4.Realisation of Digital Linear Systems:
Introduction, Basic Realization, Block Diagram & the Signal Flow Graph; Basic Structures for IIR and FIR Systems.

5.Digital Filter Design Techniques: Design of IIR Digital Filters from analogue filters; Properties of FIR Digital Filters; Design of FIR Filters using Windows; Comparison of IIR and FIR Filters, Linear Phase Filters. 6.Computation of the Discrete Fourier Transform: Goertzel Algorithm; Decimation in Time algorithms; Decimation in Frequency algorithms; FFT algorithms for an N composite number; General Computational considerations in FFT algorithms; Chirps Z Transform algorithm. 7.Discrete Hilbert Transform: Real and Imaginary part Sufficiency for Causal Sequences; Minimum Phase Condition; Hilbert Transform Relations for the DFT and the Complex Sequences.

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Oppenhiem, Schaffer, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, (PHI), 2001. 2. Proakis J.G., “Introduction to Digital Signal Processing”, (PHI), 1997.

520

References: 1. Mitra S.K., "Digital Signal Processing: A Computer Based Approach", TMH
2. Johnson J.R., "introduction To Digital Signal Processing", PHI 3. Ashok Ambardar, “ Analog and Digital Signal Processing”, (Thompson Learning), 2002. 4. S Sallivahanan et al., “Digital Signal processing”, (TMH), 2000.

521

Programme: B Tech (Information Technology)

Semester VII

Course Code 308210 308220 308230 308240 -

Course Title Computer Simulation and Modeling Mobile Computing Image Processing Management Information Systems Elective-I Total L 4 4 4 4 4 20

Contact hours P/T 2 2 2 2 2 10 Total 6 6 6 6 6 30

Evaluation weightage Cr TWA MST ESE 10 15 15 70 10 10 10 10 50 15 15 15 15 -15 15 15 15 -70 70 70 70 --

ESE (Theory) Hours 3 3 3 3 3 --

Elective I
Course Code 408010 408020 408030 408040 408050 408060 Course Title L 4 4 4 4 4 4 Contact hours P/T 2 2 2 2 2 2 Total 6 6 6 6 6 6 Cr 10 10 10 10 10 10 Evaluation weightage TWA MST ESE 15 15 70 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 70 70 ESE (Theory) Hours 3 3 3 3 3 3

Programming with components Pattern Recognition Speech Reorganization Embedded Systems Advanced Database System Advanced Computer Networks

522

Semester VIII

Course Code 308250 308260 308270 -

Course Title L 4 4 4 4 16

Contact hours P/T 2 2 2 2 8 Total 6 6 6 6 24 Cr 10 10 10 10 40

Data Warehousing and Mining. Multimedia Systems Project management Elective-II Total

Evaluation weightage TWA MST ESE 15 15 70 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 70 70

ESE (Theory) Hours 3 3 3 3

Elective II
Course Code 408110 408120 408130 Course Title L 4 4 4 Contact hours P/T 2 2 2 Total 6 6 6 Cr 10 10 10 Evaluation weightage TWA MST ESE 15 15 70 15 15 70 15 15 70 ESE (Theory) Hours 3 3 3

408140

408150 408160

Robotics Computer Vision Geographical Information System Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems Software Testing Information Security

4

2

6

10

15

15

70

3

4 4

2 2

6 6

10 10

15 15

15 15

70 70

3 3

523

Project: Sr. Course No. Code 1

Course Title Project

L

P

T

408900

Cr TW MS ESE ESE A T (Theory) Hrs 8 See note below

• •

The project is evaluated in two stages. The first stage evaluation shall be done at the end of pre-final semester by a Committee of Institute faculty (at least two faculty members including project guide). The Project Guide along with an external examiner shall do the second stage evaluation at the end of final semester. The first stage assessment shall have 25% weightage. Another 25% weightage shall be given for the initiative, interest, effort and sincerity shown by the student during the entire project work. The second stage assessment shall have 50% weightage. The first stage evaluation is to be carried out after a minimum of 12 weeks of work. The project report should be submitted in the prescribed format at least three weeks prior to the end of final semester or by the prescribed date and second stage assessment can be done in the last week of semester. The project shall carry 08 credits. The grade for the project shall be declared only after second stage evaluation.

524

(308210) COMPUTER SIMULATION AND MODELING

Objective: In the last five decades digital computer simulation has developed from infancy to a full-fledged discipline. The field of modeling and simulation is as diverse as of man. The application of simulation continues to expand, both in terms of extent to which simulation is used and the range of applications. This course gives a comprehensive and state of art treatment of all the important aspects of a simulation study, including modeling, simulation software, model verification and validation, input modeling. Pre-Requisite: Probability and Statistics

DETAILED SYLLABUS
14. Introduction to Simulation: System and System environment, Components of system, Type of systems, Type of models, Steps in simulation study, Advantages and Disadvantages of simulation. 15. Simulation Examples: Simulation of Queueing systems, Other examples of simulation. 16. General Principles: Concepts of discrete event simulation, List processing, 17. Simulation Software: History of simulation software, Desirable software features, General-purpose simulation packages, Object oriented simulation, Trends in simulation software. 18. Statistical Models in Simulation: Useful statistical model, Discrete distribution, Continuous distribution, Poisson process, Empirical distribution. 19. Queueing Models: Characteristics of Queueing systems, Queueing notations, Long run measures of performance of Queueing systems, Steady state behavior of infinite population Markovian models, Steady state behavior finite population model, Network of Queues. 20. Random Number Generation: Properties of random numbers, Generation of pseudo random numbers, Techniques for generating random numbers, Tests for random numbers. 21. Random Variate Generation: Inverse transform technique, Convolution method, Acceptance rejection techniques 22. Input Modeling: Data Collection, Identifying the Distribution of data, Parameter estimation, Goodness of fit tests, Selection input model without data, Multivariate and Time series input models. 23. Verification and Validation of Simulation Model: Model building, Verification, and Validation, Verification of simulation models, Calibration and Validation of models. 24. Output Analysis for a Single Model: Types of simulations with respect to output 525

analysis, Stochastic nature of output data, Measure of performance and their estimation, Output analysis of terminating simulators, Output analysis for steady state simulation 25. Comparison and Evaluation of Alternative System Design: Comparison of two system design, Comparison of several system design, Meta modeling, Optimization via simulation. 26. Case Studies: Simulation of manufacturing systems, Simulation of computer systems, Simulation of super market, Simulation of pert network

BOOKS

Text Books:
3. Jerry Banks, John Carson, Barry Nelson, David Nicol, “Discrete Event System Simulation” 4. Averill Law, W. David Kelton, “Simulation Modeling and Analysis”, McGRAW-HILL

References:
6. Geffery Gordon, “System Simulation”, PHI 7. Bernard Zeigler, Herbert Praehofer, Tag Gon Kim, “Theory of Modeling and Simulation”, Academic Press 8. Narsing Deo, “System Simulation with Digital Computer”, PHI 9. Donald W. Body, “System Analysis and Modeling”, Academic Press Harcourt India 10. W David Kelton, Randall Sadowski, Deborah Sadowski, “Simulation with Arena”, McGRAW-HILL.

(308220) MOBILE COMPUTING

Objective: Recent developments in portable devices and high-bandwidth, ubiquitous wireless networks has made mobile computing a reality. Indeed, it is widely predicted that within the next few years’ access to Internet services will be primarily from wireless devices, with desktop browsing the exception. Such predictions are based on the huge growth in the wireless phone market and the success of wireless data services. This course will help in understanding fundamental concepts, current developments in mobile communication systems and wireless computer networks. Pre-requisites: Computer Networks.

526

DETAILED SYLLABUS
12. Introduction: Applications, A short history of wireless communication 13. Wireless Transmission: Frequency for radio transmission, Signals, Antennas, Signal propagation, Multiplexing, Modulation, Spread spectrum, Cellular systems. 14. Medium Access Control: Motivation for a specialized MAC: Hidden and Exposed terminals. Near and Far terminals; SDMA, FDMA, TDMA: Fixed TDM, Classical Aloha, Slotted Aloha, Carrier sense multiple access, Demand assigned multiple access, PRMA packet reservation multiple access, Reservation TDMA, Multiple access with collision avoidance, Polling, Inhibit sense multiple access; CDMA: Spread Aloha multiple access. 15. Telecommunication Systems: GSM: Mobile services, System architecture, Radio interface, Protocols, Localization And Calling, Handover, Security, New data services; DECT: System architecture, Protocol architecture; TETRA, UMTS and IMT-2000: UMTS Basic architecture, UTRA FDD mode, UTRA TDD mode 16. Satellite Systems: History, Applications, Basics: GEO, LEO, MEO; Routing, Localization, Handover, Examples 17. Broadcast Systems: Overview, Cyclic repetition of data, Digital audio broadcasting: Multimedia object transfer protocol; Digital video broadcasting 18. Wireless LAN: Infrared vs. Radio transmission, Infrastructure and Ad hoc Networks, IEEE 802.11: System architecture, Protocol architecture, Physical layer, Medium access control layer, MAC management, Future development; HIPERLAN: Protocol architecture, Physical layer, Channel access control. Sublayer, Medium access control Sublayer, Information bases And Networking; Bluetooth: User scenarios, Physical layer, MAC layer, Networking. Security, Link management. 19. Wireless ATM: Motivation for WATM, Wireless ATM working group, WATM services, Reference model: Example configurations, Generic reference model; Functions: Wireless mobile terminal side, Mobility supporting network side; Radio access layer: Requirements, BRAN; Handover: Handover reference model, Handover requirements, Types of handover, Handover scenarios, Backward handover, Forward handover; Location management: Requirements for location management, Procedures and Entities; Addressing, Mobile quality of service, Access point control protocol 20. Mobile Network Layer: Mobile IP: Goals, assumptions and requirements, Entities and Terminology, IP packet delivery, Agent advertisement and discovery, Registration, Tunneling and Encapsulation , Optimizations, Reverse tunneling, Ipv6; Dynamic host configuration protocol, Ad hoc networks: Routing, Destination sequence distance vector, Dynamic source routing, Hierarchical algorithms, Alternative metrics 21. Mobile Transport Layer: Traditional TCP: Congestion control, Slow start, Fast retransmit/fast recovery, Implications on mobility; Indirect TCP, Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Fast retransmit/fast recovery, Transmission/time-out freezing, Selective retransmission, Transaction oriented TCP 22. Support for Mobility: File systems: Consistency, Examples; World Wide Web: Hypertext transfer protocol, Hypertext markup language, Some approaches that might help wireless access, System architectures; Wireless application protocol: Architecture, Wireless datagram protocol, Wireless transport layer security, Wireless transaction protocol, Wireless session protocol, Wireless application environment, Wireless markup language, WML script, Wireless telephony application, Examples Stacks with Wap, Mobile databases, Mobile agents

527

BOOKS
Text Books: 1. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile communications”, Addison wisely , Pearson Education 2. Wiiliam Stallings, “Wireless Communications and Networks” References : 6. Rappaort, “Wireless Communications Principals and Practices” 7. YI Bing Lin , “Wireless and Mobile Network Architectures”, John Wiley 8. P. Nicopolitidis , “Wireless Networks”, John Wiley 9. K Pahlavan, P. Krishnamurthy , “Principles of Wireless Networks” 10. M. Richharia , “Mobile Satellite Communication: Principles and Trends”, Pearson Education

528

(308230) IMAGE PROCESSING

Objective: Digital Image Processing is a rapidly evolving field with growing applications in science and engineering. Image processing holds the possibility of developing the ultimate machine that could perform the visual functions of all living beings. There is an abundance of image processing applications that can serve mankind with the available and anticipated technology in the near future. Pre-requisites: Digital Signal Processing

DETAILED SYLLABUS
10. Introduction to Computer Graphics: Geometry and line generation, Graphics primitives, Transformations 11. Digital Image Processing Systems: Introduction, Structure of human eye, Image formation in the human eye, Brightness adaptation and discrimination, Image sensing and acquisition, Storage, Processing, Communication, Display. Image sampling and quantization, Basic relationships between pixels 12. Image Transforms (Implementation): Introduction to Fourier transform, DFT and 2D DFT, Properties of 2-D DFT, FFT, IFFT, Walsh transform, Hadamard transform, Discrete cosine transform, Slant transform, Optimum transform: Karhunen - Loeve (Hotelling) transform. 13. Image Enhancement in the Spatial Domain: Gray level transformations, Histogram processing, Arithmetic and logic operations, Spatial filtering: Introduction, Smoothing and sharpening filters 14. Image Enhancement in the Frequency Domain: Frequency domain filters: Smoothing and Sharpening filters, Homomorphic filtering 15. Wavelets and Multiresolution Processing: Image pyramids, Subband coding, Haar transform, Series expansion, Scaling functions, Wavelet functions, Discrete wavelet transforms in one dimensions, Fast wavelet transform, Wavelet transforms in two dimensions 16. Image Data Compression: Fundamentals, Redundancies: Coding, Interpixel, Psychovisual, Fidelity criteria, Image compression models, Error free compression, Lossy compression, Image compression standards: Binary image and Continuous tone still image compression standards, Video compression standards. 17. Morphological Image Processing: Introduction, Dilation, Erosion, Opening, Closing, Hit-or-Miss transformation, Morphological algorithm operations on binary images, Morphological algorithm operations on gray-scale images 18. Image Segmentation: Detection of discontinuities, Edge linking and Boundary detection, Thresholding, Region based segmentation 19. Image Representation and Description: Representation schemes, Boundary descriptors, Regional descriptors

529

BOOKS

Text Books:
4. R.C.Gonsales R.E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Second Edition, Pearson Education 5. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Image Processing”, PHI

References:
4. William Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Wiley

5. S. Harrrington, “Computer Graphics”, McGraw Hill
6. Milan Sonka,Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision” Thomson Learning 6. N Ahmed & K.R. Rao, “Orthogonal Transforms for Digital Signal Processing” Springer

7. B. Chanda, D. Dutta Majumder, “Digital Image Processing and Analysis”, PHI

530

(308240) MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

Objectives: To enable students to understand the role and importance of information system Pre-requisites: Computer fundamentals, DBMS

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Foundation of Information System: Introduction to Information System and MIS, Decision support and decision making systems, systems approach, the systems view of business, MIS organization within company, Management information and the systems approach. 2. Information Technology: A manager’s overview, managerial overviews, computer hardware & software, , DBMS, RDBMS and Telecommunication. 3. Conceptual System Design: Define the problems, set systems objective, establish system constraints, determine information needs determine information sources, develop alternative conceptual design and select one document the system concept, prepare the conceptual design report. 4. Detailed System Design: Inform and involve the organization, aim of detailed design, project management of MIS detailed design , identify dominant and trade of criteria, define the sub systems, sketch the detailed operating sub systems and information flow, determine the degree of automation of each operation, inform and involve the organization again, inputs outputs and processing, early system testing, software, hardware and tools propose and organization to operate the system, document the detailed design revisit the manager user. 5. Implementation Evaluation and Maintenance of the MIS: Plan the implementation, acquire floor space and plan space layouts, organize for implementation, develop procedures for implementation, train the operating personnel, computer related acquisitions, develop forms for data collection and information dissemination, develop the files test the system, cut-over, document the system, evaluate the MIS control and maintain the system. Pitfalls in MIS development . 6. Advanced Concepts in Information Systems: Enterprise Resources Management(ERP), Supply Chain Management, C R M , Procurement Management System. 7. Applications: Applications of MIS in Manufacturing sector, Service sector

BOOKS
Text Books: 1. W.S. Jawadekar, “Management Information System”, TMH. 2. Gordon B. Davis and M.H. Olson, “Management Information System”, McGraw Hill.

531

References:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. J.A. O’Brien, “Management Information System”, TMH. K.C. Laudon, J.P. Laudon, “Management Information System” Turban, Rainer, Potter, “Introduction to Information Technology”, John Wiley D.P. Goyal, “Management Information System”, Macmillan G.V. Post, D.L. Anderson, “Management Information System”, TMH. Steven Alter, “Information Systems”, Pearson Education.

532

(408010) PROGRAMMING WITH COMPONENTS (ELECTIVE-I)

Objectives of the course: COM addresses software design in a very pragmatic way. Instead of providing a solution based on almost religious academic dogma of object oriented programming, COM’s design takes into account both human nature and capitalism. COM is mostly widely used object model for developing distributed and concurrent systems. Aim of this subject to study and learn COM and use COM to deploy such systems successfully. Pre-requisites: C++, Java Programming, OOAD

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Introduction to object oriented systems: Preview of Object-orientation, Concept of distributed object systems, Reasons to distribute for centralized objects. Mapping objects to locations. Object oriented system architecture, client-server system architecture, multi tier system architectures. Design of object oriented system architecture and component technology compound document. 2. Introduction to distributed objects: Computing standards, OMG, Overview of CORBA, Overview of COM/DCOM and of an open doc, Overview of Object Web, Overview of java, Enterprise java beans. 3. Component Object Model (COM) introduction: Com as better C++ software distribution, Dynamic linking, Separating interface and COM implementation, Run time polymorphism, Introduction to DCOM. 4. Interface in COM-DCOM: Introduction to interfaces, Interface definition language (IDL), Interface and IDL, Using COM interface pointers, Optimizing query interface, Code sharing and reuse. 5. Classes and Objects in COM-DCOM: Introduction, Classes and servers, Optimizations, Classes and IDL, Class emulation, Query interface types and properties, Object services and dynamic composition. 6. Apartments: Cross-apartments access, lifecycle management. 7. CORBA: Introduction and concepts, distributed objects in CORBA, CORBA components, architectural features, method invocations static and dynamic: IDL (Interface Definition Language) models and interfaces. Structure of CORBA IDL, CORBA’s self-describing data; CORBA interface repository. 8. CORBA Services: Services for object naming, Object lifecycle, Event, Transaction service features, concurrency control services, persistent object service and CORBA security service. 9. Enterprise Java Beans 10. JAVA Interface: JNI interface with C++, VC++. 11. Object Web: web technologies interfacing with distributed objects over client server and distribute architecture. 533

BOOKS
Text Books: 6. Booch, Jacobson, Rambug, “Essential COM”, Pearson Education 7. Don Box, “Essential COM”, Pearson Education. 8. Jason Pritchard, “COM and CORBA side by side”, Pearson Education.

References:
Tom Valesky, “Enterprise Java Beans”, Pearson Education

534

(408020) PATTERN RECOGNITION (ELECTIVE-I)

Objective: This course teaches the fundamentals of techniques for classifying multidimensional data, to be utilized for problem-solving in a wide variety of applications, such as engineering system design, manufacturing, technical and medical diagnostics, image processing, economics, psychology. Pre-requisite: Linear Algebra, Probability and Statistics

DETAILED SYLLABUS
Introduction: Machine perception, Pattern recognition systems, Design cycle, Learning and Adaptation Bayesian Decision Theory: Bayesian decision theory: Continuous features, Minimumerror rate classification, classification, Classifiers, Discriminant functions and Decision surfaces, Normal density, Discriminant functions for normal density, Bayes Decision theory: discrete features Maximum-Likelihood and Bayesian Parameter Estimation: Maximum likelihood estimation, Bayesian estimation, Bayesian parameter estimation: Gaussian caseand General theory, Prolems of dimentionality, Hidden Markov Model Nonparametric Techniques: Density estimation, Parzen windows, kn-Nearest-Neighbor estimation, Nearest-Neighbor rule, Matrics and Nearest-Neighbor classification Linear Discriminants Functions: Linear discriminant functions and decision surfaces, Generalised linear discriminant functions, 2-Category linearly separable case, Minimising the Perceptron criterion function, Relaxation procedure, Non-separable behavior, Minimum squared error procedure, Ho-Kashyap procedures, Multicategory generalizations Nonmetric Methods: Decision tree, CART, ID3, C4.5, Gramatical methods, Gramatical interfaces Algorithm Independent Machine Learning: Lack of inherent superiority of any classifier, Bias and Variance, Resampling for estimating statistic, Resampling for classifier design, Estimating and comparing classifiers, Combining classifiers Unsupervised Learning and Clustering: Mixture densities and Identifiability, Maximum-Likelihood estimations, Application to normal mixtures, Unsupervised Bayesian learning, Data description and clustering criterion function for clustering, Hierarchical clustering Applications of Pattern Recognition

535

BOOKS

Text Books:
Duda, Hart, and Stock, “Pattern Classification”, John Wiley and Sons. Gose, Johnsonbaugh and Jost, “Pattern Recognition and Image analysis”, PHI

536

(408030) SPEECH RECOGNITION (ELECTIVE-I)

Objectives: Develop an understanding of the relationship of vocal tract shapes and physical acoustics to the acoustic speech signal. Use a spectrum analyzer to relate the acoustic speech signal to acoustical processes. Design and implement digital filters to synthesize speech and code speech at a low bit rate. Implement speech analysis and speech synthesis modules using object-oriented software programs, using techniques such as class derivation, the use of software objects as components in a larger software system. Pre-requisites: Digital Signal Processing

DETAILED SYLLABUS
Fundamentals Of Speech Recognition: Introduction, The paradigm for speech Recognition, out line, Brief history of speech recognition research. The Speech Signal: Production, reception, and Acoustic-phonetic characterization: The speech production system, Representing speech in time and frequency domains, Speech Sounds and features, Approaches to automatic speech recognition by machine. Signal Processing And Analysis Methods For Speech Recognition: The bank-of-filters front-end processor. Linear predictive model for speech recognition, Vector quantization, Auditory based Spectral analysis model. Pattern Comparison Techniques: Speech detection, Distortion Measures-Mathematical Considerations, Distortion Measures-Perceptual Considerations, Spectral-Distortion Measures, Incorporation of spectral dynamic features into distortion measures, Time Alignment and Normalization. Speech Recognition System Design And Implementation Issues: Application of source coding techniques to recognition, Template training methods, Performance analysis and recognition enhancements, Template adoption to new talkers, Discriminative methods in speech recognition, Speech recognition in adverse environment. Theory And Implementation Of Hidden Markov Models: Discrete time Markov processes, Extensions to hidden Markov Models, The three basic problems for HMMs, Types of HMMs, Implementation issues for HMMs, HMM system for isolated word recognition Speech Recognition Based On Connected Words Models: General notations for the connected Word-Recognition problem, The two level dynamic programming algorithm, The level building algorithm, The one pass algorithm, Multiple candidate strings, Grammar networks for connected digit recognition, Segmental K-Means training procedure, Connected digit recognition implementation. Large Vocabulary Continuous Speech Recognition. Task Oriented Applications Of Automatic Speech Recognition

537

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. L. Rabiner and B. Juang, “Fundamentals of Speech Recognition”, Pearson Education. 2. L R Rabiner and RW Schafer, “Digital Processing of Speech Signals”, Pearson Education.

References:
B. Gold and N. Morgan, “Speech and Audio Signal Processing”, John Wiley. D. Jurafsky and J.H. Martin, “Speech and Language Processing”, Pearson Education.

538

( 408040) EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE-I)

Objective: Embedded system tools and products are evolving rapidly. This course deals with various approaches to building embedded systems. It introduces unified view of hardware and software. The aim of this course is to make the students aware of the various applications of embedded systems. Pre-requisites: Microprocessors and C Programming

DETAILED SYLLABUS
7. An overview of embedded systems: Introduction to embedded systems, Categories and requirements of embedded systems, Challenges and issues related to embedded software development, Hardware/Software co-design, Introduction to IC technology, Introduction to design technology 8. Embedded Software development: Concepts of concurrency, processes, threads, mutual exclusion and inter-process communication, Models and languages for embedded software, Synchronous approach to embedded system design, Scheduling paradigms, Scheduling algorithms, Introduction to RTOS, Basic design using RTOS 9. Embedded C Language: Real time methods, Mixing C and Assembly, Standard I/O functions, Preprocessor directives, Study of C compilers and IDE, Programming the target device 10. Hardware for embedded systems: Various interface standards, Various methods of interfacing, Parallel I/O interface, Blind counting synchronization and Gadfly Busy waiting, Parallel port interfacing with switches, keypads and display units, Memory and high speed interfacing, Interfacing of data acquisition systems, Interfacing of controllers, Serial communication interface, Implementation of above concepts using C language 11. Study of ATMEL RISC Processor: Architecture, Memory, Reset and interrupt , functions, Parallel I/O ports, Timers/Counters, Serial communication, Analog interfaces, Implementation of above concepts using C language, Implementation of above concepts using C language 12. Case studies and Applications of embedded systems: Applications to: Communication, Networking, Database, Process Control, Case Studies of: Digital Camera, Network Router, RTLinux

539

BOOKS

Text Books:
4. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems”, TMH 5. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer ", Pearson Education 6. Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillispie Mazidi, “The 8051Microcontroller and Embedded Systems", Pearson Education

References:
6. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design: A Unified Hardware/Software Introduction", John Wiley 7. Craig Hollabaugh, “Embedded Linux", Pearson Education 8. Daniel Lewis, “Fundamentals of Embedded Software”, Pearson Education. 9. Barnett, Cox, O’Cull, “Embedded C Programming and the Atmel AVR ", Thomson Learning 10. Myke Predko, “Programming and Customizing the 8051 Microcontroller”, TMH

(408050) ADVANCED DATABASE SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE-I)

Objectives: To study the further database techniques beyond which covered in the second year, and thus to acquaint the students with some relatively advanced issues. At the end of the course students should be able to: gain an awareness of the basic issues in objected oriented data models, learn about the Web-DBMS integration technology and XML for Internet database applications, familiarize with the data-warehousing and data-mining techniques and other advanced topics, apply the knowledge acquired to solve simple problems Pre-requisites: Database Systems, OOAD.

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. The Extended Entity Relationship Model and Object Model: The ER model revisited, Motivation for complex data types, User defined abstract data types and structured types, Subclasses, Super classes, Inheritance, Specialization and Generalization, Constraints and characteristics of specialization and Generalization, 540

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Relationship types of degree higher than two. Object-Oriented Databases: Overview of Object-Oriented concepts, Object identity, Object structure, and type constructors, Encapsulation of operations, Methods, and Persistence, Type hierarchies and Inheritance, Type extents and queries, Complex objects; Database schema design for OODBMS; OQL, Persistent programming languages; OODBMS architecture and storage issues; Transactions and Concurrency control, Example of ODBMS Object Relational and Extended Relational Databases: Database design for an ORDBMS - Nested relations and collections; Storage and access methods, Query processing and Optimization; An overview of SQL3, Implementation issues for extended type; Systems comparison of RDBMS, OODBMS, ORDBMS Parallel and Distributed Databases and Client-Server Architecture: Architectures for parallel databases, Parallel query evaluation; Parallelizing individual operations, Sorting, Joins; Distributed database concepts, Data fragmentation, Replication, and allocation techniques for distributed database design; Query processing in distributed databases; Concurrency control and Recovery in distributed databases. An overview of Client-Server architecture Databases on the Web and Semi Structured Data: Web interfaces to the Web, Overview of XML; Structure of XML data, Document schema, Querying XML data; Storage of XML data, XML applications; The semi structured data model, Implementation issues, Indexes for text data Enhanced Data Models for Advanced Applications: Active database concepts. Temporal database concepts.; Spatial databases, Concepts and architecture; Deductive databases and Query processing; Mobile databases, Geographic information systems.

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. Elmasri and Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education 2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems”, McGrawHill

References:
1. Korth, Silberchatz, Sudarshan , “Database System Concepts”, McGraw-Hill. 2. Peter Rob and Coronel, “Database Systems, Design, Implementation and Management”, Thomson Learning. 3. C.J.Date, Longman, “Introduction To Database Systems”, Pearson Education

541

(408060) ADVANCED COMPUTER NETWORKS (ELECTIVE-I)

Objectives: In first part, Advanced technologies like High speed Devices etc. are to be considered. Second part Network programming is to be studied. Not just SOCKETS but also protocols, Drivers, Simulation Programming. In third part we should study Network Design, Protocols designs and analysis considering deterministic and non-deterministic approach. We expect natural thinking from student. For example he should able to consider different constraints and assume suitable data and solve the problems. Pre-requisites: Computer networks

DETAILED SYLLABUS
16. Data Communications: Business Drivers and Networking Directions : Data communication Past and future. 17. Understanding the standards and their maker: Creating standards: players and Process, Current forums, Standard protocols, Layered reference models: The OSIRM, Standard computer architectures. 18. Introduction to Transmission Technologies: Hardware selection in the design process. 19. Optical Networking: SONET/SDH standards, Dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM), Performance and Design considerations. 20. Physical Layer Protocols and Access Technologies: Physical Layer Protocols and Interfaces, Accessing the Network, Copper access technologies, Cable Access Technologies, Fiber Access Technologies, Air Access Technologies. 21. Common Protocols and Interfaces in the LAN environment: Data link layers protocols, LLC and MAC sub layer protocol, Ethernet, Token Ring, Token Bus and FDDI, Bridge protocols, Switching in the LAN environment. 22. Frame Relay: FR specification and design, VoFR: Performance and Design considerations, Advantages and disadvantages of FR. 23. Common WAN Protocol: ATM: Many faces of ATM, ATM protocol operation (ATM cell and Transmission), ATM networking basics, Theory of operations, B-ISDN protocol reference model, PHY layer, ATM layer (Protocol model), ATM layer and cell (Definition), Traffic descriptors and parameters, Traffic and Congestion control defined, AAL Protocol model, Traffic contract and QoS, User plane overview, Control plane AAL, Management plane, Sub-DS3 ATM, ATM public services. 24. Common Protocols and Interfaces in the Upper Layers(TCP/IP): Background (Routing protocols), TCP/IP suite, Network layer (Internetwork layer), Transport layer, Application layer, Addressing and routing design. 25. Mature Packet Switched Protocol: ITU Recommendation X.25, User connectivity,

542

Theory of Operation, Network layer functions, X.75 Internetworking protocol, switched multimegabit data service (SMDS), SMDS and IEEE 802.6, Subscriber Interface and Access protocol, Addressing and Traffic control. 26. Requirements Definition: User requirements, Traffic sizing, Traffic characteristics, Protocols, Time and Delay considerations, Connectivity, Availability, Reliability and Maintainability, Service aspects, Budget constraints,. 27. Traffic Engineering and Capacity planning: Background (Throughput calculations) , Traffic engineering basics (Traffic characteristics), Traditional Traffic engineering, Queued data and packet switched traffic modeling, Designing for peaks, Delay or Latency, Availability and reliability, Network performance modeling, Creating the traffic matrix, Capacity planning and Network vision, Design tool, Categories of tools, Classes of design tool, Components of design projects, Types of design projects. 28. Technology Comparisons: Circuits-message-packet and cell switching methods, Packet switching service aspects, Generic packet switching network characteristics, Private verses public networking, Public network service selection, Business aspects of Packet-Frame and cell switching services, High speed LAN protocols comparisons, Application performance needs. 29. Access Network Design: Network design layers, Access layer design, Access network capacity, network topology and hardware, completing the access network design. 30. Backbone Network Design: Backbone requirements, Network capacities, Topologies, Topologies strategies, Tuning the network.

BOOKS

Text Books:
Darren L Spohn, “Data Network Design”, TMH D. Bertsekas, R. Gallager, “Data Networks”, PHI

References:
W.R. Stevens, “Unix Network Programming”, Vol.1, Pearson Education J.Walrand, P. Varaiya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Morgan Kaufmann Y. Zheng, S. Akhtar, “Networks for Computer Scientists and Engineers”, Oxford A.S. Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks” Peterson & Davie, “Computer Networks”, Harcourt Asia. James D. McCabe , “Practical Computer Analysis and Design”, Harcourt Asia.

543

(308250) DATA WAREHOUSING AND MINING

Objectives of the course: The data warehousing part of module aims to give students a good overview of the ideas and techniques which are behind recent development in the data warehousing and online analytical processing (OLAP) fields, in terms of data models, query language, conceptual design methodologies, and storage techniques. Data mining part of the model aims to motivate, define and characterize data mining as process; to motivate, define and characterize data mining applications. Pre-requisites: DBMS

DETAILED SYLLABUS
Data Warehousing: 7. Overview And Concepts: Need for data warehousing, Basic elements of data warehousing, Trends in data warehousing. 8. Planning And Requirements: Project planning and management, Collecting the requirements. 9. Architecture And Infrastructure: Architectural components, Infrastructure and metadata. 10. Data Design And Data Representation: Principles of dimensional modeling, Dimensional modeling advanced topics, data extraction, transformation and loading, data quality. 11. Information Access And Delivery: Matching information to classes of users, OLAP in data warehouse, Data warehousing and the web. 12. Implementation And Maintenance: Physical design process, data warehouse deployment, growth and maintenance. Data Mining: 9. Introduction: Basics of data mining, related concepts, Data mining techniques. 10. Data Mining Algorithms: Classification, Clustering, Association rules. 11. Knowledge Discovery : KDD Process 12. Web Mining: Web Content Mining, Web Structure Mining, Web Usage mining. 13. Advanced Topics: Spatial mining, Temporal mining. 14. Visualisation : Data generalization and summarization-based characterization, Analytical characterization: analysis of attribute relevance, Mining class comparisons: Discriminating between different classes, Mining descriptive statistical measures in large databases 15. Data Mining Primitives, Languages, and System Architectures: Data mining primitives, Query language, Designing GUI based on a data mining query language, Architectures of data mining systems 16. Application and Trends in Data Mining: Applications, Systems products and research prototypes, Additional themes in data mining, Trends in data mining 544

BOOKS

Text Books:
4. Paulraj Ponnian, “Data Warehousing Fundamentals”, John Wiley. 5. M.H. Dunham, “Data Mining Introductory and Advanced Topics”, Pearson Education. 6. Han, Kamber, “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Morgan Kaufmann

References:
6. Ralph Kimball, “The Data Warehouse Lifecycle toolkit”, John Wiley. 7. M Berry and G. Linoff, “Mastering Data Mining”, John Wiley. 8. W.H. Inmon, “Building the Data Warehouses”, Wiley Dreamtech. 9. R. Kimpall, “The Data Warehouse Toolkit”, John Wiley. 10. E.G. Mallach, “Decision Support and Data Warehouse systems”, TMH.

545

(308260) MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS

Objectives of the course: This course teaches students to collect, and intelligently integrate multiple media on computers. Students learn the issues involved in capturing, compressing, processing, manipulating, searching, indexing, storing, and retrieving various kinds of continuous media in the text section. Pre-requisites: Operating Systems, Computer Networks

DETAILED SYLLABUS
12. Multimedia Systems Introduction: Multimedia application, Multimedia system architecture, Evolving technologies for multimedia systems, defining objects for multimedia systems, Multimedia data interface standards 13. Compression and Decompression: Types of compression, Binary image compression schemes, Color, Gray scale, Still video image compression, Video image compression, Audio compression, Fractal compression, Data and File Format Standards: Rich text format, TIFF, RIFF, MIDI, JPEG, AVI, MPEG 14. Multimedia Input/Output Technologies: Key technologies issues, Pen input, Video and Image display system, Printout technology, Image scanners, Digital Voice and Audio, Full motion video 15. Storage and Retrieval Technologies: Magnetic media technology, Optical media, Hierarchical storage management, Cache management for storage system, Image and video databases: Indexing and Retrieval 16. Architectural and Telecommunications Considerations: Specialized computational processors, Memory systems, Multimedia board solutions, LAN/WAN connectivity, Multimedia transport across ATM networks, Multimedia across wireless, Distributed object models 17. Multimedia Networking: Multimedia networking applications, Streaming stored audio and video, RTP, Scheduling and policing mechanisms, Integrated services, RSVP 18. Multimedia Application Design: Multimedia application classes, Types of multimedia systems, Virtual reality design, Components of multimedia systems, Organizing multimedia databases, application workflow design issues, Distributed application design issues, Applications like Interactive, Television, Video Conferencing, Videoon-demand, Educational applications and authoring, Industrial applications, Multimedia archives and digital libraries 19. Multimedia Authoring and User Interface: Multimedia authoring systems, Hyper media application design considerations, User interface design, information access, Object display/playback issues 20. Hyper Media Messaging: Mobile messaging, Hyper media message components, Hypermedia linking and embedding, Creating hypermedia messages, integrated multimedia message standards, Integrated document management, The world-wide web, Open hypermedia systems, Content based navigation. 21. Distributed Multimedia Systems: Components of distributed multimedia systems, 546

Distributed client server operations, Multimedia object servers, Multi-server network topologies, Distributed multimedia database, Managing distributed objects 22. Multimedia System Design: Methodology and considerations, Multimedia systems design examples.

Books

Text Books:
5. Prabhat K. Andheigh, Kiran Thakrar, “Multimedia Systems Design”, PHI John F, 6. Koegel Buford, “Multimedia Systems”, Pearson Education.

References :
7. Free Halshall, “Multimedia Communications”, Pearson Education. 8. R. Steimnetz, K. Nahrstedt, “Multimedia Computing, Communications and Applications”, Pearson Education 9. K.R. Rao, D. Milovanovic, “Multimedia Communication Systems: Techniques, Standards, and Networks” 10. Subrahmanian, “Multimedia Database Systems”, M. Kaufman 11. J. D. Gibson, “Multimedia Communications: Directions and Innovations”, Academic Press, Hardcourt India 12. J.F. Kurose, K.W. Ross, “Computer Networking”, Pearson Education

547

(308270) PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Objectives: This course will help to identify key areas of concern and uses of measurement for project management, define indicators based upon what a project manager would want to know, use measurement to support decision making, understand where measurement is used from the perspective of a generic management process Pre-requisite: Software Engineering

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Project Management: Introduction, Need, Goals, Evolution, Project environments, Systems, Organizations, and System methodologies. 2. Systems Development Cycle: Early stages: Life cycle, Development cycle, Constraints in systems development, Phase A: Conception, Project proposals, Project contracting; Middle and Later stages: Phase B: definition, Phase c: Execution, Implementation stage, Phase D: Operation, System development in Industrial and service Organization, System development in large Government programs. 3. Systems and Procedures: Planning fundamentals: Planning steps, Project master plan, Scope and work definition, Project organization structure and responsibilities, Project management system, Scheduling, Planning and scheduling charts; 4. Network scheduling and PDM: Logic diagram and network, Critical path, Scheduling and time based networks, Management schedule reserve, PDM networks, PERT, CPM, Resource allocation, GERT; 5. Cost estimating and budgeting: Cost estimating, Cost escalation, Cost estimating and system development cycle, Cost estimating process, Elements of budgets and estimates, Project cost accounting and MIS, Budgeting using cost accounts, Cost schedules and forecasts; 6. Risk Management: Basic concepts, Identification, Assessment, Response planning, management; 7. Project Control: Control process, Control emphasis, Information monitoring, Internal and external project control, Traditional cost control, Cost accounting systems for project control, Performance analysis, Performance index monitoring, Variance limits, Controlling changes, Contract administration, Control problems; 8. Project Management Information System: Functions of PMIS, Computer based tools, Computer –based PMIS, Representative Computer –based PMIS, Web based Project management, Applying computer based PMS, Project evaluation, Project reporting, Project 9. Software Quality: Introduction, Importance, ISO 9126, Software quality measures, 548

External standards, Techniques to enhance software quality 10. Termination: Terminating the project, termination responsibilities, Closing and contracts, Project extension. 11. Organization Behavior: Project Organization structure and integration: Organization structure, Formal organization structure, Organization design by differentiation and integration, Requirements of project organizations, Integration of subunits in projects, liaison roles, Task forces, and Teams, Project expeditors and co-coordinators, Matrix organization, Informal organization, Concurrent engineering, Quality function deployment; Project roles, Responsibility and Authority, Managing participation, Team work and conflict.

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. J. M. Nicholas, “Project Management for Business and Technology”, PHI 2. B. Hughes, M. Cotterell, “Software Project Management”, TMH

References:
1. R. K. Wysocki, R.Beck Jr., D.B. Crane, “Effective Project Management”, John Wiley 2. J. Phillips, “IT Project Management”, TMH 3. P. Jalote, “Software Project Management in Practice”, Pearson Education

549

(408110) ROBOTICS (ELECTIVE-II)

Objective: The goal of the course is to familiarize the students with the concepts and techniques in robot manipulator control, enough to evaluate, chose, and incorporate robots in engineering systems. Pre-requisite: Exposure to linear algebra and matrix operations. Exposure to programming in a high level language

DETAILED SYLLABUS
26. Robotic Manipulation: Automation and Robots, Classification, Application, Specification, Notations. 27. Direct Kinematics: Dot and cross products, Co-ordinate frames, Rotations, Homogeneous, Co-ordinates, Link co-ordination arm equation, (Five-axis robot, Four axis robot, Six axis robot). 28. Inverse Kinematics: General properties of solutions tool configuration Five axis robots, Three-Four axis, Six axis robot (Inverse kinematics). 29. Workspace analysis and trajectory planning work envelop and examples, workspace fixtures, Pick and place operations, Continuous path motion, Interpolated motion, Straight-line motion. 30. Robot Vision: Image representation, Template matching, Polyhedral objects, Shane analysis, Segmentation (Thresholding, region labeling, Shrink operators, Swell operators, Euler numbers, Perspective transformation, Structured Illumination, Camera calibration). 31. Task Planning: Task level programming, Uncertainty, Configuration, Space, Gross motion, Planning, Grasp planning, Fine-motion Planning, Simulation of Planer motion, Source and goal scenes, Task planner simulation. 32. Moments of Inertia. 33. Principles of NC and CNC Machines.

BOOKS

Text Books:
7. Robert Shilling, “Fundamentals of Robotics-Analysis and control”, PHI. 8. Fu, Gonzales and Lee, “Robotics”, McGraw Hill 9. J.J, Craig, “Introduction to Robotics”, Pearson Education

550

References:
13. Staughard, “Robotics and AI”, PHI. 14. Grover, Wiess, Nagel, Oderey, “Industrial Robotics”, McGraw Hill 15. Walfram Stdder, “Robotics and Mecatronics”, TMH. 16. Niku, “Introduction to Robotics”, Pearson Education 17. Klafter, Chmielewski, Negin, “Robot Engineering”, PHI 18. Mittal, Nagrath, “Robotics and Control”, TMH

551

(408120)COMPUTER VISION (ELECTIVE-II)

Objective: To introduce the student to computer vision algorithms, methods and concepts which will enable the student to implement computer vision systems with emphasis on applications and problem solving Pre-requisite: Introduction to Image Processing.

DETAILED SYLLABUS
34. Recognition Methodology: Conditioning, Labeling, Grouping, Extracting, Matching. Edge detection, Gradient based operators, Morphological operators, Spatial operators for edge detection. Thinning, Region growing, region shrinking, Labeling of connected components. 35. Binary Machine Vision: Thresholding, Segmentation, Connected component labeling, Hierarchal segmentation, Spatial clustering, Split & merge, Rule-based Segmentation, Motion-based segmentation. 36. Area Extraction: Concepts, Data-structures, Edge, Line-Linking, Hough transform, Line fitting, Curve fitting (Least-square fitting). 37. Region Analysis: Region properties, External points, Spatial moments, Mixed spatial gray-level moments, Boundary analysis: Signature properties, Shape numbers. 38. Facet Model Recognition: Labeling lines, Understanding line drawings, Classification of shapes by labeling of edges, Recognition of shapes, Consisting labeling problem, Back-tracking, Perspective Projective geometry, Inverse perspective Projection, Photogrammetry – from 2D to 3D, Image matching : Intensity matching of ID signals, Matching of 2D image, Hierarchical image matching. 39. Object Models And Matching: 2D representation, Global vs. Local features. 40. General Frame Works For Matching: Distance relational approach, Orderedstructural matching, View class matching, Models database organization. 41. General Frame Works: Distance –relational approach, Ordered –Structural matching, View class matching, Models database organization. 42. Knowledge Based Vision: Knowledge representation, Control-strategies, Information integration.

BOOKS

Text Books:
3. David A. Forsyth, Jean Ponce, “Computer Vision: A Modern Approach”

552

4. R. Jain, R. Kasturi, and B. G. Schunk, “Machine Vision”, McGraw-Hill.

References:
3. Milan Sonka,Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision” Thomson Learning 4. Robert Haralick and Linda Shapiro, “Computer and Robot Vision”, Vol I, II, AddisonWesley, 1993.

TERM WORK
1. Term work should consist of at least 10 practical experiments and two assignments covering the topics of the syllabus.

ORAL EXAMINATION
An oral examination is to be conducted based on the above syllabus.

553

(408130) GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM (ELECTIVE-II)

Objectives: This course is designed to provide an introduction to and an understanding of the basic concepts, procedures and applications of the exciting and rapidly expanding field of Geographical Information Systems. Pre-requisites: Image processing, Computer programming concepts

DETAILED SYLLABUS
1. Introduction To GIS: Introduction, Definition of GIS, Evolution of GIS, Component of GIS. 2. Maps And GIS: Map scale, Classes of map, Mapping process, Coordinate systems, Map projection, Spatial framework for mapping locations, Topographic mapping, Attribute data for Thematic mapping 3. Digital Representation Of Geographic Data: Technical issues to digital representation of data, Database and Database management System, Raster geographic data representation, Vector geographic data representation, Object oriented geographic data representation, Relationship between Data representation and Data analysis. 4. Data Quality And Standards: Concepts and definition of data quality, Component of geographic data, Data quality assessment, Spatial data error management, Geographic data standards, Geographic data standards and GIS development. 5. GIS Data Processing, Analysis And Visualization: Raster based GIS data processing, Vector based GIS data processing, Human computer interaction and GIS, Visualization of geographic information, Principles of Cartographic design in GIS, Generation of information product. 6. Data Modeling: Digital Terrain Modeling, Approaches to digital terrain data modeling, Acquisition of digital terrain data, Data processing, Analysis and visualization, Spatial modeling, Descriptive statics, Spatial autocorrelation, Quadrat counts and Nearest- Neighbor analysis, Trend surface analysis, Gravity models. 7. GIS Project Design And Management: Software engineering as applied to GIS, GIS project planning, System analysis and study of user requirement, Geographic database design methodology, GIS application software design methodology, System implementation, System maintenance and support. 8. GIS Issues And Future Of GIS: Issues of implementing GIS, Trend of GIS development, GIS applications and GIS users.

554

BOOKS

Text Books:
1. C.P. Lo, Albert K.W. Yeung, “Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems”, PHI 2. Kang-Tsung Chang, “Introduction to Geographic Information Systems”, TMH

References:
1. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, “An Introduction to Geographical Information System”, Person Education 2. Peter A Burrough, R. A. McDonnell, “Principles of Geographical Information System”, Oxford Press

555

(408140) NEURAL NETWORKS & FUZZY SYSTEMS
(ELECTIVE-II)

Objective: This course covers basic concepts of artificial neural networks, fuzzy logic systems and their applications. Its focus will be on the introduction of basic theory, algorithm formulation and ways to apply these techniques to solve real world problems. Pre-requisite: Knowledge of calculus, and basic probability and statistics are required. Background in the following subjects desirable: numerical analysis (including optimization). Programming skills in one of the following would be desirable: Matlab, MathCad, C, Java, C++

DETAILED SYLLABUS
7. Introduction: Biological neurons, McCulloch and Pitts models of neuron, Types of activation function, Network architectures, Knowledge representation. Learning process: Error-correction learning, Supervised learning, Unsupervised learning, Learning Rules. 8. Single Layer Perceptron: Perceptron convergence theorem, Method of steepest descent - least mean square algorithms. 9. Multilayer Perceptron: Derivation of the back-propagation algorithm, Learning Factors. 10. Radial Basis and Recurrent Neural Networks: RBF network structure, theorem and the reparability of patterns, RBF learning strategies, K-means and LMS algorithms, comparison of RBF and MLP networks, Hopfield networks: energy function, spurious states, error performance . 11. Simulated Annealing: The Boltzmann machine, Boltzmann learning rule, Bidirectional Associative Memory. 12. Fuzzy logic: Fuzzy sets, Properties, Operations on fuzzy sets, Fuzzy relations, Operations on fuzzy relations, The extension principle, Fuzzy measures, Membership functions, Fuzzification and defuzzification methods, Fuzzy controllers.

BOOKS

Text Books:
5. 6. 7. 8. Simon Haykin, “Neural Network a - Comprehensive Foundation”, Pearson Education Zurada J.M., “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems, Jaico publishers Thimothy J. Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw Hill Ahmad Ibrahim, “Introduction to Applied Fuzzy Electronics”, PHI

556

References:
4. Yegnanarayana B., “Artificial Neural Networks”, PHI 5. Driankov D., Hellendoorn H. & Reinfrank M., “An Introduction to Fuzzy Control”, Norosa Publishing House 6. Berkan R.C., and Trubatch S.L., “Fuzzy Systems Design Principles”, IEEE Press

557

(408150) SOFTWARE TESTING (ELECTIVE-II)

Objectives To improve your understanding of software testing - its purpose and nature and raise your awareness of issues and constraints around testing. To provide a professional qualification widely recognized by employers, customers and peers. To learn standard terminology. Discover good sources of information. To provide a complete picture of the test activities and processes from requirements review to system implementation. Pre-requisites: Software Engineering, OOAD

DETAILED SYLLABUS
10. Introduction: Defect, Defect Vs failures, Process problems and defect rates, The business perspective for testing 11. Building a Software Testing Strategy: Computer system strategic risk, Economics of testing, Common computer problems, Economics of SDLC testing, Testing- an organizational issue, Establishing a testing policy, Structured approach to testing, Test strategy, Testing methodology 12. Establishing a Software Testing Methodology: Introduction, Verification and validation, Functional and structural testing, Workbench concept, Considerations in developing testing methodologies 13. Determining Software Testing Techniques: Testing techniques/tool selection process, Selecting techniques/tools, Structural system testing techniques, Functional system testing techniques, Unit testing techniques, Functional testing and analysis 14. Selecting and Installing Software Testing Tools: Testing tools-Hammers of testing, Selecting and using the test tools, Appointing managers for testing tools 15. Software Testing Process: Cost of computer testing, Life cycle testing concept, Verification and validation in the software development process, Software testing process, Workbench skills 16. Software Testing Process: Access Project Management Development Estimate and Status, Test Plan, Requirements Phase Testing, Design Phase Testing, Program Phase Testing, Execute Test and Record Results, Acceptance Test, Report Test Result, Testing Software Installation, Test Software Change, Evaluate Test Effectiveness 17. Testing Specialized Systems and Applications: Client/Server systems, RAD, System documentation, Web based systems, Off-the-self software, Multi platform environment, Security, Data Warehouse 18. Building Test Document: Uses, Types, Responsibility, Storage, Test plan documentation, Test analysis report documentation

558

Books

Text Books:
7. W.E. Perry, “Effective Methods for Software Testing”, John Wiley. 8. Kaner C., Nguyen H., Falk J., “Testing Computer Software”, John Wiley.

References :
3. Boris Beizer, “Software Testing Techniques”, Dreamtech 4. Louise Tamres, “Introducing Software Testing”, Pearson Education.

559

(408160) INFORMATION SECURITY (ELECTIVE-II)

Objectives of the course: Learn about the threats in computer security. Understand what puts you at a risk and how to control it. Controlling a risk is not eliminating the risk but to bring it to a tolerable level. Pre-requisites: Computer Networks, Operating system.

DETAILED SYLLABUS
9. Introduction: Security, Attacks, Computer criminals, Method of defense 10. Program Security: Secure programs, Non-malicious program errors, Viruses and other malicious code, Targeted malicious code, Controls against program threats 11. Operating System Security: Protected objects and methods of protection, Memory address protection, Control of access to general objects, File protection mechanism, Authentication: Authentication basics, Password, Challenge-response, Biometrics. 12. Database Security: Security requirements, Reliability and integrity, Sensitive data, Interface, Multilevel database, Proposals for multilevel security 13. Security in Networks: Threats in networks, Network security control, Firewalls, Intrusion detection systems, Secure e-mail, Networks and cryptography, Example protocols: PEM, SSL, IPsec 14. Administrating Security: Security planning, Risk analysis, Organizational security policies, Physical security. 15. Legal, Privacy, and Ethical Issues in Computer Security: Protecting programs and data, Information and law, Rights of employees and employers, Software failures, Computer crime, Privacy, Ethical issues in computer society, Case studies of ethics Books Text Books: 4. C. P. Pfleeger, and S. L. Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”, Pearson Education. 5. Matt Bishop, “Computer Security: Art and Science”, Pearson Education. References : 6. Stallings, “Cryptography And Network Security: Principles and practice” 7. Kaufman, Perlman, Speciner, “Network Security” 8. Eric Maiwald, “Network Security : A Beginner’s Guide”, TMH 9. Macro Pistoia, “Java Network Security “, Pearson Education 10. Whitman, Mattord, “Principles of information security”, Thomson

560